ti- 


ff 


presented  to  the 
UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 
UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 
SAN  DIEGO 

by 

MRS.  HELEN  K.  HULL 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  witii  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.arcliive.org/details/combinedspanislimOOtorniala 


THE 

COMBIl^ED  SPANISH  METHOD. 


A  NEW 


PRACTICAL  AND  THEORETICAL  SYSTEM  OP  LEARNING 


THE  CASTILIAN  LANGUAGE, 


EMBEACIXa  THE  MOST  ADVANTAGEOUS   FEATTTEES  OF  THE  BEST  KNOWN 

MEinODS. 


PROJfOUNCING    VOCABULARY, 

COXTAINING   ALL   THE  -WORDS   USED  IN   THE   COURSE   OF  THE   WORK,   AND   REFERENCES 

TO   THE   LESSONS   IN   WHICH   EACH   ONE   IS   EXPLAINED,    THUS   ENABLING 

ANY  ONE  TO  BE  HIS    OWN   INSTRUCTOR. 


BY 

ALBERTO  DE  TORNOS,  A.M., 

FOEMEKIT   DIRECTOR    OP    NORMAL   BCnOOLS    IN    SPAIN,   AND    SOW   TEACIIEE    OF   SPAXISn    IN 

TUB   NEW   YORK    MERCANTILE    LIBRARY,    NEW   YORK   EVENING   HIGH   SCHOOL,   AND 

TIIE   POLYTECHNIC  AND  PACKER  INSTITtrrES,  BROOKLYN. 


NEW  YOKE: 
D.   APPLETON   &   COMPANY, 

00,  03  &  04  GRAXD  STREET. 
18G9. 


Entebbd,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1867,  by 

D.  APPLETON  &  COMPANY, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  the  Southern  District 

of  New  York, 


Notice. — A  Key  to  the  Exercises  of  this  Grammar  is 
published  in  a  separate  volume. 


PREFACE 


It  is  an  undoubted  fact  that  in  teaching,  not  only  lan- 
guages, "but  any  other  science  or  art,  there  neither  is,  nor 
can  be,  any  other  method  than  that  of  uniting  theory 
^vith.  practice  /  and  the  various  modes  of  applying  the  one 
to  the  other,  the  extent  of  the  application,  .and  the  time  at 
which  it  should  be  commenced,  have  produced  the  great 
number  of  methods  hitherto  published. 

This  fact  is  now  univereally  acknowledged,  and  each  new 
author  proclaims  himself  to  be  the  only  one  who  has  put  it 
into  execution.  The  most  insignificant  little  phrase-book 
does  not  fail  to  announce,  in  its  introduction,  that  it  com- 
bines theory  and  jpi'actice  /  and  grammars  containing  noth- 
ing more  than  confused  masses  of  rules,  heaped  one  upon 
another,  are  entitled  "  Theoretical  and  Practical^''  It  is 
admitted  on  all  hands  that  much  progress  has  been  made 
within  the  last  few  years  in  the  art  of  teaching  languages ; 
and,  in  testimony  of  this,  we  have  only  to  mention  the  ex- 
cellent oral  and  practical  methods  of  Jacotot,  Manesca,  Ollen- 
dorff, Boulet,  Robertson,  and  others  who  have  -followed  in 
their  footsteps,  all  of  which  are  ably  treated,  and  have  done 
much  good  in  their  way.  But  each  one  of  the  grammarians 
referred  to,  satisfied  with  his  own  invention,  looked  with 
disdain  upon  that  of  his  predecessor.      Hence  the  enmity 


IV  PREFACE. 

and  the  almost  unaccountable  diversity  of  opinion  which  we 
observe  amongst  them.  Had  they  studied  each  other  with 
impartiality,  and  endeavored  to  profit  by  the  experience 
and  even  the  defects  of  the  several  systems,  their  labors 
would  certamly  have  been  attended  with  still  more  favora- 
ble results,  and  of  course  more  considerable  benefit  would 
have  accrued  thereby  to  the  art  in  general.  Nmnberless 
points  of  excellence  are  to  be  found,  scattered  here  and 
there,  throughout  the  various  ancient  and  modern  systems, 
and  chiefly  those  already  alluded  to;  and  it  has  been 
thought  that,  if  carefully  sifted  out  and  judiciously  com- 
bined, they  would  form  a  new  method  which  would  be  in 
details  essentially  superior  to  any  of  the  old  ones. 

This  conviction,  joined  to  twenty  years'  experience 
in  teaching  the  Spanish  language,  sometimes  through  the 
medium  of  one,  sometimes  of  another  of  the  before-men- 
tioned systems,  has  led  the  author  to  prepare  and  publish 
the  CoMBmED  Method,  which  he  now  offers  to  those  desir- 
ing to  learn  the  noble  language  of  Cervantes. 

Whether  he  has  successfully  attained  his  object,  the  pub- 
lic will  decide. 


OBSEEYATIOIsrS 


SOME  OF  THE  ADVANTAGEOUS  FEATURES  OF  THE  "DE  TORNOS'S 
COMBINED  METHOD." 


1st.  The  advantage  of  presenting  the  verb  as  the  first  and 
principal  part  of  speech,  which  serves  as  the  axis  upon  which 
all  the  other  parts  revolve.  These,  too,  have  been  introduced 
in  their  turn,  not  in  grammatical  order,  nor  by  mere  chance, 
but  in  the  logical  and  natural  order  in  which  they  occur  in 
discourse,  whether  written  or  spoken. 

2d.  That  of  explaining  these  parts  of  speech  in  the  order 
just  mentioned,  not  in  an  isolated  manner,  but  united  to  form* 
a  homogeneous  whole,  and  in  such  a  way  that  the  learnet  will 
have  no  difficulty  in  finding  the  explanation  relative  to  the  use  of 
each  one  of  them  respectively,  as  often  as  occasion  may  require. 

3d.  These  explanations,  which  embrace  the  whole  theory, 
and  form  a  complete  grammar  of  the  language,  are  separate 
from  and  independent  of  the  exercises  ;  the  latter  being  com- 
posed in  strict  accordance  with  the  examples  accompanying 
each  lesson,  in  such  a  manner  that  those  unacquainted  with 
grammar  in  general,  and  those  who  have  no  desire  to  enter 
into  the  theory  of  the  language,  or,  finally,  those  who  are  too 
young  or  too  old  to  learn  grammar,  may  acquire  a  thorough 
conversational  knowledge  of  Spanish,  by  merely  committing  to 
memory  the  Vocabulary,  studying  the  Compositions,  and  care- 
fully writing  the  Exercises. 

4th.  From  the  arrangement  alluded  to,  arises  another  great 
advantage,  namely,  all  the  elements  are  found  in  the  vocabu- 
lary of  each  lesson,  separated  and  detached  from  tlie  examples 
and  rules  given  in  the  explanation  ;  thus  enabling  the  student 
to  see  at  one  glance  all  that  he  has  to  commit  to  memory  for 
each  recitation. 


Vi  OBSEKVATIOXS. 

5th.  And  this  division  of  tlie  lessons  into  Elements,  Compo- 
sition, Explanation,  Version,  and  Exercise,  enables  the  teacher 
to  divide  each  lesson  into  two,  three,  or  even  four  parts,  accord- 
ing to  the  age  and  capacity  of  the  learne/. 

6th,  Jiepetition,  and  constant  repetition,  is  indispensable  for 
acquiring  any  language ;  but  by  repetition  should  not  be  under- 
stood the  simple  reiteration  of  single  words  and  easy  phrases ; 
but  repetition  of  the  idioms,  and  of  those  forms  of  expression 
differing  most  widely  from  the  idiomatical  construction  of  the 
learner's  native  tongue.  It  is  true,  that  though  this  is  the 
proper  plan  for  acquiring  a  thorough  knowledge  of  a  language, 
that  feature  might  tend  to  make  the  present  work  appear,  at 
first  sight,  more  difficult  than  the  books  hitherto  used ;  but 
such  will  not  be  found  the  case ;  for  when  there  is  frequent 
change  of  matter  there  cannot  be  monotony ;  and  variety  ren- 
ders study  at  the  same  time  easy  and  agreeable.  This  repetition, 
then,  of  useful  forms  of  expression,  and  contrast  of  idiom,  will 
be  found  in  every  page  of  our  "  Combixed  Method,"  in  Avhich 
it  has  been  our  endeavor  to  introduce  gradually  and  with  the 
necessary  explanations  of  each,  the  most  important  idioms  of 
the  Spanish  language. 

7th.  Although  we  are  of  opinion  that  to  learn  a  language, 
and,  above  all,  to  learn  to  pronounce  it,  it  is  always  preferable 
to  have  the  assistance  of  a  skilful  teacher,  and  one  who  speaks 
his  native  tongue  with  purity  and  correctness  ;  yet,  as  it  is  not 
always  possible  to  procure  such,  we  have  placed  at  the  end  a 
Vocabulary,  containing  all  the  words  used  in  the  course  of  the 
work,  and  the  pronunciation  of  each,  so  that  nothing  may  be 
wanting  to  second  the  efforts  of  tliose  who,  from  choice  or 
necessity,  may  be  their  own  instnictors. 

8th.  The  Vocabulary,  besides  giving  the  pronunciation  and 
meaning  of  the  words,  indicates  the  lesson  in  which  the  expla- 
nation of  each  has  been  given  in  the  Grammar.  By  this  means 
the  learner  can  with  ease  refer  to  the  explanation  of  all  those 
words  of  which  it  has  been  deemed  essential  to  give  one. 


CONTENTS. 


TkOM 


Preface,        ...•••••••  '    . 

a  few  eemaek3  on  the  combined  method,     .          .         •         •  •         'v*  ^^ 

„                                                                                                  ...  vii-xvi 

rRELIMINART  LESSON  ON  ObTHOGBAPHT  AND  PRONUNCIATION,              .  XVU-XXiV 

LESSON    I. 


SULE 


4 


1.  Regular  verbs,  classified  in  three  conjugations,    .  .  .  •  • 

2.  Roots, „  1,.        *  1        '  V 

a    Terminations  of  the  three  model  verbs,  corresponding  to  aU  the  regular  verbs, 

— .    Suppression  of  the  nominative  pronouns,    .  .... 

4.  F.  {UiCecD  requires  the  verb  in  the  third  person, 

LESSON    II. 

5.  Seiior,  senorito,  senora,  seilorita,  use  of  these  words, .... 

6.  Don  and  Bona,  use  of  these  words,  .  .  .  .  .  •  -5 

7.  M,  placed  before  the  verb,  .  .  .  •  •  •  •  5 

LESSON    III. 

8.  The  conjunction  y  changed  into  e,    .  .  .  .  .  .7 

9.  Que,  interrogative  pronoun,        ...  .  .  7 

10.  S//!0.— When  dvt  is  to  be  translated  by  sino, 7 

11.  P<;ra.— When  6m!!  is  to  be  translated  by  pero,  .....  7 

12.  j;^;xiito;,  «rtg'i&,  &c.,  one  word  may  belong  to  different  parts  of  speech,         ,       7 

LESSON    IV. 

13.  ^,  preposition  to,  used  after  active  verbs,  when  the  object  is  a  person,   .  10 

14.  De,  used  to  express  position  or  the  material  of  which  any  thing  is  made,  .      10 

15.  El,  the  article  (he,  used  to  determine  a  noun  masculine  singular,  .           .  10 
— .  Contraction  of  the  article  el  and  the  prepositions  a  and  de  into  al,  del,  .     10 

16.  Uh,  the  indefinite  pronoun  used  before  masculine  nouns,    ...  10 
— .    Uno  is  only  used  as  a  numeral  adjective,    .          .          .          .          .          .10 

LESSON    V. 

17.  Gender,  how  ascertained,  .......  13 

— .     Una,  used  before  feminine  nouns,    .  .  .  .  .  .  .13 

18.  Tour,  how  translated,      ........  13 


Vm  CONTENTS. 

LESSON    VI.  % 

new  PACK 

19.  The  terminations  of  the  persons  of  the  present  indicative ;  how  they  differ 

in  the  three  conjugations,  ........      IG 

20.  Muy,  how  translated,        ........  10 

21.  Nouns  ending  in  o  change  that  vowel  into  a  for  the  feminine,  .  .  .17 

LESSOX    VII. 

22.  Adjectives  ending  in  o,  an,  or  on  form  their  feminine  in  a,  .  .  20 
Adjectives  signifying  nationality  and  ending  in  a,  .  .  .  .20 
Adjectives  are  generally  placed  after  their  nouns,  ....  20 
Adjectives  used  metaphorically  are  always  placed  before  the  nouns,  .  .  20 
Some  adjectives  drop  their  last  letter  or  syllable,      ....  20 

LESSON    VIII. 

23.  The  endings  of  the  second  and  third  conjugations,  how  they  differ,    .  .     23 
ai.    The  conjunction  6  when  changed  into  it,         ....          .  23 

25.  iV7,  how  translated,      .........  23 

26.  The  plural  of  nouns,  .  .  .  .  •         .  .  .  .  23 

27.  Adjectives  agree  with  their  nouns  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  .  .  24 

28.  The  article  agrees  also,      ........  24 

— .  Feminine  nouns  that  take  the  masculine  article,  .  .  .  .  .  2-t 

29.  The  neater  article  to,         ........  24 

LESSON    IX. 

30.  Papa,  mama,  pie,  are  exceptions,     .......     27 

31.  Nouns  which  are  not  monosyllables  and  end  in  s,  their  plural,      .  .  28 

— .  Words  ending  in  z,  their  plural,        .        ' 28 

33.  Words  which  are  compounds  of  two  nouns,  their  plural,     ...  28 

33.  The  days  of  the  week,  when  they  take  the  article,  .  .  .  .28 

31.  Doiule,  adonde,  euando,  placed  before  the  verb,  ....  23 

35.  Donde,  adonde,  euando,  in  interrogations  require  an  accent,     .  .  .28 

LESSON    X. 

36.  Irregular  verbs.       .........  31 

— .  Tener  not  included  in  the  seven  verbs,       .          .          .          .          .  .31 

— .  Objective  case  of  the  third  person  le,  los,  la,  las,  lo,    .          .          .          .  31 

37.  Lo  and  U,  the  difference  between  them,      .          .          .          .          .  .32 

— .  i?  and  so  are  translated  sometimes  by  fo,         .          .          .          .          .  33 

38.  Qiiien,  mal,  que,  de  qiiien,  used  interrogatively  do  not  take  the  article,  .      32 

39.  When  the  interrogative  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  the  same  preposition 
mnst  be  repeated  in  the  answer,  .......     53 

LESSON    XI. 

40.  Algulen,  algvno,  the  difference  between  them,      .  .  .  .  .35 
— .  Any  one  or  amj  body,  when  translated  by  cualqukra,            ...  35 

41.  Kadie,  nin(nmo,  their  distinction,     .......     35 

42.  Algvno  and  ninrpmo,  when  they  lose  the  o,      .  .  »  •  «  36 

43.  Algo,  alguna  cosa,  used  affirmatively,         ......     36 


COSTTENTS.  IX 

uru  PAOB 

44.  Kada,  ninguna  cosa,  used  negatively,    ......  36 

45.  Negatives,  when  placed  before  the  verb,     ......     36 

— .  Two  negatives  render  the  negation  more  emphatic  than  one,         .          .           36 

40.  A  or  an,  when  not  translated,          .......     36 

LESSON    XII. 

47.  Tener  and  haber,  their  distinction,        ......  39 

— .    To  have  and  to  be,  followed  by  an  infinitive,  how  they  are  translated,  .  .     39 

48.  Preterit  Incminite, 40 

LESSON    XIII. 

49.  Mo,  tuyo,  Ac,  change  the  0  into  a  for  the  feminine,       .  .  .  .43 

50.  Possessive  pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  name  of  the  thing 

possessed,  .........  43 

51.  As  pronominal  adjectives,  mio,  tuyo,  suyo  precede  the  noun  and  drop  their 

final  syllable,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .43 

52.  JUlo,  when  placed  after  the  noun,  .       '   .  .  .  .  .  41 

53.  Possessivcs  used  as  pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  nouns 

they  represent,  and  take  the  article,        .          .          .          .          .  .44 

61.    When  used  indefinitely  they  take  the  neuter  article,            ...  41 

55.  When  connected  with  the  verb  to  be,  the  article  is  omitted,       .          .  .44 

56.  Vuestro,  vuestra,  when  used,       .......  44 


LESSON    XIV. 

57.  Formation  of  compound  numbers,    .          .          .          .          .          .  .48 

58.  Numbers  are  indeclinable,  except  w/w  and  the  compounds  of  ciewto,        .  48 

59.  JJno,  its  agreement ;  when  it  loses  the  0,    ,          .          .          .          .  .48 

60.  C&Tito,  its  agreement ;  when  it  loses  the  last  syllable,         .          .          .  48 

LESSON    XV. 

61.  Ordinals,  their  agreement  and  place,  ......     51 

— .    Primero  and  tercero,  when  they  drop  their  final  letter,         ...  53 

62.  Ordinals,  when  used,   ...           .          .           .          .          .  .52 

— .    N.  B.— When  ordinals  do  not  require  the  definite  article,    ...  52 


LESSON    XVI. 

63.  Preterit  Definite, 56 

64.  ^nfe  its  meaning, .  ...  •  .  .  .  •  •  67 

65.  Mas  and  nienos,  how  used,      ........     57 

LESSON    XVII. 

66.  Quien,  how  used,    ,...•••••  ^^ 

67.  TV7io.  when  translated  by  qve,  and  when  by  quien,  .          .          .  .61 

68.  Cital  and  (p/c  relate  to  persons  and  things,      .....  61 

69.  Cu7/o  refers  to  persons  and  things :  its  agreement,  .          .          .  .61 
— .  It  partakes  of  the  nature  of  the  relatives  and  of  the  possessives,  .          .  61 


CONTENTS. 


FAGg 


TO.    The  preposition  placed  before  the  relative,  .  •  •  •  .61 

71.    Relative  pronouns  can  never  be  suppressed  in  Spanish,       ...  61 


LESSON    XVIII. 


72.  Declension  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns  este,  cse,  agrud,        .  .  .66 

73.  JEste,  how  used, ^'' 

74.  Este,  ese,  forming  one  word  with  the  adjective  otro,        .  .  •  .67 

75.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  used  as  neuter,  .....  67 

76.  The  former  and  the  latter,  translated  by  aqud  and  este,    .  .  •  .67 

77.  That  of,  that  who,  or  that  which,  translated  hy  el  de,d  que,  .  .  67 

78.  EngUsh  personal  pronouns  rendered  in  Spanish  by  demonstrative  pronouns,      67 

79.  Aqui,  ahi,  acd,  alia,  how  employed,     .       .  .  •  •  •  .63 

LESSON    XIX. 

80.  JVzra  and  ;»r,  how  they  differ,    .......  1^ 

81.  Enlre,  its  meaning,       .........     "i^S 

82.  Hasta,  its  meaning,  ........  73 


LESSON     XX. 

83.  Tanto  and  cuanto,  when  they  lose  the  last  syllable,         .  .  .  .77 

81.  Comparison  of  equality,  how  formed,    ......  77 

85.  Cuan  may  be  employed,         ........  77 

86.  Comparison  of  superioHty,  how  formed,         .....  77 

87.  Comparison  of  inferiority,      ........  77 

88.  Mayor,  menor,  rmjor,  peor,  are  already  in  the  comparative  degree,            .  77 

89.  Than,  translated  by  de  and  que,        .......  78 

90.  Comparison  relating  to  nouns,  verbs,  and  adverbs.     ....  78 


LESSON     XXI. 

91.  Superlatives  ending  in  est,  or  formed  by  most,  how  translated,            .  .     82 

92.  Most,  or  most  of,  when  translated  by  la  mayor  parte,  or  by  mas,     .           .  83 

93.  Ill,  preposition,  when  translated  hy  de,       .          .          .          .          .  .83 

94.  Superlatives  formed  by  very,  mast,  etc.,  when  formed  in  Spanish  by  muy  and 

when  by  isimo,    .........  83 

93.  Adjectives  drop  the  last  vowel  on  taking  the  termination  isimo,          .  .     83 

96.  Other  superlatives  ending  in  errimo,     ......  83 

97.  Adyectives  which  change  their  endings  before  the  termination  isimo,  .  .     83 

98.  Superlatives  in  isimo  irregularly  formed,         .....  84 

99.  Irregular  comparatives  and  superlatives,    .          .          .          .          .  .84 

— .  These  make  also  a  superlative  in  isimo,           .....  84 

— .  Also  with  Tmiy,  and  a  comparative  with  mas  or  m^nos,   .          .          .  .84 

100.  Substantives  used  adjectively  admit  the  degrees  of  comparison,    .          .  81 


LESSON     XXII. 

101.  Ser  and  estar,  the  distinction  between  them,         .  .  .  .  .89 

102.  "  "       their  employment,  ......  89 


CONTENTS.  XI 

LESSON    XXIII. 

BtJLE  PAGS 

103.  Future  simple,    ..........     90 

104.  The  definite  article  used  with  numerals,  indicating  the  hour  of  the  day,  .  96 

105.  Evening  and  night,  translated  by  noclie,      .  .  .  .  .  .96 

106.  The  conjunction  si,  when  it  governs  the  subjunctive,  and  when  the  indica- 

tive,   96 

LESSON     XXIV. 

107.  Cbmpound  future,        .........    100 

108.  Acabar  de,  its  meaning,    ........         100 

— .    N.  B.— How  the  pupil  may  learn  a  great  number  of  words  with  little  or  no 

difficulty,  101 

109.  Nouns  ending  in  tion  are  the  same  in  Spanish,  changing  the  letter  t  into  c,       101 

110.  The  days  of  the  month  are  counted  by  the  cardinal  numbers,  preceded  by  the 

article,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .101 

LESSON     XXV. 

111.  Saber  and  conocer,  how  they  differ,        ......         107 

112.  Ann,  ya,  todav^,  their  different  meaning  and  uses,  .  .  .  .107 
Once,  twice,  &c.,  translated  by  una  vez,  dos  feces,  &c.,  ...  107 
Medo,  valor,  &c.,  take  the  preposition  de  after  them,      .          .          .          .107 

113.  To  be  (tfraid,  to  be  thirsty,  &c.,  how  translated,  ....         107 

114.  Jamas  and  nunca,  how  used,  ........    107 


LESSON    XXVI. 

115.  Pronoun  subject,  or  nominative,            ......  112 

116.  Two  objective  cases  of  the  personal  pronouns,  how  used,          .          .          .  113 

117.  The  objective  case,  when  not  preceded  by  a  preposition,  is  affixed  to  inHni- 

tives,  gerunds,  &c.,        ........  113 

118.  When  the  verb  drops  the  final  letter  followed  by  nos  or  as,        .          .          .  113 
— .    The  reason  of  this,            ........  113 

119.  When  the  objective  case  may  follow  the  verb,       .  .  .  .  .113 

120.  When  the  objective.may  be  placed  before  the  first  verb,  or  after  the  second,  113 

121.  Prepositions,  when  expressed,  always  govern  the  second  objective  case,       .  113 

122.  Mi,  ti,  si,  when  preceded  by  con,            ......  114 

123.  Entre,  how  used,          .........  114 

124.  The  second  objective  case  is  used  after  comparatives,          .          .          .  114 

125.  When  the  first  objective  case  is  used,  .  .  .  .  .  .114 

126.  The  objective  case  of  the  third  person  is  rendered  by  le,  les,  if  the  preposition 

to  govern  it  in  English, ........  114 


LESSON    XXVII. 

127.  The  third  person  rendered  in  Spanish  \>j  se,          .          .          .          .  .    119 

128.  The  object  of  the  verb  is  to  be  placed  last,  when  two  first  objective  cases 

occur  in  the  sentence,    ........  119 

129.  Placedfirst  when  the  object  of  the  verbis  the  reflective  pronoun,       .  .    120 

130.  Both  of  the  objective  cases  belonging  to  the  same  person  used  together, .  120 

131.  The  expressions  a  el  quiero,  a  ti  amo,  are  incorrect,           .          .          .  .    120 


tU  CONTENTS. 

132.  The  pronotms  el,  la,  lo,  los,  and  las,  how  diPtingoishcd  firom  the  articles  el,  la, 

lo,los,las,  .  .  .         .         ,         ,         .  .  .         120 

133.  The  adjective  misrrw,  how  used,       .  .  .  .  .  .  ,120 

LESSON    XXVIII. 

134.  When  the  imperfect  is  used,        .......         125 

135.  When  the  pluperfect  is  used,  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .126 

136.  How  the  expressions  to  have  just  and  to  he  jttst  are  translated  before  a  past 

participle,  .........         120 

LESSON     XXIX. 

137.  The  preterit  anterior,  its  use,  .          .          .          .          .          .          .  130 

138.  Derivation  of  adverbs  of  manner  and  quality,  ....  131 

139.  How  adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives,    ......  131 

140.  Adverbs  terminating  in  mente  admit,  like  adjectives,  the  degrees  of  compari- 

son, ..........         131 

141.  How  these  adverbs  can  be  substituted,       .  ,  .  .  .  .131 

LESSON    XXX. 

142.  What  impersonal  verbs  are,        .          .          .          .          .          .          .  137 

143.  Amaiiecer  and  anocher,  used  in  the  three  persons,          .          .          .  .137 

144.  Haber  and  hacer,  and  other  verbs  used  impersonally,            .          .          .  137 

145.  The  pronoun  it,  accompanying  impersonal  verbs,  not  translated,  .  .  133 
— .  Nouns  taken  in  a  definite  sense  require  the  article,  ....  138 
— .  Nouns  used  in  their  most  general  sense  take  the  article,           .          .  .    138 

146.  Names  of  nations,  countries,  mountains,  &c.,  take  the  article,      .          .  138 

147.  Nations,  countries,  and  provinces,  when  preceded  by  a  preposition,  do  not 

take  the  article,         .....*...    138 
— .    Names  of  some  places  that  always  take  the  article,   ....         13S 

LESSON    XXXI. 

148.  Omtar^BigaMjmg  to  give  pleasure  to,  hovrmcA, 143 

149.  Gustar,  followed  by  the  preposition  de, 144 

150.  G^^tar,  used  as  an  active  verb,       '.  •          •          •           •          •          .144 

151.  Verbs  that  require  the  same  idiomatic  construction  as  that  of  the  verb  gitstar,    144 

153.  The  verb  pesar,  when  meaning  to  regret,         .....         144 

LESSON    XXXII. 

15.3.    How  the  passive  voice  is  formed,      .  •  •  •  •  •  -1^9 

154.  When  the  passive  form  is  used  with  the  verb  ser  in  the  present  and  imperfect 

tenses  of  the  indicative,           ...••••  l"*" 

155.  When  the  preposition  de  or  por  is  to  be  used  after  passive  verbs,       .  .    149 

156.  Passive  voice  formed  by  se,          .          .          •          •          •          •  n 

157.  When  the  passive,  formed  with  «-,  is  to  be  preferred,      .          •          •  .150 


LESSON    XXXIII. 
158.   Effective  verbs,  what  they  are,    . 


153 


CONTENTS.  XIH 


BULS 


PAGB 


159.  When  are  the  verbs  made  reflective  ?  .  .  .  .  .  .150 

160.  When  a  verb  denotes  reciprocity,  how  it  is  conjugated,        .          .          .  15G 

LESSON    XXXIV. 

161.  Which  arc  the  irregular  verbs, 161 

162.  Verbs  which,  although  they  undergo  slight  changes  in  their  radical  letters, 

are  not  to  be  considered  as  irregular,            .....  161 

163, 104.    Verbs  which  change  i  into  y,      .  .  .  .  .  .  .162 

105.    Uow  the  ii-regular  verbs  are  divided,     ......  102 

166.  What  is  to  be  observed  relative  to  the  object  of  the  verb  pagar,         .          .  163 

LESSON    XXXV. 

167.  Irregularity  of  the  verb  acostar,  .......  168 

168.  Imperative  mood,  when  used,             .......  168 

169.  The  s  of  the  first  person  plural,  and  the  d  of  the  second,  suppressed  before 

nos  and  os,            .....••••  1^8 

ITO.    The  subjunctive,  used  when  the  imperative  is  negative  in  English,     .          .  168 

171.  The  future  of  the  indicative,  used  for  the  imperative,           ...  168 

172.  Adjectives  ending  in  ous,  how  rendered  into  Spanish,     .          .          .          .  168 

173.  Nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  English  in  ic  or  ical,  how  rendered  into 

Spanish, 109 

LESSON    XXXVI. 

174.  Irregularity  of  the  verb  mm'.er,           .......  173 

175.  Se,  as  the  Spanish  indefinite  personal  pronoun,          ....  173 

170.  The  pronoun  «c,  in  its  four  functions,    .......  174 

177.  Nouns  cndhi?  in  English  in  iy,  how  rendered  into  Spanish,          .          .  174 

178.  Voter,  how  used,          ••...,...  173 

LESSON    XXXVII. 

179.  Irregularity  of  the  verb  atmder, .  .  ...  .  .  .179 

180.  181,  182,  is:}.    Sabjuncfive  Mood,  when  used  in  Spanish,  .    '     .    '     .    '     .180 

181.  Present  tense  of  the  subjunctive,          ,          .          ,          .          .          .  isi 

185.  Perfect  tense,     .          .                                             *          *          '  -lai 

LESSON    XXXVIII. 

186.  Present  Participles, .  .  .  .        \  ,  ^  ,  .ISO 

187.  Gerunds,            •          .           .          .  186 

188.  The  verb  ester  used  with  the  gerund  in  Spanish 186 

189.  When  in  English  the  present  participle,  preceded  by  a  preposition,  is  used, 

how  rendered  into  Spanish, 187 

190.  The  infinitive  used  as  a  verbal  noun,    ......  187 

191.  The  infinitive  governed  by  an  other  verb,  how  rendered  into  English,          .  187 

LESSON    XXXIX. 

192.  Irregularity  of  the  verb  ;;«rfir, .  192 

193.  The  usual  forms  of  salutations 192 


XIV  CONTENTS. 

LESSON    XL. 


xuu 


FAQS 


194.  Ocmdudr^  its  Irregularity,           .......  197 

195.  Seffun  as  a  preposition  and  an  adverb,        .  .  .  .  .  .198 

196.  Collective  nouns, 193 

LESSON    XLI. 

197.  Defective  verbs  podrir,  placer,  &c.,  .          .          .          .          .          .          .  S203 

198.  Vacer,  its  use,        ■...,,....  203 

199.  &fer,  its  use, 203 

800.    JMsde,  its  meaning  and  use,        .......  203 

201.  Contra,  rendered  into  English  by  against,  .  .  .  .  .  .204 

202.  Sobre,  its  signification,      ........  201 

203.  TVas,  its  meaning,       .........  204 

204.  The  conjunction  pues,  its  use,     .          .          ,          .          .          .          .  204 

LESSON    XLII. 

205.  Conjunctions,  their  classification,      .  .  .  .  .  .  .209 

206.  What  is  to  be  obser\'ed  in  relation  to  the  government  of  conjunctions,    .  210 

207.  Some  conjunctions  that  govern  the  subjunctive  mood,    ....  210 

208.  Compound  conjunctions  which  require  the  infinitive  mood,           .          .  210 
809.    Compound  conjunctions  which  require  the  indicative,    .          .          .          .210 

LESSON    XLIII. 

210.  Imperfect  and  pluperfect  of  the  subjunctive,    .....  215 

211.  How  to  render  into  Spanish  the  auxiliaries  may,  rnight,  can,  could,  will, 

would,  and  should,    ......-••  217 

212.  Wbat  the  imperfect  subjunctive  denotes,         .....  217 

213.  What  the  pluperfect  denotes, 217 

ESSON    XLIV. 

214.  Augmentative  and  diminutive  nouns,   ......  222 

215.  Irregular  terminations  of  certain  diminutives,      .....  234 

216.  Diminutives  may  be  formed  from  adjectives,  participles,  gerunds,  and  ad- 

verbs,       ..........  2^4 

217.  Some  of  the  primitive  words  do  not  admit  all  the  diminutive  terminations,  .  2^4 

218.  There  are  derivatives  which,  although  they  appear  to  be  augmentatives  or 

diminutives,  are  not  so,           .......  225 

LESSON    XLV. 

219.  Tlie  future  simple  of  the  subjunctive,         .  .  .  .  .  .230 

220.  How  the  present  of  the  subjunctive  may  be  Bubstiluted  by  the  future,    .  2-% 

221.  The  future  compound, .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .230 

222.  The  compound  present  of  the  subjunctive  may  be  substituted  by  the  future 

compound,          .........  231 

223.  What  is  to  be  observed  in  order  not  to  misapply  the  imperfect  and  plu- 

perfect,          ..........  231 

224.  Government  of  the  fbture  simple  and  compound  fhturc  of  the  subjunctive 

mood, 231 


CONTENTS.  XV 

LESSON    XLVI. 

SULK  PACK 

225-226.    Interjections, 287 

LESSON    XLVII. 

227.  Use  of  the  article, a42 

228.  The  definite  article  used  with  common  nouns  taken  in  a  general  sense,        .    242 

229.  The  article  before  the  names  of  the  four  parts  of  the  globe,  names  of  empires, 

kingdoms,  &c.,    .........         ^3 

230.  Nouns  of  measure,  weight,  &c.,  when  they  require  the  article,  .  .    ai3 

231.  The  article  repeated  before  every  noun  enumerated,  .  .  .  243 

232.  The  definite  article  used  before  nouns  indicating  rank,  office,  &c.,      .  .    243 

233.  Used  instead  of  the  possessive  adjective,         .....  244 

234.  Used  as  in  English,  before  nouns,  taken  in  a  particular  or  definite  sense,  .    244 

LESSON    XLVIII. 

2-35.    Correspondence  of  the  tenses  with  each  other,  .  .  .  .         249 

236.  When  the  determined  verb  is  put  in  the  infinitive,         .  .  .  .250 

237.  When  the  determining  verb  is  ser,  or  any  impersonal  verb,  and  the  governing 

verb  has  no  subject,      ........  250 

238.  Put  in  the  subjunctive  when  the  determining  verb  has  a  nominative, .  .  251 

239.  When  the  governing  verb  is  put  in  the  present  or  future  of  the  subjunctive,  251 

240.  Goverrmient  of  the  preterit  indefinite,  and  compound  future  of  the  indica- 

tive,      251 

241.  The  nominative  being  the  same  for  both  verbs  and  the  governing  one  in  the 

indicative,  in  what  mood  the  determining  verb  is  put,     ...  252 

LESSON    XLIX. 

242.  243,  244,  245,  246,  247,  248,  219,  250,  251,  252.    Derivative  nouns,        .  .    257 

LESSON    L. 

253.  Compound  nouns,  ..••■•** 

LESSON    LI. 

x_  ..  ....    269 

254.  The  natural  construction,       .  .  •  •  *  ^^ 

255.  256.    Figurative  construction,      •'''*''  2~1 
257.    Which  of  the  two  constructions  is  preferable, ' 


264 


LESSON    LII. 

276 

258.  Past  Participles,     ....•••  g.g 

259.  Agreement  of  past  participles,  .  .       .   •         ,'  '       ,  *  _„inr" 

260.  When  a  verb  has  two  past  participles,  one  regular  and  the  other  irregular,  ^ 

how  they  are  used,         .          .          •          •          •          •          "  277 

261.  Irregular  past  participles  that  may  be  used  with  the  verb  ;ia5^r,         .          •  ^ 

262.  Extraordinary  irregularity  of  the  verb  won>, .  •  •  •  • 

263.  Some  pa?t  or  passive  participles  fake  an  active  signification,   .          .          •  ^^» 

264.  Past  participles  may  sometimes  take  the  place  Of  substantives,     .          .  ^ 

265.  Other  tenses  in  the  infinitive  mood, •  ' 


XVI  CONTENTS. 

LESSON    LIII. 
sru  PAOB 

266.  Idiomatic  expressions,  in  which  the  English  preposition  differs  in  meanin'» 

from  that  which  most  generally  constitutes  its  proper  signification,    .         2S1 

LESSON    LIV. 

267.  Conjunctions  in  English  that  are  frequently  used  aa  substitutes  for  other 

words,  how  rendered  into  Spanish,  ••....    289 

2CS.    Spanish  conjunctions  used  as  substitutes  for  other  words, .  .  .  289 

— .    Diflcfent  uses  of  the  conjunction  si,  ......    289 

LESSON    LV. 

269.  Some  of  the  principal  uses  of  the  conjunction  que,         .  .  .  .295 

LESSON    LVI. 

270.  Epistolary  correspondence,         .......        301 

LESSON    LYII. 

271.  Observation  in  regard  to  verbs  that  change  their  meaning  according  to  the 

preposition  by  which  they  are  followed,       .....         310 

LESSON    LVIII. 

272.  The  verbs  to  be  glad  and  to  be  r^oiced,  how  translated,    ....    314 

273.  The  verbs  to  be  sorry  and  to  grieve,  how  translated,     ....         314 
•  274.    How  the  verb  caber  is  used,    .  .  ......    314 

LESSON    LIX. 
273.    Idioms  with  the  verbs  caer,  dar,  decir,  echar,  .....        320 

LESSON    LX. 

276.    Idioms  with  the  verbs  enirar,  hacer,  ir,  Uevar,  mandar,  oler  a,  saber  a,  salir, 

servir,  tardar,  and  volver,    ...  ....    320 

LESSONS    LXI    TO    LXY, 
On  the  Principal  Idioms  of  the  Spanish  Language,  .  .  .  .  .  329  to  354 


General  observations  on  some  grammatical  and  idiomatical  peculiarities  of  the 
Spanish  language,  not  hitherto  treated  of  in  the  Grammar,  ....    355 

Recapitulation  of  all  the  rules  of  the  Grammar,  .  .  .  .  365  to  382 

Complete  list  of  the  conjugations  of  all  the  Spanish  verbs,  .  .  .    383  to  4.38 

List  of  all  the  irregular  verbs,       ........  439,440 

VocAstrLABT,  containing  all  the  Spanish  words  used  in  the  grammar,  .    441  to  470 


PRELIMINARY  LESSON 


OETHOGRAPHY  AND  PRONUNCIATIOISr. 


THE  ALiIPMABET. 

The  Spanish  Alphabet  contains  twenty-seven  letters,  ex- 
clusive of  K  and  Tl^  which  are  used  iu  foreign  words  only, 
and  are  pronounced  as  in  English.  The  W  appears  in  a  very 
ic.\Y  historical  names,  like  Wamba^  Witiza.  The  letters  are  all 
of  the  feminine  gender,  and  their  names  and  pronunciation  are 
as  follows : 


A, 

a, 

a^. 

N, 

n, 

atjnay. 

B, 

\ 

lay. 

% 

fi, 

ain-yay. 

0, 

c, 

tTiay. 

0, 

0, 

0. 

CII, 

cl), 

cliay. 

P, 

P, 

pay. 

D, 

cl, 

day. 

Q, 

q, 

Icoo. 

E, 

c, 

ay. 

R, 

r, 

air -ray. 

F, 

f, 

ay-fay. 

s, 

s, 

aymy. 

G, 

& 

lay. 

T, 

t, 

tay. 

n, 

ll, 

at-chay. 

U, 

«, 

00. 

I, 

i, 

e. 

V, 

V, 

my. 

J, 

J, 

liotali. 

X, 

^, 

aylciss. 

i>, 

\ 

a-lay. 

Y, 

y, 

e-gree-ay'-gaJi 

LL, 

11, 

ail-yay. 

z, 

z, 

tliay-tah. 

M, 

m, 

aymay. 

XVlll  PKELIMINAEY     LESSON. 

All  the  letters  are  invariable  in  sound,  except  c  and  g,  which 
have  each  two  sounds,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  proper  place;  and 
every  letter  is  pronounced  in  all  positions,  except  the  h,  Avhich 
is  always  silent,  and  the  ii,  which  is  not  sounded  in  the  sylla- 
bles (/ue,  ffui,  and  que^  qui. 

So  that,  with  a  few  exceptions,  the  Spanish  language  is 
pronounced  exactly  as  it  is  written,  and  does  not  present  those 
difficulties  met  with  in  the  orthography  and  pronunciation  of 
most  other  languages.  The  system  of  representing,  in  each  les- 
son, the  pronunciation  of  each  word  by  an  incorrect  orthography 
only  augments  the  doubts  and  labor  of  the  learner,  besides  in- 
creasing unnecessarily  the  size  of  the  work ;  one  lesson  of  an 
hour's  duration  with  a  native  Spanish  teacher  will  do  more  toward 
the  acquisition  of  a  pure  Castilian  pronunciation,  than  all  the 
works  that  could  be  written  on  the  subject. 

As  the  English  vowels  differ  in  sound  from  those  of  all 
other  languages,  gi'eat  care  ought  to  be  taken  to  learn  the 
true  sound  of  the  Spanish  vowels;  they  are: 

a,        e,        i,        o,        u. 

ah,       ay,      e,        o,        oo. 

Y  is  sometimes  a  vowel.    (See  the  letter  Y.) 

A  has  an  invariable  sound,  as  heard  in  the  words  art,  father  \ 
as,  arte,  padre  (not  varying  as  in  the  English  words  fare,  fat, 
far^fall^  swallow^  many,  courage^  mustard). 

E  Ims  the  sound  of  a  in  made ;  as,  hecho. 

I  sounds  like  the  first  e  in  even ;  as,  ingles.     (See  letter  Y.) 

O  is  pronounced  like  the  English  o  in  the  word  ode ;  as,  amo. 

IT  sounds  as  the  English  u  in  bidl;  as,  bnla:  it  is  silent  in 
the  syllables  gue,  gui,  guerra,  except  it  has  a  diasresis  marked 
over  it,  agilero.     In  the  syllables  que^  qui,  it  is  always  silent. 


SOUNDS  OF  THE   CONSONAIVTS. 

B  has  the  same  sound  as  in  English ;  but  in  Castile  and 
Aragon  (where  in  other  respects  the  Castilian  language  is  most 


PEELTMINARY     LESSON.  XIX 

purely  spoken  and  pronounced),  they  do  not  press  the  lips 
quite  so  close  as  the  English  do,  which  causes  it  very  frequent- 
ly to  be  confounded  with  the  v,  although  they  are  distinct 
letters,  and  should  be  pronounced  as  in  English. 

O,  when  followed  by  a,  o,  u,  or  any  consonant,  sounds  like 
k;  before  e  and  /,  it  sounds  like  th  in  thanks  \  as,  gracias,  lec- 
ciorij  cabaUero.     (See  letter  Z.) 

CH  is  not  a  double  consonant,  but  a  letter  which,  although 
of  a  double  form,  has  by  itself  a  particular  denomination  and 
sound ;  it  is  pronounced  like  cJi  in  chess ;  as,  chico^  chocolate. 
Formerly,  in  words  of  Hebrew  and  Greek  origin,  it  had  the 
sound  of  A',  when  the  vowel  following  it  was  marked  with  the 
cii'cumflex  accent ;  as,  archangel,  chtmica :  but  this  practice  is 
obsolete,  and  such  words  are  now  written  arcdngel,  quimica. 

D  is  pronounced  like  the  English  c?,  except  when  found  be- 
tween two  vowels  or  at  the  end  of  words,  when  it  sounds 
softer  than  the  English  c?,  like  th  in  the  article  the,  but  not  like 
th  lisped,  as  in  thin,  as  Madric?  (like  the),  not  jMadrfz  (like 
thin)  ;  Uste(?  (like  the),  not  Ustes  (like  thin).  This  lisped 
pronunciation  on  the  d  is  considered  vulgar. 

P  is  always  pronounced  like  the  English/,  and  is  now  used 
instead  of /)/i ;  sl%  Filosofia,  Filadelfia,  instead  of  Fhtlosophia, 
Philadelphia. 

G  has  two  distinct  sounds :  one,  before  a,  o,  u,  or  a  conso- 
nant, is  the  same  sound  as  in  English  go,  good-,  as,  gato,  gra- 
cias :  before  e  and  i  it  has  another  strong,  guttural,  aspirated 
sound,  for  which  the  English  has  no  equivalent,  and  which 
even  a  very  strongly  aspirated  h,  as  in  the  words  hot,  holy,  does 
not  represent ;  as,  gente,  people ;  gesto,  gesture  ;  gigante,  giant. 

H  is  never  pronounced  in  the  Spanish  language ;  as,  hace, 
higo,  pronounced  as  if  no  such  h  were  there.  It  is,  properly 
speaking,  only  a  sign  used  to  mark  the  etymology  of  words, 
and  is  now  omitted  in  many  words  in  which  it  was '  formerly 
used ;  as,  Cristo,  Filosofta,  Teatro,  Fit  dg  or  as,  Filadelfia. 


XX  PEELIMINAET     LESSON. 

Tliis  letter  is  always  written  before  the  words  that  begin 
by  ue  and  ie,  and  here  it  has  a  very  soft,  almost  imperceptible, 
aspiration  ;  as,  hnevo,  egg;  hueso,  bone;  huesped,  guest;  hierro^ 
iron ;  hielo^  ice :  but  great  care  must  be  taken  not  to  pronounce 
it  too  strong,  as  the  lower  classes  of  certain  provinces  do,  pro- 
nouncing juevo,  or  guevo'^jueso^  or  ffUeso,  which  is  considered 
vulgar. 

J  has  always  an  aspirated  guttural  sound,  like  that  which 
the  ff  has  before  e  and  i,  and  is  written  before  the  vowels  a,  o, 
w,  instead  of  the  letter  x,  which  formerly  represented  the  same 
aspirated  sound ;  as,  Alejandro,  Alexander ;  Z>on  Quijote,  Don 
Quixote. 

L  always  sounds  as  in  English. 

LL  is,  like  the  cA,  a  single  letter,  although  of  double  form, 
which  therefore  cannot  be  divided  at  the  end  of  a  line.  It  has 
a  liquid  sound,  resembling  that  of  the  English  II  in  William, 
brilliant  \  as,  Guillermo,  hrillante. 

lyr,  2^,  and  P  have  the  English  somid. 

N  is  always  pronounced  like  ni  in  the  English  word  pinion. 

Q  is  pi'onounced  like  the  English  k  before  tie  and  ni,  in 
which  combination  alone  it  is  now  used  ;  in  all  other  positions 
it  has  been  i-eplaced  by  c ;  as,  cuando,  cama,  comer,  quien,  querer. 

R,  .when  single,  is  sounded  soft,  as  in  English ;  as,  querido, 
oro:  and  when  double,  or  at  the  beginning  of  a  v.ord,  and 
when  it  comes  after  I,  n,  or  s,  or  in  compound  words,  in  wliich 
the  second  begins  by  r,  it  is  pronounced  with  a  very  strong 
rolling  sound ;  as,  reloj,  malrotar,  enriquecer,  Israel,  prerogati- 
va,  7naniroto,  cariredondo,  &c. 

S  is  pronounced  like  the  English  s  in  say ;  as,  sabio,  wise ; 
solo,  alone ;  seiior,  sir. 

T  is  pronounced  as  in  English, 

V  has  the  sound  of  the  English  v,     (See  letter  B.) 


PBELIMINAP.T     LESSON.  XXI 

X  has  the  sound  of  the  x  in  the  English  -word  tax  \  as, 
exdmen,  extrangero.  It  no  longer  represents  its  former  guttu- 
ral sound,  as  has  been  observed.  (See  letter  J.)  Some  replace 
it  by  the  letter  s,  when  it  comes  before  a  consonant,  and  write 
estrangero  instead  of  extrangero.  The  grammar  of  the  Span- 
ish Academy  does  not  authorize  this  practice. 

Y  is  a  consonant  letter,  but  use  makes  it  serve  as  a 
vowel  Avhen  it  stands  alone,  used  as  a  copulative  conjunction 
(meaning  and)  ;  it  is  also  used  instead  of  the  vowel  i,  in  the 
combinations  ««,  6^,  ui  at  the  end  of  a  word ;  as,  verdegay^  rey^ 
ley,  convoy,  muy. 

When  used  in  its  proper  place,  that  is  to  say,  as  a  conso- 
nant, it  has  the  same  sound  in  Spanish  as  in  the  English  words 
yotmg,  year. 

Z  has  always  the  sound  of  th,  as  heard  in  thank,  hath. 


SYL.L.ABL.ES. 

Such  syllables  only  will  be  noted  here  as  may  be  subject 
to  doubt  as  to  the  pronunciation  and  orthography. 


ca, 
Tcah. 

que, 
Jcay. 

qui, 
Tcee. 

CO, 

Tco. 

cu, 
koo. 

tTidh. 

ce, 
thay. 

ci, 

tliee. 

zo, 
tho. 

zu, 
thoo. 

az, 
ath. 

ez, 

aith. 

iz, 

eeth. 

oz, 

oth. 

uz, 

ooth. 

ga, 
gal. 

gue,    • 
gay. 

ghee. 

go, 

go. 

gu, 
goo. 

ja, 
liali. 

ge, 
hay. 

gj, 
hee. 

jo, 
ho. 

.1", 
hoo. 

ya,                  ye.                  yi.                   yo. 
This  sonnd  carniot  be  properly  represented  in  English. 

yu. 
(See  letter  T). 

cha, 
tchah. 

che, 
tchay. 

chi, 
tehee. 

cho, 
tcho. 

cho, 
tchoq. 

XXll  PRELIMINARY     LESSON. 

Ua,  lie,  lli,  lib,  llu, 

lyah.  lyay.  lyee.  lyd.  lyoo. 

fia,  fie,  fii,  no,  Cu, 

nyah.  nyai.  nye.  nyo.  nyoo. 

cua,  cue,  cui,  cuo, 

Jcwah  Tcway.  Tcwee.  hwo. 

gua,  gue,  gui,  guo, 

gwah.  gway.  gwee.  gwd. 


DIPHTMONGS. 

ai, 

as  in 

dabais, 

dah' -hah-eesa. 

You  gave. 

ay, 

u 

hay. 

dh'->e. 

There  is. 

au, 

(( 

poMsa, 

pah'-oo-sa. 

Pause. 

eij 

u 

va's. 

"vai'-eess. 

You  see. 

«y, 

a 

%, 

lai'-e. 

Law. 

ea, 

u 

Imea, 

le'-nai-a. 

Dne. 

eo. 

u 

virgineo. 

teer-he'-nai-o. 

Virginal. 

eu, 

u 

dettda, 

dai'-oo-da. 

Debt. 

ia, 

(( 

g^ac^cf, 

grah' -the-a. 

Grace. 

ie, 

(( 

cMo, 

the-ai'-lo. 

Heaven. 

io, 

(( 

preciV, 

prai'  -ilie-o. 

Price. 

iu, 

(( 

cittdad. 

the-oo-dath' . 

City. 

oe, 

u 

h6ro«, 

ai'-ro-ai. 

Hero. 

oi, 

u 

S()is, 

so'-eess. 

You  are. 

oy, 

(( 

voy, 

vd'-e. 

I  go. 

ua, 

u 

fragwa, 

frah'-gwa. 

Forge. 

w, 

(( 

dwefio, 

doo-ain'-yo.  , 

Owner. 

ui, 

(( 

rMJdo, 

roo-e'-do. 

Noise. 

«y, 

(( 

mwy, 

moo'-e. 

Very. 

«<?, 

(C 

ardtto, 

ar'-doo-o. 

Arduous, 

TRIPfilTKOlVGS. 

^a^,  as  in  preciais,  prai-the-ah' -eess. 

iei,  "  vacieis,  Tah-the-ai'-cess.  -. 

uai,  "  santigwffl^s,  san-te-gwah'-eess. 

vay,  "  Paragway,  pah-rah-gwaJi'-e. 

net,  "  averig?7eis,  aJi-vai-re-gwai'-ecss. 

uey,  "  htiey,  iwai'-e. 


PRELI5IINARY     LESSON. 


AVhenevcr  one  of  the  vowels  is  accented  (generally  the  i 
and  ?<),  these  combinatioijs  do  not  form  diphthongs,  because 
each  vowel  belongs  then  to  a  separate  syllable ;  as,  leia,  vana, 
efecti'ia,  &c.  And  in  poetry  the  diphthongs  as  well  as  the 
triphthongs  may  be  divided  into  different  syllables  by  a  di- 
aeresis, when  the  verse  requires  an  additional  syllable,  as  : 

"  0  si  rodeo  tal  vez, 
For  el  Istmo  de  Siiez." 


ACCENTS. 

Words  that  end  in  a  consonant  are  accented  on  the  last 
syllable ;  as,  virttcd,  virtue  ;  hablar,  to  speak  ;  ficsil,  gun ; 
papel,  paper. 

Words  that  end  in  a  vowel  are  accented  on  the  penultimate ; 
as,  banco,  bench  ;  mesa,  table ;  llbro,  book. 

Of  course  we  need  not  put  any  written  accent  on  the  last 
syllable,  when  it  ends  in  a  consonant;  nor  on  the  next  to  the 
last,  when  it  ends  in  a  vowel,  because  the  fact  of  ending  in  any 
of  these  letters  is  a  sufficient  mark  where  to  lay  the  stress  of 
the  voice. 

The  written  accent  is  used  only  over  the  words  that  do  not 
follow  the  above  two  general  rules,  to  show  they  are  excep- 
tions ;  as,  papci,  papa ;  ^:)er«<5(f^'co,  newspaper ;  Idpiz,  pencil ; 
limes,  Monday ;  mdrtes,  Tuesday ;  miercoles,  Wednesday,  &c. 

Remarks. 

Monosyllables  having  only  one  signification  are  never  ac- 
cented ;  as,  pan,  mat  But  monosyllables  or  any  other  word 
having  more  than  one  signification  should  be  accented  when 
they  are  more  slowly  pronounced  ;  as,  mi,  me  ;  mi,  my ;  tu, 
thou ;  tu,  thy ;  ^,  he  ;  el,  the,  &c. 

The  vowels  6.,  e,  6,  {i,  when  used  alone  are  always  accented. 

The  verb  is  an  exception  to  what  has  been  stated  about  the 
accent,  since  many  persons  of  it,  in  different  tenses,  have  the 
stress  of  the  voice  on  the  syllable  next  to  the  last,  although 
they  end  in  a  consonant ;  as,  hablan,  they  speak ;  compraron. 


XXIV  PEELIMINAEY     LESSON. 

they  bought,  &c. ;  and  although  this  may  be  an  exception,  it 
is  not  customary  to  place  the  -written  accent  over  them  as  is 
done  in  the  case  of  other  words. 

The  employment  of  the  written  accent  in  the  verbs  is  now 
generally  confined  to  the  first  and  tliii-d  persons  singular,  and 
first  person  plural  of  the  perfect  indicative,  and  every  person 
of  the  future  indicative. 

If  one  or  more  pronouns  of  the  dative  or  accusative  case  be 
affixed  to  an  unaccented  person  of  a  verb,  the  syllable  on  which 
the  stress  falls  should  be  marked  with  the  accent;  as  from 
busca,  hiiscolo,  h'&scaseto  ;  from  venda,  vendalo,  vendaselo. 


.  PUNCTUATION. 

The  marks  are  the  same  as  in  English,  and  are  similarly 
applied,  excepting  those  of  interrogation  and  exclamation, 
which  both  precede  and  succeed  the  sentence;  the  former  it 
should  be  remarked  are  inyerted. — Ex.,  ^'  Como  estd  V.  f 
I  Oh,  si  V.  supiera ! 


DE  TOElSrOS'S 

SPANISH   GRAMMAR. 


LESSON    I. 

REGULAR  VERBS.— i^tVs^  Conjugation. 
HdblrQX.  I  To  speak. 

IHDIOATIVE  PEESE>rT. 


Yo  habl-o. 

Tti  habl-as. 

El  or  ella  habl-a. 

Usted  (V.)  habl-a. 

I  speak. 
Thou  speakest. 
He  or  she  speaks 
You  speak. 

Fosotros,  or    ) 

Nosotras,        }"  tabl-amos. 

"We  speak. 

Vosotros,  or    )  ,    , ,    . 
Vosotras,        j"  l^^^-ais. 

You  speak. 

Ellos,  or  ellas,  habl-an. 
Ustedes  (Vds.)  habl-an. 

They  speak. 
You  speak. 

Si  {adverb). 
No      " 

Yes. 

No,  or  not. 

Selior. 

Sir. 

COMPOS 

3ITI0N. 

6  Habla  V.  ? 
Si,  senor,  yo  hablo. 
6  Hablan  Vds.  ? 
1 

Do  you  speak  ? 
Yes,  sir,  I  speak. 
Do  you  speak  ? 

LESSON     I. 


No,  senor,  cilas  liablan. 

6  Hablais  vosotras  ? 

No,  senor,  cllos  babla?. 

^Hablaclla? 

No,  senor,  ella  no  habla. 

6  Hablas  tu  ? 

No,  senor,  el  habla. 

6  Habla  V.  ? 

Si,  senor,  bablo. 

(,  Hablan  ellas  ? 

No,  senor,  no  bablan. 

i  Hablamos  nosotros  ? 

Si,  senor,  hablamos. 

(,  Ilablais  vosotras  ? 

Nosotras  no  hablamos. 


No,  sir,  they  speak. 

Do  you  speak  ? 

No,  sir,  they  speak. 

Does  she  speak  ? 

No,  sir,  she  does  not  speak. 

Dost  thou  speak  ? 

No,  sir,  he  speaks. 

Do  you  speak  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  speak. 

Do  they  speak  ? 

No,  sir,  they  do  not  speak. 

Do  we  speak  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  speak. 

Do  you  speak  ? 

"We  do  not  speak. 


EXPLANATION. 

1.  Regular  Veers. — ^Alltlie  verbs  of  the  Spanish  language 
have  their  endings,  in  the  infinitive  mood,  either  in  ar,  er,  or 
ir;  hence  their  classification  in  three  conjugations:  1st,  tliose 
ending  in  ar;  2d,  those  ending  in  er;  and  3d,  in  ^V;  as,  habl-ar^ 
aprend-er^  escrib-ir. 

2.  Roots. — The  letters  before  the  terminations  m\  er,  ir,  in 
the  preceding  verbs,  are  hdbl^  aprend,  escrib,  and  are  called  the 
roots. 

3.  Terminatioks. — All  regular  verbs  of  the^rs^  covjugaiion 
vary  the  endings  in  their  respective  tenses,  so  as  to  correspond 
with  those  of  the  verb  hahl-ar;  all  those  of  the  second  conjuga- 
tion correspond  to  the  terminations  of  aprend-er ;  and  all  those 
of  the  third  correspond  to  escrib-ir. 

Consequently,  when  the  student  has  learned  how  to  conju- 
gate one  of  the  regular  verbs  of  each  conjugation,  he  can  con- 
jugate all  the  regular  verbs  of  the  Spanish  language  (about 
8,000).  For  this  reason  we  recommend  the  scholars  to  devote 
their  attention,  in  the  first  place,  to  committing  to  memory  the 
different  moods  and  tenses  of  these  three  model  verbs.  They 
will  be  found  complete  at  the  end  of  tlie  book. 

The  terminations  of  the  verbs  being  different  for  each  per- 
son, as  well  in  the  plural  as  in  the  dngular  number,  the  nomina- 
tive pronouns  are  ordinarily  dispensed  with,  and  arc  only  used 


LESS  ONI.  3 

to  give  emphasis  ;  except  the  pronoun  listed,  which  must 
always  be  expressed. —  Usted,  meaning  You,  is  a  contraction 
from  vuestra  merced,  Your  Honor ;  and,  being  a  title,  its  omis- 
sion would  be  considered  impolite. 

4.  You. — In  addressing  an  individual  in  Spanish,  the  third 
person  is  used  with  the  pronoun  Usted:  as,  Usted  hdbla,  you 
speak ;  the  second  person  is  employed  only  in  speaking  to  rela- 
tives or  intimate  friends. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Ilablan  ellas?     Si,  seflor,  ellas  hablan. 

2.  ^ Hablais  vosotros ?     No,  seflor;  ellos  hablan. 

3.  ^  Ilablamos  nosotras  ?    No,  sefior;  ella  babla. 

4.  I  Hablais  vosotros  ?     No,  sefior ;  el  habla. 

5.  I  Habla  ella  ?    Si,  sefior,  habla. 

G,  ^Ilabla  el?    No,  sefior,  no  habla. 

7.  ^Hablas  tli?     Si,  sefior,  yo  hablo. 

8.  ^Hablais  vosotras?     Si,  sefior,  nosotraa  hablamos. 

9.  I  Hablo  yo  ?     Si,  sefior,  V.  habla. 

10.  ^  Habla  61?    No,  sefior,  no  habla. 

11.  gNo  hablan  ellos?     Si,  sefior,  ellos  hablan. 

12.  g  Habla  V.?     No,  sefior,  yo  no  hablo. 

13.  ^No  habla  V.?     No,  sefior,  yo  no  hablo. 

14.  I  No  hablan  ellas?     Si,  sefior,  hablan. 

15.  ^No  hablais  vosotras?     No,  sefior,  nosotras  no  hablamos. 

EXCERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  speak?    I  speak. 

2.  Do  they  speak?     Yes,  sir,  they  speak, 

3.  Dost  thou  speak  ?    No,  sir,  he  speaks, 

4.  Do  you  speak?    No,  sir,  we  do  not  speak. 

5.  Dost  thou  speak?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak. 
G.  Does  he  not  speak  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  speaks. 

7.  Do  you  not  speak?     No,  sir,  we  do  not  speak. 

8.  Does  she  not  speak  ?     No,  sir,  she  does  not  speak, 

9.  Do  we  not  speak  ?     Yes,  sir,  we  speak. 

10.  Do  they  {fern.)  not  speak?    No,  sir,  they  {fern.)  do  not  speak. 

11.  Do  wo  {fern.)  not  speak?    Yes,  sir,  we  {fern)  speak. 

12.  Do  you  speak?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak;  tliey  {fern.)  speak. 


LESSON     II, 


LESSON    II. 


MASCTJLINE  KOrXS. 

Sefior  (Sr.).  Sii-,  Mr.,  or  Lord. 

Caballero.  Gentleman,  Sir. 

Sefiorito.  Young  gentleman. 

Don.  (Dn.,orD.).  Mr.,  Esq. 


Manuel* 

Emanuel. 

Espafiol. 

Spanish. 

Ingles. 
Frances. 

English. 
French. 

Luisa 

Aleman. 

German. 

COMPO 

3ITI0N 

FEMIXINE   XOrXS. 

Sefiora  (Sra.).     Madam,  or  Mrs. 

"        "  Lady,  or  My  Lady. 

Sefiorita  (Srita).  Miss,  or  young  lady. 
Dona  (Da.)         Mrs. 


Louisa. 


Sefiorita,  (,  habla  V.  espafiol  ? 
Si,  sefior,  hablo  espafiol. 
Luisa,  6  hablas  frances  ? 
No,  sefior,  no  hablo  frances. 
I  Hablan  Yds.  ingles  ? 
Hablamos  ingles. 
i  Hablan  ellos,  6  ellas,  francos  ? 
Sefiora,  i  habla  Y.  espafiol  ? 
Don  Manuel,  f,  habla  Y.  aleman  ? 
Caballero,  i  habla  Y.  espafiol  ? 
Sefiorita  Luisa,  ^  habla  Y.  frances  ? 


Do  you  speak  Spanish,  Miss? 

Yes,  sir,  I  speak  Spanish. 

Louisa,  dost  thou  speak  French  ? 

No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak  French. 

Do  you  speak  English  ? 

We  speak  EngUsh. 

Do  they  speak  French  ? 

Madam,  do  you  speak  Spanish  ? 

Mr.  Emanuel,  do  you  speak  German  ? 

Sir,  do  you  speak  Spanish  ? 

Miss  Louisa,  do  you  s^jcak  French  ? 


EXPLANATION. 

5.  Sexor. — This  word,  used  alone,  i.  o.,  in  the  vocative  case, 
implies  inferiority  on  the  part  of  the  speaker,  and  answers  to 
the  word  Ztord  in  English,  It  is  used  in  addressing  God,  or 
the  King ;  or  by  servants  when  speaking  to  their  masters. 
With  an  equal,  the  proper  term  is  caballero,  gentleman ;  never- 
theless, Sefior  may  also  he  used  among  equals :  in  the  affirma- 
tive, S'l,  senor,  or  in  the  negative,  no,  senor,  in  which  cases  it 
means  sir;  or  together  with  the  name  of  the  person  ;  as,  Sefior 
Kemp,  wliich  means  Mr.  Kemp. 

Senora,  Seiiorita. — ^In  addressing  ladies,  the  word  Senora, 
Madam,  and  Scnorita,  Young  Lady,  or  Miss,  may  be   used 


LESSON     II.  5 

alone;  as,  Sefiora^  or  Sefiorita,  ^hahla  V.  espanol?  Madam, 
or  Young  Lady,  or  Miss,  do  you  speak  Spanish  ? 

Senorito,  like  Seno)',  implies  inferiority  on  the  part  of  the 
speaker,  for  Avhich  reason  it  is  seldom  used,  except  by  servants. 
6.  Don,  Mr.,  a^jplies  to  gentlemen,  and  Dona,  Mrs.,  to  la- 
dies. These  terms  are  only  used  in  conjunction  with  the  Christ- 
ian names ;  as,  Don  Manuel,  Dona  Luisa,  and,  still  more  re- 
spectfully, Seilor  Don  Manuel,  Seiiora  Dona  Luisa.  This 
title,  conferred,  in  old  times,  only  upon  members  of  noble 
families,  is  now  used  in  addressing  all  persons,  except  those 
of  very  humble  station,  and  is  written  in  abbreviation  thus, 
Dn.,  Da. 

7.  The  negative  no,  is  always  placed  immediately  before 
the  verb. 

COXVERSATIOX  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^  ITabla  V.  espafiol  ?    Ilablo  espafiol. 

2.  Luisa,  ^hablas  frances?    Hablo  frances. 

3.  I  Habla  Manuel  ingles  ?     Habla  ingles. 

4.  Caballero,  i  habla  V.  aleman  ?     Si,  seuor,  hablo  aleman. 

5.  ^Hablan  Vds.  frances?       Hablamos  frances. 

G.  I  Hablan  ellos  ingles?    No,  sefior,  no  hablan  ingl6s. 

7.  ^Hablan  ellas  espafiol?     No,  sefior,  no  hablan  espafiol. 

8.  ^ Habla  Luisa  frances?  No,  sefior,  no  habla  frances;  eUa  habla 
espafiol. 

9.  ^  No  habla  Manuel  aleman  ?  No,  sefior,  no  habla  aleman ;  61-habla 
ingles. 

10.  J  Habla  V.  espafiol?    No,  sefior,  no  hablo  espafiol. 

11.  ^ Habla  Manuel  espafiol?     Si,  sefior,  61  habla  espafiol. 

12.  Don  Manuel,  ^ habla  Y.  frances?     No,  sefior,  no  hablo  fi-ances. 

13.  Scfiora  Da.  Luisa,  ghabla  Y.  espafiol?    No,  sefior ;  hablo  ingles. 

14.  Sefiorita  Da.  Luisa,  ^ habla  Y.  frances?     Yo  hablo  frances. 
is.  Caballero,  i  habla  Y.  aleman  ?     No,  sefiorita,  hablo  espafiol. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  they  speak  French  ?     The j  speak  French. 

2.  Do  you  speak  English  ?     "We  speak  English. 

3.  Do  they  speak  Spanish  ?     No,  madam,  they  do  not  speak  Spanish. 

4.  Sir,  do  you  speak  German?     Yes,  madam,  I  speak  German. 

5.  Does  Emanuel  speak  French?    No,  sir;  be  speaks  English. 


G 


LESSON     III. 


G.  Do  you  speak  Spanish?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak  Spanisli, 

7.  Does  not  Louisa  speak  German  ?     No,  sir,  she  does  not  speak  Ger- 
man ;  she  speaks  French. 

8.  Emanuel,  dost  thou  speak  English  ?     I  speak  English. 
Does  Louisa  speak  Spanish  ?     Yes,  sir,  she  speaks  Spanish. 
Do  you  speak  French  ?     No,  sir,  I  speak  English. 
Sir,  do  you  speak  French  ?    No,  su-. 
Miss  Louisa,  do  you  speak  Spanish  ?     Yes,  madam. 
(Don)  Emanuel,  do  you  speak  English?    Yes,  sir,  I  speak  Eng- 


9 

10 

11 

12. 

13, 
lish. 

14.  Do  wo  speak  Spanish? 
French. 


We  do  not  speak  Spanish;    we  speak 


LESSON    III. 


Estudi-Qx. 

To  study. 

Estudi-o. 

I  study. 

Estudi-as. 

Thou  studiest. 

Estudi-a. 

lie  studies. 

Estudi-amos. 

We  study. 

Estudi-ais. 

You  study. 

Estudi-an. 

They  study. 

El  {mase.  sing.). 

The. 

Yord. 

And. 

Qu6  {interrogative  pronoun). 

"What  or  which. 

Pero,  sino. 

But. 

Bien  (adveri). 

Well. 

Mai 

Badly. 

ADJEC 

rivES. 

Espauol. 

Spaniard. 

Ingles. 

Englishman. 

Frances. 

Frenchman. 

Aleman. 

German. 

Americano. 

American. 

MASOITLrNE  N0FN8. 

FEMINllfE  N0XIX3 

Alejandro.    Alexander.             | 

Margarita.    Mai-garel 

LESSON     III. 


COMPOSITION. 


j  Estudia  V.  espauol  ? 

No,  scfior,  cl  Frances  estudia  espaiiol ; 

pero  yo  cstudio  ingles. 
(,  Quo  estudia  cl  Americano  ? 
Estudia  espaiiol  y  francos. 
Alejandro,  j  estudias  francos  y  aleman  ? 

No,  sciior,  estudio  espaiiol  6  inglda. 
Manuel  no  estudia  sino  francos. 
(,  Que  hablan  ellos  sino  espanol  ? 
ij  Habla  bien  ingles  el  Espaiiol  ? 
No,  seiior,  el  habla  el  ingles  mal,  pero 
habla  bien  cl  espaiiol. 


Do  you  study  Spanish  ? 

No,  sir,  the  Frenchman  studies  Spanish ; 

but  I  study  English. 
What  does  the  American  study  ? 
Ho  studios  Spanish  and  French. 
Alexander,  do  you  study  French  and 

German  ? 
No,  sir,  I  study  Spanish  and  English. 
Emanuel  studies  but  (only)  French. 
What  do  they  speak  but  Spanish  ? 
Does  the  Spaniard  speak  English  ■well  ? 
No,  sir,  he  speaks  English  badly,  but 

speaks  Spanish  well.    • 


EXPLANATION. 

8.  Y. — The  conjunction  y  is  changed  into  6  when  the  fol- 
lowing word  begins  with  i  or  hi ;  as,  espanol  ^  ingles^  Spanish 
and  English  ;  algodon  'e  hilo,  cotton  and  thread. 

9.  Que,  interrogative  pronoun^  is  written  with  an  accent, 
to  distinguish  it  from,  qice,  relative  pronoun,  or  conjunction. 

10.  SiKO. — When  we  translate  hut  into  Spanish,  we  must 
first  ascertain  its  meaning;  because  this  conjunction  is  used  in 
English  to  express  many  very  different  things.  In  Spanish  it 
is  translated  sino,  when  it  is  used  in  antithesis,  that  is,  when  it 
means  except  \  and  also  after  an  interrogation,  or  a  negation. 
The  verb  is  not  repeated  Avith  this  conjunction;  as,  £l  no  habla 
sino  ingles.  He  speaks  but  (only)  English,  i  Que  habla  sirio 
espauol  ?     Wh.at  (else)  does  he  speak  but  Spanish  ? 

11.  Pero  is  used  when  it  is  not  preceded  by  a  negative, 
and  the  verb  is  repeated ;  as,  liahlo  espanol,  pero  no  hablo 
frances.     I  speak  Spanish,  but  do  not  speak  French. 

N.  B. — We  will  see  hereafter  that  hut,  according  to  its  dif- 
fei-ent  meanings  in  English,  must  be  translated  by  different 
words  in  Spanish. 

12.  We  have  again  introduced  the  words  csjyafiol,  ingles, 
frances,  and  aUman  into  this  lesson,  because,  while  they  were 
given  before  as  substantives,  they  are  now  employed  as  adjec- 
tives. The  pupil  will  observe  that,  in  Spanish,  as  in  English, 
some  words  are,  at  different  times,  different  parts  of  speech ;  as. 


.  8  LESSON     HI. 

El  Espanol  habla  hien  frances.  The  Spaniard  speaks  French 
well.  Here  the  word  Espanol  is  used  as  an  adjective, 
meaning  Spaniard  \  and  the  word  frances  as  a  substantive, 
meaning  the  French  language;  hien  is  employed  as  an  ad- 
verb, meaning  well,  and  it  will  appear  hereafter  as  a  substan- 
tive, meaning  good.  Consequently,  the  learner,  before  trans- 
lating a  Avord,  must  first  ascertain  the  part  of  speech  to  which 
it  belongs. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^ Habla  cspafiol  Margarita?     Margarita  no  liabla  cspallol,  pero 
Labia  ingles. 

2.  I  Ilabla  V.  cspafiol  ?    No,  sefior,  liablo  frances  y  aleman. 

3.  Alejandro,  i  hablas  ingl6s  ?     Si,  sefior,  hablo  ingles. 

4.  I  Ilablan  Yds.  espafiol  ?     Ilablamos  espaflol  6  lugles. 

5.  I  Que  liablan  ellos  ?     Hablan  aleman. 

G,  CabaUero,  j  estudia  V.  espaflol  ?    Si,  sefior,  cstudio  espaflol  6  in- 
gles. 

7.  I  Que  estudia  el  Aleman  ?    Estudia  espafiol. 

8.  ^Estudian  Yds.  espafiol?    Estudiamos  frances  y  aleman. 

9.  I  Ilabla  bien  Luisa  el  ingl6s  ?     Ilabla  bien  espafiol  e  ingl6s. 

10.  ^Ilabla  bien  Manuel  el  alemau?    No,  sefior,  habla  mal  cl  aleman, 
pero  habla  bien  el  frances. 

11.  ^  Habla  bien  ingles  el  Amex-icano?   'Habla  bien  ingles,  pero  habla 
mal  el  espafiol. 

12.  Sefiora,  i  estudia  Y.  frances  ?   No,  sefior,  estudio  espafiol. 

13.  ^  Que  estudia  Alejandro  ?     El  no  estudia  sino  frances. 

14.  I  Qu6  hablan  ellos  sino  espafiol  ?    EUos  liablan  frances. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  study  German?     "We  study  French  and  Spanish. 

2.  Does  Alexander  speak  Spanish  ?    Alexander  does  not  speak  Span- 
ish, but  he  speaks  English. 

3.  Margaret,  do  you  speak  French?     No,  sir,  I  speak  German  and 
Spanish. 

4.  What  do  they  speali  ?     They  speak  Spanish  and  German,  hut  do 
not  speak  French. 

5.  Do  you  speak  Spanish?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak  Spanish,  but  I 
speak  English. 

G.  Does  Louisa  speak  French  wcU?     She  speaks  French  badly,  but 
speaks  German  well. 


LESSON     IV.  9 

7.  What  do  you  study?     We  study  Spanish,  and  Alexander  studies 
Frenci'i. 

8.  What  does  the  German  study?     He  studies  Spanish. 

9.  Does  he  study  well  ?     No,  madam,  he  studies  badly. 

10.  Do  you  speak  Spanish,  madam?     No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak  Spanish, 
but  I  speak  English  and  German. 

11.  Does  the  Frenchman  speak  English  well?     No,  madam,  he  speaks 
English  badly,  but  the  Spaniard  speaks  EngHsh  well. 

12.  What  does  the  German  study  ?     lie  studies  English,  and  the  Eng- 
lishman studies  German. 

13.  What  does  Alexander  study  ?     He  studies  French  only. 

14.  What  do  they  speak  but  Spanish  ?  )  i  i?        v. 
What  else  do  they  speak  but  Spanish?  \  ^^^  ^P^^  French. 


Libro. 

Cuaderno. 

Papel. 

Caballo. 

Tintero. 


Book. 

Copy-book. 

Paper. 

Horse. 

Inkstand. 


LESSON    IV. 

Compr-av. 

To  buy. 

Compr-o. 

I  buy. 

Oompr-as. 

Thou  buyest.' 

Compr-a. 

He  buys. 

Compr-amos. 

We  buy. 

Oompr-ais. 

You  buy. 

Oompr-an. 

They  buy. 

Busc-ar. 

To  look  for,  to  seek 

A. 

To. 

De. 

Of,  or  from. 

Al. 

To  the. 

Del. 

Of  the,  or  from  the 

Un  (masG.  sing.). 

A,  or  an. 

Madera. 


Wood: 


i  Que  compra  V.  ? 
Compro  un  libro. 


COMPOSITION. 

I      What  do  you  buy ' 
I      I  buy  a  book. 


10  LESSON     IV, 


I  Compran  Vds.  papel  ? 

6  No,   seSor,   no   compramos   papel, 

compramos  un  cuadcrno. 
Busco  al  Americano. 
El  busca  el  libro. 
El  caballo  del  Frances. 
El  tintero  de  madera. 


Do  you  buy  paper  ? 

No,  sir,  we  do  not  buy  paper,  we  buy 

a  copy-book. 
I  look  for  the  American. 
He  looks  for  the  book. 
The  Frenchman's  horse. 
The  wooden  inkstand. 


EXPLANATION. 

13.  A. — The  preposition  d,  to.  Active  verbs  govern  their 
objectives  with  the  aid  of  the  preposition  a,  if  that  objective  be 
a  person  ;  as,  JBusco  al  Americano,  I  look  for  the  American ; 
JSusco  el  papel,  I  look  for  the  paper. 

14.  De. — ^The  preposition  de,  of,  or  from,  is  used  to  ex- 
press possession,  being  always  placed  before  the  possessor ;  as, 
El  cahaUo  del  Frances:  The  Frenchman's  horse.  It  is  also 
used  to  denote  the  material  of  which  any  thing  consists,  or  is 
made ;  as.  El  tintero  de  madera.  The  wooden  inkstand. 

15.  El. — The  article  el,  the,  is  used  to  determine  a  noun 
masculine  singular ;  as,  el  lihro,  the  book. 

N,  B. — When  the  article  el  comes  after  the  preposition  d 
(to),  or  de  (of,  or  from),  the  e  is  suppressed,  and  the  two  words 
compounded  into  one ;  thus,  al,  del,  instead  of  d  el,  de  et 

16.  Un. — The  indefinite  pronoun  un  is  used  before  mascu- 
line nouns ;  as,  U7i  ingles,  an  Englishman ;  un  caballo,  a  horse. 

]Sr.  B. —  Uno  is  only  used  as  a  numeral  adjective. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Qu6  compra  el  Frances?     Compra  el  caballo  del  Inglds. 

2.  I  Qu6  comprais  vosotras  ?     Compramos  tm  cuaderno. 

3.  I  Qu6  compra  Y.  ?     Compro  un  libro. 

4.  I  Compran  Vds.  un  cuaderno?  ISo,  seiior,  compramos  un  tintero 
do  madera.  • 

6.  J  Qu6  bnscas  tti  ?    Busco  un  libro  espaiiol. 

6.  I  Qa6  buscais  vosotros  ?     Xosotros  buscamos  un  tintero. 

7.  I  Qu6  buscan  ellas  ?    Buscan  el  papel. 

8.  Alejandro,  ^buscas  el  papel?     No,  sefior,  busco  el  cuadcrno. 

9.  J  Estudia  Margarita  ingl6s?    No,  sefior,  estndia  franccs. 


LESSON     IV.  11 

10.  ^  Que  estudia  el  Americano  ?    Estudia  espafiol. 

11.  ^Estudiau  Vds.  fraaces?     No,  seflor,  estudiamos  ingles. 

12.  ^  Que  estudia  ella  ?     Estudia  aleman. 

13.  ^Que  compra  V.  ?     Compro  el  caballo  del  Espafiol. 

14.  ^Que  compran  ellos?     Compran  un  tintero  de  madera. 

15.  ^Buscais  vosotros  al  Aleman?    No,  sefior,  buscamos  al  Frances. 

16.  ^Hablais  vosotros  aleman?    Si,  sefior,  hablamos  aleman. 

17.  ^Hablan  ellas  espafiol?    No,  sefior,  hablan  frances. 

18.  ^Que  estudia  V.  ?     Estudio  ingles  y  espafiol. 

19.  ^Compra  ella  un  libro?     Si,  sefior,  compra  un  libro. 

20.  ^Busca  el  al  Frances?     No,  sefior,  busca  al  Aleman. 

21.  ^  Que  habla  el  Americano  ?     Habla  espafiol. 

22.  Manuel  ^qu6  estudias  tii?     Estudio  aleman. 

23.  ^  Que  compran  ellos  ?     Compran  un  caballo. 

24.  I  Que  buscan  Vds.  ?    Buscamos  el  libro  espafiol. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "What  do  they  look  for?     They  look  for  an  inkstand. 

2.  What  docs  she  look  for?     She  looks  for  a  book. 

3.  Do  you  look  for  a  copy-book?     Yes.  sir,  we  {/em.')  look  %r  a 
copy-book. 

4.  Do  they  (fem.)  buy  a  wooden  inkstand?     Yes,  sir,  they  buy  a 
wooden  inkstand. 

5.  What  do  you  buy  ?     We  buy  the  Frenchman's  horse. 
G.  Do  you  buy  paper?     No,  sir,  I  buy  a  book. 

7.  Do  you  buy  a  copy-book  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  buy  a  copy-book. 

8.  What  does  the  Frenchman  study?    He  studies  German. 
■  9.  Do  yon  study  Spanish  ?    No,  sir,  I  study  French. 

10.  What  does  she  study?     She  studies  English. 

11.  Wliat  do  they  (fem.)  study?     Thoy  study  Spanish. 

12.  Do  you  speak  French  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  speak  French. 

13.  Does  she  speak  English?    No,  sir,  she  speaks  German. 

14.  Do  you  speak  German?    No,  sir,  we  (fem.)  speak  English. 

15.  Do  you  look  for  the  Frenchman  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  look  for  the  French- 
man. 

16.  Do  you  look  for  paper?    No,  sir,  I  look  for  a  copy-book. 

17.  What  do  they  look  for?     They  look  for  a  book. 

18.  Do  you  look  for  the  German?    Yes,  sir,  wo  {fem.)  look  for  the 
German. 

19.  Do  you  speak  French?     Yes,  sir,  I  speak  French. 

20.  What  does  Margaret  speak  ?    She  speaks  English. 


12 


LESSON     V. 


21.  What  do  they  buy  ?    They  buy  a  wooden  inkstand. 

22.  What  dost  thou  look  for?     I  look  for  a  horse. 

23.  What  do  you  study?     We  (fern.)  study  Spanish. 

24.  What  do  you  speak  ?     I  speak  English. 


LESSON    V. 


Necesitar. 
Necesit-o. 
Necesit-as. 
Necesit-a. 


To  need,  or  to  bo  in  want  of. 
I  need. 

Thou  needest. 
lie  needs. 


Necesit-amos. 

Necesit-ais. 

Necesit-an. 

Mi. 
fSu. 
Su  (?i)  de  v.,  or 
El  {n)  de  V. 


We  need. 
You  need. 
They  need. 

My. 

His,  her,  its,  their. 

Your. 


El  papa. 
El  abogado. 
El  comerciante. 
El  lacre. 
El  polio. 
El  algodon. 
El  jabon. 
El  paiiuelo. 
El  zapatero. 


The  papa. 
The  lawyer. 
The  merchant. 
The  sealing-wax. 
The  chicken. 
Tlio  cotton. 
The  soap. 
The  handkerchief. 
The  shoemaker. 


GENDER, 

La  mama. 
La  pluma. 
La  tinta. 
La  gramatica. 
La  gallina. 
La  seda. 
La  lavandcra. 
La  camisa. 


The  mamma. 

The  pen. 

The  ink. 

The  grammar. 

The  hen. 

The  sUk. 

The  washerwoman. 

The  shirt. 


COMPOSITION. 


ft  Nccesita  el  abogado  la  pluma  ? 

Si,  seiior,  necesita  la  phima  y  cl  tintcro. 

(,  Que  necesita  comprar  la  lavandcra  ? 

Necesita  comprar  jabon. 

6  Necesita  cl  comerciante  mi  algodon  ? 


Docs  the  lawyer  want  the  pen  ? 

Yes,  sir,  he  wants  the  pen  and  the  ink- 
stand. 

What  does  the  washerwoman  want  to 
buy? 

She  wants  to  buy  soap. 

Does  the  merchant  want  my  cotton  ? 


LESS  OK     V.  13 


Necesita  comprar  el  algodon  de  V.  y 

la  seda  del  Frances. 
6  Necesita  V.  su  panuelo  de  algodon  ? 
No,  senora,  necesito  su  panuelo  de  seda 

de  V. 
i  Que  necesitan  Vds.  ? 
Necesitamos  un  polio  y  una  gallina. 


He  wants  to  buy  your  cotton,  and  the 
Frenchman's  silk. 

Do  you  want  your  cotton  handkerchief  ? 

No,  madam,  I  want  your  silk  handker- 
chief. 

What  do  you  want  ? 

"We  want  a  chicken  and  a  hen. 


EXPLANATION. 

1 7.  Gender. — In  Spanish  all  nouns  are  either  masculine  or 
feminine ;  the  neuter  gender  is  only  applied  to  those  things  so 
indefinitely  used  that  their  gender  cannot  he  discovered. 

The  gender  of  nouns  may  he  ascertained  either  hy  their 
signification  or  their  termination. 

Nouns  which  signify  males,  or  which  denote  dignities  or 
professions,  &c,,  applicahle  to  men,  are  masculine;  and  those 
which  signify  females,  or  professions,  &c.,  applicahle  to  women, 
are  feminine,  without  regard  to  their  terminations:  so  that, 
/lombre,  man;  caballero,  gentleman;  polio,  chicken;  zapatero, 
shoemaker;  ahogado,  lawyer,  are  masculine;  and  nmjer,  wo- 
man ;  senora,  lady ;  gallina,  hen ;  lavandera,  washerwoman, 
are  feminine. 

Nounds  ending  in  a,  d,  or  ion,  are  generally  feminine,  and 
those  ending  in  other  letters  are  masculine ;  as. 


PapeL 

Paper. 

Leccion. 

Lesson, 

Tintero. 

Inkstand. 

Pluma. 

Pen. 

Billete. 

Billet. 

Ciudad. 

City. 

N".  B. —  Una  {indefinite  article)  is  used  before  feminine  nouns. 

To  facilitate  the  pupils  in  the  distinction  of  gender,  the  left- 
hand  side,  in  the  vocabulary,  is  reserved  for  masculine,  the 
right  for  feminine  nouns. 

18.  When  your  is  preceded  hy  you,  it  is  sometimes  trans- 
lated by  Su ;  otherwise,  it  is  generally  rendered  by  el— — de  V., 
or  su — 'de  V. ;  as, 


F".  necesita  su  carta. 

i  Que  necesita  el  papa  de  V.  ? 

Necesita  su  lihro  de  V. 


You  need  yoxir  letter. 

What  does  your  father  need  ? 

ITe  needs  your  book. 


14  LESSON     V. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 


1.  ^Necesita  V.  mi  gramatica?    Ko,  sefior,  no  necesito  so  gramdtica 
deY. 

2.  I  Necesita  cUa  el  panuelo  de  seda  ?  Si,  sefior,  ella  neccsita  el  pafiuelo 
de  seda, 

3.  I  Necesita  V.  comprar  un  libro  ?    Necesito  comprar  un  cuaderno. 

4.  I  Necesitan  ellas  el  laere  ?    No,  sefior,  necesitan  el  pafiuelo  de  al- 
godon. 

5.  i  Qu6  necesita  comprar  el  abogado  ?    Necesita  comprar  una  pluma. 
G.  J  Qud  necesita  comprar  la  lavandera  ?     Necesita  comprar  jabon. 

7.  I  Busca  V.  su  pafiuelo  ?     Si,  sefior,  busco  mi  pafiuelo. 

8.  I  Busca  V.  el  cuaderno  fle  Manuel  ?    No,  sefior,  busco  el  cuademo 
deV. 

9.  I  Habla  V.  bien  el  aleman  ?    No,  sefiorita,  bablo  mal  el  aleman. 

10.  ^Estudian  Vds.  frances?     No,  sefior,  estudiamos  espafiol. 

11.  ^Compra  V.  un  cabaUo  inglds?     Si,   sefior,  compro  un  caballo 
ingl6s. 

12.  ^  Que  compran  ellos  ?     Compran  una  pluma  y  tinta. 

13.  jQu6  comprais  vosotras?     Nosotras  compraraos  un  pafiuelo  de 
seda. 

14.  I  Qu6  compra  la  lavandera  ?     Compra  jabon. 

15.  I  Busca  V.  a  mi  abogado  ?     Si,  sefior,  busco  al  abogado  do  Y. 

16.  I  Compra  la  lavandera  im  polio  ?     Compra  una  gaUina. 

17.  J  Compra  jabon  el  comerciante?    No,  sefior,  el  comerciante  com- 
pra algodon. 

18.  i  Buscan  ellas  el  pafiuelo  de  V.  ?     Buscan  el  pafiuelo  de  V. 

19.  ^ Necesita  y.  bablar  al  abogado?     Si,  sefiora,  necesito  hablar  al 
abogado. 

20.  I  Necesita  V.  comprar  nn  libro  ?     No,  sefior,  necesito  comprar  una 
pluma  y  papel. 

21.  I  Necesita  V.  estudiar  inglds  ?     Si,  sefior,  necesito  cstudiar  ingles. 

22.  I  Qu6  necesitais  vosotras  ?    Necesitamos  comprar  lacre. 

23.  J  Necesita  V.  hablar  al  Frances?    No,  sefior,  necesito  hablar  al 
Aleman. 

24.  g  Qu6  necesita  V.  ?     Necesito  un  pafiuelo  de  algodon. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  What  do  you  need?     I  need  a  book  and  paper. 

2.  What  does  she  need  ?     She  needs  your  handkerchief. 

3.  Do  you  need  a  horse  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  need  an  English  horse. 

4.  What  do  you  need?    I  need  soap. 


LESSON     VI, 


15 


5.  Docs  tlie  American  need  the  Spanish  book  ?     Yes,  sir,  he  needs  tlie 
Spanish  book. 

6.  Do  they  need  a  lawyer  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  need  a  lawyer. 

7.  Do  you  buy  a  sUk  handkerchief?    No,  sii-,  we  {fern.)  buy  a  cot- 
ton handkerchief. 

8.  Do  you  look  for  the  Frencliinan's  horse  ?    No,  sir,  I  look  for  the 
EngMsh  man's  horse. 

9.  Dost  thou  study  German  ?    No,  sir,  I  study  English. 

10.  "What  does  the  merchant  buy?    He  buys  cotton. 

11.  What  does  the  washerwoman  buy  ?    She  buys  a  hen  and  a  chicken. 

12.  Does  the  lawyer  bay  a  book  ?    No,  sir,  he  buys  paper. 

13.  Do  they  {fern.)  speak  well  ?     No,  sir,  they  speak  badly. 

14.  Do  you  speak  French,  sir  ?     No,  sir,  I  speak  English. 

15.  Do  yoH  study  much  (mucho)  ?     No,  sir,  we  study  very  little  {poco). 

16.  Do  you  study  fast  (aprisa)  ?     No,  sir,  I  study  slowly  {despacio). 

17.  Do  you  buy  cotton  from  the  merchant?     No,  sir,  I  buy  silk  from 
your  brother  (hermano). 

18.  What  does  your  papa  need?      He  needs  the  lawyer's  book.^ 

19.  What  are  they  looking  for  ?    They  are  looking  for  paper. 

20.  Do  you  need  a  copy-book  ?    No,  sir,  I  need  a  book. 

21.  Do  you  study  Spanish  ?    Yes,  madam,  I  study  Spanish. 

22.  Do  you  need  paper  and  pen  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  need  paper  and  pen. 

23.  What  do  they  need  ?     They  need  a  silk  handkerchief. 

24.  What  do  you  need  ?    I  need  an  English  horse. 


LESSON    VI. 


Aprend-er. 
Aprend-o. 
Aprend-es. 
Aprend-e. 

Aprend-emos. 

Aprend-eis. 

Aprend-en. 


To  learn. 
I  learn. 
Tliou  learnest. 
He  learns. 

We  learn. 
You  learn. 
They  learn. 


Vender. 


To  sell. 


16 

LESSON     VI. 

Muy. 

Very. 

Mucho. 

Much,  a 

great  deal. 

Poco. 

Little. 

Aprisa. 

Quickly. 

Despacio. 

Slowly. 

Estudioso 

Studious 

Holgazan 

Man. 

Idle. 

Hombre. 

Mujer. 

Woman. 

Mucbacho. 

Boy. 

Mucbacba. 

Girl. 

Padre. 

Fatber. 

Madrc. 

Motber. 

Hijo. 

Son. 

Ilija. 

Daugbter 

Hermano. 

Brotber. 

COMPOS 

Hermana. 
ITIOK 

Sister. 

(,  Aprende  muy  aprisa  el  mucbacho  ? 

El  muchacho  estudioso  aprende  muy 
aprisa;  pero  el  muchacho  holgazan 
aprende  muy  despacio. 

jAprenden  ingles  su  padre  y  su  her- 
mano de  V.  ? 

Si,  scfior,  y  mi  madre  y  mi  hermana 
aprenden  frances. 

g  Aprende  mucho  la  muehacha  ? 

No,  senor,  aprende  poco. 

(,  Aprenden  aprisa  su  hijo  y  su  hija 
deV.? 

No,  seSor,  aprenden  despacio. 


Does  the  boy  learn  very  fast  ? 
The  studious  boy  learns  very  vast ;  but 
the  idle  one  learns  very  slowly. 

Do  your  father  and  brother  learn  Eng- 
lish? 

Yes,  sir,  and  my  mother  and  sister 
learn  French. 

Does  the  girl  learn  much  ? 

No,  sir,  she  learns  little. 

Do  your  son  and  daughter  learn  fast  ? 

No,  sir,  they  learn  slowly. 


EXPLANATION. 

19.  The  teeminatiok  of  the  Jirst  person  in  the  present  in- 
dicative is  always  o  in  all  the  verbs  of  the  Spanish  language, 
to  whatever  conjugation  they  may  belong,  except  six  irregular 
^erbs,  as  we  shall  see  in  future ;  so  that  the  only  difference  be- 
tween the  termination  of  the  second  and  first  conjugations  is 
the  changing  the  a  into  e  in  the  second  and  third  persons 
singular,  and  in  all  the  plural. 

20.  Muy  is  generally  translated  by  veri/  or  very  micch ;  as 
muy  Men,  very  well ;  muy  hueno,  very  good,  &c. ;  but  it  can 


LESSON     VI.  17 

never  qualify  a  verb  nor  stand  alone  in  discourse ;  as,  Does 
he  speak  very  well  ?  Yes,  very.  ^  Hahla  el  niuy  Men  ?  Si, 
mucho. 

21.  Many  masculine  nouns  ending  in  o,  change  this  letter 
into  a  for  the  feminine ;  as. 


Hermano. 

Brother. 

Hermana. 

Sister. 

Hijo. 

Son. 

Hija. 

Daughter. 

Muchacho. 

Boy. 

Muchacha. 

Girl. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Aprende  V.  Men  elfrances?     No,  sefior,  aprendo  muy  mal  cl 
frances. 

2.  I  Aprenden  ellas  aprisa  ?    No,  sefior,  aprenden  despacio. 

3.  I  Aprende  mucho  el  muchacho  holgazan  ?    No,  sefior,  aprende  muy 
poco, 

4.  ^  Aprendeis  vosotros  aprisa?     Si,  sefior,  aprisa  y  bien. 

5.  i  Que  vende  el  hermano  de  su  padre  de  V.  ?    Vende  algodon. 

6.  I  Venden  ellas  papel  ?    No,  sefior,  venden  plumas  y  lacre. 

7.  I  Que  vende  Margarita  ?     Yende  una  gaUina. 

8.  I  Vende  lacre  el  comerciante  ?    No,  sefior,  vende  papel. 

9.  I  Necesita  V.  el  pafiuelo  de  su  hermana  ?    No,  sefior,  necesito  el 
pafiuelo  de  su  hija  de  V. 

10.  ^Busca  su  mama  de  V.  cl  pafiuelo  de  seda?     No,  sefior,  busca  cl 
pafiuelo  do  algodon. 

11.  ^Que  necesita  su  hija  de  Y.  ?  Necesita  hablar  al  hermano  de  Y. 

12.  I  Necesita  la  muchacha  comprar  papel  ?    No,  sefiora,  necesita  com- 
prar  un  cuaderno, 

13.  I  Habla  Y.  del  Frances  ?    No,  sefiorita,  hablo  del  Aleman. 

14.  i  Que  compra  su  padre  de  Y.  ?     Corapra  cl  cabaUo  del  hijo  del 
abogado. 

15.  I  Qu6  busca  Y.  ?    Busco  un  libro  y  una  pluma. 

16.  I  Que  busca  la  muchacha?    Busca  el  jabon  de  la  hermana  de  Y. 

17.  ^Aprende  mucho  cl  muchacho  estudioso?      Si,  seilor,   aprendo 
mucho. 

18.  J  Aprende  Y.  su  leccion  de  frances?    No,  sefior,  aprendo  mi  Ice-, 
cion  de  aleman. 

19.  ^  Habla  bien  Don  Manuel  el  espafiol?    SI,  sefior,  habla  muy  bien 
el  espafiol. 

20.  gEstudia  Y.  gramutica  inglesa?      No,   sefior,  estudio  gramatica 
francesa. 

21.  I  Compra  Y.  uu  tintcro  y  papel  ?    No  compro  sino  un  tintero. 


18  LESSON     VI. 

22.  I  Busca  V.  a  mi  padre  ?    Si,  senorita,  busco  a  su  padre  de  V. 

23.  I  Necesita  \ .  comprar  un  tintcro  ?    No,  sefiora,  necesito  hablar  d 
mi  hermana. 

24.  I  Necesitamos  nosotraa  aprender  espafiol  ?    Si,  seiior,  necesitamos 
mucho  aprender  espafloL 

EXERCISR 

1.  Does  yom*  sister  learn  English  ?     Yes,  sir,  she  learns  English. 

2.  What  does  your  brother  learn  ?     My  brother  learns  Spanish. 

3.  Do  you  learn  quickly?     No,  sir,  we  learn  very  slowly. 

4.  Does  the  studious  boy  learn  well  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  learns  very  well. 

5.  "What  does  your  brother  sell  ?     He  sells  cotton  and  silk. 

6.  Do  you  sell  paper  ?     Xo,  sii",  I  sell  sealing  wax  and  ink. 

7.  Do  they  {/em.)  need  a  French  book  ?     No,  sir,  they  need  a  copy- 
book, a  pen,  and  ink. 

8.  Do  you  need  the  English  grammar  ?    No,  sir,  I  need  the  Spanish 
grammar. 

9.  Do  yon  want  to  speak  to  my  father  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  want  to  speak  to 
your  father, 

10.  Do  you  want  to  speak  to  my  sister's  son  ?     No,  sir,  I  want  to 
speak  to  the  Frenchman. 

11.  Does  he  want  to  buy  a  horse  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  wants  to  buy  a  horse. 

12.  Do  you  need  my  book?    No,  madam,  I  need  your  wooden  ink- 
stand. 

13.  Do  you  look  for  the  merchant  ?    No,  sir,  I  look  for  your  father. 

14.  Do  they  look  for  papa?    No,  sir,  they  look  for  the  lawyer. 

15.  Do  you  buy  a  book  ?    No,  sir,  we  buy  a  copy-book  and  paper. 

16.  Do  they  study  English  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  study  English. 

17.  Do  you  study  German,  sir  ?     No,  I  study  Spanish,  madam. 

18.  Do  you  speak  English  well?    No,  sir,  I  speak  English  badly. 

19.  Does  your  sister  speak  French  very  well?    No,  sir,  she  speaks 
very  little  French. 

20.  "What  does  your  father  speak  ?    He  speaks  but  (only)  English. 

21.  Does  he  not  speak  German  ?    No,  sir,  he  does  not  speak  German. 
■22.  Does  your  daughter  speak  to  your  sister  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  speaks  to 

my  sister. 

23.  Do  you  learn  very  quickly  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  learn  very  quickly. 

24.  Do  you  sell  your  book  ?    No,  sir,  I  sell  my  paper. 


LESSON     VII. 


10 


LESSON    VII. 


Ze-er. 
Le-o. 
Le-cs. 
Le-e. 

Le-emos. 

Le-eis. 

Le-en. 

Comer. 
Beber. 

MASCtTLINE  ADJECTIVES. 

Bueno.  Good. 

Hermoso.  Handsome. 

Feo.  Ugly. 

Pequeflo.  Little  or  small. 

Grande  (in.  &/.)•     Large. 

Esiiafiol.  Spanish,  also  Spaniard. 

Americano.  American. 


Pan. 

Pescado. 

Queso. 

Vino. 

Billete. 


Bread. 

Fisb. 

Cheese. 

Wine. 

Billet  or  note. 


To  read. 
I  read. 

Thou  readest. 
He  reads. 

We  read. 
You  read. 
They  read. 

To  eat,  to  dine. 
To  drink. 

FEMININE   ADJECTIVES. 


Buena. 
Hermosa. 
Fea. 
Pequena. 


Good. 

Handsome. 

Ugly. 

Little  or  small. 


Espailola.        Spanish. 
Americana.     American. 


Came. 

Leche. 

Agua. 

Oervcza. 

Carta. 


Meat. 

Milk. 

Water. 

Beer. 

Letter. 


COMPOSITIOX. 


•(,  Lee  V.  un  billete  ? 

No,  sefior,  leo  una  carta. 

(,  Que  come  el  Espafiol  ? 

Come  bucn  pescado,  pero  come  mala 

came. 
(,  Bcben  Vds.  vino  bueno  ? 
Bebemos  buen  vino  y  bucna  ccrvcza. 
6  Que  compra  el  Americano  ? 
Compra  un  caballo  pequeSo. 
(,  Habla  V.  al  gran  hombre  ? 
No,  senor,  hablo  al  hombre  grande. 
6  Que  vende  la  Francesa  ? 
Vende  hermosa  scda. 


Do  you  read  a  note  ? 
No,  sir,  I  read  a  letter. 
What  does  the  Spaniard  eat  ? 
He  eats  good  fish,  but  bad  meat. 

Do  you  drink  good  wine  ? 

We  drink  good  wine  and  gciod  beer. 

What  does  the  American  buy  ? 

He  buys  a  small  horse. 

Do  you  speak  to  the  great  man  ? 

No,  sir,  I  speak  to  the  large  man. 

What  does  the  French  woman  sell  ? 

She  sells  handsome  silk. 


20  LESSONVII. 


EXPLANATIOX. 


22.  AujECTiTES  terminating  in  o,  a«,  or  on,  fonn  their 
feminine  termination  in  a.  '  Those  terminating  otherwise  arc 
common  to  both  genders ;  as, 


El  muchacho  holgazan. 
La  muchacha  holgazana. 
El  hombre  comilon. 
La  mujer  comilona. 
El  hombre  feliz. 
La  mujer  feliz. 
La  galllna  buena. 


The  idle  boy. 

The  idle  girl. 

The  gluttonous  mau. 

The  gluttonous  woman. 

The  happy  man. 

The  happy  woman. 

The  good  hen. 


Adjectives  signifying  nationality,  and  ending  in   a  conso- 
nant, take  an  a  to  form  their  feminine  terminations ;  as, 


Espauol. 
EspaSola. 
Libro  ingles. 
Gramatica  ingldsa. 


Spaniard. 
Spanish. 
English  book. 
English  grammar. 


Those  ending  in  o  change  this  letter  into  a ;  as, 
Americano.  I  American. 

Americana.  |  American. 

Adjectives  are  generally  placed  after  their  nouns;  but  In 
poetry,  or  in  an  elevated  style,  and  even  in  conversation,  we 
place  many  before  the  noun.  Reading  and  practice  "will  form 
the  ear  of  the  scholar  so  as  to  use  them  projierly. 

Adjectives  used  metaphorically,  or  in  a  signification  differ- 
ent from  their  proper  one,  are  ahvays  placed  before  ;  as, 

Un  gran  caballo.  |  A  great  horse. 

Some  adjectives  lose  their  last  letter,  or  syllable,  when  pre- 
fixed to  the  sinirular  masculine  noun  ;  as. 


Mai  muchacho. 
Buen  libro. 
Gran  caballo. 


Bad  boy. 
Good  book. 
Great  horse,  kc. 


CONVERSATIOX  AXD  YERSIOX. 


1.  ^Lee  Y.  un  buen  libro?     Si,  seiior,  leo  un  libro  bueno. 

2.  ^Leemos  nosotros  bien  el  ingles  ?    No,  seiior,  Icemos  mal  el  ingleo, 
pero  leemos  bien  el  espafiol. 

3.  I  Bebe  V.  %ino  ?    No,  scfior,  yo  btbo  agua. 


LESSOK     VII.  '         21 

4.  J  Qu6  bebea  ellos  ?    Beben  cerveza. 

5.  ^  Comeis  vosotros  queso  y  pau  ?    No,  seQor,  comemos  pescado. 
G.  I  Qu6  coinen  los  Ingleses  ?     Los  Ingleses  comen  buena  carne. 

7.  ^  Que  bebe  el  Espaflol  ?    Bebe  bueu  vino  y  cerveza  mala. 

8.  i  Qu6  lee  la  Americana  ?    Lee  im  libro  de  mi  hermana. 

9.  2  Qu6  estudia  el  liijo  pequeQo  de  V.  ?    Estudia  gramatica. 

10.  ^  Que  necesita  la  muchacha  bermosa  ?   Necesita  uu  pequeDo  pafluelo 
de  seda. 

11.  J  Necesita  V.  un  cabaUo  grande?    No,  sefior,  yo  no  necesito  un 
caballo  grande,  sine  un  gran  caballo. 

12.  I  Qu6  estudia  la  EspaQola  ?    Estudia  ingMs. 

13.  I  Estudia  V.  la  gramatica  francesa?    No,  sefior,  estudio  la  gramd- 
tica  inglesa. 

14.  I  Come  pan  la  Inglesa  ?    Si,  seuor,  come  pan  y  carne. 

15.  I  Qu6  beben  Vds.  ?     Bebemos  leche. 

IG.  I  Lee  V.  un  libro  ingles  ?     No,  sefior,  leo  un  libro  franccs. 

17.  J  Que  lee  la  Americana?    Lee  su  leccion. 

18.  ^  Qu6  vende  la  Inglesa  ?    Yende  un  pafluelo. 

19.  jCompra  V.  algodon  al  comcrciante  americano?     Si,  seflor,  corn- 
pro  algodon  al  comerciante  americano. 

20.  I  Necesita  la  Francesa  un  pafluelo  grande  ?    No,  seflor,  necesita  un 
pafluelo  bermoso. 

21.  I  Qu6  busca  el  mucbacbo  ?     Busca  a  su  hermana. 

22.  I  Qu6  compra  V.  ?     Compro  un  pafluelo  feo,  pero  bueno. 

23.  I  Necesita  V.  seda  ?    No,  sefior,  necesito  algodon. 

24.  ^  Qu6  lee  V.  ?    Leo  el  libro  de  mi  padre. 

25.  I  Que  comeis  vosotros  ?     Comemos  pan  y  pescado. 
2G.  I  Que  bebe  el  Aleman  ?     Bebe  vino  y  cerveza. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "Wbat  do  you  read  ?    I  read  a  great  book. 

2.  Do  you  read  English  well?     Yes,  sir,  I  read  English  very  well. 

3.  Does  the  German  drink  wine?     No,  sir,  he  drinks  beer. 

4.  "What  do  they  (fern.)  drink  ?    They  drink  water. 

5.  Do  you  eat  meat  ?     No,  sir,  I  eat  fish. 

G.  What  does  the  Englishman  eat  ?     lie  eats  bread  and  meat. 

7.  "What  does  your  daughter  buy?    She  buys  a  silk  handkerchief 
from  the  American  woman. 

8.  Does  the  studious  boy  buy  a  book  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  buys  a  French 
grammar. 

9.  Does  the  handsome  American  woman  buy  a  large  book  ?    No,  sir, 
she  buys  a  little  book. 


22 


LESSON     VIII, 


10.  Docs  your  mamma  want  a  large  handkerchief?    No,  sir,  she  -wants 
a  handsome  handkercliief. 

11.  Do  you  need  your  book  ?     Is  o,  sir,  I  do  not  need  my  hook. 

12.  Do  they  need  a  Spanish  grammar  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  need  a  Spanish 
grammar. 

13.  Does  the  woman  sell  bread  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  sells  bread  and  fish. 

14.  "What  do  you  read  ?    I  read  my  letter. 

15.  What  does  your  brother  read  ?    He  reads  a  note. 

16.  Does  the  girl  sell  soap  ?    No,  sir,  she  sells  milk. 

17.  Does  the  lazy  boy  learn  well  ?    No,  sir,  he  learns  badly. 

18.  Do  you  learn  much  ?    No,  sir,  I  learn  little. 

19.  Do  you  read  the  book  ?    No,  sir,  I  read  the  letter. 

20.  Do  you  buy  cheese  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  buy  cheese. 

21.  Do  they  buy  bread  ?     No,  sir,  they  buy  meat  and  beer. 

22.  Do  you  need  a  handkerchief?    No,  sir,  I  need  soap. 

23.  Do  you  read  your  father's  letter?   No,  sir,  I  read  my  brother's  letter. 

24.  Does  your  father  buy  an  English  grammar  ?     No,  sir,  he  buys  a 
French  book. 

25.  Does  your  brother  read  my  note  ?  No,  sir,  he  reads  my  sister's  letter. 


LESSON    VIII. 


TmUD   COXJUGATIO^'. 

Esc}'ib-\r. 

To  write. 

Escrib-o. 

I  write. 

Escrib-es. 

Thou  writest. 

Escrib-e. 

He  writes. 

Escrib-imos. 

"We  write. 

Escrib-is. 

You  write. 

Escrib-en. 

They  -write. 

Eecibir. 

1          To  receive. 

En. 

In,  into,  or  at. 

Ni. 

No,  neither,  nor. 

El  (mass.  sing.). 

La  {fern.  sing.). 

Lo  (7ieuter). 

The. 

Los  (masc.  plural). 

Las  {fern,  plura 

T). 

LESSON     VIII. 

ADJECTIVES. 

Mucho. 

Much. 

Poco. 

Little. 

Muclios. 

Many. 

Pocos. 

Few. 

SUBSTAXTIVES. 

Periodico. 

Newspaper. 

Leccion. 

Lesson. 

Periodicos. 

Newspapers. 

Lecciones. 

Lessons 

Ejercicio. 

Exercise. 

Ley. 

Law. 

Ejercicios. 

Exercises. 

Leyes. 

Laws. 

Zapatero. 

Shoemaker, 

Plata. 

SUver. 

Sombrerero. 

Hatter. 

Semana. 

Week. 

r 

COMPO 

Semaiias. 
3ITI0X. 

Weeks. 

23 


i  Escribe  V.  las  Icccloacs  6  los  ejerci- 
cios ? 

No  escribo  ni  las  lecciones  ni  los  ejerci- 
cios. 

I  Escrlben  las  sciioritas  muclios  billetes  ? 

Ellas  cscribcn  rauchos. 

I  Recibo  cl  comerciante  plata  u  oro  ? 

El  rccibe  oro  y  plata. 

^  Escribo  V.  la  carta  en  ingles  ? 

Si,  smor,  escribo  la  carta  en  ingles. 


Do  you  write  the  lessons  or  the  exer- 
cises ? 

I  write  neither  the  lessons  nor  the  ex- 
ercises. 

Do  the  young  ladies  write  many  notes  ? 

They  write  many. 

Does  the  merchant  receive  silver  or 
gold? 

He  receives  gold  and  silver. 

Do  you  write  the  letter  in  English  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  write  the  letter  in  English. 


EXPLANATIOX. 

23.  The  endings  of  the  third  conjugation  and  those  of  the 
second  are  the  same,  except  in  the  first  and  second  pe^-sons  of 
the  pkiral ;  in  v»'hich  the  e  of  the  second  conjugation  is  changed 
into  i  in  the  third,  as  the  learner  must  have  observed. 

24.  The  conjunction  6  is  changed  into  He  when  the  fol- 
lowing word  begins  with  6  or  ho  ;  as, 

Plata  u  oro.  |  Silver  or  gold. 

25.  Ni. — Neither  and  nor  arc  rendered  by  ni',  as, 

El  no  necesita  ni  la  came  ni  cl  pcscado.  |  He  wants  neither  the  meat  nor  the  fish. 

26.  The  plural  of  nouns  is  formed  by  adding  an  s  to 
those  terminating  in  a  vowel  not  accented ;  as, 

Ejercicio.  Exercise.  |  Ejercicios,  Exercises. 


24 


LESSOIf     VIII. 


And  adding  es — 

1st.  To  those  ending  in  an  accented  vowel;  as, 


Gilliflowers. 


Lessons. 


Laws. 


Aleli.  Gilliflower.  |  Alelies. 

2d.  To  those  ending  in  a  consonant ;  as, 
Leccion.  Lesson.  |  Lecciones. 

3d.  To  those  ending  in  y ;  as, 

Ley.  Law.  |  Leyes. 

27.  An"  adjective  agrees  with  its  noun  in  gender,  number 
and  case,  and  forms  the  plural  according  to  the  rules  laid  down 
for  nouns ;  as, 

Buen  hombrc. 
Buenos  hombres. 
Buena  mujer. 
Buenas  mujercs. 

28.  The  article  must  agree  also  with  the  noun  to  wliich  it 
refers,  in  number,  gender  and  case ;  as, 

The  book. 
The  books. 
The  pen. 
The  pens. 
What  is  good. 


Good  man. 
Good  men. 
Good  woman. 
Good  women. 


El  libro. 
Los  libros. 
La  pluma. 
Las  plumas. 
Lo  bueno. 


Feminine  nouns  beginning  with  a  accented,  take  the  mascu- 
line article  el  in  the  singular  number,  instead  of  the  feminine 
la^  in  order  to  avoid  the  disagreeable  meeting  of  two  a's ;  as. 


El  alma. 
El  agua. 
El  alba. 
El  hambre. 


The  soul. 
The  water. 
The  dawn  of  day. 
The  hunger,  &c. 


29.  The  neuter  article  lo  liaS  no  plural  number,  and  is 
placed  only  before  adjectives  used  as  substantives,  in  an  abso- 
lute indeterminate  case ;  as. 


Lo  bueno. 
Lo  malo. 


What  is  good. 
What  is  bad. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Escribe  Y.  a  su  padre?    No,  seiior,  escribo  A  mi  hermano. 

2.  I  Que  escribe  V.  ?    Escribo  una  carta  a  la  muchaclia. 


LESSONVIII.  25 

3.  ^Escribe  V.  muehos  billetos?    No,  sciior,  escribo  muy  pocos. 

4.  ^Escribcn  ellos  bieu  los  ejercicios?    Si,  sefior,  ellos  escriben  bien 
los  ejercicios. 

5.  ^Kecibe  V.  libros  ingleses?    No,  senor,  rccibo  libros  francescs. 

6.  I  Que  "reciben  ellos  ?     Reciben  plata  y  oro. 

7.  ^Eeciben  raucbo  oro?     No,  seflor,  reciben  muy  poco. 

8.  I  Lee  V.  sus  cartas  6  sus  billetes  ?    No  leo  ni  mis  cartas,  ni  mis 
billotes ;  leo  mis  ejercicios. 

9.  I  Nece§ita  V.  mucbos  pafluelos  ?     No,  sefior,  necesito  muy  pocos. 

10.  ^Estudia  V.  mucbas  lecciones?    No,  seflor,  cstudio  pocas. 

11.  ^  Busca  V.  una  pluma?    No,  sefior,  busco  una  gramatica. 

12.  ^Que  busca  su  liermana  de  V.  ?    Busca  los  ejercicios  en  ingles. 

13.  ^Estudia  V.  frances  6  aleman?    No  estudio  ni  francos,  ni  ale-man  ; 
estudio  espaflol. 

14.  ^Necesita  V.  mi  ejercicio?     Si,  sefior,  necesito  su  ejercicio  ingles. 

15.  ^Escribe  V.  al  comerciante  6  al  abogado?    No  escribo  al  comer- 
ciante,  ni  al  abogado ;  escribo  a  su  padre  de  V. 

16.  ^Escriben  ellas  los  ejercicios  de  ingles?    No,  sefior,  escriben  Ijj 
ejercicios  de  espafiol. 

17.  ^Recibe  V.  raucbas  cartas  de  su  padre?    No,  sefior,  recibo  muy 
pocas. 

18.  ^Recibe  el  comerciante  mucbo  algodon  ?    Si,  sefior,  recibe  mucho. 

19.  jCompra  V.  mucbos  pafiuelos?     Si,  sefior,  compro  mucbos. 

20.  I  Compra  su  padre  de  V.  mucbos  caballos  ?    No,  sefior,  compra 
pocos. 

21.  ^  Compra  V.  la  gi'amatica  del  mucbacbo?    No,  sefior,  compro  el 
ouaderno  de  la  muchacha. 

22.  I  Ilabla  mucho  el  Frances?    No,  sefior,  babla  poco. 

23.  ^Escribe  V.  bien  el  ingles?     No,  sefior,  escribo  mal.el  ingles,  pero 
escribo  bien  cl  espafiol. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Does  your  brother  write  English  well?     Tes,  sir,  be  writes  Eng- 
lish well. 

2.  Do  yon  write  to  my  brotber  ?    No,  sir,  I  write  to  my  father. 

3.  Do  you  write  in  English  or  in  Spanish  ?     I  T\Tite  in  English. 

4.  Do  they  (/cm.)  write  the  lessons  or  the  exercises  ?     They  write 
neitlier  the  lessons  nor  the  exercises ;  they  write  letters. 

5.  Do  3'ou  receive  many  notes  ?    No,  sir,  I  receive  but  few. 
G.  Do  they  receive  gold  ?     No,  sir,  they  receive  silver. 

7.  Do  you  receive  many  letters  from  yoiu*  father  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  receive 
many. 


26 


LESSON     IX, 


8.  Do  you  eat  fish  ?    No,  sir,  I  eat  bread  and  cheese. 

9.  Do  the  Germans  drink  water?     No,  sir,  they  drink  beer. 

10.  Do  you  read  your  brother's  letter?     No,  sir,  I  read  my  sister's 
letter. 

11.  Does  the  merchant  sell  French  paper?     No,  sir,  he  sells  English 
paper. 

12.  Does  your  brother  leai'n  German  and  English?    No,  sir,  he  learns 
neither  German  nor  English  ;  he  learns  Spanish. 

13.  Do  you  need  silver  or  gold  ?    I  need  neither  gold  nor  silver. 

14.  Do  you  look  for  my  father?     No,  madam,  I  look  for  the  lawyer. 

15.  Do  you  buy  a  grammar  from  the  merchant?    Yes,  sir,  I  buy  a 
grammar  from  the  merchant. 

16.  Do  they  study  their  lessons  well?    Yes,  sir,  they  study  their  les- 
sons well. 

17.  Do  you  speak  much  to  your  sister?     Yes,  madam,  I  speak  much 
to  my  sister. 

18.  Do  you  speak  Spanish  or  English  ?  .  I  speak  English. 

19.  Do  you  receive  French  books  ?     No,  sir,  I  receive  English  books. 

20.  Does  the  merchant  receive  silver  or  gold  ?     He  receives  gold  and 
alver. 

21.  Do  you  write  your  exercises?    No,  sir,  I  write  my  letters. 

22.  Do  you  Avrite  a  letter  to  your  father?    No,  sir,  I  write  to  my 
Bister. 


Viv-ir. 
Viv-o. 

Yiv-es. 
Viv-e. 


LESSON    IX. 


To  hve. 
I  live. 
Thou  livest. 
He  lives. 


Viv-imos. 

Viv-is. 

Viv-en. 

Residir. 

Mis  (j)luraT). 

Sus  {plural). 

Cuando. 

Donde  {without  motion). 

.Adonde  {icith  motion). 


"We  live. 
You  live. 
They  live. 

To  reside. 

My. 

Your. 

When. 

"Where. 


LESSOR     IX.                                                      27 

Campo,  pais. 

Country. 

Flor.                   Flower. 

Dia. 

Day. 

Flores.                 Flowers. 

Dias. 

Days. 

Casa.                    House,  or  home 

Lapiz. 

Pencil. 

Nueva  York.       New  York. 

Lapices. 

Pencils. 

Francia,               France. 

Aleli. 

Gilliflower. 

Espafia.                Spain. 

Alelies. 

Gilliflowers. 

Inglaterra,           England. 

Cortapluinas. 

Penknife. 

Alemania.            Germany. 

Hotel,  fonda. 

Hotel. 

Tienda.                Store. 
Ciudad.                City. 

Dias  de  la  scmana* 

Days  of  the  week. 

Lunes. 

Monday. 

Martes. 

Tuesday. 

iliercoles. 

"Wednesday. 

Jueves. 

Thursday, 

Yiernes. 

Friday. 

Sabado. 

Saturday. 

Subados. 

Saturdays. 

Domingo. 

Sunday. 

Domingos. 

COMPOJ 

Sundays. 
3ITI0N. 

I  Yive  V.  en  el  campo  6  en  la  ciudad  ? 
Vivo  en  la  ciudad. 

5  En  donde  rcsiden  sus  papas  de  Y.  ? 
Papa  reside  en  Francia,  y  mama,  en 

Xueva  York. 

6  Cuando  come  Y.  en  casa  dc  sus  her- 

manos  de  Y.  ? 
Los  domingos,  martes  y  jueves  como  en 

casa  de  mis  hermanos. 
6  Y  en  donde  come  Y.  los  lunes,  mier- 

coles,  viemes  y  sabados  ? 
Como  en  casa. 


Do  you  live  in  the  country  or  in  the  city  ? 
I  live  in  the  city. 
Where  do  your  parents  reside  ? 
Father  resides  in  France,  and  mother  in 

Xew  York. 
When  do  you  dine  at  your  brothers'  ? 

On  Sundays,  Tuesdays  and  Thursdays 

I  dine  at  my  brothers'. 
And  where  do  you  dine  on  Mondays, 

"Wednesdays,  Fridays  and  Saturdays  ? 
I  dine  at  home. 


EXPLANATION. 
30.  Pc(p«,  papa ;  ??2ama,  mamma ; />e^,  foot ;  are  exceptions 
to  the  general  rule,  and  form  the  plural  by  the  addition  of  s ; 

as,  papas,  pa^ias ;  mamas,  mammas  ;  pies,  feet. 

*  All  of  the  masculine  gender. 


28  LESSON.  IX. 

31.  JVbtms  tchich  are  not  monosyllahles,  and  end  in  s,  the 
last  syllable  not  being  accented,  do  not  change  their  termina- 
tion in  the  plural  number ;  as,  L-dnes^  Monday  or  Mondays ; 
Mdrtes,  Tuesday  or  Tuesdays,  etc.  Words  ending  in  z  take  es, 
and  change  the  z  into  c  in  the  plural ;  as,  Idjnz,  Idpices^  pencil, 
pencils ;  juez,jueces^  judge,  judges. 

32.  Words  which  are  co77i2)Owids  of  two  nouns  differ  so  va- 
riously that  it  is  not  possible  to  give  rules  for  the  formation  of 
their  plurals.;  but  compounds  of  a  verb  and  a  noun  in  the  singu- 
lar number  form  the  plural  in  the  same  manner  as  simple  nouns ; 
and  compound  words  of  a  verb  and  a  noun  in  the  plural  will  be 
used  the  same  in  both  numbers ;  as,  cortaplumas^  penknife,  or 
penknives. 

3  3.  The  days  of  the  week  always  take  the  article  when  they 
are  employed  to  mark,  or  express  time  ;  as, 
Estudio  espauol  el  lunes  y  el  riemes.      |  I  study  Spanish  on  Monday  and  Friday. 

34.  Donde^  where  (without  motion) ;  adonde,  where  (with 
motion)  ;  cuando^  when.  These  adverbs  are  placed  always  be- 
fore the  verb ;  as, 

I  Donde  reside  V.  ?  I  Where  do  you  reside  ? 

•(,  Cuando  escribe  V.  ?  |  When  do  you  write  ? 

35.  Donde,  adonde,  and  cuando,  when  used  interrogatively 
requii-e  an  accent ;  thus,  ^  Donde  vive  ?  Where  does  he  live  ? 
I  Cuando  lee  Y.  f    When  do  you  read  ? 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  En  d6n(le  vive  V.  ?    Vivo  en  !N"ucva  York. 

2.  I  D6ncle  viven  sus  padres  de  V.  ?  Mi  padre  vive  en  la  ciudad  y  ini 
madre  en  el  campo. 

3.  I  D6Dde  viven  sus  hermanos  ?    Viven  en  Francia. 

4.  ^  Donde  come  V.  los  sabados  y  los  domingos?  Como  en  el  hotel 
de  los  Franceses. 

6.  ^Y  donde  come  V.  los  lunes  y  los  mdrtes?  Como  en  cl  hotel 
Americano. 

G.  I  Donde  reside  V.  ?    Eesido  en  el  campo. 

7.  ^  Y  d6nde  reside  su  mama  de  V.  ?    Reside  en  los  Estados  TJnidos. 

8.  I  Cuando  estudia  V.  sus  lecciones  de  francos  ?  Los  midrColos  y  los 
jueves. 


LESSON     IX.  29 

9.  ^  Y  que  estudia  Y.  los  viernes  ?    Los  viemes  estudio  una  leccion 
do  frances. 

10.  ^Cuando  lee  V.  los  periodicos?     To  leo  los  periodicos  los  do- 
mingos. 

11.  gOompran  alelies  sus  hermanas?    Si,  seilor,  ellas  compran  alelies. 

12.  ^Estudia  V.  las  leyes  de  Inglaterra?    No,  sefior,  estudio  las  de 
losEstados  Unidos  {United  States). 

13.  ^Aprende  bien  la  muchacha  el  ingles?     Si,  seilor,  aprende  bien 
el  ingl6s. 

14.  I  Qu6  beben  los  Espafloles  y  los  Alemanes?    Los  Espafioles  bebea 
buen  vino,  y  los  Alemanes  buena  cerveza. 

15.  I  D6nde  compra  el  comerciante  el  algodon?    Compra  el  algodon  en 
los  Estados  Unidos. 

16.  J  Y  d6nde  vende  el  oro  y  la  plata?    En  Inglaterra. 

17.  gCaando  necesita  su  hermano  de  V.  la' gramdtica?    Mi  liermano 
neccsita  sn  gramdtica  el  lunes. 

18.  J  En  qu6  hotel  come  V.?     Como  en  el  hotel  de  Inglaterra. 

19.  ^Que  compra  el  comerciante,  plata  u  oro?     El  comerciante  no 
compra  ni  oro  ni  plata,  compra  seda. 

20.  I  Qu6  estudia  V.  ?    Estudio  los  dias  de  la  semana  en  ingl6s. 

21.  ^Escribe  V.  d  Francia?    No,  seuor,  escribo  a  Inglaterra. 

22.  gQu6  escribe  V.?    Escribo  los  ejercicios  de  la  semana  en  ingles. 

23.  I  Donde  reside  su  hermana  de  V.  ?    Reside  en  el  campo. 

24.  I  En  qu6  pais  vive  su  papa  ?    Vive  en  iVl eraania. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  live  in  the  country?    No,  su-,  I  live  in  town. 

2.  Where  does  your  sister  live  ?     She  lives  in  New  York. 

3.  "Where  do  your  parents  {padres)  live  ?     They  live  in  France. 

4.  Where  does  your  brother  reside  ?    He  resides  in  England, 

5.  Do  you  not  reside  in  the  United  States  ?    No,  sir,  in  Spain. 

6.  In  which  country  does  your  mother  live  ?    She  lives  in  the  United 
States. 

7.  Do  you  write  to  your  father  in  Spanish  or  in  English  ?     I  write 
in  English. 

8.  Where  does  the  merchant  buy  the  cotton  ?    Ho  buys  the  cotton  in 
England. 

9.  Which  do  you  sell,  silver  or  gold  ?     I  sell  gold. 

10.  Where  do  you  dine  on  Sundays  and  Mondays  ?     I  dine  in  the 
French  hotel. 

11.  And  where  on  Wednesdays,  Fridays  and  Saturdays?      In  the 
German  hotel. 


30 


LESSO]!f     X, 


12.  "When  do  tliey  study  their  lesson?    On  (los)  Tuesdays. 

13.  Does  the  lawyer  study  the  laws  of  England?     Jso,  sir,  he  studies 
the  laws  of  the  United  States. 

14.  Where  does  your  mother  reside  ?     She  resides  in  Germany. 

15.  When  do  you  need  your  grammar  ?     On  Friday. 

16.  When  do  your  sons  study  the  French  lessons?     Tliey  study  the 
French  lessons  on  Mondays  and  Saturdays. 

17.  Where  does  the  merchant  buy  the  good  penknives?     In  England. 

18.  What  day  do  you  (/em.)  receive  the  newspapers?     We  receive  the 
newspapers  on  Sundays. 

19.  Does  your  sister  buy  gilliflowers?    Yes,  sir,  she  buys  gilliflowers. 

20.  Where  do  you  biiy  your  pencils  ?    In  the  French  store. 

21.  What  do  you  study  ?    I  study  the  days  of  the  week  in  Spanish. 

22.  Where  do  your  parents  reside  ?    My  mother  resides  in  Spain,  and 
my  father  in  Germany.     • 

23.  Where  does  your  sister  reside  ?    She  resides  in  the  country. 

24.  Do  you  need  my  books  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  need  your  books. 


LESSON     X. 


Tener. 

Tengo. 
Tienes. 
Tiene. 

Tenemos. 

Teneis. 

Tienen. 


To  have. 

I  have. 
Thou  hast. 
He  has. 

We  have. 
You  have. 
They  have. 


OBJECTIVE   CASE. 


Le,  los  (mase.  pi.). 
La,  las  {fern.  pi.). 
Lo  {neuter). 


It,  him,  them. 
It,  her,  them. 
It,  (sometimes)  so. 


I  Qnien,  quienes  {pi.)  ? 

^  Cual,  cudles  {pi.)  ? 

|Qu6? 

De  quien,  de  quienes  {pi.)  ? 

Con. 


EfTEEEOGATIVE   PEOXOUXS. 

Who? 


Which  one,  which  ones? 
What,  or  which? 
Whose? 
With. 


LESSON     X. 

Zapato. 

Shoo. 

Botas. 

Boots. 

Chaleco. 

Vest, 

Casaca. 

Coat. 

Baston. 

Cane. 

Corbata. 

Cravat. 

Sombrero. 

Hat. 

Medias. 

Stockings. 

31 


6  Qiiicn  tiene  mi  baston  ? 

Yo  lo  tengo. 

(,  Que  corbata  tiene  Y.  ? 

Tengo  la  bonita. 

(,  Tienen  ellos  mi  chaleco  ? 

No,  setior,  tienen  la  corbata  de  V. 

I  De  quien  babla  V.  ? 

Hablo  de  los  Franceses. 

6  Teneis  vosotros  casacas  ? 

Si,  serior,  las  tenemos. 

^  Quien  tiene  sombreros  ? 

Los  tiene  el  comerciante. 

i  Necesita  V.  a  mi  padre  ? 

Sf,  seiior,  le  necesito. 

I  Tiene  Y.  mi  casaca  ? 

Si,  seiior,  la  tengo. 

6  Que  botas  tiene  V.  ? 

i  Que  tiene  V.  ? 


COMPOSITION. 

Who  has  my  cane  ? 

I  have  it. 

Which  cravat  have  you  ? 

I  have  the  pretty  one. 

Have  they  my  waistcoat  ? 

No,  sir,  they  have  your  cravat. 

Of  whom  do  you  speak  ? 

I  speak  of  the  Frenchmen. 

Have  you  coats  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  have  (them). 

Who  has  hats  ? 

The  merchant  has  (them). 

Do  you  need  my  father  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  need  him. 

Have  you  my  coat  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  it. 

Which  boots  have  you  ? 

What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? 


EXPLANATION. 

36.  Irregulae  verbs  are  tliose  which  do  not  retain  in- 
tact the  radical  lettei-s  and  the  terminations  designated  for 
each  tense  and  person. 

The  verb  tener,  to  have,  is  the  first  of  the  irregular  verbs 
here  introduced ;  and,  like  all  the  auxiliary  verbs,  is  not  in- 
cluded in  the  seven  groups  in  which  the  irregular  Spanish 
verbs  are  classified,  on  account  of  their  multifarious  irregulari- 
ties. The  auxiliaries  require,  therefore,  to  be  learned  separate- 
ly, or  each  one  by  itself 

A  complete  list  of  the  irregular  conjugations  will  be  found 
at  the  end  of  the  book. 

Wlien  the  objective  case  of  the  third  person  is  the  object 
of  the  English  verb,  it  is  translated  by  le,  los,  for  the  masculine; 
la,  las,  for  the  feminine ;  and  lo  for  the  neuter ;  as. 


El  Ic  busca. 
Ella  los  compra. 
Ellos  lo  necesitan. 


He  looks  for  him. 
She  buys  them. 
They  want  iL 


32  LESSON     X. 

37.  Lo  and  Le. — It  must  be  observed,  however,  with  regard 
to  the  objective  forms  le  and  lo,  that  their  nse  is  very  doubtful 
in  Spanish,  since  many  correct  writers  employ  the  neuter  lo, 
instead  of  the  masculine  le.  Consequently,  while  custom  or 
general  use  does  not  give  the  preference  to  either,  the  learner 
may  use  them  according  to  his  own  discretion  or  taste,  in  the 
accusative  case,  masculine  gender;  as, 

Manuel  tiene  un  buen  iibro  y  lo  (le)  I  Emanuel  has  a  good  book  and  sells  it. 
veuJe.  I 

Lo  is  sometimes  employed  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  a 
whole  or  part  of  a  sentence,  and  tlien  it  is  equivalent  to  so,  or 
it.  Of  this,  however,  more  will  be  said  w-heu  treating  of  the 
regimen  of  verbs. 

38.  The  iifTEEEOGATivE  PRONOUNS  quien,  ciidl,  que,  de 
qulen,  who,  which,  what,  and  whose,  do  not  require  the  arti- 
cle ;  as. 


I  Quien  habla  ? 

i  Cual  tengo  yo  ? 

(,  Que  escribe  V.  ? 

i  De  quien  son  los  caballos  ? 


Who  speaks  ? 
Which  one  have  I  ? 
What  do  you  write  ? 
Whose  are  the  horses  ? 


39.  When,  in  a  question,  the  interrogative  pronoun  is 
governed  by  a  preposition,  that  preposition  must  also  be  re- 
peated in  the  answer ;  as, 


/  Con  quien  vivc  V.  ? 
Con  mi  amigo. 
^  Dc  quien  es  cl  eaballo  ? 
De  mi  amigo. 


With  whom  do  you  live  ? 
With  my  friend. 
Whoso  is  the  horse  ? 
Mv  friend's. 


CONVERSATIOX  AND  YERSION. 

1.  j  Que  tiene  V.  ?     Tengo  un  hermoso  baston. 

2.  I  Tiencs  tii  un  buen  sombrero  ?    Si,  sefior,  lo  (le)  tengo. 

3.  iQne  pauuclo  tiene  ella?     Tiene  el  de  secla. 

4.  I  Cual  tiene  V.  ?     Tengo  mi  pafiuelo. 

5.  ^Teneis  vosotros  buenos  chalecos?     Si,  scfior,  los  tenemos. 
G.  I  De  quien  liablau  ellos  ?     Ilablan  de  las  Americanas. 

7.  I  Tiene  V.  las  corbatas  ?     Si,  sefior,  las  tengo. 

8.  ^  Ticnen  ellos  los  herraosos  pafuielos  de  seda  ?    Si,  scilor,  los  tienen. 

9.  j  Quien  tiene  las  medias  ?    Yo  las  tengo. 

10.  ^  Tiene  V.  mi  chaleco?       Si,  sefior,  lo  (le)  tengo. 


LESSON     X.  33 

11.  gQuicn  tiene  mi  baston  ?     Su  hermano  lo  (le)  tiene. 

12.  gllabla  V.  a  su  liormana?     Si,  scfior, 

13.  ^Busca  V.  ti  su  hcrmana?     Si,  seilorita,  la  busco. 

14.  ^Estudia  V.  su  Icccion  ?     Si,  sefior,  la  estudio.    . 

15.  I  Necesita  V.  a  su  papa  ?    Si,  sellor,  le  (lo)  necesito. 

16.  ^Que  sombrero  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  el  de  V. 

17.  iQue  botas  busca  v.?    Busco  las  buenas. 

18.  I  Con  qui6n  aprende  V.  el  ingles  ?     Con  un  Americano. 

19.  I  A  quien  busca  V.  ?    Busco  al  abogado. 

20.  i  Que  compra  V.  ?     Compro  lapices  ingleses. 

21.  g  Tiene  V.  una  buena  gramatica  ?    Si,  seilor,  tengo  ima  muy  buena. 

22.  I  Tiene  V.  mucbos  libi'os  ?    No,  seflor,  tengo  pocos. 

23.  ^Tienen  elks  mucha  seda?     No,  sefior,  tienen  mujpoca. 
24.^  Dondo  reside  V.  ?     Resido  en  el  campo. 

25.  gD6nde  vive  su  abogado  de  V.  ?     Vive  en  la  ciudad. 

26.  gVive  en  Fraacia  su  liermano  de  V.?    No,  seilor,  vivo  en  Espafia. 

•      EXERCISE. 

1.  Wlio  has  tbe  stockings  ?    I  have  them. 

2.  What  has  he  ?     lie  has  my  grammar. 

3.  Have  they  my  vest  ?     Yes,  sir,  they  have  it. 

4.  Which  books  have  they  {fern.)  ?     They  have  yonrs. 

5.  Of  whom  do  you  speak  ?    I  speak  of  the  Frenchman. 

6.  Who  has  my  coat  ?     They  have  it. 

7.  Have  you  my  cravat  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  it  not. 

8.  Have  we  very  good  coats  ?    Yes,  sir,  we  have. 

9.  Who  has  the  handsome  stockings  ?     They  {fern.)  have  them. 

10.  Do  you  speak  to  the  Frenchman?     Yes,  sir,  I  speak  to  the  French- 
man. 

11.  Do  you  need  my  hat?    No,  sir,  I  have  my  hat. 

12.  Whom  do  you  look  for  ?     I  look  for  your  father. 

13.  What  do  you  buy  ?     I  buy  English  books. 

14.  Which  shoes  do  you  buy  ?     I  buy  the  handsome  shoes. 

15.  Which  hats  have  you?    I  have  the  merchant's  hats. 

1  (5.  With  whom  do  you  learn  English  ?     I  learn  with  an  American. 

17.  Have  you  good  coats?     Yes,  sir,  I  have  good  coats. 

18.  Have  they  many  grammars?     No,  sir,  they  have  very  few.  . 

19.  Where  do  you  live  ?    I  live  in  the  coimtry.  • 

20.  Does  your  father  reside  in  France  ?    No,  sir,  he  resides  in  England. 

21.  Docs  your  mother  live  in  Gemiauy?    No,  sir,  she  lives  in  the 
United  States. 

2* 


34 


LESSON     XI, 


22.  Do  you  buy  many  books  ?     No,  sir,  I  buy  very  fevr. 
2S.  Who  has  ray  handsome  boots?     I  have  them. 

24.  Which  hat  have  you  ?     I  have  yours. 

25.  What  have  y.ou  ?    I  have  my  stockings. 

26.  Of  -whom  do  you  speak?    I  speak  of  your  father. 


LESSON    XI. 

Ser. 

To  be. 

Soy. 

I  am. 

Eres. 
Es. 

Thou  art. 
He  is. 

Somos. 

We  arc. 

Sois. 

You  arc. 

Son. 

They  are 

INDEFINITE  rROXOtrSS. 


AJguien. 


Aiguno. 

Nadie. 

Ninguno. 

Algo,  alguna  cosa. 

Nada,  ninguna  cosa. 

Todo. 

Todos. 


Librero. 
Panadero. 
Carnicero. 
Sastre. 


Bookseller. 
Baker 
Butcher. 
TaUor. 


somebody,  anybody, 


Some   one, 
any  one. 
Some,  somebody,  anybody. 
No  one,  nobody. 
None,  no  one,  nobody. 
Something,  anything. 
Nothing,  not  anything. 
All,  everything. 
Every  one,  everybody. 


Libreria. 
Panaderia. 
Carniceria. 
Sastreria. 


Bookstore. 
Bakery. 
Butcher's  shop. 
Tailor's  shop. 


COMPOSITION. 


i.  Son  Vds.  carniceros  ? 

No,  senor,  somos  panaderos. 

6  Es  V.  carnicero  ? 

No,  seiior,  yo  soy  sastre. 

6  Tienc  V.  algun  pan  ? 


Are  you  butchers  ? 
No,  sir,  we  are  bakers. 
Arc  you  a  butcher  ? 
No,  sir,  I  am  a  tailor. 
Have  you  some  bread  ? 


LESSOK     XI, 


35 


No,  scuor,  no  tengo  ninguno. 

i  Tienen  Yds.  algo  ? 

No,  seiior,  no  tcnemos  nada. 

i  Quien  tienc  el  sombrero  ? 

El  Americano  lo  tiene. 

g  Donde  compra  V.  pan  ? 

En  la  panaderia. 

6  Donde  compra  V.  sus  libros  ? 

En  la  libreria. 

^Eres  tii  muy  cstudioso? 

No,  scfior,  no  lo  soy. 

i  Tienen  todos  Vds.  buenas  grama- 

ticas. 
Si,  seiior. 

g  Quien  tieno  papel  ? 
Nadic  lo  (le)  tienc. 


No,  sir,  I  have  none. 

Have  you  anytliing  ? 

No,  sir,  we  Iiave  nothing. 

Wlio  has  the  hat  ? 

The  American  has  it. 

Where  do  you  buy  bread  ? 

In  the  bakery. 

Where  do  you  buy  your  books  ? 

In  the  bookstore. 

Art  thou  very  studious  ? 

No,  sir,  I  am  not  (so). 

Have  you  all  good  grammars  ? 

Yes,  sir. 

Who  has  paper  ? 

Nobody  has  (it). 


EXPLANATION. 

40.  Alguien,  ALGUisro. — Alguien  refers  only  to  persons, 
and  always  in  the  singular  number ;  as, 

Vivo  con  alguien.  1  I  live  with  some  one. 

Escribo  •'i  alguien.  |  I  write  to  somebody. 

When  some  one,  any  one  is  followed  by  the  preposition  of, 
we  must  use  alguno  in  Spanish,  and  not  alguien  ;  as,  alguno  de 
ellos  escribe  en  el  periodico,  so7ne  one  of  them  writes  in  the 
newspapei*. 

Ang  one,  or  anybody,  not  used  interrogatively,  is  trans- 
lated by  cualquiera,  as  will  be  seen  Avhen  we  introduce  the  in- 
definite pronoun. 

Alguien  is  used  only  in  the  affirmative.  Alguno  may,  on 
the  contrary,  be  employed  either  in  affirmative  or  negative 
sentences ;  in  the  affirmative  it  ahvays  precedes  the  noun  to 
which  it  refers,  and  in  the  negative  it  invariably  comes  after 
it ;  as, 

No  estudian  Icccion  alguna.  1  They  study  no  lesson  (or  do  not  study 

I       any  lesson). 

41.  Nadie,  laisrGUNO. — Ninguno  relates  to  persons  and 
things,  and  is  used  in  the  negative  in  the  same  manner  as  al- 
guno in  the  affirmative ;   7iadie  relates  to  persons  only,  and  is 


36  L  E  s  s  o  :^T    X  I , 

used  in  the  negative  in  tlic  same  way  as  tlie  pronoun  dl<juien 
in  tlie  affirmative.  In  a  word,  nadie  and  ninguno  are  merely 
the  negative  forms  oi  dlguien  and  alguno. 

42.  Algttxo  and  kixguxo  lose  the  o  when  they  come  im- 
mediately before  the  noun. 

43.  Algo,  and  alguxa  cosa,  are  used  in  the  affirmative ;  as, 
Como  algo,  or  al(pina  cosa.  I  I  cat  something. 

6  RecibeV.  algo,  or  alguna  cosa  ?       \  Do  you  receive  anything  ? 

Anything,  when  not  used  interrogatively,  is  translated 
cualquiera  cosa,  as  will  be  seen  in  its  proper  place. 

44.  Nada,  ih'inguna  cosa  are  used  in  the  negative  fonn, 

45.  Nada,  xun^guno,  k^adie,  the  adverb  no,  as  well  as  any 
other  words  expressing  negation,  are  placed  before  the  verb ; 
but  wheu  no  precedes  the  verb,  another  negative  may  be  placed 
after  it,  and  the  two  negatives  serve  to  strengthen  each  other, 
contrary  to  the  practice  of  the  English  language  ;  as, 


No  cstudio  nada. 
Xo  hablo  t  iiadic. 
No  recibo  ninguno 


I  study  nothing. 

I  speak  to  nobody,  or  no  one. 

I  receive  none. 


But  in  omitting  the  negative  no,  the  words  which  express 
the  negation  must  be  placed  before  thq^verb ;  as. 


Nada  estudio. 
A  nadie  hablo. 
Ninguno  recibo; 


I  study  nothing. 
I  speak  to  nobody. 
I  receive  none. 


The  two  negatives  are  always  preferable. 

46.  The  indefinite  article  a  or  an,  is  not  translated  into 
Spanish  when  accompanied  by  a  noun  which  expresses  nation 
ality,  profession,  &c. ;  as, 

6  Es  Y.  Ingles  ?  I  Are  you  an  Englishman  ? 

No,  senor,  soy  Espafiol.  |  No,  sir,  I  am  a  Spaniard.   . 

6  Es  el  sastre  ?  I  Is  he  a  tailor  ? 

No,  seSor,  es  zapatcro.  |  No,  sir,  he  is  a  shoemaker. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jEs  V.  Frances?    !N"o,  sen  or,  soy  Americano. 

2.  J  Son  Yds.  Alemanes?    No,  senor,  somos  Ingleses. 

3.  jEres  tti  buen  mncliacho?    Si  senor,  lo  soy. 

4.  I  Sois  vosotros  sastrcs  ?    No,  sefior,  somos  panaderos. 


LESSON     XI.  37 

5.  lEs  bueno  cl  libro  do  su  hermano  de  V.  ?     Si,  sciior,  lo  es. 
*      G.  I  Son  buenos  sus  zapatos  de  V.  ?     No,  sefior,  son  muy  raalos. 

7.  ^Tiene  alguno  mi  sombrero?    Si,  sefior,  alguien  lo  (Ic)  tiene. 

8.  I  Tieno  algnien  papel  ?     Ko,  sefior,  ningnno  tiene  papel. 

9.  ^  Tiene  V.  alguna  cosa  ?    No,  sefior,  no  tcngo  nada. 

10.  I  No  tieno  V.  cosa  alguna  ?     Si,  sefior,  tengo  alguna  cosa. 

11.  ^Compran  pan  todos  Vds.  ?    Si,  sefior,  todos  compramos  pan. 

12.  ^Donde  compran  Vds.  todo  su  pan?    Lo  (le)  compramos  en  la 
panaderia. 

13.  ^Son  Vds.  panaderos?    No,  sefior,  nosotros  somos  zapateros. 

14.  ^ Tiene  alguien  mi  sombrero  bueno?     Si,  sefior,  alguien  le  (lo) 
tiene. 

15.  ^  No  compra  V.  algo  ?     Si,  sefior,  compro  alguna  cosa. 

16.  ^Escribe  V.  algo?     No,  sefior,  no  escribo  nada. 

17.  ^Necesita  V.  todo  el  papel?     Si,  sefior,  lo  (le)  neccsito  todo. 

18.  ^Necesita  V.  todas  las  plumas?    Si,  sefior,  las  necesito  todas. 

19.  gEs  V.  sastre?     Si,  sefior,  yo  soy  sastre. 

20.  gDondc  tiene  V.  su  sastreria?    La  tengo  en  Nueva  York. 

21.  ^Es  su  padre  de  V.  librero?    Si,  sefior,  lo  es. 

22.  J  Vende  muclios  libros  ?     Si,  sefior,  vcnde  muchos. 

23.  ^  Donde  tiene  61  su  libreria  ?     La  tiene  en  Francia. 

24.  ^ Tiene  V.  una  panaderia?    No,  sefior,  tengo  una  carniceria. 

25.  I  Habla  V.  a  alguien  ?     No,  sefior,  no  liablo  a  nadie. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Are  you  an  Englishman?     No,  sir,  I  am  an  American. 

2.  Are  you  good  boys  ?    Yes,  sir,  we  arc  very  good  boys, 

3.  Is  Louisa  a  good  girl  ?    Yes,  sii*,  she  is  a  very  good  girl. 

4.  Art  thou  a  Frenchman  ?     No,  sir,  I  am  a  German. 

5.  Is  yours  a  good  book  ?     Yes,  sir,  mine  is  a  very  good  one. 

6.  Are  they  (Jem.)  studious  ?     Yes,  sir,  they  are  very  studious. 

7.  Have  you  anything  ?     No,  sir,  I  have  nothing. 

8.  Have  you  nothing  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  something. 

9.  Has  anybody  a  good  grammar  ?     Yes,  sir,  the  Frenchihan  has  one. 

10.  Who  spealis  French  ?    The  American  speaks  French. 

11.  Do  you  write  an  exercise?     Yes,  sir,  I  write  an  exercise. 

12.  Where  do  you  buy  all  your  books  ?     I  buy  them  in  the  bookstore. 

13.  Are  you  a  bookseller?     No,  sir,  I  am  a  baker. 

14.  Where  have  you  your  bakery  ?     I  have  it  in  New  York. 

15.  Where  do  you  buy  your  coats?     In  the  tailor's  shop. 

16.  Have  you  all  of  your  books?     Yes,  sir,  I  liavc  all. 


38 


LESSON     XII, 


17.  Do  you  all  reside  in  the  United  States?    Yes,  sir,  we  reside  in  the 
United  States. 

18.  Have  you  any  bread  ?     No,  sir,  I  have  none. 

19.  Do  you  speak  to  anybody?     Yes,  sir,  I  speak  to  the  Americans. 

20.  Do  you  buy  anything  ?     No,  sir,  I  buy  nothing. 

21.  Are  you  a  baker?     No,  sir,  I  am  a  tailor. 

22.  Are  they  French  ?     No,  sir,  they  are  English. 

23.  Art  thou  a  Spaniard  ?     No,  sir,  I  am  an  American. 

24.  Who  is  studious  ?    Emanuel  is  very  studious. 


LESSON    XII. 


Haber. 


To  have. 


He. 

I  have. 

Has. 

Thou  hast. 

Ha. 
Hemos. 

He  has. 
TVe  have. 

Habeis. 

You  have. 

Han. 

They  have. 

PAST 

PARTICIPLES.— 

-First  Conjugation. 

Habl-ado. 

Spoke. 

Estudi-ado. 

Studied. 

Compr-ado. 

Bought' 

Busc-ado. 

Looked  for,  sought. 

Necesit-ado. 

Needed. 

Second  m 

id  Third. 

Aprend-ido. 

Learned. 

Vend-ido. 

Sold. 

Le-ido. 

Eead. 

Beb-ido. 

Drunk. 

Com-ido. 

Eaten,  dined. 

Eecib-ido. 

Received. 

Viv-ido. 

Lived. 

Eesid-ido. 

Resided. 

Escrito   {irregular 

in 

this 

Written. 

partieij)le  only). 

LESSON     XI 

Hoy. 

1 

Paris. 

Paris. 

L6ndi*es. 
Madrid. 

London. 
Madrid. 

Pafio. 

Cloth. 

COMPOSITION. 

39 


To-day. 


Habana. 

Havana. 

Viena. 

Vienna. 

Filadelfia. 

Philadelphia 

Esquela. 

Note. 

(,  Cuando  ha  escrito  Y.  L  su  padre  ? 

He  escrito  hoy  a  mi  padre. 

i  Ha  recibido  Y.  sus  cartas  ? 

Si,  sefior,  las  he  recibido. 

j  Ha  vivido  Y.  en  Paris  ? 

Si,  seSor,  he  vivido  una  semana. 

(,  Ha  residido  Y.  en  Londres  ? 

Si,  senor,  he  residido  algunos  dias. 

(,  Han  comido.ellos  ? 

Si,  senor,  han  comido. 

^  Hemos  leido  bien  nosotros  ? 

Sf,  sefior.  Yds.  han  leido  muy  bien. 

^Ilabeis  vcndido  vosotros  muchos  pa- 

fiuelos  ? 
Hemes  vendido  muy  pocos. 
j  Cuando  habeis  aprendido  vucstra  lec- 

cion? 
La  hemos  aprendido  hoy. 
6  Habeis  comprado  pan  ? 
Si,  senor,  lo  hemos  comprado. 
(,  Ha  estudiado  Y.  aleman  ? 
No,  senor,  no  lo  he  estudiado. 
^  Ha  hablado  Y.  con  el  Frances  ? 
Si,  sciior,  he  hablado  con  el. 


When  have  you  written  to  your  father  ? 

I  have  written  to  my  father  to-day. 

Have  you  received  your  letters  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  received  them. 

Have  you  Uved  in  Paris  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  lived  a  week. 

Have  you  resided  in  London  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  resided  some  days. 

Have  they  eaten  (or  dined)  ? 

Yes,  sir,  they  have  eaten. 

Have  we  read  well  ? 

Yes,  sir,  you  have  read  very  well. 

Have  you  sold  many  handkerchiefs  ? 

We  have  sold  very  few. 

When  have  you  learned  your  lesson  ? 

We  have  learned  it  to-day. 

Have  you  bought  bread  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  have  bought  it. 

Have  you  studied  German  ? 

No,  sir,  I  have  not  studied  it. 

Have  you  spoken  with  the  Frenchman  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  spoken  with  him. 


EXPLANATION. 

47.  Tenek  and  Habee.     To  have,  used  as  an  active  verb, 
is  translated  by  tener,  as  an  auxiliary,  by  habe?' ;  as, 

To  have  horses. 
I  have  gold. 
To  have  spoken. 


Tener  caballos, 
Tengo  oro. 
Haber  hablado. 
Hemos  hablado. 


Wc  have  spoken. 
When  the  auxiliaries  to  have  and  to  he,  followed  by  an  infi- 


40  LKSSONXII. 

iiitive,  denote  some  future  action,  to  have  is  rendered  by  tener 
que,  and  to  be  by  haber  de  ;  as, 

Tenemos  que  escribir.  I  We  liavo  to  write. 

Hemos  de  recibir  dinero.  |  We  are  to  receive  money. 

48.  Peetekit -Indefinite. — This  tense  not  only  refers  to 
what  is  past,  but  also  conveys  an  allusion  to  the  present  time ;  as, 
Alejandro  ha  estudiado  el  espaiiol.      |      Alexander  has  studied  Spanish. 

It  must  also  be  used  when  we  speak  indefinitely  of  any 
thing  past,  as  happening  or  not  happening  in  the  day,  year, 
or  age,  in  which  we  mention  it ;  as, 

He  escrito  hoy  muchas  cartas.  |      I  have  written  many  letters  to-day. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  Ha  escrito  V.  sus  cartas?  No,  scQor,  ho  escrito  los  xyercicios  de 
la  leccion. 

2.  I  Ila  rccibido  V.  su  dinero  ?     Si,  sefior,  lo  be  recibido. 

3.  J  Ha  escrito  V.  u  su  bermana?  Si,  sefior,  be  escrito  boy  u  mi  ber- 
mana. 

4.  I  Cuando  ba  rccibido  V.  los  pcriodicos  de  Paris  ?  Los  be  recibido 
boy. 

5.  ^Ha  leido  V.  mi  libro?     Si,  sefior,  lo  be  leido. 

6.  I  Han  vivido  Vds.  en  L6ndres  ?    Si,  seuor,  beraos  vivido  una  seraana. 

7.  I  Ha  comido  V.  ?     Si,  sefior,  he  comido. 

8.  I  Ha  leido  V.  la  carta  de  mi  berraano  ?     Si,  sefiora,  la  be  leido. 

9.  I  Ha  vendido  V.  su  baston  ?     Si,  seuor,  lo  be  vendido  boy. 

10.  ^Ha  necesitado  V.  el  libro  de  mi  bermana?    No,  seuor,  no  lo  bo 
necesitado. 

11.  J  Ha  buscado  V.  bien  cl  pafiuelo?     Si,  sefiora,  lo  bo  buscado  bien. 

12.  J  Ha  comprado  V.  pan  ?    No,  sefior,  be  comprado  vino. 

13.  J  Ha  aprendido  Y.  su  leccion  do  espafiol?    La  bo  estudiado,  pero 
be  aprendido  muy  poco. 

14.  I  Ha  bablado  V.  con  mi  padre  ?    Si,  sefior,  bo  bablado  con  61. 

15.  gHa  estudiado  V.  cl  aleman?    Si,  sefior,  lo  be  estudiado  con  nn 
Frances. 

16.  J  Ha  vivido  V.  en  la  Habana?    No,  sefior,  be  vivido  en  Filadclfia. 

17.  ^Ha  vendido  V.  raucbos  lapices?    No,  sefior,  be  vendido  muy 
pocos. 

18.  ^Ha  recibido  V.  sus  cartas?     No,  sefior,  be  recibido  los  pcriodicos 
del  ju^vcs. 


LESSON    -XII.  41 

19.  J  Ha  leido  V.  mi  esquela?    25'o,  sefior,  no  la  be  leido. 

20.  I  Ha  buscado  V.  bien  mi  baston  ?    Si,  sefior,  lo  ho  buscado  bien. 

21.  ^Ua  coiuprado  V.  un  sombrero?    Si,  sefior. 

22.  ^  Han  bablado  ellos  a  su  padre  ?    No,  sefior. 

23.  I  Ha  aprendido  V.  el  ingles  ?    No,  sefior,  lo  be  estudiado  un  poco ; 
pero  no  lo  bo  aprendido. 

24.  I  Ha  leitlo  V.  el  periodico  do  boy  ?     Si,  sefior,  lo  be  leido. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Have  you  received  yom*  letters?     Yes,  sir,  I  bave  received  them 
to-day. 

2.  Have  you  read  tbe  newspapers?     Yes,  sir,  I  bave  read  them. 

3.  Have  you  written  to  my  sister?     No,  sLi*,  I  bave  not  written  to 
ber   (le). 

4.  Have  you  received  your  letters  from  Vienna?    I  bave  received 
them. 

5.  Have  you  read  tbe  English  newspapers?    Yes,  sir,  I  bave  (read 
them). 

G.  Have  you  dined  with  your  sister?    I  have  dined  with  her. 

7.  Have  you  bought  your  bat  ?     I  have  bought  it  to-day. 

8.  Have  you  looked  for  my  father  in  Paris  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  have  looked 
for  him. 

9.  Have  you  spoken  with  him  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  spoken  with  him. 

10.  "Where  bave  you  spoken  with  him?    I  have  spoken  with  him  at 
his  bouse. 

11.  Have  you  studied  your  Spanish  lesson?     Yes,  sir,  I  have  studied  it. 

12.  Have  you  learned  it  well?     No,  sir,  I  have  learned  it  little. 

13.  Have  the  bakers  sold  much  bread?     No,  sir,  they  bave  sold  very 
Uttle. 

14.  Has  tbe  tailor  bouglit  much  cloth  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  has  (bought). 

15.  Have  they  (fern.)  dined  with  your  sister?     Yes,  sir,  they  have 
dined  with  my  sister. 

16.  Have  they  dined  with  your  brother?    Yes  sir. 

17.  What  have  they  eaten?    They  have  eaten  bread  and  meat. 

18.  What  have  they  drunk?    They  have  drunk  water,  wine  and  ale. 

19.  Have  you  spoken  with  tbe  Spaniard?    Yes,  su-,  I  bave  spoken 
with  him. 

20.  Have  you  spoken  with  him  in  Spanish  or  English?    I  bave  spoken 
with  him  in  English. 

21.  Have  you  received  your  letters  from  Pliiladelpbia  ?     Yes,  sir,  I 
have  received  them. 

22.  Have  you  received  them  all  ?    I  bave  received  them  all. 


42 


LESS-ON     XIII, 


23.  Have  you  lived  in  London  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  lived  in  Vienna. 

24.  Have  you  lived  with  youi"  fatlier  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  hved  with  my 
brother. 


LESSON  XIII. 


Querer. 

Querido. 
Quiero. 
Quieres. 
Quiere. 

Queremos. 
Quereis. 
Quieren. 
Desear. 

Mio. 

Tuyo. 

Suyo. 

Nuestro. 
Vuestro. 


To  wish,  to  be  willing,  to  love. 

Wished,  loved,  dear. 
I  wish,  or  am  willing. 
Thou  wishest. 
He  wishes. 


"We  wish. 
You  wish. 
They  wish. 
To  desire. 

POSSESSIVE  PEOKTOTINS. 

My,  or  mine. 
Thy,  or  thine. 
His,  hers  or  its. 
Our,  or  ours. 
Your,  cr  yours. 


Amigo.  Friend, 

Primo.  Cousin. 

Dinero.  Money. 


Util. 

Useful. 

Caro. 

Dear. 

Barato. 

Cheap. 

Viejo. 

Old. 

J6ven. 

Young. 

Eico. 

Eich. 

Pobre. 

Poor. 

Amiga. 
Prima. 
Moneda. 


Friend. 
Cousin. 
Coin. 


COMPOSITION. 


I  Quiere  V.  un  sombrero  ? 
No,  sefior,  quiero  un  baston. 
(,  Quiere  V.  mucho  a,  su  primo  ? 
Si,  sefior,  le  quiero  muelio. 


Do  you  wish  a  hat  ? 

No,  sir,  I  wish  a  cane. 

Do  you  love  your  cousin  much  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  love  him  much. 


LESSON     XIII. 


43 


(,  Quicre  V.  escribir  ? 

No,  seuor,  qiiiero  leer. 

(,  Quicre  V.  hablar  con  mi  hermana  ? 

Si,  scnor,  quiero  hablar  con  ella. 

(,  Quicre  V.  comprar  el  caballo  de  nues- 
tro  araigo  ? 

Si,  sefior,  quiero  comprar  el  caballo  del 

amigo  do  V. 
6  Quieres  escribir  k  mi  herraano  ? 
Si,  seiior,  quiero  escribirle. 
(,  Tiene  V.  mi  baston  ? 
No,  seSor,  tengo  el  mio. 
(,  Tienen  ellas  nuestros  libros  ? 
Si,  senor,  tienen  los  de  Vds. 
^  Es  viejo  su  padre  de  V.  ? 
Si,  seuor,  es  un  poco  viejo. 
(,  Es  joven  su  hermana  de  V.  ? 
Si,  senor,  es  muy  joven. 
(,  Es  pobre  el  comerciante  ? 
No,  seuor,  es  muy  rico. 
6  Ha  escrito  V.  4  su  amigo  ? 
Si,  seiior,  he  escrito  hoy  k  mi  amigo. 

6  Ha  hablado  V.  con  su  prima  ? 
No,  seiior,  he  hablado  con  mi  amigo. 
6  Donde  vive  su  primo  de  V.  ? 
Vive  en  Filadelfia. 


Do  you  wish  to  write  ? 

No,  sir,  I  wish  to  read. 

Do  you  wish  to  speak  to  my  sister  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  speak  to  her. 

Do  you  wish  to  buy  our  friend's  horse  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  buy  your  friend's 

horse. 
Do  you  wish  to  write  to  my  brother  ? 
Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  write  to  him. 
Have  you  my  cane  ? 
No,  sir,  I  have  mine. 
Have  they  our  books  ? 
Yes,  sir,  they  have  yours. 
Is  your  father  old  ?  . 
Yes,  sir,  he  is  rather  old. 
Is  your  sister  young  ? 
Yes,  sir,  sBe  is  very  young. 
Is  the  merchant  poor  ? 
No,  sir,  he  is  very  rich. 
Did  you  write  to  your  friend  ? 
Yes,  sir,  I  have  written  to  my  friend 

to-day. 
Have  you  spoken  with  your  cousin  ? 
No,  sir,  I  have  spoken  with  my  friend. 
Where  does  your  cousin  Uvc  ? 
He  lives  in  Philadelphia. 


EXPLANATION. 

49.  Mio,  tuto,  suto,  nuesteo,  vuesteo,  change  the  final 
o  into  a,  to  form  the  feminine  termination. 

50.  In  Spanish,  the  possessive  pronouns  always  agree  with 
the  name  of  the  thing  possessed,  in  gender,  number,  and  case ;  as, 

Nuestra  gramatica.  I  Our  grammar. 

Nuestros  libros.  |  Our  books. 

51.  When  used  as  pronominal  adjectives,  they  precede  the 
noun  with  which  they  agree ;  and  it  is  to  be  observed  that,  in 
this  case,  mio,  tuyo  and  suyo  drop  their  final  syllable ;  as, 


Nuestros  caballos. 
Mi  pluraa. 
Tu  papel. 
Su  cuadcmo. 


Our  horses. 
My  pen. 
Thy  paper. 
His  copy-book. 


44  LESSON   XIII, 


Mis  plumas. 
Tus  papeles. 


My  pens. 
Thy  papers. 


Sus  cuademos.  His  copy-boolcs. 

52.  Mio,  when  used  in  the  vocative  case — that  is,  in  ad- 
dressing persons — is  placed  after  the  noun  governing  it ;  as, 

Escribe,  hijo  mio.  |  Write,  my  son. 

53.  When  possessives  are  used  as  pronouns,  they  agree  in 
gender,  number  and  case  ■with  the  noun  whicli  they  represent, 
and  are  preceded  by  the  definite  article ;  as, 


Tu  gramatica  y  la  mia. 
De  mis  muchachos  y  los  tuyos. 
Su  hermano  y  el  nucstro. 
Sus  zapatos  y  los  imcstrcs. 
Tus  caballos  y  los  suyos. 


Thy  grammar  and  mine. 
Of  my  boys  and  thine. 
His  brother  and  ours. 
His  shoes  and  ours. 
Thy  horses  and  {heirs,  &c. 


54.  Possessives  arc  preceded  by  the  neuter  article,  when 
they  are  indefinitely  used ;  as, 

Lo  mio,  lo  tuyo,  lo  suyo.  |  What  is  mine,  what  is  thine,  what  is  his. 

55.  When  the  possessive  pronoun  is  connected  with  the 
noun  by  the  verb  to  he^  the  article  is  omitted ;  as, 


Este  billete  es  mio. 

Esa  carta  es  tuya. 

El  caballo  cs  suyo. 

Muchachos,  j  es  este  vucstro  libro  ? 

Niiios,  (,  es  este  el  vuestro  ? 


This  note  is  mine. 
That  letter  is  thine. 
The  horse  is  his. 
Boys,  is  this  your  book  ? 
Children,  is  this  yours  ? 


56.  Vuestro,  vuestea,  is  cluefly  used  in  addressing  per- 
sons in  very  high  positions ;  as, 

Sciior,  westra  patria  lo  exije.  |  Sir,  your  country  demands  it. 

CONTERSATIOX  AXD  YERSIOX. 

1.  ^Quiero  V.  vino?    No,  sefior,  quicro  agiia. 

2.  ^Qnierea  Vds.  mis  libros?    No,  sefior,  qaeremos  los  nuestros. 

3.  ^Tienen  ellos  nuestros  periodicos?     No,  sefior,  ellos  tienen  los 
suyos. 

4.  jTiene  V.  nuestro  libro?     No,  sefior,  yo  tengo  el  mio. 

5.  ^Teneis  ^-uestros  ejercicios?    Si,  sefior,  tenemos  los  nuestros. 

6.  ^Es  vieja  su  amiga  de  V.  ?    No,  sefior,  es  j6ven. 

7.  iEs  lico  el  comerciante?    Si,  sefior,  es  may  rico. 

8.  I  Veudc  barato  ?    No,  sefior,  compra  barato ;  pero  vcndo  caro. 


LESSON     XIII.  45 

9.  ^  Es  litil  la  grmniitica  ?     Si,  sen  or,  es  muy  util. 

10.  ^Quiere  V.  inucho  a  sa  liermana?     Si,  seilor,  la  quicro  mucho. 

11.  ^Quiere  V.  beber  vino?     No,  sefior,  qniero  beberagua. 

12.  gQuiore  V.  comprar  un  panuelo  de  algodon?    No,  sciior,  quiero 
comprar  uno  de  seda. 

13.  I  Quiere  V.  vivir  en  nuestra  casa?  No,  sefior,  quiero  vivir  en  la  mia. 

14.  j  Quiero  V.  estudiar  espaQol  ?    Si,  selior,  quiero  estudiarlo. 

15.  I  Que  quieren  ellos  ?     Quieren  liablar  con  V. 

16.  ^  Quiere  V.  ir  {to  go)  a  mi  casa  cl  martes?  No,  sefior,  quiero  ir  hoy. 

17.  ^  Necesita  V.  un  libro  ?     Si,  sefior,  necesito  el  mio. 

18.  ^Necesita  V.  hablar  con  cl  abogado?    No,  sefior,  necesito  hablar 
con  el  comerciante. 

19.  ^Necesita  su  prima   un  lapiz?      No,  sefior,  ella  no  lo  necesita. 

20.  ^Ila  querido  V.  mucbo  a  su  padre?      Si,  sefior,  le  he  querido 
mucho. 

21.  ^EEa  necesitado  V.  dinero?    No,  sefior,  he  necesitado  amigos. 

22.  ^Ila  escrito  Y.  sus  cartas?     Si,  sefior,  las  he  escrito. 

23.  I  Ha  leido  V.  los  peri6dico3  ?     Si,  sefior,  los  he  leido  hoy. 

24.  j  Quiere  V.  aprcnder  espafiol  ?     Si,  sefior,  quiero  aprenderk). 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  wish  to  eat  anything?     No,  sir,  I  wish  to  drink. 

2.  What  do  you  wisli  to  drink  ?     I  wish  to  drink  water. 

3.  Do  yon  wish  to  speak  to  your  brother  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  speak 
to  him  {le). 

4.  Do  you  wish  to  learn  Spanish  ?     No,  sir,  I  wish  to  learn  French. 

5.  Do  they  wish  to  live  in  New  York  ?     No,  sir,  they  wish  to  live  in 
Philadelphia. 

G.  Have  you  read  your  note  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  have  read  it. 

7.  Do  you  want  some  wine  ?     No,  sir,  I  want  some  water. 

8.  Do  they  want  my  book  ?     Yes,  sir,  they  want  your  book. 

9.  Does  your  brother  want  to  speak  to  my  father?      No,  sir,  ho 
wants  to  speak  to  the  lawyer. 

10.  Did  you  want  my  father's  letter?    No,  sir,  we  did  not  want  your 
father's  letter. 

11.  Did  you  want  any  money?    Yes,  sir,  I  wanted  some. 

12.  Do  you  wish  to  live  in  France?    No,  sir,  I  wish  to  live  in  the 
United  States. 

13.  Do  you  wish  to  speak  French  ?    No,  sir,  I  wish  to  speak  Spanish. 

14.  Do  they  wish  to  buy  a  grammar  ?    No,  sir,  they  wish  to  buy  news- 
papers. 


46 


LESSOI^^     XIV. 


15.  What  do  you  wish  to  buy  ?    I  wish  to  buy  a  handkerchief. 

16.  What  do  you  Avish  to  read?    I  wish  to  read  the  EngUsh  news- 
papers. 

17.  What  do  you  wish  to  di'ink  ?     I  wish  to  drink  some  wine  and 
water. 

18.  What  do  they  want  to  sell?    They  want  to  sell  their  horses, 

19.  When  did  you  receive  your  letters  from  England  ?    We  have  re- 
ceived them  to-day. 

20.  When  did  you  dine  with  your  friends?    I  have  dined  with  them 
to-day. 

21.  Have  you  a  useM  book  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  a  Spanish  grammar. 

22.  Does  the  merchant  sell  his  hats  dear  ?    No,  sir,  he  sells  them  very 
cheap. 

23.  Is  your  friend  young?     No,  sir,  he  is  old. 

24.  Are  you  rich?    No,  sir,  I  am  poor. 

25.  Do  you  wish  to  have  money  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  have  it 

26.  Do  your  friend  and-  cousin  live  in  New  York?    No,  sir,  they  live 
in  Philadelphia. 


LESSON    XIV. 


Llevar, 

llevado,  traer. 

To  bring,  brought,  to  take 

Enviar, 

enviado. 

To  send,  sent. 

Tomar, 

tornado. 

To  take,  taken. 

Pagar,  pagado. 

To  pay,  paid. 

Cuanto. 

How  much. 

Cuantos. 

How  many. 

Bastante. 

Enough. 

Peso. 

Dollar. 

Silla.               Chair. 

Centavo. 

Cent. 

Mesa.              Table. 

Cafe. 

Coffee. 

Cama.            Bed. 

Chocolate 

Chocolate. 

ITTJMEBAL  ADJECTIVES- 

— CAHDIXAL  NTJMBEES. 

TTno,  una. 

One. 

Dos. 

Two. 

Tres. 

Three. 

Cuatro. 

Four. 

Cinco. 

Five. 

LESSON     XIV. 


47 


Seis. 

Siete. 

Oclio. 

Nueve. 

Diez. 

Once. 

Doce. 

Trece. 

Catorce. 

Quince. 

Diez  y  seis. 

Diez  y  siete. 

Diez  y  ocho. 

Diez  y  nuevc. 

Veinte. 

Veinte  y  uno,  etc. 

Treinta. 

Cuarenta. 

Cincuenta. 

Sesenta. 

Setenta. 

Ochenta. 

Noventa. 

Ciento. 

Doscientos. 

Trescientos. 

Cuatrocientos, 

Quinientos. 

Seiscientos. 

Setecientos. 

Ochocientos. 

Novecientos. 

Mil. 

Dos  mil. 

Mil  ciento. 

Cien  mil. 

Un  millon. 


Six. 

Seven. 

Eight. 

Nine. 

Ten. 

Eleven. 

Twelve. 

Thirteen. 

Fourteen. 

Fifteen. 

Sixteen. 

Seventeen. 

Eighteen. 

Nineteen. 

Twenty. 

Twenty-one,  &c. 

Thirty. 

Forty. 

Fifty. 

Sixty. 

Seventy. 

Eighty. 

Ninety. 

A  or  one  hundred. 

Two  hundred. 

Three  hundred. 

Four  hundred. 

Five  hundred. 

Six  hundred. 

Seven  hundred. 

Eight  hundred. 

Nine  hundred. 

A  or  one  thousand. 

Two  thousand. 

Eleven  hundred. 

A  or  one  hundred  thousand. 

A  or  one  million. 


6  Han  Levado  mi  sombrero  al  sombre 

rero? 
Si,  scnor,  lo  ban  llevado. 


COMPOSITION. 

Have  they  taken  my  bat  to  the  hatter? 


Yes,  Bir,  they  have  taken  it. 


48 


LESSON     XIV. 


I,  Ha  enviado  V.  la  carta  a  su  primo  ? 
La  he  enviado. 

5  Ha  tornado  V.  cafe  ? 

No,  seiior,  he  tornado  chocolate. 
(,  Cuiinto  dinero  tienc  V.  ? 
Tengo  bastante. 
^  Cuanto  tiene  V.  ? 
Tengo  diez  pesos. 

6  Ha  comido  V.  con  su  hermano  hoy  ? 

No,  senor,  no  he  comido  con  61. 

6  Cudnto  ha  pagado  V.  al  sombrercro  ? 

Ocho  pesos  y  seis  centavos. 

6  Cuaatas  sillas  ha  comprado  V.  ? 

He  comprado  scis. 


Have  you  sent  the  letter  to  your  cousin  ? 
I  have  sent  it 
Have  you  taken  coffee  ? 
No,  sir,  I  have  taken  chocolate. 
How  much  money  have  you  ? 
I  have  enough. 
How  much  have  you  ? 
I  have  ten  dollars. 

Have  you  dined  with  yoiu*  brother  to- 
day? 
No,  sir,  I  have  not  dined  with  him. 
How  much  have  you  paid  to  the  hatter  ? 
Eight  dollars  and  six  cents. 
How  many  Chan's  have  you  bought  ? 
I  have  bought  six. 


EXPLANATION. 

NTTMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 

5  7.  In  the  formation  of  compound  numbers,  the  same  order 
is  observed  in  Spanish  as  in  English,  except  as  to  the  place  of 
the  conjunction ;  as, 

Mil  ochocientos  sesenta  y  seis.         |  18GG. 

58.  All  these  numbers,  except  uno,  one,  and  the  compounds 
of  cie?ifo,  one  hundred,  are  indeclinable. 

59,  Uxo  agrees  in  gender  v.itli  the  noun  to  which  it  refers, 
but  drops  the  o  when  it  comes  immediately  before  a  masculine 
noun;  as. 


Uno  de  los  hombres. 
Una  mujer. 
Un  hombre. 
Z7h  gran  caballo. 


One  of  the  men. 
A  woman. 
A  man. 
A  great  horse. 


60.  CiE^TO  drops  the  last  syllable  when  it  comes  immedi- 
ately before  a  noun.  Its  compounds  agree  in  number  and 
gender  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  refer  ;  as. 


Cien  hombres  y  cicn  mujeres. 

Cienio  veinte  y  tres  caballos. 
Bosdentos  libros. 
Urcsciciiias  cajas. 


One  hundred  men   and   one  hundred 

women. 
One  hundred  and  twenty-three  horses. 
Two  hundred  books. 
Three  hundred  boxes. 


LESSON     XIV.  49 

COXVEUSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Ha  escrito  V.  sus  cartas  ?     Si,  sefior,  las  lie  escrito. 

2.  J  Las  lia  enviado  V.  al  correo*  ?   Si,  sefior,  las  be  cnviado  hoy. 

3.  ^lla  tornado  V,  cafe  6  chocolate?    He  tornado  cafe. 

4.  I  Tiene  V.  bastaate  diuero  ?    Si,  sefior,  tengo  bastante. 

5.  I  Ciianto  ticne  V.  ?    Tengo  veintc  pesos  y  treinta  centavos. 

6.  I  Cuiinto  ha  pagado  V.  a  su  sastre  ?    He  pagado  a  mi  sastre  veinto 
y  cinco  pesos  y  cuarenta  ceatavos. 

7.  I  Cnando  ha  comido  V.  con  su  amigo  ?     He  comido  con  61  hoy. 

8.  ^  Cuantos  caballos  ha  comprado  V.  ?    He  comprado  ocho. 

9.  ^Ha  comprado  V.  sillas?     Si,  sefior,  he  comprado  doee. 

10.  I  Tiene  V.  nmcho  dinero  ?     Tengo  cien  pesos  y  cincuenta  centavos. 

11.  eCuiiuto  tiene  su  hermano  ?     Tiene  quinientos  (500)  pesos. 

12.  jDonde  vive  V.?     Vivo  en  Nueva  York. 

13.  2  Que  ndmero  {number)  tiene  la  casa  de  Y.  ?     Tiene  el  niimero 
ttescientos  treinta  y  ocho  (338). 

14.  I  Ha  recibido  V.  sus  periodicos  de  Paris  ?    Si,  sefior,  los  he  recibido. 

15.  ^Que  numeros  ha  recibido  V.?     He  recibido  cl  once,  doce,  trece, 
catorce,  y  diez  y  ocho. 

16.  ^Los  ha  leido  V.?     No,  sefior,  no  los  he  leido. 

17.  ^Cuantos  afios  {year)  ha  vivido  V.  en  Paris?     He  vivido  cinco. 

18.  J  Cuantas  lecciones  ha  aprendido  V.  ?    Ho  aprendido  trece. 

19.  ^Cuantas  gramdticas  tiene  V.?    No  tengo  sino  una. 

20.  I  Quien  ha  recibido  hoj'  periodicos  ?     Nadie  los  ha  recibido  hoy._ 

21.  ^Es  rico  el  amigo  de  V.  ?     Si,  sefior,  tiene  quinientos  mil  (500,000) 
pesos. 

22.  I  Ha  llevado  V.  mis  cartas  al  correo  ?     No  he  llevado  sino  dos. 

23.  ^Ha  enviado  Y.  mis  zapatos  al  zapatero?     Si,  sefior,  los  he  envia- 
do hoy. 

24.  I  Ila  tomado  Y»  muchas  lecciones  de  espafiol  ?    He  tornado  doce. 

25.  I  Cuiinto  ha  pagado  Y.  a  su  amigo  ?     Tres  mil  ochocientos  cuarenta 
y  cuatro  pesos  (3,844). 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  -wish  to  send  anj-thing  to  your  cousin?     Yes,  sir,  I  vrish  to 
send  money  to  my  cousin. 

2.  How  much  money  do  you  wish  to  send?     I  Avish  to  send  $317. 

8.  "Who  has  taken  the  money  to  the  tailor?     My  cousin  {fcm.)  has 
taken  it. 

4.  Wliere  have  you  sent  the  horses  ?     I  have  sent  them  to  Paris. 

5.  How  many  have  you  sent?    I  have  sent  two  very  good  ones. 

*  Correo,  post-offlce. 


50 


LESSOX     XV. 


G.  My  son,  Lave  you  taken  the  $31.50  to  the  baker?    Yes,  sir,  I  have 
(taken  them). 

7.  Has  your  brother  sent  some  chairs  to  your  house  ?    No,  sir,  but  he 
has  sent  some  to  his. 

8.  How  many  has  he  sent  ?    He  has  sent  ten  chairs  and  three  tables. 

9.  Has  the  woman  bought  no  chairs?    Yes,  sir,  she  has  bought 
twenty-six. 

10.  How  many  letters  have  they  written  this  {esta)  week  ?   They  have 
written  three  Imndred  and  ten  letters  and  one  thousand  and  one  notes. 

11.  Which  newspapers  have  you  sent  to  your  father  ?    I  have  sent  him 
numbers  three,  fifteen  and  eighteen. 

12.  Has  he  read  them  all  ?    He  has  read  only  number  fifteen. 

13.  Has  the  butcher  much  money  ?    He  has  $1,000. 

14:.  How  much  have  you  sent  to  your  friend  (fem.)l    I  have  sent 
$111.17. 

15.  "Whom  do  you  wish  to  pay  ?    I  wish  to  pay  my  tailor. 

16.  "Where  does  your  tailor  reside?    He  resides  in  Vienna. 

17.  "When  have  you  written  to  Alexander?    I  have  written  to  Alex- 
ander to-day. 

18.  Have  you  received  a  letter  from  him  to-day  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  re- 
ceived six. 

19.  "What  day  do  you  receive  letters  from  France  ?    I  receive  them  on 
Tuesdays  and  Saturdays. 

20.  How  many  has  your  cousin  written  to  you  ?    None. 


LESSON    XV. 


Pronunciar^  pronunciado. 
Tocar,  tocado. 

Cantor,  cantado. 
Heinar,  reinado.    ' 

Como. 


To  pronounce,  pronounced. 
To  touch,   touched;   to  play, 

played. 
To  sing,  sung. 
To  reign,  reigned. 


How,  like,  as. 


OKDIXAL  NOTBEES. 


Primero  (primer  iefore  a  noun). 

Segundo. 

Tercero  (or  tercer  before  a  noun), 


First. 

Second. 

Third. 


LESSON     XV. 


51 


Cuarto. 

Fourth. 

• 

Quinto. 

Fifth. 

Sexto. 

Sixth. 

S6ptimo. 

Seventh. 

Octavo. 

Eighth. 

Noveno, 

or  none. 

Ninth. 

Decimo. 

Tenth. 

Piano. 

Piano. 

Cancion. 

Song. 

Violin. 

- 

Violin. 

Palabra. 

Word. 

Musi  CO. 

Musician. 

Guitarra. 

Guitar. 

Pianista. 

Pianist. 

Ilistoria. 

History. 

Cantor. 

Singer. 

Arpa. 

Ilarp. 

Tomo  or 

voliimcn. 

Volume* 

Obra. 

Work. 

Carlos. 

Charles. 

Mdsica. 

Music. 

Luis. 

Louis. 

Cantora,  cantatriz 

Singer. 

Enrique. 

Henry. 

Calle. 

Street. 

Eey. 

King. 

Avcnida. 

Avenue 

Trabajo. 

"Work,  labor. 
COMPO 

3ITI0X. 

f,  Como  pronuncia  Manuel  el  cspauol  ? 

Lo  pronuncia  bien. 

6  Toca  V.  la  guitarra  ? 

No,  scuor,  toco  el  violin  y  cl  piano. 

6  Canta  V.  canciones  espanolas  ? 

No,  seiior,  canto  canciones  inglesas. 

(,  Quicn  reiua  en  Rusia  ? 

Alejandro  Segundo. 

(!,Jln  que  calle  vive  V.  ? 

Vivo  en  la  calle  Once. 

(,  Y  v.,  donde  vive  ? 

Yo  vivo  on  la  calle  Veinte  y  tres. 

;,  Que  toca  el  musico  ? 

Toca  cl  arpa,  cl  violin  y  el  piano. 

(,  Ticne  V.  el  primer  tomo  de  mi  libro  ? 

No,  scuor,  tengo  el  segundo. 

6  Ila  Icido  V.  el  tomo  tercero  ? 

No,  seiior,  he  leido  el  cuarto. 

^  Cuuntos  afios  tieno  V.  ? 


How  does  Emanuel  pronounce  Spanish  ? 

He  pronounces  it  well. 

Do  you  play  the  guitar  ? 

No,  sir,  I  play  the  violin  and  tlie  piauo. 

Do  you  sing  Spanish  songs  ? 

No,  sir,  I  sing  English  songs. 

Who  reigns  in  Russia  ? 

Alexander  the  Second. 

In  which  street  do  you  live  ? 

I  live  in  Eleventh  street. 

And  where  do  you  live  ? 

I  live  in  Twenty-third  street. 

What  does  the  musician  play  ? 

He  plays  the  harp,  violin  and  piano. 

Have  you  the»first  volume  of  my  book  ? 

No,  sir,  I  have  the  second. 

Have  you  read  the  third  volume  ? 

No,  sir,  I  have  read  the  fourth. 

How  old  are  you  ? 


EXPLANATION. 
61.  The  ordinals  always  agree  in  gender  and  numljer  with 


62  LESSON     XV. 

the  noTin,  expressed  or  understood,  to  which  they  refer,  and  may- 
be phiccd  either  before  or  after  that  noun  ;  as, 

El  primer  tomo  (or  el  tomo  primero). 

El  primer  buen  libro. 

Los  primeros  cnadernos. 

Las  primeras  lecciones. 

El  segundo  tomo. 

Las  se^undas  intencioncs. 


The  first  volume. 
The  first  good  book. 
The  first  copy-books. 
The  first  lessons. 
The  second  volume. 
The  second  intentions. 


It  has  been  seen,  in  the  list  of  ordinal  numbers  at  the  open- 
ing of  the  present  lesson,  ihstt  primero  and  tercero  lose  the  final 
letter  when  they  immediately  precede  their  noun,  or  are  separ- 
ated from  it  only  by  an  adjective.  We  may  observe  here,  that 
tercero  is  by  some  written  entire  ^  the  contracted  form,  how- 
ever, is  much  to  be  preferred ;  as. 

El  tercer  tomo.  |      The  third  volimie. 

62.  The  ordinals  are  not  so  frequently  used  in  Spanish  as 
in  English ;  and,  except  ^:)r/?nero,  first,  their  place  is  generally 
supplied  by  the  cardinal  numbers ;  as,  for  instance,  in  speaking 
of  the  days  of  the  month,  which  are  expressed  by  el  dos,  tres, 
cicatro,  etc.,  the  second,  tliird,  fourth,  &c.  The  following  are 
the  principal  cases  in  which  the  ordinals  are  employed:  1st, 
with  the  names  of  sovereigns,  popes,  &c. ;  2d,  in  the  enum- 
eration of  books,  chapters,  lessons,  &c.,  and  a  few  others; 
but,  even  in  these  cases,  after  decimo,  tenth,  they  are,  by  rea- 
son of  their  great  length,  generally  replaced  by  the  numerals ; 
as. 


Carlos  Quinto. 
Pio  Nono. 
Capftulo  decimo. 
Calle  Veinte  y  tres. 
Luis  Catorce. 


Oiarles  the  Fifth. 
Pius  the  Ninth. 
Chapter  tenth. 
Twenty-third  street. 
Louis  the  Fourteenth. 


N.  B. — The  defiaiite  article  is  not  required  in  the  above  ex- 
amples. 

CONTERSATIOX  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Proniincia  V.  bien  el  ingles?    No,  sefior,  lo  pronuncio  mal. 

2.  I  Es  V.  cantor  ?     No,  seQor,  pero  toco. 

3.  I  Qu6  toca  y.?    Toco  el  violin. 


LESSON     XV.  63 

4.  ^Canta  bien  su  hcrmana  de  V.  ?    Fo,  sefior,  cUa  canta  mal;  pero 
toca  bien  el  piano. 

5.  I  Que  leccion  cstudia  V.  ?     Estiidio  la  cuarta. 

G.  ^En  que  calle  vivo  su  padre  de  V.  ?     Vive  en  la  calle  Catorce. 

7.  i  Que  tomos  ba  leido  V.  ?    He  leido  el  primero,  segundo,  terccro  y 
cuarto. 

8.  I  Cudntos  tomos  tiene  la  obra  ?    Tiene  seis. 

9.  I  Qu6  libro  lee  V.  ?     Leo  la  bistoria  de  Curios  Quinto. 

10.  glla  leido  V.  la  bistoria  de  Enrique  Octavo  do  Inglaterra?    Si, 
sefior,  la  he  leido. 

11.  j  Qu6  torao  Ico  su  bermana  de  V.  ?     Lee  el  noveno. 

12.  J  Cudnto  dinero  ha  recibido  V.  hoy  ?    lie  recibido  cincuenta  y  un 
pesos. 

13.  J  Cuantos  hermanos  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  cinco. 

14.  ^Cuiintos  afios  tiene  su  liermana  de  V.?.    Tiene  quince. 

15.  gCuanto  tiompo  ha  vivido  V.  en  Paris?    lie  vivido  seis  afios. 

16.  ^Qu6  numero  tiene  su  casa?    El  doscientos  seis  (200). 
IT.  ^  Que  dia  do  la  semana  es  hoy  ?    Iloy  cs  mi^rcoles. 
18.  ^  Qu6  bora  tiene  V.  ?     Las  diez. 

•     19.  J  Cniintos  dias  tiene  una  semana?     Tiene  siete. 

20.  Ocho  y  doce  i  cuantos  son  ?     Son  veinte. 

21.  ^Cuantos  afios  tiene  su  papa  de  V.  ?     Tiene  sesenta. 

•22.  I  Cuantos  dias  tiene  el  afio  ?    Tiene  trescientos  sesenta  y  cinco  (365). 

23.  J  Como  ba  leido  V.  ?    He  leido  despacio. 

24.  I  Ha  Uevado  V.  mi  piano  al  pianista  ?     Si,  aefioT,  lo  he  llevado. 

25.  I  Ila  cantado  V.  niucbo  hoy  ?    Hoy  ho  cantado  poco. 

2(5.  I  Cuiindo  ha  vendido  V.  su  caballo  ?    Lo  ho  veadido  hoy. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "What  book  have  you  ?    A  music-book. 

2.  IIow  many  volumes  has  it?     Three. 

3.  Which  volume  have  you  read?     The  first. 

4.  Has  your  father  not  read  the  second  volume  ?     No,  sir ;  but  my 
cousin  has  read  it. 

5.  What  arc  you  reading,  miss?    I  am  reading  the  History  of  Chai-les 
the  Fifth. 

6.  Who  has  sold  your  sister''3  History  of  England  ?     She  has  sold  it. 

7.  Who  has  bought  the  violin  ?     The  pianist. 

8.  Wliere  does  he  live  ?    In  Seventeenth  street. 

9.  In  what  street  does  the  butcher  live  ?     In  Sixth  avenue. 

10.  Have  you  bought  good  meat  in  the  butcher's  shop?     The  meat 
(which)  I  have  bought  is  very  bad. 


54 


LESSON     XVI, 


11.  What  things  have  you  sent  to  the  tailor?    I  have  sent  stockings, 
vests,  and  pocket-handkerchiefs. 

12.  What  day  of  the  week  is  to-day?    Monday. 

13.  Is  Monday  tl»e  first  day  of  the  week?     No,  sir,  it  is  the  second; 
Sunday  is  the  first. 

14.  How  much  money  does  the  merchant  require  ?    lie  requires  $1,500. 

15.  How  much  money  do  you  wish  to  send  to  your  friend?    I  wish  to 
send  my  friend  $50. 

16.  Does  ho  need  much  money?     Yes,  madam,  he  is  very  poor. 

17.  How  many  letters  have  your  brothers  written  to  Emanuel?    Very 
few. 

18.  How  do  your  sisters  pronounce  Spanish  ?    They  pronounce  it  well 
when  they  read,  but  not  when  they  speak. 

19.  When  do  they  write  their  exercises?     When  they  have  studied 
their  lessons. 

20.  And  you,  when  do  you  write  yours?     When  my  brothers  write 
theirs. 

21.  How  do  the  poor  buy?     The  poor  buy  dear,  and  the  rich  buy 
cheap. 

22.  Has  your  father  sold  his  old  horse  ?     He  has  sold  it. 

23.  Have  you  read  the  History  of  Louis  XVI.  ?     I  have  read  volumes 
first,  second,  and  third. 


LESSON    XVI, 


FIRST  co^'J^cGATIO^' — Preterit  Definite. 


Eabl-L 
Habl-aste, 
Habl-6, 

I  spoke. 
Thou  spokest. 
lie  spoke. 

Habl-amos. 
Habl-asteis. 
Habl-aron. 

We  spoke. 
You  spoke. 
They  spoke. 

SECOND    CO 

S'JUGATIOX. 

Aprend-\. 
Aprend-iste. 
Aprend-io. 

I  learned. 
Thou  learn edst. 
lie  learned. 

Aprend-imos. 
Aprend-isteis. 
Aprend-ieron. 

We  learned. 
You  learned. 
They  learned. 

LESSON     XVI. 


55 


Escrib-i. 

Escrib-iste. 

Escrib-io. 

Escrib-imos. 
Escrib-isteis. 
Escrib-i  eron. 

Pasar. 

Aycr.    Anocbe. 

Antes  de  ayer,  or  anteayer. 

EI  aQo  pasado. 

El  mes  pasado. 

La  semana  pasada. 

Ante  {prep.). 

Ante  todas  cosas. 

Ante  todo. 

Antes  (ad.). 

Delante  {ad.). 

Despues  {ad.). 

Mas  {ad.). 

M6nos  (acZ.). 

Que  {conj.). 


THIUD   COXJUGATIOU. 

I  wrote. 
Thou  wrote. 
He  wrote. 


"We  wrote. 
You  wrote. 
They  wrote. 

To  pass,  to  spend  {in  relation 
to  time). 

Yesterday.    Last  night. 

The  day  before  yesterday. 

Last  year. 

Last  month. 

Last  week. 

Before,  in  the  presence  of. 

Before  all  things. 

Above  all. 

Before  {rejers  to  time). 

Before  {refers  to  place). 

Afterwards,  after. 

More. 

Less,  fewer. 

That,  than. 


COMPOSITIOX. 


6  Habl6  V.  con  mi  padre  ? 

Si,  seuor,  hable  con  dl  intes  de  ayer. 

i  Han  aprendido  Yds.  su  leccion  ? 
Si,  senor,  la  hemes  aprendido  hoy. 
(,  Cuando  esctibio  Y.  a  su  hermana  ? 
Escribi  la  semana  pasada  k  mi  hermana. 
i  Ha  recibido  Y.   sus    periodicos  del 

mes  pasado  ? 
Si,  senor,  los  he  recibido  hoy. 
6  Cudndo  vendio  Y.  su  caballo  ? 
Lo  vendi  el  aiio  pasado. 
(,  Estudia  Y.  antes  6  despues  de  comer? 

Estudio  antes  dc  comer, 

6  Hablo  V.  mucho  ante  el  juez  ? 


Did  you  speak  with  my  father  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  spoke  with  him  the  day  be- 
fore yesterday. 

Have  you  learned  your  lesson  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  have  learned  it  to-day. 

When  did  you  write  to  your  sister  ? 

I  wrote  to  my  sister  last  week. 

Have  you  received  your  newspapers  of 
last  month  (last  month's  newspapers)? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  received  them  to-day. 

When  did  you  sell  your  horse  ? 

I  sold  it  last  year. 

Do  you  study  before  or  after  dining  (or 
dinner)  ? 

I  study  before  dining. 

Did  you  speak  much  before  the  judge  ? 


56 


LESSON     XVI, 


No,  seuor,  hable  muy  poco. 

i  Que  libro  tiene  V.  delante  ? 

Tengo  la  gramatica  cspafiola. 

I  Escribio  V.  sus  cartas  ? 

Si,  scfior,  las  cscribi  el  domingo  pasa- 

do. 
g  Come  V.  ir.cnos  que  yo  ? 
No,  EcBor,  como  mas  que  V. 
I  Ha  visto  V.  a  su  amigo  ? 
Si,  scnor,  lo  vi  ayer. 
6  Donde  lo  vio  V.  ? 
Lo  Ti  delante  de  la  iglesia. 

i  Hablo  V.  con  el  ? 

SI,  seuor ;  pero  muy  poco. 

^  Ha  comido  V.  ? 

Si,  scnora,  he  comido  pan  y  lie  bebido 

vino, 
g  Ha  leido  V.  y  cstudiado  sus  ejercicios  ? 

Si,  seuor,  Ics  he  leido  y  estudiado. 

I  Ha  escrito  Y.  a  su  padre  ? 

Si,  seuor,  escribi  ayer. 

j  Cu4ndo  ha  recibido  V,  las  cartas  de 

el? 
Las  he  recibido  hoy. 
5  Ha  cnviado  Y.  mis  cartas  despues  de 

las  suyas  ? 
Las  he  cnviado  antes. 
i  Hablo  Y.  ante  el  rey  ? 
No,  senor,  hable  ante  el  jucz. 
i  Cu4nto  tiempo  ? 


No,  sir,  I  spoke  very  little. 

What  book  have  you  before  you  ? 

I  have  the  Spanish  grammar. 

Did  you  write  your  letters  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  wrote  them  last  Sunday. 
% 

Do  you  eat  less  than  I  ? 

No,  sir,  I  eat  more  than  you. 

Have  you  seen  your  friend  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  saw  him  yesterday. 

Where  did  you  see  him  ? 

I  saw  him   before  (in  front  of)  the 
church. 

Did  you  speak  with  him  ? 

Yes,  sir ;  but  very  little. 

Have  you  dined  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  eaten  bread  and  drunk 
wine. 

Have  you  read  and  studied  your  exer- 
cises? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  read  and  studied  them. 

Have  you  written  to  your  father  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  wrote  yesterday. 

When  have  you  received   the  letters 
from  him  ? 

I  have  received  them  to-day. 

Have  you  sent  my  letters  after  yours  ? 

I  (have)  sent  them  before. 
Did  you  speak  before  the  king  ? 
No,  sir,  I  spoke  before  the  judge. 
How  long  ? 


EXPLANATION. 


63.  The  Preterite  Defiiote  refers  to  a  time  past,  and 
generally  specified  in  the  sentence,  and  denotes  the  thing  or 
action  past  in  such  a  manner  that  nothing  remains  of  that 
time  in  which  it  was  done :  as. 


Escribi  a  mi  padre  en  el  afio  1S64. 
Aprendi  el  frances  el  afio  pasado. 


I  wrote  to  my  father  in  the  year  1864. 
I  learned  French  last  year. 


In  colloquial  language,  the  2^^cf€rite  indefinite  (which  has 
been  treated  of  in  Lesson  xii.),  is  sometimes,  though  incorrect- 


LESSON     XVI.  57 

ly,  substituted  for  the  preterite  definite.     The  following  example 
Avill  show  the  impropriety  of  such  a  substitution : 

lie  cscrito  k  mi  padre  ayer.  |  I  have  writtea  to  my  father  yesterday. 

Nothing  remains  of  yesterday ;  it  is  time  past,  and  has  no 
connection  Avith  the  present ;  and,  as  it  has  been  already  seen 
that  the  preterite  indefinite  conveys  an  allusion  to  the  present 
time,  the  incorrectness  of  the  foregoing  example  is  at  once 
apparent. 

We  may,  however,  say  with  propriety  : 

Escribi  la  carta  ii  las  tres,  a  las  cua-  1  I  wrote  the  letter  at  three  o'clock,  at 

tro,  etc.  I      four  o'clock,  &c. 

for  the  time  specified  is  completely  past. 

64.  Ante. — This  preposition  means  before,  or  in  the  pres- 
ence of;  as, 

Hablo  ante  el  juez.  1  He  spoke  before  the'judge. 

And  it  sometimes  denotes  priority,  antecedence,  &c. ;  as, 
Ante  todas  cosas.  |  Before  all  things. 

65.  Mas,  more;  Menos,  fess, /etoen — These  two  adverbs  are 
used  to  form  the  comparative  degree  of  several  adjectives, 
which  last  they  always  precede  in  the  sentence  ;  as, 

El  vino  es  mas  caro  que  la  cerveza.      I  Wine  is  dearer  than  beer. 
Yo  soy  mas  rico  que  V.  |  I  am  richer  than  you. 

When  used  to  express  some  quality  or  circumstance  re- 
specting verbs,  their  usual  place  in  the  sentence  is  immediate- 
ly after  these  last ;  as. 

To  escribo  mas.  I  I  write  more. 

Tu  hablas  menos.  \  Thou  speakest  less. 

It  is  needless  to  observe  here,  that  mas  and  m^nos  are  then> 
selves  the  comparatives  of  mucho  and  ^oco,  respectively. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Cuando  Labl6  V.  con  el  abogado  ?    liable  con  ^1  anteayer. 

2.  I  Ha  hablado  V.  con  mi  hermana  ?  No,  senor,  hable  ayer  con  su 
amigo  de  V. 

3.  2  Ha  hablado  V.  con  cl  pianista  ?    Si,  seiior,  le  liabld  ayer. 


58  LESSON     XVI. 

4.  J  Ha  aprendido  V.  su  leccion?    No,  seRor;  pero  he  escrito  el 
ejercicio. 

5.  ^Han  aprendido  ellos  sus  lecciones  de  frances?    Si,  sefior,  han 
aprendido  las  de  frances  y  de  espafiol. 

6.  J  Cudndo  aprendi6  su  hermana  a  tocar  el  piano  ?    Aprendio  cl  ano 
pasado. 

7.  I  Ha  leido  Y.  la  bistoria  de  los  Estados  TJnidos  ?    He  leido  el  toino 
primero  y  el  segundo. 

8.  ^  Ha  leido  V.  la  carta  de  su  hermana  y  la  de  su  amiga  ?    He  leido 
la  de  mi  hennana ;  pero  no  la  de  mi  amiga. 

9.  I  Qu6  ha  leido  V.  hoy  ?     He  leido  los  ejercicios  de  la  semana  pasada. 

10.  I  Cuando  compr6  V.  su  caballo  ?    Lo  compre  el  mes  pasado. 

11.  ^Donde  hablo  V.  con  mi  padre?    Delante  de  su  casa  de  V. 

12.  I  Ley6  Y.  la  carta  de  su  padre  antes  que  la  de  su  hermano  ?     No, 
sefior,  la  lei  despues. 

13.  I  Cudndo  residio  Y.  en  Paris  ?    Eesidi  dntes  que  Y. 

14.  I  Cuantos  afios  tiene  su  hermana  ?    Tiene  veinte. 

15.  I  Cuantos  pesos  pago  Y.  el  mes  pasado  al  comerciante  ?    Quinien- 
tos. 

16.  ^  Ha  Uevado  Y.  mis  zapatos  al  zapatero?     Si,  sefior,  los  llev6  ayer. 

17.  4  Cuando  ha  recibido  Y.  su  dinero?    Lo  recibi  anteayer. 

18.  I  Ha  escrito  Y.  despues  que  escribid  mi  padre?    No,  sefior,  escribi 
antes. 

19.  eEscribi6  Y.  su  carta  despues  que  recibi6  la  do  su  hermano?     Si, 
sefior,  la  escribi  mucho  despues. 

20.  I  Ha  hablado  Y.  con  la  raadre  antes  que  con  la  hija  ?    No,  sefior, 
liable  dntes  con  la  hija  que  con  la  madre. 

21.  I  Estudio  Y.  su  leccion  de  ayer  ?    No,  sefior,  estudie  la  de  dntes  de 
ayer ;  pero  no  he  estudiado  la  de  ayer  ni  la  de  hoy. 

22.  I  Habl6  Y.  ante  el  juez  ?    Si,  sefior,  hable  ante  el  juez  y  ante  el  rey. 

23.  I  Habla  Y.  mas  que  yo  ?    No,  sefior,  hablo  m^nos ;  pero  escribe 
mas. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  speak  more  yesterday  than  to-day?    I  spoke  less ;  but  I 
read  more. 

2.  How  many  newspapers  did  your  father  read  yesterday  ?  Yery  few. 

3.  How  old  is  your  sister  ?     She  is  nineteen. 

4.  "Wlio  took  the  vest  to  the  tailor  last  year?    The  baker  took  it. 

5.  How  much  did  the  tailor  pay  to  the  baker  afterwards  ?     $59.10. 

6.  Did  he  receive  the  vest  after  or  before  the  coat  ?    He  received  it 
after. 


LESSOK     XVII.  59 

7.  Did  your  sisters  .sing  yesterday  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  sang  and  played. 

8.  What  did  they  sing  ?     They  sang  Spanisli  songs  and  played  on  tho 
piano. 

9.  Have  you  {plural)  played  to-day?     No,  inadani,  we  hav^e  .not 
played ;  but  wo  have  written  our  French  exercises. 

10.  How  many  words  have  your  brothers  written  in  Spanish  to-day? 
Fewer  than  last  Thursday. 

11.  Do  they  speak  more  English  than  Spanish?    No,  madam,  they 
speak  more  Spanish. 

12.  What  have  the  singers  received  from  Paris  ?  '  They  have  received 
some  good  songs  and  French  music. 

13.  Have  the  singers  (fern.)  enough  Spanish  music?     Yes,  sir,  they 
have  received  some  to-day. 

14.  Did  they  sing  well  last  month?    Not  very  well. 

15.  Who  sang  in  your  house  the  day  before  yesterday?    Nobody  sang. 

16.  How  long  did  you  reside  in  Vienna?    Five  years,  six  months,  and 
thirteen  days. 

17.  How  many  churches  has  Paris?    Paris  has  many  churches. 

18.  How  did  your  cousins  pronounce  their  Spanish  yesterday?    Very 
well. 

10.  Are  you  a  musician?     Yes,  madam. 

20.  Is  your  sister  a  pianist  or  a  singer^  or  does  she  play  on  the  guitar  ? 
She  sings  and  plays  on  the  piano. 

21.  When  did  you  speak  before  the  judge  ?     The  day  before  yesterday 
and  last  week. 

22.  Do  you  sing  much  with  the  musicians  ?    I  sing  a  little ;  but  be- 
fore all  things  I  study  my  Spanish  lessons. 


LESSON    XVII. 

Trdbajar,  I      To  work. 

Mandar  I      To  command,  to  send. 


Quien,  quienes, 

A  quien,  a  quienes. 

jQu6? 

Cual,  cuales. 

Cuyo  (masc.  sing.),  cuya  (fe7n. 

sing.). 
Cuyos    (masc.   plural),   cuyas 

(fern,  plural). 
Varies.     Algunas  veces. 


Who. 

Whom,  to  whom. 

What  (inter.),  who,  that,  or  which. 

Which  one,  which  ones. 

Whose,  which,  or  of  whom. 
Several.    Sometimes. 


60 


LESSON     XVII, 


Rctrato. 

Portrait. 

Criada. 

Servant. 

Pantalones. 

Pantaloons. 

Iglesia. 

Church. 

Criado. 

Servant. 

CaUe. 

Street. 

Concierto. 

Concert. 

Plaza. 

Square,  market 

Teatro. 

Theatre. 

Compafiia. 

Company. 

Mercado. 

Market. 

Juana. 

Jane. 

Parque. 

Park. 

Juan. 

John. 

Trabajador. 

Workman. 

Ultimo  (a). 

Last. 

COMPOSITIOX. 

jEs  vicjo  el  caballero  a  qiden  Y.  hablo 

en  el  concierto  ? 
No,  senor,  pero  lo  es  la  sefiora  que  ha 

hablado  con  V.  en  el  teatro. 
I A  quien  busca  V.  ? 
Busco  bk  la  senorita  d  quicn  Y.  busca. 

I  Qui6n  es  el  joven  que  ha  hablado  con 

v.? 

Es  Tin  criado  del  hotel. 

El  muchacho  qiie  lee,  y  alcual  Y,  man- 
do  trabajar,  es  mi  hermano. 

La  gramatica  que  el  tiene,  y  en  la  cual 
estudia,  es  mia. 

El  caballero  cwja  casa  Y.  compro  es 
amigo  mio. 

El  comerciante  cuyo  vino  Y.  compro, 
vende  muy  barato. 

El  libro  en  que  leemos. 

La  sefiora  «  quien  hable  es  mi  madre. 

gManda  Y.  sus  nines  al  Parque  Cen- 
tral? 

I A  quien  manda  Y.  trabajar  ? 

A  mis  criados. 

i  Juan ! 

i  Senor !  g  que  manda  Y.  ? 

Quiero  la  coraida. 

jEn  donde  trabajan  hoy  los  trabaja- 
dores  ? 

Trabajan  en  la  callc. 


Is  the  gentleman  to  whom  you  spoke 

at  the  concert  old  ? 
No,  sir ;  but  the  lady  who  spoke  to  you 

at  the  theatre  is  (so). 
For  whom  do  you  look  ? 
I  am  looking  for  the  yoyng  lady  that 

you  look  for. 
Who  is  the  young  man  that  has  spoken 

with  you  ? 
He  is  a  servant  in  the  hotel. 
The  boy  that   reads,  and  whom  you 

commanded  to  work  is  my  brother.. 
The  grammar  which   he   has,  and   in 

which  he  studies,  is  mine. 
The  gentleman  whose  house  you  bought 

is  my  friend. 
The  merchant  whose  wine  you  bought 

sells  very  cheap. 
The  book  in  which  we  read  (or  which 

we  read  in). 
The  lady  I  spoke  to  is  my  mother. 
Do  you  send  your  children  to  the  Cen- 
tral Park? 
Whom  do  you  conmiand  to  work  ? 
My  servants. 
John ! 

Sir !  what  do  you  wish  ? 
I  wish  my  dinner. 
Where  do  the  workmen  work  t>-day  ? 

They  work  in  the  street 


LESSON     XVII.  61 

EXPLANATION. 

66.  QuiEN. — The  relative  pronoun  quien  refers  to  persons 
only,  and  is  always  preceded  by  the  preposition  a,  when  gov- 
erned by  a  verb  ;  as, 

El  hombre  d  quien  V.  quiere.  )  The  man  whom  you  love. 

67.  Who,  coming  immediately  after  its  antecedent,  is 
translated  by  qtie ;  when  it  stands  alone,  or  is  governed  by  a 
preposition,  it  is  rendered  by  quien ;  as, 

El  muchacho  que  cstudia.  I  The  boy  who  studies. 

La  muchacha  con  quien  hablas.  |  The  girl  with  whom  you  speak. 

68.  CuAL  and  que  relate  to  persons  and  things  ;  as. 

The  boy  that  reads,  and  whom  you 
commanded  to  work,  is  my  brother. 

The  grammar  which  he  has,  and  in 
which  he  studies,  is  mine. 


El  muchacho  que  lee,  y  al  cual  V. 

mando  trabajar,  es  mi  hermano. 
La  gramatica  que  61  tiene,  y  en  la 

cual  estudia,  es  mia. 

69.  CuYO  also  refers  to  persons  and  things,  but  agrees  with 
tlie  word  by  which  it  is  immediately  followed ;  as, 


El  caballero  cuya  casa  V.  compro  es 

amigo  mio. 
El  comerciante  aiyo  vino  V.  compro 

vende  muy  barato. 


The  gentleman  whose  house  you  bought 

is  my  friend. 
The  merchant  whose  wine  you  bought 

sells  very  cheap. 


This  pronoun  partakes  of  the  nature,  both  of  the  relatives 
and  the  possessives. 

70.  In  English  the  preposition  does  not  always  precede  the 
relative  pronoun ;  but  in  Spanish  it  is  indispensable  to  place 
the  preposition  before  the  relative ;  as, 

El  libro  en  que  Icemos.  I  The  book  which  we  read   in  (or,  in 

I      which  we  read). 

71.  The  relative  pronoun  caii  never  be  suppressed  in  Span- 
ish ;  so  that  we  cannot  say,  as  in  English,  the  lady  I  spoke  to, 
but,  in  full ;  as. 

La    senora    d  quien  hable,   es    mi  I  The  lady  to  whom   I   spoke    is    my 
madre.  |      mother. 

,       CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  A  quidn  mand6  V.  ayer  al  mercado  ?    Mand6  a.  mi  criado  Juan. 

2.  ^Cuiil  do  sus  criados  trabaja  mas?     Juan  trabaja  mas  que  todos. 

3.  I  Quien  cs  el  liombre  a  qui6n  V.  busca  ?  El  hombre  a  quien  busco 
63  trabajador. 


62  ,  LESSOKXVII. 

4.  I  Quien  C3  el  caballero  con  quien  hablo  V.  ayer  en  el  conclerto  ? 
Es  un  discipulo  mio. 

5.  I A  quien  quiere  V.  hablai*  ?     Quiero  hablar  a  la  seQorita  quo  toca 
el  piano. 

6.  ^  Corao  pasai'on  Vds.  el  tierapo  en  el  carapo  ?     Lo  pasamos  muy 
bien  en  compafiia  de  nuestros  amigos. 

7.  i  Es  Frances  el  comerciante  a  quien  compr6  V.  el  caballo  ?    Si, 
seflor,  es  el  Frances  cuya  casa  compr6  V. 

8.  ^Manda  (envia)  V,  sus  niflos  al  Parque  Central?     Si,  senor,  los 
mando  al  Parque  Central. 

9.  I  Con  quien  los  envia  V.  ?     Con  sus  primos. 

10.  ^  Que  libro  quiere  V.  leer  ?     Quiero  leer  el  de  Manuel. 

11.  ^Xo  quiere  V.  leer  el  que  yo  tcngo?     No,  seQor,  quiero  leer  el  de 
Alejandro. 

12.  I A  quiiin  manda  V.  trabajar  ?    A  mis  criados. 

13.  ]  Juan !     ;  Sefior !     i  Qu6  manda  V.  ?     Quiero  la  comida. 

14.  I  Canta  V.  bien  ?    No,  senor ;  pcro  la  seflorita  que  reside  en  su 
casa  de  V.  canta  rauy  bien. 

15.  I  Estudia  V.  muclio  ?    No,  sefior,  pero  trabajo  mucbo. 

16.  jHa  estndiado  V.  boy  su  leccion?    No,  senor,  la  estudie  ayer;  boy 
he  escrito  los  ejercicios. 

17.  ^C6mo  pronuncia  su  maestro  de  V.  el  espauol  ?    Lo  pronuncia 
bien ;  pero  pronuncia  muy  mal  el  ingles. 

18.  ^  Toco  Y.  ayer  el  piano  en  casa  de  sus  amigos  ?    Si,  senor,  tocamos 
y  cantamos. 

19.  ^Que  cantaron  Vds.?     Cantamos  caneiones  espafiolas  y  la  can- 
cion  americana  llamada,  "  The  Star  Spangled  Banner." 

20.  I  CabaUeros !  ^  Quieren  Yds.  tomar  chocolate  6  cafe  ?     Queremos 
beber  vino. 

21.  I  Cuantos  dias  pas6  Y.  en  el  campo  ?    Pas6  toda  xma  semana. 

22.  |Porque  no  pasa  Y.  un  mes  en  el  campo  con  nosotros?    Porque 
necesito  residir  en  la  ciudad. 

23.  I  Cual  de  sus  amigos  habla  bien  espafiol  ?     El  que  estudia  mucho 
habla  bien. 

24.  I  Cual  de  sus  hermanos  estudia  mas  ?    El  mas  peqnefio. 

25.  I  De  quien  recibe  Y.  cartas  ?     De  mi  padre  y  mis  hermanos. 

26.  I  Es  do  Y.  el  libro  en  el  cual  estudia  su  hermano  ?     No,  sefior,  es 
suyo. 

27.  j Trabajo  Y.  mucho  ayer?    No,  senor;  pero  he  trabajado  mucho 
hoy. 

28.  I  Cuando  estudia  Y.  sus  lecciones  ?    Las  estudio  los  miercoles  y  los 
sabados. 


LESSON     XVII.  63 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "Whose  is  tlio  portrait  (which)  you  sent  me  yesterday  ?     It  is  the 
portrait  of  my  brother  who  lives  iu  Germany, 

2.  Which  portrait  have  you  sent  to  Charles?    I  have  sent  no  portrait 
to  Charles;  but  I  have  sent  mine  to  the  musician. 

3.  With  whom  did  you  spend  last  week  ?     I  spent  last  week  with  my 
cousin  John. 

4.  In  which  city  of  France  does  the  pianist's  brother  live  ?    lie  lives 
in  the  city  in  which  your  sister  Jane  resides. 

5.  To  whom  did  you  send  the  first  voliune  of  your  work  ?     I  sent  it 
to  Louis. 

6.  Whom  do  you  order  to  work  ?     My  servant  John. 

7.  Who  is  the  lady  you  are  looking  for  ?     She  is  the  mother  of  the 
singer  {fern.)  whose  piano  Charles  bought  last  year. 

8.  With  whom  did  you  send  your  children  to  the  concert  last  night  ? 
I  sent  them  with  a  servant. 

9.  With  which  servant  did  you  send  them  ?    With  one  of  mine  (my 
OAvn). 

10.  In  which  church  does  Miss  Garcia  sing  ?  She  sings  iu  Twenty- 
eighth  street  church. 

11.  How  did  you  {plural)  pass  the  time  iu  Philadelphia?    Very  well, 

12.  Did  you  study  many  lessons  ?  We  studied  very  little,  and  neither 
read  nor  wrote  our  exercises. 

13.  IIow  much  did  you  write  the  day  before  yesterday?  I  studied  a 
good  deal,  but  wrote  little. 

14.  Which  volumes  of  Robertson's  History  has  your  son  ?  He  has  re- 
ceived the  first,  second,  third  and  fourth. 

15.  Did  you  buy  any  books  at  the  bookstore  in  Walker  street  ?  Yes, 
madam,  I  bought  the  History  of  Charles  V.  and  some  music  books, 

16.  Whom  have  you  paid  with  the  money  I  sent  you?  I  have  paid 
the  man  who  worked  in  my  house  yesterday.  • 

17.  Does  your  servant  work  much  ?    No,  sir ;  but  she  reads  a  great  deal. 

18.  From  whom  do  you  receive  letters  every  day  ?  I  receive  letters 
from  Henry  on  Mondays,  Wednesdays  and  Fridays,  and  from  my  father 
on  Tuesdays. 

19.  Who  has  the  boots  that  I  bought  in  Fourth  avenue?  John  has 
taken  them  to  his  cousin  who  lives  in  Philadelphia. 

20.  Has  your  servant  bought  any  good  meat  iu  the  market  ?  He  has 
not  bought  any  to-day. 

21.  How  many  songs  have  you  received  from  Spain  ?  I  have  received 
several  from  Spain  and  two  from  England. 


64 


LESSON     XVIII, 


22.  Have  you  sung  any  of  them  ?    None  ;  but  ray  sister  sang  one  or 
two  last  night  at  the  concert. 

23.  Are  they  very  good  ?     One  of  them  is  very  good,  and  my  cousin 
{fern.)  sings  it  very  "well. 

24.  How  many  pencils  does  the  hatter  -wish  ?    He  wants  twelve  pen- 
cils and  tliree  penknives. 

25.  Does  Louisa  play  much  on  the  piano?     No,  sir,  she  is  very  lazy, 
and  will  neither  play  nor  study. 

26.  The  tailor  has  a  handsome  vest,  very  cheap ;  will  you  buy  it  ?    I 
do  not  wish  to  buy  a  vest ;  but  I  want  pantaloons. 

27.  Has  he  any  pantaloons  ?    He  has  none,  he  sold  them  all  last  week. 


LESSON  XYIII, 


Ir. 


Togo. 


Voy. 

I  go  (or,  am  going). 

Vas. 

Thou  goest. 

Va. 

He,  or  she,  goes. 

Vamos. 

We  go. 

Vais. 

You  go. 

Van. 

They  go. 

PEETKRTT 

DEFDflTK. 

FuL 

I  went. 

Fuiste. 

Thou  wentcst. 

Fu6. 

He,  or  she,  went. 

Fuimos. 

We  went. 

JFuisteis. 

You  went. 

Fueron. 

They  went. 

PEES 

EXT. 

Yenir. 

To  come. 

Vengo. 

I  come  (or,  am  coming). 

Yienes. 

Thou  comest. 

Viene. 

He,  or  she,  comes. 

Yenimos. 

"We  come. 

Yenis. 

You  come. 

Yienen. 

They  come. 

LESSO]Sr     XVIII. 


65 


Yine. 

Viniste. 

Vino. 

Yinimos. 

Yinisteis. 

Yinieron. 


Feminine. 
Esta. 
Esa. 
Aquella. 

Estas. 

Esas. 

Aquellas. 


Mascnline. 

Esto, 

Ese. 

Aquel. 

Estos. 
Esos. 
Aquellos. 
EUo. 

Aqui,  acd. 

Ahi. 

Alii,  alia,  aculld, 

Porqu6. 

Porque. 

Lejos. 

Cerca. 

Otro.    Arabos. 

Ni  uno  ni  otro  (ind.  pro.). 


PRETERIT   DEFINITE. 

I  came. 
Thou  earnest. 
He,  or  slie,  came. 
"We  came. 
You  came. 
They  came. 

DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Singular. 

Neuter. 

Esto. 
Eso. 
Aquello. 

Plural. 
No  neuter. 


.1 


This. 
That. 
That  (yonder). 

These. 

Those. 

Those  (yonder). 

It. 

Here. 

There. 

Why. 

Because. 

Far. 

Near. 

Another.     Both. 

Keither. 


Profesor. 
Discipulo. 
Lado. 
Jardin. 


Professor. 
Pupil. 
Side. 
Garden. 


Juana. 
Discipula. 
Zapatcria. 
Manteca. 


Jane. 
Pupil. 

Shoenialcer's  shop. 
Butter. 


4  De  qui6n  es  este  libro  que  lengo  aqui? 
Ese  que  tienc  V.  ahi,  y  este  que  yo  ten- 
go  aqiii,  son  del  profesor. 

gQuicn  e^  aqiiel  caballero  que  reside 

alH  del  otro  lado  de  la  calle  ? 
Aquel  cabellero  es  mi  discipulo. 


COMPOSITION. 


Whose  book  is  this  which  I  have  here  ? 

That  one  which  you  have  there,  and  this 
one  which  I  have  here,  are  the  pro- 
fessor's. 

Who  is  that  gentleman  who  resides 
there  on  the  other  side  of  the  street  ? 

That  gentleman  is  my  pupil. 


66 


LESS02f     XVIII, 


I  Adonde  va  V.  ? 

Voy  alia,  al  otro  lado  del  parque. 

I  No  quiere  V.  venir  aca  de  este  lado  ? 

No,  sefior,  voy  alia  del  otro  lado. 

6  Quiere  V.  comprar  aquel  libro  ? 

No,  seuor,  quiero  comprar  ese  otro. 

g  Quiere  V.  venir  al  teatro  con  nosotros  ? 

£so  quiero. 

4  Uevo  V.  aqueUo  k  la  sastreria  ? 

Lo  Ueve. 

g  Manda  V.  algo  mas  ? 

No,  eso  es  todo. 

6  Envio  V.  el  chaleco  h  la  sastreria,  y 

las  botas  k  la  zapateria  ? 
Envie  lo  uno  y  lo  otro  {or  ambos). 
fiFueron  h  su  casa  de  V.   el  medico 

francca  y  cl  profesor  aleman  ? 
Vino  aquif,  pero  no  vino  cste. 

I  Hablo  V.  de  aqucllo  k  mi  madre  ? 

No,  senor,  pero  hable  de  ello  a  su  pa- 
dre de  V. 

En  mi  casa  y  en  la  de  su  hermano  de  Y. 

El  jardin  de  esta  casa  y  cl  de  la  que  V. 
compro. 

Este  caballo  y  cl  de  mi  amigo. 


Where  do  you  go  ? 

I  go  there  to  the  other  side  of  the  park. 

Will  you  not  come  here  to  this  side  ? 

No,  sir,  I  go  there  to  the  other  side. 

Do  you  wish  to  buy  that  book  ? 

No,  sir,  I  wish  to  buy  that  other  one. 

Will  you  come  to  the  theatre  with  us  ? 

That  (is  what)  I  wish. 

Did  you  take  that  (thing)  to  the  tailor's  ? 

I  did  (or  I  took  it). 

Do  you  command  anything  more  (or 
have  you  any  more  commands)  ? 

No,  that  is  all. 

Did  you  send  the  vest  to  the  tailor's, 
and  the  boots  to  the  shoemaker's  ? 

I  sent  both. 

Did  the  French  physician  and  the  Ger- 
man professor  go  to  your  house  ? 

The  former  came,  but  the  latter  did  not 
come. 

Did  you  speak  of  that  to  my  mother  ? 

No,  sir,  but  I  spoke  of  it  to  your  father. 

In  my  house  and  in  your  brother's. 
The  garden  of  this  house  and  that  of 

the  one  you  bought. 
This  horse  and  my  friend's  (that  of  my 

friend). 


EXPLANATION. 

72.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  este,  this,  ese,  aquel,  that, 
are  thus  declined : 

Este,  ese,  aquel  {masc.  sing.). 

Esta,  esa,  aquella  {/em.  sitiff.). 

Estos,  esos,  aquellos  {masc.  plural). 

Estas,  esas,  aquellas  {/em.  plural).  * 

Esto,  eso,  aquello  {neuter). 

73.  Este  is  used  to  point  out  what  is  near  to  us,  and  cor- 
responds to  the  meaning  of  th.e  adverb  here ;  ese  points  out 
that  which  is  at  some  distance,  and  con-esponds  to  the  adverb 


LKSSOK     XVIII. 


67 


ihere\  :ind  aquel  denotes  remoteness,  and  corresponds  to  the  ad- 
verb yonder ;  as, 

Esle  libro  que  tciigo  aini. 

Esc  que  tienc  V.  ahi. 

Aquel  quo  llcvo  V.  did. 


This  book  which  I  have  liere. 
Tlial  one  which  you  have  tlure. 
lliat  one  which  you  took  there. 


Estotro.  1 

Estotra.  I    This  other. 

Esotro.  [   That  other. 

Esotra.  J 


74.  When  the  pronouns  este,  ese  precede  the  adjective  otro, 
another,  they  may  sometimes  be  written  together,  so  as  to  form 
but  one  word  with  it,  in  the  following  manner: 

Estotros.  1 

Estotras.  I  These  others. 
Esotros.  [  Those  others. 
Esotras.    J 

These  forms,  however,  are  now  rarely  used. 

75.  The  demonstrative  pronouns,  in  their  quality  of  adjec- 
tives, are  used  also  as  neuter,  .Eso,  that,  is  tlie  most  used  of 
the  three,  and  almost  as  much  as  the  personal  pronoun  lo,  and 
in  the  same  manner;  as, 

Bso  se  hara.  I  That  will  be  done. 

/Eso  OS  !  I  That  is  it ! 

76.  The  former  and  the  latter  is  translated  in  Spanish  by 
aquel  and  este ;  thus. 


La  aplicacion  y  la  pereza  haccn  al 
hombre  muy  diferente ;  aquella  le 
cleva  y  esla  Ic  rebaja. 


Industry  and  slothfulness  have  a  very 
different  effect  upon  man ;  the  former 
elevates  him,  the  latter  lowers  him. 


77.  When  in  English  the  demonstrative  pronoun  that  is 
followed  by  the  preposition  of,  or  either  of  the  relatives  icho^ 
lohich,  expressed  or  understood,  referring  to  a  noun  already 
mentioned,  the  definite  article,  in  the  corresponding  number 
and  gender,  is  employed  in  Spanish  ;  as. 


En  mi  casa  y  en  la  do  su  hermano  de 

V. 
El  jardin  de  esta  casa  y  cl  de  la  qiic 

V.  oompro. 
Este  caballo  y  cl  do  mi  amigo. 


In  my  house  and  in  your  brother's. 


The  garden  of  this  house  and  that  of 

the  one  (which)  you  bought. 
This  horse  and  my  friend's  (i.  c.,  that 
of  my  friend). 

78.  English  personal  pronouns,  followed  by  a  relative  not 
agreeing  in  case,  are  generally  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  de- 
monstrative ;  as, 

Quiero  comprar  a  aqucllos  que  vendcn  I  I  want  to  buy   from  those  who    sell 
barato.  |      cheap. 


68  LESSON     XVIII. 

79.  Aqui,  alli,  aca,  alla. — Although  the  adverbs  aqui, 
here,  alli,  yonder,  are  employed  as  synonyms  of  acd,  liere,  and 
alldf  yonder,  respectively,  we  must  observe  that  aqut  and  alH 
refer  to  a  place  more  circumscribed  or  determinate  than  acd, 
alia ;  for  the  same  reason  we  can  say,  mas  acd,  mas  alld, 
nearer,  farther ;  and  we  cannot  say,  m,as  aqid,  more  here,  mas 
alli,  more  there. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jYiene  V.  del  carapo?    No,  scflor,  voy  allii. 

2.  I  De  ilonde  viene  su  amigo  de  V.  ?    Viene  de  Espafia. 

3.  ^Ad6nde  va  V.  este  ailo?    Este  aflo  quiero  ir  a  Paris. 

4.  I  De  quien  es  ese  retrato  que  tiene  V.  ahi  ?  Este  que  tengo  aqui 
es  cl  de  mi  padre,  y  aquel  que  tiene  su  amigo  de  V.  alli,  es  do  mi  madre. 

5.  ^Es  discipulo  de  V.  el  caballero  que  reside  en  aquella  herniosa 
casa  ?  No,  sefior ;  pero  su  prima,  que  reside  de  este  otro  lado  de  la  caUe, 
es  mi  discipula. 

6.  I  Va.  V.  a  su  casa  todos  los  dias  ?  No,  seQor,  voy  alli  los  lunes, 
raiercoles  y  viernes. 

7.  I  Cuiintas  lecciones  toma  el  caballero  que  vino  ayer  a  su  casa  de  V.  ? 
Toma  dos  a  la  semana. 

8.  I  Quien  trabaja  mas,  el  profesor  6  el  discipulo  ?  El  uno  y  el  otro 
trabajan  mucLo. 

9.  ^Es  este  niflo  su  hijo  de  Y.  ?     Si,  sefior,  es  mi  hijo  Manuel. 

10.  j Manuel!  ^quieres  venir  aqui  a  mi  lado?     No,  scflor,  no  quiero  ir. 

11.  ^Porqu6  ?     Porque  quiero  ir  con  mi  padre. 

12.  I  Cuantos  niflos  tiene  V.  ?     Tengo  cinco,  tres  nifias  y  dos  nifios. 

13.  I  Quiere  V.  venir  con  nosotros  al  Parque  Central  ?    No,  sefior,  por- 
que tengo  que  ir  con  mis  nifios  al  campo. 

14.  ^Ha  de  ir  V.  (tiene  Y.  que  ir)  hoy?     Si,  sefior,  tengo  que  ir  boy. 

15.  J  No  quiere  Y.  venir  aca  de  este  lado?    No,  sefior,  voy  alia  del 
otro  lado. 

16.  ^Llevo  V.  aquello  j'l  la  sastreria?     Si,  sefior,  lo  lleve. 

17.  ^Manda  Y.  algo  mas?     No,  eso  estodo. 

18.  ^llablo  V.  de  aquello  a  mi  amigo?     No,  sefior;  pero  liable  do  ello 
a  su  hermano. 

19.  I  En  donde  trabajo  Y.  ayer  ?     Trabaje  en  la  casa  do  Y.  y  en  la  de 
su  hermano. 

20.  I  Trabaj6  Y.  en  mi  jardin  6  en  el  de  mi  amigo  ?     Trabajo  en  el  uno 
y  en  el  otro. 


LESSON     XVIII.  69 

21.  I  Aduude  va  Y.  a  trabajar  hoy  ?  Yoy  a  trabajar  en  el  jardin  de 
esta  casa  y  en  el  dc  la  que  V.  compr6  el  ailo  pasado. 

22.  J  Llevo  V.  mis  botas  a  la  zapateria,  y  compro  V.  el  pan  que  necesita- 
luos  ?    Lleve  las  botas  ;  pero  no  be  comprado  el  pan. 

23.  i Que  llevas  abi,  Alejandro?    Llevo  mis  libros. 

24.  I  Que  quiere  tu  hermano?     Quiere  pan  y  manteca. 

25.  I  Pag6  V.  al  sastro  ?  Si,  seflor,  ayer  pagu6  al  sastre,  y  hoy  he  pa- 
gado  al  zapatero. 

26.  ^  De  quien  son  esos  caballos?  Este  es  el  de  mi  padre,  y  aquel  es  el 
de  mi  hermano. 

27.  I  Cual  es  el  de  Y.  ?     Yo  no  tengo  ninguno. 

28.  I  Quiere  Y.  tener  uno  ?     Quiero  tener  nmcbos. 

29.  I  Escribio  Y.  la  carta  y  la  lec-cion  ?  Escribi  aquella,  pero  no  ho 
escrito  esta. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  go  to  church  every  day  ?    I  only  (solo)  go  on  Sundays. 

2.  "Where  is  your  seivant  Jane  going?  She  is  going  to  the  bakery  to 
buy  bread. 

3.  Do  your  music  teacher  (maestro)  and  your  Spanish  professor  come 
to  your  house  every  day  ?  The  former  comes  every  day,  but  the  latter 
only  comes  on  Tuesdays  and  Saturdays. 

4.  "Which  of  the  two  works  the  more  ?     Both  have  to  work  much. 

5.  "Which  of  tlie  two  horses  is  the  older,  this  one  here  or  that  one 
tJiere  ?    This  one  liere  is  the  younger. 

6.  Have  j^ou  that  letter  which  you  received  last  Monday  ?  I  have  not 
that  one;  but  I  have  here  the  one*  I  received  the  day  before  yesterday. 

7.  Who  has  written  these  two  histories,  that  of  France  and  that  of 
America  ?    Eollin  has  written  the  former,  and  Robertson  the  latter. 

8.  Does  the  piano  teacher  live  far  from  here  ?  Tlie  piano  teacher 
does  not  live  far  from  here  ;  but  the  French  professor  lives  very  far. 

9.  Is  that  all  (lo  que)  your  brother  has  studied?     Yes,  sir,  that  is  all. 

10.  "Which  lesson  have  you  studied?  I  have  studied  the  one  (la  que) 
we  read  the  other  day. 

11.  "Which  did  we  read,  the  fifteenth  or  the  sixteenth  ?   "We  read  both. 

12.  "Which  one  do  you  wish  to  read  first  ?  I  require  to  read  the  former. 

13.  "Why  do  you  require  to  read  the  former?  Because  I  have  not 
studied  it  well. 

14.  Which  exercise  have  you  there  ?    I  have  mine  and  my  brother's. 

15.  Is  your  brother  not  coming  to  take  his  lesson  to-day?  No,  sir,  he 
has  to  take  his  music  lesson  to-day. 

16.  John!     Sir! 

♦  La  que. 


70  LESSONXIX. 

17.  Have  you  taken  my  coat  to  tlie  tailor's?  Yes,  sir,  I  took  it  last 
night. 

18.  Have  yon  paid  that  man  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  have  paid  him  to-day. 

19.  IIow  much  have  you  paid  him  ?  I  have  paid  hiiu  tlirce  dollars  and 
seventy-five  cents. 

20.  Why  did  you  pay  him  three  dollars  and  seventy-five  cents  ?  Be- 
cause he  worked  one  day  in  this  garden,  and  two  in  that  of  the  Twenty- 
third  street  house. 

21.  IIow  many  pupils  have  you?  I  have  thirty:  seventeen  learn 
Spanish  and  the  thirteen  others  French. 

22.  Do  they  study  well  ?  Some  of  them  study  very  well ;  but  none 
•write  their  exercises  well. 

23.  "When  do  you  sing  and  play  on  the  piano  ?  I  study  my  lessons 
before  singing  and  playing. 

24.  Who  is  that  gentleman  that  came  from  Vienna  last  month?  That 
gentleman  is  the  one  to  whom  I  spoke  last  week  at  the  concert. 


LESSON    XIX. 


Uaecr. 
Haciendo. 
Hecho. 


Hago. 
Ilaces. 
Hace. 

Haeeoios. 

Ilaceis. 

Hacen. 


Hiee. 

Hiciste. 

Hizo. 

Hicimos. 
Ilicisteis. 
Uicieron. 

Partir. 
ifarchar. 

Carabiar. 


To  do,  or  to  make. 
Doing,  making. 
Done,  made. 


PRESENT. 


I  do,  or  make. 

Thou  doest,  or  makest. 

He  does,  or  makes. 

We  do,  or  make. 
You  do,  or  make. 
They  do,  or  make. 

PEETEEIT  DEF1^^TE. 

I  did,  or  made. 

Thou  didst,  or  madest. 

He  did,  or  made. 

We  did,  or  made. 
You  did,  or  made. 
They  did,  or  made. 

To  set  out,  to  depart,  to  divide. 
To  go,  set  out,  set  oif,  to  march. 
Change. 


LESSON     XIX. 


VI 


Para. 

PREPOS 

ITI0X8. 

For,  or  in 

order  to. 

Asi. 

So,  thus. 

Por. 

By,  for,  through. 

Entrc. 

Between,  amoug. 

Ilasta. 

Until,  even 

. 

Hacia. 

Towards. 

Sin.     Hasta  donde. 

Without. 

How  far. 

Pedro. 

Peter. 

Helena. 

Helen. 

Escritor. 

Writer. 

Escritora 

Writer  {female). 

Escribano. 

Notary. 

Tienda. 

Store,  shop. 

EstaJo. 

State. 

Provincia. 

Province. 

Medico. 

j  Physician. 
1  Doctor. 

Manera. 

Manner. 

Escritura. 

Writing,  convey 

Cuarto. 

Eoom. 

, 

ance. 

Aragou. 

Aragon. 

Comida. 

Dinner. 

Tie. 

Uncle. 

COilPO 

SETIOX. 

^  Que  hizo  V.  ayer  en  su  cuarto  ? 

Estudle  mi  leccion. 

ij  Que  ha  hecho  V.  hoy  ? 

He  cscrito  los  ejercieios. 

(,  Que  hace  el  zapatero  en  la  zapatcria  ? 

Hace  zapatos  y  botas  para  V. 

^Tiene  V.   papcl  para    cscribir    una 

carta? 
Si,  scnora,  lo  tcngo. 
6  Quiere  V.  cscribir  u  -.a  carta  por  ii.i 

hcrmano  ? 
^  Para  quicn  cs  la  carta  ? 
Es  para  Manuel. 
Yo  parto  para  Madrid. 
I  Para  donde  parte  V.  ? 
Parto  para  los  Estados  Unidos. 
I  Hablo  Y.  a  su  padre  por  mi  hermano  ? 

Hable  por  el  a  mi  padre  y  a  mi  tio. 


What  did  you  do  yesterday  in  your 

room  ? 
I  studied  my  lesson. 
V»'hat  have  you  done  to-day  ? 
I  have  written  my  exercises. 
What  does  the  shoemaker  do  in  the 

shoe-shop  ? 
lie  makes  shoes  and  boots  for  you. 
Uave  you  paper  to  write  a  letter  ? 

Yes,  madam,  I  have. 

Will  you  write  a  letter  for  my  brother? 

For  whom  is  the  letter  ? 

It  is  for  Emanuel. 

I  set  out  for  Madrid. 

For  where  do  you  set  out  ? 

I  set  out  for  the  United  States. 

Did  you  speak  to  your  father  for  my 

brother  ? 
I  spoke  for  him  to  my  father  and  to  my 

uncle. 


LESSON     XIX. 


I  Habla  V.  bien  el  francos  ? 

Lo  hablo  muy  bien,  y  hasta  paso  ]x>r 

frances. 
/  For  cuanto  vendio  V.  el  caballo  ? 
Lo  vendi  por  doscientos  cincuenta  pesos. 

I  Necesita  V.  enviar  por  algo  ? 

Necesito  enviar  por  el  mddico. 

g  Por  qu6  envia  V.  ? 

Envio  por  vino. 

g  Vive  V.  para  comer  ? 

No,  seSor,  como  para  vivir. 

I  Marcho    ayer  mucho    el  regimiento 

Septimo. 
Marcho  hasta  el  Parque  Central 


Do  you  speak  French  well  ? 

I  speak  it  very  well,  and  I  eve©  pass 
for  a  Frenchman. 

For  how  much  did  you  sell  the  horse  ? 

I  sold  it  for  two  hundred  and  fifty  dol- 
lars. 

Do  you  want  to  send  for  anything  ? 

I  want  to  send  for  the  physician. 

What  do  you  send  for  ? 

I  send  for  wine. 

Do  you  live  to  eat  ? 

No,  sir,  I  eat  to  Uve. 

Did  the  Seventh  regiment  march  much 
(fiir)  yesterday  ? 

They  marched  to  the  Central  Park. 


EXPLANATION. 

80.  Paea  and  Poe. — As  botli  these  prepositions  very  fre- 
quently answer  to  the  English  /or,  they  are  apt  to  be  con- 
founded by  foreignei-s.  Such  confusion  may,  however,  be 
avoided  by  bearing  in  mind  the  following  rules  : 

J^ara  expresses  aim,  object,  destination. 

JPor  conveys  the  idea  of  want  or  requirement,  substitution, 
favor,  duration  of  time,  direction,  &c.     Examples  : 

"niTII   POE. 
Escribo  por  mi  hermano. 
I  write  for  my  brother. 
Cambio  mi  sombrero  por  cl  suyo. 
I  changed  my  hat  for  his. 
Pasa  por  docto. 

He  passes  for  a  man  of  learning. 
Vendera  la  casa  por  diez  mil  pesos. 
He  will  sell  the  house  for  ten  thousand 

dollars. 
Trabajo  por  ganar  la  vida. 
I  work  to  (endeavor  to)  earn  my  living, 
liable /)or  tu  amigo. 
I  spoke  for  (in  favor  of)  thy  friend. 
Envio  por  pan. 
I  send  for  bread. 
Lo  hare  por  tu  hermano. 
I  will  do  it  for  thy   brother  (for  thy 

brother's  sake). 


■WITH   PAE.V. 
Tapelpara  escribir. 
Paper  for  writing. 
Este  libro  es  pa}-a  V. 
This  book  is  for  you. 
Parto  para  Nueva  York. 
I  start  for  New  York. 
Comer  para  vivir. 
To  cat  to  live. 

Trabajo  ^ra  ganar  la  vida. 

I  work  in  order  to  earn  a  living. 

JPara  el  domingo. 

For  Sunday. 

Este  caballo  ca  pai-a  su  padre  do  V. 

This  horeo  ii  for  your  father. 

Lo  hare  para  tu  hermano. 

I  shall  do  it  for  thy  brother. 


LESSON     XIX.  73 

81.  Entre. — The  general  meaning  of  this  preposition  is 
between  and  amongst ;  as, 


Entre  lo3  dos. 
Entre  V.  y  yo. 
Entre  todos. 


Between  the  two. 
Between  you  and  vac. 
Amongst  all. 


82.  Hasta  signifies  till,  until,  even,  to,  as  many  as,  as  far 
as  ;  as. 


Ilasta  el  doraingo. 
Pasaron  hasta  mil. 
Voy  hasta  el  Parquc  Central. 
Ilstudio    el    ospanol    hasta    que  lo 
aprendio. 


Till  (or  until)  Sunday. 

As  many  as  a  thousand  passed. 

I  go  as  far  as  the  Central  Park. 

He  studied  Spanish  till  he  learned  it. 


CONVERSxiTION  AJfD  VERSION. 

1.  ^Escribio  V.  la  carta  para  su  padre,  y  los  ejercicios  do  la  leccion  de 
espaflol  ?     Hicc  aqueUo ;  pero  no  he  hecho  esto. 

2.  I  Tiene  V.  papel  para  escribir  una  carta  ?     Si,  seilor ;  pero  tcngo 
que  escribir  antes  mis  ejercicios. 

3.  I  Hizo  el  sastre  mi  casaca  ?    La  hizo. 

4.  I  Qu6  ha  hecho  el  zapatero  ?     Ha  hecho  unas  botas  para  V.  y  unos 
zapatos  para  Manuel. 

5.  ^Para  donde  parte  V.  ?    Parto  para  los  Estados  Unidos. 

6.  ^Quiere  V.  escribir  una  carta  por  mi  hermano?     Si,  seQor,  ^para 
quien  es  la  carta?    Es  para  Dn.  Manuel. 

7.  I  Hablo  V.  d  su  padre  por  mi  hermano  ?     liable  por  el  u  mi  padre 
y  a  mi  amigo. 

8.  plabla  V.  bien  el  francos?    Lo  hablo  muy  bien,  y  liasta  paso  por 
frances.. 

9.  I  Por  cuiinto  vcndio  V.  la  casa  ?    La  vendi  por  ocho  mil  pesos. 

10.  I  Por  q\i6  cnvia  V.  ?     Envio  por  mis  libros. 

11.  2 Vive  V.  para  comer?     No,  scflor,  como  para  vivir. 

12.  ^March6  V.  ayer  con  el  regimiento  Septimo?     Mai'che  hasta  el 
Parque  Central. 

13.  gEs  Dn.  Pedro  escritor?    No,  sefior,  Dn.  Pedro  es  escribano. 

14.  ^De  qn6  manera  hace  V.  eso?    Lo  hago  asi. 

15.  ^Qu6  hizo  V.  ayer?    Estudio  la  leccion  do  espafiol,  y  hoy  he 
cscrito  los  ejercicios. 

16.  ^ Tiene  V.  que  trabajar  mas  que  yo?     Tengo  que  escribir  mas  que 
V. ;  pero  no  tengo  que  trabajar  mucho. 

17.  J  Ilacia  donde  van  Vds.  ?     Vamos  hacia  la  iglesia. 

18.  J  En  donde  ^Ive  V,  ?     Vivo  en  la  Cuarta  avenida  mimcro,  trescien- 
tos  treinta  y  oclio,  entre  las  calles  Veinte  y  cinco  y  Veinte  y  seis. 


74  LESSONXIX. 

19.  ^Para  qu6  quicre  V.  mi  libro?     Para  Icerlo. 

20.  I  Quien  pago  la  comida  ?     La  pagamos  entrc  todos. 

21.  J  Marchan  bien  cstos  hombres  ?     Marchan  muy  bien. 

22.  ^  Por  donde  pasaron  Vds.  cuando  fueron  a  la  iglesia  ?    Pasamos 
por  la  calle  Veinte  y  tres. 

23.  jEs  esa  aefiora  escritora?     Si,  sefior,  y  escribe  muy  bien. 

24.  jDe  que  pais  es  V.  ?     Soy  de  Espaua. 

25.  I  De  que  provincia  ?     De  Aragon. 

26.  I  Pronuncian  bien  el  espaQol  en  Aragon  ?    Lo  pronuncian  muy  bien. 

27.  ^Hablan  bien  el  inglds  en  los  Estados  Unidos  ?    Lo  liablan  bien. 

28.  I  Quierc  V.  vcnir  a  mi  casa  para  comer  con  nosotros  ?    No,  seiior, 
porque  tengo  que  ir  a  comer  a  casa  de  mi  amigo. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  How  far  did  tbe  Seventh  regiment  march  yesterday?    They  (it) 
marched  to  the  Central  Park. 

2.  Did  your  sister  set  out  yesterday  for  Philadelphia?    No,  madam, 
she  did  not  set  out  yesterday. 

3.  When  does  she  start  ?     She  starts  to-day. 

4.  What  does  your  servant  look  for  ?    He  looks  for  my  cousin's  (fern.) 
letter. 

5.  What  do  you  do  to  learn  Spanish  ?     I  study  the  lessons  of  my 
Spanish  grammar  and  read  good  writers. 

6.  To  whom  did  you  speak  last  night  at  the  concert  ?     I  spoke  to  the 
physician  for  Peter. 

7.  Who  is  that  man  who  came  to  your  house  last  night?     He  is  my 
brother's  servant. 

8.  Do  you  speak  Spanish  well  ?     No,  sir ;  but  I  speak  Italian  very 
well,  and  I  even  pass  for  an  Italian  (italiano). 

9.  How  did  your  uncle  spend  the  day  yesterday  ?     Studying  his  les- 
sons and  writing  to  Madrid. 

10.  Will  your  uncle  write  a  letter  for  (in  favor  of)  Charles?     He  will 
write  it. 

11.  Do  the  yoimg  ladies  want  to  send  for  anything?     They  vrant  to 
send  for  the  physician. 

12.  For  what  do  they  send  for  the  physician?     To  speak  for  their 
servant  {fern.). 

13.  Where  does  he  live?     In  Fifth   avenue,  between  Twenty-fourth 
and  Twenty-fifth  streets. 

14.  Wliere  do  you  send?    I  send  to  the  shoemaker's. 

15.  What  do  you  send  there  for?    For  some  boots  and  shoes  for 
Emanuel. 


LESSON     XX. 


15 


16.  How  do  you  write  your  exercises  without  ink?    I  write  them  with 
a  pencil. 

17.  How  did  Louis  write  his  exercise  the  other  day?    He  and  his  sis- 
ter wrote  it  between  them. 

18.  Have  you  sold  your  old  hat?    I  changed  it  for  Peter's  new  one. 

19.  Will  you  pass  me  that  paper  to  write  a  letter  for  my  brother? 
This  paper  is  not  for  letters. 

20.  "What  is  it  for  ?     It  is  for  my  exercises, 

21.  Whose  letter  is  that  ?     This  letter  is  for  your  mother. 

22.  Where  did  the  singer  go  last  year?    He  went  to  Aragon,  a  prov- 
ince in  Spain. 

23.  What  have  you  sent  for?    I  have  sent  for  notliing. 

24.  WUl  you  go  for  wine?     I  do  not  want  wine,  but  bread  and  meat. 

25.  Do  you  live  to  eat  ?    No,  sir,  I  eat  to  live. 

26.  Have  you  read  the  newspapers  to-day?     No,  sir;    but  I  have 
marched  with  my  regiment. 

27.  Has  the  tailor  made  my  vest  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  made  it  last  week. 

28.  Will  you  go  to  the  pianist's  for  my  piano?     No;  I  have  to  study 
my  lessons. 

29.  Do  you  write  before  studying?    No;  I  study  first  and  write  after- 
wards. 


LESSON    XX. 

Salir. 

To  go  out,  to  leave 

Saliendo. 

• 

Going  out. 

Salido. 

Gone  out. 

PEESEXT. 

Salgo. 

I  go  out. 

Sales. 

Thou  goest  out. 

Sale. 

He  goes  out. 

Salimos. 

We  go  out. 

Salis. 

You  go  out. 

Salen. 

They  go  out. 

PEETEEIT   DEFINITE. 

Sail. 

I  went  out. 

Saliste. 

Thou  wentest  out. 

Sali6. 

He  went  out. 

LESSON     XX. 


Salimo3. 
Salisteis. 
Salieron. 

Tanto. 

Cuanto. 

Como. 

Presto. 

Pronto. 

Temprano. 

Tarde. 

Mejor. 

Peor. 

Mayor. 

Menor. 

Mejor. 

Peor. 

Prudente. 

Imprudente. 

Pronto. 

Presto. 

Callado. 

Ilablador. 

Limpio. 

Vivo. 

Situado. 

Cansado. 

M6jico. 


"Wc  went  out. 
You  went  out. 
Tliey  went  out. 

So,  so  much,  as  much. 

IIow  much. 

As,  how. 

Soon,  speedily. 

Promptly,  quickly. 

Early. 

Late. 

Better. 

Worse. 

Greater,  larger,  older. 

Smaller,  younger. 

Better. 

"Worse, 

Pnident. 

Imprudent. 

Prompt,  quick,  ready. 

Ready,  prepared. 

Silent,  taciturn. 

Talkative. 

Cleanly,  clean. 

Lively,  alive. 

Situated. 

Tiresome,  tired. 


Mexico. 


Fccha. 


Date. 


COMPOSITION. 


iEs  Alejandro  Ian  prudente  como  su 
hermano  ? 

No,  senor,  Alejandro  cs  iniiy  impru- 
dente. Es  tan  imprudente  como  ha- 
blador. 

jSon  los  comerciantcs  mas  ricos  que 
los  medicos  ? 

Algunos  son  mas  ricos;  pero  otros  lo 
son  menos  que  los  medicos. 

I  Es  Nueva  York  mayor  que  Madrid  ? 

Madrid  cs  menor  que  Nueva  York. 


Is  Alexander  as  prudent  as  his  brother  ? 

No,  sir,  Alexander  is  very  imprudent. 
He  is  as  imprudent  as  talkative. 

Are  merchants  richer  than  physicians  ? 

Some  are  richer;   but  others  are  less 

rich  than  physicians. 
Is  New  York  larger  than  Madrid  ? 
Madrid  is  smaller  than  New  York. 


LESSON     XX. 


^Que  caballo  es  mcjor,  el  de  V.  6  cl 

mio? 
El  de  V.  es  mayor ;  pero  es  pcor  que  cl 

mio. 
(,  Tiene  V.  mas  de  cincucnta  pesos  ? 
No  tengo  mas  que  veinte  y  tres. 
El  tiene  tanto  dinero  como  V. 
Yo  estudio   taTito  como  V. ;  pero  no 

aprendo  tanto. 
El  habla   espanol   tan,  bicn  como  V. ; 

pero  no  lo  escribe  Can  bien. 
El  tiene  ianio  cuanto  quiere. 
Tengo  lan'.os  libros  y  tanto  papcl  como 

cl. 
Yo  escribo  mas  que  Y. ;   pero  Y.  Ice 

ma-t  que  yo. 
El  habla  menos  que  Y. 


"WTiich  horse  is   the  better,  yours  or 

mine? 
Yours  is  larger;  but  it  is  worse  than 

mine. 
Have  you  more  than  fifty  dollars  ? 
I  have  not  more  than  twenty-three. 
He  has  as  much  money  as  you. 
I  study  as  much  as  you ;  but  I  do  not 

learn  so  much. 
He  speaks  Spanish  as  well  as  you ;  but 

he  does  not  write  it  as  well. 
He  has  as  much  as  he  wishes. 
I  have  as  many  books  and  as  much 

paper  as  he. 
I  write  more  than  you ;  but  you  read 

more  than  I. 
He  speaks  less  th.an  you. 


EXPLAXATIOX. 

DEGEEE3    OF   COMPARISON. 

83.  The  adverbs  tanto  and  cuanto  lose  the  last  syllable,  to^ 
before  an  adjective  or  another  adverb. 

84.  The  comparative  of  equality  is  formed  by  placing  the 
adverb  tan^  so  or  as,  before,  and  como,  as,  after  the  adjec- 
tive; as, 

Alejandro  cs  tan  prudcnte  como  su  I  Alexander  is  as  prudent  as  his  sister. 
hcrmana.  | 

85.  CuAX  may  be  employed,  if  the  comparative  is  followed 
by  an  adjective  instead  of  a  noun ;  as, 

Es  tan  hablador  cTtan  imprudente.       |  He  is  as  talkative  as  imprudent. 
But  como  is  more  frequently  used. 

86.  The  comparative  of  superiority  is  formed  by  placing 
the  word  mas,  more,  before  the  adjective,  and  que,  than,  after 
it;  as. 

El  es  mas  rico  que  V.  |  He  is  richer  than  you. 

87.  The  comparative  of  inferiority  is  foi-med  by  placing 
the  word  menos,  less,  before,  and  que  after ;  as, 

El  es  niinos  rico  que  V.  |  He  is  less  rich  than  you. 

88.  JMayoe,  greater  or  larger;  siexor,  smaller;  mejoe,  bet- 


LESSON     XX. 


ter,  and  peoe,  worse,  are  already  in  the  comparative  degree, 
and  do  not  require  mas  or  m'enos  before  them ;  as, 
Esta  casa  es  mayor  6  menor  que  esa. 


Estc  caballo  es  mejor  6  peor  que  el 
mio. 


This  house  is  larffci-  or  smaller  than 

that  one. 
This  horse  is  belter  or  icorse  than  mine. 


89.  Tha7i,  after  comparatives  coming  before  numeral  ad- 
jectives, is  also  generally  translated  by  de  in  the  affirmative, 
and  que  in  the  negative ;  as, 

Tengo  mas  de  cincuenta  libros.  I  I  have  more  than  fifty  boolis. 

No  tengo  mas  que  veinte  pesos.  |  I  have  not  more  than  twenty  dollars. 

90,  Comparison  may  also  take  place  witli  relation  to  nouns, 
verbs,  and  adverbs;  but  its  form  is  so  similar  to  that  laid  down 
for  the  adjectives  that  the  learner  will  not  require  any  other 
explanation  than  the  examples  given  in  the  Composition. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Sale  Y.  tanto  como  su  hermano?  No,  scuor,  mi  hei'mano  sale 
mas  que  yo. 

2.  ^Cudndo  salimos  nosoti'os?     Xosotros,  saliraos  niuy  pronto. 

3.  ^Salio  su  hermano  temprano  de  casa?     Xo,  seuor,  salio  tardo. 

4.  ^Salieron  Yds.  pronto  del  teatro?     Si,  sefior,  salimos  may  pronto. 

5.  ^  Sale  Y.  presto  a  la  calle  ?     Si,  sefior,  salgo  muy  presto. 
G.  ^Salieron  Yds.  temprano  de  la  iglesia?     Salimos  tarde. 

v.  ^Cual  de  estas  dos  gramiiticases  mejor?  La  que  Y.  tienc  delante 
es  mejor  que  la  otra, 

8.  jEs  malo  este  caballo?    Es  peor  que  el  de  Y. 

9.  I  Es  buena  la  pluma  de  su  hermano  de  Y.  ?  Es  mejor  que  la  mia  y 
peor  que  la  de  Y. 

10.  ^  Cuanto  dinero  tiene  Y.  ?     Tengo  cnarenta  pesos. 

11.  J  Cuantos  libros  tiene  su  hermana?     Tiene  tantos  como  su  prima. 

12.  ^  Cudnto  tiempo  vivi6  Y.  en  Paris  ?     Yivi  cuatro  aflos. 

13.  ^  Es  su  hermano  mayor  6  menor  que  Y.  ?     Es  mayor. 

14.  ^  Quien  de  su  familia  de  Y.  habla  mejor  el  ingles?     Mi  hermano 
menor  lo  habla  mejor  que  todos. 

15.  I  Donde  lo  aprendi6  ?    En  Londres. 

16.  ^  Cudnto  tiempo  vivio  alia?     Seis  afios. 

17.  I  Cudndo  vino  de  alld?     Yino  el  afio  pasado. 

18.  jCudl  de  Yds.  dos  estudia  mas?    El  estudia  m^nos  que  yo;  pero 
aprende  mas.  t 


LESSON     XX.  79 

19.  ^  Cuiil  de  sus  liermanos  de  V.  es  mas  prudente?    El  mayor  es  muy 
callado  y  prudente ;  pero  el  menor  cs  vivo  6  imprudente. 

20.  I  Salieron  Vds.  del  coucierto  antes  que  nosotros  ?    No,  sellor,  sali- 
mos  despues. 

21.  ^Cuando  salio  su  amigo  do  Vds.  de  Nucva  York?     Salio  el  mes 
pasado  para  Paris. 

22.  I  Ouando  sale  V.  para  Filadelfia  ?    No  salgo  liasta  la  semaaa  que 
viene. 

23.  jllacia  donde  vive  su  amigo  de  V.  ?    Vive  ht'icia  la  plaza. 

24.  I  Por  d6ndc  vino  V.  de  Paris  ?     Vine  por  Inglaterra. 

25.  ^  En  d6nde  vive  V.  ?     En  ]a  Quinta  avenida  entre  las  calles  Treinta 
y  Treinta  y  una. 

26.  jQn6  caballo  cs  raejor,  el  de  V.  6  el  mio?    El  de  V.  es  mayor; 
pero  no  tan  bueno  conio  el  mio. 

27.  I  Tiene  V.  mas  de  cien  pesos  ?     Tengo  mas  de  ciento. 

28.  I  No  tiene  V.  mas  que  tres  pesos  ?     No,  sefior,  no  tengo  mas  quo 
dos. 

29.  ^Habla  V.  cspafiol  mejor  que  Luisa?     No,  sefior,  lo  liablo  peor; 
pero  lo  escribo  mejor  que  ella. 

30.  I  Sali6  V.  ayer  tcmprano  ?     Sali  teraprano ;    pero  boy  he  salido 
muy  tarde. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Have  you  written  your  letter?     Yes,  sir,  I  have  written  it. 

2.  What  is  the  date  of  it  (wliat  date  has  it)?    The  first  of  this  month. 

3.  Do  you  (plural)  go  out  much  ?     "We  go  out  this  year  as  much  as 
last  year. 

4.  Which  is  the  better  grammar,  mine  or  yours?      Yours  is  better 
than  mine,  but  not  so  large. 

5.  Which  of  the  two  goes  out  earlic:^you  or  your  cousin?     I  go  out 
earlier  than  he. 

6.  Are  merchants  as  rich  as  singers  ?     Some  singers  arc  richer  than 
merchants. 

7.  Is  tliis  horse  not  as  lively  as  that  one  ?     That  one  is  a  little  more 
lively  than  this  one. 

8.  Is  Mexico  as  large  as  the  United  States  ?     No,  miss,  the  latter  are 
much  larger  than  the  former. 

9^ When  do  the  musicians  leave  for  Havana?     They  leave  next  week 
(the  week  that  is  coming). 

10.  When  did  you  take  your  music  lesson  ?    I  took  it  the  day  before 
yesterday,  early. 


80  LESSONXX. 

11.  Did  your  brothers  take  theirs  as  early  as  you  ?  No,  sir,  they  took 
theirs  very  late. 

12.  "Which  of  you  two  speaks  Italian  better?  He  speaks  it  better 
than  I :  but  I  write  it  better  than  he. 

13.  Do  you  sing  much  every  day  ?  I  do  not  sing  as  much  as  last 
month. 

14. ■Ooes  the  notary  write  as  well  as  the  physician?  The  fonner 
Avrites  better  than  the  latter. 

15.  Is  that  man  not  very  tiresome  ?  He  is  very  talkative  and  very 
tiresome. 

16.  Is  Lewis  as  prudent  as  his  uncle?  He  is  more  prudent  than  he; 
but  not  so4;aciturn. 

17.  Are  you  less  taU  {alto)  than  Louisa?     No,  she  is  less  tall  than  I. 

18.  Is  your  uncle,  the  merchant,  as  rich  as  your  fother  ?  No,  sir,  my 
father  is  richer  than  he. 

19.  When  do  your  cousins  leave  for  Paris?     They  leave  very  soon. 

20.  Is  your  servant  as  cleanly  as  ours?  Ours  is  more  cleanly  than 
yours,  but  not  so  talkative. 

21.  Have  you  any  paper  for  writing?  I  have  as  much  paper  and  as 
much  ink  as  I  wish  for. 

22.  Is  Henry  very  prudent  ?     He  is  as  imprudent  as  talkative. 

23.  Who  goes  to  the  bakery  quicker  than  John?  Nobody  goes  as 
quick  as  he. 

24:.  Have  the  merchants  sent  as  much  silver  to  France  as  to  Spain  ? 
They  have  sent  more  to  France. 

25.  Did  the  shoemaker  make  the  shoes  as  quickly  as  the  tailor  made 
the  coat  ?  The  former  made  the  shoes  quicker,  because  he  worked  more 
than  the  latter. 

26.  Which  works  the  later,  the  tailor  or  the  baker?  The  latter  does 
not  Avork  so  late  as  the  former. 

27.  Are  your  father's  books  larger  than  ours  ?  Yours  are  smaller  than 
Ms. 

28.  Are  those  horses  bad  ?     Tliey  are  worse  than  the  others. 

29.  Will  you  go  with  your  friend  (/em.)  to  the  concert?     I  will  not  go. 

30.  Why  will  you  not  go  ?  Because  it  is  very  late,  and  I  have  to  play 
on  the  piano.    • 

31.  Where  did  your  mother  learn  Spanish?     She  learned  it  here. 

32.  And  does  she  speak  it  well  ?  She  does  not  speak  it  as  well  a^  she 
writes  it. 

33.  How  much  money  have  you  ?  I  have  not  more  than  seven  dollars. 
'  34.  Has  your  friend  as  much  as  you  ?  He  has  more  than  I ;  he  has 
received  more  than  two  hundred  dollars  from  Spain. 


LESSON     XXI. 


81 


LESSON    XXI. 


Saber. 
Sabiendo. 
Sabido. 

Se. 

Sabcs. 

Sabe. 

Saberaos. 

Sabeis. 

Saben. 

Supe. 

Supiste. 

Supo. 

Supimos. 
Supisteis. 
Supieron. 

Amar. 
Viajar. 

Trinidad  (fern). 
Sabio,  sapientisimo. 

Habil,  liabilisiino. 
Dificil,  dificilisimo. 
Facil,  facilisirao. 
Corto,  cortisimo. 
Alegre,  alegrisimo. 
Tristo,  tristisimo. 
Feliz,  felicisirao. 
Largo,  larguisimo. 
Fuertc,  fortisimo. 
Nuevo,  novisimo. 
Fiel,  fidelisimo. 
Alto,  altisimo. 
4* 


To  know. 
Knowing. 
Known. 

I  know. 
Thou  knowest. 
He  knows. 

"We  know. 
You  know. 
They  know. 

I  knew. 
Thou  knewest. 
He  knew. 

We  knew. 
You  knew. 
They  knew. 

To  love. 
To  travel. 

Trinity. 

Wise,  learaed ;  very,  most  or  ex- 
tremely wise. 
Clever,    skilful ;    very  clever. 
Difficult,  very  or  most  difficult. 
Easy ;  very  or  most  easy. 
Short ;  very  or  most  short. 
Cheerful ;  very  or  most  cheerful. 
Sad ;  very  or  most  sad. 
Happy ;  very  or  most  happy. 
Long ;  very  or  most  long. 
Strong ;  very  or  most  strong. 
New ;  very  or  most  new. 
Faithful ;  very  or  most  faithful. 
Tall ;  very  or  most  tall. 


82 


LESSON     XXI. 


inREGCLAE  COMPARATIVES  AND   SUPERLATIVES. 


Baeno,  mejor,  6ptimo. 
Malo,  peor,  p6simo. 
Grande,  major,  mdximo. 
Pequefio,  menor,  minimo. 
Alto,  superior,  supremo. 

Bajo,  inferior,  Infimo, 

Combinada. 


Good,  better,  best. 
Bad,  worse,  worst. 
Great,  greater,  greatest. 
Small,  smaller,  smallest. 

Higb,    \  ^ig^^^J"'  highest. 

(  superior,  supreme. 

•^°^'     1  -IJl^L    C  lowest. 
(  mierior,   ) 


Combined. 


COMPOSITIOX. 


Es  el  mas  sabio  de  mis  discipulos. 

Esta  senorita  cs  la  mas  amable. 

La  mayor  parte  del  regimiento. 

La  mayor  parte,  6  los  mas,  de  los  solda- 

dos. 
La  mejor  casa  de  la  calle. 
Manuel,  i  cuales  son  los  profesores  que 

saben  mas  en  tu  escuela  ? 
El  profesor  de  aritmetica  sabe  mucho, 

el   de  francos,    sabe  mas ;    pero   cl 

profesor  de  historia  cs  el  que  mas 

sabe. 
6  Es  bueno  estc  caballo  ? 
Este  caballo  es  muy  bueno ;  pero  cl  de 

V.  es  mejor,  y  cl  mio  es  cl  mejor  de 

los  tres. 
j  Es  esta  leccion  muy  facil  ? 
Es  facil isi ma. 

^  Es  su  casa  de  V.  tan  alta  como  la  mia  ? 
La  mia  es  mas  alta  que  la  de  V.,  y  la 

de  su  bermano  de  V.  cs  la  mas  alta. 
Ese  Frances  es  m^iy  caballero. 
f,  Es  alegre  6  triste  su  amigo  de  V.  ? 
Es  alegrisimo ;  pero  cs  muy  nino. 

ftEsmuyjoven? 
Xo,  senor,  es  viejo. 


He  is  the  wisest  of  my  pupils. 
This  young  lady  is  the  most  amiable. 
The  greater  part  of  the  regiment. 
The  greater  part,  or  the  most,  of  the 

soldiers. 
The  best  house  in  the  street. 
Emanuel,  which  are  the  professors  in 

your  school  who  know  the  most  ? 
The  professor  of  arithmetic  is  learned, 

the  French  professor  is  more  learned ; 

but  the  professor  of  history  is  the 

most  learned. 
Is  this  horse  good  ? 
This  horse  is  very  good ;  but  yours  is 

better,  and  mine  is  the  best  of  the 

three. 
Is  this  lesson  very  easy  ? 
It  is  most,  or  very  easy. 
Is  your  house  as  high  as  mine  ? 
Mine  is  higher  than  yours,  and  your 

brother's  is  the  highest. 
That  Frenchman  is  very  gentlemanly. 
Is  your  friend  cheerful  or  sad  ? 
He  is  most  cheerful ;  but  he  is  very 

childish. 
Is  he  very  young  ? 
No,  sir,  he  is  old. 


EXPLANAJIOX. 
91.  Englisli  superlatives  ending  in  est,  or  fonncd  by  most. 


LESSON     XXI.  83 

arc  rendered  by  placing  the  definite  article  before  the  Spanish 
comparative;  as, 

El  mas  sabio.   -  I      The  wisest. 

La  mas  amable.  |      The  most  amiable. 

92.  3Iost,  or  most  of,  when  followed  by  a  noun  (singular), 
is  translated  by  la  mayor  parte  ;  as. 

La  mayor  parte  del  regimiento.  |      Most  of  the  regiment. 

But  if  the  noun  is  iu  the  plural,  m,ost  may  also  be  translated  by 
m«5,  with  the  corresponding  article ;  as. 

La  mayor  parte,  6  los  mas,  de  los  I      M6st  of  the  soldiers, 
soldados.  | 

93.  The  preposition  in,  after  the  English  superlative,  is 
translated  by  de  in  Spanish ;  as, 

<iia  mejor  casa  de  la  calle.  |      The  best  house  in  the  street. 

94.  Those  superlatives  which  in  English  are  formed  with 
the  aid  of  very,  most,  &c.,  may  in  Spanish  be  formed  either 
with  the  help  of  m,ity  before  the  adjective,  or  by  adding  to  the 
latter  the  termination  tsimo ;  as, 

Iftiy  habil,  or  hahWisimo.  I      Very  clever. 

Mity  facil,  or  {nciUsimo.    %  \      Very,  or  most  easy. 

The  termination  isimo  is,  however,  more  expressive  of  the 
positive  superlative  degree  than  is  the  adverb  m,icy. 

95.  Observe  that  adjectives  ending  in  a  vowel  drop  that 
vowel  on  taking  the  termination  isimo ;  as. 


Short,  very  short. 
Cheerful,  most  cheerful. 
Sad,  very  sad. 


Corto,  cortisimo. 
Alegre,  alegrisimo. 
Triste,  tristisimo. 

96.  There  are  other  superlatives  ending  in  ^rrimo',  as, 

Celebre,  celebenimo.  I      Celebrated,  most  celebrated. 

Salubre,  saluberj-imo.  |      Salubrious,  very  salubrious. 

But  these  forms  are  not  the  most  used. 

97.  Adjectives  ending  in  the  following  letters  change  them 
before  admitting  the  termination  isimo :  .- 

Co  becomes  qu ;  as,  rico,  riyrtisimo. 

Go       "        gu ;  as,  largo,  larj'Misimo. 

Ele      "        hil;  as,  amable,  ama6?7isimo.  • 

Z        "  c ;  as,  feliz,  fclicisimo. 


84  LESSONXXI. 

98.  Superlatives  in  tsimo  irregularly  formed : 

Bueno,  good,  makes  bo7iisimo,  very  good. 
Ftierle,  strong,  makes  fortisimo,  very  strong. 
Kuevo,  new,  makes  novisimo,  very  new, 
iSabio,  wise,  makes  sapieniisimo,  very  wise. 
Sacro,  sacred,  makes  sacraiisimo,  very  sacred. 
Mel,  faithful,  makes  fiddisimo,  very  faithful. 

99.  Irregular  comparatives  and  superlatives: 
Bueno,  mejor,  optimo. 
Malo,  peor,  pesimo. 
Grande,  mayor,  m&ximo. 
PequcSo,  menor,  minimo. 
Alto,  euperior,  supremo. 
Bajo,  inferior,  infimo. 
Mucho,  mas,  lo  mas. 
Poco,  mcnos,  lo  m^nos. 

All  these  adjectives  form  also  a  superlative  in  tsimo^  accord- 
ing to  the  rules  already  given ;  as,  mallsimo^  poquUimo,  mu- 
cKisimo. 

They  admit  also  a  comparative  fonned  with  mas  or  menos ; 
and  a  superlative  with  mwy ;  as, 


Menos  malo. 
Los  mas  grandes. 
Muy  pequeiios. 


Less  bad. 
The  greatest. 
Very  small. 


100.  Substantives  used  adjcctively  admit  the  degrees  of 
comparison;  as, 


Es  mas  caballero  que  tu. 
Es  muy  hombre. 

Este  hombre  es  muy  niiio. 


He  is  more  gentlemanly  than  thou. 
He  is  very  much  of  a  man,  or  very 

manly. 
This  man  is  very  childish. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jSiipo  V.  su  leccion  antes  de  aver?    La  snpe  muy  Men,  y  la  s6 
todos  los  dias. 

2.  I  Ama  V.  a  su  hennano  ?     Le  amo. 

3.  I  Le  ama  a  V.  su  hermano  ?    Xo  lo  se. 

4.  A  quien  ama  "V.  ?    Amo  a  mis  papas. 

5.  ^Ila  viajado  V.  mucho?    He  ^'iajado  mucho  en  Europa;  pero  he 
viajado  muy  poco  en  America. 


LESSON     XXI.  85 

C.  ^  Sabe  V.  el  espauol  ?    Muy  poco,  sefiorita ;  pero  lo  aprendo. 

7.  Y  v.,  sefiorita,  i  lo  sabe  V.  ?    No,  sefior,  no  lo  se,  ni  lo  aprendo, 

8.  ^  Porqu6  no  estudia  V.  el  espafiol  ?    Porquc  aprendo  la  mtisica,  y 
no  tengo  tierapo  para  cstudiarlo. 

9.  jEs  muy  bdbil  su  profesor  de  mtisica  de  V.  ?    Es  habilisimo. 

10.  J  Sabe  V.  cantar?    No,  sefiora,  pero  se  tocaann  poco  el  piano. 

11.  ^No  sabe  V.  tocar  la  guitai'ra?    No,  scQora,  toco  el  violin. 

12.  ^Aprende  bien  ese  caballero  el  espaliol?  Estudia  muchfl  y  lo 
nprende  muy  bien. 

13.  ^  Qui6n  aprendo  mas  pronto  cl  espafiol,  las  selloras  6  los  caballeros? 
Las  seQoras  aprenden  mucbo  mas  pronto. 

14.  i  Quien  es  el  mas  sabio  de  sus  discipulos  do  V.  ?  La  sefiorita  N,,  es 
la  mas  sabia  de  todos  mis  discipulos. 

15.  I  Cual  de  estos  niflos  es  el  mejor  ?  El  que  ama  a  sus  padres,  y  es- 
tudia mas  sus  lecciones,  es  el  mejor. 

IG.  ^Marcb6  todo  el  regimicnto  7°.  por  Broadway  basta  el  Parque 
Central  ?    No,  sefior,  pero  la  mayor  parte  de  61. 

17.  I  Fueron  al  campo  los  soldados  ?  Los  mas  de  los  soldados  fucron 
alia. 

18.  ^Es  esta  la  mejor  casa  de  la  calle?  No,  sefior,  esta  casa  es  muy 
buena ;  pero  la  de  Astor  es  mejor  y  la  de  Stewart  es  la  mejor  do  la 
ciudad. 

19.  J  Sabe  V.  quien  paso  por  aqui  anocbe?  No,  sefior,  pero  se  quien 
pas6  por  la  5»  avenida. 

20.  ^  Es  bueno  este  caballo  ?  Este  caballo  es  muy  bueno ;  pero  el  de 
V.  es  mejor,  y  el  mio  es  el  mejor  de  los  tres. 

21.  ^Es  caballero  ese  Frances?     Si,  sefior,  es  muy  caballero. 

22.  I  Es  ese  bombre  alegro  6  triste  ?  Es  muy  alegre ;  pero  es  muy 
nifio. 

-23.  ^Fu6  V.  al  concierto  la  semana  pasada?     Fui  antes  de  ayer. 

24.  I  Quiere  V.  tocar  el  piano  ?     Quiero,  pero  no  se. 

25.  I  Ha  venido  su  amigo  de  V.  ?    Ila  venido. 

26.  jOuando  vino  ?    Vino  antes  de  ayer. 

27.  I  Cuando  sale  V.  ?    Quiero  salir  la  semana  que  viene. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  know  French  ?    No,  sir,  but  my  brother  knows  it. 

2.  Is  that  physician  clever  ?    He  is  most  clever. 

3.  "Which  is  the  most  skilful  physician  ?     Ours  is  the  most  skilful  in 
the  city. 

4.  Is  Miss  Louisa  very  amiable  ?    Yes,  she  is  very  amiable. 


86  LESSOKXXI. 

5.  Alexander,  which  is  the  most  learned  teacher  in  your  school  i 
The  English  teacher  is  learned,  the  teacher  of  arithmetic  is  more  learned ; 
but  the  Italian  teacher  is  the  most  learned  of  all. 

6.  Is  your  school-mistress  cheerful,  Louisa  ?  Yes,  mamma,  she  is  most 
cheerful  and  very  happy. 

7.  Did  you  know. your  lessons  well  yesterday?  Yes,  I  knew  them 
very  well,  better  than  to-day's,  for  I  have  not  had  time  to  study  them. 

8.  Does  yoiu-  brother  know  his  every  day  ?  I  do  not  know ;  but  he 
works  very  little. 

9.  Is  he  taciturn  ?    No,  sir,  he  is  very  talkative. 

10.  "Which  is  the  largest  church  in  New  York  ?  Trinity  Church  is  the 
largest  and  the  handsomest  in  the  city. 

11.  Whose  is  that  handsome  house  there?    It  is  my  uncle's. 

12.  Is  it  not  the  finest  in  the  street  ?  No ;  Mr.  Emanuel's  is  the  finest 
in  the  city. 

13.  Did  the  12th  Regiment  go  out  to  march  yesterday  ?  Not  ah,  but 
the  greater  part  went  out. 

14.  Did  not  all  the  soldiers  march  through  Fourteenth  street  last 
Thursday  ?  The  most  of  them  marched  through  Fourteenth  street,  but 
not  aU. 

15.  Is  your  Spanish  lesson  for  to-day  diflScult  ?  Yes,  it  is  the  most 
difficult  (that)  I  have  had  this  month. 

16.  Is  your  French  lesson  very  difficult,  Charles  ?  No,  sir ;  my  French 
lesson  for  to-day  is  the  easiest  one  in  the  grammar. 

17.  Which  is  the  best  Spanish  grammar?  The  Combined  Spanish 
Grammar  is  the  best  and  the  easiest. 

18.  Is  not  your  table  very  low  for  writing?  Yes,  it  is  very  low;  I 
write  better  on  a  higher  one. 

19.  "Will  you  take  this  small  pen  to  write  your  exercise?  No;  I  do 
not  write  well  with  my  own,  which  is  very  small,  but  lai-ger  than 
yours. 

20.  Have  you  travelled  much  in  Europe  ?  I  have  travelled  very  much 
in  America,  but  very  little  in  Europe. 

21.  Which  is  the  longest  street  in  New  York  ?  Broadway  is  the 
longest  in  the  United  States. 

22.  Do  you  love  your  parents  ?     Yes,  I  love  them  very  much. 

23.  Why  does  Margaret  not  love  her  cousin?  She  does  not  love  him 
because  he  is  very  taciturn. 

24.  Which  of  your  pupils  is  the  wisest  ?  Henry  and  Louisa  are  the 
wisest  of  all  my  pupils. 

25.  Who  reads  tlie  most  newspapers  in  your  house?  I  do  not  know  ; 
but  papa  reads  a  great  many. 


LESSON      XXII. 


87 


26.  To  whom  have  you  paid  the  most  money  to-day  ?    I  have  paid 
most  to  the  tailor,  because  he  has  worked  most  for  me. 

27.  Does  not  your  washerwoman  work  very  much  ?     Yes,  she  works 
very  much,  but  earns  (ganar)  very  Uttle  money. 

28.  Whose  horse  is  the  most  Uvely,  yours,  Charles',  or  mine  ?    Charles' 
is  lively,  mine  is  more  hvcly,  but  yours  is  the  liveliest  of  the  three. 

29.  In  what  street  do  you  live  ?     I  live  in  Twenty -third  street. 

30.  Is  that  a  fine  street  ?    Yes,  it  is  one  of  the  finest  streets  up-town 
(of  the  upper  part  (j>arte  alta)  of  the  city). 


LESSON    XXII. 


Estar 

To  be  (in  a  certain  place, 

state  or  condition). 

Estoy. 

I  am. 

Estas. 

Thou  art. 

Esta. 

He  is. 

Estamos. 

We  are. 

Estais. 

You  are. 

Estan. 

They  are. 

Prestar.                                       1 

To  lend. 

GEED 

NDS. 

Hablando. 

Speaking. 

Estudiando. 

Studying. 

Comprando. 

Buying. 

Buscando. 

Looking  for. 

Necesitando. 

Needing,  wanting,  requiring. 

Aprendiendo. 

Learning. 

Vendiendo. 

Selling. 

Leyendo. 

Reading. 

Bebiendo. 

Drinking. 

Comiendo. 

Eating,  dming. 

Escribiendo. 

Writing. 

Recibiendo. 

Receiving. 

Viviendo. 

Living. 

Residiendo. 

Residing. 

Teniendo. 

Having,  holding. 

Siendo. 

Being. 

Qneriendo. 

Wishing,  desiring,  loving. 

88 


LESSC^r     XXII. 


Llevando. 

En\'ian<lo.  • 

Tomando. 

Pagando. 

Pronunciandcf. 

Cantando. 

Tocando. 

Haciendo. 

Pasando. 

Trabajando. 

Mandando. 

Yendo. 

Viniendo. 

Estando. 

Norte,  sur,  este,  oeste. 


Carrying,  taking. 

Sending. 

Taking. 

Paying. 

Pronouncing. 

Singing,  chanting. 

Toucliing,  playing. 

Doing,  making. 

Passing. 

Working. 

Sending,  commanding. 

Going, 

Coming. 

Being  (in  a  certain  state,  &c.). 

North,  south,  east,  west. 


COMPOSITION. 


/  ^s  su  casa  do  V.  grande  ? 

Us  grande ;  pero  estd  en  mal  estado. 

i  En  que  callc  estd  la  casa  de  su  herma- 

no  de  V.  ? 
Ustd  en  la  Cuarta  avcaida. 
^  Es  Luisa  bonita  ? 
Es  muy  bonita. 
i  Estd  ella  contenta  ? 
No  estd  contenta,  porquc  estd  enferma. 

I  Es  enfermiza  ? 

Lo  es  mucho. 

6  De  qui6n  cs  esta  casa  ? 

Es  de  mi  hermano. 

Estd  muy  bien  situada. 

Esta  carta  cs  para  Margarita. 

Nueva  York  estd  cntre  cl  rio  del  Norte 

y  el  del  Este. 
El  senor  Walker  cs  pintor. 
La  mesa  cs  de  madera. 
Estuve  en  casa  hasta  que  Y.  Ucgo. 
Mi  amigo  estd  pai'a  partir. 
Estoy  sin  comer. 
6  Qu6  estd  V.  haciendo  ? 
Estoy  escribiendo. 


Is  your  bouse  large  ? 

It  is  large  ;  but  it  is  in  a  bad  state. 

In  what  street  is  yovu*  brother's  house  ? 

It  is  in  (the)  Fourth  Avenue. 

Is  Louisa  pretty  ? 

She  is  very  pretty. 

Is  she  contented  ? 

She  is  not  contented,  because  she  is 

sick. 
Is  she  sickly  ? 
She  is  very  much  so. 
Whose  house  is  this  ? 
It  is  my  brother's. 
It  is  very  well  situatcil. 
This  letter  is  for  Margarc!. 
New  York  is  between  the  I.'crl'.i  ;:.:■;! 

East  rivers. 
Mr.  Walker  is  a  painter 
The  table  is  of  wood. 
I  was  at  home  until  you  arrived. 
My  friend  is  about  to  set  out. 
I  have  not  dined  (I  am  without  eating). 
What  arc  you  doing  ? 
I  am  writing. 


LESSON     XXII. 


89 


I  De  quien  es  V.  amado  ? 

Soy  amado  de  mis  niuos. 

Manuel  es  bucno. 

Manuel  cstd  malo. 

/  Esid  Pedro  cansado  ? 

Estd  cansado  y  es  cansado. 

^  Porque  esld  tan  callado  Alejandro  ? 

Porque  es  callado. 


Ey  whom  arc  you  loved  ? 
I  am  loved  by  my  children. 
Emanuel  is  good. 
Emanuel  is  ill. 
Is  Peter  tired  ? 

lie  is  tired,  and  be  u  tiresome 
Why  is  Alexander  so  silent  ? 
Because  he  is  taciturn. 


EXPLANATION. 

101.  See  and  Estar. — These  two  verbs  have  in  English  but 
one  equivalent — to  be  ;  but  their  respective  significations  and 
uses  are  so  materially  different  as  to  constitute  one  of  the  chief 
difficulties  of  the  Spanish  language.  By  careful  observation, 
however,  of  the  following  simple  rule,  the  learner  will,  we  are 
assured,  be  enabled  to  overcome  that  difficulty,  and  know  ex- 
actly when  to  use  the  one  and  when  the  other  of  these  two 
verbs. 

102.  Whenever  we  wish  to  exjoress  what  persons  or  things 
are^  and  their  mode  of  being,  in  an  absolute  manner,  see  is  the 
verb  to  be  employed ;  but  if  we  desire  to  express  the  state  or 
condition  of  persons  or  things,  and  the  mode  of  that  state  or 
condition  in  a  relative  manner,  then  estar  must  be  used. 

The  following  examples  will  serve  to  render  the  application 
of  this  rule  more  clear  : 


1st.  Esta  casa  es  grande. 

2d.    Esta  casa  estd  limpia. 

3d.    Esta  casa  estd  en  Broadway. 

4th.  Luisa  es  bonita. 

5th.  Luisa  es  feliz. 

Gth.  Luisa  estd  contenta. 

Tth.  Luisa  estd  enferma. 

8th.  Luisa  es  enfermiza. 


This  house  is  large. 
This  house  is  clean. 
This  house  is  in  Broadway. 
Louisa  is  pretty. 
Louisa  is  happy. 
Louisa  is  content. 
Louisa  is  sick. 
Louisa  is  sickly. 


In  the  first  example  we  use  ser  to  express  what  Jci7id  of  a 
bouse  the  one  referred  to  is — i.  e.  large ;  in  the  second,  estak, 
inasmuch  as  we  desire  to  express  Jioio,  or  in  wJiat  state  the 
house  is,  i.  e.  in  a  clean  state ;  estar  is  also  employed  in  the 
third,  sixth  and  seventh  examples,  the  object  being  to  make 
known  respectively  wliere  the  house  is,  and  in  what  state  or 


90 


LESSOIf      XXII, 


condition  Louisa  is  or  finds  herself ;  while  in  the  fourth,  fifth 
and  eightli  ser  again  comes  into  play,  seeing  we  wish  to  desitr- 
nate  Louisa's  mode  of  being  in  an  absolute  manner. 

From  the  above  general  rule  may  be  deduced  the  folio  win  f 
observations : 

1st.  That  SEE  must  be  used  whenever  we  -wish  to  express 
possession,  use,  purpose  or  destination ;  to  point  out  the  nation- 
ality, profession  or  calling  of  persons ;  the  place  of  production 
of  things  or  the  materials  of  which  they  are  composed ;  the 
simple  fact  of  existence,  the  occurrence  of  events;  and,  finally, 
as  an  auxiliary  in  forming  the  passive  voice  of  verbs. 

2d.  That  estak  is  to  be  employed  in  speaking  of  situation 
or  position,  place,  state  or  condition,  in  making  the  progressive 
form  in  ndo  (corresponding  to  the  English  ing)  of  other  verbs ; 
and,  lastly,  to  govern  verbs  in  the  infinitive  mood  with  the  aid 
of  a  preposition,  or  past  participles  Avithout  such  aid. 

N.  B. — The  verb  estar  can  never  be  used  with  the  present 
participles  of  ir  and  venir. 

Examples  of  the  uses  of  ser  and  est^ve  : 


6ER. 

La  casaca  fs  dc  mi  hermano. 

The  coat  is  xny  brotlier's. 

La  carta  es  para  Margarita. 

The  letter  is  for  Margaret. 

El  sefior  Walker  es  pintor. 

Mr.  Walker  is  a  painter. 

Este  vino  es  de  Espana. 

This  wine  is  from  Spain. 

La  mesa  es  de  madera. 

The  table  is  of  wood. 

Has  sido  prudente  en  hacerlo  asi. 

Thou  hast  been  prudent  in  so  doing 

Hoy  es  la  celebracion. 

The  celebracion  is  to-day. 

Son  las  diez. 

It  is  ten  o'clock. 

File  el  caso  como  yo  escribi  a  V. 

The  case  was  as  I  wrote  to  you. 

Soy  amado. 

I  am  loved. 


ESTAE. 

Esta  casa  esld  bien  situada. 
This  house  is  well  situated. 
Xueva  York   cstd  entre   el   rio   del 

Norte  y  el  del  Este. 
New  York  is  between  the  North  and 

East  rivers. 
Estuve  en  casa  hasta  que  llego. 
I  was  at  home  until  he  arrived. 
El  estd  escribiendo. 
He  is  writing. 
Mi  amigo  estd  para  partir. 
My  friend  is  about  to  set  out 
Estoy  por  no  hacerlo. 
I  am  inclined  not  to  do  it. 
Estamos  sin  comer. 
We  have  not  dined  (or  eaten). 
Esta  carta  estd  fechada  en  Madrid. 
This  letter  is  dated  from  Madrid. 


LESSON      XXII. 


91 


N.  B, — As  it  frequently  occurs  that,  in  perfect  accordance 
with  the  rules  of  grammar,  the  same  sentence  may  be  construed 
with  either  ser  or  estar,  though  conveying  entirely  different 
ideas,  it  is  essential  to  inquire  thoroughly  into  the  respective 
value  of  these  two  verbs,  in  order  to  avoid  the  confusion  which 
must  necessarily  arise  from  their  misapplication.  The  impor- 
tant nature  of  this  remark  may  be  seen  from  the  following 
examples : 


"WITH   SER. 
Manuel  cs  bucno. 
Emanuel  is  good. 
Juan  cs  malo. 
John  is  bad  (or  wicked). 
Pedro  cs  cansado. 
Peter  is  tiresome. 
Juana  cs  viva. 
Jane  is  lively. 
Alejandro  es  callado. 
Alexander  is  taciturn. 
Este  niQo  es  limpio. 
This  child  is  cleanly. 
Esta  naranja  es  agria. 
This  is  a  sour  orange  {i.  e.  of  the  sour 
species). 


WITH  ESTAE. 

Manuel  csld  bueno. 

Emanuel  is  well. 

Juan  csld  malo. 

John  is  sick. 

Pedro  estd  cansado. 

Peter  is  tired. 

Juana  estd  viva. 

Jane  is  alive. 

Alejandro  estd  callado. 

Alexander  is  silent. 

Este  nino  edd  limpio. 

This  child  is  clean. 

Esta  naranja  eM  agria. 

This  orange  is  sour  (i.  c.  unripe). 


What  is  said  in  the  course  of  the  present  lesson  relative 
to  SES  and  estar,  being  all  that  is  requisite  to  enable  the 
student  to  determine  which  of  the  two  is  to  be  used  in  any 
ordinary  case,  his  attention  shall  not  again  be  called  to  them 
until  we  come  to  treat  of  their  idiomatic  uses. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^  Qne  esta  haciendo  el  miichacho  ?    Esta  estudiando  su  leccion. 

2.  I  lla  estudiado  V.  la  suya  ?     La  estudie  ayei*. 

3.  I  De  quien  es  V.  amado  ?     Soy  amado  de  mis  nifios. 

4.  I  Esta  V.  cscribiendo  sus  cjcrcicios  ?     No,  sefior,  estoy  escribiendo 
una  carta. 

5.  I  Esta  Margarita  cansada  ?     Margarita  no  esta  cansada  ;    pero  es 
cansada. 

6.  I  Porquc  esta.  Pedro  tan  callado  ?     Porque  es  callado. 

7.  I  Para  quieu  es  esta  carta  ?     Es  para  V. 


92  LESSON      XXII. 

8.  I  En  donde  esta  situada  Xueva  York  ?    Esta  situada  cntre  el  rio  del 
Norte  y  el  del  Este. 

9.  ^Es  V.  Espaflol?     No,  scQor,  soy  Americano. 

10.  ^Es  ese  caballero  abogado?     No,  seflor,  es  medico. 

11.  ^  C6mo  esta  Alejandro  ?    Esta  bueno. 

12.  ^Es  Alejandro  buen  muchacbo?    Es  bueno. 

13.  ^Estuvo  V.  ayer  en  mi  casa?    Estuve  alii  hasta  que  su  padre  do 
Y.  vino. 

14.  ^De  qu6  es  este  tintero?    Es  dc  madera. 

15.  2  Es  grande  su  jardin  de  V.  ?    Es  grandisimo ;   pero  esta  en  mal 
estado. 

16.  ^En  que  calle  esta  su  casa  de  Y.  ?    Esta  en  la  Cuarta  avenlda. 

17.  ^Es  hermosa  la  casa  de  su  amigo  de  Y.  ?    Es  hermosisima. 

18.  ^Es  Luisa  feliz?    Lnisa  es  muy  feliz;  pero  no  esta  contenta,  por- 
que  no  vino  Y.  a  verla  (to  see  her). 

19.  ^Es  Y.  enfermizo?    No,  sefior;  pero  estoy  enfermo. 

20.  ^De  quien  es  aquclla  casa   tan  alta?       Es  de  un  amigo  mio ;  pero 
quicre  venderla  porque  esta  mal  situada  en  esta  calle  tan  fca. 

21.  I  Cuando  parte  Y.  ?    No  se,  quiero  partir  hoy,  porque  tengo  muclio 
que  hacer. 

22.  I  Parti6  su  amigo  de  Y.  aver  ?    No,  seOor,  ha  partido  hoy. 

23.  ^  Fue  Y.  a  la  iglesia  el  domingo  pasado  ?     Si,  seflor,  voy  a  la  iglesia 
todos  los  domiugos,  cuando  no  estoy  enfermo. 

24.  I  Yive  su  amigo  de  Y.  en  el  campo  ?    No,  seflor,  reside  en  la 
ciudad. 

25.  I  Que  hace  en  la  ciudad  ?    Trabaja  de  abogado. 

26.  I  Que  hace  Y.  ?     To  vendo  y  compro  :  soy  comerciantc. 

27.  I  Pas6  Y.  por  Paris,  cuando  fue  a  Madrid  ?     Si,  seflor,  y  por  otras 
muchas  ciudades  de  Francia  y  Espafia. 

28.  2  Yiaja  Y.  mucho?     He  viajado  mucho;  pero  no  viajo  mas. 

29.  J  Yiaj6  Y.  en  M6jico?     Si,  seflor,  estuve  alii  el  aflo  pasado. 

30.  I  Es  bonito  pais  ?    El  pais  es  hennosisimo. 

EXCERCISE. 

1.  "Wliere  is  your  house  situated?    In  Eleventh  street. 

2.  Is  it  very  large  ?    No,  sir,  it  is  not  as  large  as  my  uncle's. 

3.  Which  of  the  three  languages*  English,  French  or  Spanish,  is  the 
richest  ?    The  Spanish  is  much  richer  than  the  other  two. 

4.  Do  you  speali  Spanish  ?    No,  madam ;  but  I  am  learning  it. 

5.  Do  you  and  your  sister  take  a  lesson  to-day?    No,  oiu*  tcacljer  is 
not  coming  (does  not  come)  to-day,  he  is  sick. 

*  Lengnos. 


LESSONXXII.       ^  93 

6.  What  lesson  are  you  at  (in).  We  arc  at  the  twenty-second,  one 
of  the  most  difficult  iu  the  grammar. 

Y.  Is  Louis  very  taciturn ?  he  speaks  very  little.  Iso,  sir,  ho  is  not 
taciturn ;  but  he  is  silent  to-day,  because  he  is  unwell. 

8.  Why  is  Henry  so  cheerful  to-day?  He  is  cheerful  because  he  has 
received  letters  from  his  father  and  mother. 

9.  Is  he  a  good  boy  ?  He  is  a  very  good  boy ;  he  is  studying  his 
Italian  lesson. 

10.  How  is  your  friend  to-day  ?    He  is  much  better  than  yesterday. 

11.  Where  is  that  wine  from  that  Charles  is  drinking  ?    It  is  from  Spain. 

12.  Has  your  father  been  prudent  in  selling  his  horse  ?  He  has  been 
most  imprudent  in  selling  it. 

13.  Whom  do  you  love  ?  I  love  my  father  and  mother,  and  I  am  loved 
by  them. 

14.  Where  is  that  letter  from  ?    It  is  (comes)  from  Paris. 

15.  Have  you  {plural)  dined  to-day?  .Fo,  sir,  we  have  not  dined; 
our  servant  is  very  ill. 

16.  What  do  you  do  evci'y  day  to  pass  the  time  ?  Sometimes  I  sing 
and  play  on  the  piano,  and  at  others  I  read  the  newspapers  and  go  out 
to  walk  {pasear). 

17.  What  does  Mr.  Emanuel  do  ?    He  is  a  merchant. 

18.  For  whom  is  that  letter  that  Louisa  is  -writing?  It  is  for  her 
cousin  (fern.). 

19.  Is  Alexander  a  tiresome  boy?  No,  madam,  but  he  went  to  walk 
very  early,  and  he  is  tired. 

20.  Was  Louis  at  your  house  yesterday  ?  Yes,  sir,  he  was  tlierc  until 
my  uncle  came. 

21.  How  is  your  uncle  to-day?  He  is  very  well;  he  is  about  to  set 
out  for  Paris. 

22.  Is  Ilcnry  tired  ?    Ko  ;  but  he  is  very  tiresome. 

23.  Whose  book  is  that  ?  It  is  my  friend's ;  but  he  wants  to  sell  it, 
because  it  is  very  badly  written. 

24.  How  much  docs  he  "want  for  it  ?    He  wants  five  dollars  and  a  half.* 

25.  Is  it  in  French  ?     No,  sir,  it  is  in  Spanish. 

26.  When  do  you  (plural)  leave  for  Europe  ?    We  leave  very  soon. 

27.  Have  you  a  garden  at  your  house  ?  Yes,  sir,  I  have  a  very  fine 
garden. 

28.  Is  it  very  large  ?    It  is  very  large. 

29.  What  is  your  friend  doing  in  Paris  ?  He  is  studymg  law  (for  a 
lawyer). 

80.  And  you,  what  do  you  do  in  Philadelphia?    I  work  as  a  notary. 
31,  Whom  is  this  letter  from?    It  is  from  the  pianist,  and  for  you. 

*  Medio. 


94 


LESSON     XXIII. 


LESSON    XXIII. 


FUTURE 

SIMPLE. 

First  Conjugation. 

Ilabl-ar^. 

I  sball  speak. 

Habl-aras. 

Tliou  wilt  speak. 

Ilabl-ara. 

He  will  speak. 

Habl-ar^mos. 

"We  sball  speak. 

Habl-ar^is. 

You  will  speak. 

Ilabl-ardn. 

\          They  will  speak. 

Second 

Conjugation. 

Aprend-er6. 

I  sball  learn. 

Aprend-erds. 

Tbou  wilt  learn. 

Aprend-era. 

He  will  learn. 

Aprend-eremos. 

"Wc  sball  learn. 

Aprend-er6is. 

You  will  learn. 

Aprend-erdn. 

They  will  learn. 

TUrd 

Conjugation. 

Escrib-ir6. 

I  sball  write. 

Escrib-iras. 

Thou  wilt  write. 

Escrib-ird. 

He  will  write. 

Escrib-ir^mos. 

We  shall  write. 

Escrib-ireis. 

You  will  write. 

Ecrib-iran. 

They  will  write. 

Desear. 

To  desire. 

Practicar. 

To  practise. 

Bailar. 

To  dance. 

Principiar. 

To  commence,  to  begin. 

Acabar. 

To  finish. 

Medio. 

Half. 

Pr6ximo. 

Next. 

Entonces. 

Then. 

Anocbe. 

Last  night. 

Antes  de  anocbe. 

The  night  before  last. 

Mafiana. 

To-morrow. 

LESSOJf     XXIII. 


95 


Pasado  maflana. 

The  day 

after  to-morro-vr. 

La  maiiana. 

The  moruing. 

Si. 

If. 

Gusto. 

Taste,  pleasure. 

Noche. 

Night. 

Deseo. 

Desire,  mind. 

Gracias. 

(to  give)  Thanks. 

Negocios. 

Business,  occupa- 

Familia. 

Family. 

tion. 

Practica. 

Practice. 

Oficio. 

Office. 

Teoria. 

Theory. 

Minuto. 

"Minute. 

Ilora. 

Hour. 

Segnndo. 

Second. 

Polca. 

Polka. 

Vals. 
Idioma. 

Waltz. 
Language. 

Lengua. 

Tongue,  language 

COMPO 

3ITI0X. 

i  Estudiard  Y.  mauana  su  leccion  de  es- 

pafiol? 
Si,  senor,  la  estudiar6  mafiana  por  la 

maiiana. 
(,  A  que  hora  principiara  V.  ? 
Principiare  k  las  tres  de  la  manana. 

SeSorita,  ^  quicre  V.  bailar  un  vals  ? 
Gracias,  caballero,  no  se  bailar  vals. 

I  Bailara  V.  una  polca  ? 

Si,  scnor,  con  mucho  gusto. 

Hablo  mal  el   espaQol,  porquo  no  lo 

practico. 
V.  neeesita  practicar  mucho  para  aprcn- 

der  una  lengua, 
Practicaro  en  Espaiia,  porque  ire  alll 

muy  pronto. 
6  Que  dias   toma  V.  sus  lecciones  de 

piano  ? 
Las  tomo  los  lines  y  los  viemes,  a  las 

once  de  la  manana. 
6  A  que  hora  tomara  V.  las  lecciones 

de  Frances. 
Las  tomare  a  las  diez. 
i  Que  hora  es  ? 
Es  la  \ina. 


Will  you  study  your  Spanish  lesson  to- 
morrow ? 
Yes,  sir,   I  will    study  it    to-morrow 

morning. 
At  what  hour  will  you  commence  ? 
I  shall  commence  at  three  o'clock  in 

the  morning. 
Will  you  (dance  a)  waltz,  Miss  ? 
Thank  you,  sir,  I  do  not  know  how  to 

waltz. 
Will  you  dance  a  polka  ? 
Yes,  sir,  with  great  pleasure. 
I  speak  Spanish  badly,  because  I  do 

not  practise  it. 
You  require  to  practise  a  great  deal  in 

order  to  learn  a  language. 
I  will  practise  in  Spain,  because  I  shall 

go  there  very  soon. 
On  what  days  do  you  take  your  piano 

lessons  ? 
I  take  them  on  Mondays  and  Fridays, 

at  11  o'clock  in  the  morning. 
At  what  hour  will  you  take  your  French 

lessons  ? 
I  shall  take  them  at  10  (o'clock). 
Wliat  o'clock  is  it  ? 
It  is  one  (o'clock). 


98 


LESSON     XXIII. 


Son  las  once  y  cuarto. 

Son  las  tres  menos  diez  minutos. 

Mafiana  ire  al  campo,  y  pasado  maua- 

na  tendre  el  gusto  de  pasar  el  dia 

con  V. 
Gracias ;  entonces  sere  muy  feliz. 
6  Bailaremos  en  su  casa  de  V.  ? 
Si,  senor,  bailaremos,  cantar^mos,  toca- 

rdmos  y  practicaremos    el   espauol 

toda  la  noche. 
Muy  bien,  muy  bien ;  entonces  seremos 

mas  que  felices,  seremos  felicisimos. 

I  En  donde  pas  6  V.  ayer  la  noche  ? 

La  pase  con  mis  amigos  los  senores 

Martinez  y  su  familia. 
I  Cudnto  tiempo  estuvo  V.  en  su  casa  ? 
Fui  a  las  siete  de  la  noche  y  sali  a,  los 

once  y  media. 


It  is  a  quarter-past  eleven. 

It  is  ten  minutes  to  three. 

I  shall  go  to  the  country  to-morrow, 
and  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  spend- 
ing the  day  after  to-morrow  with  you. 

Thank  you ;  then  I  shall  be  very  happy. 

Shall  we  dance  at  your  house  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  shall  dance,  sing,  play  and 
practise  Spanish  all  the  evening  (the 
whole  night). 

Ycry  well,  very  well ;  then  we  shall  be 
more  than  happy ;  we  shall  be  most 
happy. 

Where  did  you  spend  the  evening 
yesterday  ? 

I  spent  it  with  my  friends,  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Martinez  and  (their)  family. 

How  long  were  you  at  their  house  ? 

I  went  at  seven  in  the  evening  and  left 
(went  out)  at  half  past  eleven  o'clock. 


EXPLANATION. 

103.  Future  simple. — This  tense  affirms  what  is  yet  to  he 
or  to  take  place  at  a  future  time  (mentioned  or  not)  ;  as, 

Sere  comerciante.  I      I  sJiall  be  a  merchant. 

Juan  esiudiard  mafiana.  I      John  will  study  to-morrow. 

This  tense  is  also  used  as  imperative,  as  will  be  seen  when 
that  mood  is  introduced. 

104.  The  definite  article  is  to  be  used  before  numerals 
indicating  the  hour  of  the  day,  and  the  word  o'clock  is  never 
translated  into  Spanish  ;  as, 

A  las  tres  de  la  tarde.  1    At  three  o'clock  in  (of)  the  afternoon. 

105.  JfocHE  (evening  or  night),  commences  at  sundown; 
so  that  evening  and  night  both  are  translated  into  Spanish  by 
noclie. 

106.  The  conjunction  si,  when  conditional,  does  not  gov- 
ern the  subjunctive  in  Spanish  as  it  does  in  English,  unless  the 
latter  be  followed  by  should,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  proper 
place  ;  in  all  other  cases,  si  is  followed  by  the  present  of  tlic 
indicative ;  as, 

Si  V.  tiene  papel,  i  escribira  ?  1      If  you  have  paper,  will  you  MTitc  ? 


LESSON     XXIII.  97 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Ciuuulo    princlpiara  V.  a  escribir  sus  ejercicios?     Principiar6 
mafiana. 

2.  g  A  que  liora  acabara  V.  ?    Acabare  a  las  diez  y  media. 

8.  Alejandro,  ^quc  quieres  ser,  abogado  6  escritor?    No  sere  ui  abo- 
gado  ni  escritor,  sere  comerciante. 

4.  Seilorita,  jquiere  V.  bailar  una  polca?     Gracias,  caballero,  no 
bailar6,  porquo  estoy  niiiy  cansada. 

5.  I  Bailara,  V.  la  proxiina  ?     Si,  sefior,  con  mucbo  gusto. 

6.  ^  Practicard  Y.  el  piano  hoy  ?     No,  sefior,  boy  no  tengo  ticrapo ; 
pero  practicar6  mafiana  por  la  mafiana. 

7.  2Qu6  hard  V.  mafiana?     Mafiana  por  la  mafiana  escribir6  mis 
ejercicios  y  practicare  el  espafiol  con  mi  hermano. 

8.  ^  Qu6  dias  toma  V.  leccion  de  piano  ?    Los  lunes  y  viernes. 

9.  ^  A  que  hora  tomara  V.  su  leccion  mafiana  ?     A  las  once  y  cuarto. 

10.  J  Vendra  V.  a  mi  casa  en  el  campo  ?     Ir6  pasado  mafiana  y  tendre 
el  gusto  de  pasar  el  dia  con  V. 

11.  ^Bailar^mos  en  su  casa.de  V.?     Si,  sefior,  bailar^mos,  cantar6mos 
y  practicaremos  el  espafiol  toda  la  noche. 

12.  I  En  d6nde  pasara  V.  mafiana  la  noche  ?     La  pasar^  con  mis  ami- 
gos  los  sefiores  Martinez  y  su  familia. 

13.  I A  qu6  hora  ii'an  Vds.  alii  ?     L'6raos  a,  las  siete  de  la  noche. 

14.  I  Ilasta  qu6  hora  estaran  Vds  ?    Hasta  la  una  y  media. 

15.  ^Estara  V.  mafiana  por  la  mafiana  on  su  cuarto?    Estar6  hasta  las 
nueve  y  diez  minutos. 

16.  ^Es  triste  su  hermano  de  V.  ?     No,  sefiora,  no  es  triste  ;  pero  esta 
triste. 

17.  ^Es  V.  feliz  ?     Soy  felicisimo ;  pero  no  estoy  contento  esta  tarde. 

18.  ^Es  V.  mayor  que  su  hermano  ?    No,  sefiora,  soy  el  raenor  de  toda 
la  familia. 

19.  ^Qui6n  es  el  mayor?    Juan  es  el  mayor. 

20.  I  Sale  V.  de  casa  temprano  ?     Salgo  tempranisimo. 

21.  ^Aqu6hora?     Salgo  a  las  ocho  y  media. 

22.  I  Salio  V.  ayer  tan  temprano  ?     No,  sefior,  ayer  sali  mas  tarde ; 
pero  hoy  he  salido  temprano. 

23.  I A  que  hora  saldra  V.  mafiana  ?    Mafiana  saldr6  a  la  una  de  la  tarde. 

24.  I  Para  quien  escribe  V.  una  carta  ?    Escribo  al  abogado,  por  el 
IX)bre  Juan,  que  lo  necesita  para  un  negocio. 

25.  I  Partira  V.  mafiana  para  la  Ilabana  ?     No,  sefior,  no  partir6  hasta 
la  semana  proxima. 

2G.  ^Es  este  caballo  muyfuerte?    Es  fortisimo ;   pero  ese  que  estd 
ahi  es  mas  fuerte  y  el  que  esta  alii  al  otro  lado  es  el  mas  fnerte. 
5 


"98  LESSON     XXIII. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "When  shall  you  commence  to  study  music  ?    I  desire  to  commence 
next  month. 

2.  Do  you  know  how  *  to  dance?     I  do  not  dance  very  well ;  but  I 
am  going  to  take  lessons  soon. 

3.  Do  you  study  in  the  morning  or  in  the  evening  ?    I  study  in  the 
morning. 

4.  At  what  o'clock  do  you  take  your  lessons  ?    At  a  quarter  to  three 
in  the  afternoon  (tarde). 

5.  Does  your  teacher  come  so  late  ?    Yes,  he  has  a  great  many  pupils 
this  year. 

6.  Will  you  dance  a  waltz,  Miss?    Thank  you,  sir,  I  danced  so  much 
the  night  before  last  that  I  am  tired. 

7.  Then  it  will  be  better  to  talk.     I  shall  talk  with  much  pleasure. 

8.  "When  shall  your  cousin  write  his  exercise  ?     He  shall  write  it  to- 
morrow moraing. 

9.  At  what  time  do  you  receive~your  newspapers  ?     I  receive  them 
every  day  at  eight  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

10.  Mr.  Louis,  will  you  come  and  dine  at  my  house  ?     I  shall  be  very 
happy  to  go  with  you. 

11.  How  did  you  spend  the  evening  at  your  friend's?    Very  well;  his 
wife  (Itidj)  is  most  amiable. 

12.  Has  she  not  travelled  in  Europe  ?     No,  sir ;   but  they  spoke  last 
night  of  travelling  very  soon. 

13.  Is  their  family  large  ?    No,  they  have  no  children. 

14.  Does  not  your  fi'iend  speak  Spanish  very  well  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  some- 
times even  passes  for  a  Spaniard. 

15.  Did  you  practise  much  with  him  ?     No ;  his  cousin  speaks  French 
very  well,  and  so  we  spoke  that  language  all  the  evening. 

IG.  Where  shall  you  spend  this  evening?    I  do  not  know;    but  the 
day  after  to-morrow  we  shall  go  to  your  house. 

17.  Tlianl^you!    then  I  shall  be  more  than  happy;   I  shall  be  most 
happy. 

18.  How  many  seconds  make  a  minute  ?     Sixty. 

•  19.  How  many  minutes  make  an  hour  ?     Sixty  minutes. 

20.  And  how  many  hours  has  a  day  ?    A  day  has  twenty-four  hours, 
,1  week  seven  days,  a  month  four  weeks,  and  a  year  twelve  months. 

21.  Peter,  what  o'clock  is  it  ?     It  is  half- past  two. 

22.  Then  I  am  going  to  take  my  lesson :  will  you  come  ?    No,  thank 
you ;  I  wish  to  read  this  morning's  paper. 

23.  Until  what  o'clock  shall  you  be  ?    I  shall  finish  at  one. 

♦  Hoic  is  not  translated  ■when  it  does  not  refer  to  the  manner  of  doing  anything. 


LESSON     XXIV. 


99 


24.  Peter!     Sir? 

25.  Has  the  tailor  finished  my  vest?    Yes,  sir,  here  he  is  with  the 
vest  and  the  coat. 

26.  When  will  the  shoemaker  make  my  boots  ?    He  will  make  them 
for  next  Tuesday. 

27.  Have  you  any  btisiness  in  Philadelphia  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  am  writing 
the  history  of  Louis  XVI.,  for  a  gentleman  of  that  city. 

28.  Mr.  Henry,  are  you  happy?     Yes,  sir,  thank  you,  I  am  very 
happy ;  but  I  am  not  very  contented  this  evening. 

29.  "Why  are  you  not  contented?    Because  my  father  has  not  written 
to  mo  this  week. 


LESSON    XXIV. 


COMPOUND  FUTURE. 


Habre  escrito. 

I  shall  have 

) 

Habras  escrito. 

Thou  wilt  have 

>  written. 

Habra  escrito. 

He  will  have 

J 

Habr^mos  escrito. 

"We  shall  have 

Habrd'is  escrito. 

You  will  have 

■  written. 

Habran  escrito. 

They  will  have 

• 

Coser. 

To  sew. 

Lavar. 

To  wash. 

Barrer. 

To  sweep. 

Pasear. 

To  walk  (take  a  walk). 

Dedal. 

Thimble. 

Aguja. 

Needle. 

Hilo. 

Thread. 

Primavera. 

Spring. 

Verano. 

Summer. 

Accion. 

Action. 

Invierno. 

"Winter. 

Nacion. 

Nation. 

OtoQo. 

Autumn  (Fall). 

Afectacion. 

Affectation. 

Enero. 

January. 

Navegacion. 

Navigation. 

Febrero. 

February. 

Agitacion. 

Agitation. 

Marzo. 

March. 

Aprobacion. 

Approbation. 

Abril. 

April. 

Aceptacion. 

Acceptation. 

Mayo. 

May. 

Atraccion. 

Attraction. 

Junio. 

June. 

Conversacion. 

Conversation. 

Julio. 

July. 

Direccion. 

Direction. 

Agosto. 

August. 

Oircunspecciou. 

Circumspection 

100 


LESSON     XXIV. 


Setiembre. 
Octubre. 
Noviembre. 
Diciembre. 


September. 
October. 
November. 
December. 


Clasificacion. 

Coleccion. 

Combicacion. 

Comparacion. 

Composicion. 

Reputacion. 


Classification. 

Collection. 

Combination. 

Comparison. 

Composition. 

Reputation. 


COMPOSITION, 


Habrd  escrito  mi  leecion  Writes  de  ir  a 

casa  del  profcsor. 
Habrc  acabado  a  las  diez. 
El  abogado  acaba  de  hablar. 
Yo  acabo  de  estudiar  mi  leecion. 
La  lavandcra  habra  acabado  de  lavar 

d  las  cuatro. 
(,  A  euantos  estamos  ? 
Estamos  h  seis. 
I  Que  dia  del  mcs  es  hoy  ? 
Es  cl  primero. 

ft  Que  fecba  tiene  csa  carta  ? 
El  primero  de  Eaero  de  mil  ochocientos 

sesenta  y  seis. 
i  En  que  afio  fue  V.  a  Mejico  ? 
Eui  en  Setiembre  de  mil  ochocientos 

cincuenta  y  dos. 
(,  Ira  V.  este  verano  a  Europa  ? 
No,  seSor,  ire  en  el  inviemo. 
I  Paseara  Y.  mucho  esta  primavera  ? 
Kg,  senor,  trabajare  mucbo. 


I  shall  have  written  my  lesson  before 

going  to  the  professor's. 
I  shall  have  finished  at  ten  o'clock. 
The  lawyer  has  just  spoken. 
I  have  just  studied  my  lesson. 
The  washerwoman  will  have  finished 

washing  at  four  o'clock. 
What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 
It  is  the  sixth. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  to-day  ? 
It  is  the  first. 

What  is  the  date  of  that  letter  ? 
January  1st,  186G. 

In  what  year  did  you  go  to  Mexico  ? 
I  went  in  September,  1852. 

Will  you  go  to  Europe  this  summer  ? 
No,  sir,  I  shall  go  in  the  winter. 
Will  you  walk  much  this  spring  ? 
No,  sir,  I  shall  work  a  great  deal. 


EXPLANATION. 

107.  The  COMPOUND  futtjee  affirms  something  future  that 
will  have  taken  place  before  or  at  the  time  of  some  other  future 
action  or  event  expressed  in  the  sentence;  and  is  composed  of 
the  simple  future  of  the  verb  /laber,  to  have,  and  the  past  parti- 
ciple of  another  verb  ;  as, 


Habrc  escrito  mi  ejercicio  antes  de 

ir  a  casa  del  profesor. 
Habr6  acabado  4  las  diez. 


I  will  have  written  my  exorcise  before 

going  to  the  professor's. 
I  will  have  finished  at  ten  o'clock. 


108.  AcABAB  DE  is  employed  before  an  infinitive  in  the 


LESSOJf     XXIV.  101 

sense  of  to  have  Just,  and  tlie  infinitive  is  translated  in  English 
as  a  past  pailiciple  ;  as, 

Acaba  de  hablar.  I  He  h.a&  j^cst  spoken. 

Acabo  de  estudiar.  |  I  have  just  studied. 

N.  B. — In  order  to  facilitate  the  acquisition  of  words,  we 
shall  give  now  and  then  a  few  rules,  with  the  help  of  which  the 
learner  Avill  be  enabled  to  convert  several  thousand  English 
words  into  Spanish.  And,  although  we  have  proposed  not  to 
introduce  many  new  words  or  elements  at  one  time,  these 
observations  will  enable  the  pupil  to  learn  a  greater  number  of 
words  witli  little  or  no  difficulty  at  all,  from  the  striking  re- 
semblance that  those  words  bear  to  the  English  ones. 

109.  The  greater  part  of  English  nouns  ending  in  tion  are 
rendered  into  Spanish  by  changing  the  letter  t  into  c;  as,  appro- 
bation, aprohacion.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  only  conso- 
nants that  can  be  doubled  in  Spanish  are  c,  n  and  r.  All  nouns 
of  the  above  termination  are  feminine. 

110.  The  days  of  the  month  are  all  counted  in  Spanish  by 
the  cardinal  numbers,  preceded  by  the  ai-ticle,  except  the  first 
day;  and  there  are  several  forms  of  asking  the  day  of  the 
month ;  e.  g., 

A  Qu^  dia  del  mes  tenemos  ? 


ft  Que  dia  es  hoy  ?  ^  |  What  day  of  the  month  is.  it  ? 

6  A  cuantos  estamos  del  mes  ? 


There  is  no  preference  between  these ;  but  the  answer  must 
be  made  in  the  same  form  as  the  question  ;  as, 

5  Que  dia  tenemos  ? 
Tenemos  el  seis. 

6  A  cuantos  estamos  ? 


Estamos  a  dos. 
(,  Que  dia  es  hoy  ? 
Es  cl  primcro. 


What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 

It  is  the  sixth. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 

It  is  the  second. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  to-day  ? 

It  is  the  first. 


COXYERSATIOX  AND  YERSIOX. 


1.  I  Habra  Y.  acabado  de  escribir  su  Icccion  a  las  diez  j  media  ?    No, 
se ;  pero  la  habr6  acabado  antes  de  ir  a  casa  del  profesor. 

2.  I  Ha  hablado  aquel  abogado  ?     I^o,  seQor,  acaba  de  liablar  este. 

3.  ^Ha  hablado  bien?    May  bien,  pero  con  afectacion. 


102  LESSON     XXIV. 

4.  I  Hard  V.  una  buena  composicion  para  la  leccion  prusiraa  ?     Si, 
seflor,  si  tengo  tiempo,  la  har6. 

5.  ^Lava  bien  su  lavandera  de  Y.  ?     Lava  iiiuy  bien, 

G.  ^  A  donde  envia  V.  sus  niflos  ?    Los  euvio  a  pasear  con  la  criada. 

7.  4  A  donde  ?     A  la  plaza  de  Madison. 

8.  I  Estii  cerca  de  su  casa  de  V.  ?    Esta  muy  cerca. 

9.  jBarri6  el  criado  ayer  mi  cuarto?    No,  seflor,  no  lo  barri6  ayer; 
pero  lo  ha  barrido  hoy. 

10.  ^Lo  barrera  mafiana  ?    Lo  babrd  barrido  antes  de  las  nueve. 

11.  Muchacho,  ^esta  el  sastre  en  la  sastreria?    No,  seflor,  acaba  de 
salir. 

12.  ^  A  qu6  hora  principiaron  Vds.  a  bailar?    Principiamos  a  las  diez 
de  la  noche. 

13.  ^Desea  V.  practicar  el  ingl6s?     Si,  seflor,  si  tengo  tiempo  princi- 
piare  pasado  mafiana. 

14.  I  D6nde  esta  su  amigo  ?    Estd  Aaajando  por  Francia. 

15.  ^  Ama  su  hermana  de  V.  mucho  a  sus  hijos?     Si, 'seflor,  los  ama 
muchlsimo. 

16.  jSaldra,  V.  muy  pronto  para  Europa?     Quiero  salir  mafiana. 

17.  ^Sabe  V.  bailar  el  vals?    No,  sefior,  pero  se  bailar  el  rigodon  y 
la  polka. 

18.  ^De  donde  vienen  Vds.?    Venimos  de  Francia,  y  vamos  para 
Filadelfia. 

19.  I  Quiere  V.  salir  a  pasear  ?    Muy  bien,  iremos  al  Parque  Central. 

20.  I  Quien  lavo  estos  pafluelos  ?    Estan  muy  mal  lavados.     Su  lavan- 
dera de  V.  los  lavo. 

21.  |D6nde  paso  V.  el  verano?    Lo  pase  en  el  campo.    ^  Y  el  invierno  ? 
En  la  ciudad. 

22.  ^  Cuales  son  los  meses  mas  alcgres  del  afio?    Los  de  la  primavera. 

23.  ^  Sabe  V.  la  direecion  de  la  casa  de  su  hermano  de  V.  ?     Si,  soflor, 
calle  Catorce,  nuraero  ciento  veinte  y  cinco. 

24.  ^A  qu6  hora  comen  Vds.  ?     Comemos  a  las  tres  de  la  tarde. 

25.  I  Qu6  hora  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  las  dos  y  veinte. 

26.  I A  que  hora  salieron  sus  hcrmanas  para  el  parque  ?    Salieron  a  las 
seis  y  media  de  la  mafiana. 

27.  e  Y  a  qu6  hora  volvieron  ?    A  las  once  mdnos  cuarto. 

28.  i  Buenos  dias! — Buenos  dias.— ^Estii  V.  bueno?     Muy  bueno,  gra- 
cias.     I Y  su  familia  de  V.  ?    Muy  buena,  gracias. 

29.  ^Baila  V.  la  polca?    No,  sefior,  estoy  principiando  a  aprenderla. 


LESSON     XXIV.  103 

EXERCISE.  • 

•       1.  When  shall  your  uncle  have  finished  his  letter?    He  shall  have  it 
finished  at  eight  o'clock. 

2.  When  shall  you  have  your  letter  written  ?    I  shall  have  it  written 
before  going  to  the  professor's. 

3.  When  shall  the  notary  make  the  conveyance  (writing)  ?  He  has  just 
made  it. 

4.  Shall  your  servant  have  swept  my  room  before  the  lesson  hour  to- 
morrow ?    Yes,  sir,  she  shall  have  it  swept  at  six  o'clock. 

5.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it?    It  is  the  thirteenth. 

6.  Does  your  washerwoman  come  to  wash  in  your  house  ?      She  does 
not,  but  she  washes  very  well. 

7.  How  many  lessons  do  those  gentlemen  take  every  month  ?    They 
take  four  every  week ;  that  makes  sixteen  every  month. 

8.  Which  are  the  best  months  for  walking  ?     The  three  months  of 
spring,  and  the  three  of  autumn  (or  fall). 

9.  Where  are  you  coming  (do  you  come)  irom  ?    I  am  coming  from 
walking. 

10.  Will  you  give*  me  a  needle  and  thread  and  a  thimble  to  sew? 
Here  is  the  needle ;  I  am  going  to  look  for  the  thread  and  thimble. 

11.  In  what  year  did  your  sister  Margaret  go  to  England?    She  went 
in  June,  1865. 

12.  What  is  the  date  of  that  letter?    Madrid,  7th  July,  1866. 

13.  Shall  you  go  t6  Europe  this  summer?     No,  madam,  I  shall  not  go 
before  next  spring. 

14.  Is  December  a  good  month  for  travelling?    Xo,  it  is  one  of  the 
worst  in  tlie  year, 

15.  IIow  did  you  (phiral)  spend  the  day  yesterday?    We  walked  in 
die  Central  Park. 

16.  Did  you  walk  the  whole  day  ?    No,  we  walked  until  twelve  o'clock, 
and  then  we  read  and  played  on  the  piano. 

17.  Did  you  not  pass  the  evening  at  Mr.  Martinez's?    No,  we  did  not 
go  out  all  (in  all)  the  evening,  Margaret  was  a  little  sick. 

18.  Do  yon  know  which  are  the  longest  months  ?    Yes  ;  they  are  Jan- 
uary, March,  May,  July,  August,  October  and  December. 

19.  And  which  are  the  shortest?    April,  June,  September  and  No- 
vember. 

20.  But  what  do  you  do  with  February  ?     February  is  the  shortest  of 
all ;  it  has  but  twenty-eight  days. 

21.  Shall  you  walk  much  this  spring?    No,  miss,  I  shall  work  a  great 
deal. 

*J}ar. 


104 


LESSON     XXV. 


22.  ^hen  shall  the  tailor  sew  my  vest  ?  Ue  shall  sew  it  to-morrow 
evening. 

23.  lias  the  lawyer  not  spoken  ?    He  has  just  spoken. 

24.  Until  what  hour  did  he  speak  ?    Until  half-past  one. 

25.  Did  he  speak  in  Spanish  ?  No,  he  spoke  iu  Trench  to-day ;  but 
to-morrow  he  shall  speak  in  Spanish. 

26.  Do  you  not  wish  to  practise  Italian  ?  Yes,  sir,  and  I  shall  prac- 
tise the  day  after  to-morrow,  if  I  have  time. 

27.  If  your  teacher  comes  to-day,  will  you  take  a  lesson  ?  I  shall 
take  it  if  he  comes. 

28.  Does  he  pronounce  Avell?  lie  pronounces  very  well,  but  with 
some  affectation. 

29.  IIow  many  Spanish  words  do  you  know  that  end  in  cion  ?  I  know 
very  many. 

30.  Which  are  they?  Conversation,  approbation,  agitation,  complica- 
tion, classification,  intention,  desertion,  circumspection,  nation,  naviga- 
tion, and  very  many  others. 


LESSON    XXV. 


Conocer. 


To  know,  to  be  acquainted  with. 


PEESEXT   IXDICATIVE. 

Conozco. 

I  know. 

Conoces. 

Thou  knowest. 

Conoce. 

Ho  knows. 

Conocemos. 

We  know. 

Coneceis. 

You  know. 

Conocen. 

They  know. 

PBETEKIT 

DEFINITE. 

Conoci. 

I  knew. 

Conociste. 

Thou  knewest. 

Conocio. 

He  knew. 

Conocimos. 

We  knew. 

Conocisteis- 

You  knew. 

Conocieron. 

They  knew. 

LESSON     XXV. 


105 


Conoccre. 

Conoceras. 

Conocera. 

Conoceremos. 

Conocereis. 

Conoceran. 

lie  conoculo. 

Habre  conocido. 

Gozar. 
Prometcr. 

Una  vez. 

Dos  veces,  &c. 

Alto. 

Bajo. 

Siempre. 

Niinca. 

Jamas. 

Ya. 

Ya  {with  a  negative). 

Ann. 

Todavia. 

A  menudo. 
Demasiador 
Bastante. 

Frio.         Cold  (the). 

Calor.       Heat. 

Miedo.      Fcav. 

Suefio.      Sleep. 

Ilarabre.  Hunger. 

Valor.      Courage,  ^rorth,  value. 


FUTURE  SIMPLE, 

I  shall  know. 
Thou  wilt  know. 
He  fl411  know. 

We  shall  know. 
You  will  know. 
They  will  know. 

PEETEEIT  niDEFINITE, 

I      I  have  known. 

COMPOUND   FCTUKE. 

I      I  shall  have  known. 


To  enjoy. 
To  promise. 

Once. 

Twice. 

High, loud. 

Low. 

Always. 

Never. 

Never. 

Already,  yet  {interrogatively). 

No  longer. 

Still,  yet,  even. 

Still,  yet,  even. 


Maestro.   JIastcr,  teacher. 


Often. 

Too,  too  much. 

Enough, 

pretty. 

Verguenza.      Shame.. 

Eazon. 

Reason. 

Sed. 

Thirst. 

Ldstima. 

Pity. 

Salud. 

Health. 

Moda. 

Fashion. 

Maestra. 

Mistress  (school) 

COMPOSITION'. 


6  Conocc  V.  a  ese  hombre  ? 
No  lo  conozco ;   pcro  s6  quiea  le  co- 
nocc. 


Do  you  know  that  man  ? 
I  do  not  know  him ;  but  I  know  who 
knows  him. 


106 


LESSOIf     XXV. 


6  Porque  no  aprende  V.  sus  leccioncs  ? 

Conozco  que  he  hecho  mal  en  no 
aprenderlas ;  pero  prometo  saber- 
las  para  mauana.  • 

6  Sabe  y.  francos  ? 

No,  senor,  pero  voy  &  aprenderlo; 
i  conoce  Y.  un  buen  maestro  ? 

i  Estudia  V.  aun  (todavia)  el  espauol  ? 

Ya  no  lo  estudio. 

6  Sabe  V.  hablarlo  ja  ? 

No,  todavia. 

(,  Ha  principiado  ya  su  hermano  de  V. 
sus  leccioncs  ? 

Va  ha  principiado  ;  pero  no  las  apren- 
dera  jam^s  (nunca),  porque  no  estu- 
dia bastantc. 

5  Cu<anta3  veces  ha  cstado  Y.  este  mes 

en  el  teatro  ? 
He  estado  una  vez  ;  pero  el  mcs  pasa- 
do  estuve  tres  veces. 

6  Tiene  Y.  miedo  de  su  maestro  ? 

No  tengo  miedo  de  61 ;  pero  tengo  ver- 

giienza  de  dl. 
6  De  quien  tiene  Y.  lastima  ? 
Tengo  lastima  de  ese  pobre  hombre. 
i  Tiene  Y.  calor  6  frio  ? 
No  tengo  ni  calor  ni  frio  ;  tengo  ham- 

bre  y  sed. 
6  Tiene  razon  cl  abogado  ? 
El  abogado  no  tiene  razon. 
^  Tiene  el  razon  alguna  vez  ? 
Tiene  razon  algunas  veces,   pero  no 

siempre. 
^  Hara  Y.  eso  otra  rcz  ? 
No  lo  hare  jamiis  (nimca). 
6  Amard  Y.  k  su  amigo  ? 
Le  amare  por  siempre  jamas. 
i  Ha  leido  Y.  jamas  ese  Ubro  ? 
Nunca  jam&s  lo  hare. 
i  Tiene  su  madrc  de  Y.  buena  salud  ? 

Si,  seiior,  goza  de  muy  buena  salud. 
i  Tiene  Y.  hambre  6  sed  ? 
No    tengo  ni    hambre    ni  sed,  tengo 
sueuo. 


Why  do  you  not  Icam  your  lessons  ? 
I  know  that  I  have  done  wrong  in  not 

learning   them  ;    but   I   promise  to 

know  them  for  to-morrow. 
Do  you  know  French  ? 
No,  sir,  but  I  am  going  to  learn  it ;  do 

you  know  a  good  teacher  ? 
Do  you  stUl  study  Spanish  ? 
I  study  it  no  longer. 
Do  you  know  how  to  speak  it  already  ? 
Not  yet. 

Has  your  brother  commenced  his  les- 
sons yet  ? 
He  has  (already)  commenced  ;  but  he 

will  never  learn  them,  for  he  does 

not  study  enough. 
How  many  times  have  you  been  in  the 

theatre  this  month  ? 
I  have  been  once ;  but  last  month  I 

was  there  three  times. 
Are  you  afraid  of  your  master  ? 
I  am  not  afraid   of  him ;   but  I  am 

ashamed  before  him. 
On  whom  do  you  take  pity  ? 
I  take  pity  on  that  poor  man. 
Are  you  warm  or  cold  ? 
I   am  neither  warm  nor   cold ;   I  am 

hungry  and  thirsty. 
Is  the  lawyer  right  ? 
The  lawyer  is  not  right. 
Is  he  right  sometimes  ? 
He  is  right  sometimes,  but  not  always. 

Will  you  do  that  again  (another  time)  ? 

I  will  never  do  it. 

Will  you  love  your  friend  ? 

I  shall  love  him  always  (for  ever). 

Have  you  ever  read  that  book  ? 

I  shall  never  do  it. 

Is  your  mother  in  good   health   (has 

your  mother  good  health)? 
Yes,  sir,  she  enjoys  very  good  health. 
Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty  ? 
I  am  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty,  I  am 

sleepy. 


LESSON     XXV.  107 

EXPLANATIOX. 

111.  Saber,  to  know,  and  conocer,  to  be  acquainted  with. 
— It  must  be  observed,  in  ordei*  not  to  confound  these  two 
verbs,  that  saber  is  employed  to  signify  the  act  of  knowing, 
being  infoi-med  of,  liaving  learned,  or  having  a  knowledge  of 
something ;  whereas  conocer  is  used  to  express  the  fact  of 
being  acquainted  with,  perceiving,  or  being  able  to  distinguish 
persons  or  things  ;  as, 

6  Sabe  V.  quien  conoce  a  este  hombre  ?  [  Do  you  know  who  knows  that  man  ? 

112.  Aux,  TA,  ToDAviA. — ^The  adverb  aun  indicates  that 
tlie  subject  of  the  sentence  continues  in  the  same  state  as  be- 
fore ;  quite  the  reverse  with  the  adverb  ya,  which  always 
signifies  discontinuance  of  a  former  state  (expressed  or  under- 
stood) ;  e.  g., 

6  Escribe  V.  aun  ?  I  Do  you  write  yet  ? 

Xo  cscribo  ya.  |  I  do  not  write  any  longer. 

Todama^  yet,  still,  is  synonimous  with  aun ;  as, 

Esta  trabajando  todavia  (or  aun).        \  He  is  still  working. 

Once,  twice,  &c.,  are  rendered  in  Spanish  by  una  vez^  dos 
veces,  &c. 

Miedo,  valor,  vergilenza,  Idstima,  tiem2}0,  take  the  preposi- 
tion de  after  them ;  as, 

Tengo  miedo  de  salir.  I  I  am  afraid  to  go  out. 

Tengo  verguenza  de  ese  hombre.  |  I  am  ashamed  of  that  man. 

113.  When  in  English  the  verb  to  be  precedes  the  adjec- 
tives hungry,  thirsty,  afraid,  ashamed,  right,  vyrong,  warm,  cold, 
sleepy,  it  is  changed  into  the  Spanish  verb  tener,  and  the  adjec- 
tive into  a  corresponding  substantive  ;  as, 


I  Tiene  V.  miedo  ? 
6  Tiene  V.  sed  ? 
I  Tiene  V.  calor. 
A  Tiene  V.  frio  ? 


Are  you  afraid  ? 
Are  you  thirsty  ? 
Are  you  warm  ? 
Are  you  cold  ? 


114.  Jamas  and  iojnca  may  be  used  indiscriminately,  or 
one  for  the  other ;  as, 

Jamds  (or  nunca)  le  he  conocido.         |  I  have  never  been  acquainted  with  him. 


108  LESSOJf      XXV. 

Sometimes  they  are  used  together,  to  give  more  energy  to 
the  expression ;  as, 

Xunca  jamds  lo  hard.  |  Xerer,  no  never,  shall  I  do  so. 

But  jamds  has  the  peculiarity  of  being  used  after  the  words 
por  siemj^re  and  para  siempre,  for  ever;  -where,  instead  of  being 
a  negative,  it  affirms,  meaning  eternally  ;  as, 

Le  amarc  por  siempre  jamds.  \  I  will  love  him  forever. 

Sometimes  it  is  used  alone  interrogatively,  meaning  ever;  as, 
6  Ha  leido  V.  jamds  esc  hbro  ?  |  Have  you  ever  read  that  book  ? 

CONVERSATION  AND  TEESION. 

1.  ^D6nde  conoei6  V.  d  sn  araigo?  Le  conoci  en  Paris  el  inviemo 
pasado. 

2.  I  Sabe  V.  qui6n  conoce  a  cso  horabre  ?  Mi  padre  le  conoco  inuy 
bien. 

3.  I  Cudndo  conocer6  a  su  hcrmano  de  V.  ?    Ea  el  otoilo  Ic  conocera  V. 

4.  I  Ila  conocido  Y.  en  L6ndres  a  ese  cabaUero  ?  Si,  seflor,  le  conoci 
alii  el  ailo  pasado. 

5.  I  C6mo  esta  su  hijo  de  Y.  ?    Mai ;  no  goza  de  bncna  salad. 

6.  I  Bail6  Y.  mucho  en  el  baile  de  anoche  ?     Si,  seflor,  muchisimo. 

7.  I  Quien  es  ese  cabaUero  ?     Es  un  escritor  de  gran  repntacion. 

8.  g  Tienen  mucba  aceptacion  sus  obras  ?     Tieneu  mnchisima. 

9.  I  Sabe  Y.  lo  que  ban  prometido  sus  amigas  de  Y.  ?  Ko  lo  se. — Han 
prometido  estudiar  sus  lecciones. 

10.  ^  Yendra  Y.  mafiana  a  comer  con  nosotros?    No,  seiior,  lie  prome- 
tido comer  con  mis  amigos  los  Alemanes. 

11.  ^Habla  va  espafiol  su  primo  de  Y.  ?    No  lo  Labia  aun,  y  no  lo 
hablani  jamas  (nanca),  porque  no  estudia  bastante. 

12.  ^Barrio  Y.  rai  cuarto?    No,  seflor,  pero  prometo  barrerlo  mafiana 
temprano. 

13.  g Cuantas  veces  prometi6  Y.  buscar  mi  sombrero?    Jamas  lo  pro- 
meti. 

14.  I  No  desea  Y.  ya  ir  a  su  pais  ?    Lo  deseo  muchisimo. 

15.  i  Sale  Y.  ya  a  pasear  todos  losdias  ?     No  salgo  sino  algunas  veces. 

16.  ^  Llevo  Y.  ya  mi  carta  al  correo  ?     Todavia  no  la  he  Uevado. 

17.  g  No  ha  estado  Y.  jamas  en  Paris  ?    No,  seflor,  jamas  be  estado. 

18.  ^No  ha  leido  Y.  jamas  la  historia  de  los  Rstados  Unidos?    Si,  la 
he  leido  una  vez. 

19.  g  Habla  bien  cl  abogado  ?    Habla  bien,  pero  muy  bajo. 

20.  jOomprende  Y.  ya  el  espaHol"?  Si  hablan  alto,  y  despacio,  si,  sefior. 


LESSON    XXV.  109 

21.  ^Tiene  V.  bastante  quo  hacer?     Tengo  demasiado. 

22.  I  Cuantos  afios  tiene  V.  ?     Tengo  veinte  y  uno. 

23.  I  Ouilndo  vi6  V.  por  liltima  vez  a  su  familia  ?  El  dia  seis  de  Se- 
tiembro  del  afio  de  mil  ocliocientos  cincuenta  y  cinco. 

24.  ^Ciiando  conoci6  V.  al  i)ianista?    Le  conoci  ayer  por  primera  vez. 

25.  ^  Ilan  salido  sus  hermanas  para  el  campo  ?  Todavia  no,  pero  sal- 
dran  muy  pronto. 

26.  ^Que  hace  su  padre  de  Vds.  ?  Esta.  gozando  del  bnen  tiempo  en 
el  campo. 

27.  ^  Que  tiene  su  niQo  de  V.  ?     Tiene  frio  y  sueQo. 

28.  I  Tienen  cllos  hambre  ?    No,  seJior,  tienen  sed. 

29.  I  Tiene  V.  valor  para  hacerlo  ?    Si,  sellor,  pero  tengo  vcrguenza. 

30.  I  No  tiene  V.  lastima  de  esa  mujer  ?  Si,  sefior,  tengo  lastima  de 
ella,  porque  no  tiene  buena  salud. 

31.  j  Tiene  sueJio  su  madro  de  V.?    No,  sefior,  pero  estd  muy  cansada. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  know  that  man?    Yes,  sir,  that  gentleman  is  my  uncle. 

2.  Are  you  still  writing  ?    No,  I  am  no  longer  writing. 

8.  Has  Charles  come  from  the  country  yet  ?    No,  he  has  not  come  yet. 

4.  Have  you  (plural)  ever  read  the  History  of  Civilization  by  Guizot? 
No,  but  we  shall  read  it  next  spring. 

5.  Are  you  not  ashamed  of  not  having  read  the  History  of  the 
United  States  ?  I  am  not  ashamed,  because  I  am  too  young  to  read  his- 
tory. 

0.  When  shall  you  commence  to  read  it?  I  shall  commence  next 
year. 

7.  Very  well ;  it  is  a  useful  study  (estudio). 

8.  Does  your  aunt  enjoy  good  health  ?  Yes,  sir,  thank  you,  she  en- 
joys very  good  health. 

9.  Are  you  cold,  madam  ?  No,  thank  you,  I  wish  to  go  out  a  minute, 
because  I  am  very  warm  in  this  room. 

10.  Is  it  ten  o'clock  yet  ?    No,  it  is  but  a  quarter  past  eight. 

11.  Who  is  that  gentleman  to  whom  your  cousin  spoke  last  night  at 
the  concert  ?vl  do  not  knoAV  him. 

12.  And  that  gentleman  who  came  this  morning  to  your  house,  who 
is  he?    He  is  a  Spanish  writer  who  enjoys  a  high  (great)  reputation. 

13.  Has  he  written  many  works?  Ho  has  already  written  many 
books,  and  he  is  going  to  write  a  history  of  Spain. 

14.  Do  you  know  Sir  Walter  Scott's  works  ?    Yes,  I  have  read  them  all. 

15.  Are  they  not  much  esteemed  in  Europe  (have  they  not  much  esti- 
mation) ?     Yes,  very  much. 


110  LESSON     XXV. 

16.  When  did  your  brother  become  acquainted  with  his  {el)  Spanish 
friend?      Last  year,  in  London. 

17.  Are  you  sleepy,  young  ladies?  Yes,  we  are  very  tired,  thirsty 
and  sleepy  (tener  aed  y  sueiio). 

18.  Will  you  take  a  little  wine  ?     No,  thank  you,  we  never  take  wine. 

19.  Does  your  mother  know  Emanuel's  address  (direction)  ?  Yes,  here 
it  is  in  this  letter. 

20.  Will  you  read  it  ?  With  much  pleasure.  Emanuel  Martinez,  Esq. 
(don),  113  Broadway.     A  thousand  thanks. 

21.  Did  your  cousin's  {fern.)  friends  commence  their  lessons  the 
other  day  ?  Yes,  they  commenced,  and  ai'e  much  pleased  (content)  with 
them. 

22.  Why  does  the  lawyer  speak  so  low  ?    I  do  not  know. 

23.  Does  he  not  speak  as  low  as  his  brother  loud  ?  He  speaks  low 
from  (by)  affectation. 

24.  Which  of  your  servants  {/em.)  sews  the  best?  None  of  them 
sews. 

25.  How  many  conjugations  has  the  Spanish  language  ?  Three  regu- 
lar (regular)  conjugations,  and  several  irregular  (irregular)  ones. 

26.  Have  you  ever  been  in  Philadelphia?  I  have  never  been  there 
yet ;  but  I  shall  go  next  year. 

27.  Did  your  father  write  the  letter  for  Peter  yesterday  ?  No,  but  he 
promised  to  write  it  the  day  after  to-morrow. 

28.  Has  your  shoemaker  enough  to  do  ?  Yes,  sir,  he  has  too  much 
to  do. 

29.  Will  you  always  love  your  brothers  and  sisters?  Yes,  I  shall 
love  them  forever. 

30.  Do  you  not  pity  that  man?  I  do  pity  him,  for  he  has  nothing  to 
do. 

31.  Have  you  money  enough  to  buy  a  house?  Yes,  sir,  I  have 
enough. 


LESSON    XXYI. 

Dor.  I         To  give,   r 

PEESENT  rSDICATTTE. 

Doy,  das,  da.  I  I  ^ve,  thou  givest,  he  gives. 

Damos,  dais,  dan.  I  We  give,  you  give,  they  give. 


LESSON    XXVI. 


Ill 


PRETERIT  DEFINITE. 

Di,  diste,  dio.  I  I  gave,  tliou  gavest,  he  gave. 

Dimos,  disteis,  dieron.  I  Wc  gave,  you  gave,  they  gave. 


Dar6,  daras,  dard. 
Dar6mos,  dar6is,  dardn. 


FUTURE  SIMPLE. 

I  shall  give,  thou  wilt  give,  he  will 

give. 
We  shall  give,  you  shall  give,  they 

shall  give. 


PRETERIT  INDEFINIE. 

He  dado,  has  dado,  etc,  |  I  have  given,  thou  hast  given,  «&c. 


Habre  dado, 

con 

etc. 

[POtniTD 

1 

FUTtTEE. 

I  shall  have  given,  &c. 

Ganar 

1 

To  gain,  earn,  win. 

Sing.  N'om. 
1st  Olj. 
2d  Olj. 

Yo. 
Me. 
A  mi. 

\ 

L 

Me,  or  to  me. 

Plur.  Norn. 
1st  Olj. 
2d  Ohj. 

Nosotros. 

Nos. 

A  nosotros. 

i 

We. 

Us,  or  to  us. 

Sing.  N'om. 
1st  Ohj. 
2d  Ohj. 

Tii. 
T6. 
Ati. 

Thou. 

Thee,  or  to  thee. 

Plur.  N'om. 
1st  Olj. 
2d  Olj. 

Yosotros. 

Os. 

A  vosotros. 

Ye,  you. 

Ye,  you,  or  to  you. 

Sing.  Nbm. 
1st  Olj. 
2d  Olj. 

£1. 
Le. 

A  61. 

He. 

Him,  or  to  him. 

Plur.  Xom. 
1st  Ohj. 
2d  Olj. 

Ellos. 
Los,  les. 
A  eUos. 

They, 

Them,  to  them. 

Sing.  Norn. 
1st  Olj. 
2d  Ohj. 

Ella. 
La,  le. 
A  ella. 

She. 

Her,  to  her. 

112 


LESSON     XXVI. 


Plur.  Kom.       Ellas. 
\st  01)j.         Las,  les. 
2d  Ob}.         Aellas. 

Sing,  and  Plur. 
1st  Obj.         Se. 
2d  Obj.         A  si. 

Neuter  Form. 
Mm.  Ello. 

1st  Olj.         Lo. 
2d  Obj.         A  ello. 


They. 

Them,  to  them. 

f Himself,  herself,  itself,  them- 
■l  selves;  or  to  himself,  to  her- 
(_     self,  to  itself,  to.themsclves. 

It. 
It. 

To  it. 


COMPOSITION. 
(,  Conoce  V.  aquellas  sefioras  ?    Deseo  ]  Do  you  know  those  ladies  ?    I  desire  to 

know  them. 
On  knowing  them  you  will  love  them. 
Do  you  promise  me  to  take  me  to  their 

house? 
I  will  give  you  my  word. 


conocerlas. 
ConocIendola3  las  amara  V. 
6  Me  promote  V.  llevarme  &  su  casa  ? 


Doy  4  V.  mi  palabra. 

6  Que  le  dio  4  V.  mi  primo  ? 

Quiso  darme  xmas  floras ;    pero  yo  no 

quise  recibirlas. 
6  Quieres  venir  conmigo  al  tcatro  ? 
No  ire  contigo,  porque  mi  padre  quiere 

llevarme  eonsigo. 
i  Son  estas  flores  para  ti  ? 
No  son  para  mi ;  son  para  V. 
Yo  te  necesito. 
Ella  nos  hablo  en  el  teatro. 
El  me  amara  eon  el  tiempo. 
Nosotros  le  hablamos  en  el  concierto. 
Yo  le  escribi  una  carta. 
Ella  lc3  dio  im  hbro. 


What  did  my  cousin  give  you  ? 

He  wanted  to  give  me  some  flowers ;  but 

I  would  not  receive  them. 
Wilt  thou  come  with  me  to  the  theatre  ? 
I  will  not  go  with  thee,  because  my 

father  wants  to  take  me  with  him. 
Are  these  flowers  for  thee  ? 
They  are  not  for  me,  they  are  for  you. 
I  want  thee. 

She  spoke  to  us  in  the  theatre. 
He  will  love  me  in  time. 
We  spoke  to  him  at  the  concert. 
I  wrote  him  a  letter. 
She  gave  them  a  book. 


EXPLANATION. 
115.  Subject  or  NoMrsfATiYE. — To  what  has  already  been 
said,  in  Lesson  X.,  relative  to  pronouns  as  subjects  or  nominative 
cases  to  verbs,  we  shall  here  simply  add,  that  they  may  at  all 
times  precede  their  verbs,  unless  the  latter  be  in  the  imperative 
mood,  or  be  used,  interrogatively  ;  examples : 


Yo  cstudio. 
Tu  escribes. 
Vengan  ellos.. 
e,  Lee  ella  ? 


I  study. 
Thou  writest. 
Let  them  come. 
Does  she  read. 


LESSON     XXVI.  113 

116.  PERSojfAL  Pronouns. — ^In  Spanish  there  is  a  pecu- 
liarity to  be  observed  amongst  the  personal  pronouns  :  that  is, 
that  they  have  two  objective  cases ;  one  of  which  can  never 
be  used  with  prepositions,  and  the  other  never  without  one. 

117.  The  Objective  Case,  when  not  preceded  by  a  prepo- 
sition, is  affixed  to  infinitives,  imperatives  and  gerunds  ;  as, 

Amar/a. 

Amemosfc. 

Amandofos. 


Ilabiendo^a  amado. 
Comprafcs  algo. 
Ilabiondo/os  hallado. 


To  love  her. 
Let  us  love  him. 
Loving  them. 
Having  loved  her. 
Buy  them  something. 
Having  found  them. 


118.  In  some  tenses  the  verb  drops  the  final  letter  in  the 
first  and  second  persons  plural,  when  they  are  followed  by  nos 
or  OS;  as, 

Amdmonos  instead  of  amdmosnos.    I  Wc  loved  each  other. 

Amaos  instead  of  amados.  \  Love  each  other. 

In  the  first  case,  the  reason  of  this  is  perhaps  to  soften  the 
pronunciation  of  the  first  word ;  and  in  the  second  the  d  is 
dropped,  in  order  that  the  imperative  be  not  confounded  with 
the  past  participle.  Nevertheless,  we  say  idos,  go,  and  not 
ios ;  but  this  is  the  only  exception  to  the  rule. 

119.  The  objective  case  may  sometimes  elegantly  follow 
the  verb,  but  rarely  Avhen  the  sentence  does  not  begin  by  the 
verb ;  as, 

Llevome  al  tcatro.  I  He  took  me  to  the  theatre. 

120.  When  one  verb  governs  another  in  the  infinitive 
mood,  the  objective  case  referring  to  the  second  verb  may  be 
placed  either  before  the  governing  verb,  or  after  the  governed 
one ;  as, 

Quiero  llevarle,  or  le  quiero  Uevar.      |  I  wish  to  take  him. 

121.  Prepositions,  when  expressed,  always  govern  the 
second  objective  case  ;  as, 

Para  mi.  For  me. 

Sin  tl.  Without  thee. 

Hacia  cllos.  Towards  them. 


114  LESSOX     XXVI. 

122.  Mi,  Ti,  si,  when  preceded  by  con,  take  go  after  them, 
ajid  are  joined  to  tlie  preposition  ;  as, 


Con/nigo. 
Conft'go. 

Consjgo. 


With  me. 

With  thee. 

With  him,  her,  them,  it. 


123.  Entee  is  used  with  the  nominative  case  of  the  first 
person  singular,  in  this  expression, 

Entre  tu  y  yo.  |  Between  thee  and  me ; 

but  in  every  other  instance  it  governs  the  second  objective 
case ;  as, 

Entre  si.  I  Between  themselves. 

Enire  nosotros,  (  Between  us. 

124.  The  second  objective  case  is  always  used  after  com- 
paratives ;  as, 

Te  quiero  mas  que  d  'el.  |  I  love  thee  better  than  him. 

125.  When  in  English  the  objective  case  of  the  first  or 
second  person  is  the  object  of  the  verb,  or  of  the  preposition 
to,  expressed  or  understood,  we  use  the  first  case  ;  as, 


Yo  te  necesito. 
Ella  nos  hablo. 
El  me  amara. 


I  want  thee. 
She  spoke  to  us. 
He  will  love  me. 


126.  In  Lesson  X.  we  explained  the  objective  case  of  the 
third  person  wheivit  is  the  object  of  the  English  verb;  but 
if  the  third  person  in  English  be  governed  by  the  preposition 
to,  expressed  or  understood,  we  render  it  by  le.  Us,  for  both 
genders ;  as. 


Nosotros  le  habl&mos. 
Yo  le  escribi. 
Ella  les  dio. 


We  spoke  to  him. 
I  wrote  to  her. 
She  gave  them. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jQn6  me  dara  V.  ?    Le  clar6  aV.  las  gracias. 

2.  ^Qn6  les  di6  V.  d  sus  nlDos?    Les  di  veinte  centavos. 

3.  jMe  daras  algo  por  mi  trabajo?     Algo  te  dar6  si  k)  haces  bien  y 
.si  no,  nada. 


LESSOX     XXVI.  115 

4.  I  Qu6  OS  illeron  en  casa  de  tu  primo  ?    ISTos  dieron  chocolate, 

5.  g  Que  le  has  proinetido  a  tu  prima  ?    Bailar  hoy  con  ella. 

6.  ^Como  seremos  mas  felices?    Anidndonos  los  imos  a  los  otros. 

7.  I  Cuando  vendra  el  con  nosotros  ?     Vendni  raafiana  temprano. 

8.  I  Cuando  saldra  V.  conniigo  a  pasco  ?     Tendre  ese  gusto  pasado 
maflana, 

9.  I  Quien  ira  conmigo  al  teatro  esta  uoche  ?    Yo  ir6  contigo. 

10.  ^Donde  habiaste  a  mis  amigos?    Les  hable  en  el  Parque  Central. 

11.  ^Les  ley6  V.  mi  carta?    No,  les  lei  la  de  su  hermana  de  V. 

12.  ^Me  envio  V.  los  libros?    No,  seiior,  los  envi^i  a  su  hermano 
doV. 

13.  ^Como  supo  V.  de  sus  amigos?     Escribiendoles. 

14.  ^Como  conocio  Y.  a  su  amiga?     Bailando  con  ella  en  casa  de  su 
hermano. 

15.  ^  Que  le  prometio  V.  a  su    prima  ?      Lo  promcti  Uevarla  a  la 
opera. 

16.  ^Nos  hablaron  ellos  alguna  vez?    Nos  hablaron  ima  6  dos  veces 
en  el  paseo. 

17.  ^Porque  no  les  hablo  V.?    Porque  no  los  conozco  bien. 

18.  ^Que  le  han  escrito  a  V.  sus  amigos?     Que  vendran  a  hablamos. 

19.  gQuieres  salir  conmigo  a  paseo?     Si,  saldre  contigo. 

20.  ^Cuando  iremos  a  ca.'.a  de  tus  amigos?     Ir6mos  hoy,  porque  ellos 
tendran  mucho  gusto  en  conocerte. 

21.  ^Quiere  V.  pasarme  el  pan  ?     Con  mucho  gusto. — Gracias. 

22.  I  Qu6  le  prometiste  a  tu  prima  ?    Le  prometi  ir  a  su  casa  mafiana 
y  llevarle  un  pafiuelo  de  seda. 

23.  I  Cuando  le  habl6  V.  ?    Le  habl6  anoche  en  casa  de  su  madre. 

24.  I  Quiere  V.  venir  a  pasear  ?     Mejor  sera  estaj nos  aqui. 

25.  I A  qu6  vienea  Vds.  ?-   Venimos  a  hablarle  a  V, 

26.  I  Cuando  iremos  al  campo  con  nuestros  amigos  ?    Iremos  mafiana. 

27.  gComo  les  gan6  a  Vds.  la  lavandera  tanto  dinero?    Lavdndonos 
los  vestidos  y  trabajando  mucho. 

28.  I  Cuantas  veces  a  la  semana  habla  V.  con  sus  amigos  ?    Nos  ha- 
blamos tod  03  los  dias. 

29.  I  Vendi-a  hoy  su  primo  de  V.  a  comer  con  nosotras  ?    Si,  porque 
quiere  conocerlas  a  Vds. 

30.  I  Le  dio  V.  los  buenos  dias  a  su  prima  ?    Le  di  los  buenos  dias  ayer 
en  la  plaza  y  le  hablo  de  V. 

31.  Le  doy  a  V.  las  gi'acias.     ^Tiea?  buena  salud  ahora?     Si,  senora, 
esta  muy  buena, 

32.  ^Le  dio  a  V.  los  peri6dicos?    No,  sefiora,  pero  prometio  mandar- 
los  mafiana. 


110  LESSON     XXVI. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "What  was*  that  you  gave  to  your  friend  last  night  at  the  theatre? 
I  gave  him  the  second  volume  of  Mr.  Eomanos'  new  work. 

2.  Why  do  you  not  give  him  the  first  volume  ?    I  have  already  given 
it  to  my  cousin. 

3.  Did  you  not   promise  last  week  to  give  me  those  two  volumes  ? 
Yes ;  and  you  shall  have  them  the  day  after  to-morrow. 

4.  Will  you  come  with  me  to  the  country  in  the  summer?     I  will  go 
if  you  set  out  on  the  first  of  July. 

5.  Will  you  and  your  uncle    come  with  us  to  walk  this  afternoon  ? 
Tiiis  evening  we  have  to  go  to  the  concert. 

6.  When  will  you  go  out  with  us  ?     I  do  not  know ;  hut  I  think  (that) 
to-morrow  {creo  que  maflana). 

7.  Have  you  heard  {sabiclo)  from  your  father  this  week  ?    No ;  but 
we  heard  from  oar  brother  John  last  week. 

8.  How  often  has  he  written  to  you  from  Boston?    We  have  received 
seven  or  eight  letters  from  him. 

9.  How  much  did  that  singer  make   (gain)  in  New  York?     Which 
one?  I  do  not  know  any  singers. 

10.  Do  you  not  know  the  singer  who  spent  last  week  at  your  uncle's 
in  the  country?  Yes;  but  it  was  in  Philadelphia  that  he  sang,  not  in 
New  York. 

11.  Are  you  cold?    No,  sir;  hut  I  am  hungry  and  thirsty. 

12.  When  will  you  take  Emanuel  to  see  your  children  ?  I  shall  take  him 
to-morrow. — They  will  have  much  pleasure  in  making  his  acquaintance. 

13.  How  many  languages  does  that  gentleman  speak?  He  only  speaks 
his  own ;  but  his  cousin  speaks  five. 

14.  Which  are  they'  He  speaks  French,  German,  Spanish,  English, 
and  Italian. 

15.  How  did  he  learn  so  many  languages?  By  studying  the  grammar 
of  each  one  of  them  {coda  una  de  ellas\  reading  the  works  of  the  best 
writers,  and  practising  with  the  natives  {natural). 

16.  Does  he  write  all  those  languages  as  well  as  he  speaks  them  ?  He 
writes  them  better  than  he  speaks  them. 

17.  Did  I  not  see  you  {plural)  speaking  to  the  notary  yesterday  in  the 
park  ?    No,  it  was  the  day  before  yesterday. 

18.  What  has  he  done  in  that  afi*air  {negocio)  of  your  brother's?  lie 
has  done  nothing  yet;  and  as  he  has  to  leave  town  {la  ciudad)  this  after- 
noon, he  will  do  nothing  all  this  week. 

19.  Who  is  the  young  lady  who  danced  so  well  last  night  at  your 
house?     Do  you  not  know  her?  she  is  my  cousin. 

*  See  the  conjugation  of  the  verb  Sep.,  at  the  end  of  the  book. 


LESSON     XXVII.  117 

20.  When  did  you  see  our  friend  Mr.  Perez  ?  I  saw  him  the  other  day 
in  Twenty-sixth  street,  and  we  talked  for  more  than  two  hours  about 
(de)  theatres  and  concerts. 

21.  I  saw  him  the  niglit  before  last;  but  wc  did  not  talk  about  thea- 
tres and  concerts.   In  whose  house  did  you  see  him  ?   At  Mr.  de  la  Rosa's. 

22.  At  what  o'clock  did  you  go  there  ?  I  went  at  a  quarter  to  eight, 
and  left  at  half-past  ten. 

23.  Did  you  see  many  Mexicans  there?  I  only  saw  one:  that  Mexi- 
can lawyer  who  has  just  written  a  history  of  his  country. 

24r.  Does  he  leave  soon  for  Europe  ?    He  wishes  to  set  out  next  week. 

25.  Did  John  write  to  his  father  the  day  before  yesterday  ?  Yes,  and 
he  has  heard  {saber)  since  that  he  set  out  last  week  for  France. 

2G.  Has  your  sister  read  the  books  yet  whicli  she  received  from  Louisa 
last  week  ?     Yes ;  and  she  wishes  to  read  them  again  (ptra  vez). 

27.  I  shall  see  her  this  evening ;  and  if  you  wish  (it)  I  shall  take  them 
to  her  (se  los). 

28.  Thank  you.  Have  you  much  to  do  now  ?  No,  I  never  have  much 
to  do  in  summer. 

29.  Is  Peter  tired  ?     Ko  ;  but  he  is  the  most  tiresome  boy  I  know. 


LESSON    XXVII. 

Decir.  '  |  To  say,  to  tell. 

PUESEXT  OF  INDICATIVE. 

Digo,  dices,  dice,  decimos,  de-  I         I  say,  or  tell,  &c. 
cis,  dicen.  I 

PKETERIT   DEFIIOTE. 

Dije,  dijisto,  dijo,  dijimos,  di-  j  I  said,  or  told,  &c. 

jisteis,  dijeron.  I 

rUTTTRE   SIMPLE. 

Dire,  diras,  dirn,  direraos,  di-  I  I  shall  or  will  say,  or  tell,  &c. 

reis,  diran.  I 

PRETERIT   INDEFINITE. 

He  dicho,  has  dicho,  etc.  |  I  have  said,  or  told,  &c. 

COMPOUND   FUTURE. 

Habr6  dicho,  etc.  |   '     I  shall  or  will  have  said,  or 

told,  &c. 


118 


LESSON     XXVII. 


Excusar. 

To  excuse. 

Perdonar. 

To  pardon. 

Creer. 

To  believe,  to  think. 

Ofender. 

To  offend. 

Llamar. 

To  call,  to  knock. 

Ensefiar. 

To  teach,  to  show. 

Ahora. 

Now. 

Mismo  (adverb). 

Just,  very. 

Mismo. 

Same,  self. 

Necesario. 

Necessary. 

Precise. 

Precise,  needful. 

Regular. 

Ecgular,  middling. 

Parte.        Despatch. 

Parte.          '  Part. 

Estudio.     Study. 

Falta.           Fault,  mistake. 

Humor.      Humor,  disposition. 

Esperanza.    Hope. 

Sugeto.       A  person,  subject,  topic. 

Puerta.          Door. 

Asunto.      Subject,  business,  matter. 

Noticia.        News. 

Ramillete.  Bouquet. 

COMPO 

3ITI0X. 

Le  compro  un  ramillete,  y  se  lo  mando. 

He  bought  her  a  bouquet,  and  sent  it  to 

her. 

Lea  eseribirc  tres  cartas,  y  se  las  man- 

I  shall  write  them  three  letters,  and 

dare. 

send  them  to  them. 

Ella  se  lo  ha  prometido. 

She  has  promised  it  to  her. 

6  Qu6  esti'i  Y.  haciendo  con  ese  libro  ? 

What  are  you  doing  with  that  book  ? 

Estoy  enseuandoseZo  k  Manuel. 

I  am  showing  it  to  Emanuel. 

I  Le  leiste  la  carta  ? 

Did  you  read  the  letter  to  him  ? 

Ya  se  la  lei. 

I  did.     (I  read  it  to  him  already.) 

Ella  me  lo  dijo. 

She  told  it  to  me. 

Yo  se  lo  di. 

I  gave  it  to  him. 

Mi  madre  me  ama  d  mi. 

My  mother  loves  me. 

Tu  amigo  te  busca  d  ti. 

Thy  friend  looks  for  thee. 

Yo  Ics  di  las  noticias  a  elhs. 

I  told  them  the  news. 

Yo  se  las  dar^  d  V.  ?  , 

I  will  tell  them  to  you. 

A  ti  te  amo,  or  te  amo  a  tf. 

I  love  thee. 

i  Que  le  ha  dicho  «  V.  su  hermano  ? 

What  has  your  brother  told  you  ? 

No  me  ha  dicho  nada. 

He  has  told  me  nothing. 

/  Le  dije  yo  eso  d  V.? 

Did  r  tell  you  that  ? 

V.  no  me  lo  dijo. 

» You  did  not  tell  it  to  me. 

LESSON      XXVII. 


119 


/  Se  lo  ha  dicho  61  d  V.  ? 

Me  lo  ha  dicho. 

^  Quiere  V.  decir  eso  k  sus  amigos  ? 

Quiero  decirsc/o  «  ellos. 

i  Quien  llama  a  la  puerta  ? 

Soy  yo  mismo. 

g  Tienc  buen  humor  su  amigo  de  V.  ? 

Si,  sefior,  tiene  buen  humor  cuando  le 

van  bien  los  ncgocios. 
j  Gana  esc  sugeto  mucho  en  esc  asunto  ? 

El  no  gana  para  si  mismo ;  pero  gana 

para  otros. 
Tengo  esperanza  dc  que  me  perdonara. 


Has  he  told  it  to  you  ? 

He  has  told  it  to  me. 

Will  you  tell  your  friends  that  ? 

I  will  tell  it  to  them. 

Who  knocks  at  the  door  ? 

It  is  I  (myself). 

Has  your  friend  a  good  disposition  ? 

Yfis,  sir,  he  is  good  humored  when  busi- 
ness goes  well  with  him. 

Does  that  man  make  (or  earn)  much  in 
that  business  ? 

He  does  not  make  for  himself ;  but  he 
makes  for  others. 

I  have  hopes  he  will  pardon  me. 


EXPLANATION. 

127.  Objective  pronouns,  continued. — Tlie  third  person 
being  governed  by  to  in  English,  either  expressed  or  under- 
stood, is  in  Spanish  rendered  by  se,  if  the  object  of  the  verb 
be  a  pronoun  in  the  third  person ;  as, 


Le  compro  un  ramillete,  y  se  lomando. 

Les   escribire   trcs  cartas,  y  se  las 

mandare. 
Mi  criado  se  lo  dara. 


He  bought  her  a  bouquet,  and  sent  it  to 

her. 
I  shall  write  thera  three  letters,  and 

send  them  to  them. 
My  servant  will  give  it  to  him. 

This  is  done  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  changing  the  first  of 
the  two  pronouns,  whatever  its  full  form  may  be  (fc,  la  or  les)^ 
into  se.  This  rule  applies  to  all  pronouns,  after  as  well  as  be- 
fore the  verb ;  as. 


Ella  se  lo  ha  prometido  (instead  of 

ella  le  lo). 
Prometicndosch   (instead   of  promc- 

tihidolelo). 
i  Le  leiste  la  carta  ? 
Ya  se  la  lei,  instead  of  ya  le  la  lei. 


She  has  promised  it  to  her. 

Promising  it  to  him. 

Did  you  read  the  letter  to  him  ? 
I  read  it  to  him  (already). 


128.  When  two^rs^  objective  cases  occur  in  the  sentence, 
one  of  Avhich  is  the  object  of  the  verb,  and  the  other  is  gov- 
erned, in  English,  by  the  preposition  to,  citlier  expressed  or 
understood,  the  object  of  the  verb  is  to  be  placed  last ;  as, 

Ella  me  lo  dijo.  I  She  told  it  to  me. 

Yo  se  lo  di.  |  I  gave  il  to  him. 


120  LESSONXXVII. 

129.  But  if  the  object  of  tlie  verb  be  the  reflective  pro- 
noun, it  must  be  placed  first ;  as, 

Luego  se  me  excuso.  |  He  excused  himself  immediately  to  me. 

130.  Both  the  objective  cases  belonging  to  the  same  per- 
son are  sometimes  used  together  in  Spanish,  in  order  to  give 
more  energy  to  the  expressjpn,  and  then  the  second  must  al- 
ways be  preceded  by  d  ;  as, 


Mi  madre  me  ama  d  mi. 
Tu  amigo  fe  busca  d  ii. 
El  se  lo  dijo  a  cllas. 
Yo  Ics  di  las  noticias  d  ellos. 
Yo  se  las  dare  d  Vdi.  ? 


My  mother  loves  me. 
Thy  friend  seeks  thee. 
He  told  it  to  them. 
I  told  them  the  news. 
I  will  tell  them  to  you. 


131.  Tlie  second  objective  case  of  any  of  the  persons 
should  never  be  used  in  the  sentence,  preceded  by  a,  as  the 
object  of  the  verb,  without  being  accompanied  by  the  first 
(except  after  comparatives)  ;  therefore,  such  expressions  as 
these:  d  el  quicro^  d  ti  amo,  are  incorrect,  and  should  be  thus: 
d  Hie  quiero,  d  ti  te  amo.  The  place  of  the  second  objective 
case  in  sentences  of  this  kind  is  restricted  to  the  following  rules : 

1st.  If  the  first  objective  case  precede  the  verb,  the  second 
may  be  placed  either  before  the  first,  or  after  the  verb;  as, 

A  ti  te  amo,  or  te  amo  d  li.  \  I  love  thee. 

2d.  If  the  first  objective  case  follows  the  verb,  the  second 
must  be  placed  after  the  first ;  as, 

AmandoZe  d  el.  |  Loving  Iiim. 

132.  It  may  appear  that  the  personal  pronouns  U,  la,  lo, 
los  and  las  might  be  confounded  with  the  articles  el,  la,  lo,  los, 
las,  having  the  same  form ;  but  they  are  easily  distinguished, 
since  the  articles  must  always  be  occompanied  by  and  precede 
nouns  ;  as,  el  tiempo,  la  salud,  los  soldados,  las  ohras,  lo  hucno ; 
while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  personal  pronouns  are  Only  em- 
ployed with  verbs,  and  placed  before  or  after  them ;  as. 

La  llcvaron,  or  llevaronla.  I   They  carried  it. 

Lo  buscaroH,  or  buscdronlo.  \   They  looked  for  it. 

133.  Whenever  emphasis  is  required  to  be  laid  on  any 


LESSON     XX  VII.  121 

noun  or  pronoun,  the  adjective  mismo  is  used  in  Spanish  for 
that  purpose  ;  as, 


El  Jio   aiaa   ii  nadie  mas  que  i  si 

mlsmo. 
Este  mismo  hombre  lo  hara, 
Yo  mismo  lo  hare. 


He  loves  no  one  but  himself. 

This  very  man  will  do  it. 
I  will  do  it  mjsel£ 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Lo  (lijo  V.  eso  al  ingles?     Se  lo  dije. 

2.  I  Se  lo  dijo  V.  en  ingles  6  en  espailol?    So  lo  dije  en  ingles. 

3.  I  Le  comprendi6  a  V.  ?     Si,  seuor,  rauy  bien. 

4.  ^  Y  que  le  enseii6  a  V.  ?     Me  enseuo  el  retrato  de  su  hermana. 

5.  I  Lo  tiene  V.  ?    No ;  se  lo  cnvie  ya. 

G.  I  Me  lo  enscliara  V.  ?     Se  lo  enseilare  a  Y.  la  semana  pr6xima. 
T.  I  Ha  llamado  V.  d  la  criada  ?    La  lie  llamado  y  no  ha  venido. 

8.  J  No  le  perdonard  V.  esa  falta  ?     No  quiero  perdonursela. 

9.  I A  quien  llama  mi  padre?     Te  llama  a  tL 

10.  I  Quieres  enseiiarme  tn  vestido  nuevo  ?     Te  lo  ensefiar6  con  mucho. 
gusto.  * 

11.  J  Vendrun  tus  amigos  a  darnos  los  buenos  dias  ?     Creo  que  vendran 
d  darnoslos. 

12.  I  Nos  ban  enviado  los  periodicos?     Os  los  enviardn  raafifuia. 

13.  ^Cuanto  le  gano  V.  a  ese  sugeto?     Le  gane  dos  mil  trcscientos 
cincuenta  y  cuatro  pesos. 

14.  I  Que  les  dicron  d  sns  amigas  de  Y.  ?    Prometi^ronles  llevarlas  4 
paseo  ;  pero  no  les  dicron  nada. 

15.  I  Qui6n  dijo  eso  ?     Yo  mismo  lo  dije. 

16.  ^Para  qui4n  son  estos  libros  ?    Para  ti  mismo. 

17.  ^Ilan  raandado  mis  cartas  al  correo?    Si,  sefior,  yo  mismo  las  he 
raandado. 

18.  ^  Quien  me  ha  enviado  este  ramillete?    Su  amiga  misma  se  lo  ha 
enviado. 

19.  ^  Le  leiste  d  tu  padre  las  not! cias  de  Francia  ?  El  mismo  las  ha  leido. 

20.  ^  Qaices  enseiiarme  tu  reloj  ?     Quiero  ensefidrtelo. 

21.  ^  Quien  llam6  d  la  puerta  ?    Yo  mismo  llame. 

22.  I  Tieno  Y.  esperanza  de  vcr  su  pais  ?     Si,  sefior,  tengo  esperanza  de 
verlo  rauy  pronto. 

23.  I  Cantaron  bien  anoche  en  el  concierto  ?     Cantaron  bien  la  primera 
parte ;  pero  la  segunda  muy  mal. 

24.  I  C6mo  estd  su  tio  do  Y.  ?    Esta  bueno ;  pero  do  mny  mal  humor. 

25.  J  Es  hombre  de  mal  humor  ?    No,  sefior,  es  liombre  muy  amable ; 
pero  hoy  estd  do  mal  bumor  por  asuntos  de  familia. 

6 


122  LKSSON     XXVIIo 

26.  ^Crecn  ellos  ganar  diuero  a  ese  hombre?     Creen  ganurselo. 

27.  I  Necesita  V.  enviar  este  periodico  a  su  hennano  ?    Necesito  en- 
vidrselo. 

28.  I  Cuando  quiere  V.  mandar  su  piano  al  pianista  ?     Se  lo  quicro 
mandar  ahora. 

29.  ^Cuando  neccsita  Y.  hablar  al  abogado?     Necesito  hablarle  aliora 
mismo. 

30.  ^Es  esta  la  carta  que  V.  recibio  ayer?    Es  la  misma. 

31.  I A  quien  ama  el  Mejicano?    No  ama  a  nadie  mas  que  a  si  mismo. 

32.  ^Para  qui6n  trabaja  esa  mujer  ?     Trabaja  para  si  misma. 

33.  £  Que  lo  ha  dicbo  V.  I107  a  su  padre  ?     Lo  mismo  que  le  dije  ayer. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Good  morning,  sir;  how  are  you?     Very  well,  thank  you. 

2.  How  is  your  family  ?    Very  well,  thank  you, 

3.  "When  did  you  hear  from  your  cousin  Jane  ?  I  received  a  letter 
Aom  her  yesterday.     But  will  you  excuse  mo  an  instant?   some  one  is 

knocking  at  the  door. 

4.  Have  you  sent  your  sister  the  bouquet  I  bought  for  her  the  other 
day  ?    Not  yet ;  but  I  shall  send  it  to  her  to-morrow  morning. 

5.  Will  you  write  to  her  at  the  same  time  and  (to)  tell  her  what 
Charles  said  ?  I  am  going  to  write  to  her  just  now,  and  I  shall  tell  it 
to  her. 

6.  Do  you  think  my  father  will  pardon  us  ?  I  do  (I  think  so),  because 
Emanuel  showed  me  a  letter  he  received  from  him,  in  which  he  says  he 
will  pardon  both  of  us. 

7.  And  what  does  Henry  thinli  of  the  matter  ?  He  thinks  tlie 
same. 

8.  Have  the  pupils  shown  their  new  books  to  their  teaclier  yet? 
Yes,  they  showed  them  to  him  yesterday. 

9.  Does  he  think  they  are  good  ?    He  says  they  are  very  good. 

10.  What  else  (more)  did  he  say  ?    He  said  that  if  they  study  them 
with  attention  they  wiU  very  soon  speak  Spanish. 

11.  Is  that  all  *  he  said  ?     That  is  all. 

12.  Who  is  knocking  at  the  door?  is  it  you,  Peter?    Yes,  it  is  I. 

13.  Why  did  you  not  come  earlier?    I  was  (have  been)  reading  the 
news  from  Italy. 

14.  What  is  the  news  (what  news  have  we)  ?     The  papers  say  that  the 
Italians  have  gained  another  victory  (tictoria). 

15.  What  did  that  mau  promise  yon  last  night  ?    He  promised  to  bring 
me  some  volumes  of  the  History  of  the  United  States. 

*  Lo  que. 


LESSON     XXVII.  123 

16.  lias  Le  brought  (traido)  them  to  you  yet?    Not  yet. 

17.  When  do  you  think  he  will  bring*  them?  He  has  to  come  to  onr 
house  this  evening,  and  I  think  he  will  bring  them  with  him. 

18.  What  do  you  wish  to  see?  I  wish  to  see  your  new  dress,  if  you 
will  have  the  goodness  (bondad)  to  show  it  to  me. 

•19.  Will  you  tell  the  Englishman  what  I  have  told  you?  I  shall  not 
tell  it  to  the  Englishman ;  but  I  shall  tell  it  to  the  Frenchman  this  very 
day. 

20.  AVill  he  believe  it?  Yes,  he  wiU  (believe  it);  he  believes  every- 
thing I  tell  him. 

21.  Have  they  taken  my  letters  to  the  post-ofiSce  ?     I  took  them  my 
self,  sir. 

22.  WTio  is  my  father  calling?  lie  is  calling  you  to  send  you  to  the 
bookstore  for  a  book. 

23.  Do  you  know  why  Louis  does  not  send  us  the  papers  any  more 
(ija)  ?  He  promised  to  send  them  ;  but  you  know  that  no  steamer  (va- 
por) has  arrived  f  this  week  yet. 

24.  When  does  the  merchant  want  to  see  the  notary  ?  He  wants  to 
see  him  just  now. 

25.  There  he  is  talking  to  a  gentleman ;  will  you  go  and  (to)  tell  him 
that  my  father  wishes  to  speak  to  him  a  moment  (momento)  ? 

26.  Good  morning,  sir;  father  wishes  to  tell  you  something;  will  you 
come  now  ?     Yes,  I  shall  go  just  now. 

27.  How  is  your  son,  Mr.  Alexander  ?  He  is  much  better,  thank  you ; 
but  ho  would  not  come  out  this  morning,  because  he  has  to  study  his 
lesson. 

28.  What  language  is  he  learning  ?  He  is  not  learning  any  now ;  he 
commenced  to  learn  Spanish  in  the  winter. 

29.  What  is  he  studying,  then  ?  He  takes  lessons  in  (of)  writing,  his- 
tory and  music. 

30.  What  part  of  the  grammar  are  you  in  now,  Peter  ?  I  have  just 
got  to  (arrived  at)  J  the  twenty-seventh  lesson. 

31.  Do  you  require  to  send  this  paper  to  your  brother?  I  require  to 
send  it  to  him  this  very  day. 

♦  Tracr.i  +  Llegar.  $  Acabo  dc. 


124 


LESSON      XXVIII, 


LESSON    XXVIII. 

IMPEKFEHT  AND  rLUPERFECT  TENSES. 

niPEEFBCT. 
v. 

First  Conjugation. 

I  spoke,  was  speaking,  or  used  to 

speak,  (fee,  &c. 
We  spoke,  &c. 


Habl-aba,  habl-abas,  habl-aba. 

Habl-abamos,  babl-abais,  babl-aban. 

Second  Conjugation. 


I  learned,  was  learning,  or  used  to 
learn,  &c.,  &c. 


Aprend-ia,  aprend-ias,  aprend-ia. 
Aprend-iamos,  aprend-iais,  aprend- 
ian. 

Third  Conjugation. 
Escrib-ia,  escrib-ias,  escrib-ia.  l  I  wrote,  was  writing,  or  used  to 

Escrib-iamos,  escrib-ims,  escrib-ian.  |      write,  &c.,  &c. 


PLTJPEKFECT. 


Habia 

Habiais 

Habia 

Habiamos 

Habiais 

Habian 


bablado. 

aprendido. 

escrito. 

hablado. 
aprendido. 

escrito. 


I  had 

Thou  hadst 
He  had 

We  had 
You  had 
They  had 


spoken, 
learned, 
written. 

spoken, 
learned, 
written. 


Acabar. 

To  finish. 

Entrar. 

To  enter,  come  in,  go  in. 

Deber, 

To  owe. 

Deber. 

Should,  ought,  must,  to  be  to,  to  be 

ojae's  duty  to. 

Dudar. 

To  doubt. 

Teincr. 

To  fear,  be  afraid  of. 

Abrir,  abierto  (irregular  in  this 

To  open,  opened. 

past  participle  only). 

Ambos. 

Both. 

Cuidado. 

Deber. 

Projimo. 


Care. 
Duty. 

Neid^bor. 


Cabeza. 

Mano. 

Eopa. 


Head. 
Hand. 

Clothes. 


LESSON     XXVIII. 


125 


Vecino. 

Neiglibor. 

Yentana. 

"Window. 

Eeloj. 

Clock,  watch. 

Visita. 

Visit. 

Cuenta. 

Bill,  account 

Mai'ido,  csposo. 

Husband. 

Esposa. 

Wife. 

COMPOSITION. 

Yo  cscribia  cuando  V.  vino. 

El  catudiaba  sus  Iccciones  todos  lo3 

dias. 
Margarita  bailaba  mucho  cuando  era 

joven. 
Yo  acababa  de  sallr  cuando  V.  entro. 
(,  Abria  V.  la  puerta  6  la  vcntana  on  el 

invierno  ? 
En  el  invierno  no  abria  ni  la  una  ni  la 

otra ;  pero  en  el  verano  abria  ambas. 
ftllabia  V.  escrito  los  ejercicios  antes 

de  dar  su  leccion  ? 
No  Ids  habia  escrito  ;  pcro  Labia  estu- 

diado  la  leccion. 
Debe  V.  tener  cuidado  no  solo  de  estu- 

diar  la  leccion,  sino  de  escribir  los 

ejercicios,  porque  si  no  Y.  no  apren- 

dera  nada. 
I  En  donde  esta  su  vecino  do  Y.  ? 
Acaba  do  entrar. 
ij  Quo  bora  tiene  su  reloj  do  Y.  ? 

Son  las  doce  y  cuarto. 

i  Tenia  su  vecino  de  Y.  cuidado  de  su 
ropa? 

Debia  hacerlo,  pero  no  lo  hacia. 

Debemos  amar  al  projimo  tanto  como 
(i  nosotros  mismos ;  pero  mi  vecino 
no  me  ama  a.  mi  ni  yo  le  amo  a  el. 

No  dudo  lo  que  Y.  dice. 


I  was  writing  when  you  came. 

He  used  to  study  his  lessons  every  day. 

Margaret  used  to  dance  much  when  she 
was  young. 

I  had  just  gone  out  when  you  came  in. 

Used  you  to  open  the  door  or  the  win- 
dow in  winter  ? 

In  winter  I  used  to  open  neither ;  but 
in  summer  I  used  to  open  both. 

Had  you  written  your  exercises  before 
taking  your  lesson  ? 

I  had  not  written  them ;  but  I  had 
studied  my  lesson. 

You  must  take  care,  not  only  to  study 
your  lesson,  but  (also)  to  write  your 
exercises ;  for  if  not,  you  will  learn 
nothing. 

Where  is  your  neighbor  ? 

He  has  just  come  in  (entered). 

What  o'clock  is  it  by  your  watch 
(what  hour  has  your  watch)  ? 

It  is  a  quarter  past  twelve. 

Used  your  neighbor  to  take  care  of  his 
clothes  ? 

He  should  have  done  so,  but  did  not. 

We  should  love  our  neighbor  as  our- 
selves ;  but  my  neighbor  does  not 
love  me,  nor  do  I  love  him. 

I  do  not  doubt  what  you  say. 


EXPLANATION. 

134.  The  imperfect  is  used  to  express  what  is  past,  and, 
at  the  same  time  present,  with  regard  to  something  else  which 
is  past ;  that  is,  it  is  a  past  tense  which  was  still  present  at  the 
time  spoken  of.  It  may  always  be  employed  in  Spanish  when 
in  English  the  word  teas  can  be  used  with  the  present  parti- 


126  LESSON     XXVIII. 

ciple,  or  tised  to  with  the  infinitive,  or  when  we  speak  of  ha- 
bitual actions ;  as, 

Yo  escribia  cuando  Y.  vino.  I  was  writing  when  you  came. 

El   estadiaba  sua  lecciones  todos  los     He  used   to  study  his  lessons   every 
dias.  day. 

135.  The  PLUPESFECT  is  used  to  express  what  is  past,  and 
took  place  before  some  other  past  action  or  event,  expressed  or 
understood;  as, 

Yo  /labia  Icido  ya  los  periodicos  cuando  I  I  had  already  read  the  newspapers  when 
V.  me  los  dio.  |      you  gave  them  to  me. 

136.  AcABAE  i)E. — The  English  expressions,  to  have  Just, 
and  to  he  just,  before  a  past  participle,  are   translated  into 
Spanish  by  acabar  de,  preceding  an  infinitive  ;  as, 
Acabo  de  entrar.  I  I  have  just  come  in. 

El  acaha  de  abrir  la  ventana.  |  He  has  just  opened  the  window. 

COXYERSATIOX  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Ha  hablado  V.  con  la  seilorita?  No,  ella  acababa  de  salir  cuando 
yo  toque  a  la  puerta. 

2.  ^Dudaba  V.  entrar?    Si,  porque  temia  ofender  a  V. 

3.  No  senor;  ^que  bora  es?      Mi  reloj  tiene  las  once  y  cuarto. 

4.  2  Y  qu6  bora  tiene  V.  ?    Yo  tengo  las  once  y  media. 

5.  ^Sabe  V.  qu6  bora  es  en  el  reloj  de  la  iglesia?  Cuando  yo  pasaba 
estaban  dando  las  once. 

C.  ^Ent6nces  abora  deberan  ser  no  mas  que  las  once  y  vcinte  6  vcinte 
y  cinco  minutos  ?     Creo  que  seran  un  poco  menos. 

7.  I  Ha  bablado  V.  con  mi  vecino  ?  He  ido  a  bacerle  una  visita,  pcro 
babia  salido. 

8.  J  No  liabl6  V.  con  la  sefiora?  Si,  estaba  en  la  ventana  cuando  yo 
pas6. 

9.  g  Tiene  unamano  muy  hermosa?  Si,  pero  los  ojos  son  mas  ber- 
mosos. 

10.  ^Qn6  tenia  en  la  cabeza?    Dos  flores. 

11.  gQui6n  Uama  a  la  puerta?    La  lavandera,  que  vlene  a  buscar  la 
ropa. 

12.  ^Cudnto  le  debo  a  Y.  ?    Me  debe  V.  veinte  y  cinco  centavos  de  la 
ropa  de  la  semana  pasada. 

13.  jNo  se  los  iia  pagado  a  V.  mi  marido?    No,  sefiora.  no  tenia  di- 
nero. 

14.  jDuda  V.  lo  que  le  digo?    No,  sefiora,  lo  creo. 


LESSON    XXVIII.  127 

15.  J  Estc'i  bieii  hivada  la  ropa  ?     Muybiea;  yo  inisraa  la  lav6. 

IG,  ^Ilizo  V.  la  visita  a  su  vecino?    Fui  a  su  casa;  pero  habia  salido. 

17.  ^Va  V.  muclias  veces  al  teatro?     Cuando  vivia  en  Paris  iba  a 
Juenudo  •;  pero  aqui  voy  muy  pocas  vcccs. 

18.  2  Como  debemos  amar  al  projimo  ?    Tanto  como  a  nosotros  mismos. 

19.  gQuien  es  el  pr6jimo  ?     Todos  los  liombrcs  son  nuestros  pr6jimos. 

20.  I  Esta  mala  su  hermana  de  V.  ?    Si,  sefiora,  y  de  cuidado  (seriously). 

21.  ^Cuantas  visitas  le  ha  liecbo  el  m6dico?    Mucliisimas. 

22.  jDebcn  Vds.  tener  muclio  cuidado  do  ella?     Si,  sefiora,  ya  lo  te- 
nemos. 

23.  ^Cuantas  visitas  le  debo  yo  d  V.?     Con  esta  son  tres. 

24.  ^  No  vendra  V.  a  comer  maflana  con  nosotras  ?    Maiiana  ire  al 
campo  con  mis  vccinos. 

25.  I  Habia  V.  recibido  la  carta  del  Frances  cuando  recibi6  la  mla  ? 
La  recibi  despues. 

26.  ^Porque  trabjya  V.  tanto?    Porque  es  mi  deber. 

27.  ^Vendran  Y.  y  su  liermana  a  pasar  una  semana  con  nosotros? 
Si,  sefiora,  la  semana  proxima  vcndremos  ambos. 

28.  I  Qui6n  abri6  mi  ventana,  Juan  ?     Seflor,  yo  mismo  la  abri. 

29.  I  Hablo  V.  con  el  sastre  ?     Fui  alia,  pero  habia  salido. 

30.  I  Cuando  vino  V.  ?     Ahora  mismo  acabo  de  entrar. 

31.  ^Donde  esta  mi  padre  ?     Acaba  de  salir  a  la  calle. 

32.  I  Sabes  a  d6nde  fue  ?     Fu6  a  comprar  ropa. 

33.  gHabra  ido  d  la  Cuarta  avenida?      No,  seilor,  creo  que  fud  a 
Broadway. 

34:.  ^Qu6  bora  es?    El  reloj  de  su  cuarto  de  V.  acaba  de  dar  las  doce. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "What  were  you  doing  when  Alexander  went  into  your  room?  I 
was  talking  to  my  father. 

2.  I  thought  you  were  writing  your  exercises.  No,  I  had  written 
them  already. 

3.  Does  the  servant  take  care  to  sweep  your  room  every  day  ?  Yes, 
ho  knows  very  well  it  is  his  duty. 

4.  "Why  did  you  not  come  before  ?  you  were  to  come  at  nine  o'clock. 
I  know  I  have  done  wrong  in  not  coming  earlier;  but  I  have  been 
writing  all  the  morning. 

5.  Does  your  sister  Margaret  dance  now  as  much  as  she  used? 
When  (she  was)  in  the  city  she  used  to  dance  very  much,  but  now  she 
has  no  time. 

6.  "When  you  lived  in  the  country  did  you  open  both  the  doors  and 
the  windows?     I  opened  neither. 


128  LESSON     XXVIII, 

7.  Had  you  finished  your  work  before  going  to  the  concert?     I  had 
(finished  it). 

8.  Do  you  doubt  what  I  tell  you  ?     No,  sir,  I  never  doubted  anything 
you  told  me, 

9.  Is  your  neighbor  afraid  to  open  his  windows  in  ^vinter  ?    He  is 
not  afraid  to  open  them. 

10.  Who  was  it  that  went  out  last  night  after  ten  o'clock  ?  No  one 
went  out;  my  brother  came  in  at  that  hour. 

11.  Did  Alexander  go  out  when  j^our  cousin  came  in?  lie  had  already 
gone  out  when  my  cousin  came  in, 

12.  Where  is  he  now  ?    lie  has  just  gone  out  to  walk. 

13.  WUl  he  be  very  long  (much  time)  ?  He  wUl  not  be  long ;  he  is  to 
take  his  Spanish  lesson  this  evening. 

14.  Did  you  pay  (make)  a  visit  to  my  neighbor  last  week  ?  I  went  to 
his  house,  but  he  was  not  at  home. 

15.  When  did  you  see  the  pianist?  He  came  to  see  me  the  other  day, 
but  I  had  gone  out. 

16.  Do  you  think  we  shall  have  studied  our  lessons  before  going  to  the 
teacher's?     I  think  wc  shall. 

17.  What  o'clock  is  it  by  (in)  your  watch  ?  It  is  seventeen  minutes 
past  three  by  mine ;  what  time  have  you  ? 

18.  It  must  bo  (deben  ser)  half-past  three ;  has  the  music  teacher 
come  ?     Not  yet. 

19.  WiU  you  have  the  kindness  to  go  to  his  house  and  tell  him  I  shall 
not  take  my  lesson  tliis  afternoon  ?     With  much  pleasure. 

20.  So  soon !  Well,  did  you  see  the  teacher  ?  No,  madam,  he  had 
just  gone  out. 

21.  How  much  do  you  owe  the  tailor  now  ?  I  owe  him  very  little  ; 
you  know  I  sent  him  some  money  last  montli. 

22.  I  know  (it) ;  but  did  he  not  send  (pasar)  in  another  bill  on  Mon- 
day ?     If  he  has  sent  in  another  I  have  not  seen  (visto)  it. 

23.  I  thought  you  were  in  the  country,  Mr,  Emanuel  ?  I  was  there 
last  week. 

24.  Why  did  you  not  come  yesterday?  I  saw  you  were. writing  and 
I  feared  to  offend  you, 

25.  But  you  kuow  it  was  your  duty  to  come  in  ;  you  knew  I  wanted 
you.  Well,  if  you  pardon  me  this  time  (vez),  I  sliall  come  in  again  (another 
time). 

26.  How  often  do  you  go  to  the  theatre?  Not  very  often  now;  I 
used  to  go  every  night  in  the  week. 

27.  How  are  we  to  love  our  neighbor?     As  ourselves, 

28.  Who  is  oiu:  neighbor  ?    All  mankind  (men)  are  our  neighbors. 


LESSON     XXIX. 


129 


29.  How  many  visits  has  tlio  pliysician  mado  to  your  uncle  ?  He  be- 
gan his  visits  on  the  30th  of  December,  and  visited  him  twice  a  week 
until  April  4th. 

30.  IIow  many  visits  do  I  owe  you  for  now?  You  owed  me  for 
twelve,  but  you  paid  me  for  nine,  and  so  you  only  owe  for  three  now. 

31.  Whose  letter  did  you  receive  first,  mine  or  Jane's  ?  When  yours 
came  to  hand  (my  hands),  I  had  akeady  received  Jane's. 

32.  Will  you  take  your  lesson  to-day?  I  am  to  go  to  the  Central  Park 
this  afternoon  with  my  mother,  and  so  I  shall  not  take  my  lesson  until 
to-morrow. 


LESSON    XXIX. 


PEETEEir  ANTEEIOE. 


Hubo 

Hubisto 

Hubo 

Hnbimos 
Ilubisteis 
Ilubieron 

Ver. 

Mirar. 

Esperar. 


hablado. 

aprendido. 

escrito. 

hablado. 

aprendido. 

escrito. 


Asi  que. 
'  Apenas. 
No  bieu. 
Tampoco  (cojij-.). 
Tambien  (adverb). 
Tambien  {con}.). 
Ademas. 
Primcramente,  or  en  primer  lu- 

gar. 
Segnndamente,    or    en    segundo 

lugar. 
Frccuente. 
Frecuontemente. 
Comodo. 
C6modamente. 
G* 


I  had 

Thou  hadst 
He  had 

We  had 
You  had 
They  had 


I 


"]  spoken, 
learned, 
written. 

spoken, 
learned, 
written. 


To  see.   {See  the  end  of  {lie  iooJi). 

To  look. 

To  hope,  to  wait  for. 


As  soon  as. 
Scarcely. 
No  sooner. 
Neither,  not  either. 
Also,  likewise. 
As  well,  moreover. 
Moreover,  besides. 
Firstly. 

Secondly,  &c. 

Frequent. 
Frequently. 

Convenient,  comfortable. 
Conveniently,  comfortably. 


130 


LESSON     XXIX. 


Incomodo, 

Inconvenient,  uncomfortable. 

Inc6modaiaente. 

Inconveniently,  uncomfortably. 

Probable. 

Probable,  likely. 

Probableinente. 

Probably,  likely. 

Perfecto. 

Perfect. 

Perfectamente. 

Perfectly. 

Correcto. 

Correct. 

Correctamente. 

Correctly. 

Ojo.                   Eye. 

Vista. 

Sight,  view. 

Correo.             Post, 

post-office, 

Comodidad. 

Convenience, 

courier. 

comfort. 

Lugar.               Place. 

COMPO 

MiUa. 
SITION. 

Mile. 

Cnando  le  hube  conocido  le  am6. 
Apenas  hubo  salido  61  cuando  yo  cntre. 

No  bien  le  hube  visto  cuando  le  conocf. 

Asi  que  hube  cscrito  la  carta  la  lleve 
al  correo. 

Cuando  le  conoci  le  am6. 

^  Iba  V.  frecuentcmente  al  toatro  el  ano 
pasado  ? 

Iba  frecuentisimamente,  or  muy  frecuen- 
tcmente. 

El  vive  en  esa  casa  comodamente,  or 
con  comodidad. 

El  escribe  coiTCcta  y  perfectamente ; 
pero  V.  escribe  mas  facilmente. 


When  I  had  knovn  him  I  loved  him. 
Scarcely    had    he    gone    out   when  I 

came  in. 
No  sooner  had  I  seen  him  than  I  knew 

him. 
As  soon  as  I  had  written  the  letter  I 

took  it  to  the  post-office. 
When  I  knew  him  I  loved  him. 
Did  you  go  often  to  the  theatre  last 

year? 
I  went  very  often. 

He  lives  comfortably,  or  with  comfort, 

in  that  house. 
He  writes  correctly  and  perfectly ;   but 

you  write  more  easily. 


EXPLANATION. 
137.  The  PEETEKiT  A^TEKIOR  is  used  to  express  a  past 
action  or  event  that  took  place  immediately  before  anotlier 
action  or  event  also  past.  It  is  never  used  except  after  some 
of  the  adverbs  of  time ;  cuando,  when ;  as't  que,  as  soon  as  ;  no 
hien,  no  sooner ;  apenas,  scarcely ;  luego  que,  immediately  after ; 
despues  que,  soon  after  ;  as, 


Cuando  le  hube  conocido. 

Apenas  hubo  salido  cuando  yo  vine. 

No  bien  le  hube  visto  cuando  le  conoci. 


"^licn  I  had  made  his  acquaintance. 
Scarcely  had  he  gone  out  when  I  came. 
No  sooner  had  I  seen  him  than  I  knew 
him. 


LESSON     XXIX.  131 

This  tense  is  very  little  used,  not  only  for  the  reason  already 
mentioned,  of  its  being  preceded  by  an  adverb  of  time,  but  also 
because  its  p^ace  may  be  elegantly  supplied  by  the  pketeeit 
DEFiJfiTE ;  as, 

Cuando  le  conod.  "When  I  had  known  him. 

Apenas  salid  cuando  yo  vine.  Scarcely  had  he  gone  out  when  I  came. 

No  bien  le  vi  cuando  le  conoci.  No  sooner  had  I  seen  him  than  I  knew 

him. 

138.  The  adverbs  of  manner  and  quality,  in  Spanish  as 
well  as  in  English,  are  generally  derived  from  adjectives. 

139.  To  form  an  adverb  from  an  adjective,  it  is  sufficient 
to  add  mente  to  the  adjective,  if  the  latter  has  the  same  ter- 
mination in  both  genders ;  as, 

Frecuente,  frecuentemcnfe. 
Gramatical,  gramaticalmenfe. 

If  the  adjective  has  a  different  termination  for  each  gender, 
then  mente  is  added  to  the  feminine ;  as, 

Incomoda,  incomodamc/ifc. 
Perfecta,  perfectamewfe. 

"When  two  or  more  of  these  adverbs  follow  each  other,  only 
the  last  one  takes  mente,  the  others  taking  the  feminine  termi- 
nation a ;   as, 
Ciceron  hablo  sabia  y  elocueatcmente.    \  Cicero  spoke  learnedly  and  eloquently. 

140.  Tliese  adverbs  terminating  in  m,ente,  being  derived 
from  adjectives,  admit  like  these  the  degrees  of  comparison ;  as, 


Facilmente. 

Mas  facilmente. 

Menos  facilmente. 

Tan  facilmente. 

Muy  facilmente,  or  facilisimamentc. 


Easily. 

More  easily. 

Less  easily. 

As,  or  so  easily. 

Very  easily,  or  most  easily. 


141.  Those  adverbs  may,  without  any  change  in  the 
sense,  be  substituted  by  a  substantive  goveraed  by  the  prepo- 
sition con ;  as, 

El  Tive  comodamente,  or  con  comodi-  I  He  lives  comfortably, 
dad. 


132  LESSON     XXIX. 

CONYERSATIOX  AXD  YERSIOX. 

1.  ^  Ve  V.  aquella  flor  tan  herraosa?    Miro,  pcro  no  la  veo. 

2.  I  Ve  V.  qu6  liora  es  en  el  reloj  de  la  iglesia  ?     No,*  pero  mirar^  en 
mi  reloj. 

3.  ^  Ha  visto  V.  a  su  hermano  ?     Si,  seQor,  le  vi  apenas  hubo  salido 
del  teatro. 

4.  ^Lo  conoci6  a  Y.  mi  vecino?    No  bien  le  liubc  liablado,  me  co- 
iioci6. 

5.  I  Han  venido  mis  amigos  ?     Yinieron  asi  que  hubo  Y.  salido. 

6.  ^Le  dieron   4  Y.  mis  libros?     Me  los  dieron,  no  bien  les  Irabe 
Lablado  de  ello. 

7.  ^  Y  se  marcharon  muy  pronto  ?    So  marcliaron  asi  que  hubieron 
escrito  sus  cartas. 

8.  I  Qu6  hizo  Y.  despues  ?     Primeramente  (ar  primero)  fui  al  corrco 
y  despues  al  mercado. 

9.  ^Qu6  quierc  Y.  hacer?     Primeramente  escribir  los  ejercicios  y 
despues  cstudiar  la  leccion. 

10.  gPorque  nolo  hizo  Y.  antes?     En  primer  lugar  porque  no  tenia 
humor  y  en  segundo  porque  apenas  tuve  tiempo. 

11.  gHabla  Y.  frances  frecuentemente  ?     Si,  seflor,  lo  liablo  con  frc- 
cuencia. 

12.  ^Lo  escribe  Y.  correctamente  ?     Cuando  lo  estudiaba  lo  escribia 
con  mas  correccion  que  ahora. 

1-3.  I  Aprende  Y.  ingles  6  espaflol  ?    Aprendo  ambos. 

14.  I Y  su  hermano  de  Y.  ?    Mi  hermano  los  aprende  tambien. 

15.  gLos  hablan  Yds.  con  perfeccion  ?     Si,  seiior,  el  ingl6s  lo  hablamos 
perfectamente ;  pero  el  espafiol  ni  yo,  ni  el  tampoco. 

16.  ^Ha  euviado  Y.  su  carta  al  correo?     No,  seflor,  la  enviard  ma- 
fiana. 

17.  ^La  ha  escrito  Y.  ?     Tampoco  la  he  escrito,  porque  quiero  hacerlo 
con  comodidad. 

18.  glla  aprendido  Y.  la  leccion  do  hoy?     He  aprcndido  la  de  hoy  y 
la  de  mafiana  tambien. 

19.  J  Cuando  piensa  Y.  salir  para  Paris?      Probablcmcnto  saldre  la 
semana  pr6sima. 

20.  J  No  vis'e  Y.  c6modamento  aqui?     Si,  seiior,  pero  vivo  mas  como- 
do  en  Francia. 

21.  ^Yivia  Y.  comodamente  cuando  estaba  en  Londres?  *  No,  sefloi*, 
vivia  incomodamente  porque  no  hablaba  ingles. 

22.  I  Tiene  Y.  otro  libro  ademas  de  ese  ?     Si,  seiior,  'tengo  otros  dos. 

23.  jEsta  Y.  malo  de  la  vista?    Si,  sefior,  tengo  malo  un  ojo. 


LESSON     XXIX.  133 

24.  I  Porque  no  ha  venido  aim  su  primo  de  V.  ?  Porque  quiorc  venir 
con  comodidad. 

25.  ^Tiene  V.  buena  vista?  Si,  seflor,  pero  ahora  tengo  los  ojoa 
malos. 

26.  ^Cuando  estudia  V.  sus  lecciones?  Las  estudio  de  dia  porqne'cl 
estudio  de  noclie  es  malo  para  la  vista. 

27.  I  D6nde  estan  sus  hermanos  de  V.  ?  Salieron  d  paseo  no  bien  hu- 
bieron  escrito  sus  ojercicios. 

28.  I  Cuando  escribieron  las  cartas  ?  Asi  que  hubieron  aprendido  sus 
lecciones. 

29.  I  Llevo  V.  mis  cartas  al  correo  ?     Si,  sefior,  asi  que  Y.  Imbo  salido. 

30.  I  Va  V.  con  frecuencia  al  correo  ?  Si,  sefior,  vpy  frecuentemente : 
voy  todos  los  dias. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  go  to  the  la"w^r's  as  I  told  you?  I  went  as  soon  as 
you  told  me. 

2.  Was  lie  at  home  ?  did  you  see  him  ?  He  ■was  not  in  when  I  went; 
but  I  waited  until  he  came. 

3.  Did  you  show  him  the  letter  ?  I  opened  it  and  showed  it  to  him ; 
but  he  would  *  not  read  it. 

4.  TVhat  did  your  children  do  after  taking  their  lesson  ?  They  had 
scarcely  finished  their  lesson  when  they  went  to  bed. 

5.  Did  you  look  at  the  horses  your  brother  bought  on  Monday.  I  did 
(look  at  them),  and  I  think  they  are  very  fine. 

6.  Have  you  ever  taken  your  family  to  Italy  ?  Yes,  several  times ; 
last  year  we  travelled  in  Italy. 

7.  Did  you  spend  some  time  in  the  principal  cities  ?  Tcs ;  but  prin- 
cipally in  Eome  {Eoma\  Florence  (Florencia)  and  Milan  (Milan). 

8.  Where  were  you  on  the  1.5th  of  December,  1865  ?  On  the  15th 
we  were  in  Florence  in  the  morning,  and  in  Rome  at  night. 

9.  Did  you  all  enjoy  good  health  in  Europe?  Yes,  all,  except  (menos) 
Alexander,  who  had  a  sore  (malo)  eye  the  greater  part  of  the  time. 

10.  Did  you  go  often  to  the  theatre?  We  generally  went  every 
evening. 

11.  Had  you  any  diflSculty  (dijicultad)  in  understand^g  t  the  lan- 
guage? None;  you  know  Emanuel  speaks  Italian  very  correctly :  he 
had  learned  it  before  setting  out  for  Europe. 

12.  Did  you  see^  many  Americans  when  you  were  travelling?  Very 
many;  some  of  them  we  knew  very  well,  and  others  were  friends  of 
ours. 

*  Quiso.  t  Comprender. 


134  LESSON     XXIX. 

13.  Where  is  the  letter  you  were  writing  this  morning?  As  soon  as  I 
had  finished  it  John  took  it  to  the  post-oflBce. 

14.  Do  you  ever  write  to  your  uncle  ?  Very  little  since  we  left  New 
York ;  but  there  I  used  to  write  to  him  very  frequently. 

15.  Which  of  you  three  writes  French  the  most  correctly*?  I  know  it 
is  not  I  ?■  and  as  to  (en  cuanto  a)  Peter  and  Louis,  I  think  Peter  wi'ites 
best,  but  Louis  writes  with  more  ease  (more  easily). 

16.  Do  you  see  that  beautiful  flower  ?  I  am  looking ;  but  I  do  not 
see  it. 

17.  Will  you  tell  me  what  o'clock  it  is  by  the  church  clock?  I  am 
looking  at  the  church ;  but  I  see  no  clock. 

18.  Have  you  not  good  sight  ?  Yes,  very  good ;  but  I  have  a  very 
sore  eye. 

19.  Did  my  cousins  not  come  ?    They  came  as  soon  as  you  went  out. 

20.  Did  you  show  them  my  poi*trait  ?  I  did ;  but  they  scarcely  had 
time  to  look  at  it. 

21.  Did  they  say  where  they  were  going?  They  said  they  were  going 
to  the  country. 

22.  How  long  ai-e  they  to  be  there  ?     They  did  not  tell  me  that. 

23.  Are  they  not  coming  for  me  to-morrow  ?  Yes,  sir,  they  are  com- 
ing for  you  to  go  and  pay  a  visit  to  Mrs.  Peflaverde. 

24.  Have  you  ever  seen  a  more  comfortable  little  room  than  this  one  ? 
Besides  being  comfortable  it  is  very  handsome. 

25.  Why  do  you  not  speak  Spanish  with  Mr.  Riberas  ?  Jn  the  first 
place,  because  I  do  not  speak  it  well  enough ;  and  in  the  second,  because 
he  speaks  English  very  correctly. 

26.  I  thought  you  were  studying  Spanish  ?  I  am  studying  it ;  but 
studying  and  speaking  are  two  distinct  {distinto)  things. 

27.  Did  you  tell  the  music  teacher  that  Louisa  wishes  to  take  lessons  ? 
Not  yet ;  but  I  shall  see  him  to-morrow  and  tell  him  so. 

28.  Why  did  you  not  take  your  lesson  yesterday  ?     I  was  sick. 

29.  ifave  you  studied  yesterday's  lesson,  and  to-day's  ?  I  have  studied 
both. 

30.  Will  you  come  to-morrow  at  the  same  hour  ?    Probably  I  shall. 

*  Mejor. 


LESSON     XXX. 


135 


LESSON    XXX. 


Dover. 

Lloviendo. 

Llovido. 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
Preterit  definite. 
Future  simple. 


Preterit  definite. 
Pluperfect. 
Anterior. 
Future  compound. 


IMPEESONAL   VERBS. 

To  rain. 
Earning. 
Eained. 

Indicative. 
Llueve.  It  rains. 

Llovia.     ^  It  was  raining. 

Llovi6.  It  rained. 

Llovera.  It  will  rain. 

'     Compound  Tenses. 


Ha  llovido. 
Habia  llovido. 
Hubo  llovido. 
Habra  llovido. 


It  has  rained. 
It  had  rained. 
It  had  rained. 
It  will  have  rained. 


Amanecer. 

To  grow  light. 

Anochecer. 

To  grow  dark. 

Diluviar. 

To  rain  like  a  deluge,  to  rain  in 

torrents. 

Granizar. 

To  hail. 

Helar. 

To  freeze. 

Uoviznar. 

To  drizzle. 

Nevar. 

To  snow. 

Relampaguear. 

To  lighten. 

Tronar. 

To  thunder. 

PEBSOITAI,   VEEB3   Vi 

5ED   IMPEESONALLY. 

Bastar. 

To  be  sufficient. 

Ilaber. 

(Signifying)  there  to  be. 

Hacer. 

(Signifying)  to  be.  • 

Ser. 

To  be. 

Convenir. 

To  suit,  to  be  proper. 

Parecer. 

To  seem,  to  appear. 

Brasil. 

Menester. 

Ilielo. 


Brazil. 

Necessity. 

Ice. 


Ilabana. 

Nievc. 

Lluvia. 


Ilavana. 

Snow. 

Rain. 


136 


LESSOR      XXX. 


Ilelado. 
Trueno. 
Medio  dia. 
Viento. 


Ico  cream. 
Thunder. 
Noon. 
Wind. 


Tarde,  Afternoon. 

La  mafiana.  Morning. 

Media  nocbe.  Midnight. 

Especie.  End. 


COMPOSITIOX. 


^E3    necesario   estudiar    mucho   para 

aprender  el  cspanol  ? 
Es  menester  estudiar  muclio,  pero  no 

tanto  come  para  aprender  el  ingles. 
En  Nueva  York  Uueve  y  lloyizna  mucho, 

pero  no  diluvia  como  en  la  Habana. 

En  Madrid  amanece  muy  temprano  y 

anochece  muy  tarde  en  el  verano. 
En  la  Habana  amanece  y  anochece  siem- 

pre  L  la  misma  hora,  en  todo3  los 

dias  del  ano. 
En  el  Brasil  no  nieva;  pero  truena  y 

relampaguea    mucho    siempre    que 

llucve. 
En  la  Habana  no  hay  hielo,  porque  no 

hace  bastantevfrio  para  helar  ;  y  por 

cso  lo  llcvan  dc  Xueva  York. 

En  Xuera  York  ha  helado  y  nevado 
mucho  este  ano ;  pero  en  el  pasado 
nevo  y  helo  muy  poeo. 

i  Hace  mucho  calor  en  este  pals  ? 

En  los  mescs  de  Noviembre,  Diciembre 
y  Euero  hace  mucho  frio ;  pero  en 
Junio,  Julio  y  Agosto  hace  mucho 
calor. 

^  Que  tiempo  hace  ? 

Parece  que  Ta  t,  Hover,  porque  hay 
mucho  viento  y  hace  calor. 

Cuatro  anos  ha,  or  hay  cuatro  anos,  que 
no  vco  a  mi  padre. 

Pero  V.  tiene  csperanza  dc  vcrle  pron- 
to, porque  llcgari  hoy  h  Nueva  Yoik 
ea  el  vapor  "Etna"  que  viene  dc 
Eoropa. 

En  verano  voy  a  pasear  todos  los  dias 
al  amanccer. 


Is  it  necessary  to  study  much  to  learn 

Spanish? 
It  is  necessary  to  study  a  great  deal, 

but  not  so  much  as  to  learn  English. 
In  Xew  York  it  rains  and  drizzles  a 

great  deal,  but  it  does  not  rain  in 

torrents  as  in  Havana. 
In  Madrid  day  breaks  very  early  and 

night  falls  very  late  in  summer. 
In  Havana  day  breaks  and  night  falls 

at  the  same  hours  every  day  in  the 

year. 
In  Brazil  it  does  not  snow ;  but  it  thun- 
ders and  Ughtens  much  whenever  it 

rains. 
In  Havana  there  is  no  ice,  becaiise  it  is 

not  cold  enough  to  freeze;  and  for 

that  reason  they  take  it  from  New 

York. 
In  New  York  it  has  frozen  and  snowed 

much  this  year;   but  last  year  it 

snowed  and  froze  very  Uttle. 
Is  it  very  warm  in  this  country.? 
In  the  months  of  November,  December 

and  January  it  is  very  cold ;   but  in 

June,  July  and  August  it   is  very 

warm. 
What  kind  of  weatlier  is  it  ? 
It  appears  it  is  going  to  rain,  because 

it  is  very  windy  and  hot. 
I  have  not  seen  my  father  for  four 

years. 
But  you  (have)  hope  to  see  him  soon ; 

for  he  will  arrive  to-day  in  New  York 

by  the    steamer   "  Etna "   (that  is) 

coming  from  Europe. 
In  summer  I  go  to  walk  every  morning 

at  davbrcak. 


LESSOIjT     XXX. 


137 


^  Va  V.  a  la  cama  temprano  ? 

No,  senor,  tarde ;  a  la  media  noche, 

(,  Come  V.  al  medio  dia  ? 

Xo,  seiior,  como  al  anochecer. 

6  Va  V.  a  la  Habana  ? 

No,  seSor,  voy  a  Francia. 

La  Francia  es  mas  alegre  que  la  Ingla- 

terra. 
El  muchacho  cstudia  muclio. 
El  estudio  de  la  gramatica  es  necesario. 
El  liombre  necesita  trabajar. 
La  conversacion  es  muy  titil  para  aprcn- 

der  una  lenjrua. 


Do  you  go  to  bed  early  ? 

No,  sir,  late ;  at  midnight. 

Do  you  dine  at  uoou  ? 

No,  sir,  I  dine  at  nightfall. 

Are  you  going  to  Havana  ? 

No,  sir,  I  am  going  to  France. 

France  is  more  pleasant  than  England. 

The  boy  studies  much. 
The  study  of  grammar  is  necessary. 
Man  requires  to  work. 
Conversation  is  very  useful  for  learning 
a  language. 


EXPLANATION. 


142.  Impeesonal  vekbs  are  those  which  are  used  only  in 
the  infinitive  mood  and  in  the  third  person  singular  of  all  the 
tenses,  and  have  no  definite  subject ;  as, 


Llueve. 

Tronar4. 

Nevaba. 


It  rains. 

It  will  thunder. 

It  was  snowing. 


143.  The  verbs  amanecer  and  anochecer  are  sometimes 
used  in  the  three  persons,  both  numbers ;  but  then  they  are 
not  impersonal,  but  neuter ;  as, 

I  was  in  New  York  at  daybreak,  and 
in  Philadelphia  at  nightfall. 


Yo  amanec£  en  Nueva  York,  y  ano-  | 
chec^  en  Filadelfia.  I 


144.  Habek  and  hacer  are  often  used  impersonally,  and 
are  in  such  cases  to  be  rendered  into  English  by  the  corre- 
sponding tenses  of  the  verb  to  he. 

The  verb  haber,  when  conjugated  impersonally,  has  the 
peculiarity  of  taking  a  ?/  in  the  third  person  ©f  the  present  in- 
dicative ;  as. 

There  is  much  fruit. 
There  will  be  many  men. 


Hay  mucha  fruta. 
Habrii  muchos  hombres. 
Hizo  frio. 
Hace  muchos  auos. 


It  was  cold. 
Many  years  ago. 


N.  B. — Hd  is  sometimes  elegantly  used  for  Jiay  ;  as, 
Docc  auos  ha,  or  hay  doce  anos.         |      Twelve  years  ago ; 


138 


LESSON     XXX. 


but  it  is  to  be  observed  that  hd  always  follows  the  time,  while 
fiay  precedes  it. 

There  are  many  other  verbs  which,  although  not  impersonal, 
are  sometimes  used  as  such ;  as, 

Es  muy  tarde.  It  is  very  late. 

Es  preciso.  It  is  necessary. 

Es  menester.  There  is  necessity. 

Parece.  It  seems,  it  appears. 

Conviene.  It  suits,  it  is  proper. 

Basta.  It  is  sufficient,  it  will  do. 

145.  As  it  may  have  been  observed,  the  pronoun  it.,  which 
accompanies  impersonal  verbs  in  Englisli,  is  not  translated  into 
Spanish. 

Nouns  taken  in  a  definite  sense  require  the  article ;  as, 

El  mucbacho  estudia.  I      The  boy  studies. 

El  estudio  de  la  gramatica  es  titil.       |      The  study  of  grammar  is  useful. 

Nouns  used  in  their  most  general  sense  are  j^receded  by  the 
article ;  as, 
El  hombre  necesita  trabajar. 
La  conversacion   es   muy  util  para 

aprender  una  lengua. 

146.  Names  of  nations,  countries,  provinces,  mountains, 
rivers  and  seasons,  generally  take  the  article ;  as, 


Man  requires  to  work. 
Conversation  is  very  useful  for  learn- 
ing a  lanfniase. 


La  Espafia. 
La  Inglaterra. 
El  inviemo. 


Spain. 

England. 

Winter. 


147.  Nations,  countries  and  provinces,  when  preceded  by 
a  preposition,  do  not  take  the  article  unless  they  are  personi- 
fied; as. 

Las  provincias  de  Espaiia.  1      The  provinces  of  Spain. 

El  valor  de  la  Espafia.  |      The  courage  of  Spain. 

Nevertheless^  the  article  is  employed  under  all  circumstances 
with  the  names  of  some  places ;  as, 


El  Brasil. 
La  Habana. 
El  Ferrol. 
La  China. 
El  Japon. 
El  Peru. 


Brazil. 

Havana. 

Ferrol. 

China. 

Japan. 

Peru. 


LESSON     XXX.  139 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  g  Que  tieinpo  liace  ?     Ahora  liace  calor ;  antes  liacia  frio. 

2.  I  Lloveni  mafiana  ?     Creo  quo  nevara. 

8.  I  Llueve  muclio  en  Nueva  York  ?    Llucve  y  llovizna  bastantc ;  pero 
raramentc  diluvia. 

4.  I  Hace  mucho  frio  on  la  Habana  en  el  mes  do  Euero  ?     Hace  algu- 
no,  pero  nuuca  nieva  ni  Mela. 

5.  I  Kelampaguea  ?    Relampaguea  y  llovizna. 

G.  ^Porquo  escribe  V.  tantos  ejercicios  ?     Porque  para  aprender  una 
lengua  no  basta  hablarla,  esnecesario  tambien  saber  escribirla. 

7.  I  Nieva  mucho  en  el  Brasil  ?    En  el  Brasil  no  nieva,  mas  quo  en  las 
montaiias,  donde  hay  nieve  todo  el  alio. 

8.  gQuiere  V.  tomar  un   helado?     No,   seiior,  los  helados  no   soq 
buenos  en  este  tiempo. 

9.  ^Oudnto  tiempo  hace  quo  no  ve  Y.  a  su  familia?    El  dos  de  Setiem- 
bre  proximo  hara  onco  alios. 

10.  I  Porqu6  no  vino  V.  anoche  ?    Porque  llovia  y  hacia  mucho  viento. 

11.  ^Tiene  V.  miedo  do  los  truenos?     Cuando  relampaguea  mucho,  si 
seQor. 

12.  I  Porque  no  fue  V.   anoche  al   concierto  ?     Porque  Uoviznaba  y 
estaba  nevando. 

13.  jAqu6  boras  come  V.  ?     Al  amaneccr  tomo  chocolate;   al  medio 
dia  como,  y  al  anochccer  tomo  el  t6. 

14.  ^  Se  levauta  V.  al  amauecer  todos  los  dias  ?     Cuando  es  menester, 
si  seQor. 

15.  2  A  que  hora  salio  V.  del  toatro  el  sabado?     A  media  noche. 

IG.  ^Cuando  salieron  sus  hermanas  para  el  campo?     Ayer  al  medio 
dia. 

17.  ^  Cuando  vol veriin  ?     Pasado  maflana  por  la  noche. 

18.  ^A  que  hora  amanece  en  el  verano?     En  verano  amanece  a  las 
cinco  y  anochece  a  las  siete  y  media. 

19.  ^Porque  se  marcha  V.  tan  pronto?    Porque  es  menester. 

20.  ^Es  menester  salir  al  amanecer  ?     No,  basta  salir  al  medio  dia. 

21.  ^Hay  muchos  Alemanes  en  Nueva  York?     Si,  sefior,  hay  muchi- 
simos. 

22.  ^  Cuantos  dias  hace  que  no  le  ve  V.  ?    No  hace  mas  que  uno. 

23.  I  Hay  algun  Frances  en  su  casa  de  Y.  ?    Hay  cuatro  Franceses  y  una 
Francesa. 

24.  I  Cuando  vinieron  Yds.  ?     Ayer  al  medio  dia. 

25.  I  Cree  Y.  que  Uovera  hoy  ?     Parece  que  si,  porquo  hace  mucho 
viento  y  mucho  calor. 


140  LESSOX     XXX. 

26.  jLlovi6  mucbo  aqui  cl  aHopasado?    Aqui  Uovio  muclao,  pero  en 
la  Ilabaua  Uovio  mas. 

27.  jNieva  mucho  en  cste  pais?    En  el  invierno  nieva  mucbo. 

28.  I  Se  biela  el  agua?    Muchas  veces. 

29.  i  Habra  raucho  Melo  cl  alio  prdximo  ?    En  el  invierno  habra  mu- 
cbo bielo. 

30.  jHace  mucbo  frio  ?    Si,  sefior,  j  al  amanecer  Uovia  y  granizaba. 

31.  ^Porque  baco  tanto  Mo  boy?    Porque  nev6  ayer. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Is  it  raining  ?     I  do  not  know. 

2.  You  do  not  know  ?  How,  are  you  still  in  bed  ? — Yes,  and  I  shall 
be  uutU  7  o'clock. 

3.  At  wbat  o'clock  did  you  go  to  bed?    At  midnight. 

4.  What  is  it  necessary  to  do  in  order  to  learn  Spanish  ?  It  is  neces- 
sary to  study  a  good  grammar,  talk  a  great  deal  with  Spaniards,  and  read 
the  works  of  good  authors. 

5.  "WTiat  were  you  doing  in  the  garden  this  morning  at  daybreak  ? 
I  was  walking. 

6.  Have  you  read  the  Spanish  newspaper  yet  that  I  lent  *  you  ?  Yes, 
sir,  here  it  is.     Thank  you. 

•  7.  "What  language  do  they  speak  in  Brazil?    Portuguese  (portugues). 

8.  Do  you  see  that  hghtningt?  Yes,  it  is  lightening  and  thundering 
very  much. 

9.  Is  it  proper  to  have  the  windows  open  when  it  thunders?  No,  it 
is  better  to  have  them  shut  (cerradas). 

10.  I  think  fit  appears  to  me)  it  will  soon  rain.  Yes,  I  think  so  too ; 
it  is  already  drizzling. 

11.  John !  Sir.  Is  there  any  water  in  my  room  ? — Xo,  sir,  but  if  you 
wish,  I  shall  take  some  there  now. 

12.  In  what  months  of  the  year  does  it  freeze  most  in  New  York  ? 
During  (durante)  the  months  of  January  and  February. 

13.  I  believe  there  is  a  great  deal  of  ice  used  (se  tisa)  in  New  York 
during  the  summer.    A  great  deal,  and  it  is  very  cheap. 

14.  It  appears  that  there  will  be  little  ice  next  summer.  Yery  little, 
the  winter  has  not  been  cold  enough  to  have  much. 

15.  "What  watch  is  that  you  have  there?    It  is  the  one  I  always  had. 

16.  I  thought  you  had  given  your  watch  to  Charles,  and  bought  your 
(the)  neighbor's  ?    No,  Charles  has  a  very  pretty  little  watch. 

17.  What  o'clock  is  it  by  your  watch  ?  It  is  just  four  o'clock  (son  la» 
ctuitro  enjpunto). 

*  Prestar.  t  Eelampago. 


LESSON     XXXI.  141 

18.  "Who  knocked  at  the  door  just  now?    It  was  Mrs.  Martinez  ;  it  is 
thundering,  and  you  know  she  is  afraid  of  the  lightning. 

19.  Why  did  she  not  come  in  ?    She  did  not  like  to  (would  not)  disturb 
yon  (inolcstarla  d  V.)  madam. 

20.  Do  you  know  whether  Alexander  has  sent   the  papers  to  his 
brother  yet  ?     I  think  he  has  (me  pcu'ece  que  s'l). 

21.  Did  you  take  him  the  two  volumes  I  showed  him  yesterday?    I 
took  them  to  him  this  morning. 

22.  Was  he  in  the  house  when  you  went  ?    No,  madam,  he  had  just 
gone  out. 

23.  Will  you  open  that  window,  if  you  please  ?    With  pleasure. 

24.  And  this  one  also  ?     No,  thank  you ;  it  is  better  to  have  that  one 
shut. 

25.  What  kind  of  weather  is  it  to-day  ?    Very  bad ;  it  has  been  raining 
and  hailing  ever  since  (desde)  daybreak. 

20.  Madam,  here  are  two  beautiful  bouquets  that  Mrs.  Garcia  has  sent 
you  from  her  garden.     She  is  very  kind  (buena). 

27.  Who  brought  them  ?     Her  servant  {fern.). 

28.  When  did  she  bring  them  ?    You  had  no  sooner  gone  out  than 
she  came. 

29.  How  windy  it  was  last  night!     Yes,  and  it  rained  in  torrents  the 
whole  night,  from  nightfall  until  daybraak  this  morning. 

30.  What  news  is  there  from  Europe?     I  do  not  know;  I  have  not 
yet  seen  the  newspapei-s. 


LESSON^    XXXI. 


Gustar.  |         To  like,  to  please. 


PEESENT. 


(A  mi)  me  gusta  or  gustan. 

(A  ti)  te  gusta  " 

(A  61)  le  gusta  *' 

(A  nosotros)  nos  gusta,  or  gustan. 

(A  vosotros)  OS  gusta,  " 

(A  ellos)  les  gusta.  " 


I  like  it  or  them. 
Thou  likest  it  or  them. 
He  likes  it  " 

We  like  it  " 

You  like  it  " 

They  hke  it  " 


IMPEEFECT. 

(A  mi)  me  gustaba  or  gustaban.     I      I  liked  it  or  them. 
(A  ti)  te  gustaba,  etc.  I      Thou  lilcedst  it,  &c. 


142 


LESSON      XXXI, 


Gustar  de. 


Gusto  de. 

Gustas  de. 
Gusta  de. 

Gustamos  de. 
Gustais  de. 
Gustan  de. 


Gustaba  de. 
Gustabas  de,  etc. 


To  be  fond  of. 


PRESENT. 


I  am  fond  of. 
Thou  art  fond  of. 
He  is  fond  of. 

We  ai'c  fond  of. 
You  are  fond  of. 
They  are  fond  of. 


IMPEEFECT. 

I  was  or  used  to  be  fond  of. 
Thou  wast  or  used  to  be  fond 
of,  &c. 


Gustar. 

To  taste. 
To  please. 

Placer. 

Pesar  {impersonal). 

To  regret. 

Pesar  (in  all  its  persons). 

To  weigh. 

Faltar  or  hacer  falta. 

To  want. 

Faltar. 

To  fail,  to  be  wanting  or  missing. 

Acomodar. 

• 

To  suit,  to  accommodate. 

Convenir. 

To  suit,  to  be  convenient. 

Importar. 

To  be  important. 

Cerca. 

Near. 

Ldjos. 

Far. 

Dentro. 

Within. 

Fuera. 

Without. 

Bello. 

Beautiful,  fine 

Posible. 

Possible. 

Imposible. 

Impossible. 

Poeta. 

Poet. 

Poesia. 

Poetry,  poem. 

Pintor. 

Painter. 

Pintura. 

Painting. 

Escultor. 

Sculptor. 

Escultm-a. 

Sculpture. 

Placer. 

Pleasure. 

Prosa. 

Prose. 

Dios. 

God. 

Fruta. 

Fruit. 

Pesar. 

Piegret,  sorrow. 

Manzana. 

Apple. 

Melon. 

Melon. 

Naranja. 

Orange. 

Melocoton. 

Peach. 

Artes  {pill.). 

Arts. 

Arte. 

Art,  skill. 

Arroba. 

Arroba. 

LESSON     XXXI, 


143 


COMPOSITION. 


6  Le  gusta  a  V.  la  fruta  ? 

Si,  seSor,  mc  gustan  las  naranjas  y  los 

melones. 
A  mi  me  gustan  los  melocotones  y  las 

manzanas. 
j  dial  de  las  bellas  artes  le  gusta  a  V. 

mas  ? 
Me  gustan  todas,  la  musica,  la  poesia, 

la  pintura  y  la  cscultura. 
6  Ya  Y.  4  la  opera  muy  a  menudo  ? 
Yoy  dos  6  tres  vcces  por  semana. 
Me  parece  que  llovera  pronto,  y  me 

gusta  porquc  tengo  im  gran  placer  en 

ver  Hover. 

i  Es  posible !  A  mi  no  me  gusta  ver 
Hover ;  pero  mc  gusta  muchisimo 
ver  ncvar. 

(,  Le  acomoda  a  Y.  ese  caballo  ? 

No  me  conviene,  porque  es  muy  viejo 
asi  que  no  lo  comprar^. 

i  Yive  Y.  ccrca  6  K-jos  de  aqui  ? 
Yivo  muy  ccrca. 

(,  Yive  Y.  dentro  6  fuera  de  la  ciudad  ? 
Ahora  en  la  ciudad ;  pero  en  el  verano 

vivo  en  el  campo. 
6  Que  le  falta  t,  Y.  para  ser  feliz  ? 

No  me  falta  nada,  gracias  a  Dio?. 
Deseo  conocer  al  pintor  cuya  pintura 

tiene  Y.  en  su  cuarto. 
6  Le  pesa  a  Y,  de  no  liaber  estado  en  el 

concierto  ? 
3Ie  pesa  mucho  de  no  haber  estado, 

porque  no  tuve  el  placer  de  ver  &  su 

amigo  de  Y. 
A  mi  me  pesa  de  cUo  tambien. 


Do  you  like  fruit  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  like  oranges  and  melons. 

I  like  peaches  and  apples. 

Wliich  of  tlie  fine  arts  do  you  like 
best? 

I  like  them  all,  music,  poetry,  painting 
and  sculpture. 

Do  you  go  to  the  opera  very  often  ? 

I  go.two  or  three  times  a  week. 

It  appears  to  me  that  it  will  soon  rain, 
and  I  am  glad  of  it  (I  like  it),  because 
I  find  (have  a)  great  pleasure  in  see- 
ing it  rain. 

Is  it  possible  !  I  do  not  Uke  to  see  it 
rain ;  but  I  like  to  see  it  snow. 

Does  that  horse  suit  you  ? 

It  does  not  suit  (or  answer)  me,  because 

it  is  very  old,  so  that  I  shall  not 

buy  it. 
Do  you  hve  near  here,  or  far  away  ? 
I  live  very  near. 
Do  you  hve  in  or  out  of  town  ? 
In  town  now,  but  in  the  country  in 

summer. 
What  do  you  want  (is  wanting  to  you) 

to  be  happy  ? 
I  want  nothing,  thank  God. 
I  desire  (or  wish)  to  know  the  painter 

whose  painting  you  have  in  your  room. 
Do  you  regret  not  having  been  at  the 

concert  ? 
I  deeply  (very  much)  regret  not  having 

been  there,  for  I  had  not  the  pleasure 

of  seeing  your  friend. 
I  regret  it  too  (also). 


EXPLANATION. 


148.  GusTAR,  derired  from  the  noun  gttsto,  pleasure,  and 
signifying  literally  to  ffive pleasure  to,  is  the  verb  by  which  we 


144  LESSOKXXXI. 

translate  to  li1ce\  but  in  passing  from  English  to  Spanish,  the 
nominative  case  or  subject  becomes  the  objective,  and  the 
latter  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  d ;  as, 

^  Le  gusta  a  V.  la  poesia  ?  I      Do  you  like  poetry  ? 

Mo  giista  {or  a  ml  me  gusta)  mucho.  |      I  like  it  very  much. 

149.  GusTAR,  followed  by  the  preposition  <?e,  means  to  he 
fond  of,  and  sentences  in  which  it  is  used  are  constructed  as 
in  English ;  as. 

To  gusto  de  la  musica.  I      I  am  fond  of  music. 

El  gusta  de  la  poesia.  |      lie  is  fond  of  poetry. 

150.  GusTAE,  used  as  an  active  verb,  means  to  taste,  and 
governs  the  objective,  without  the  aid  of  any  preposition  what- 
ever; as, 

l  Gusta  V.  la  sopa  ?  I      Do  you  taste  the  soup  ? 

No,  seiior,  gusto  la  carne.  |      No,  sir,  I  taste  the  meat 

151.  The  verbs jr)es«r,  to  regret;  f altar,  in  the  sense  of  to 
want,  or  hacer falta,  to  have  need  of;  acomodar,  to  suit ;  coii- 
venir,  to  suit ;  importar,  to  be  important ;  placer,  to  please, 
and  some  others,  require  the  same  idiomatic  construction  of  the 
sentence  as  that  explained  in  tlie  case  of  gustar  ;  as, 


No3  falta  (or  nos  hace  falta)  dinero. 
A  V.  le  importa  ese  negocio. 
Mucho  me  place. 


We  want  (or  are  in  want  of)  mone}'. 
That  business  is  important  to  you. 
It  pleases  me  much. 


This  last  verb  is  defective,  and  is  very  little  used,  except  in 
the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  as  will  be 
seen  in  the  proper  place. 

152.  The  verb  pesar,  when  meaning  to  regret,  generally 
takes  the  preposition  de  after  it ;  as, 

Me  pesa  de  ello.  |      I  am  sorry  for  it. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Le  gusta  A  V.  la  6pera?  Cuando  era  j6ven  me  gustaba  mas  quo 
ahora. 

2.  gYendra  Y.  mafiana  a  comer  con  nosotros?     SI,  seflor,  no  faltar6. 

3.  I  Kecesita  Y.  hoy  su  rcloj  ?  Hoy  no  me  hace  falta,  mafiana  mo 
convendra  tenerlo. 

4.  I Quiere  Y.  saber  lo  que  lie  becho  hoy?    No  me  importa  saberlo. 


LESSON     XXXI.  145 

5.  ^Compra  V.  el  caballo  del  ingles?     No,  seilor,  no  mc  conviene : 
03  inuy  caro. 

6.  Dicen  que  es  niuy  bueno.     No  importa. 

7.  ^Porquo  vivo  V.  tan  lejos  de  la  ciudad?     Porque  no  me  gustan 
vccinos.     ■ 

8.  Antes  vivia  Y,  comodamente  cerca  de  la  poblacion.    Si;  pero 
ahura  no  me  gusta. 

9.  I  Cuantas  arrobas  pesa  V.  ?    Peso  ocho  arrobas  y  cinco  libras. 

10.  jlla  visto  V.  a  su  prima?    No,  sefior,  y  me  pesa  mucho  do  ello. 

11.  jCuanto  pesa  su  niil©  de  V.?      No  s6,  porque  no  lo  hemos  pesado 
aun. 

12.  ^Quiere  V.  ir  ii  paseo  con  D.  Carlos,  nuestro  vecino?    No  quiero 
ir  con  el  porque  liabla  mucbo,  y  no  me  gustan  los  habladores. 

13.  No  obstante,  el  alio  pasado  estaba  V.  en  buena  amistad  con  cl. 
Si ;  pero  aliora  me  pesa  y  me  pesai'u  siempre. 

14.  ^Nunca  scran  Vds.  amigos  otra  vezi?    Jamas:  es  imposible. 

15.  g Porque?    No  puedo  decirselo  a  V. 

IG.  ^  Eso  no  le  gustara  a  61  ?    Nada  me  importa. 

17.  ^Estan  Yds.  comiendo  pan?     No,  seftor,  estamos  comiendo  fruta. 

18.  4  Gusta  Y.  ?*  Si,  comere  xma  manzana. 

19.  ^No  le  gustan  a  Y.  los  melones?      Si,  seQor;  pero  me  gustan  mas 
los  melocotones  y  las  naranjas. 

20.  ^Quien  es  aquella  seiiorita  tan  bella  que  paseaba  ayer  con  Y.  en 
el  parque?     Es  una  amiga  mia. 

21.  I  Qu6  son  los  liombres  que  vinieron  iintes  de  ayer  con  Y.  ?  El  uno  es 
poeta,  el  otro  pintor  y  escultor  el  otro. 

22.  ^Cual  de  las  bellas  artes  le  gusta  a  Y.  mas?     Todas  me  gustan; 
pero  la  poesia  mas  que  las  otras. 

23.  I  Le  gusta  a  Y.  leer  una    bella  poesia  ?      Si,  sefior,  me   gusba 
nmcho. 

24.  ^Hace  mucho  trio  boy?    Fuera  bace  bastante;    pero  dentro  de 
casa  hace  muy  poco. 

25.  ^Porque  no  fu6  Y.  al  baile  anoclie?     Porque  no  mc  gustan  los 
bailcs. 

2G.  ^Es  posible  que  siendo  tan  joven  no  le  gustan  a  Y.  ?    A  mi  me 
importa  estudiar ;  no  bailar. 

27.  I  Porque  no  quiere  Y.  bailar  ?    Porque  cstoy  cansado. 

28.  I  Que  es  lo  que  le  hace  falta  a  Y.  para  ser  feliz?    Nada  me  hace 
falta  por  ahora,  gracias  a  Dios, 

29.  ^Qu6  le  falta  a  Y.  ?    Me  falta  el  sombrero. 

30.  Aqui  osta,     ^  So   marcha  Y.?— Si,  senor,  si  Y.  no  manda  otra 
cosa.  ^  „  .  ,  „ 

*  Do  yon  ■\visu? 

7 


146  LESSOR     XXXI, 


EXERCISE. 


1.  Are  your  brothers  ami  sisters  fond  of  study?    They  are  not  so 
fond  of  it  as  some  children  I  have  known. 

2.  Do  they  ever  read  poetry  ?     Sometimes,  but  not  very  often. 

3.  Do  you  understand  Spanish  poetry  ?    Not  yet ;  but  I  understand 
prose  perfectly  well. 

4.  Do  you  ever  eat  fruit  ?    Yes,  I  am  very  fond  of  apples,  oranges, 
peaches  and  melons. 

5.  Is  that  gentleman  a  sculptor?    No,  madam,  he  is  a  painter,  and 
enjoys  a  high  reputation. 

6.  Do  you  know  that  it  is  raining  ?    Raining!  no,  I  did  not  (know  it). 

7.  Do  you  think  it  is  going  to  thunder  ?     I  think  it  is  (I  think  so). 

8.  Then  it  is  imposible  to  go  out  ?    By  no  means  {de  ningun  modo)  ; 
we  are  not  afraid  of  hghtning. 

9.  Does  it  always  lighten  when  it  rains  ?     Not  always. 

10.  Good  morning,  Mr.  Eetortillo,  how  do  you  do?    Very  well,  thank 
you ;  and  how  are  you  (and  you)  ? 

11.  What  do  you  wish  ?     I  have  come  to  see  if  this  letter  is  correctly 
written.     It  is  perfectly  correct. 

12.  "Who  wrote  that  letter  ?    A  friend  of  mine,  who  writes  Spanish 
very  well.. 

13.  Why  do  you  not  learn  Spanish  yourself?     I  have  no  time,  and  I 
regret  it  very  much. 

14.  What  profession  {profcsion)  do  you  like  best?     Of  all  professions  I 
like  that  of  a  physician  best. 

15.  When  did  you  see  Miss  Mel6ndez  ?     I  had  the  pleasure  of  seeing 
her  the  other  day. 

16.  How  do  you  like  {que  tal)  your  new  piano?    Very  much. 

17.  Who  is  your  music  teacher?    I  have  none  just  now;   but  I  used 
to  have  a  German  teacher. 

18.  IIow  much  do  you  weigh?     I  weigh  a  hundred  and  sixty -five 
pounds  {libras). 

19.  Does  Charles  weigh  as  much  as  Alexander?    No,  sir,  Alexander 
weighs  twenty  pounds  more. 

20.  Is  Mr.  Martinez  at  home?    No,  sir,  he  is  out. 

21.  When  will  he  be  in  ?     I  do  not  know ;  he  did  cot  say  (it)  when  he 
was  going  out  {al  salir). 

22.  Does  your  uncle  live  in  or  out  of  town  ?     In  summer  he  lives  out 
of  town. 

23.  When  he  \r,  in  town  where  docs  he  live?    In  Twenty-second  street, 
near  Fifth  Avenue. 


LESSON     XXXII. 


147 


24.  How  did  you  spend  your  time  when  you  were  in  the  country  ?  I 
walked  morning  and  evening,  and  during  tlie  day  I  read  the  beautiful 
poems  of  Zorrilla  and  Espronceda. 

25.  Have  you  ever  read  any  of  Martinez  de  la  Rosa's  poems?  Yes, 
but  I  do  not  like  them  so  well  as  those  of  Mel^ndez. 

20.  Which  is  the  greatest  Spanish  painter  ?  Spam  has  had  a  great 
number  of  excellent  painters,  but  the  most  celebrated  of  all  are  Mm'Ulo 
and  Velazquez. 

27.  Are  your  cousins  pleased  with  their  new  house  ?  I  beheve  so ; 
but  they  say  they  liked  the  old  one  better. 

28.  Where  did  they  live  before  taking  the  house  in  ■which  they  reside 
now  ?     In  Fourteenth  street,  near  Seventh  avenue. 

29.  Are  they  not  comfortable  in  the  new  one  ?  It  is  not  for  that ; 
but  they  are  very  fond  of  flowers,  and  they  have  no  garden  now. 

30.  Will  you  come  out  and  take  a  walk  with  me  ?  Yes,  if  Emanuel 
comes  with  us ;  if  not,  I  shall  go  and  practise  on  the  piano. 


LESSON    XXXII. 


Poder.      (See  this  xcrl)  at  the 

end  of  the  hook.) 
Esperar. 
Castigar. 
Engailar. 
Quemar. 
Tratar. 
Tratar  de. 
Tratar  en. 

Seguir.    (See  this  verh  at  the 
end  of  the  hook.) 


To  be  able ;  may,  «&c. 

To  expect,  to  wait  for,  to  hope. 

To  punish. 

To  deceive,  to  cheat. 

To  burn. 

To  treat ;  to  have  intercourse  with. 

To  endeavor,  to  try,  to  treat  of. 

To  deal  in. 

To  foUow. 


ADVERBS  AXD  ADVERBIAL  PHEASES. 


Casi. 

I  Cuiinto  tiempo  ? 

Cnanto  antes. 

De  Mod  a. 

De  baldc. 

Gratis. 

Dc  cuando  en  cuando. 


i 


Almost,  nearly. 

How  long? 

As  soon  as  possible. 

Fashionable. 

Gratis ;  for  nothmg. 

From  time  to  time ;  now  and  then. 


148 


LESS02f     XXXII 


De  improviso. 

De  vei'iis. 
Verdaderainente 
En  lo  sucesivo, 
Hasta  no  mas. 
Poco  a  poco. 
Por  supuesto. 
Tal  vez.  ) 
Aeaso.    i 


.[ 


Picaro.        Rogue  (roguish). 

Bribon.        Radical. 

Ejemplo.     Example;  instance. 


Suddenly,      unexpectedly,      un- 
awares. 

Indeed,  truly. 

In  future. 

To  tlie  utmost,  to  the  extreme. 
Little  by  little,  by  degrees,  gently. 
Of  course. 

Perhaps. 

Coqueta.         Coquette. 
Sociedad.         Society. 
Politica.  Politics. 


COMPOSITION. 


Mi  hermano  es  castlgado  algunas  vecea 

■por  no  saber  sus  lecciones. 
Y  su  amigo  dc  V.  Alejandro,  ^  lo  ca  al- 

guna  vez  ? 
Lo  cs  de  cuando  en  cuando ;  pcro  mi 

hermana  no  ha  sido  castigada  jamas, 

porquc  sabe  siempre  sus  lecciones. 
6  Ha  sido  V.  enganado  alguna  vez  ? 
Hasta  no  mas,  porquc  haj  muchos  pi- 

caros  en  la  sociedad. 
Esta  casa  esta  bien  situada. 
La  carta  estaba  mal  escrita, 
Manuel  es  amado  de  (or  por)  Margarita. 
El  libro  ha  sido  escrito  por  un  Frances. 
Se  quemo  {or  fue  quemada)  la  casa. 
Esta  casa  se  hizo  en  scis  meses. 

i  En  cuanto  tiempo  se  hizo  la  dc  Y.  ? 

En  cosa  de  tres  meses. 

i  Cuanto  tiempo  necosita  T.  para  cscri- 

bir  esa  carta  ? 
Esta  casi  acabada ;  cstoy  con  Y.  en  un 

minuto. 
Poco  a  poco ;  va  Y.  muy  aprisa. 
Tal  vez ;  pero  tengo  prisa  v  quiero  aca- 

bar  pronto. 


My  brother  is  sometimes  pxaiished  for 

not  knowing  his  lessons. 
And  your  friend  Alexander,  is  ho  ever 

punished  (ever  so)  ? 
He  is,  now  and  then  ;  but  my  sister  has 

never  been  punished,   because  she 

always  knows  her  lessons. 
Have  you  ever  been  deceived  ? 
To  the  utmost,  for  there  arc  a  great 

many  rogues  in  society. 
This  house  is  well  situated. 
The  letter  was  badly  written. 
Emanuel  is  loved  by  Margaret. 
The  book  was  written  by  a  Frenchman. 
The  house  was  burnt. 
This  house  was   built   (made)  in  six 

months. 
How  long  was  yours  in  building  (mak- 

ing)? 
About  three  months. 
How  long  shall  you  be  in  writing  that 

letter  ? 
It  is  almost  finished ;  I  shall  be  (am) 

with  you  in  a  moment  (minute). 
Gently :  you  go  very  quick. 
Perhaps  so ;  but  I  am  in  haste,  and  I 

want  to  get  done  (finish)  soon. 


LESSOIC     XXXII. 


149 


6  De  veras  ? 

Por  supuesto :  tengo  que  ir  al  correo. 

Dio3  csta  en  todas  partes,  lo  sabc  y  lo 
puede  todo,  y  nos  perdonara  si  trata- 
mos  de  hacer  nuestro  deber. 


6  Es  su  reloj  de  V.  de  moda  ? 
Si,  seilor ;  pero  no  mc  gusta,  porqiic  es 
muy  pequeno. 


Indeed  ? 

Of  course :  I  have  to  go  to  the  post- 
office. 

God  is  everywhere ;  He  knows  all 
things,  and  nothing  is  impossible 
for  Him  (can  do  all);  and  He  will 
pardon  us,  if  we  endeavor  to  do  our 
duty. 

Is  your  watch  fashionable  ? 

Yes,  sir ;  but  I  do  not  like  it,  because 
it  is  too  small. 


EXPLANATION. 


153.  Passive  Voice. — This  voice  is  formed  by  the  different 
tenses  of  the  auxiliary  ser  added  to  the  past  participle  of  the 
A'erb,  cai'c  being  taken  that  the  participle  agree  with  the  sub- 
ject, in  gender  and  number,  like  an  adjective ;  as. 


Soy  amado. 
Hemos  sido  amados. 
Habeis  sido  amados. 
Seriis  amada. 


I  am  loved. 
We  have  been  loved. 
You  have  been  loved. 
Thou  wilt  be  loved. 


(a).  The  passive  voice  is,  however,  formed  in  Spanish,  by 
estar,  instead  of  ser,  when  the  past  participle  is  used  adjective- 
ly,  that  is  to  say,  when  the  state  or  condition  of  the  subject  is 
described  Avithout  any  reference  to  an  action  ;  as, 

Esta  casa  esia  bien  situada.  I      Tliis  house  is  well  located. 

La  carta  estaba  mal  cscrita.  |      The  letter  was  badly  written. 

154.  The  passive  verb  formed  by  ser  is  used  in  Spanish  in 
the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  indicative  mood,  only  when  it 
is  designed  to  exj^ress  a  mental  act ;  as, 

Manuel  es  amado  de  Margarita.  |      Emanuel  is  loved  by  Margaret. 

When  a  mental  act  is  not  expressed,  the  passive  verb  being 
in  the  present  or  imperfect  of  the  indicative  mood,  estar  is  the 
auxiliary  to  be  used,  and  not  ser ;  as, 

El  Ubro  ha  sido  escrito  por  un  Fran- 
ces, or  el  libro  estd  escrito  por  un 
Frances  (instead  of  es  escrito). 

155.  When  the  action  of  the  verb  refers  to  the  mind,  the 


The  book  was  written  by  a  French- 
man. 


150  LESSON     XXXII. 

preposition  de  or por  may  be  used  after  the  passive  verb,  before 
the  agent,  and^o;*  only,  when  otherwise ;  as, 

Manuel  es  amado  de  (or  por)  Marga-  I      Emanuel  is  loved  by  Mai^aret. 
rita.  I 

156.  The  passive  voice  in  English  is  very  frequently 
turned  into  Spanish  by  putting  the  verb  which  is  in  the  parti- 
ciple jjast  in  English,  in  the  same  person  and  number  as  the 
auxiliary  to  be  in  the  English  sentence,  and  placing  the  pronoun 
se  before  it. 

157.  The  latter  form  is  preferred  when  the  object,  or  re- 
ceiver, of  the  action  is  an  inanimate  thing,  or  when  the  sub- 
ject, or  agent,  remains  undetermined  ;  as, 


Se  quemo  la  casa. 

Esta  casa  se  hizo  en  seis  mcscs. 


The  house  was  burnt. 
This  house  was  built  (made)  in  six 
months. 


CO^TYERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  No  puede  V.  esperar?    Esperar6  un  poco. 

2.  I  No  me  enganara  V.  ?  Por  supnesto  que  no ;  yo  no  soy  ningun 
picaro. 

3.  Buenos  dias.  ^De  qu6  estan  Vds.  tratando? — Estabamos  liabltmdo 
do  moda?. 

4.  ^  Puede  V.  decirme  si  mi  sombrero  cs  de  moda  ?  No  es  de  la  ulti- 
ma (moda). 

5.  ^  Cuunto  tiempo  Lace  qne  pas6  esta  moda  ?  Habra  ya  un  mes,  poco 
mas  6  men  OS. 

6.  I  Quiere  V.  quemar  las  cartas  do  esa  scflorita?  Si,  seflor,  porque 
es  una  coqueta. 

7.  ^De  veras?  Yo  creia  que  era  ima  sefiorita  de  mucba  circuiis- 
peccioD.  Hace  algun  tiempo  lo  era ;  pero  poco  a  poco  ba  ido  sigaiendo 
el  ejemplo  de  otras. 

8.  I  Tal  vez  el  ser  coqueta  es  do  moda  en  la  sociedad  del  dia  ?  Asi  lo 
creo. 

9.  V.  debe  escusar  a  las  nifias ;  ellas  son  inoccntes  y  no  creen  hacer 
mal  en  eso. 

10.  ^Ha  sido  V.  engaiiado  algana  vez?     Hasta  no  mas;  porque  bay 
mnehos  picaros. 

11.  ^Han  sido  castigados  sus  nlQos  de  Y.?     Si,  sefior,  ban  sido  casti- 
gados  por  no  saber  sus  leccioncs. 


LESSON     XXXII.  151 

12.  ^Y  aquel  criado  tan  bueno  que  V.  tenia?  Es  im  bribon;  no  lo 
quiero  ni  de  balde. 

13.  I  Do  veras  ?  V.  lo  ti-ataba  muy  bien.  Acaso  per  lo  mismo  que 
yo  lo  trataba  bien,  me  ba  tratado  el  tan  mal. 

14.  I  Le  gusta  a  V.  la  sociedad  ?     Si,  sefior,  de  cuando  en  cuando. 

15.  i  Porque  no  vive  V.,  entonces,  en  la  ciudad?  Porque  se  me  quem6 
la  casa. 

IG.  I Caanto  tiempo  liace  ?     Casi  un  mes. 

17.  Y  abora,  ^no  va  V.  nucca  alia?    Yoy  de  cuando  en  cuando. 

18.  Eso  es  verdaderamcntQ  un  gran  mal;  pcro  en  lo  sucesivo  tendra 
V.  mas  cuidado. — Por  supuesto  que  si. 

19.  I'So  pudo  V.  saber  quien  le  quemo  la  casa?  No;  pero  creo  que 
fue  un  bribon,  que  me  queria  mal. 

20.  I  Quiere  V.  acabar  ya?     Si,  cuanto  dntes ;  no  puedo  espei'ar  mas. 

21.  J  Qu6  piensa  V.  hacer  abora  ?  Trato  de  castigar  al  que  me  quem6  la 
casa. 

22.  I Y  despues  ?     Dcspues  vere  si  puedo  hacer  otra. 

'  23.  ^  Y  no  tiene  V.  abora  ninguna  alia  ?     Tengo  una  becha  de  impro- 
viso. 

24.  Poco  a  poco  ira  V.  haciendo  otra.      Asi  lo  espero. 

25.  J  Por  supuesto  que  su  sefiora  vivira  en  la  ciudad?  Si;  pero  va 
allii  de  cuando  en  cuando ;  el  otro  dia  llego  de  improviso,  cuando  menos 
la  esperaba. 

2G.  I  No  puede  V.  volvcr  mafiana  por  aqni  ?  Mafiana  tal  vez  no,  pero 
pasado  si. 

27.  Entonces  lo  espero  a  V.  sin  falta.     Puede  V.  esperarme ;  no  faltard. 

28.  I  Ira  V.  boy  a  la  comedia  6  a  la  6pera  ?  Tal  vez  ire  a  la  6pera, 
porque  es  mas  de  moda. 

29.  ^  iSTunca  va  V.  a  la  comedia  ?    Si ;  voy  de  cuando  en  cuando. 

30.  I  Sabe  V.  que  se  ha  quemado  la  Academia  {academy)  de  Miisica  ? 
Si ;  anoche  lo  lei  en  los  peri6dicos. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Papa,  may  I  go  out  ?     Yes,  you  may  go  out  for  half  an  hour. 

2.  How  long  is  it  since  your  house  was  burnt  ?     Only  three  weeks. 

3.  Why  does  that  woman  punish  her  cbildr&n  so  much?  She  al- 
ways punishes  them  when  they  do  wrong  {phrar  mal). 

4.  Does  she  reward  (recompensar)  them  when  they  do  right  ?  I  be- 
lieve she  does. 

5.  "Why  do  you  burn  all  that  young  lady's  letters  ?  Because  she  is 
only  a  coquette. 


152  LESSOR"     XXXII, 

6.  I  thiuk  you  are  not  right ;  I  liave  known  her  a  long  time,  and  I 
believe  she  is  very  cu'cumspect  (circumsj)ectu). 

7.  "Why  do  your  family  always  live  in  the  country  ?    Because  we  do 
not  like  society. 

8.  And  is  it  not  possible  to  live  in  tovra  without  going  into  society  ? 
It  is  impossible. 

9.  We  always  live  in  town,  and  yet  (sin  embargo)  we  never  gy  into 
society. 

-     10.  Peter,  can  you  write  that  letter  for  me  now  ?     I  can. 

11.  When  do  you  want  it  ?    As  soon  as  possible. 

12.  Have  you  ever  been  deceived  by  that  man?  Yes,  very  often;  he 
is  a  rascal. 

13.  How  long  have  you  known  him?  Not  long;  but  each  time  I  have 
had  business  with  him,  he  has  deceived  me. 

14.  Indeed!     What  business  is  he  in  ?    I  cannot  tell  you. 

15.  Do  you  often  go  to  the  theatre  ?  Xever  to  the  theatre ;  I  go  to 
the  opera  now  and  then.  • 

16.  Can  you  tell  me  whether  my  hat  is  fashionable  ?  Yes,  it  is  in  the 
latest  fashion. 

17.  Is  Peter's  the  fashion  too?  Xo,  those  hats  went  out  of  fashion 
last  year. 

18.  Where  is  your  old  servant?     He  lives  with  us  no  longer. 

19.  Did  you  give  Charles  the  fruit  you  were  to  buy  for  him  ?  Xo,  ho 
came  for  it  the  other  day,  but  I  had  not  had  time  to  buy  it. 

20.  Why  did  you  come  so  late  to-day  to  your  lesson  ?  My  exercise 
was  very  difficult,  and  I  could  not  finish  it  in  time. 

21.  Well,  I  hope  you  will  come  in  time  in  future  ?  Yes,  in  future  I 
shall  come  at  four  o'clock  precisely. 

22.  I  hope  you  wUl  not  deceive  me  ?  Of  coiu-se  I  shall  not ;  I  never 
deceive  anybody. 

23.  Will  that  yonng  gentleman  *  be  at  the  concert  with  you  to-morrow 
night?    Perhaps  he  will  come  with  us. 

24.  Does  he  not  go  every  night  ?    Indeed  I  do  not  know. 

25.  How  long  is  it  since  you  began  to  take  lessons  ?  About  (cerca  de) 
four  months. 

26.  And  do  your  brother  and  sister  take  their  lessons  at  the  same  hour 
as  you?  ISoy  my  brother  takes  his  at  ten  o'clock,  and  ray  sister  at 
twelve. . 

27.  Where  did  you  become  acquainted  with  the  gentleman  who  danced 
last  with  your  cousin  (fern.)  yesterday  evening  ?  I  made  his  acquaint- 
ance in  Madrid  the  year  before  last  (hace  dos  alios). 

28.  Has  this  young  man  deceived  you  as  often  as  his  father?    He  has: 

♦  Caballerito. 


LESSOK     XXXIII. 


153 


you  know  children  almost  always  follow  the  example  of  then*  parents 
(jiadres). 

29.  Do  you  tliink  Charles  is  loved  by  Louisa?    I  think  she  loves  him 
as  much  as  it  is  possible  to  love. 

30.  What  did  you  tell  the  taUor  ?    I  told  him  you  wanted  your  coat 
and  vest  for  the  day  after  to-morrow. 


Lavavst?. 
Haberse  lavado. 
Ilaber^c  de  lavar. 


LESSON  XXXIII. 

REFLECTIVE  VERBS. 

INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

To  wash  one's  self. 
To  have  washed  one's  self. 
To  have  to  wash  one's  self. 


Laviindosf?. 
Habiendose  lavado. 
Habiendosc  de  lavar. 


GERUND. 

Washing  one's  self. 
Having  washed  one's  self. 
Having  to  wash  one's  selfi 

INDICATIVE   PRESENT. 


(Yo)  me  lavo. 
(Til)  te  lavas. 
(£l)  se  lava. 

(N'osotro.s)  nos  lavamos. 
(Vosotros)  OS  lavais. 
(EIlos)  se  lavan. 


I  wash  myself. 
Thou  washcst  thyself. 
He  washes  himself. 
We  wash  ourselves. 
You  wash  yourselves. 
They  wash  themselves. 


{The  other  simple  tenses  are  conjugated  in  like  maimer.) 


PRETERIT  INDEFINITE. 


(Yo)  me  he  lavado. 
(Tii)  te  has  lavado. 
(£l)  se  ha  lavado. 
(Nosotros)  nos  hemos  lavado. 
(Vosotros)  OS  habeis  lavado. 
(Ellos)  se  ban  lavado. 
{The  other  compound  tenses 

Cortar. 

Cortarsc. 

Afeitai'. 


I  have  washed  myself. 
Thou  hast  washed  thyself. 
He  has  washed  himself. 
"We  have  washed  ourselves. 
You  have  washed  yourselves. 
They  have  washed  themselves. 
are  conjugated  in  like  manner.) 

To  cut. 

To  cut  one's  self;  to  be  ashamed. 

To  shave. 


154 


LESSON     XXXIII. 


Meitarse. 

Levantar. 

Levantarse. 

Cansar. 

Oansar««. 

Descansar. 

Contentar. 

Contentars(?. 

Burlar. 

Burlarse. 

Preguntar. 

Kesponder. 

Engafiar««. 

Temer.     Eeir. 


Barbero. 

Cansancio. 

Descanso. 

Contento. 

Eespondon. 

Cuchillo. 

Pelo  6  cabello.  Hair. 


Barber. 

"Weariness,  fatigue. 
Best 

Contentment. 
Ever  ready  to  reply. 
Knife. 


To  shave  one's  self. 

To  raise,  to  lift. 

To  get  up,  to  rise. 

To  weary,  to  fatigue,  to  tire. 

To  tire  one's  self,  to  get  tired. 

To  rest. 

To  content,  to  please. 

To  content  one's  self. 

To  mock,  to  jest. 

To  jest,  to  make  jest  of,  to  laugh  at. 

To  question,  to  ask,  to  enquire. 

To  answer. 

To  deceive  one's  sel£ 

To  fear.     To  laugh. 


Arriba. 

Up. 

Abajo. 

Down. 

Detras. 

Behind. 

Encima. 

Upon,  above. 

Debajo. 

Under. 

Luego. 

Presently. 

Qu6  tal  ? 

How ;  how  do  you  do  ? 

Descan  sadamente. 

Easily. 

De  burlas. 

In  jest. 

Descansado. 

Bested. 

Contento. 

Content. 

Pregnnta. 

Respuesta. 

Bnrla. 

Declinacion. 

Derivacion. 

Disposicion. 

Una, 


Question,  query. 

Answer. 

Jest. 

Declination. 

Derivation. 

Disposition. 

Kail  (finger). 


COMPOSITION. 


6  A  quo  hora  se  levanto  V.  ayer  ? 

Me  levanto  temprano;  me  levanto  al 

amancccr  todos  los  dias. 
6  Quo  liizo  V.  entonces  ? 
Me  afeitd  y  sail. 


At  what  o'clock  did  you  get  up  yester- 
day? 

I  rose  early  ;  I  rise  at  daybreak  every 
morning. 

What  did  you  do  next  (then)  ? 

I  shaved  myself  and  went  out. 


LESSOK      XXXIII. 


155 


i  Sc  lava  V.  intes  de  afeitarse  ? 

Me  afeito  antes  de  lavarme. 

(,  Son  faciles  de  aprender  las  palabras 

declinacion,  derivacion,  y  disposicion  ? 
Son  facilisimas,  porque  casi  todas  las  pa- 
labras que  acaban  en  cioii  son  lo 

mismo  en  ingles,  cambiando  la  c  en  i. 
Tengo  un  barbero  que  afeita  muy  bien^ 

pero  cs  carisimo  ;  ^  ftu6  tal  afeita  el 

deV.? 
EI  mio  no  afeita  muy  bien;   pero  es 

baratisimo,    porque    me    afeito    yo 

mismo. 
Ahora  me  afeita  q1  barbero,  porque  me 

he  cortado  la  mano  y  no  puedo  afei- 

tarme  yo  mismo. 
(,  Porque  se  burla  V.  de  su  amigo  ? 
Mc  burlo  de  el  porque  sc  levanta  muy 

tarde. 
6  Se  ha  cansado  V.  de  estudiar  ? 
No,  senor,  porque  cuando  me  canso  de 

estudiar,  descanso  escribiendo. 
(,  Ama  V.  a  su  hermano  ? 
Nos  amamos  el  uno  al  otro. 
6  Le  gusta  a  V.  mas  preguntar  que  res- 
ponder  ? 
No,  seiior,  yo  no  soy  pregunton,  y  me 

gusta  haccr  ambas  cosas. 
To  no  trabajo  mucho,  lo  hago  descan- 

sadamente. 
i  Sc  engatia  V.  &  si  mismo  alguna  vez  ? 
V.  habla  de  burlas ;  ^  puede  imo  enga- 

fiarse  a  si  mismo  jamas  ? 
Por  supucsto  que  si. 
(:  Esta  su  amigo  de  V.  abajo  6  arriba  ? 
I  Est^  mi  libro  debajo  6  encima  de  la 

mesa? 
6  Que  tal  le  gusta  a  V.  Nueva  York  ? 


Do  you  wash  yourself  before  shaving 

(yourself)  ? 
I  shave  before  washing  myself. 
Are  the  words  declination,  derivation 

and  disposition  easy  to  learn  ? 
They  are  very  easy,  because  all  words 

ending  in  don  are  the  same  in  Eng- 
lish, changing  the  c  into  t. 
I  have  a  barber  that  shaves  very  well, 

but  he  is  exceedingly  high  (dear) ; 

how  does  your's  shave  ? 
Mine  does  not  shave  very  well ;  but  he 

Ls  very  cheap,  for  I  shave  myself. 

The  barber  shaves  me  at  present  (now), 

because  I  (have)  cut  my  band,  and  I 

cannot  shave  myself. 
Why  do  you  make  fun  of  your  friend  ? 
I  make  fun  of  him  because  he  gets  up 

very  late. 
Have  you  got  tired  of  studying  ? 
No,  sir;  because  when  I  get  tired  at 

study,  I  rest  myself  writing. 
Do  you  love  your  brother  ? 
We  love  each  other. 
Do  you  like  better  to  ask  questions 

than  to  answer  ? 
No,  sir,  I  am  not  inquisitive ;  I  like  to 

do  both. 
I  do  not  work  much ;  I  do  it  at  my  ease. 

Do  you  ever  deceive  yourself? 
You  speak  in  jest;  can  one  ever  de- 
ceive one's  self? 
Certainly  (so). 

Is  your  friend  up-stairs  or  down-stairs  ? 
Is  my  book  upon  or  under  the  table  ? 

How  do  vou  like  New  York  ? 


EXPLANATION. 

158.  Reflectite  Verbs.— Almost  all  active  verbs  may 
become  reflective  in  Spanish,  and  be  used  as  pronominal     The 


156  LKSSON     XXXIII. 

pronoun  object  must  be  of  the  same  person  as  tliat  of  the  sub- 
ject, and  each  j^erson  is  coiijugated  with  a  double  jjersoual 
pronoun.  However,  the  pronoun  subject  is  almost  always  un- 
derstood in  Spanish,  while  in  English  it  is  expressed  ;  as, 

Infinitive.     Amarse.  I  To  love  one's  self. 

Fart.  Pres.  Amaadosc.  Lo\-ing  one's  self. 


IXDICATITE   PRESENT. 


Me  amo. 
Te  amas. 
Se  ama. 
Nos  amamoa. 
Os  amais. 
Se  aman. 


I  love  myself 
Thou  lovest  thyself. 
He  loves  himself. 
We  love  ourselves. 
You  love  yourselves. 
They  love  themselves. 

And  in  the  same  manner  in  all  the  other  tenses. 

159.  When  an  agent  performs  an  action  upon  a  j^ai-t  of 
himself,  the  verb  is  made  reflective ;  and  the  possessive  pro- 
noims,  my,  his,  etc.,  are  translated  into  Spanish  by  the  article 
el,  la,  los,  las;  as, 

Me  corto  d  cabello.  I  I  cut  my  hair. 

Sc  corta  las  unas.  |  He  cuts  his  nails. 

160.  When  the  A'erb  denotes  a  reciprocity  of  action  be- 
tween two  or  more  individuals,  it  is  formed,  in  Spanish,  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  plural  of  reflective  verbs ;  as, 


Nos  amamos. 
Os  enffanasteis. 
Se  temerdn. 


W^e  love  one  another. 
You  deceived  each  other. 
They  will  fear  each  other. 


CONVERSATION  ANT)  VERSION. 

1.  I  Sc  La  afeitado  V.  ?     i!f  i  me  he  lavado  ni  afeitado. 

2.  I  CuAntas  veces  lava  la  criada  a  los  niilos  ?  Los  lava  per  la  maiiana, 
al  medio  dia  y  a  la  noclie. 

3.  ^  Cuando  les  corta  las  mlas  ?  Se  las  corta  los  miercoles  y  los  sabados. 

4.  I  Se  lavantan  temprano  ?    A  las  seis  en  verano,  y  a  las  siete  en  in- 
vierno. 

5.  ^Porqu6  no  se  levanto  V.  hoy  mas  temprano  ?    Porque  el  criado 
no  me  de5pert6. 

6.  I  ISo  despierta  V.  temprano  ?     Cuando  cstoy  cansado,  no. 

7.  i  Estaba  V.  muy  cansado  ayer  ?    Si,  sefior,  el  paseo  me  cans6  mucho. 


LESSON    xxxiir.  157 

8.  Ent6nces,  ^  querra  V.  descansar  hoy  toclo  el  dia  ?     No,  ho  descan- 
sado  ya  bastante  durante  la  noche. 

9.  I  Con  cuanto  diuero  se  contenta  V.  ?    Yo  me  contcnto  con  poco. 

10.  I  Se  coutentara  V.  con  diez  pesos  ?     Se  burla  V.  de  mi. 

11.  No,  yo  solaniente  pregunto. — V.  me  pregunta  y  yo  respondo  que  no. 

12.  ^Ilabla  V.  de  burlas  6  de  veras?    Ilablo  de  veras;  yo  no  me  con- 
tcnto con  menos  de  cien  pesos. 

13.  gSe  burla  V.  do  mi?    No,  seiior,  yo  uunca  hablo  de  burlas;  y  V. 
tendra  que  contentarse  con  lo  que  se  le  ha  dado  ya. 

14.  V.  cs  quien  se  engafia. — El  engaflado  sera  V.,  yo  no. 

15.  I  Para  qu6  llama  V.  al  barbero  ?     Para  afeitarrae. 

16.  ^Porqu6  no  se  afeita  V.  mismo  ?    Porque  tengo  miedo  de  cortarme. 

17.  ^  D6nde  esta  el  cuchillo  ?    Esta  sobre  la  mesa. 

18.  ^  Ad6nde  v'a  V.  ?     Voy  a  cortarme  el  pelo. 

19.  ^Donde  vive  su  barbero  ?     Vive  detras  de  la  iglesia. 

20.  ^Pregunto  V.  al  criado  por  mis  botas?     Si,  seiior,  me  dijo  que  es- 
taban  bajo  de  la  cama. 

21.  2  Sale  V.  ahoraapaseo?     No,  senor,  saldre  despues. 

22.  I  Que  tal  esta  su  amigo  de  V.  ?     Ahora  esta  mas  contento. 

23.  ^Que  tal  es  el  criado  que  tiene  V.  ahora?    Es  muy  respondon, 

24.  i  Donde  estd  su  padre  de  V.,  arriba  6  abajo  ?    Antes  estaba  abajo, 
ahora  me  parece  que  esta  arriba. 

25.  I  Que  tal  ha  pasado  V.  la  noche  ?    Muy  descansadamente  ;  he  dor- 
mido  muy  bien. 

26.  I  Como  estan  escritos  los  cjercicios  de  su  gi'amatica  de  V.  ?    Estan 
por  preguntas  y  respuestas. 

27.  I  Uizo  V.  la  pregunta  que  le  dije ?    Si;  pero  no  me  dicron  respuesta. 

28.  I  De  que  trata  la  leccion  de  hoy  ?    De  la  declinacion  y  derivacion 
de  los  nombres,  y  de  la  disposicion  de  las  palabras  en  la  composicion. 

29.  I  Quo  esta  V.  leyendo  ?     Las  disposiciones  del  rey  Carlos  III. 

30.  I  Aprende  bien  el  espauol  su  amigo  de  Y.  ?    No,  sefior,  tiene  muy 
poca  disposicion  para  las  Icnguas. 

31.  I  Qu6  hizo  V.  ayer  despues  que  se  levanto  ?    Me  lav6  y  me  afeite. 

32.  gSe  cans6  V.  mucho  ayer?    Si,  seiior,  me  cans6  mucho  el  paseo  al 
parque. 

33.  I  Neccsita  V.  descanso  ?    Descanso  bastante  de  noche. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "Wliere  do  you  sleep?     In  the  small  room  on  the  third  floor  (piso). 

2.  At  what  o'clock  do  you  get  up  every  morning  ?    I  generally  rise 
at  six  o'clock. 


158  LESSON     XXXIII. 

3.  At  what  hour  do  your  children  rise  in  summer  ?     They  rise  at  day- 
break. 

4.  At  wliat  time  do  they  go  to  bed?     At  nightfall. 

5.  Where  do  you  wash  yourself?     I  wash  myself  in  my  own  room. 

6.  Do  you  wash  yourself  in  hot  (caliente)  or  cold  water  ?     I  Avash 
myself  always  with  cold  water. 

7.  Why  do  you  not  wash  sometimes  with  warm  water  ?     Because 
cold  water  is  much  better  for  the  skin  (cutis). 

8.  Where  do  you  go  to  get  shaved  ?    I  go  to  the  barber's. 

9.  Where    does  your   barber  live  ?     In  Broadway,   near  Broome 
street. 

10.  Are  you  tired  ?     No,  sir,  I  never  tire  myself  writing, 

11.  Are  you  speaking  in  earnest  or  in  jest?  In  earnest;  I  am  not  in 
a  humor  to  jest. 

12.  It  seemed  to  me  you  were  in  a  humor  to  jest  a  while  ago  ?  Not 
at  all ;  on  the  contrary,*  it  was  my  brother  that  was  making  fun  of  me 
because  I  had  cut  my  hand. 

13.  Well,  no  matter  ;  I  know  you  are  fond  of  jesting  and  laughing  at 
everybody.     You  deceive  yourself,  my  dear  sir  (seflor  mid). 

14.  Charles,  can  you  go  to  the  tailor's  to  tell  him  I  wish  to  see  him  ? 
It  is  impossible  for  me  to  go  out  now,  I  am  expecting  Mr.  Vtdero. 

15.  No  matter,  I  shall  send  John.  John  cannot  go  either;  he  has  to 
be  here  at  the  same  time  as  I. 

16.  Will  you  go  to  the  post-office  and  ask  if  there  are  any  letters  for 
me?  I  asked  this  morning  when  I  took  father's  letters,  and  they  told 
me  there  were  none. 

17.  Did  you  see  the  newspaper  I  was  reading  when  your  cousin  came 
in  ?    Tlierc  it  is  on  the  table,  behind  the  dictionary. 

18.  Why  did  you  get  your  hair  cut  (Jiacerse  cortar)  ?  Because  it  was 
too  long  {largo). 

19.  Indeed  !  I  thought  you  liked  long  hair  ?  On  ladies,  yes ;  but  it 
is  not  very  suitable  for  a  man. 

20.  Where  is  Peter  ?    I  think  he  is  up-stairs. 

21.  Will  you  do  me  the  pleasure  to  call  him  ?     Certainly  (ciertamente)., 

22.  Was  the  musician  contented  with  what  you  gave  him  ?  He  did 
not  appear  to  be  contented. 

23.  How  do  you  like  the  vest  that  my  tailor  made  for  you  ?  Pretty 
(hastante)  well ;  but  I  like  the  work  of  my  own  tailor  better. 

24.  How  is  your  uncle  to-day  ?  The  physician  came  to  see  him  this 
afternoon,  and  he  said  he  was  much  better. 

25.  What  are  those  gentlemen  doing  over  there  ?  Do  you  not  see  that 
they  are  resting? 

*  De  ningun  modo,  al  contrario. 


LESSON     XXXIV. 


169 


.  26.  How  do  you  know  they  aro  tired  ?    They  have  been  walking  all 
the  morning. 

27.  Then  they  are  very  right  (hacer  muy  lien)  to  rest.     Of  course ; 
rest  is  sweet  {grata)  when  one  is  tired  {se  estd  camado). 


LESSON    XXXIV. 


niREGULAE  VERBS. 


Acertar. 


Acierto. 

Aciertas. 

Acierta. 

Acertamos. 

Acertais. 

Aciertan. 


Acierta  th. 
Acierte  61. 
Acertemos  nosotros. 
Acertad  vosotros. 
Acierten  eUos. 


To  guess,  to  make  out,  to  hit 
the  mark. 


INDICATIVE. — Presen  t. 
I  guess. 
Thou  guessest. 
He  guesses. 
We  guess. 
You  guess. 
They  guess. 

IMPEEATIVE. 

Guess  thou. 

Let  him  guess. 

Let  us  guess, 

Guess. 

Let  them  guess. 


SUBJUNCTIVE.  — Presen  t. 

Acierte.  I  may  or  can  guess. 

Aciertes.  Thou  mayest  or  canst  guess. 

Acierte.  He  may  or  can  guess. 

Acertemos.  We  may  or  can  guess. 

Acerteis.  You  may  or  can  guess. 

Acierten.  They  may  or  can  guess. 

Veris  conjugated  liJce  aceetar. 

Calentar.  To  warm,  to  heat. 

CeiTar.  To  shut,  to  close. 

Confesar,  To  confess. 

Despertar.  To  awake,  to  wake. 

Gobernar.  Acercar.                      To  govern.     To  approach. 


160 


LESSOK     XXXIV. 


Merendar. 

Negar. 

Pensai". 

Quebrar. 

Sentarse. 


To  lunch. 

To  deny. 

To  tbiuk,  to  intend. 

To  break. 

To  sit  down. 


Veris  that  are  regular,  altTiougli  small  changes  are  made  to  preserve  tlie 
pronunciation  of  the  infinitive. 


Veneer. 

To  vanquish,  to  overcome. 

Eesarcir. 

To  indemnify. 

Pagar. 

To  pay. 

Delinquir. 

To  commit  a  fault,  to  transgress. 

Escoger. 

To  choose. 

Poseer. 

To  possess. 

Proveer. 

To  provide. 

Hail-. 

To  lice,  to  fly. 

Argtiir. 

To  argue. 

A  ver. 

Let  us  see. 

Quiza. 

Perhaps. 

Delincuente 

• 

Delinquent,  offender,   transgrcs 
sor. 

Inocente. 

Innocent. 

Franco. 

Frank,  open. 

Oualquiera. 

Any,  any  one,  some  one,  what 
ever,  whatsoever. 

Oualquiera 

>arte. 
Fire. 

Any  place. 

Fuego. 

Consccuencia.       Consequence, 

Jardinero. 

Gardener. 

conclusion. 

Motivo. 

Motive. 

Prudencia.            Prudence. 

Sofa. 

Sofa. 

COMPO 

Verduras.             Vegetables. 
Deuda.                  Debt. 

SITIOX. 

^  Le  gusta  h  V.  calentarsc  al  fuego  ? 
Si,  senor,  me  gusta  calentarmo  al  fuego 

en  el  inviemo  cuando  hace  mucbo 

frio. 
6  Que  calienta  el  criado  ? 
Esta  calentando  cl  caf6. 
4  A  que  hora  dosperto  V.  ayer  ? 


Do  you  like  to  warm  yourself  at  the  fire  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  like  to  warm  myself  at  the 

fire  in  winter  when  it  is  very  cold. 

What  is  the  servant  warming  ? 

He  is  warming  the  coffee. 

At  what  hour  did  you  awake  yesterday. 


LESSON     XXXIV. 


161 


(,  A  ver  si  acierta  V.  ? 

No  so,  quiza  desperto  V.  d  las  cinco. 

Despierto  todas  las  mauanas  a  las  cua- 

tro  y  media. 
^  Cierra  V.  la  puerta  6  la  abre  ? 
He  cerrado  la  puerta  y  abierto  la  ven- 

tana. 

5  Es  delincuente  aquel  hombre  ? 
Lo  creo,  porque  huye. 

Niego  la  consecuencia ;  V.  no  arguye 
bien,  61  puede  ser  inocente  y  huir 
per  prudencia. 

6  Se  proveyo  V.  do  flores  ? 

Me  provel  de  fruta  y  mi  liermana  de 

verduras. 
6  Pago  Y.  per  elks  al  jardinero  ? 
Yo  le  paguo  la  fruta  y  mi  hermana  le 

pago  las  verduras. 
6  Picnsa  Y.  ir  a  Europa  estc  vcrano  ? 

Dcsco  irme  a  alguna  parte,  porque  con- 

fieso  que  tengo  mucho  miedo  del  colera. 

Hay  muchos  que  niegan  tener  miedo ; 

pero  yo  tengo  el  valor  de  confesarlo 

francamente. 
^  A  que  bora  se  desayuna  Y.  ? 
Me  desayuno  a  las  ocho,  meriendo  a  las 

dos  y  como  a  las  seis. 
i  Me  promete  Y.  vcnir  a  comer  conmi- 

go  hoy  ? 
Entre  comer  6  merendar  con  V.  escojo 

el  merendar,  porque  Y.  come  dema- 

siado  temprano. 

*  Words  printed  in  italics  do  not 


Let  us  see  if  you  can*  guess  ? 

I  do  not  know ;  perhaps  you  awoke  at 

five  o'clock. 
I  awake  every  morning  at    half-past 

four. 
Are  you  shutting  the  door  or  opening  it  ? 
I  have  shut  the  door  and  opened  the 

window. 
Is  that  man  a  transgressor  ? 
I  think  so,  for  he  flees. 
I  deny  the   conclusion  ;   you  do  not 

argue  correctly  (well) ;    he  may  be 

innocent  and  flee  (or  fly)  from  pru- 
dence. 
Did  you  provide  yourself  with  flowers  ? 
I  provided  myself  with  fniit,  and  my 

sister  with  vegetables. 
Did  you  pay  the  gardener  for  them  ? 
I  paid  him  for  the  fruit,  and  my  sister 

paid  him  for  the  vegetables. 
Do  you  intend  to  go  to  Europe  this 

summer  ? 
I  wish  to  go  somewhere,  for  I  confess 

I  am  very  much  afraid  of  the  cholera. 
There  are  many  who  deny  being  afraid ; 

but  I  have  the  courage  to  confess  it 

freely. 
At  what  hour  do  you  breakfast  ? 
I  breakfast  at  eight,  limch  at  two,  and 

dine  at  six. 
Will  you  (do  you)  promise  to  come  and 

dine  with  me  to-day  ? 
Between  lunching  and  dining  with  you, 

I  choose  lunching,  for  you  dine  too 

early, 
require  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 


EXPLANATION. 

161.  iKREGrLAii  Verbs. — All  verbs  that  are  not  conju- 
gated throughout  according  to  the  model  verbs  ali-eady  given 
{hablar,  aprender,  escribir),  are  called  irregular. 

162.  It  is,  however,  to  be  observed,  that  although  some 
^'erbs  undergo  slight  changes  in  their  radical  letters,  they  are 


162  LESSON    xxxir. 

not  to  be  considered  as  irregular  on  that  account,  inasmuch  as 
those  mutations  take  place  in  order  to  preserve  throughout  the 
whole  conjugation  the  pronunciation  of  the  root  as  sounded  in 
the  infinitive.  This  observation  should  be  carefully  borne  in 
mind,  so  as  not  to  take  for  irregular  verbs  those  which  are 
really  not  so. 

Many  verbs  ending  in  car^  cer,  cir,  gar,  for  instance,  undergo 
respectively  such  mutations  as  .above  alluded  to  :  those  in  car 
change  the  c  into  qu  before  e  /  as, 

Tocar.  I      To  touch. 

Toque  (instead  of  toc6).  |      I  touched  ; 

in  those  in  cer  and  cz>,  the  c  is  changed  into  z  before  a  and  o ; 
as, 

Veneer.  To  vanquish. 

Yenzo  (instead  of  venco).  I  vanquish. 

Resarcir.  To  indemnify. 

Besarzo  (instead  of  resarco).  I  indemnify ; 

and  lastly,  those  in  gar  take  a  tc  afler  the  g  and  before  e ;  as, 
Pagar.  I      To  pay. 

Pagw6  (instead  of  pag6).  |      I  paid. 

For  the  same  reason  delinquir  changes  qu  into  c,  before  a 
and  o ;  as,  delinco,  delinca,  delincamos ;  and  escoger,  to  choose, 
changes  the  g  into^'  before  a  and  o ;  as,  escojo,  escoja. 

163.  The  verbs  which  terminate  in  eer,  as  creer,  to  believe ; 
leer,  to  read ;  paseer,  to  possess ;  proveer,  to  provide,  in  those 
terminations  which  contain  an  i,  change  it  into  y  whenever  it 
is  to  be  joined  with  another  vowel ;  as,  crel,  creyd ;  le\,  leyeron ; 
pose'i,  poseyere ;  provei,  proveyeremos,  &c. 

164.  The  same  change  is  made  in  the  verbs  ending  in  uir, 
when  the  u  and  the  i  make  a  part  of  two  diflferent  syllables. 
Thus  huir,  to  fly,  makes,  in  the  third  person  of  the  preterit  defi- 
nite, huyo  ;  argiXir,  to  argue,  makes  arguyo,  &c. 

165.  The  irregular  verbs,  about  jf?ue  hundred  and  fifty  in 
number,  may  be  divided  into  seven  classes,  presenting  each  a 
certain  regularity  in  their  irregularity ;  that  is  to  say,  whose 
irregularities  occur  in  the  same  persons  and  tenses,  so  that 
when  the  pupil  has  learned  seven  verbs,  or  one  of  each  of  those 


LESSON     XXXIV.  163 

group:^,  he  will  be  able  to  conjugate  almost  all  the  Spanish 
irregular  verbs,  save  a  few  that  confine  their  irregularities  to 
themselves  and  their  compounds,  and  of  which  the  majority 
have  been  already  introduced  in  previous  lessons,  such  as  haber^ 
tener,  &c. ;  but  the  learner  can  find  them  all  conjugated  at  the 
end  of  the  book. 

Acertar  may  serve  as  a  model  for  the  conjugation  of  the 
first  of  these  seven  classes  of  irregular  verbs,  just  as  hablar  does 
for  the  first  conjugation  of  the  regular  verbs.  The  irregularity 
of  acertar,  and  of  all  those  conjugated  like  it,  consists  in  taking 
an  i  before  the  last  e  of  the  root,  in  the  Jirst,  second  and  third 
pei-sons  singular,  and  the  ^A?VJ  person  plural  of  the  present  of  the 
indicative  mood,  in  the  present  of  the  subjunctive,  and  in  the 
imperative.  (See  list  of  the  irregular  verbs  at  the  end  of  the 
book.)  In  all  the  other  tenses  and  moods  those  verbs  are  regu- 
lar, and  the  learner  can  easily  form  them  according  to  their 
respective  conjugations, 

166.  Pagar  may  take  for  its  direct  object  either  the  value 
paid  or  the  thing  paid  for,  while  the  person  paid  is  the  indi- 
rect object.     I'or  may  be  used  before  the  thing  paid  for ;  as, 


Pago  los  caballos,  or  pago  por  lo3 

caballos. 
Pago  mil  pesos  por  !os  caballos. 

Pago  al  coinerciante  mil  pesos  por 
los  caballos. 


I  pay  for  the  horses. 

I  pay  a  thousand  dollars  for  the 
horses. 

I  pay  the  merchant  a  thousand  dol- 
lars for  the  horses. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Acertara  V.  la  casa  de  su  prima  ?     Si,  sefior,  yo  la  acertard, 

2.  ^Podra,  V.  acertar  quien  estuvo  aqui  ayer?     No  acierto. 

3.  ^No  entiende  su  hermano  de  V.  lo  que  le  digo  ?     Si,  sefior;  pero 
no  aeierta  a  responder. 

4.  I  Se  calienta  V.  al  fuego  ?     Si,  sefior,  porque  hace  mucho  frio. 

5.  ^Porqu6  no  cierra  V.  cnt6nces  la  puerta?     Oonfieso  quo  no  habia 
pensado  en  ello. 

C.  ^  A  que  hora  desperto  V.  esta  mafiana?    Despert6  a  las  diez. 

7.  gEl  que  gobierna  una  casa  y  una  familia,  no  debe  levantarse  tem- 
prano?    No  lo  niego. 

8.  ^Piensa  V.  merendar  hoy?    Si,  sefior,  nosotrcs  merendamos  todos 

los  dias. 


164  LESSON     XXXIV. 

9.  ^Porqnd  no  se  sienta  V.  en  aquella  silla,  que  es  mejor?    Porque 
tengo  mieilo  de  romperla. 

10.  ^  Le  pag6  V.  d  su  criado  ?  Si,  senor,  le  pagu6  ayer  y  hoy  se  ha  huido. 

11.  ^No  le  perdonara  V.  ?     No,  sefior,  porque  quien  delinquio  una  vez 
delinquira  dos. 

12.  gY  no  se  resarci6  de  su  trabajo?    Si,  senor,  antes  se  provey6  de 
ropa  en  mi  casa. 

IS.  I  Que  lenguas  posee  61  ?    El  ingles,  el  frances  y  el  italiano. 

14.  J  Qui6n  posee  ahora  la  casa  de  campo  de  V.  ?  El  americano  la  posee. 

15.  ^  Se  la  ha  pagado  a  V.  ?     No,  senor,  no  me  pago  nada. 

16.  jCompro  V.  flores  al  jardinero?    Le  compre  verduras  y  mi  hcr- 
mana  le  compr6  flores. 

17.  jLe  pagaron  Vds.  al  jardinero  por  eUas?    Yo  Ic  pague  las  verdu- 
ras y  mi  hermana  pag6  por  las  flores. 

18.  ^  A  qui6n  le  gustan  mas  las  flores,  4  Y.  6  a  su  hermana?     Creo  que 
a  ella  le  gustan  mas  las  flores;  pero  a  mi  me  gusta  mas  la  fruta. 

19.  I  Qa6  fruta  le  gusta  a  V.  mas  ?    Me  gustan  las  naranjas  y  las  man- 
zanas. 

20.  jPaga  V.  siempre  sus  deudas?    Las  pago  cnando  tengo  dincro. 

21.  ^Piensa  V.  ir  al  campo  este  verano  ?    Deseo  ir  A  cualquiera  parte, 
porque  confleso  que  tengo  mucho  miedo  del  colera- 

22.  J  No  tiene  V.  verguenza  de  confesarlo?     Uay  muchos  que  nicgan 
tener  miedo ;  pero  yo  tengo  el  valor  de  confesarlo  francamente. 

23.  ^A  que  hora  desperto  V.  ayer?     Ayer,  creo  que  despert^  a  las 
cinco.     Despierto  todos  los  dias  a  las  cuatro  y  media. 

24.  J  Y  a  qu6  hora  se  desayuna  V.  ?    Me  desayuno  a  las  siete,  meriendo 
d  las  dos  y  como  a  las  seis. 

25.  I  Me  promete  V.  venir  hoy  a  comer  conmigo  ?    No  puedo  prome- 
t^rselo,  porque  no  se  si  tendre  tiempo. 

EXCERCISE. 

1.  How  cold  it  is  this  morning!     Yes,  it  is  very  cold. 

2.  "Will  you  not  come  and  "warm  yourself  at  the  fire  ?    No,  thank 
you ;  I  do  not  like  to  warm  myself  at  the  fire. 

3.  In  that  case  it  is  better  to  shut  the  doors  and  the  Avindows. 
Perhaps  it  is.* 

4.  Do  you  intend  remaining  (estarse)  here  during  the  winter?     If  my 
imcle  remains,  I  will  too. 

5.  'Will  you  not  choose  other  rooms  if  you  remain  ?     Yes,  I  intend 
to  do  so. 

♦     English  words  printed  in  italics  do  not  require  to  bo  translated  into  Spanish. 


LESSON     XXXIV.  165 

6.  Good  evening,  Charles ;  will  you  not  sit  down  for  a  few  minutes  ? 
With  pleasure. 

7.  Did  you  find  out  (make  out)  the  musician's  house  yesterday  ?     I 
made  out  the  house  without  much  difficulty,  hut  I  did  not  see  him. 

8.  How  was  that  ?     He  must  have  heen  out,  for  I  knocked  at  his 
door. 

9.  At  what  hour  do  you  dine?    I  generally  dine  at  six  o'clock. 

10.  Then  you  lunch  at  noon  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  generally  lunch  ahout  that 
hour. 

11.  Do  you  cat  ftuit  every  day  at  dinner?     Not  every  day. 

12.  Did  your  hrother  pay  for  the  fruit  he  bought  last  week  ?     No ;  hut 
he  has  to  go  out  to-morrow,  and  perhaps  he  will  go  and  pay  for  it. 

13.  Let  us  go  aud  take  a  walk.     Where  do  you  wish  to  go  ? 

14.  We  can  go  to  the  Central  Park.     Very  well,  let  us  go  there ;  I 
think  it  is  the  finest  promenade  in  the  city. 

15.  At  what  time  do  they  open  the  park  in  the  morning  ?     I  believe 
it  is  open  m  summer  at  five  o'clock. 

16.  And  at  what  time  is  it  shut?    At  eleven  o'clock,  I  believe,  or  per- 
haps a  little  later. 

17.  In  that  case  it  will  be  better  not  to  go  there  until  to-morrow ;   it 
is  now  rather  too  late  {algo  tarde). 

18.  How  too  late?     It  is  only  half-past  seven,  so  that  wo  have  three 
hours  and  a  half  for  walking. 

19.  Where  are  they  taking  that  man  to?      They  are  taking  him  to 
prison  {la  ccirceT). 

20.  What  are  they  taking  him  to  prison  for  ?     Ha  must  be  guilty  of 
some  misdemeanor  (delinquir). 

21.  Has  the  servant  taken  the  letter  to  the  pianist  yet  ?     lie  took  it  to 
him  yesterday  afternoon. 

22.  Have  you  seen  the  news  this  morning  ?     No ;  what  news  is  there  ? 

23.  There  was  a  great  fire  last  night  in  Fourth  street,  and  twelve 
houses  were  burned. 

24.  Where  is  Alexander  ?    Ho  is  up  stairs. 

25.  Have  any  of  you  seen  my  Spanish  dictionaiy  ?     Yes,  I  had  it  this 
morning  in  my  room. 

20.  What  were  you  doing  with  it?     I  was  looking  for  a  new  word 
which  I  met  with*  while  reading  the  history  you  lent  mo. 

27.  How  did  you  manage  (ace ?'ter)  to  wake  so  early  this  morning? 
My  brother  awoke  me  singing  in  my  room,  at  five  o'clock. 

28.  At  what  time  do  you  generally  wake  ?    If  no  one  comes  to  inter- 
nipt  {interrum])ir)  my  sleep,  I  never  wake  before  nine. 

*  Enslish  worda  in  italics  do  not  require  to  bo  translated. 

S 


166 


LESSON     XXXV. 


29.  Is  it  not  better  for  the  health  to  rise  early  ?  Certainly ;  but  then 
it  is  necessary  to  go  to  bed  early  also. 

30.  Why  do  you  not  go  to  bed  early  ?  I  am  fond  of  reading  and  study, 
and  so  I  rarely  go  to  bed  before  two  o'clock  in  the  morning  (de  la  ma- 
drugada). 


LESSON    XXXV. 

IRREGULAR  'VEKB^t—Coniimted. 
Acostar.  |  To  put  in  bed. 

IXDICATIVE. — Present. 
Aeuesto,  aeuesias,  acuesta.  I  I  put  in  bed,  &c. 

Acostamos,  acostais,  acuestan.   |         We  put  in  bed,  &o 

IMPEEATIYB. 

Acuesta  tii,  aeueste  61,  acoste-  Put  in  bed,  &c. 

mo3  nosotros,  acostad  voso- 
tros,  acuesten  ellos. 

suBJiixcnvE. — Present. 

Aeueste,  acuestes,  aeueste,  acos-  l  I  may,  or  can,  put  in  bed,  &c 

temos,  acosteis,  acuesten.        \ 


VERBS   CONJUGATED  LIKE  AC03TAE. 


Acostarse. 

Aprobar. 

Almorzar. 

Contar. 

Consolar. 

Encontrar. 

Mostrar. 

Probar. 

Recordar. 

Reprobar. 

Rogar. 

Sonar. 

DeliciosQ. 
Espacioso. 
Industrioso. 
Religiose. 


To  go  to  bed,  to  lie  down. 

To  approve. 

To  breakfast. 

To  count ;  to  relate,  or  tell. 

To  console. 

To  meet. 

To  show. 

To  prove ;  to  ivy ;  to  taste. 

To  remind;  to  remember. 

To  reprove. 

To  entreat 

To  dream. 

Delicious. 
Spacious. 
Industrious. 
Religious. 


LESSON     XXXV. 


16V 


Aristocrdtico. 

Cldsico. 

Fanatico. 

Monarquico. 

Tiranico. 

Tragico. 

Portico, 

Analitico. 

Satiiico. 

Filos6fico. 

C6mico. 

Economico. 

Laconico. 

Met6(lico. 

Cronico. 


Vaso. 

Sermon. 

Muudo. 

Capitulo. 

Perro. 


Tumbler,  glass. 

Sermon. 

World. 

Chapter. 

Dog. 


Ai-istocratic. 

Classic. 

Fanatic. 

Monarchical. 

Tyrannical. 

Tragic. 

Poetical. 

Analytical. 

Satirical. 

Philosophical. 

Comic,  comical. 

Economical. 

•Laconic. 

Methodical. 

Chronic. 

Taza, 
Moral. 


Cup. 
Moral. 


Eepublica.  Republic. , 

Independencia.  Independence. 
Religion.  Religion. 


COMPOSITION. 


Manuel,  acuestate  temprano  y  levantatc 

temprano  tambien. 
Alejandro,  cucntamc  lo  que  te  dijo  Luisa. 
Ayiidate  y  Dios  te  ayudara. 
Ama  a  tu  projimo  como  a  ti  mismo. 
Se  religiose,  pero  no  seas  fanatico. 
Se  industrioso  y  economico  y  no  seras 

pobre. 
Sentemonos,  que  cstoy  cansado. 
Amaos  como  hcrmanos  y  no  hableis 

mal  uno  del  otro. 
Entre  V.,  Dn.  Pedro,  y  tome  V.  asiento, 

or  sientcse  V. 
No  puedo,  cstoy  dc  prisa. 
Juan,  clcrra  la  puerta,  pero  no  cicrres 

la  ventana. 
Caballeros,  cntrcn  Vds.,  y  les  mostrare 

mis  libros. 
Alejandro,  coufiesa  tu  falta  y  te  la  pcr- 

donarc. 


Emanuel,  go  to  bed  early  and  rise  early 

too. 
Alexander,  tell  me  what  Louisa  told  thee. 
Help  thyself,  and  God  will  help  thee. 
Love  thy  neighbor  as  thyself. 
Be  religious,  but  not  a  fanatic. 
Be  industrious  and  economical  and  thou 

shalt  not  be  poor. 
Let  us  sit  down,  for  I  am  tired. 
Love  each  other  as  brothers,  and  speak 

no  evil  one  of  another. 
Come  in,  Mr.  Peter,  take  a  seat,  or  be 

seated. 
I  cannot,  I  am  in  a  hurry. 
John,  shut  the  door,  but  do  not  shut 

the  window. 
Come  in,  gentlemen,  and  I  shall  show 

you  my  books. 
Alexander,  confess   your  fault,  and   I 

will  pardon  you. 


168  LESSON     XXXV, 


No  los  ofendamos. 

Amigos,  cantemos  y  bailemos  y  seamos 
felices. 

No  tomaras  en  vano  el  Nombre  del  Sa- 
ilor tu  Dios 


Let  us  not  offend  them. 

My  friends,  let  us  sing,  dance  and  be 

merry. 
Thou  shalt  not  take  the  Name  of  the 

Lord  thy  God  in  vain. 


EXPLANATION. 

167.  The  verb  acostar  changes  the  radical  o  into  ue  in  the 
same  tenses  and  persons  as  those  in  which  the  verb  acertar  is 
irregular;  i.  e.,  in  the  present  indicative,  the  imperative  and  the 
present  subjunctive.  (See  this  va-b  and  those  conjugated  like 
it  at  the  end  of  the  booh). 

168.  The  imperative  mood  is  not  used  in  the  first  person 

singular  ;  nor  is  it  used  in  Spanish  for  forbidding  ;  that  is,  it  is 

not  employed  in  the  negative  form ;  but  the  persons  of  the 

present  subjunctive  are  used  when  a  negative  command  or  a 

prohibition  is  expressed ;  as. 

No  lo  hagas.  )  I 

Nolohagais.f  |  Do  not  do  so. 

169.  As  has  already  been  said,  the  s  of  the  first  person 
plural,  and  the  d  of  the  second,  are  suppressed  before  nos  and 
OS',  as, 

Amemonos.  I  Let  us  love  each  other. 

Amaos.  |  Love  one  another. 

170.  When  the  imperative  is  negative  in  English,  as  the 
subjunctive  is  employed  in  Spanish,  the  objective  pronouns  are 
placed  before  it ;  as, 

No  lo  digas.  I  Do  not  tell  it. 

No  los  ofendamos.  |  Let  us  not  offend  them. 

171.  The  future  of  the  indicative  is  often  used  for  the  im- 
perative; as, 

No  tomaras  en  vano  el  Nombre  I  Thou  shalt  not  take  the  Name  of 

del  Seiior  tu  Dios.  |  the  Lord  thy  God  in  vain. 

172.  Many  adjectives  ending  in  ous  are  rendered  into 
Spanish  by  changing  this  termination  into  oso ;  as, 

DeUcioso.  I  Delicious. 

Espacioso.  |         Spacious,  &c. 


LESSON     XXXV.  109 

173.  Many  nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  English  in  ic 
or  ical  have  in  Spanish  the  termination  ico ;  as, 

Fanatico.  I  Fanatic,  fanatical. 

Poetfco.  I  Poetic,  poetical. 

COXYERSATION  AXD  VERSIOX. 

1.  Luisa,  estudia  bien  tu  leccion  de  espafiol  y  escribe  los  ejercicios. 

2.  i  Que  me  dard  V.,  papa,  si  la  estudio  biea  y  no  bago  faltas  en  los 
ejercicios?    Te  Ilevare  conmigo  al  Parque  Central. 

3.  Papa,  I  no  llevara  V.  a  Alejandro  y  a  Manuel  con  nosotros  ?  Si 
son  buenos  uiuchacbos  y  estudiosos  los  llevar6  tambien. 

4.  Alejandro,  ven  aca  y  cuentame  que  biciste  ayer  en  el  campo. — Con, 
mucbo  gusto.  Por  la  mafiana  me  levantd  temprano,  me  lav6  y  almorc6  y 
despues  me  fui  a  pasear.     Yolvi  muy  cansado  y  me  acoste  a  las  nueve. 

5.  j  Juan!  ^SeQcr?  MaQana  me  despertaras  a  las  cinco,  me  llmpia- 
ras  las  botas  y  me  traeras  el  caballo  temprano,  porque  quiero  ir  a  dar  un 
paseo  y  toraar  un  vaso  de  Icche  en  el  hotel  del  Parque  Central. 

6.  Amigo  mio,  no  seas  fanatico,  pero  se  religioso.  No  seas  satirico 
ni  bablador,  pero  s6  prudente,  economico  6  industrioso  y  seras  feliz. 

7.  Por  Dios,  Don  Pedro,  no  bable  V.  mas,  le  prometo  a  V.  estudiar  y 
ser  buen  mucbacbo. 

8.  No  seas  rcspondon,  baz  tu  deber,  ayudatc  y  Dios  te  ayudard. 

9.  Don  Pedro,  a  mi  no  me  gustan  los  sermones  lai-gos,  sientese  V.  y 
hablemos  de  otra  cosa. 

10.  Mire  V.,  Dn.  .Juan,  a  aquella  seflorita  que  esta  en  la  ventana  del 
vecino  ;  ^la  conoce  V.  ?     Si,  sefior,  la  conoci  en  Filadelfia. 

11.  2  Que  tal  le  gnsta  a  V.?  Mucbisimo;  es  una  seflorita  perfecta,  y 
babla  el  espauol  tan  bien  como  el  ingles. 

12.  I  Quiere  V.  llevanne  a  su  casa?  Tengo  deseo  de  conocerla.— Con 
mucbo  gusto,  pero  antes  neccsito  su  aprobacion. 

13.  ^Le  araan  a  V.  mucbo  sus  niilos?  Me  aman  y  yo  los  amo;  y  toda 
la  farailia  nos  amamos  los  unos  d  los  otros,  asi  es  que  somos  felicisiinos. 

14.  I  Se  aman  Yds.  los  unos  a  los  otros  tanto  como  se  aman  Yds.  mis- 
mos  ?     Creo  que  si. 

15.  liable  Y.  alto  y  despacio  si  Y.  gusta  y  entonces  entendere  todo  lo 
que  Y.  dice. — A?i  lo  liar6;  pero  Y.  no  pensard  en  otra  cosa  quo  en  lo 
que  yo  digo,  porque  si  no,  no  bablare  mas. 

16.  iLe  conviene  a  Y.  comprar  aquella  casa?  No  me  convierle,  por- 
que es  muy  cara  y  estd  muy  lejos  de  la  ciudad. 

17.  ^Que  le  parcce  a  Y.  del  tieiupo?    Hoy  es  el  cuatro  de  Julio  de 

8 


170  LESSON     XXXV. 

1866,  y  por  snpuesto  bace  calor;  pero  liace  miiy  buen  tiempo  para  la 
celebi'aciou  de  la  independencia  de  esta  gran  Republica. 

18.  gCudntos  alios  bace  boy  que  los  Estados  Unidos  celebran  su  inde- 
pendencia ?    Noventa  y  un  anos. 

19.  jParece  imposible!  En  m6nos  de  cien  afios  ba  llegado  esta  nacion 
a  ser  una  de  las  potencias  (powers)  mas  grandes  del  mundo. 

20.  Eso  debia  ser  asi,  y  no  dude  V.  que  llegara  un  dia  en  que  la  liber- 
tad  y  la  religion  reinaran  en  el  mundo  baciendo  felices  a  todas  las  na- 
ciones  como  a  otras  tantas  familias  que  tienen  un  mismo  padi*e. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  get  up  late  to-day  ?  No ;  I  got  up  at  daybreak  to  go  and 
walk  in  tbe  country. 

2.  Where  did  you  walk?  I  went  first  to  tbe  Central  Park,  and  tben 
to  Harlem. 

3.  What  is  tbe  first  thing  we  read  in  Telemacbus  ?  We  read  that 
Calypso  could  not  console  herself  for  tbe  departure  (partida)  of. 
Ulysses. 

4.  Where  have  you  been  all  this  time,  sir  ?  it  is  more  than  a  week 
since  you  last  came  to  see  us ;  that  is  not  right  (estar  lien).  I  confess  I 
am  rather  negligent  (negligente)  sometimes. 

6.  You  have  doubtless  already  gone  to  see  your  old  friend?  Tes, 
and  he  wanted  to  make  me  spend  a  month  with  him  at  bis  country  bouse. 

6.  What  part  of  the  country  does  be  live  in  ?  On  Long  Island,  about 
ten  miles  from  the  city. 

Y.  Was  he  not  glad  to  see  you  ?  We  looked  at  each  other  for  about 
ten  minutes  without  being  able  to  say  a  word ;  at  last  {en  Jin)  he  broke 
the  silence  {rompio  el  silencio),  and  said  to  me :  "  What !  is  it  you,  my 
dear  friend  ?     After  seven  years'  absence  (ausencia) !     IIow  glad  I  am  ! 

8.  Did  be  know  yon  as  soon  as  he  saw  you  ?  Yes,  and  I  knew  him, 
though  I  met  him  at  some  distance  from  bis  father's  house. 

9.  Doubtless  he  asked  you  about  your  travels  (voyages)  ?  Of  course. 
"Where  have  you  been  ?  "  said  he.  "  What  have  you  done  ?  what  have 
you  seen?  are  you  rich?  are  you  happy?  Tell  me  all  you  have  done 
since  you  went  away  (irse) ;  all  your  adventures.  I  wish  it;  I  desire  it; 
I  beg  of  you ;  it  will  give  (yon  will  do)  me  tbe  greatest  pleasure." 

10.  All  that  proves  his  joy  at  seeing  you.  Yes,  I  know  that ;  but  how 
many  questions ! 

11.  Did  he  want  an  answer  to  each  one  of  them?  Of  course;  and.  I 
answered  them  as  well  as  I  could. 

12.  AVbat  did  you  tell  liini?    I  told  him  that  after  having  left  France, 


LESSON     XXXVI.  171 

I  went  to  Spain,  and  from  there  into  Portugal  {Portugal)^  and  that  after 
a  few  months  passed  in  Lisbon  (Lisboa)  I  went  on  to  Italj,  where  I  re- 
mained fom-  years. 

13.  What  are  the  hours  for  breakfast  and  dinner  amongst  the  Italians? 
The  Italians,  like  the  French,  usually  (generally)  breakfast  at  eleven 
o'clock,  and  dine  from  five  to  seven  in  the  evening. 

14.  And  do  they  never  eat  anything  before  the  breakfast  hoar?  Al- 
most everybody  takes  a  cup  of  coffee  or  chocolate  in  the  morning  soon 
after  rising. 

15.  What  kind  of  governments  are  there  in  Europe?  In  Europe  we 
find  almost  every  form  {forma)  of  government,  repubhcan  (jnd  monar- 
chical. 

IG.  What  is  that  book  you  have  in  your  hand?  An  analytical  treatise 
(tratado)  of  Spanisli  poetry  that  I  was  going  to  show  to  your  cousin. 

1 7.  Have  you  seen  Boileau's  satirical  poems  ?  My  uncle  has  promised 
to  bring  mo  that  work  from  Paris. 

18.  Are  jow  fond  of  reading?  Yes,  I  take  (find)  great  pleasure  in 
reading  books  of  all  kinds,  classical,  poetical,  religious,  analytical,  satiri- 
cal, philosophical,  &c. 

19.  Do  you  remember  the  peaches  our  friend  sent  us  from  the  country 
last  year?     Of  course  I  remember  them,  and  that  they  were  delicious. 

20.  Charles,  go  and  take  your  breakfast;  I  want  to  take  you  to  see 
the  fine  horse  your  uncle  has  bought  for  Alexander. 

21.  Will  you  not  buy  one  for  me,  too,  papa?  If  you  are  a  good  boy 
I  probably  will. 

22.  Do  you  ever  dream?  Very  often;  last  night  I  dreamed  I  was 
travelling. 

23.  Indeed!     Where  were  you  going  to ?    I  do  not  remember  now. 

24.  What  was  your  father  saying  to  Peter  when  I  came  in  ?  He  was 
reproving  him  for  not  having  written  his  exercise  yesterday. 

25.  Can  you  tell  me  what  day  this  is?  To-day  is  Wednesday,  July 
4th,  of  the  year  1866,  and  the  ninety-first  of  the  Independence  of  the 
United  States. 


Respetar. 

Parar. 

Mover. 


LESSON    XXXVI. 


To  respeet. 
To  stop. 
To  move. 


172 


LESSON     XXXVI. 


nroioATivE — Present. 
Jiluevo,  mueves,  muete,  move-  I  I  move,  «fec. 


mos,  moveis,  mueren. 


IMPERATIVE. 


Muete  tu,  mueva  61,  movamos 
nosotros,  moved  vosotros, 
muevan  ellos. 


Move,  &c. 


SUBJUNCTIVE — Present. 

Muevoi,  muevas,  mueva,  mova-  i  I  may  or  can  move,  «&c 

mos,  movais,  muevan.  \ 

Verls  conjugated  like  moveb. 


Llover, 

To  rain. 

Morder. 

To  bite. 

Doler. 

To  grieve,  to 

pain,  to  ache. 

Volver. 

To  turn,  to  return. 

Antes  que. 

Before. 

Aunque. 

Although. 

Como. 

Since,  provided. 

Para  que. 
A  fin  de. 

In  order  that 

,  in  order  to. 

Todo  el  mundo. 

Everybody. 

Principalmento. 

Principally,  c 

hiefly. 

Antagonista.  Antagonist. 

Atrocidad. 

Atrocity. 

Artista.           Artist. 

Capacidad. 

Capacity. 

Materialista.  Materialist. 

Claridad. 

Clearness, 

Naturalista.    Naturalist. 

light. 

Organista.       Organist. 

Crueldad. 

Cruelty. 

Violinista.      Violinist. 

DificiUtad. 

Difficulty. 

Purista.           Purist. 

Etemidad. 

Eternity. 

Escritorio.      OflSce. 

Facilidad. 

Facility. 

Clima.             Climate. 

Noticias. 

News. 

Dolor.             Grief,  pain, 

ache. 

Gucrra. 

War. 

COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

Se  dice  que  Maximiliano  ha  partido  de  I  It  is  said  that  Maximilian  has  left  Mex- 
Mejico.  I      ico. 


LESSON     XXXVI. 


173 


g  Se  crce  cso  ? 

Aqui  lo  crce  todo  cl  mundo ;  pero  en 

Francia  no  se  crce. 
i  Cree  V.  que  se  podra  pagar  pronto  la 

deuda  de  los  Estados  Unidos  ? 
l\o  se  Lara  muy  pronto ;  pero  se  hara. 

Aqui  se  habla  espanol. 

Aqui  se  vende  buen  vino. 

Se  perdona  algunas  veces  a  los  dclin- 

cuentes,  pero  no  siempre. 
El  hombre  se  engafia  k  si  mismo. 
(,  Envlo  V.  el  violin  al  violinista  ? 

Se  le  envie. 

6  Tocan  bien  el  piana  en  Espafia  ? 

Ea  Espaiia  se  toca  bien  la  giiitarra. 
6  Se  hal'la  bien  el  espaiiol  en  la  Ameri- 
ca del  Sur  ? 
Lo  liablan  y  pronuncian  bien. 
6  Le  duele  a  V.  la  cabeza  ? 
Si,  seiior,  mucho. 
6  Como  se  llama  V.  ? 
Me  llamo  Juan. 

i  Como  se  llama  eso  en  espaiiol  ? 
i  Como  se  dice  eso  en  espaiiol  ? 

Lo  mismo  qnc  en  ingles. 


Do  they  believe  that  ? 

Here   everybody  believes  it ;    but  in 

France  it  is  not  believed. 
Is   it  thought  that  the  United  States 

debt  can  soon  be  paid  ? 
It  will  not  be  accompUshed  (done)  very 

soon  ;  but  it  will  be  done. 
Spanish  is  spoken  here. 
Good  wine  is  sold  here. 
Transgressors  are  pardoned  sometimes, 

but  not  always. 
Men  deceive  themselves. 
Did  you  send  the  violin  to  the  violin- 
ist? 
I  sent  it  to  him,  or  did  send  it  to  him. 
Do   they  play  well    on   the  piano   in 

Spain  ? 
They  play  the  guitar  well  in  Spain. 
Is  Spanish  well  spoken  (or,  do  they  speak 

good  Spanish)  in  South  America  ? 
Tliey  speak  it  and  pronounce  it  welL 
Does  your  head  ache  ? 
Yes,  sir,  very  much. 
V\Tiat  is  your  name  ? 
My  name  is  John. 
What  is  that  called  in  Spanish  ? 
How  do  you  (or,  do  they)  say  that  in 

Spanish  ? 
The  same  as  in  English. 


EXPLANATION. 

174.  Mover,  to  move,  changes  the  radical  o  into  we,  in  the 
same  tenses  and  persons  as  the  verb  acostar;  i.  e.,  in  the 
first,  second  and  third  persons  singular,  and  the  third  plural 
of  the  present  indicative,  and  present  subjunctive,  and  in  the 
imperative.  [See  this  verh^  and  those  conjugated  like  it,  at  the 
end  of  the  book). 

175.  Se  is  the  indefinite  personal  pronoun  of  the  Spanish, 
referring  to  a  personal  agency  in  such  a  manner  as  to  leave  un- 
determined both  the  sex  and  the  number  of  the  persons  repre- 
sented._  It  corresponds,  in  this  respect,  with  the  English  tee, 
they,  people  or  one ;  in  fact,  with  all  expressions  whicli  mention 


174  LESSOX     XXXVI. 

persons  thus  vaguely  and  indefinitely.     It  is  used  with  the 
third  person    singular  of  the  verb ;  as, 


Se  dice. 
Se  eree. 
No  se  Jiard. 

Aqui  se  vende  vino  bueno. 
Aqui  se  habla  espaiiol. 


It  is  said,  or  they  say. 

It  is  believed,  or  they  believe. 

They  (people)  will  not  do  it,  or  it 

will  not  be  done. 
Good  wine  is  sold  here. 
Spanish  is  spoken  here. 


176.  The  pronoun  se  has  now  been  seen  used  in  the  four  func- 
tions in  whicli  it  can  be  found ;  it  may  be  well  to  mention  them 
all  again,  in  order  that  these  difierent  olfices  of  the  pronoim  se 
may  be  well  distinguished,  and  to  avoid  all  confusion.  They 
are  the  following : 

1st.  As  an  indefinite  subject,  as  has  been  seen  in  the  pres- 
ent lesson ;  as, 

Se  dice.  |    They  say. 

2d.  To  form  the  passive  voice  of  verbs  (see  Lesson 
XXXn.) ;  as, 

Se  perdona  algunas  veces  ^  los  dclin-  I      Transgressors    arc    sonactimcs    par- 
cuentes.  |  doned. 

Sd.  As  a  reflective  pronoun ;  as, 

Manuel  se  engana.  |      Emanuel  deceives  himself. 

4th,  and  lastly,  the  objective  pronoun  se,  for  the  sake  of 
euphony,  takes  the  place  of  the  objectives  le,  la,  lo,  les  (see 
Lesson  XXVIL) ;  as, 

Se  lo  pagar6  a  V.  manana.  |      I  will  pay  it  to  you  to-morrow. 

177.  Many  nouns  ending  in  English  in  ty,  are  rendered  in 
Spanish  by  changing  these  letters  into  dad;  as, 

A.civndad.  I      kciviUy. 

CapacicZaJ.  |      Capacity. 

N.  B. — All  nouns  of  this  termination  are  feminine.  Many 
nouns  ending  in  English  in  ist,  are  rendered  into  Spanish  by 
adding  to  these  letters  an  a  ;  as, 

Artista.  I       Artist. 

Organista.  |       Organist,  &c. 


LESSOIT     XXXVI.  175 

178.  DoLER, — This  verb  is  used  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
verb  ffustar,  to  like  (see  Lesson  XXXI.) ;  as, 

(,  Le  duele  a  V.  la  cabeza  ?  |      Does  your  head  ache  ? 

The  same  may  be  expressed  in  the  following  manner : 
(,  Tiene  V.  dolor  de  cabeza  ?  |      Have  you  a  headache  ?  " 

COXVERSATION  AKD  VERSION. 

1.  ^Sevendo  buen  vino  en  NuevaYork?  Se  vende  buenoymalo; 
pero  mny  care. 

2.  I  Que  noticias  bay  ?  Se  dice  quo  la  Alcmania  y  la  Italia  estan  en 
guerra. 

3.  I  So  cree  eso  ?  No  solamente  se  creo,  sine  quo  se  sabe  que  la  guer- 
ra ha  principiado  ya. 

4.  ^Se  habla  espailol  en  Nueva  York?  En  ISTueva  York  se  bablan 
todas  las  Icnguas,  pero  principalinento  el  ingles,  el  aleman,  cl  frances  y 
el  espaQol. 

5.  ^Se  aman  los  Franceses  y  los  Ingleses?  Creo  que  no  se  aman 
como  hermanos;  pero  se  respetan. 

6.  I A  quien  se  ama  mas  en  este  pais,  a  los  Franceses  6  a  los  Ingleses  ? 
Es  cosa  que  no  sabre  dccir. 

?.  i  En  los  Estados  Unidos  se  respetan  las  iglesias  de  todas  las  religio- 
nes  ?  Si,  seQor,  porquc  hay  libertad  de  religion ;  es  una  cosa  muy  bue- 
na  para  el  pais,  y  yo  la  deseo  para  todas  las  naciones  del  mundo. 

8.  Ilablemos  de  otra  cosa,  porque  todos  no  son  tan  liberales  como  V. ; 
y  no  se  hard  V.  amigos  si  babla  tan  francamente. 

9.  Conveugo  con  V.  en  eso,  ademas  no  se  debe  decir  todo  lo  que  se 
piensa;  pero  pai"a  aprender  una  lengua  se  debe  practicar  mucho  y  se 
debe  hablar  de  todo  un  poco. 

10.  V.  tiene  razon  en  eso,  y  una  conversacion  en  que  no  se  babla,  sino 
de  "  si  hace  calor  6  frio,  si  ha  estado  V.  en  el  teatro,  en  el  concierto,  6  en 
la  iglesia,  y  de  si  tiene  V.  el  sombrero  y  el  fusil,  y  el  vino,  y  el  dinero  de 
V.  6  del  vecino  "  es  muy  cansada. 

11.  Por  supuesto;  pero  Y.  debe  saber  que  lo  que  se  llama  en  ingles 
small  talk*  es  muy  de  moda. — Lo  s(?,  es  muy  de  moda,  y  basta  necesario 
algunas  veces. 

12.  ^Le  dijo  V.  eso  a.  su  amigo?  No  so  lo  dije,  porque  mi  bermana  se 
lo  habia  dicbo  ya. 

13.  I  Porque  no  me  lo  dijo  Y.  a  mi  ?  Porque  mi  hennano  me  ha  dicbo 
que  se  lo  dira  a  V.  mauana. 

14.  I  Toca  Dn.  Pedro  bien  el  piano  ?  No,  seiior,  pero  se  engana  a  si 
raismo  y  cree  tocarlo  muy  bien. 

*  Charla. 


1V6  LESSON     XXXVI. 

15.  V6ngase  V.  esta  tarde  por  aqui,  6  ir6raos  a  dar  un  paseo. — Bien, 
si  V.  me  espera  hasta  las  seis,  vendre,  pero  no  antes,  porque  no  puedo 
Balir  del  escritorio  hasta  esa  hora. 

IG.  ^Que  tal  tiempo  ha  hecho  hoy  en  la  ciudad  ?  Hoy  ha  hecho  huen 
tiempo  y  ayer  hizo  huen  tiempo  tatnbien  ;  pero  mafiana  hard  mal 
tieinpo. 

XT'.  jC6mo  sabe  V.  que  hara  mal  tiempo  mafiana?  Porque  en  Nueva 
York  no  hace  nunca  huen  tiempo  por  tres  dias. 

18.  2  V.  cree  que  no  hace  huen  tiempo  mas  que  (sirio)  en  la  Hahana? 
Perdone  V.  no  me  gusta  el  clima  de  la  Ilabana  ni  el  de  Nueva  York. 

19.  Ent6nces,  gqu6  clima  le  gusta  a  V.  ?  El  de  Espaua,  porque  alii 
tenemos  verdaderamente  las  cuatro  estaciones. 

20.  ^  Qu6  quiere  V.  decir  ?  Quiero  decir  que  en  Espafia  hace  calor  en 
verano  aunque  no  muchisimo ;  en  invierno  hace  frio,  pero  no  nos  hela- 
mos ;  en  otoflo  hace  un  excelente  tiempo  de  otouo,  y  en  la  primavera 
tenemos  primavera. 

21.  ^Bien,  y  no  es  lo  mismo  en  Kucva  York?  Esciiserae  V.;  en 
Nueva  York  no  he  conocido  la  primavera ;  hay  muy  pocos  dias  de  otofio, 
on  imderno  larguisimo  y  un  verano  calurosisimo. 

22.  ^  Y  en  la  Ilabana  ?  En  la  Ilabana  hay  todo  el  auo  el  vei'ano  de 
Nueva  York. 

23.  I  Yo  pensaba  que  a  V.  no  le  gustaba  hablar  del  tiempo  ?  Y-  do 
me  ha  entendido ;  crco  que  dcbe  hablai'so  do  todo,  pero  no  siempro  del 
tiempo. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Why  do  you  not  come  quicker  when  I  call  you  ?  I  cannot  come 
any  quicker,  my  head  aches. 

2.  Where  do  you  think  Spanish  is  spoken  best  ?  In  Madrid,  and  in 
all  parts  of  Old  and  New  Castile  {Castillo). 

3.  And  is  it  not  well  spoken  in  South  America?  There  is  some 
difference  in  the  pronunciation j  but,  in  general,  persons  of  education 
speak  correctly,  whether  they  bet  South  Americans  or  Spaniards. 

4.  "William,  will  you  be  good  enough  to  take  this  letter  to  the  post- 
office  when  you  are  going  to  take  your  lesson?  I  shall  take  it  in  the 
afternoon,  I  have  not  time  now. 

5.  Are  there  many  organists  in  the  United  States  ?  Yes ;  and  in  New 
York,  principally,  there  are  a  great  many  excellent  organists  and  pianists. 

6.  Do  you  like  that  man's  manner  of  speaking?  No,  I  do  not;  he  is 
too  much  of  a*  purist. 

7.  Is  your  brother  studying  natural  history  ?     I  cannot  tell   you 

*  Eugllbli  words  in  italics  not  to  be  translated  into  Spanish.  t  Ya  scan. 


LESS  OH     XXXVI.  177 

whether  (si)  ho  is  studjing  it  or  not;  but  I  know  he  has  just  bought  the 
complete  woi'ks  of  Biiffon. 

8.  Who  is  Biiffon  ?     A  celebrated  French  naturalist. 

9.  What  did  that  man  do  that  was  taken  to  prison  this  morning? 
They  say  he  was  arrested  (arrestar)  for  cruelty  to  animals. 

10.  Will  he  bo  punished  for  it?  Of  course;  transgressors  of  that 
kind  are  rarely  let  off  unpunished  (pardoned). 

11.  What  is  the  matter  with  Alexander?     A  dog  bit  him  in  the  hand. 

12.  Come  here,  Alexander;  show  me  your  hand.  Is  this  the  one? 
No.  it  is  the  other. 

13.  Does  it  pain  you  mucb?  It  was  very  sore  (pained)  when  I  got 
bitten,  but  now  it  is  less  painful. 

14.  1  have  always  told  you  how  necessary  it  is  to  take  care  with  dogs. 
I 'know  that;  and  I  shall  do  so  in  future. 

15.  Does  your  new  watch  go  well?  Not  very  well;  it  stops  (itself) 
three  or  four  times  a"  day. 

10.  Is  your  son  getting  on  well  in  his  studies?  Pretty  well";  he  has  a 
great  deal  of  capacity,  and  is  fond  of  study. 

17.  Look  here,  Charles.     What  do  you  wish? 

18.  Count  from  one  to  a  thousand  in  Spanish.  Oh!  I  can  do  that 
with  the  greatest  ease. 

19.  Well,  let  us  see?  One,  two,  three,  four,  five,  six,  seven,  eight, 
nine,  ten,  eleven,  twelve,  tbirteen,  fourteen,  fifteen,  sixteen,  seventeen, 
eighteen,  nineteen,  twenty,  twenty-one,  thirty,  forty,  fifty,  sixty,  seventy, 
eighty,  ninety,  a  hundred,  a  hundred  and  one,  two  hundred,  three  hun- 
dred, four  hundred,  five  hundred,  six  hundred,  seven  hundred,  eight 
hundred,  nine  hundred,  a  thousand. 

20.  How  do  they  write  that  last  word  in  Spanish  ?    I  do  not  remember. 

21.  What  is  that?  you  do  not  remember!  Did  you  not  learn  in  the 
lesson  on  pronunciation,  at  the  beginning  of  the  grammar,  that  in  Spanish 
every  word  is  written  just  as  it  is  pronounced  ?  Oh,  yes,  now  I  remember. 

22.  Tell  mo,  if  you  please,  Mr.  R.,  is  French  as  easy  to  pronounce  as 
Spanish  ?    They  say  it  is  much  more  difficult,  on  the  contrary. 

23.  But  it  is  not  impossible  to  learn  French  pronunciation  ?  I  did  not 
say  that ;  I  only  said  that  they  say  it  is  more  difficult  than  Spanish  pro- 
nunciation. 

24.  IIow  do  I  pronounce  ?  Very  well ;  but,  when  reading  or  speaking, 
take  a  little  more  care  with  the  z. 

25.  Please  to  pronounce  the  name  of  that  letter  again  (to  return  to 
pronounce)  ?    With  the  greatest  pleasure ;  it  is  called  z. 

26.  What  other  letter  (letra)  is  pronounced  like  (the)  z?  C,  when  it 
comes  (finds  itself)  before  an  e  or  an  ^. 


178 


LESSON     XXXVII, 


LESSON    XXXVII. 


To  go,  or  come  uj),  to  ascend. 
To  attend. 


Subir. 
Atender. 

INDICATIVE — Present. 
Atiendo,  atlendes,  atiende,  aten-  j      I  attend,  && 
demos,  atendeis,  atienden.  I 

IMPERATIVE. 

Atiende  tti,  atienda  %\,   atenda-        Attend,  &c. 
mos   nosotros,    atended   voso- 
tros,  atiendan  ellos. 

SUBJUNCTIVE — Prcsen  t. 
Atienda,  atiendas,  atienda,  aten-  I      I  may,  or  can,  attend,  &c. 
damos,  atendais,  atiendan,  I 

Verds  conjugated  like  atender. 


Ascender. 

To  ascend,  to  mount. 

Descender. 

To  descend. 

Defender. 

To  defend. 

Entender. 

To  understand. 

Encender. 

To  liglit,  to  kindle. 

Perder. 

To  lose. 

Alegrarse. 

To  be  glad,  to  rejoice. 

Charlar. 

To  prattle,  to  chat. 

Ilallar. 

To  find. 

Uegar. 

To  arrive. 

Enviar. 

To  send.        *" 

Preparar. 

To  prepare. 

CONJU^ 

CTI0X3. 

Con  tal  quo. 

On    condition    that  ; 
(that). 

l^rovided 

Puesto  que. 

Since,   inasmuch  as  ; 
that. 

supposing 

Dado  caso  que. 

In  case. 

Hasta, 

Until,  till. 

Ann  cuanfhK* 

Even,  although. 

Por  tanto. 

Therefore. 

Por  cuanto. 

Seeing  that,  for. 

A  menos  do.    ) 
A  monos  que.  f 

Unless. 

LESSON     XXXVII. 


179 


Tambien. 

Also,  too. 

Aderaas. 

Moreover,  besides. 

Ya. 

Whether,  either. 

Tampoco. 

Neither. 

Ojalii. 

Steamer. 

Would  to  God,  God  grant. 

Vapor. 

Altura.               Ileiglit. 

Globo. 

Balloon. 

Friolera.             Trifle. 

Kesfriado. 

Cold. 

Estada,  perma-  St-ay,    pcrma- 
ncncia.             ,  nence. 

COMPOSITION.     '    ' 

Desco  quo  esto  cstudiando  su  leccion. 

Creo  que  la  esta  aftudiando. 

(,  Piensa  V.  que  tiene  razon  ? 

No  pienso  que  la  tenga. 

No  lo  creerd  aunque  me  lo  digau  mil. 

Lo  creo  aunque  el  lo  niega. 

Dudo  que  venga  hoy. 

Dudo  que  haya  venido. 

Dado  caso  que  V.  no  me  cncucnlre  en 

casa,  espereme  V.  hasta  que  venga. 
Asi  lo  hard  con  tal  que  V.  me  prometa 

volver  pronto. 

Yolvero  tan  pronto  como  pueda. 
Tcmo  que  no  haya  recibido  mi  carta, 
j  Ojali  no  la  reciba  !  pcro  yo  tcmo  que 

la  recibira. 
A  menos  que  V.  venga  primcro  b.  ver- 

me,  yo  no  ire  4  verlo  a  V. 
Puesto  que  61  haya  venido,  <,  le  hablara 

'v.? 

Aimque  haya  venido  no  le  hablard  an- 
tes que  cl  me  hable. 


I  wish  that  he  may  be  studying  his 

lesson. 
I  think  he  is  studying  it. 
Do  you  think  he  is  right  ? 
I  do  not  think  he  is. 
I  will  not  believe  it  though  a  thousand 

tell  it  to  me. 
I  believe  it,  although  he  denies  it. 
I  doubt  whether  he  will  come  to-day. 
I  doubt  his  having  come. 
In  case  you  should  not  find  mc  at  home, 

wait  for  me  till  I  come. 
I  will  do  so,  on  condition   that  you 

promise  mc  to  come  back  sooii  (or 

quickly). 
I  shall  return  as  soon  as  I  can. 
I  fear  he  has  not  received  my  letter. 
God  grant  that  he  may  not  receive  it ! 

but  I  fear  he  will  (receive  it). 
Unless  you  come  first  to  see  me,  I  will 

not  go  to  see  you. 
Supposing  that  he  has  come,  will  you 

speak  to  him  ? 
iUthough  he  may  have  come  I  will  not 

speak  to  him  before  he  speaks  to  me. 


EXPLANATION. 


179.  Atendee,  to  attend,  and  all  the  verbs  conjugated  like 
it,  take  an  i  before  the  last  e  of  the  radical  letters,  in  the  same 
tenses  and  persons  as  the  verb  acertar,  and  the  same  tense  in 
which  acostar  and  mover  change  the  o  into  ue ;  /.  c,  in  the  first, 


180  LESSON     XXXVIl. 

second  and  tliiid  persons  singular,  and  third  plural  of  tho 
present  indicative,  the  present  subjunctive,  and  the  imperative. 
{/See^  at  page  394,  this  verb  and  those  conjugated  like  it.) 

180.  Subjunctive  Mood. — Unlike  the  indicative,  this  mood 
cannot  of  itself  express  an  action  or  mode  of  being  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  form  complete  sense ;  but  its  signification  is  de- 
termined by  another  verb,  to  which  it  is  subordinate,  as  its 
name  indicates,*  and  by  which  it  is  governed,  usually  with  the 
help  of  a  conjunction,  such  as  que,  aunqite,  or  a  conjunctive  ex- 
pression, sucli  as  a  Jin  de  que,  con  tal  que,  &c. 

As  none  of  the  moods  of  the  English  verb  correspond  ex- 
actly to  the  Spanish  subjunctive;  and  as  the  tenses  of  the 
latter  are  often  employed  to  express,  in  the  Castilian  language, 
ideas  which,  in  English,  are  conveyed  by  those  of  the  indica- 
tive or  the  potential,  and,  not  unfrequently,  by  the  infinitive, 
learners  experience  much  difficulty  in  determining  when  the 
subjunctive  is  to  be  used.  Were  we  to  give  all  the  rules  neces- 
sary for  the  correct  application  of  this  mood,  a  whole  volume 
might  be  filled  ;  we  shall,  however,  give  here  those  most  likely 
to  guide  the  student  in  all  ordinaiy  cases. 

181.  The  subordinate  verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive  when 
the  leading  verb  means  admiration,  icish,  will,  desire,  consent, 
prohibition,  hinderance,  necessity,  command,  doubt,  regret,  jog, 
usefulness,  contentm.ent,  hope,  fear,  surprise,  ignorance,  pjrefer- 
ence,  negation,  permission,  sorroio,  &c. 

The  subjunctive  mood  is  here  required  because  we  are  not 
positive  that  what  we  wish,  command,  &c.,  will  be  accom- 
plished ;  but  the  same  verb  which  governs  the  subordinate  one 
in  any  of  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  when  the  accomplisli- 
ment  of  the  action  is  doubtful,  governs  it  in  any  of  those  of 
the  indicative  when  the  action  is  regarded  as  certain  to  take 
place  ;  as, 

Dcselo  T.  a  los  que )         ,      ,  Give   it  to   those  who   (may)  have 

)■  Doubtful.  ^     ^' 


hayan  venido. 

Deselo  V.  a  los  cuatro  ) 

J  .  J  \  Certain. 

que  nan  vemdo.        ) 


come. 

Give  it  to  the  four  who  have  (or  arc) 
come. 


In  the  fii-st  example,  the  verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive,  be- 

*  Subjunctive,  something  joined,  in,  a  subordinate  manner,  to  what  has  already  been  said. 


LESSON     XXXVII.  181 

cause  the  speaker  is  not  positive  how  many  have  come,  or 
whether  any  have  as  yet  come.  In  the  second,  the  indicative 
is  employed,  because  the  speaker  is  certain  of  the  arrival  of  the 
persons  alluded  to,  and  also  of  their  number. 

182.  There  are  in  Spanish  certain  conjunctions  which  re- 
quire the  subjunctive  mood,  after  them,  on  account  of  the  in- 
detinite  and  uncertain  meaning  which  they  commonly  have. 
Some  of  them,  however,  it  will  be  seen,  occasionally  occur  with 
a  positive  signification,  and  may,  in  that  case,  be  used  with  the 
indicative  after  them;  as, 


No  lo  creere  aunque  me  | 

lodiganmil.  \CorUingent. 

Lo  creo  aunque  cl  me ) 
lonieKa.  \  Certain. 


I  will  not  believe  it  though  a  thou- 
sand tell  it  to  me.  f 

I  believe  it,  although  he  denies  it  (to 
me). 

183.  Finally,  there  are  other  parts  of  speech,  and  even 
whole  phrases,  which,  on  account  of  their  indeterminate  and 
doubtful,  or  contingent,  meaning,  require  the  subjunctive  after 
them, 

184.  The  present  tense  of  the  subjunctive  marks  a 
contingent  action  as  going  on  at  the  present  moment,  or  to  take 
place  at  some  future  time ;  as, 

Dudo  que  vcnga.  |      I  doubt  whether  he  will  come. 

N.  B. — Another  use  of  this  tense  has  been  already  noticed 
when  treating  of  the  imperative.     (See  Lesson  XXXV.) 

.185.  The  perfect  tense  expresses  a  doubtful  or  contin- 
gent action  or  event,  as  having  been  completed  some  time  past, 
or  that  will  have  taken  place  before  the  completion  of  another 
future  action  or  event ;  as, 

I  doubt  whether  he  has  come. 


Dudo  que  haya  vcnido. 
Yo  le  dare  su  libro  cuando  el  me 
haya  dado  cl  mio. 


I  shall  give  him  his  book  when  he 
will  have  given  me  mine. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Espera  Y.  que  lleguo  lioy  el  vapor  de  Europa?  Creo  que  ha  Ile- 
gado  csta  mafiana. 

2.  Yo  dudo  que  haya  llegado  todavia.  i  Quiere  V.  cnviar  su  criado 
a  preguntar  si  ha  llegado  el  vapor  ?  Con  mucho  gusto,  porque  yo  tam- 
bien  dcseo  tener  noticias  do  Europa. 

3.  I  Ci-ee  V.  que  llegani  uu  dia  en  que  podamos  ir  a  Europa  en  globos 


182  LESSON     XXXVII. 

acreostdticos  ?  Macho  mo  alegraro  que  Uegue  ese  dia,  pcro  creo  que  no 
lo  verdmos  nosotros,  porque  es  mny  dificil,  y  quiza  imposible,  el  hallar  la 
direceion  de  los  globos. 

4.  ^Suben  muy  alto  los  globos?  !N'o  creo  que  suban  a  mas  de  dos  6 
tres  mil  pi6s,  pero  si  se  quiere  pueden.  subir  hasta  la  altura  de  quince  6 
diez  J  seis  mU  pi6s. 

5.  Dado  caso  que  Uegue  hoy  el  vapor;  ^espera  V.  a  su  amigo?  Por 
supuesto  que  si,  puesto  que  me  escribe  que  Uegara  en  este  mismo  vapor. 

6.  Ojala  llegue,  pero  temo  mncho  que  haya  tornado  otro  vapor  y  que 
no  llegue  hasta  la  semana  proxima. 

7.  I  Duda  V.  que  haya  estudiado  su  Icccion  ?  Dudo  que  la  haya  estu- 
diado,  porque  es  muy  holgazan. 

8.  A  m6no3  que  V.  estudie  bien  las  lecciones  y  haga  con  mucho  cai- 
dado  los  ejercicios  de  la  gramdtica,  no  aprendera  V.  el  espaflol. 

9.  Si,  pero  yo  creia  que  se  podia  aprender  una  lengua  con  la  practica 
solamente. — Asi  es ;  pero  cntonces  se  necesita  practicar  todos  los  dias 
con  quien  la  hable  muy  bien. 

10.  ^En  cuanto  tieinpo  picnsa  V.  que  hablar6  yo  el  espaCol?  V.  lo 
hablara  cuando  sepa  bien  todas  las  lecciones  de  la  gramatica,  y  haya 
practicado  y  escrito  los  ejercicios. 

11.  Y  despues  que  haya  aprendido  toda  la  gramatica,  practicado,  y 
escrito  los  ejercicios,  ^hablare  perfcctamente  el  espaflol?  No,  sefior; 
pero  hablarA,  V.  bastante  correctamente  para  llevar  una  conversacion,  es- 
cribir  una  correspondencia,  y  poder  hacer  negocios  en  csta  lengua. 

12.  Yo  pensaba  que  el  espaflol  era  una  lengua  muy  facil. — Verdadera- 
mente  lo  es  para  aprender  lo  que  acabo  de  decirle  a  V. ;  pero  para  ha- 
blarlo  perfcctamente  como  Y.  quiere,  todas  las  lenguas  son  dificiles. 

13.  Y  si  Y.  no  lo  cree,  hagame  el  favor  de  decirme  si  habla  Y.  su  pro- 
pia  lengua  y  la  escribe  perfectamente.— Yo  conlieso  que  todavia  tengo 
algo  que  aprender  en  el  ingles. 

14.  Creame  Y.,  amigo  mio,  el  estudio  de  una  lengua  no  es  una  friolfera. 
— Creo  que  tiene  Y.  mucha  razon ;  pero  hay  muchos  que  quieren  aprenderlo 
todo  y  muy  pocos  que  quieran  cstudiar. 

15.  I  Me  promote  Y.  venir  a  verme  cuando  venga  a  la  ciudad  ?  Aun- 
que  venga  a  la  ciudad  no  podr6  venir  d  ver  d  Y.  a  menos  que  acabo  tem- 
prano  mis  negocios. 

16.  ^Sabe  Y.  hacer  frases  (sentences)  en  espaflol  con  todos  los  tiempos 
del  modo  indicativo?  Si,  sefior,  y  tarabien  con  el  imperativo,  el  presente 
y  el  perfecto  de  subjuntivo. 

17.  Muy  bien,  entonces  hagame  Y.  ocho  frases  con  los  echo  tiempos 
de  indicativo,  una  con  el  imperativo  y  dos  con  el  presente  y  perfecto  de 
subjuntivo  de  cualquiera  verbo. 


LESSOK     XXXVII.  183 

18.  gEstd  V.  malo  ?  ^  Ila  estado  V.  hoy  en  el  cscritorio  ?  ^Estaba  V. 
en  su  casa  cuando  su  ainigo  fue  a  veiie  ?  j  Habia  V.  estado  en  el  teatro 
iintcs  de  ir  al  baile  ?  i  Estuvo  V.  ayer  en  la  ciudad  ?  i  Qu6  bizo  V.  asi 
que  bubo  estado  algun  tiempo  en  el  hotel  ?  i  Estara  V.  en  casa  maflana 
todo  cl  dia  ?  ^  Habra  cscrito  V.  su  cjercicio  antes  de  las  cuatro  ?  Estu- 
dia  tus  lecciones  y  escribe  los  ejercicios.  No  pierdas  el  tiempo.  ^Duda 
V.  que  yo  scpa  mi  leccion  ?     ^  Duda  V.  que  yo  la  haya  estudiado  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  John,  there  is  some  one  at  the  door ;  go  and  see  who  it  is.   Yes,  sir. 

2.  Is  Mr.  Retortillo  in  ?  Yes,  sir ;  who  shaU  I  say  wishes  to  see  him? 
Tell  him  that  Mr.  Perez  wishes  to  speak  to  him  a  moment. 

3.  Mr.  Perez  wishes  to  see  you  a  moment,  sir.    Let  {que)  him  come  up. 

4.  Oh!  I  am  so  glad  to  see  you!  How  are  you?  how  have  you 
been  ?  when  did  you  return  ? — I  arrived  by  the  steamer  Napoleon  III.^ 
on  Wednesday  last. 

5.  Did  you  receive  all  the  letters  I  wrote  you  during  (durante)  my 
absence  ?     I  received  one  in  March,  dated  from  Eome. 

6.  How  did  you  spend  the  time  ?  did  you  pass  through  Spain,  as  you 
had  intended  ?  No ;  whdo  I  was  still  in  Paris,  and  preparing  to  set  out 
for  Madrid,  I  learned  that  ray  brother  was  very  ill  in  Florence. 

7.  Indeed!  I  am  very  sorry  to  hear  that.  "Wliat  was  the  matter 
with  him  Cwhat  had  he)  ?  A  heavy  (strong)  cold,  that  he  had  caught  on 
his  way  from  Turin  to  Florence. 

8.  lie  had  not,  I  believe,  enjoyed  very  good  health  for  a  long  time  be- 
fore leaving  home  ?  No,  he  has  always  been  sickly ;  but  principally  for 
about  a  year  before  his  voyage  to  Europe,  he  had  colds  almost  every 
month,  and  I  may  say  that  he  was  never  without  headaches,  day  or 
night.  '■ 

9.  Had  he  an  Italian  physician  to  attend  him  ? .  No,  Dr.  Perez,  his 
family  physician,  who  was  travelling  through  Italy  that  same  winter,  just 
arrived  at  Florence  the  same  day  as  my  brother,  and,  hearing  of  his  ill- 
ness, went  at  once  (inmediatamente)  to  see  him. 

10.  How  long  was  he  ill  ?    Nearly  tln-ee  weeks. 

11.  How  ?  Are  you  going  away  so  soon  ?  Sit  down  and  let  us  chat 
for  half  an  hour  about  your  family.  Thank  you ;  I  cannot  stay  any 
longer  now,  but  I  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing  you  again  to-morrow. 

12.  Where  arc  your  brothers?  Tliey  ai'e  gone  to  see  tlie  balloon  that 
is  to  go  up  this  afternoon. 

13.  Indeed  ?  I  thought  the  balloon  was  not  to  go  up  until  Saturday. 
It  was  not  to  have  gone  up  before  Saturday ;  but,  on  account  of  the  fine 
weather,  it  is  to  go  up  this  afternoon. 


184  LESSON      XXXVIII. 

14.  Will  many  persons  go  up  in  it  ?  Very  few,  I  think ;  people  in 
general  do  not  like  to  go  to  such  a  height. 

15.  Do  you  understand  all  that  is  said  in  Spanish  ?  I  understand  more 
and  more  every  day ;  hut  there  are  still  many  words  and  constructions 
that  I  do  not  know. 

16.  How  long  do  you  think  it  will  be  before  I  can  understand  all,  and 
speak  like  a  native  ?  That  is  a  hard  question  to  answer ;  provided  you 
study  with  attention,  read  a  great  deal,  and  practice  with  Spaniards,  you 
will  soon  understand  and  speak  with  ease ;  but  it  is  diiScult  for  a  foreigner 
to  speak  any  language  exactly  like  a  native. 

17.  But  do  you  beUeve  it  to  be  impossible  ?  No,  I  do  not  say  it  is  im- 
possible, but  it  is  very  difficult ;  and,  besides,  I  do  not  thmk  it  is  neces- 
sary. All  that  is  required  (wanted)  is  correctness,  and  to  be  able  to  con- 
verse with  ease. 

18.  Has  John's  servant  lighted  the  fire  ?  Not  yet ;  John  does  not  wish 
it  to  be  lighted  until  he  returns. 

19.  "Well,  Charles,  have  you  found  out*  the  meaning  of  the  word  you 
asked  me  for  yesterday  ?  No,  sir ;  I  have  searched  for  it  in  all  the  dic- 
tionaries, and  it  is  not  to  be  found  in  any  of  them. 

20.  "Why  do  you  not  ask  your  teacher  ?  he  can  tell  you  at  once.  Tes, 
I  know  that  very  well ;  but  I  do  not  like  to  ask  him  so  many  questions : 
every  day  he  comes  I  have  a  new  one  to  ask  him. 

21.  Do  not  stop  at  trifles  of  that  kind;  your  teacher  is  very  glad  to  be 
able  to  answer  all  questions,  knowing  that  by  that  means  (medio)  you 
will  leara  better  and  more  quickly. 

22.  I  am  very  glad  to  see  you  defend  him,  for  Alexander  said  he  was 
not  fond  of  answering  questions,  and  did  not  like  inquisitive  persons. — 
Neither  he  does ;  but  an  inquisitive  person  is  one  thing,  and  a  person 
who  asks  questions  in  order  to  g£un  knowledge  is  another. 


LESSON.  XXXYIII. 

Sentir.     {LooTc  for  the  conjugation  I      To  feel,  to  be  sorry  for. 
of  this  verb  at  p.  395).  I 

Verbs  conjugated  lil-e  sexttr. 

Arrepentirse.  To  repent. 

Consentir.  To  consent. 

Preferir.  To  prefer. 

*  English  words  italiciaed  not  to  be  translated. 


LESSON     XXXVIII 


185 


Asegiirar, 

To  secure,  tc 

insure,  to  assure. 

Animar. 

To  animate, 
duce. 

to  encourage,  to  in- 

Desanimar. 

To  dishearten,  to  discourage. 

Ayudar. 

To  aid,  to  help. 

Eafermar. 

To  fall   (or 
sick. 

get)  sick,  to  make 

Exigir. 

To  exact,  to 

require. 

Quedar. 

To  remain. 

Perfecciouar. 

To  perfect,  to  finish. 

TJsar. 

To  use,  to  wear. 

Generalmente 

Generally. 

De  memoria. 

By  heart. 

Ambos. 

Both. 

De  continue. 

Continually. 

Perezoso. 

Lazy. 

Examen. 

Examination. 

Helena. 

EUen. 

Oficio. 

Trade,  office. 

Persona. 

Person. 

Alberto. 

Albert. 

Lectura. 

Reading,  lecture. 

Norte. 

North. 

Profesion. 

Profession. 

Sur,  or  sud. 

South. 

Escuela. 

School. 

Este,  oriente. 

East. 

Muerte. 

Death. 

Oeste,         ) 
Occidente.  ) 

West. 

Vida. 

Life. 

Promesa. 

Promise. 

Lint  of  the  present  partlcijdcs  or  verl 

al  norms  and  adjectives  formed  from 

the  verls  alrea 

iy  introduced. 

Vivnente. 

Living  being. 

Paseante. 

Walker,     passer- 

Estudiante. 

Student. 

by,  promenader. 

Escribiente. 

A  lawyer's  clerk. 

Creyente. 

Behever. 

a  writer  in  a 

Conveniente. 

Convenient,  suita- 

commercial 

ble. 

house. 

Importante. 

Important. 

Residente. 

Eesident. 

Tratante. 

Dealer. 

Tocante  (en  6r- 

Concerning. 

Cortante. 

Sharp,  edged. 

den  a). 

Gobernante. 

Governing. 

Reinante. 

Reigning. 

Contante. 

Ready. 

Saliento. 

Salient. 

Doliente. 

Sad,  afflicted, 

Aniantc, 

Lover. 

mournful. 

Practicante. 

Practitioner. 

Priiicipiantc. 

Beginner. 

186 


LESSOX     XXXVIII. 


COMPOSITIO>f. 


Tocante  h  lo  que  V.  me  dijo  el  otro  dia, 
deseo  que  no  se  hable  mas  de  ello. 

Entraron  cantando. 

Le  encontraron  leyendo. 

6  Que  esta  V.  haciendo  ? 

Estoy  leyendo. 

Vengo  de  comer. 

Trabaja  sin  descansar. 

El   trabajar   es    bueno    para    muchas 

cosas. 
El  descansar   despues   de  trabajar  es 

necesario. 
La  vimos  ballar. 

Emanuel  es  un  estudiante  industrioso. 
i  Es  V.  residente  de  los  Estados  Unidos  ? 
El  es  buen  creyente. 


Concerning  what  you  told  me  the  other 
day,  I  wish  no  more  to  be  said 
about  it. 

They  came  in  sin^g. 

They  found  him  reading. 

What  are  you  doing  ? 

I  am  reading. 

I  am  coming  from  dinner. 

He  labors  without  resting. 

Work  is  good  for  many  things. 

Rest  after  labor  is  necessary. 

We  saw  her  dancing. 
Emanuel  is  an  industrious  student 
Are  you  a  resident  of  the  United  States  ? 
He  is  a  good  believer. 


EXPLANATION. 

186.  Present  Participles. — Many  Spanish  A'erbs  have, 
besides  the  past  or  passive  participle,  another  called  the  present 
or  active  participle.  Those  formed  from  verbs  of  the  first  con- 
jugation end  in  ante;  as,  amante,  loving,  lover;  and  those 
formed  from  the  second  and  third  end  in  iente  or  ente ;  as,  asis- 
tente,  assistant,  obediente,  obedient. 

Participles  of  this  kind  cannot  be  formed  from  all  verbs, 
and  indeed  those  already  in  existence  can  only  be  regarded  as 
mere  verbal  nouns  or  adjectives,  inasmuch  as,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  a  very  limited  number  to  be  found  in  use,  such  as  to- 
cante, they  do  not  follow  the  regimen  of  the  verbs  from  which 
they  are  derived. 

187.  Geruxds. — Instead  of  the  present  participle,  as  a  part 
of  the  verb,  the  gerund  is  now  employed,  and  it  corresponds, 
therefore,  exactly  to  the  English  progressive  form  in  inff ;  as, 

Entraron  cantando.  I      They  carau  in  sin^ng. 

Le  encontraron  leyendo.  I       They  found  him  reading. 


188.  The  verb  estar,  as  has  already  been  mentioned,  can 


LESSON     XXXVIII.  187 

be  used  with  the  gerund  iu  Spanish,  .is  in  English  the  verb  to 
he,  Avith  the  present  particij)le ;  as, 

Yo  estoy  Ifyendo.  I       I  am  reading. 

EIlos  estan  escribiendo.  \      They  are  writing. 

189.  The  HTFiNiTiVE  is  used  in  Spanish  when  in  English 
the  present  participle,  preceded  by  a  preposition,  is  used ;  as, 

Se  fue  sin  verle.  I      He  went  away  without  seeing  him. 

Trabaja  sin  descansar.  \      He  labors  without  resting. 

190.  The  ixFixinvE  is  also  used  as  a  verbal  noun  or  pres- 
ent participle,  in  which  case  it  takes  the  masculine  definite 
article  before  it ;  as, 


El  irabajar  es  bueno  para  la  salud. 
El  descansar   despues    dc    trabajar 
mucho  es  necesario. 


Work  is  good  for  the  health. 
Rest  is  necessary  after  much  work. 


191.  The  iKFixiTiVE  is  often  rendered  in  English  by  the 
present  participle,  when  in  Spanish  it  is  governed  by  another 
verb;  as. 

La  vimos  bailor.  |      We  saw  her  dancing. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jLe  gusta  a  Y.  mas  leer  que  escribir  ?  Me  gustan  ambas  cosas, 
pero  creo  que  leyendo  se  aprende  mas  que  escribiendo. 

2.  ^Es  estudioso  ese  muchacho?  No,  sefior,  pero  hoy  estudia  mucho 
porque  maliana  tienen  exiimenes  en  su  escuela. 

3.  I  Piensa  V.  que  sea  conveniente  ese  negocio  ?  Yo  pienso  que  lo  es, 
pero  quizd  no  lo  sea. 

4.  ^  Qu6  esta  V.  haciendo  ?    Estoy  estudiando  mi  Icccion  de  espafiol. 

5.  g  Sintio  Helena  mucho  la  muerte  de  su  amiga  ?  La  sintio  tanto  que 
cnfcrm6. 

G.  ^Como  se  siente  ahora?  Esta  un  poco  mejor. — Me  alegro  que  este 
mejor,  porque  es  muy  buena  muchacba. 

7.  i  Puede  V.  prestarme  trescientos  pesos  ?  Puedo  prestarselos  a  V., 
pero  no  me  gusta  el  prestar  dinero  (to  lend). 

8.  I  Como  se  aprende  &  hablar  el  espaflol  ?  Hablando  se  aprende  a 
hablar;  del  raismo  modo  que  bailando  se  aprende  a  bailar  y  haciendo 
zapatos  se  aprende  a  zapatero. 

9.  ^Se  arrepintio  aqucl  hombre  de  su  mala  nccion  ?  No  lo  creo  por- 
que es  un  picai'o  que  vive  de  engafiar. 

10.  iQne  profcsion  u  oficio  tieue?     No  ticne  ni  oficio,  ni  profesion 
ninguna,  es  un  paseantc. 


It: 


188  LESSON     XXXVIII. 

11.  iDc  domic  vieno  V.  ?     Vengo  de  coiner. 

12.  |De  doude  viene  el  viento?  Viene  del  Sur,  pero  csta  mafiana 
venia  del  Este. 

Id.  I Lluove  en  Nueva  York  cuando  estd  el  viento  al  Este  ?  No,  seflor, 
generalmente  Uueve  cuando  el  viento  esta  al  Ooste. 

14.  Alberto,  animate,  s6  estudioso  y  aprende  de  memoria  la  leccion 
para  mafiana.    Papa,  hace  mucho  calor  j  estoj  cansado. 

15.  Bien,  no  te  desanimes,  descansa  un  poco  y  vuelve  a  trabajar  des- 
pues. — V.  quiere  que  yo  est^  trabajando  continuamente. 

IG.  No,  querido,  no  quiero  que  trabajes  demasiado;  pero  acu6rdate  quo 
en  este  mundo  no  se  logra  nada  sin  trabajar. — Bien,  papjx,  yo  s6  quo  V. 
tiene  siempre  razon,  descansar6  un  poco  ahora  y  despues  acabar6  de  esta- 
diar  mi  leccion. 

17.  jSe  qued6  mucho  tiempo  sa  amigo  de  V.  en  el  concierto  ?  Ambos 
nos  quedamos  hasta  que  se  acabo. 

18.  ^  Tuvicron  Vds.  ayer  examenes  en  la  escuela  ?  Ayer  tuvimos  exa- 
men  de  graraatica,  antes  de  ayer  de  Mstoria,  hoy  de  espafiol  y  mafiana 
lo  tendrumos  de  aritm6tica. 

19.  Manuel,  levantate  y  vete  a  la  escuela.  ^No  sabes  qu6  hora  es? 
No,  sefior,  yo  pensaba  que  era  temprano. 

20.  J  C6mo,  temprano  ?  Ya  son  las  siete  y  media  y  todavia  tienes  que 
lavarte  y  almorzar ;  [  vamos,  vamos,  perezoso,  arriba ! — Alia  voy  papa, 
alia  voy  ;  y  excuseme  V.,  no  sabia  que  era  tan  tarde. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Have  you  heard  any  more  concerning  the  matter  we  "were  speak- 
ing of  the  other  day?  Nothing  further;  but  I  expect  by  to-morrow  to 
be  able  to  tell  you  something  more. 

2.  When  does  your  friend  intend  setting  out*  on  his  travel  to  the 
South  ?  Probably  by  the  latter  end  (ullimos)  of  November,  or  beginning 
of  December. 

3.  Is  he  to  belong  absent  ?  lie  knows  nothing  as  yet  of  how  long 
ho  may  be  absent  (ausente). 

4.  Concerning  books  to  be  read  in  order  to  perfect  one's  self  in  a 
language,  what  kind  do  you  think  the  best  ?  There  is  little  dilferenco 
between  books  to  be  used  for  that  purpose  {proposito). 

5.  Are  there  not  some  better  than  all  the  others?  Not  that  I  knovr 
of:  each  student  will  prefer  those  that  treat  of  the  subject  ho  is 
fondest  of. 

G.  But  beginners  cannot  do  so,  for  there  are  many  books  too  difficult 
for  them ;  is  it  not  so  ?  Certainly ;  I  thought  it  needless  to  say  that 
beginners  must  search  for  books  easy  to  bo  read. 

*  Emprender. 


LESSOK     XXXVIII.  189 

7.  It  seems  to  me  tliat  newspaper  reading  is  very  useful ;  what  do 
you  thiuk  ?  Yes,  and  especially  for  those  who  take  pleasure  in  studying 
the  politics  of  the  d;iy. 

8.  Do  you  think  I  shall  be  able  to  understand  Cervantes'  great  work 
after  I  have  gone  through  {recorrer)  the  whole  of  the  grammaj  ?  No, 
sir,  you  will  not ;  you  will  have  to  read  and  study  a  great  deal  before 
you  will  be  able  to  understand  thoroughly  the  writings  of  any  of  the 
Spanish  classic  authors. 

9.  Who  is  that  young  man  we  met  when  walking,  and  to  whom  you 
spoke  ?    lie  is  a  lawyer's  clerk. 

10.  Does  he  make  much  money  at  that  occupation?  I  cannot  tell  you ; 
but  he  is  undoubtedly  a  man  of  talent  {talento). 

11.  Are  the  children  gone  to  school  yet,  Louisa?  All  but  Henry, 
who  wishes  not  to  go  to-day,  if  you  will  consent  to  it. 

12.  I  am  afraid  he  is  a  very  lazy  boy;  he  is  continually  asking  not  to 
bo  sent  to  school. 

13.  How  can  he  expect  to  learn  if  he  neither  goes  to  school  nor  studies 
at  home  ?  He  wants  to  study  at  home  ;  he  says  that  if  you  consent  to 
his  staying  at  home,  he  wiU  study  anything  you  please. 

14.  Well,  I  shall  give  him  something  to  learn  by  heart,  and  we  shall 
see  what  he  does. — Very  well ;  but  do  not  give  him  too  much  to  do  at 
the  beginning,  for  he  is  easily  disheartened. 

15.  I  never  requu'e  of  any  one  more  than  he  is  able  to  do. — That  is 
perfectly  right. 

16.  Tell  Charles  and  Albert  that  I  want  to  see  them,  and  that  I  have 
two  books  for  them. — I  need  not  go  to  tell  them ;  here  they  are  coming. 

17.  Come  here,  boys. — Well,  papa,  what  do  you  want  us  for? 

18.  To  give  you  these  two  books:  one  for  each.— How  beautiful! 
— Yes,  that  is  true;  but  they  are  something  more  than  beautiful:  they 
are  good. 

19.  What  do  they  treat  of?  This  one  treats  of  man  in  life  and  of  aU 
li\"ing  beings ;  and  that  one  of  man's  state  after  death'. 

20.  Now,  I  wish  you  to  read  a  chapter  each  one  in  his  book  every 
day,  after  your  lessons  ;  and  then  you  may  go  out  and  walk  for  an  hour. 
— Tliank  yon,  sir ;  and  we  can  assure  you  that  we  shall  do  so  with  the 
greatest  pleasure. 

21.  Tell  me,  ^Vlbert,  where  did  you  buy  that  hat  ?  That  is  one  of  those 
hats  that  were  worn  three  summers  ago.  I  know  that  very  well,  for  I 
bought  it  at  the  time  they  were  being  worn,  and  I  have  worn  it  ever 
since. 

22.  Tliis  author  seems  to  have  travelled  a  great  deal ;  have  you  read 
any  of  his  travels?     Yes,  and  I  like  them  exceedingly  {miicliidmo). 


190 


LESSON     XXXIX, 


23.  I  am  going  to  read  them,  too,  as  soon  as  I  liave  time.  In  what 
countries  did  he  travel  principally?  He  has  been  in  nearly  every  coun- 
try in  tlie  world,  East,  West,  North  and  South. 

24.  "What  is  the  trade  or  profession  of  that  person,  just  gone  out  ?  He 
is  a  physician ;  he  has  been  in  this  city  for  noio  nearly  five  years.  lie  is 
an  excellent  practitioner. 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


Pedir.    {LooTc  for  the  conjugation  I  To  petition,  to  ask  for. 
of  this  verb  at  p.  Z^Q.)  I 

Verbs  conjugated  like  pedir. 


Competir. 

Elcjir. 

Medir. 

Renir. 

Seguir. 

Eendir. 

Eepetir. 
Servir. 
Tefiir. 
Vestm 

Dlvertirse. 

Oasarse. 

Besar. 

Enamorarse. 

Celebrar. 

Cenar. 

Presentar. 


Reconocer. 

Estiraar. 
Agradecer. 

En  hora  buena. 
Asi  asi. 


To  contend,  to  compete. 

To  elect,  to  choose. 

To  measure. 

To  quarrel,  to  scold. 

To  follow. 

To  render ;  to  exhaust,  to  do  out, 

to  wear  out. 
To  repeat. 
To  serve. 
To  dye. 
To  dress. 


To  amuse  one's  self. 

To  marry ;  to  got  (or  be)  married. 

To  kiss. 

To  fall  in  love. 

To  celebrate,  to  praise,  to  be  glad. 

To  sup. 

To  present,  to  introduce  one  per- 
son to  the  acquaintance  of 
another. 

To  recognize,  to  examine  closely. 

To  estimate,  to  value,  to  esteem. 

To  thank,  to  bo  thankful,  to  be 
obliged. 

It  is  well,  well  and  good. 
So  so. 


LESSON     XXXIX, 


191 


Tal  cual. 
Hasta  la  vista. 
Hasta  lucgo. 
Sin  novedad. 
Medianamcnte. 


Middling,  so  so. 

Till  I  see  you  again. 

Good-bye  for  a  while. 

Well,  in  a  good  state  of  health. 

Middling. 


jAh!  (int.) 

Ah! 

jOh!  (int.) 

Oh! 

Respetable. 

Eespectable. 

Delicado. 

Delicate,  weak. 

Infinite. 

Infinite. 

Junto. 

Near,  close  to,  together. 

Discreto.     Encantador. 

Discreet.     Charming. 

Favor. 

Beso. 

Scrvidor. 

Pi6. 

Honor. 

Vestido. 

Esposo. 

Asiento. 

Capitulo. 

Sobrino. 


Favor. 
Kiss. 

Servant. 

Foot. 

Honor. 

Dress. 

Husband. 

Seat. 

Chapter. 

Nephew. 


Tertulia. 

Novedad. 

Celebracion. 

Servidora. 

Ocasion. 

Complacencia. 

Bondad. 

Esposa. 
Orden. 
Memorias. 
Enhorabuena. 


Party,  soiree. 
Novelty. 
Celebration.     * 
Servant. 
Occasion. 
Complaisance. 
Goodness,    kind- 
ness. 
Wife. 

Order,  command. 
Regards. 
Congratulation. 


COMPOSITION. 


i  Que  le  pide  a  V.  cse  hombre  ? 

No  me  pide  nada ;  mo  preguuta  quo 

hora  cs. 
Beso  a  V.  la  mano,  caballcra. 


Beso  &  V.  la  suya. 

(,  Como  csta  su  familia  de  V.  ? 

Todos  cstan  bicn,  gracias ;  6  y  la  de  V.  ? 

Asi  asi ;  los  niuos  estan  muy  buenos, 

pero  mi  esposa  no  se  siente  bien. 
A  los  pies  de  V.,  apiiora. 

Beso  k  V.  la  mano,  caballcro. 
A  la  orden  de  V.,  Don  Pedro. 


What  is  that  man  asking  for  ? 

Iff  is  asking  me  for  nothing ;  he  is  ask- 
ing me  what  o'clock  it  is. 

(A  Spanish  expression  of  coicricsi/,  used 
at  meeting  or  parting.  No  equivalent 
in  English.) 

{Reply  to  the  above.) 

How  is  your  fiimily  ? 

All  are  well,  thank  you  ;  and  yours  ? 

So  so ;  the  children  are  very  well,  but 
my  wife  does  not  feel  well. 

{Spanish  expression  of  courtesy,  used  to 
'  ladies.     No  English  equivalent.) 

(Tlie  ladij\  reply  to  the  above.) 

At  your  ser^'ice,  Mr.  Peter. 


192 


LESSOX    XXXIX. 


Vaya  V.  con  Dios,  Don  Juan. 

Buenos  dias,  Dona  Luisa,  ^  como  lo  pasa 

V.  hoy  ? 
Bien,  para  servir  d  V. ;  ,5  y  V.  ? 
Sin  novedad  a.  la  disposicion  de  V. 
SeSor  D.  M.,  tengo  el  honor  de  pre- 

sentarle  al  Sr.  D.  P. 
Caballero,  celebro  la  ocasion  de  conocer 

&  V. 
Tenga  V.  la  bondad  de  darme  cl  cu- 

chillo. 
Con  mucho  gusto. 
Mil  graeias. 

Hagame  V.  el  favor  de  decirmc,  como 

se  llama  esto  en  espauol. 
Sirvase  V.  tomar  asiento. 
Lo  siento  mucho,  pero  no  puedo,  tengo 

que  marcharme. 
Tenga  V.  la  complacencia  de  poncrme 

a  los  pi6s  de  su  esposa  de  V. 


God  be  with  you,  Mr.  John. 

Good  mornuag,  Miss  Louisa,  how  do 

you  do  to-day? 
Well,  thank  you  ;  and  you  ? 
I  am  very  well  too,  thank  you. 
Mr.  M.,  I  have  the  honor  to  introduce 

(or  present)  you  to  Mr.  P. 
I  am  happy  to  make  your  acquaintance, 

sir. 
Have  the  goodness  to  give  me  the  knife. 

With  much  pleasure. 

Thank  you. 

Be  kmd  enough  to  tell  me  what  you  call 
this  in  Spanish. 

Please  to  take  a  seat. 

I  am  very  sorry,  but  I  cannot,  I  must 
be  off. 

Have  the  goodness  to  present  my  re- 
gards to  your  lady  (oj  wife). 


EXPLANATION 

192.  Pedik. — A  paradigm  will  be  found  at  the  end  of  the 

grammar,  showing  the  tenses  and  pei-sons  in  which  this  A'erb 

and  all  those  conjugated  like  it  change  the  e  of  their  root  into  i. 

193.  TuE  USUAL  FOEMS  OF  SALUTATIONS,  among  gentlemen 

in  greeting  each  other,  are  the  following : 


Beso  &  V.  la  mano. 
Servidor  de  V.,  caballero. 
A  la  orden  de  V. 
Yaya  Y.  con  Dios. 
Tenga  Y.  muy  bueuos  dias. 


I  Idss  your  hand. 
Tour  servant,  sir. 
Your  most  obedient. 
Adieu,  or  God  be  with  you. 
Good  day  to  you. 


This  last  expression  is  used  from  the  earliest  part  of  the 
morning  till  two  or  three  hours  after  meridian  ;  from  which 
time  till  dark  is  used, 

Buenas  tardcs.  |      Good  afternoon ; 

and  from  dark  until  tl>c  following  morning,  both  on  meeting 
and  taking  leave, 
Buenas  noches.  ,      |      Good  night. 

All  these  expressions  are  always  used  in  Spanish  in  the 
plural  number. 


LESSOK     XXXIX. 


193 


In  saluting  a  lady,  the  first  expression  most  frequently  made 
use  of  is : 
A  lo3  picd  de  V.,  senora.  |      Madam,  at  your  feet. 

The  lady's  reply  is  : 
Beso  L  V.  la  mauo,  caballero.  |      I  kiss  your  hand,  sir. 

To  inquire  after  another's  health  : 
C6mo  lo  pasa  V.  ?  or  como  esta  V.  ?  |      How  do  you  do  ? 

To  answer : 


Medianamente  bien. 
Pcrfectamentc  bien. 
'  Para  servir  6.  V. 
Muy  bien,  gracias. 
Asl  asi,  or  tal  cual ;  y  "V.,  i  c6mo  lo 

pasa? 
Sin  novedad, 
A  la  disposicion  de  V. 


Middling  well. 

Perfectly  well. 

At  your  service. 

Very  well,  thank  you. 

So  so ;  and  how  do  you  do  ? 

Always  well. 
At  your  seriicc. 


For  introducing  one  person  to  another : 


SeSor  Don  M.,  tengo  el  honor  de  pre- 
Bentarlc  al  Senor  Don  P. 

And  the  reply  is : 
Caballero,  celcbro  la  ocasion  dc  cono- 

ccr  a  v.,  or 
Reconozcame  V.  por    ua   servidor 

suyo. 

For  asking  or  requesting  : 

Tenga  V.  la  bondad  de  darme.   . 
Hagame  V.  el  favor  de  dccirme. 
Sirvase  V.,  or  tenga  V.  la  conipla- 
cencia  de. 

And  for  returning  thanks  : 
Mil  gracias,  or 
Muchfsimas  gracias. 
Se  lo  agradczco  a  V.  inflnito. 


Mr.  M.,  I  have  the  honor  of  intro- 
ducing Mr.  P.  to  you. 


Sir,  I  am  happy  to  make  your  ac- 
quaintance. 
I  am  entirely  at  your  service. 


Have  the  goodness  to  give  me. 
Do  me  the  favor  to  tell  me. 
Have  the  kindness  to. 


A  thousand  thanks. 

Many  thanks. 

I  am  very  much  obliged  to  you. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Sefior  D.  Juan,  ^que  le  pide  d  Y.  mi  muchacho?    No  .me  pide 
nada ;  me  pregunta  qn&  hora  es.  , 

3.  Yo  creia  qnc  le  pedia  A  V.  dinero,  porque  <^1  esta  siempre  pidiendo 
9 


194  LESSON     XXXIX. 

centavos  ii  todo  el  mundo. — Vaya!  nolo  rifia  V. ;  a  todos  los  niiios  les 
gusta  que  les  dea  centavos. — Vcrdad  es,  pero  a,  mi  no  me  gusta  que  los 
mios  los  pidan. 

3.  Digame  V.,  D.  Pedro,  j  quien  es  aquella  senorita  que  esta  sentada 
ea  el  sofa  junto  a  su  esposa  de  V.  ?  Esa  es  una  seQorita  muy  amable, 
hija  del  Seflor  D.  Luis  Martinez,  familia  muj  rcspetable  a  quien  conoci 
hace  muchos  afios. 

4.  I  Quierc  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  presentarme  a  ella  ?  Con  muclio 
gusto;  pero  le  advierto  que  no  se  enamore  de  la  Senorita  Martinez,  por- 
que  esta  para  casarse. 

5.  Pierda  V.  cuidado ;  yo  solo  deseo  conocerla  para  gozar  de  su  dis- 
creta  conversacion. — En  hora  buena  venga  V.  j  lo  prescntare. 

6.  Sefiorita  Martinez,  tengo  el  honor  de  presentar  a  V.  el  Sefior  Don 
Juan  McLeren. — Caballero,  celebro  la  ocasion  de  conocer  a  V. — SeQorita, 
reconozcame  V.  por  su  servidor. 

7.  i  Ah  !  aqui  viene  Don  Alberto  y  su  esposa. — Sirvanse  Vds.  pasar 
adclaiate, 

8.  ;  Oil !  Seflor  Don  Pedro,  me  alegro  mucho  do  encontrar  a  V.  por 
acd.    Mil  gracias,  sefiora,  soy  muy  feliz  en  volver  a  ver  a  Vds. 

9.  A  los  pi6s  de  Y.,  Sefiorita  Martinez. — Beso  a  V.  la  mano,  caballero. 

10.  Dona  Margarita,  ^como  esta  su  familia  do  V.?  Todos  estan  bicn, 
gracias,  ^  y  la  de  V.  ?  Asi  asi ;  los  ninos  estan  muy  buenos,  pero  mi  esposa 
esta  delicada. 

11.  Sirvase  Y.  tomar  asiento,  D.  Alberto. — Lo  siento  mucho,  pero  no 
pnedo ;  he  prometido  a  mi  raadre  volver  pronto  para  ccnar  con  ella. 

12.  Sefloras,  d  los  pies  de  Yds.    Beso  4  Yds.  la  mano  cabaUeros. 

13.  A  la  6rden  de  Y.,  D.  Pedro.     Yaya  Y.  con  Dios,  D.  Juan. 

14.  Tenga  Y.  muy  bucnas  noches,  DonaLuisa,  ^como  lo  pasa  Y.  boy  ? 
Bien,  para  servir  d  Y.,  ^  y  Y.  ?     Sin  novedad,  a  la  disposicion  de  Y, 

15.  Buenas  noches,  D.  Pedro;  hasta  mafiana.  Ilasta  manana,  p6n- 
game  Y.  d  los  pies  de  su  sefiora. 

16.  D6  Y.  memorias  de  mi  parte  d  toda  la  famUia. — De  su  parte  de  Y. 
lo  estiraaran  mucho. 

17.  Adios,  Manuel,  id  donde  vas  tan  de  prisa?  Yoy  d  acompafiar  a 
mi  herraana  al  teatro,  y  desde  alii  iremos  d  la  tcrtulia  del,  Sefior  Marracl. 

18.  Celebrard  que  te  diviertas  mucho.  Yo  tambien  pienso  ir  a  la  ter- 
tulia  del  Sefior  Marraci ;  con  que,  asi  no  te  digo  adios,  ya  nos  verc^mos. — 
Ilasta  la  vista. — Hasta  luego. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Good  morning,  Charles !  Are  you  never  going  to  get  up  ?— Why, 
how  late  is  it? 


LESSON     XXXIX.  195 

2.  It  is  near  nine  o'clock ;  but  it  is  nothing  new  to  see  you  in  bed  at 
that  hour.  Ah  !  you  are  always  making  fun  of  me  for  lying  so  long  in 
the  morning,  and  I  think  I  rise  very  early. 

3.  Up,  then,  and  dress  yourself  as  quickly  as  possible,  I  want  you  to 
come  and  breakfast  with  mc. 

4.  Indeed !  What  good  things  arc  you  going  to  give  me  ?  You  will 
have  a  first-rate  breakfast,  with  exceUent  wine,  followed  by  delicious 
chocolate. 

5.  Tell  me,  my  dear/eZZow :  I  can  never  remember  the  name  of  that 
young  lady  that  I  met  at  your  sister's  party ;  what  is  her  name  ?  Oh, 
no  matter  ;  my  sister  has  invited  *  her  to  dine  this  evening,  and  if  you 
wait  for  dinner  with  us  I  will  introduce  you  to  her. 

6.  Papa,  here  is  my  friend  Mr.  N.,  whom  I  have  the  pleasure  to  pro- 
sent  to  you.     I  am  very  happy  to  know  you,  sir. 

7.  Be  kind  enough  to  take  a  seat,  and  excuse  me  an  instant ;  I  shall  be 
back  immediately.     Certainly,  sir. 

8.  How  are  your  old  friends  the  RetortUlos  ?  They  are  very  well, 
tliank  you ;  they  ai'e  to  be  here  this  evening,  so  you  can  have  a  chat 
with  them. 

9.  "Why  did  you  not  introduce  mo  long  ago  to  your  father  ?  I  am 
very  soiTy  for  not  ha\'ing  done  so,  and  my  father  has  often  scolded  me 
for  my  neglect  (negligencia). 

10.  Do  you  expect  your  uncle  to-day?  I  do  not;  but  if  Ije  comes, 
well  and  good,  we  shall  be  glad  to  see  him. 

11.  Will  you  be  good  enough  to  give  me  that  newspaper  that  is  on  the 
chair  next  the  window  ?    With  the  greatest  pleasure. 

12.  What  news  is  there  this  morning?  I  see  that  a  new  i)rcsident 
(presidente)  has  been  elected  in  one  of  the  provinces  of  South  America. 

13.  They  might  have  chosen  another  occasion  for  electing  him,  I  think. 
Ah,  of  course;  they  are  at  war  with  Spain. 

14.  How  much  do  they  ask  for  the  house  that  is  for  sale  in  Fifteenth 
street  ?  Father  was  saying  yesterday  that  they  ai'e .  asking  a  very  high 
price. 

15.  What  do  you  understand  by  a  high  price  ?  More  than  the  house 
is  worth  (valer). 

16.  You  seem  very  much  dissatisfied  at  the  price;  have  you  any  in- 
tention of  buying  the  house  ?    Yes,  unless  it  has  already  been  sold. 

17.  What  news  have  you  from  Boston  ?  is  Miss  Guevara  married  yet? 
I  have  not  heard  from  the  family  for  a  month  ;  but  I  suppose  slic  must 
be  married  by  this  time ;  she  vras  to  be  married  in  July. 

18.  Will  you  come  and  take  a  walk  before  dinner  ?  Ah,  you  must  ex- 
cuse me ;  believe  me,  I  am  worn  out  with  fatigue. 

*  Inritar. 


196 


tESSON     XL. 


19.  What  is  that  you  said,  Emanuel?     I  have  told  you  once,  and  I 
shall  not  i-epeat  it. 

20.  Do  you  knovr  that  young  lady  who  is  sitting  on  the  sofa  beside 
your  niece  ?    Yes ;  I  will  introduce  you  to  her,  if  you  wish. 

21.  When  will  you  introduce  mo?    Just  now,  on  condition  that  yoa 
will  not  fall  in  love  with  her. 

22.  "Well,  will  you  promise  ?    I  will ;   you  know  I  am  going  to  get 
married,  and  I  only  wish  to  enjoy  her  charming*  conversation. 

23.  Miss  Velcta,  allow  me  to  have  the  honor  of  introducing  to  yoa 
Mr.  Romelio.     IIow  do  you  do,  sir  ?    I  am  very  happy  to  know  yon,  miss. 

24.  "Well,  John,  what  do  you  think  of  her?     That  she  is  charming; 
and  I  am  exceedingly  obliged  to  you  Tor  introducing  me. 

25.  Oh,  Louisa!    come  and  look  at  this  beautiful  dress. — Oh,  how 
beautiful!     How  much  did  it  cost?— Only  a  trifle  of  $120. 

26.  How  much  did  you  pay  for  that  last  coat  of  yours,  Alesander? 
— Only  eighty  dollars. — Xot  very  much  at  all  (no  se  me  hacc  caro). 


LESSON    XL. 


Conducir?    (See  conjugation  of  this  I  To  conduct,  to  lead,  to  drive. 
verb  in  at  p.  398.)  I 

Verbs  conjugated  lilce  coxDrciE. 
Producir.  To  produce. 

Traducir.  To  translate. 

Introduclr.  To  introduce. 


Obrai*. 

To  act. 

En^•idiar. 

To  envy. 

Olvidar. 

To  forget 

Existir. 

To  exist. 

Segun  (prep.). 
Siquiera  (conj.). 
Colectivo. 
Particular. 

Ejercito. 

Gentio. 

Rebano. 


According  to. 
At  least,  even. 
Collective. 
Private,  particular. 


COLLECTIVE   NOTIXS. 


Army. 

Tropa. 

Crowd. 

Gente. 

Flock,  herd. 

Multitud 

Troop. 
People. 
Multitude. 


*  Encantadora. 


LESSON     XL. 


197 


Par. 

Pair,  couple. 

Docena. 

Dozen. 

Centenares. 

Hundreds. 

Centena. 

A  hundred. 

IkEiUares. 

Thousands. 

Mitad. 

Half. 

El  tercio. 

The  third. 

La  tercera. 

The  third. 

El  euarto. 

The  fourth. 

La  cuarta  parte. 

The  fourth,  & 

El  dozavo. 

The  twelfth. 

Una  infinidad. 

An  infinity. 

El  (loblc. 

The  doable. 

Higo. 

Fig. 

Conciencia. 

Conscience. 

Caracter. 

Character. 

Circunstancia. 

Circumstance 

Habitante. 

Inhabitant. 

Uva. 

Grape. 

Gobierno. 

Government. 

Especie. 

Species,  kind. 

Eecurso. 

Recourse,  rcsour- 

Naranja. 

Orange. 

ses. 

Castafia. 

Chestnut. 

Mod  to. 

Mountain. 

Nuez. 

Nut. 

Bosque, 

Wood  (forest). 

Cuestion. 

Question, 

Eio. 

River. 

Produccion. 

Production. 

Lago. 

Lake. 

Libertad. 

Liberty. 

Nombro. 

Noun,  name. 

Causa. 

Cause. 

Carnero  merino. 

Merino  sheep. 

Irlanda. 

Ireland. 

Rincon,  esquina 

Corner. 

COMPOS 

Naturaleza. 
JITIOX. 

Natm-e. 

Obro  segun  su  conciencia. 
Habla  seguu  las  circuastancias. 
Lo  cuento  segun  me  lo  ban  contado. 
Entro  {or  entraron)  en  la  ciudad  una 

tropa  de  soldados. 
En  el  ejorcito  de  Ids  Estados  Unidos 

habia  soldados  de  todas  las  naciones^ 
EI  tercio  (or  la  tercera  parte)  de  esos 

hombrcs  no  saben  escribir. 
El  gentio  era  tan  grande  que  no  pudi- 

mos  pasar. 
Un  par  de  caballos  americanos  vale  per 

dos  pares  do  c.aballos  m^jicanos. 


lie  acted  according  to  his  conscience.    • 
He  speaks  according  to  circumstances. 
I  tell  it  as  it  was  told  to  me. 
A  troop  of  soldiers  came  into  the  city. 

In  the  United  States  army  there  were 

soldiers  of  all  nations. 
The  third  of  those  men  do  not  know 

how  to  write. 
The  crowd  was  so  great  that  we  could 

not  pass. 
A  pair  of  American  horses  are  worth 

two  pairs  of  Mexican  horses. 


EXPLANATION. 


194.  Co:n-ducie,  to  conduct,  and  the  verbs  conjugated  like 
it,  take  a  z  before  the  radical  c  in  the  terminations  beginning 
with  o  or  a.     They  also  take  the  tevxn\niiX\ox\sje,jistG,jo,jimos, 


108  LESSONXL. 

Jisteis,Jero}i,  &c.,  as  may  be  seen  in  the  conjugation  oi  condu- 
cii\  at  the  end  of  the  grammar. 

195.  Segust. — We  class  this  word  among  the  prepositions, 
in  conformity  to  the  general  practice  among  Spanish  gi-ara- 
marians,  and  because  it  sometimes  has  the  character  of  such  ;  as, 

Obro  seipin  su  conciencia.  I  He  acted  according  to  his  conscience. 

Habla  secfun  las  circunstaucias.  |  He  speaks  according  to  circumstances. 

Xevertheless,  in  other  cases  it  is  employed  as  an  adverb ;  as, 

Lo  cuento  seffun  me  lo  han  contado.    |  I  tell  it  as  it  was  told  to  me. 

196.  Collective  nouns,  in  the  singular,  generally  agree  -with 
verbs  in  the  singular  number ;  but  when  the  collective  noun 
is  taken  in  its  most  extended  sense,  custom  allows  the  verb  to 
be  in  the  plural,  for  in  such  case  the  numbers  concurring  to 
form  the  whole,  rather  tlian  the  whole  itself,  are  considered ;  as, 

Entr6  {or  entraron)  en  la  ciudad  una  I  A  troop  of  soldiers  came  into  the  city, 
tropa  de  soldados.  | 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  Produce  Espafla  buena  fruta?  Espaiia  produce  excelente  fruta 
de  todas  especies. 

2.  I  Cual  es  la  mejor  fruta  de  Espaua  ?  !N"o  sabre  decir  a  V.,  porque 
toda  es  bueua  y  bay  centenares  de  especies,  per  ejemplo :  las  uvas  son  de 
las  mejores  del  mundo ;  los  melocotones  y  los  inelones  son  tambien  muy 
buenos,  sin  contar  con  las  naranjas,  los  bigos,  las  castauas,  las  nueces  y 
otra  infinidad  de  frntas. 

3.  ^Es  Espaua  un  pais  care  6  barato?  Es  demasiado  barato.  Con 
im  peso  se  puede  vivir  mejor  en  EspaCa  que  cu  ISTueva  York  con  cuatro. 

4.  I  Bien,  ent6nces  porque  se  vino  V.  a  vivir  en  los  Estados  Unidos  ? 
Esa  es  ya  otra  cuestion,  Espafia  no  tiene  que  envidiar  d  ningun  pais  del 
mundo  en  cuanto  a  su  clima  ni  a  bus  producciones,  ni  mduos  en  cuanto  al 
cardctcr  de  sus  babitantes ;  pero  bajo  su  gobicrno  no  se  goza  de  la  misma 
libertad  que  so  goza  bajo  el  de  la  Republlca  de  los  Estados  Unidos. 

5.  jEs  esta  la  causa  per  la  cual  Y.  se  vino  a  residir  en  este  pais? 
Hay  muebas  otras.  Por  ejemplo,  cs  verdad  que  en  EspaQa  no  se  conocen 
las  hambres  que  bay  en  Ii'landa,  Alemania  y  otros  paises,  y  que,  como 
be  diebo,  se  vive  mejor  aUi  con  un  peso  que  aqui  con  cuatro ;  pero  tam- 
bien es  verdad,  que  en  cualquiera  profesion  u  oficio  es  mas  facil  ganar 
cuatro  pesos  en  los  Estados  Unidos,  que  uno  en  Espafla. 

6.  ^Por  tanto  Y.  crce  que  los  recursos  de  los  Estados  Unidos  son 


LESSOR"     XL.  199 

mas  graudes  que  los  de  otros  paises  ?  Por  snppesto  que  si.  Aqui  la 
nacion  cs  grande ;  la  libcrtad  cs  grandc ;  los  inontes,  los  rios,  los  lagos, 
los  bosques  son  graudes;  la  naturaleza  es  grande  ;  todo  es  grande  ;  Nue- 
va  York  es  grande  y  los  lioinbres  mismos  son  tainbien  grandes ;  pero  no 
mas  grandes  quo  los  Espanoles. 

7.  Ilablando  de  osto,  V.  se  olvida  que  en  cste  ejercicio  tiene  V.  que 
practicar  con  los  nombrcs  colectivos, — V.  tiene  razon,  se  me  habian  olvi- 
dado  los  norabres  '.'olcctivos  bablaodo  de  las  dos  naciones  que  mas  amo 
en  el  mundo. 

8.  En  cuanto  a  los  nombrcs  colectivos,  su  practica  cs  muy  facil  y  todo 
so  reduce  a  dccir :  que  en  Xueva  York  hay  multitud  de  gentes  de  dife- 
rentes  naciones,  m^llares  de  mujeres  y  cosas  buenas  y  centonares  do 
hombres  y  cosas  malas. 

9.  ^Pero  y  que  dice  V.  con  respecto  a  los  rebafios,  ejercitos,  etc.? 
Que  en  Espafia  hay  rebafios  de  carneros  merinos  que,  asi  como  su  ejSr- 
oito,  no  tienen  superiores  en  el  mundo. 

10.  |Segun  cso  V.  cree  que  todo  lo  mejor  existe  en  Espafia?  Todo 
no,  puesto  que  mis  niQos  son  Americanos. 

11.  Vamos,  V.  se  burla. — No,  sefior,  yo  hablo  de  veras  para  practicar 
el  espafiol. 

12.  V.  habla  segun  las  circunstancias. — No,  sefior,  yo  hablo  segun  mi 
concicncia. 

13.  Acu6rdese  V.  que  segun  V.  obi'e  con  los  demas  asi  obraran  ellos 
con  V. — Muy  bien  y  asi  como  yo  hable  de  ellos,  asi  hablaran  ellos  de  mi ; 
pero  yo  no  debo  hablar  de  ellos  mejor  que  de  mi  mismo. 

14.  I  Quiere  V.  pagarme  la  mitad,  el  tercio  6  el  cuarto  de  lo  que  V. 
me  debe  ?    Ni  lo  uno  ni  lo  otro,  porque  no  tcngo  dinero  ahora. 

15.  Deme  V.  a  lo  menos  un  par  de  pesos. — Mafiana  le  dare  a  V.  una 
docena  de  pesos,  pero  hoy  ni  tan  siquiera  un  centavo. 

16.  A  Dios,  Carlos,  me  canso  de  charlar  y  mo  voy  d  acostar.  Buenas 
noches,  Luis,  n»o  olvide  V.  de  pagar  sus  deudas. 

EXCERCISE. 

1.  Wliat  is  the  name  given  to  a  large  number  of  sheep  together? 
It  is  called  a  flock. 

2.  "What  were  you  doing  so  long  in  the  street  ?  I  went  to  see  the 
reason  of  the  great  crowd  at  the  corner  of  the  next  street. 

3.  Well,  what  was  it?  I  could  not  see  any  thing;  but  it  seems  there 
was  a  fire  in  some  of  the  streets  near  here. 

4.  You  seem  to  be  very  much  of  a  Spaniard ;  why  did  you  ever  come 
to  the  United  States?  I  will  not  deny  that  I  like  the  government;  yet 
that  is  not  the  only  reason  I  had  for  coming  here. 


200  LESSON     XL. 

5.  Can  you  tell  me  some  of  the  others?  Undoubtedly;  although 
living  is  higher  here  than  there,  business  of  all  kinds  is  better,  and  it  is 
easier  to  make  money  here,  not  only  than  in  Spain,  but  than  any  otlier 
country  in  Europe. 

G.  I  am  very  glad  you  think  so;  how  long  have  you  been  here?  It 
will  be  four  years  nest  September. 

7.  Will  you  be  good  enough  to  tell  me  something  of  your  country  ? 
That  will  give  me  much  pleasure. 

8.  You  talk  so  much  about  Euro[>e  in  general,  and  about  Spain  in 
particular,  that  I  cannot  help  {no  piiedo  menos  de)  thinking  you  intend  to 
go  there.  You  are  very  right ;  it  is  very  possible  that  my  brother  and 
I  shall  take  a  trip  (viaje)  to  Spain  next  fall. 

9.  "Well,  in  order  to  be  able  to  enjoy  youKelves  a§  much  as  possible, 
it  will'  be  necessary  for  you  to  know  how  to  speak  the  language  perfectly 
before  starting.     That  we  intend  to  do. 

10.  Do  you  think  all  the  soldiers  in  the  army  are  Americans?  No, 
nor  even  the  half,  and  perhaps  not  even  the  third. 

11.  How  many  inhabitants  are  there  in  this  city?  I  am  not  able  to 
tell  you  exactly ;  bat  there  cannot  be  much  less  than  a  million. 

12.  Which  city  in  the  world  has  the  most  inhabitants  ?  London ;  it 
has  about  three  millions  of  inhabitant^. 

13.  Ah!  you  are  jesting;  or  else  you  are  an  Englishman.  I  am  not 
jesting,  neither  am  I  an  Englishman,  but  a  Frenchman  ;  after  London 
comes  Paris. 

14.  Who  is  that  book  by  ?  This  is  the  celebrated  Don  Quixote  {Qui- 
jote\  by  Cervantes. 

15.  In  how  many  parts  is  it  ?  Two,  the  first  containing  (confciier) 
some  fifty-two  chapters,  and  the  second  about  eighty-four. 

16.  What  etfect  (efecto)  does  the  reading  of  Don  Quixote  produce  upon 
you  ?  It  makes  me  admire,  and  even  leads  me  to  envy  the  genius  (rfcnid) 
of  its  author. 

17.  Ah !  I  see ;  yon  say  that  to  please  me,  because  you  know  that  I 
too  admire  the  grand  work  of  Cervantes.  Pardon  me,  sir ;  I  never  speak 
according  to  circumstances,  but  always  according  to  my  conscience. 

18.  But,  have  you  forgotten  your  promise  already?  What  promise  is 
that  ?  I  do  not  remember  any. 

19.  No  matter;  I  see  you  have  completely  forgotten  it.  lam  very 
sorry. 

20.  What  are  the  best  fruits  that  Spain  produces?  Spain  produces 
so  many  kinds  of  fruit,  and  so  delicious,  that  it  is  almost  impossible  for 
me  to  tell  tbem  all :  You  have  e.xcelleut  grapes,  melons,  peaches,  apples, 
oranges,  and  an  infinity  of  others. 


LESSON     XLI. 


201 


'21.  Have  the  soldiers  that  came  into  the  city  last  night  gone  away 
yet  ?     They  marched  this  morning  at  daybreak. 

22.  How  was  our  old  friend  Ilarnero  when  you  last  heard  from  him  ? 
He  was  in  Boston,  entirely  without  means,  having  been  deceived  by  a 
bad  man  who  took  the  whole  of  his  money  from  him,  and  from  whom 
he  was  unable  to  recover  (recohrar)  even  the  fourth  part. 


LESION    XLI. 


Soler. 

Bendecir. 

Caer. 

Dormir. 

Morir. 

Errar. 

Jugar. 

Oir. 

Oler. 

Oontradccir. 

Poner. 

Podrir. 

Eeir. 

Valer. 

Yacer, 


To  be  accustomed  to,  to  do,  or 

be,  usually. 
To  bless. 

To  fall,  to  sec  (understand). 
To  sleep. 
To  die. 
To  err. 
To  play. 
To  hear. 
To  smell. 
To  contradict. 
To  put. 
To  rot. 
To  laugh. 
To  be  worth. 
To  lie. 


{Sec  the  conjugation  of  these  verbs  at  the  e7id  of  the  book.) 


Eeposar. 
Premiar. 
Examinar. 

Desde. 
Contra. 
Sobre. 
Tras. 

Pues. 

Ilelo  aqui. 
Desde  ahora. 

9* 


To  rest,  to  repose. 
To  reward. 
To  examine. 

Since,  from. 
Against,  towards. 
Above,  over,  about. 
After,  behind,  besides. 

"Well,  then ;  therefore,  &c. 

Here  ho  (or  it)  is. 
Henceforward,  from  now,  just 
now. 


202 


LESSON     XLI, 


Desde 

aqui. 

From  here. 

En  efecto. 

Indeed, in  < 

effect,  in  fact,  really. 

Eterno. 

Eternal. 

Afortunado. 

Fortunate. 

Convicto. 

Convicted. 

Desgraciado. 

Uufortunate. 

Infortimio. 

Misfortune. 

Carlota. 

Charlotte. 

Reo. 

Criminal. 

Creacion. 

Creation. 

Grito. 

Cry,  scream. 

Caridad. 

Charity. 

Coclie. 

Carriage. 

Prenda. 

Pledge,     quality, 

Vicio. 

Vice. 

accomplishment. 

Fraile. 

Fray,  friar. 

Virtnd. 

Virtue. 

Diego. 

James. 

Tristeza. 

Grief,  sorrow. 

Verbo. 

Verb. 

Experiencia. 

Experience. 

Principio. 

Beginning,  prinT 
ciple. 

COMPO 

Pagina. 
3ITI0N. 

Page. 

(,  Suele  V.  Icvantarse  temprano  ? 

Suelo  levantarme  tardc. 

I  Solia  V.  ir  a  pascar  a  caballo  cl  aiio 

pasado  ? 
No,  senor,  solia  pasear  en  cochc. 
Plegue  a  Dios  que  tengamos  pronto  lo 

que  deseamos. 
Desde  ahora  prometo  servirle  a  V.  en  lo 

que  pueda. 
El  hombre  ha  obrado  mal  para  con  Dios 

J  consigo  mismo  desde  la  creacion  del 

mundo. 
Desde  Nueva  York   a  Filadclfia  hay 

ochenta  y  ocho  millas. 
Yo  juego  contra  ti. 
Esta  casa  csta  contra  el  Este. 
La  ciudad  esta  sobre  un  monte. 
La  caridad  es  sobre  todas  las  virtudes. 
Voy  tras  ti. 
Sufre  la  pena  pues  lo  quieres. 

Tras  la  primavera  riene  el  verano. 
Tras  set"  culpado,  el  es  cl  que  Icvanta  el 

grito. 
Lecre  este  libro  pues  Y.  me  dice  que  es 

bneno. 


Do  ybu  usually  rise  early  ? 

I  usually  rise  late. 

Used   you  to  ride  on  horseback  last 

year  ? 
No,  sir,  I  used  to  ride  in  a  carriage. 
God  grant  we  may  soon  have  what  we 

desire. 
From  this  moment  I  promise  to  serve 

you  as  far  as  I  can. 
Man  has  acted  wrong  before  God  and 

to  himself  since  the  creation  of  the 

world. 
It  is  eighty-eight  miles  from  New  York 

to  Philadelphia. 
I  play  against  you  (thee). 
This  house  faces  the  East. 
The  city  is  buUt  upon  a  mountain  (or  hill). 
Charity  is  before  all  virtues. 
I  go  after  you  (thee). 
Suffer    the   consequences  (pain),  since 

such  is  your  (thy)  will. 
After  spring  comes  summer. 
Notwithstanding  he  is  guilty,  it  is  he 

that  raises  the  cry. 
I  will  read  this  book  since  you  tell  me 

it  is  good. 


LESSON      XLI.  203 

EXPLANATION. 

197.  Defective  verbs  are  those  which  are  not  employed  in 
all  their  tenses  and  persons.  Podrir^  to  rot,  placer^  to  please, 
and  yacer,  to  lie,  belong  to  this  class,  and  are  found  used  in  the 
following  tenses  and  persons  : 

PODRlR. 


Imper.  2d  person  plural. 

Podrid. 

Rot. 

Subjunc.  imp.  Sd person 

sin{f.   Podriria. 

He  -n-ould  vdi. 

Infi/iit.     Present. 

Podrir, 

To  rot. 

Particip. 

Podrido. 

PLACE  K. 

Rotten. 

Indicat.   Pres.  3d  person  sinff.  Place. 

It  pleases. 

Imperfect. 

Placia. 

It  did  please. 

Perfect  ind. 

Plugo. 

It  pleased. 

Subjunc.  Present. 

Plegue. 

It  may  please. 

Imperfect. 

Pluguiera.  | 
■i^uguifese.  f 

It  might  please. 

Future  imp. 

Pluguierc. 

It  may  please. 

These  persons  of  the  subjunctive  mood  in  this  verb  are  only- 
used  in  the  following  expressions  :  plegue^  or pluguiera^  or  ph(>- 
guiese  a  Dios,  would  to  God ;  and  si  me  pluguiere,  if  it  should 
please  me. 

198.  Yacee. — No  part  of  this  vei-b  is  used  except  the 
third  persons  of  the  present  indicative,  yace  a»d  yacen,  chiefly 
at  the  beginning  of  ei^itaphs. 

199.  SoLER  is  used  only  in  the  present  and  imperfect  of 
the  indicative  mood.  Tliis  verb  has  the  peculiarity  of  never 
being  employed  except  as  a  determining  verb,  governing  the 
determined  verb  without  the  aid  of  any  preposition,  and  al- 
ways in  the  present  infinitive ;  as, 

Suelo  pasear  temprano.  |      I  usually  go  early  to  walk. 

200.  Desde,  from,  points  out  the  beginning  of  time  or 
place ;  as, 

Desde  la  creacion  del  mundo.  I      From  the  creation  of  the  world. 

Desde  Nueva  York  a  Filadelfia.  |      From  New  York  to  Philadelphia. 

For  this  reason  it  forms  a  part  of  several  adverbial  expres- 
sions which  signify  time  or  place ;  as, 

Desde  ahora.  |       From  this  time. 

Desde  aquL  |      From  hence. 


204  LESSON     XLI. 

201.  CoNTKA  is  used  in  all  cases  as  the  Englisli  against. 

202.  SoBKE,  upon,  above,  &c.,  serves  to  denote  the  superi- 
ority of  things  with  respect  to  others,  either  by  their  material 
situation  or  by  their  excellence  or  power ;  as. 

La  ciudad  estd  sobre  un  monte.  I      The  city  is  on  a  mountain. 

La  caridad  es  sobre  todas  las  virtudes,  |      Charity  is  above  all  virtues. 

It  has  also  the  signification  of  ademds,  moreover,  or  ademds 
dCy  besides ;  as, 

Sobre  ser  reo  convicto  quicre  que  le  I      Besides  being  a  convicted  criminal, 
premien.  |  he  wishes  to  be  rewarded. 

It  also  signifies  time ;  as, 
Hablar  sobre  mesa.  |      To  talk  during  dinner. 

Security ;  as, 
Prestar  sobre  prendas.  |      To  lend  upon  pledge. 

203.  Teas,  behind,  after,  &c.,  signifies  tliQ  order  in  which 
some  things  follow  others  ;  as, 

Voy  tras  ti.  I      I  follow  you. 

Tras  la  primavera  viene  el  verano.      |      After  spring  comes  summer. 

It  also  signifies  besides ;  as, 

Tras  ser  culpado,  61  es  el  que  levan-  I      Besides  being  guilty,  he  remonstrates, 
ta  el  grito.  | 

204.  The  conjunction  pues,  since,  is  used  to  account  for  a 
proposition  brought  forward ;  as, 

Leere  este  libro  pucs  V.  me  dice  que  [      I  will  read  this  book  since  you  tell 
es  bueno.  |         me  it  is  good. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  Sobre  que  quiere  Y.  que  hablemos  hoy  ?  No  se  ;  do  cualquiera 
cosa,  con  tal  que  practiquemos  con  los  verbos  defectives  y  las  preposi- 
ciones  contra^  d^esde^  sobre  j  tras. 

2.  Que  me  place  ;  pero  digame  V.,  i  cree  Y.  que  tenemos  mucho  que 
practicar  con  el  verbo  yacer  ?  No,  sefior,  puesto  que  es  nn  verbo  que 
solo  su've  para  ponerse  en  los  epitafios. 

3.  Pues  si  Y.  gusta  le  ]iar6mos  un  epitafio  y  pasar6mos  a  practicar 
con  otro  verho  que  no  sea  tan  tristc. — Soy  de  su  opinion  de  Y.,  porque 
no  me  gustan  las  cosas  tristes. 


LESSONXLI.  205 

4.  Helo  aqui : 

"  Aqni  yace  el  vcrbo  yacer, 
Otra  cosa  no  sabiendo  haccr." 

5.  Ese  epitafio  me  hace  recordar  &  mi  otro,  oigalo  V. : 

"  Aqui  Fray  Diego  reposa, 
T  jamas  hizo  otra  cosa.", 

6.  Hombro,  tenga  V.  caridad  de  mi  y  no  me  haga  V.  reir  liablando  de 
cpitafios,  quo  cs  cosa  mas  bien  i)ara  hacer  llorar  que  para  bacer  reir. 
I  Suele  V.  tener  siempre  tan  buen  humor  ?  No  siempre ;  pero  no  se  gana 
nada  con  estar  triste. 

7.  En  efecto,  mas  vale  estar  alegre  que  triste,  pero  no  siempre  so 
puede  estar  alegre,  i  y  ent6nces  que  hace  Y.  ?  Entonces  mando  d  pasear 
al  mal  humor. 

8.  Eso  es  mas  facil  de  decir  que  de  hacer ;  i  quiero  Y.  decirme  como 
lo  hace  Y.  ?  Convengo  con  Y. ;  pero  cuando  el  hombre  quiero  verda- 
deramente  una  cosa  la  logra  casi  siempre. 

9.  Plegue  a  Dios  que  yo  logre  estar  siempre  contento  puesto  que  estar 
contento  es  ser  feliz.  i  Qu6  es  lo  que  Y.  hace  para  estar  siempre  con- 
tento ?  Yo  no  le  he  dicho  a  Y.  que  estoy  siempre  contento,  pero  pro- 
euro  estarlo  y  asi  logro  no  estar  triste. 

10."  I  C6mo  lo  hace  Y.  ?  Obro  segun  las  circunstancias.  Examine  la 
causa  de  mi  tristeza  6  mal  humor;  si  es  mi  falta  me  consuelo  porque  creo 
que  Dios  me  castiga  para  que  yo  me  corrija,  y  me  haga  mejor  con  la  ex- 
perieneia. 

11.  Bien,  ^  y  cuando  Y.  es  inocente  y  le  sacede  un  infortunio?  Ent6n- 
ces  me  consuelo  tambien,  porque  creo  que  todo  lo  que  Dios  no3  envia  es 
para  nuestro  bien. 

12.  Entonces  es  Y.  fil6sofo.     No,  sehor,  mejor  que  eso;  soy  religioso. 

13.  2  Tiene  Y.  miedo  de  la  muerte  ?  No,  seQor,  porque  s6  que  todoa 
hemes  de  morir,  y  que  tras  la  muerte  viene  la  vida  eterna. 

14.  I  Cnantos  niflos  tiene  Y.  ?     Cinco ;  dos  nifios  y  tres  ninas. 

15.  I  C6mo  so  Hainan  ?  El  mayor  de  los  niQos  se  llama  Alejandro  y  e^ 
menor  Manuel. 

16.  ^  Y  las  ninas  ?    Las  nifias  son  Luisa,  Carlota  y  Margarita. 

17.  i  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  que  no  ha  estado  Y.  en  Espafia  ?  Hace  veinto 
atios  que  saU  de  Espafia. 

18.  ^  Y  no  ha  vuelto  Y.  ?    No,  sefiora,  y  creo  que  nunca  volver^. 

19.  ^Porqu6  ?  No  porque  no  lo  haya  deseado,  sino  porque  las  circun- 
stancias  no  me  lo  han  permitido. 

20.  Porque  habla  Y.  tanto  de  si  mismo  en  sus  conversaciones,  ^no 
piensa  Y.  que  eso  puede  cansar  a  sus  oyeutes  ?  Asi  es  la  verdad,  seflora ; 
pero  para  ir.i  cs  la  materia  de  conversacion  mas  interesante  que  puedo 
encjntrar. 


206  LESSON     XLI.  '' 

EXERCISE. 

1.  James,  do  you  know  where  Charlotte  has  gone  to?  I  saw  her 
going  out,  but  I  do  not  know  where  she  has  gone. 

2.  Can  you  not  help  your  brother  in  his  misfortune  ?  you  know  he  re- 
lies (contar)  upon  yom*  aid.  I  shall  do  all  in  my  power  to  serve  him; 
but  you  know  that  is  not  much. 

3.  Margaret,  go  and  call  Charles ;  tell  him  he  has  played  enough,  and 
that  I  want  him  to  attend  to  his  music  lessons.  Why,  he  has  been  at  his 
lessons  for  the  last  half  hour ! 

4.  Ah  !  that  is  another  thing.     Where  is  he  tlicn  ?     Here  he  is,  here. 

5.  Well,  Charles,  how  are  you  getting  on  with  your  music  ?  Very 
well,  papa ;  but  I  think  Jane  will  have  to  help  mo  with  my  Spanish  ex- 
ercise. 

6.  My  dear  boy,  always  do  your  own  exercises,  then  you  will  be  sure 
they  are  well  done.  Oh,  Ws>  I  know  ;  as  they  say:  "Help  yourself  and 
Heaven  will  help  you." 

7.  How  beautiful  that  lady  is !  Yes ;  but,  my  dear  sir,  her  accom- 
plishments are  much  superior  to  her  beauty. 

8.  I  do  not  doubt  it  at  all ;  but  how  do  you  know  that  ?  have  you 
knoAvn  her  long?  Long  enough  to  find  out  her  good  qualities,  which,  in 
my  opinion,  are  of  more  value  than  all  tlie  beauty  in  the  world. 

9.  Have  you  found  time  yet  to  examine  the  books  I  put  on  your  table 
the  other  day  ?  I  have,  and  the  examination  caused  (produced)  me  a 
great  deal  of  sadness. 

10.  How  so?  From  the  commencement,  page  after  page,  I  found  that 
the  author  has  not  the  least  experience  of  the  world ;  and,  besides,  he 
contradicts  toward  the  end  what  he  has  given  as  a  general  rule  at  the 
beginning  of  his  work. 

11.  I  am  very  much  gi-ieved  (sorry)  that  such  is  your  opinion.  So  am 
I ;  but  you  know  it  is  better  (worth  more)  to  tell  tlie  truth,  even  though 
it  should  ofiend  the  author  himself. 

12.  Can  you  read  that  epitaph?  I  believe  it  is  in  English.  Yes;  it 
says :  "  Here  lies  Pedro  Gutierrez." 

13.  Is  that  all  it  says  ?  No,  there  is  a  great  deal  more ;  but  I  cannot 
read  it. 

14.  Ah,  indeed !  I  see ;  you  do  not  read  English  as  well  as  you  thought, 
I  do  not ;  and  I  promise  you  that  from  this  moment  I  will  study  it  at- 
tentively until  I  know  it  thoroughly. 

15.  What  is  that  you  are  smelling?  The  book  that  Charles  has  just 
bought. 

IG.  What  smell  has  it  ?    It  smells  like  new  paper. 


LESSOir     XLII, 


207 


17.  Wliat  was  that  man  rewarded  for  ?  For  having  returned  (devolver) 
five  liundred  dollars,  which  he  found  in  the  park,  to  the  person  that  had 
lost  them. 

18.  I  ain  very  glad  that  he  has  heen  rewarded ;  but  virtue  is  always 
rewarded,  sooner  or  later  (tarde  que  temprano). 


LESSON    XLII. 


Adquirir. 

Asir. 

Caber. 

Cocer. 

Erguir. 

Satisfacer. 

Traer, 


To  acquire. 

To  seize. 

To  contain,  to  hold. 

To  cook. 

To  erect. 

To  satisfy. 

To  bring,  to  carry. 


{fiee  conjugation  of  these  verbs  at  the  end  of  the  book.) 


Conseguir, 

Callar. 

lieprender. 


iCdspita!  {int.). 
i  Vaya !   {int.). 


To  succeed,  to  get. 

To  be  silent,  to  hold  one's  tongue. 

To  reprehend,  to  chide. 


Divisar. 

To  perceive,  to  descry,  to  e 

Fumar. 

To  smoke. 

Establecei*. 

To  establish. 

Saber  {imp.  verb). 

{In.  the  signification  of)  to 

or  to  savor. 

Sorprender. 

To  surprise. 

Entrambos.    • 

Both. 

Solo. 

Alone. 

Ir  a,  caballo. 

To  ride  on  horseback. 

Ir  en  coche. 

To  ride  in  a  carriage. 

De  todos  modos. 

At  all  events,  by  all  means. 

De  ningun  modo. 

By  no  means,  not  at  all. 

Manos  a  la  obra. 

.  To  work! 

Por  mi  parte. 

For  my  part. 

Asi  sea. 

So  be  it,  let  it  be  so. 

Wonderful !  too  bad ! 

Come,  now  !  indeed !  go  away 


208 


LESSON     XLII. 


COXJL'^NXTIONS. 


They  are  classified  as  follows  : 

Copulative. 


Que. 
Tambien. 


O,  u,  ya. 

Sea  que. 
Tampoco. 


That. 
Also. 


Or,  either, 
whether. 
Whether. 
Neither. 


Ademas. 
Y  or  k. 

m 

Disjunctive. 

Por  cuauto. 
Para  que. 

A  fin  de. 


Moreover. 
And. 
Neither,  nor. 


Whereas. 

So  that,  in  order 

that. 
In  order  that. 


Adteraative. 
Mas,  pero.  But. 

Ann  cuando.         Even. 
Aunque.  Although, 

though. 


Causal. 


Porqne,  que. 
I  Porque  ? 
Pues,  pues  que. 
Por. 
Por  tanto. 


Because. 

Why? 

Since. 

For. 

Therefore. 


Unless. 


Conditional. 
Si.  If. 

Sino.  But. 

Con  tal  que.         Provided. 
A  m^nos  de.   ) 
A  m6nos  que.  f 

Continuatite. 
Pues,  puesto  que.  Since,     inasmuch 
as. 

Com'jparative. 
Como,  asi  como.  As. 
Asi.  So. 


Antes  de. 

Before. 

L6J08  de. 

Far  from. 

En  lugar  de. 

Instead  of,  in  place  of. 

Por  falta  de. 

For  want  of. 

De  miedo  de,     ) 
Por  temor  de.    j 

For  fear  of. 

• 
Como  quiera  que. 

However. 

Fuera  de  que. 

Besides. 

Al  instante  que,  or 

lucgo  que, 

or 

As  soon  as. 

tan  pronto  como. 

^ 

De  manera  que. 

So  that. 

Desde  que. 

Since. 

Acuerdo.  Advice,  or  opin-  I  Marca.  Brand,  mark, 

ion.  I  Fortuna.  Fortune. 


LESSON     SLII, 


209 


DaQo. 

Ilarra,  damage. 

Partida. 

Party,  game,  de 

Ajedrez. 

Chess. 

parture. 

Cigarro. 

Cigar. 

Opinion. 

Opinion. 

Cigar  rillo. 

Cigarette. 

Pipa. 

Tobacco-pipe, 

Tabaco. 

Tobacco. 

pipe. 

Jaque. 

Check. 

Compatlia. 

Company. 

Oaso. 

Case. 

COMPOSITION. 

Conjunctions  governing  the  suijunctive. 


Dado  que  mc  escnba  no  le  respondere. 

Con  tal  que  el  trabajc. 
A  meuos  que  me  pague. 
Sea  que  sc  vara  6  que  se  quede. 
Calle  Y.  no  sea  que  nos  oiga. 


Granted  that  he  should  write  me,  I  will 

not  answer  hira. 
Provided  he  works. 
Unless  he  pays  me. 
Whether  he  sets  out  or  remains. 
Be  silent  lest  he  should  hear  us. 


Conjunctions  governing  the  indicative. 


Al  instantc  que  recibi  la  carta  le  res- 
pond!. 

De  suerte  que  {or  de  modo  que)  no 
pudo  conseguirlo. 

De  manera  que  no  csta  nada  satisfecho. 

6  Que  ha  hecho  V.  desde  que  le  he  vis- 
to  a  V.  ? 

Llegue  tan  pronto  como  pude. 

Mientras  que  V.  jucga  cl  estudia  su  lec- 
eion. 

Yo  reprendo  a  V.  sus  faltas  porquc  le 
quiero. 


As  soon  as  I  received  the  letter  I  an- 
swered him. 
So  that  he  could  not  bring  it  about. 

So  that  he  is  not  pleased  at  all. 

What  have  you  been  doing  since  I  saw 

you? 
I  got  here  (or  there)  as  soon  as  I  could. 
While  you  play,  he  studies  his  lesson. 

I  reprove  you  for  your  faults  because  I 
love  you. 


Conjunctions  governing  the  infinitive. 


To  ft^bajo  i\  fin  de  ganar  dinero. 
No  le  visitars  iintes  de  conocerle. 

L^jos  de  amai-le  Ic  aborrcce. 


I  work  in  order  to  earn  money. 
I  shall  not  visit  him  before  makin_ 
acquaintance. 
I  Far  from  loving  him,  he  abhors  him. 


his 


EXPLANATION. 


205.  Conjunctions. — The  learner  is  already  acquainted 
■with  the  greater  part  of  the  conjunctions ;  but  in  this  lesson 
they  are  again  given,  so  that  he  may  see  how  they  are  classitied. 
Besides  the  conjunctions  introduced  in  this  lesson,  thei'e  may 


210  LESSON     XLII. 

be  formed  a  variety  of  expressions  wliich  answer  the  same  end 
as  conjunctions  ;  as. 

Como  quicra  que,  1      However ; 

Fuera  de  que,  |      Besides ; 

and  a  large  number  of  others. 

206.  It  would  require  too  much  space  to  specify  all  the 
conjunctions  that  govern  verbs  in  a  given  mood  ;  more  is  to  be 
learned  from  the  teacher,  and  by  constant  practice  in  reading 
and  conversation,  than  from  all  the  rules  that  could  be  given. 

207.  The  subjunctive  should  be  used  after  the  followino- 
conjunctive  expressions :  Dado  que^  granted  that ;  con  tal  que, 
provided  that ;  d  inenos  que,  unless ;  no  sea  que,  lest,  for  fear ; 
dntes  que,  sin  que,  sea  que,  &c. ;  as, 


Dado  que  me  escriba  no  lo  respon- 

derc. 
Con  tal  que  el  trabaje. 
A  menos  que  me  pague. 


Granted  that  he  should  write  to  me, 

I  shall  not  answer  him. 
Provided  that  he  works. 
Unless  he  pays  me. 


208.  Other  expressions  having  de,  instead  of  que,  require 
the  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood ;  such  as,  a  Jin  de,  in  order  to  ; 
d  m^nos  de,  unless,  &c. 

209.  Finally,  other  compound  conjunctions  govern  the 
indicative ;  as,  al  instante  que,  as  soon  as ;  de  manera  que,  so 
that,  &c. 

CONVERSATIOX  AND  VERSIOX. 

1.  Buenos  dias,  Don  Carlos. — T6ngalos  V.  muy  felices,  Don  Enrique; 
al  instante  que  lo  divise  desde  la  ventana  lo  recouoci. 

2.  I  Corao  esta  toda  la  familia  ?     Todos  buenos ;  acaban  de  sallr. 

3.  I  Do  manera  que  estd  V.  solo  ?  Si,  seQor,  en  lugar  de  salir  quiso 
quedarmo  a  esperar  a  V.  pues  sabia  que  Labia  V.  de  venir. 

4.  I  Qui6n  se  lo  dijo  d  V.  ?  A  que  no  acierta  V. — Verdadcramente 
no  s6  quien  puede  hab^rselo  dicbo  a  V. 

5.  Fu6  Helena,  su  bija  de  V.,  que  acaba  de  salir  a  pasear  con  mi  csposa 
y  Margarita,  mi  bija. 

6.  Y  nosotros,  i  que  hareraos  ?     Lo  que  V.  gnste. 

1.  Mi  opinion  es  que  juguemos  una  partida  de  ajcdrcz,  que  fumeraos 
un  cigarro,  bcbamos  un  vaso  de  ^ino  de  Cariuena,  y  vayamos  despucs  a 
soi-prender  a  las  seiioras  al  parque.  i  Esta  V.  de  acuerdo  ?  Perfectisi- 
mamcnte. 


LESSON     XT.  II.  211 

8.  Pues  bieii,  manos  ii  laobra;  ^  juega  V.  mucho  ?  Mcdianameutc ; 
pero  coino  no  lo  practice  teino  que  mo  gane  V. 

9.  jQue  hombre!  si  hace  lo  menos  dos  afios  que  no  he  jugado,  fuera 
de  que  jamas  he  sido  muy  fuerte. 

10.  ^  Cuiiles  quiero  V.,  las  uegras  6  las  blancas  ?  Cualesquiera,  de  todos 
modos  he  de  perder. 

11.  Jaque  a  la  reiua  Don  Enrique. — Pues  creo  que  esta  perdida. — Si, 
seflor,  no  puedo  huir — vaya  pues  le  doy  a  V.  la  partida,  puesto  que  sin 
reina  es  casi  imposible  ganar. 

12.  ^Quiero  V^  que  en  lugar  de  jugar  mas  vayamos  a  ver  las  seuoras? 
Si,  seilor,  hiego  que  bebamos  del  vino  de  Cariilena. 

13.  i  Hombre,  si,  lo  habia  olvidado!  aqui  esta,  y  aqui  ticne  V.  tarabien 
pipas,  cigarros  de  la  Habana,  cigarrillos  de  la  marca  de  la  Ilonradez  y 
tabaco  do  Virginia  para  la  pipa ;  i  que  prefiere  V.  ?  Yo  prefiero  los 
cigarrillos. 

14.  A  su  salud  de  V.,  Don  Carlos. — A  la  de  V.,  Don  Enrique. — ;  Cas- 
plta !   i  qu6  bien  sabe  cl  de  Cariuena ! 

15.  ^Le  gusta  aV.?  iQue  si  me  gusta!  desde  que  ^-ivo  en  Nueva 
York  no  he  probado  vino  mejor. 

16.  Puesto  que  le  gusta  ^porque  no  repito  V.  ?  Por  temor  de  que  me 
haga  dailo,  no  suclo  beber  mucbo,  y  temo  que  me  ponga  un  poco  alegre. 

17.  Aqui  tienc  V.  fuego;  ^quo  tal  le  gustan  a  V.  csos  cigarrillos? 
Excelentes. 

18.  Seflor ;  i  Qu6  quicres  Juan  ?    Los  caballos  estan  listos. 

19.  jQu6!  ^  Vamos  a  caballo  ?    Si,  sefior,  las  seuoras  han  ido  en  coche. 

20.  iQue  camino  toraaremos?  Iremos  por  la  Quinta  avenida,  que  es 
la  caUe  mas  hermosa  de  Nueva  York. 

21.  Tenemos  buen  tiempo,  D.  Eni-ique. — Hermosisimo,  y  con  esto,  buena 
salud,  amigos  fieles,  una  larga  familia  y  una  buena  fortuna,  ^  que  mas 
podemos  desear  ? 

22.  Tiene  V.  razon,  Don  Carlos,  por  mi  parte  soy  feliz  y  solo  deseo  que 
Dios  me  de  una  larga  vida  para  ver  a  todos  mis  hijos  bien  establecidos. — 
Asi  sea,  Don  Enrique,  lo  deseo  para  entrambos. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Docs  your  brother  never  go  out  on  horseback?  Sometimes;  but 
not  very  often. 

2.  What  can  be  the  reason  of  that  ?  I  thought  he  was  very  fond  of 
horses  and  riding  on  horseback.  So  he  is ;  but  he  docs  not  often  take 
exercise  of  that  kind  for  fear  of  falling. 

3.  How  does  he  go  to  the  Central  Park,  in  that  case  ?  Why,  in  a 
carriage  of  course. 


212 


LESSOX     XLIII. 


4.  Go  away  !  "What  carriage  does  he  go  in  ?  In  his  cousin's,  of  course, 
for  "want  of  one  of  his  own. 

5.  "WTio  will  give  me  a  cigarette  ?  No  one  here ;  there  is  nobody 
here  that  smokes  any  thing  but  cigars  or  pipes. 

6.  Too  bad  I  May  I  ask  why  none  of  you  use  the  cigarette  ?  Cer- 
tainly ;  and  we  shall  tell  you  with  the  greatest  pleasure :  at  one  time 
we  all  smoked  what  you  call  "cigarette,"  but  what  we  call  a  "poor 
man's  cigar,"  until  one  day  Henry  came  (you  know  Henry  is  something 
of  a  doctor),  and,  with  his  head  erect,  said  with  a  voice  of  thunder : 
"  What's  this  ?  smoking  cigarettes  ?  " 

v.  Well !  what  more  did  he  say  ?  "  Don't  you  know  that  what  you 
are  smoking  there  is  nothing  more  than  paper  ?    You  will  all  be  sick ! " 

8.  What  did  you  do  then  ?  We  were  at  first  surprised ;  but  very 
soon  we  promised  never  to  smoke  such  a  thing  again,  for  it  was  good  for 
nothing,  and  only  tasted  of  paper. 

9.  Be  that  as  you  please ;  for  my  part  I  shall  always  prefer  the  ciga- 
rette to  the  cigar  {tabaco).  Perhaps  you  are  right ;  each  one  has  his 
taste,  and  so  we  shall  say  no  more  about  it. 

10.  What  news  do  you  bring  from  Boston?  Some  good,  and  some 
bad  :  my  cousin  has  been  very  fortunate  in  that  affah'  I  spoke  of  to  you ; 
but  he  met  last  week  with  an  unfortunate  accident. 

11.  Ah!  how  was  that?  He  was  out  riding  in  company  with  some 
friends,  and  in  returning  home  he  fell  off  his  horse. 

12.  I  am  very  sorry  indeed ;  and  I  hope  he  may  soon  bo  able  to  attend 
to  his  business. 

13.  What  do  you  think  of  playing  a  game  of  chess  ?  I  am  ready  to 
play  one,  if  you  wish ;  but  yoxi  will  not  find  my  game  very  good. 

14.  Why  do  you  not  practise  more  than  you  do  ?  I  have  practised 
very  much,  with  a  desire  to  become  perfect  in  the  game,  but  have  not 
been  able  to  succeed. 


LESSON    XLIII. 


Advert  ir. 

Conjugar. 
Desconfiar. 
Cometer. 
Distiusruir. 


To  take  notice,  to  observe,  to 

warn. 
To  conjugate. 
To  distrust,  to  mistrust. 
To  commit. 
To  distinguish. 


LESSON     XLIII. 


213 


Formal*. 

Devolver. 

Descuidar. 

Pertenecor. 

Molestar. 

Eesultar. 


To  form,  to  shape. 

To  return,  to  give  back.      [mind. 

To  neglect,  to  be  at  ease  in  one's 

To  belong. 

To  molest,  to  trouble. 

To  result,  to  turn  out. 


{The  learner  ought  by  this  time  to  know  almost  all  the  conjugaiions,  loth  of 
the  regular  and  the  irregular  verbs  ;  should  lie  at  any  time  be  at  a  loss  for  some 
part  of  a  verb,  he  may  refer  to  the  conjugalioTis  at  the  end  of  the  grammar.) 


Cada. 

Every,  each. 

Sin  duda. 

Certainlj,  without  doubt. 

[Adelante 

! 

Go  on !  go  ahead !  come  in  1 

En  a<lelante. 

Henceforth. 

Compuesto. 

Compound. 

Irregular. 

Irregular, 

Oompleto. 

Complete. 

Varios. 

Various,  divers,  several. 

Simple. 

Simple. 

Seguro. 

Secure,  sure. 

Obvio. 

Obvious. 

Lo  dcmas. 

The  rest. 

j  Bill  of  lading. 
( Knowledge. 

Condicion. 

Condition. 

Conocimiento. 

Navidad,  or ) 
Natividad.    f 

Nativity,     Christ 

Jose. 

Joseph. 

mas. 

Articulo. 

Article,  section. 

Kelacion. 

Relation. 

Pronorabre. 

Pronoun. 

Duda. 

Doubt. 

Participio. 

Participle. 

Ventaja. 

Advantage. 

Gerundio. 

Gerund. 

Erase. 

Phrase. 

Adverbio. 

Adverb.  , 

Prontitud. 

Promptitude. 

Pisesente. 

Present. 

Sentencia. 

Sentence. 

Imperfecto. 

Imperfect. 

Conjugacion.  • 

Conjugation. 

Perfecto. 

Perfect. 

Vcrdad. 

Truth. 

Futuro. 

Future. 

'Imprudencia. 

Imprudence. 

Pluscuamperfccto.  Pluperfect. 

Preposicion. 

Preposition. 

Jufinitivo. 

Infinitive. 

Conjnncion. 

Conjunction. 

Indicativo. 

Indicative. 

Interjeccion. 

Interjection. 

Imperativo. 

Imperative. 

Paz. 

Peace. 

Sabjuntivo, 

Subjunctive. 

Molestia. 

Trouble. 

214 


LESSOK     XLIII. 


COMPOSITION. 


Descuido  V. 


6  Cuantos  tiempos  tiene  el  modo  indica- 

tivo? 
Ocho :   cuatro   simples  y  cuatro  com- 

puestos. 
Bueno  faera  (or  seria)  no  descuidarse. 

Conviniera  {or  couvendria)  que  se  hicic- 

se  la  paz. 
Aunque  dijeras  {or  dijeses)  la  verdad, 

no  te  creeria. 
j  Ojala  ceaara  {or  cesase)  la  guerra !  asi 

seriamos  mas  felloes. 
Pense  que  estudiaras. 
No  crei  que  estudiase  V. 

Juzgu6  que  cstudiaria  V. 
Dije  que  leyeras. 

Dijo  que  leerias. 

Dijimos  que  leyese. 

Deseaba  que  ganaras  {or  ganases). 

Quiso  que  te  casaras  {or  casases). 

Xo  se  si  iria  6  no. 

Si  tuviera  {or  si  tuviese)  bueno.^;  libros 

leeria. 
Seria  imprudencia  ir  con  este  tiempo. 
No  quiso  ir. 

Debemos  perJonar  a  nuestros  enemigos. 
V.  pueJe  hablar,  pero  yo  no  lo  puedo. 
6  Si  bubiera  {or  hubicse)  Y..recibido  los 

libros  me  los  habria  V.  prestado  ? 

Si  los  hubiera  {or  hubiese)  recibido  se. 

los  habria  prestado ;  pero  no  los  he 

recibido  aun. 
En  lugar  de  venir  a  verme  me  escribio. 

El  no  jugarA  por  temor  de  perder  su 

dinero. 
i  Quiera  Dios  que  se  corrija  ! 


Make  yourself  easy  (or  bo  at  case  in 

your  mind). 
How  many  tenses  has  the  indicative 

mood  ? 
Eight :  four  simple  and  four  compound. 

It  would  be  well  not  to  bo  off  one's 

guard. 
It  would  be  well  if  peace  were  made. 

Though  thou  wort  to  toll  the  truth,  he 

would  not  believe  thee. 
Would  to  God  the  war  would  come  to 

an  end  !  we  should  then  be  happier. 
I  thought  thou  wouldst  study. 
I  did  not  think  you  would  study  (or 

were  studying). 
I  judged  you  would  study. 
I  said  thou  wert  to  read  (or  wouldst 

read). 
He  said  thou  wouldst  read. 
We  said  he  was  to  read. 
He  wished  thee  to  win. 
He  wished  thee  to  get  married. 
I  do  not  know  whether  he  would  go  or 

not. 
Had  I  (or  if  I  had)  good  books  I  would 

read. 
It  were  imprudent  to  go  in  this  weather. 
He  would  not  go. 
We  should  forgive  our  enemies. 
You  can  speak,  but  I  cannot. 
Had  you  received  (or  if  you   had  /t> 

ceived)  the  books  would  you   have 

lent  them  to  me  ?  , 

If  I  had  received  them  I  would  have 

lent  them  to  you ;  but  I  hare  not  re- 
ceived them  yet. 
Instead  of  coming  to  see  me,  he  wrote 

to  me. 
He  will  not  play,  for  fear  of  losing  his 

money. 
God  grant  that  ho  may  change  ! 


LESSON     XLIII, 


215 


i  Asi  sea !     Lo  desco  para  enlrambos. 
Bebo  a  la  salud  de  V.,  Don  Enrique. 
A  la  de  V.,  Don  Carlos. 
Sefiores,  manos  ii  la  obra,  no  sea  que 

no  podamos  acabar  a,  tiempo. 
De  todos  modos  crco  que  no  lo  conse- 

guir6mo3. 


iSjiny  c 
leaft'i, 


I  drink  to  your  heSft'i,  Mr.  Henry, 

Your  health,  Mr.  Charles. 

To  work,  gentlemen,  for  fear  we  should 

not  be  able  to  finish  in  time. 
At  all  events,  I  do  not  think  wc  shall 

succeed. 


EXPLa^^ATION. 

210.  Imperfect  axd  Pluperfect  of  the  Subjuxctive. — 
Although  it  has  been  deemed  expedient,  in  the  example  of  the 
conjugation  of  verbs  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  to  give  but  one 
English  equivalent  for  each  of  the  three  terminations  ria,  ra^ 
se,  it  is  not  to  be  inferred  therefrom  that  they  may  be  used  in- 
discriminately. Indeed,  the  correct  application  of  each  of 
these  terminations  presents  as  much  difficulty  to  the  student  of 
Spanish  as  does  that  of  the  English  signs  mighty  covXd^  should^ 
would  to  tlie  foreigner  learning  English.  The  following  rules 
will,  however,  serve  as  a  guide  in  all  ordinary  cases,  and  enable 
the  pupil  to  surmount  not  a  few  of  the  mosjt  serious  obstacles 
to  the  right  use  of  the  terminations  in  question. 

1st.  When  the  sentence  begins  without  a  conditional  con- 
junction, the  verb  may  take  cither  the  first  or  the  second  ter- 
mination {ria  or  ra) ;  as. 


Bueno  seria  {or  fucra)  no  descuidarsc. 


It  would  be  well  not  to  be  off  one's 

guard. 
It  would  be  well  if  peace  were  made. 


Convendria  {or  conviniera)  que  se  hi 

clese  la  paz. 

2d.  In  sentences  beginning  with  si,  slno,  aimque,  hien  que, 
dado  que,  &c.,  or  with  an  interjection  expressive  of  desire, 
either  the  second  or  third  termination  may  be  employed  {ra  or 
se)  ;  and  were  it  necessary  to  repeat  the  same  tense  in  the 
second  clause  of  the  sentence  (in  order  to  show  what  would 
take  place  as  the  result  of  the  condition  expressed  in  the  first 
clause),  the  first  termination  {Ha)  may  then  be  used  ;  as, 
Aunque  dijeras  {or  dijoscs)  la  vcrdad,  I      Though  thou  toldest  (or  wert  to  tell) 

no  tc  creeria.  |  the  truth,  he  would  not  believe  thee. 

3d.  When  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  is  preceded  by 
a  verb  in  the  preterit  definite  of  the  indicative,  signifying  pen- 


216  LESSON     XLIII. 

sar^  to  think,  dfcir,  to  say,  or  such  like,  any  of  the  tei-minations 
may  be  used ;  but  it  must  be  observed  that  the  idea  conveyed 
will  be  different,  according  to  the  termination  employed ;  as, 

I  thought  you  would  study. 

I  did  not  think  you  were  studying,  or 

I  did  not  think  you  would  study, 
I  judged  you  would  study. 

I  said  you  would  read. 
He  s.iid  you  were  to  read. 
We  said  he  was  to  read. 


Pens6  que  estudiara  V.,  or  que  cstu- 

diaHa  V. 
No  crei  que  cstudiase  Y.{pr  estudiara) 

V, 
Juzgu6  que  estudia>'/a  {or  estudiaro) 

V, 
Dije  que  leyera  {or  leer/a)  V, 
Dijo  que  leyesc  {or  leyera)  V. 
Dijimos  que  leyera  {or  leyese). 


4th.  But  if  this  tense  be  preceded  or  governed  by  a  verb  in 
any  of  the  past  tenses  of  the  indicative,  signifying  desear,  to 
desire,  querer^  to  wish,  or  by  any  verb  of  such  nature,  then  the 
second  termination  {ra)  or  the  third  (se)  must  be  used,  and 
never  tlie  first  {ria) ;  as, 

Deseaba  que  ganaz-a  {or  ganase)  V.      I      He  was  desirous  that  you  might  win. 

Quiso  que  V.  se  casara  {or  casasc).      |      He  wished  you  to  get  married, 

A  glance  at  the  foregoing  mles  and  examples  will  suffice  in 
order  to  observe  that  the  first  and  second  terminations  {ria  and 
ra)  may  be  used  one  for  the  other,  without  any  change  in  the 
sense  of  the  phrase ;  that  the  second  may  also  be  used  for  the 
third  (that  is'to  say,  ra  for  se),  but  that  the  first  and  third  are 
of  an  entirely  different  meaning,  and,  in  consequence,  can  never 
be  substituted  one  for  the  other.  Another  pecitliarity  of  the 
first  {ria)  is,  that  it  can  never  be  preceded  by  a  conditional  con- 
junction, while  the  second  and  third  may. 

5th.  When,  in  translating  into  Spanish,  ichether  is  to  be 
translated  by  si,  would  or  should  must  be  rendered  by  the  ter- 
mination ria ;  as, 
No  se  si  iria.  \      I  do  not  know  whether  he  would  go. 

6th.  The  inverted  forms  had  I,  had  he,  &c.,  meaning  if  I 
had,  if  lie  had,  &c.,  are  always  to  be  turned  into  Spanish  by 
either  of  the  terminations  ra  or  se,  preceded  by  the  conjunc- 
tion si ;  as. 

Si  tuviera  {or  tuviese)  buenos  libros,  I      Had  I  (or  if  I  had)  good  books,  I 

leeria.  I  would  read. 


LESSON     XLIII.  217 

Vth.  Were,  used  in  the  place  of  would  be,  may  be  translated 
by  either  ria  or  ra,  never  by  se ;  as, 
Seria  {or  fuera)  imprudencia  ir  con  I      It  were    imprudent    to   go  in   this 
este  tiempo.  I  weather. 

211.  The  English  auxiliaries,  may,  might,  can,  could,  will, 
looidd  and  shoidd  are  sometimes  to  be  translated  into  Spanish 
by  princiiDal  verbs  of  the  same  meaning,  and  not  merely  ren- 
dered by  corresponding  terminations ;  as, 

No  qu'iso  ir.  I      He  would  not  go. 

V.  puedc  hablar,  pero  yo  no  lo  puedo.  \      You  may  (or  can)  speak,  but  I  cannot. 

In  the  first  example  we  see,  that  by  would  not  is  conveyed 
the  idea  of  the  want  of  will  or  desire  on  the  part  of  the  person 
alluded  to,  and  not  the  idea  of  that  person's  going  or  not  going, 
as  dependent  on  a  condition.  Had  the  latter  been  the  sense 
intended,  wo  should  then  have  rendered  would  by  the  termi- 
nation ria  of  the  verb  ir,  to  go ;  thus, 

EI  no  iria.  \      He  would  not  go ; 

for,  in  that  case,  the  object  would  have  been  simply  to  predict 
that  he  would  not  go,  as  dependent  on  some  such  condition  as, 
if  I  did  not  go  too,  si  yo  nofuese  tamhien.  Hence,  the  closest 
attention  is  required,  in  order  to  find  the  real  meaning  of  the 
auxiliaries  above  mentioned,  before  attempting  to  translate  them. 

212.  The  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  denotes  a  contingent 
action  that  took  place  some  time  ago,  or  that  is  taking  place  at 
the  present  time,  or  that  will  take  place  after  the  completion 
of  the  action  expressed  by  the  determining  verb. 

213.  The  pluperfect  represents  a  contingent  action  as  com- 
pleted-before  some  period  of  time  already  past,  or  before  some 
other  action  which  is  now  also  completed,  or  which  would  be 
now  completed  had  it  taken  place. 

The  closest  attention  to  the  foregoing  remarks  is  essential, 
in  order  to  avoid  the  improper  substitution  of  the  tenses  of  the 
indicative  for  those  of  the  subjunctive,  which  all  foreigners,  and 
especially  the  English,  are  most  liable  to  commit. 


10 


218  LESSON     XLIII. 


COXVERSATIOX  AXD  VERSION*. 


1.  ^Duda  V.  quo  so  haga  la  paz  este  verano  ?  Convenclria  (or  convi- 
■  niera)  que  se  hiciese  la  paz ;  pero  temo  que  no  se  baga. 

2.  I  Iria  V.  a  Europa  si  tuviera  {or  tuviese)  tiempo  ?  Xo  iria  aunque 
tuviera  tiempo,  si  no  tuviese  dinero. 

3.  ;Ojala!  tudera  V.  (or  tuviescj  muclio  dincvo,  porque  entonces 
mc  prestai'ia  V.  alguno ;  jno  es  asi?  Si  tuviera  mucho  le  prestaria  a  V. 
alguno ;  pero  con  la  condicion  de  que  me  lo  devolviese  pronto. 

4.  I  Teme  V.  acaso  que  no  se  lo  devolviera  ?  Todo  pudiera  suceder, 
amigo  mio. 

6.  Si  V.  me  liubicra  {or  liubiese)  prostado  algo,  y  yo  no  se  lo  bubiese 
{or  bubiera)  devuelto,  V.  tendria  razon  en  desconfiar. — Todo  eso  esta  muy 
bien ;  pero  si,  en  lugar  do  ser  V.,  fuera  yo  el  que  necesitai-a  dinero,  y  V. 
el  que  lo  tuviera,  i  me  lo  prestaria  ?    Por  supuesto  que  si. 

6.  Pues  con  todo  eso  yo  no  s6  si  V.  lo  haiMa.— ^Porqu6  piensa  V.  tan 
mal  de  mi  ? 

7.  I  Ha  olvidado  V.  ya  que  el  alio  pasado,  por  Navidad,  fui  a  pedii-le  a 
Y.  cien  pesos  y  me  los  nego  V.?  Mal  pudiera  yo  prcstarselos  a  V. 
cuando  yo  no  los  tenia ;  pero  este  V.  seguro,  Don  Jose,  que  yo  bubiera 
tenido  un  gran  placer  en  bab^rselos  prestado  a  V.  si  los  bubiera  {or  bu- 
biese) tenido. 

8.  I  Si  V.  snpiera  usar  correctaments  los  tiempos  y  modos  del  vcrbo. 
sabria  V.  bablar  espaQol  ?  Si,  seuor,  con  los  conocimientos  que  ya  tengo 
de  las  demas  partes  do  la  oracion,  creo  que  bablaria  bien  el  esi>anol  si  su- 
piera  nsar  bien  los  tiempos  y  modos  del  verbo. 

9.  I  Qu6  es  lo  mas  importante  al  aprender  una  Icngna  ?  El  conoci- 
miento  de  todo  lo  que  bace  relacion  al  verbo. 

10.  ^Porqu6  cree  V.  que  el  verbo  es  lo  mas  importante?  Porquo  sin 
los.verbos  no  se  pucdc  formar  una  sola  scntencia. 

11.  jLaego,  scgun  eso,  bastard  aprender  la  conjugacion  de  los  verbos 
regulares  6  irregularcs  para  bablar  una  lengua?  Iso,  seilor,  si  nno  sabe 
conjugar  los  verbos  como  regularmente  se  conjugan  en  los  gramaticas ; 
pero  si  sabiendolos  conjugar  como  se  debe. 

12.  jPues  qu^,  bay  algun  otro  raodo  do  conjugar  los  verbos?  Los 
verbos  debcn  conjagarse  forraando  sentencias  completas  ea  todos  sus 
modos  y  tiempos. 

13.  ^Que  ventajas  rcsultan  de  csto?  Las  ventajas  son  obvias,  pues 
formando  sentencias  completas  con  cada  tiempo  y  modo  se  aprende  a  dis- 
tinguir  estos  tiempos  y  modos,  acabando  por  usarlos  correctamente. 

14.  ^Y  cree  V.  que  bablaria  bien  el  espanol  si  pudiese  baccr  sentencias 
en  todos  los  tiempos  y  modos  del  verbo?    Sin  duda  alguna,  una  vez  que 


LESSOIf     XLIII.  219 

V.  forme  estas  sentcneias  con  prontitutl  y  sin  cometcr  faltas,  hablard  Y. 
espafiol. 

15.  Pues  manos  u  la  obra,  ^quiere  V.  que  liaga  algimas  en  el  raodo  in- 
dicativo  ?  No,  senor,  eu  las  lecciones  pasadas  ha  practicado  V.  bastante 
con  ese  modo,  haga  V.  algiinas  ahora  con  el  modo  subjuntivo. 

16.  Preseutc:  ^DeseaV.  que  yo  aprenda  el  espafiol  ?  ^Escorrecta? 
Perfectamente ;  adelante. 

17.  Perfecto  de  subjuntivo :  Temo  que  la  gnerra  no  baya  acabado  en 
Europa.  jEsta  bieni  Si,  sefior,  esta  muy  bien;  pero  no  necesita  V. 
preguntarrae  a  cada  sentencia  que  haga,  si  esta  correcta,  porqne  yo  ten- 
dre  buen  cuidado  de  advertirselo  a  V.  cuando  no  sea  asi. 

18.  Pluicuaraperfecto  :  Si  yo  hubiera  creido  que  esto  le  molestaba  a  V. 
no  se  lo  habria  preguntado. — Esto  no  me  molesta  de  ningun  modo  y  espero 
que  V.  no  se  moleste  tampoco  por  lo  que  yo  acabo  de  decir. 

1 9.  Imperfecto :  ^  Seria  suficiente  liacer  una  frase  en  cada  tiempo  ? 
Seria  suficiente  si  cada  tiempo  se  usase  en  un  solo  caso  ;  pero  como  hay 
mucbos  y  muy  varios,  convendria  practicar  en  todos  tanto  como  fuese 
posible. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Before  going  out,  Henry,  I  wish  to  give  you  a  piece  of  advice. 
Well,  go  on ! 

2.  What  is  that  advice*  you  have  to  give  me?  Hold  your  tougiu, 
and  hear  what  I  have  to  tell  you. 

3.  Did  you  warn  your  cousin  not  to  lend  his  carriage  to  that  young 
man  who  asked  him  for  it  ?  Yes,  but  he  said  he  would  do  so,  and  that 
ho  did  not  distrust  that  young  man  at  all. 

4.  Do  you  know  how  to  conjugate  all  the  verbs  in  the  Spanish  lan- 
guage now  ?  I  am  not  sm'e ;  my  memory  is  not  very  good  ;  and  so  I  al- 
ways like  to  look  at  my  grammar,  for  fear  of  making  (committing)  mistakes. 

5.  Can  you  tell  me  how  many  conjugations  of  regular  verbs  there 
are  in  Spanish  ?    Yes,  sir,  there  are  three. 

6.  When  you  see  a  new  verb,  how  do  you  know  to  what  conjugation 
it  belongs  ?    By  the  termination  of  the  infinitive  mood. 

7.  Can  you  tell  me  to  what  conjugation  the  verb  comprar  belongs? 
Certainly ;  it  belongs  to  the  first. 

8.  IIow  do  you  know  that  ?  I  see  the  characteristic  termination  of 
the  first  conjugation,  which  is  ar. 

9.  And  of  which  conjugation  is  entender  ?  The  second ;  its  termina- 
tion being  er. 

10.  Very  well.  Now,  if  I  say  existio,  can  you  tell  me  all  about  that 
verb  ?    Yes,  sir,  it  is  a  regular  verb,  third  person  singular,  of  the  preterit 

♦  Comejo.  ' 


220 


LESSON     XLIV, 


definite  tense  of  the  indicative  mood ;  it  belongs  to  the  third  conjugation, 
its  infinitive  being  existir. 

11.  Are  there  in  Spanish  no  other  conjugations  than  tliose  which  you 
have  just  told  me  ?  Yes,  very  many.  Those  I  liave  mentioned  {mencio- 
nar)  already  ai'c  the  three  regular  ones. 

12.  "What  do  you  understand  by  '^ regular  verbs" ?  Eegular  verbs  are 
those  which  are  conjugated  in  all  their  moods  and  tenses  exactly  like  the 
models  (modelos)  given  in  different  parts  of  the  grammar. 

13.  And  "irregular  verbs,"  what  are  they?  Those  whose /Conjugation 
is  different  from  the  models.  / 

14.  If  you  could  speak  Spanish  as  well  as  English,  do  you  think  you 
would  prefer  it  to  your  own  language  ?  I  would  like  to  be  able  to  speak 
it  as  well ;  but  there  is  no  language  in  the  world  that  I  would  prefer  to 
my  own. 

15.  If  I  were  to  lend  you  this  phrase  book  would  yon  return  it  to  me 
next  week  ?  I  would  it'  you  wanted  it,  and  that  I  promised  to  return  it 
to  you  at  that  time. 


LESSON    XLIV. 


Aproximar. 

To  approach,  to  draw  near. 

Apurar. 

To  perplex,  to  press. 

Aullar. 

To  howl. 

Ladrar. 

To  bark. 

Cuidar. 

To  take  care  of. 

Dejar. 

To  leave,  to  let. 

Emplear. 

To  employ. 

Matar. 

To  kiU. 

Permitir. 

To  permit. 

Eobar. 

To  rob,  to  steal. 

Imponer. 

To  impose. 

Tantico. 

Somewhat ;  a  little. 

Vaya  de  cuento. 

To  begin  juy  story. 

Como   iba  diciendo   de  mi 

As  I  was  saying  (in  my  story) 

cuento. 

A  mi  costa. 

At  my  expense,  to  my  cost. 

Ya  le  veo  a  V.  venir. 

I  see  what  you  are  at. 

Venir  a  pelo. 

To  suit  exactly,  to  be  apropos. 

LESSON     XHV. 


221 


De  sopeton. 
Cuanto  mas. 
i  Por  Dios ! 


Unexpectedly. 

The  more. 

For  Heaven's  sake  I 


jEe! 

Ho!  lioa!  What? 

jOiga! 

Indeed !     Just  listen 

Cliico. 

Little,  small. 

Revoltoso. 

Noisy. 

Caliente. 

Hot,  warm. 

Apurado. 

Embarrassed. 

Burlon. 

Jester,  scoffer. 

Natural. 

Natural. 

Aumentativo. 

Augmentative. 

Diminutivo. 

Diminutive. 

Picaro. 

Rogue,  rascal. 

Satisfecho. 

Satisfied,  contented. 

Cuento. 

Corro. 

Cojo. 

Brazo. 

Ademaii. 

Francisco,  Pace 

(dim.). 
Jos6,  Pepe  (dim.). 
Caldo. 
Calduclio. 
Pistoletazo. 
Poetastro. 
Lugar. 
Garrote. 
Garrotazo. 

Canon. 

Cafionazo. 

Ladron. 


Tale,  story. 

Group  of  persons. 

Lame. 

Arm. 

Attitude. 

Francis,  Frank. 

Joseph,  Joe. 
Broth. 
Poor  broth. 
Pistol  shot. 
Poetaster. 
Place. 
Bludgeon. 
Blow  of  a  blud- 
geon. 
Cannon. 
Cannon-shot. 
Tliief,  robber. 


Anecdota. 

Casuca. 

Mosca, 

Necesidad. 

Pierna. 

Boca. 

Maria,  Mariqui- 

ta  (dbn.). 
Concepcion, 

Concha  (dim.) 
Pistola. 
Estratagema. 
Josefa,  P6pa 

(dim.). 
Francisca,  Paca 

(dim.). 
Costumbre. 
Clase. 


Anecdote. 
Miserable  house. 
Fly ;      tiresome 

person. 
Necessity,  need. 
Leg. 
Mouth. 
Mary. 

(No  EngJisJi  cquiz 
,     alent.) 
Pistol. 
Stratagem. 
Josephine. 

Frances,  Fanny. 

Custom. 

Class. 


COMPOSITION. 


Lo  aprendi  a,  mi  costa. 

Antes  no  le  habia  comprendido  4  Y., 

ahora  ya  le  veo  venir. 
£1  me  dio  la  noticia  dc  sopeton. 


I  learned  it  to  my  cost. 

I  did  not  understand  you  before,  but 

now  I  see  what  you  are  at. 
He  gave  me  the  news  unexpectedly. 


222 


LESSON     XLIV. 


i  For  Dios  !  D.  Francisco,  no  bable  V. 

de  eso. 
(,  Conoce  V.  a  aquel  hombron  ? 
Si,  sefior,  es  el  marido  de  mi  Tccinita 

Mariquita. 
V.  me  sorprende.     ;  Es  posible  que  sea 

aquel  bombronazo  el  marido  de  esa 

mujercita ! 
i  Es  ese  hombre  cojo  ? 
Si,  seiior ;  en  la  ultima  guerra  recibio 

an  pistoletazo  en  una  piema. 
(,  Ha  matado  Y.  alguna  vez  a  alguno  ? 
Si,  seiior,  el  a5o  pasado  mate  de  un 

garrotazo  al  perro  de  mi  vecino,  por- 

que  no  me  dejaba  dormir,  aullando 

todita  la  noche. 
Ese  hombre  es  un  picaronazo,  que  no 

hace  sino  bcbcr  y  no  atiende  a  las 

necesidades  dc  su  familia. 
Este  perro  es  chiquito,  pero  yo  tengo 

uno  cliiquirritito. 
Carlotita,  ve  L  cuidar  de  tu  hermanita. 

Ese  nino  es  xm  picarillo. 

Esta  niiia  es  una  coquetilla. 

Mi  pobrecico  hijo  esta  muy  malo. 

Pepe,  ij  has  visto  mi  caballito  ? 

Si ;  pero  yo  en  tu  lugar,  Paco,  le  llama- 
ria  caballejo,  poi-quc  creo  que  no 
merecc  el  nombrc  de  caballito. 

Pepe  vino  callandito. 

Mi  amigo  esta  apuradillo. 

Esa  nina  esta  muertecita  de  frio. 

Tu  casa  esta  Icjitos. 

El  no  es  poeta,  sino  poetastro. 


For  Heaven's  sake !  Mr.  Francis,  do 
not  speak  of  that. 

Do  you  know  that  big  man  ? 

Yes,  sir,  he  is  the  husband  of  my  little 
neighbor  Mary. 

You  surprise  me.  Is  it  possible  that 
that  enormous  man  is  that  little 
woman's  husband ! 

Is  that  man  lame  ? 

Yes,  sir ;  in  the  last  war  he  received  a 
pistol  shot  in  one  of  liis  legs. 

Did  you  ever  kill  any  one  ? 

Yes,  sir ;  lust  year  I  killed  my  neigh- 
bor's dog  with  a  bludgeon,  for  he 
would  not  let  me  sleep,  howling  the 
whole  night  over. 

That  man  is  a  great  rascal  who  does 
nothing  but  drink,  and  does  not  at- 
tend to  the  wants  of  his  family. 

This  dog  is  pretty  small,  but  I  have  a 
very  little  one. 

Charlotte,  go  and  take  care  of  your  lit- 
tle sister. 

This  child  is  a  Uttle  rogue. 

This  little  girl  is  a  little  coquette. 

My  poor  httle  son  is  very  sick. 

Joe,  have  you  seen  my  little  horse  ? 

I  did ;  but  if  I  were  you,  Frank,  I 
would  call  it  a  nag,  for  I  think  it  is 
not  worthy  the  name  of  (little)  horse. 

Joe  came  in  softly. 

My  friend  is  a  little  embarrassed. 

That  little  girl  is  almost  dead  with  cold. 

Your  house  is  pretty  far  away. 

He  is  no  poet,  but  a  poetaster. 


EXPLANATION. 

214.  Augment ATiTE  a>t>  DiMrNunvE  notjns  are  those 
derivatives  whicli  serve  to  augment  or  diminish  the  significa- 
tion of  their  primitives ;  not  only  in  regard  to  size,  but  also  to 
esteem,  character,  dignity,  importance,  &c. 

They  are  formed  by  adding  various  terminations  to  the 
primitive  nouns,  dropping  generally  the  vowel,  if  it  end  in  one. 


LESSON     XLIV.  223 

The  terminations  which  are  used  are  very  numerous  ;  but  those 
most  frequently  adopted  are  azo,  on,  oU  for  the  augmentive 
masculine,  and  aza^  ona,  ota  for  the  augmentive  feminine  nouns. 
These  terminations  are  equivalent  in  their  meaning  to  the  Eng- 
lish words  big,  large,  stout,  tally  and  such  like ;  as, 

PRIMITIVES.  DERIVATITES. 


Ilombrc.  A  man. 

Mujer.  A  woman. 


Hombro.'i,  hom-  A  tall,  or  large, 
braz9,  liombrofo.  man. 

MujeroKa,  mu-  A  tall,  or  large, 
jeraza,  mujcroto.  woman. 

But  the  nouns  which  have  those  terminations  are  not  al- 
ways augmentatives,  since  the  nouns  pistoletazo,  pistol  shot; 
caiionazo,  cannon  shot ;  garrotazo,  blow  of  a  bludgeon,  do  not 
augment  the  signification  of  their  primitives,  pistola,  canon 
and  garrote,  and* consequently  are  not  augmentatives. 

Familiar  use  has  introduced  many  other  augmentative  and 
diminutive  terminations;  as, 

Hombronazo.  I      A  very  large  man. 

Picaronozo.  |      A  very  great  rascal. 

The  terminations  most  used  as  diminutives  are  in,  illo,  ito, 
ico,  ete,  icelo  or  ejo,  for  the  masculine ;  the  feminine  are  formed 
by  adding  a  to  the  termination  in,  and  by  changing  the  final 
vowel  of  the  others  into  a. 

Many  of  the  diminutive  terminations  may  acquire  a  still 
further  diminutive  signification,  by  adding  other  terminations 
to  them;  thus. 


Chico. 
Chiqu/to. 

ChiquirritiVo. 


Small. 
Very  small. 
Very,  very  small. 


The  manner  of  applying  these  terminations,  as  much  for 
their  different  meanings  as  for  their  various  orthographical  ac- 
cidents, admits  of  so  much  variety  that  practice  seems  the  only 
means  of  acquiring  the  proper  use  of  them  ;  as, 


Mi  hcrmanito. 
Un  hombrecz/o. 
Un  viejccjYo. 
El  cs  un  plcan7/o. 
CarlotiVa. 


My  dear  little  brother. 
A  dear  little  man. 
A  dear  little  old  man. 
He  is  a  dear  little  rogue. 
Dear  little  Charlotte. 


224 


LESSOX     XLIV. 


Una  pobre  viejeciia. 

Ella  cs  una  coquete7/a. 

Mi  probrecico  hijo  {or  mi  pobre 

hijiio). 
Un  caballe/o. 
Un  pobrefe. 
Un  ladronzaeZo. 
Un  reyezMe/o. 


A  poor  dear  little  old  woman. 
She  is  a  dear  little  coquette. 
My  poor  little  son. 

A  miserable  little  horse,  a  nag. 
A  poor  useless  creature. 
A  petty  young  thief. 
A  petty  king. 


215.  Besides  the  terminations  mentioned,  there  are  many 
others  which  may  be  called  irregular,  inasmuch  as  they  can  be 
affixed  to  certain  nouns  only,  among  them  the  most  irregular 
are  those  of  persons ;  as, 


Francisco,  Paco,  etc. 
Concepcion,  Concha,  etc. 
Jose,  Pepe,  etc. 
Maria,  Mariquita,  etc. 


Francis,  Frank. 

(iVi)  equivalent  in  English.') 

Joseph,  Joe. 

Marv. 


216.  Although  the  diminutives  proceed  in  general  from 
substantive  nouns,  as  we  see  by  the  preceding  examples,  they 
are  also  formed,  in  femiliar  style,  from  adjectives,  participles, 
gerunds,  and  even  from  adverbs  ;  thus  we  not  unfrequently 
say: 


Revoltoseffo  es  el  muchacho. 
MuerteceVo  de  frio. 
ToAito  el  dia. 
Pan  calent?7y. 
ApuradiV/o  estuvo. 
Vino  callandzVo. 
LejiVos  esta  tu  casa. 


The  boy  is  rather  turbulent. 

Half  dead  with  cold. 

The  whole  day  over. 

Warm  bread  (slightly  warm). 

He  was  somewhat  embarrassed. 

He  came  softly. 

Your  house  is  pretty  far  away. 


217.  Primitive  words,  ending  of  themselves  in  any  diminu- 
tive termination  (such  as  cepillo,  brush  ;  abanieo,  fan  ;  esp^o, 
looking-glass,  &c.),  cannot  take  an  additional  termination  simi- 
lar to  their  own,  Avithout  producing  a  disagreeable  sound,  which 
ought  always  to  be  avoided.  Words  ending  in  ito  or  ita  are 
excepted. 

The  same  termination  may  often  serve  to  express  affection, 
pity,  contempt,  &c.,  being  in  this  respect  like  the  interjec- 
tions, and  it  is  consequently  very  difficult  to  classify  them. 
"Very  often  their  real  meaning  can  be  distinguished  only 
by  the  nature  of  the  conversation  and  the  intonation  of  the 


.LESSON      XLIV.  225 

voice.  They  are,  nevertheless,  not  to  be  used  too  profusely, 
because  when  they  come  too  close  together  they  render  the 
discourse  monotonous,  in  consequence  of  the  similarity  existino- 
between  them. 

218.  There  are  in  Spanish  other  derivatives,  formed  more 
or  less  at  fancy,  and  which  are  not  augmentatives  or  diminu- 
tives, although  they  may  appear  to  be  such;  these  might  be 
called  depreciatives  {desprecioUivos),  because  there  is  always  in 
them  something  of  censure,  maliciousness,  or  mockery ;  as, 


Casa,  casuca. 
Poeta,  poetastro, 
Caldo,  calducho. 


House,  miserable-looking  house. 
Poet,  poetaster. 
Broth,  poor  broth. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Tiene  V.  lastima  de  aquel  pobreto  ?  No  tengo  lastima  de  61,  por- 
que  es  un  ladronzuelo. 

2.  I  Le  ha  robado  a  V.  algo  ?  No,  sefior,  61  sabe  muy  bien  que  si  se 
atreviese  A  robarme  yo  lo  mataria  de  un  pistoletazo. 

3.  Y  ^porque  no  de  un  garrotazo,  6  un  caiionazo  ?,  ^Porque?  No  s6 
porqu6,  probablemente  he  cmpicado  la  palabra  pistoletazo  porque  tengo 
una  pistola  y  no  tengo  ni  garrote,  ni  caOon. 

4.  No,  sefior,  esa  no  es  la  razon ;  i  quiere  V.  que  yo  se  la  diga  ?  Bien, 
veamos. 

5.  Y.  no  tiene  valor  para  matar  una  mosca  cuanto  mas  d  un  hombre ; 
pero  V.  queria  practicar  con  las  palabras  matar  j  pistoletazo  y  esta  es  la 
sola  razon  por  la  cual  V.  iba  a  coraeter  un  homicidio. 

6.  Vaya,  Don  Francisco,  V.  es  poeta,  hombre  de  ingenio  y  de  bucn 
humor  y  quiere  .divertirse  a  costa  mia,  i  no  es  verdad  ?  Ya  lo  veo  a  V. 
venir,  V.  quiere  hacerme  decir  que  no  soy  poeta  sino  poetastro  introdu- 
ciendo  esta  palabrita  mas  de  la  leccion. 

7.  Solo  le  faltaba  a  V.  llaraarse  Quevedo  para  serle  parecido  en  todo, 
hasta  en  el  nombre. — Mil  gracias  por  el  honor  de  la  comparacion,  pero 
volviendo  a  lo  del  pistoletazo. 

8.  i  Por  Dios !  D.  Francisco,  no  sea  V.  tan  burlon  y  dejeme  V.  estar 
en  paz. — Lo  dejare  a  V.,  Don  Pepe,  si  me  permite  contarle  un  cuentecito; 
y  para  que  le  parezca  a  V.  mas  interesante,  se  lo  contar6  a  V.  introducien- 
do  tantos  aumentativos  y  diminutivos  como  me  sea  posible. 

9.  Con  esa  condicion  le  escucho  a  V. — Pues  bien ;  vaya  de  cuento : 
Habia  un  hombrecillo  en  cierto  lugarcillo. — Y  observe  V.,  D.  Pepito, 
que  para  el  cuentecito  lo  misrao  hubiera  dado  que  el  hombre  hubiera  sido 

10* 


22G  LESSON     XLIV.     . 

liombroa  y  el  lugar  lugaron. — Adelante  con  el  cuentccillo  quo  mc  va  gu3- 
tando  uu  tantico.  Pues  cs  cl  caso  que  estc  liombron,  hombrecito,  hom- 
brecillo,  hoiubrotc,  borabrecico,  bombrazo,  hombronazo,  bombracho,  6 
como  v.  quiera  Uamarle.     .     .     . 

10.  Yo  no  quiero  Uamarle  nada,  V.  le  lia  Uamado  ya  suficiente ;  pero 
al  cuento,  al  cuento  6  se  acabara  el  ejercicio  sin  que  llegucraos  al  fin.— 
Pues  este  bombrezuelo  no  sabia  mas  que  nn  cuenteciUo ;  pero  lo  contaba 
h  todo  cl  mundo  que  cncontraba. 

11.  Pero  yo  no  comprendo  como  podia  hacer  que  su  cuento  vinlese  A 
pclo  y  V.  sabc  que  no  se  cuenta  un  cuento  asi  de  sopeton,  como  se  dan 
los  buenos  dias. — Al  principio,  el  viejote  se  encontraba  apuradillo  para 
conseguirlo ;  pero  cl  picaruelo  invento  despues  una  estratagema  por  me- 
dio do  la  cual  bizo  que  su  anecdotilla  viniera  a  pelo  siempre. 

12.  jOiga!  ^y  que  estratagema  fue  esa?  Oigala  V. ;  pero  dntes  debo 
advertir  a  V.  que  en  su  anecdota  liabia  algo  que  baci'a  rclacion  a,  cafiona- 
zos  y  pistol  etazos. 

13.  ;  He !  j  Ya  vuelve  V.  a  los  pistolctazos !  Pues  bien,  como  iba  di- 
ciendo  de  mi  cuento,  se  aproximaba  el  buen  yiejecito  callandito  a  cual- 
quier  corrillo  que  encontrase  y  ponidndose  cl  dedo  indice  sobre  la  boca 
en  ademan  de  imponer  silencio,  les  preguntaba.  "  i  Han  oido  Vds.  nn 
cafionazo  ? "  No,  senor,  era  naturalmcnte  la  respuesta ;  pues  bien,  res- 
pondia  mi  hombre  muy  satisfecbo. — Ahora  que  hablamos  de  cafionazos 
les  contare  a  Vds.  una  an6cdota    .     .     .     .     y  aqui  contaba  su  cuento. 

14.  Yo  no  veo  la  aplicacion  de  su  cuento  de  V.  todavia,  Sr.  D.  Fran- 
cisco.— j  Como  I  D.  Pepe,  i  no  ba  oido  V.  un  pistoletazo  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  How  did  you  like  tbat  story  by  Fernan  Caballero  whicb  I  lent 
you?  Very  mucb  indeed;  it  gives  a  very  good  idea  of  the  manners, 
customs  and  language  of  the  low  classes  in  Andalusia  (Ajidalucia). 

2.  What  did  tliat  man  want  ?  He  is  a  poor  lame  man  asking  for  a 
piece  of  bread,  or  a  few  cents  to  buy  some. 

3.  He  is  lame,  you  say ;  bow  did  that  happen  to  him  ?  He  says  he 
was  at  the  war  and  received  a  pistol  shot  in  the  leg. 

4.  What  does  the  physician  give  to  your  cousin  since  he  has  been 
sick  ?  He  has  given  him  some  medicine  {medicind),  and  says  he  must 
take  broth  three  times  a  day. 

5.  Do  you  like  broth  ?  Yes,  very  well ;  but  not  such  poor  broth  as 
they  make  for  my  cousin. 

6.  How  does  that  poor  man  make  his  living  since  he  lost  both  liis 
arms?  He  can  do  nothing  in  the  world,  and  lives  on  what  little  money 
he  gets  from  his  brother,  who  is  rather  embarrassed  himself  just  now. 


LESSON      XLV. 


227 


7.  Como  nearer  to  the  fire,  Louisa ;  it  is  a  little  cold  this  morning. 
Thank  yon,  I  do  not  feel  the  cold  much ;  hut  I  would  ho  obliged  to  you 
if  you  would  call  Fanny  in  to  warm  herself;  she  is  half  dead  with  cold. 

8.  Is  Henry  going  to  be  employed  by  that  merchant  to  whom  you 
spoke  for  him  some  time  ago  ?  Yes,  I  think  it  is  probable,  and  I  shall  be 
very  glad,  for  the  poor  felloio*  is  a  little  embarrassed,  and  has  been  so 
for  a  long  time. 

9.  If  I  were  in  your  place  I  would  not  allow  that  dog  to  howl  so  the 
whole  night  over.  My  father  will  not  let  me  spealc  about  it  to  our  neigh- 
bor, who  lives  in  that  miserable  old  liouse  next  to  ours ;  it  is  his  dog,  and 
he  ouglit  not  to  let  it  howl  in  such  a  manner. 

10.  Just  listen  to  him!  as  if  I  could  not  go  and  kill  it  with  a  blud- 
geon.— Kill  it!  There  would  be  no  necessity  for  killing  it;  just  give 
him  one  good  blow  with  the  bludgeon  you  talk  of  and  he  would  let  you 
sleep  in  future. 

11.  Have  you  ever  read  Don  Quixote?  No;  why?  If  you  take  the 
trouble  to  read  it  you  v;ill  find  a  very  good  anecdote  of  a  madman  {loco) 
and  a  dog,  in  the  first  cliapter  of  tlie  second  pait  of  that  justly  celebra- 
ted work. 

12.  Have  you  paid  attention  to  what  is  said  in  to-day's  lesson  on  aug- 
mentatives  and  diminutives  ?  Yes,  madam  ;  and  it  seems  to  me  that  the 
proper  use  of  them  must  make  a  language  expressive  and  elegant  in  a 
high  degree  {grado). 

13.  Is  Conccpcion  a  very  common  name  for  ladies  in  Spain?  There 
are  a  great  many  called  by  that  name  ;  the  diminutive  is  Concha. 

14.  Is  your  mother  satisfied  with  her  new  servant?     Very  much  so. 

15.  Why  did  she  let  the  other  one  go  away  ?  She  was  very  glad  to 
see  her  go  away,  because  she  used  to  steal  everything  that  came  to  her 
hand. 

16.  Is  that  coffee  warm?  No,  sir;  hut  I  could  warm  it  in  a  few 
minutes,  if  you  wished. 


LESSON    XLV. 

[know. 

Avisar.  To  advise,  to  notify,  to  let  one 

Admirar.  '  To  admire. 

Aconsejar.  To  counsel,  to  advise. 

Apremiar.  To  urge,  to  compel  one  to  do  any 

thing  by  order  of  court. 

*  Kemember  that  English  words  italicised  are  not  to  be  translated. 


228 


LESSON     XLV. 


Afectar. 

To  feign,  to  affect. 

Compadecer, 

To  pity. 

Convertir, 

To  convert. 

Desertar. 

To  desert. 

EmpeQar. 

To  pledge,  to  engage. 

Explicar. 

To  explain. 

Tusilar. 

To  shoot. 

Guardar. 

To  guard,  to  observe,  to  keep. 

Librar. 

To  free,  to  liberate,  to  deliver. 

Mentir. 

To  lie. 

Mencionar, 

To  mention. 

Permanecer. 

To  remain. 

Eelatar. 

To  relate. 

Santificar. 

To  sanctify. 

Suceder. 

To  happen,  to  succeed. 

Sonar. 

To  sound. 

Volar, 

To  fly. 

I  All  bahf 

Oh,  pshavr  I 

jTomal 

Indeed! 

Anclio, 

Wide,  broad. 

Falso. 

False. 

Calvo, 

Bald. 

Famoso. 

Famous. 

Notorio. 

Notorious,  well  known. 

Cr6dulo, 

Credulous. 

Critico. 

Critical. 

Formal, 

Formal,  straightforward. 

Supersticioso. 

Superstitious. 

Esc6ptico. 

Skeptic,  skeptical. 

De  todo  coraxon. 

With  all  my  heart. 

En  su  interior. 

In  his  mind. 

Ta  caigo. 

I  see  (or  understand). 

Bien  venido. 

Welcome. 

A  cual  mas. 

Viein^  with  each  other. 

De  buena  f6. 

In  good  faith. 

Esto  es. 

Tliat  is. 

Ya  lo  ve  Y. 

So  you  see. 

Sol.                      Sun. 

Oracion.                Prayer. 

Amor.                  Love. 

Ticrra.                  Earth,  land. 

LESSON     XLV, 


229 


Oielo. 

Keiuo. 

Fin. 

Deudor. 

General. 

Cuervo. 

Agiiero. 

Interior. 

Espiritu. 

Lodo. 


Sky,  heaven. 

Kingdom. 

End,  purpose. 

Debtor. 

General. 

Raven,  crow. 

Omen. 

Interior. 

Spirit. 

Mud. 


El  padre  nuestro.  The  Lord's  Prayer, 
Trcn.  Train. 

Parroquiauo.  Parishioner,  customer, 
Lector.  Reader. 


Calva. 

Ana. 

Voluntad. 
Profecia. 
Fisonomia. 

Tentacion. 

Sinceridad. 

Injusticia. 

Ridiculez. 

Compasion. 

Materia. 

Fe. 

Bolsa. 

Excepcion. 

Frente. 

Formalidad. 


Baldness,  the  bald 

part. 
Ann. 

Will,  choice. 
Prophecy. 
Physiognomy, 

countenance. 
Temptation. 
Sincerity. 
Injustice. 
Ridicule. 
Compassion. 
Matter. 
Faith. 
Purse. 
Exception. 
Forehead. 
Formality. 


COMPOSITION. 


Dios  te  lo  premie. 

Si  para  fines  de  aiio  no  hubiere  pagado, 
le  apremias  {or  apremiale,  or  le  ap»re- 
miar&s). 

Si  viene  {or  como  venga)  seri  bien  re- 
cibido. 

Quien  tal  diga  miente. 

Si  asi  lo  haces,  Dios  te  lo  premie. 

Si  al  salir  de  tu  casa  vieres  volar  Cuer- 
vos, dejalos  volar  y  mira  tu  donde 
pones  los  pies. 

Todo  hombre  calvo  no  tendra  pelo ;  y 
si  tuviere  alguno  no  sera  en  la  calva. 

Le  perdonaran  todo  lo  que  hicierc. 

Le  escribire  a  V.  lo  que  me  dijere. 

Si  permaneciere  aqui  algun  tiempo  so  lo 

avisare. 
Le  escribird  a  V.  lo  que  diga. 


May  God  reward  you  for  it. 
If  at  the  end  of  the  year  he  has  not 
paid  you,  compel  him  to  do  so. 

K  he  comes,  he  shall  be  well  received. 

Whoever  says  such  a  thing  lies. 

If  you  do  so,  may  God  reward  you. 

If  on  going  out  of  your  house  you  should 
see  crows  fly,  let  them  fly,  and  look 
where  you  put  your  own  feet. 

Every  bald  man  will  be  without  hair ; 
or  if  he  should  have  any,  it  will  not 
be  on  the  bald  part. 

They  will  forgive  him  every  thing  he 
may  do. 

I  will  write  to  you  what  he  may  (hap- 
pen to)  say  to  me. 

If  I  should  (or  should  I)  remain  here 
any  time,  I  will  let  you  know. 

I  will  write  to  you  what  he  may  say  to 
me. 


230 


LESSON     XL V. 


Le  perdonaria  lo  que  haga. 

Si  hubiere  salido  cuando  Y.  llegue. 
Aunquc  hubierc  llcgado  antes  que  re- 

ciba  la  carta. 
Aunque  baya  llegado  Sntes  que  reciba 

la  carta. 
EI  general  mando  que  todos  los  que 

desertaran  fuesen  fusilados. 

El  general  mando  que  todos  los  que 
hubieran  desertado  fuesen  fusilados. 

El  general  ha  mandado  que  todos  los 
que  desertaren  scan  fusilados. 

El  general  ha  mandado  que  todos  los 
que  hubieren  desertado  sean  fusila- 
dos. 

Quien  lo  dijere  miente. 

Si  viniere,  sera  bien  recibido. 

Si  asf  lo  hicieres. 


They  will  forgire  him  every  thing  he 

may  do. 
If  he  should  have  left  when  you  arrive. 
Although  he  may  have  arrived  before 

he  receives  the  letter. 
Although  he  may  have  arrived  before 

he  receives  the  letter. 
The  general  ordered  that  all  those  who 

might  (happen  to)  desert  should  be 

shot. 
The  general  ordered  that  all  those  who 

might  have  deserted  should  be  shot. 
The  general  has  ordered  that  all  those 

who  may  desert  (i.  e.  may  happen  to 

desert)  should  be  shot. 
The  general  has  ordered  that  all  those 

who  may  have  deserted  be  shot. 

Whoever  should  say  so  will  lie. 
If  he  should  come,  he  will  be  well  re- 
ceived. 
If  you  should  do  so. 


EXPLAXATIOIs\ 

219.  The  futuee  simple  of  the  subjunctive  mood  repre- 
sents a  contingent  action  as  to  take  place  some  time  hence  ;  as, 

I  will  write   to   you  what   he   may 

(happen  to)  say  to  me. 
They  will  forgive  him  everything  he 

may  do  in  future. 
If  I  should  (or  should  I)  remain  here 
any  time  I  shall  let  you  know. 


Le  escribire  a  V.  lo  que  me  dijere. 

Le  perdonaran  todo  lo  que  hiciere. 

Si  permaneciere  aqui  algvm  tiempo  se 
lo  avisare. 


220.  The  peesent  of  the  subjunctive  may  be  substituted 
for  the  foregoing  tense,  except  when  the  verb  is  preceded  by 
the  conditional  si ;  as,  Le  escribire  d  Y.  lo  que  diga  ;  Leperdo- 
nardn  lo  que  haga. 

2i2,\.  The  fttttjee  compound,  which  is  not  so  much  used 
as  the  simple,  denotes  a  contingent  action  subordinate  to  a 
future  event :  as. 


Si  hubiere  salido  cuando  V.  llegue. 


If   he  should  have  left  when  you 
arrive. 


LESSON     XLV, 


231 


Aunquc   hubio'e   llcgado   antes    que 
reciba  la  carta. 


Although  he  may  have  arrived  before 
he  receives  the  letter. 


222.  The  compound  present  of  the  subjunctive  maj'-  be 
substituted  for  the  above  tense,  except  when  the  verb  is  pre- 
ceded by  the  conditional  si ;  as,  aunque  haya  llegado  dntes  que 
reciba  la  carta. 

223.  In  order  that  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  of  the  sub- 
junctive, which  also  express  a  future  contingent  action  or 
event,  be  not  misapplied,  as  too  frequently  they  are,  and  con- 
founded with  the  future  simple  and  compound  future  of  the 
samQ  mood,  the  following  distinction  must  be  attentively 
observed : 

1st.  That  the  imperfect  and  iiluperfect  may  be  employed 
when  the  actions  or  events  expressed  in  the  sentence  are  future 
only  in  reference  to  some  other  time  expressed,  or  merely  im- 
plied, in  the  sentence. 

*  2d.  That  the  future  simple  and  compound  future  must  be 
used  when  the  contingent  action  or  event  implied  in  the  sen- 
tence is  future  with  regard  to  the  action  expressed  by  the 
determining  verbs ;  as. 

The  general  ordered  that  all  those 
who  should  (might  happen  to)  de- 
sert should  be  shot. 

The  general  ordered  that  all  those 
who  had  (might  have)  deserted 
should  be  shot. 

The  general  has  ordered  that  all  those 
who  desert  {i.  e.  may  happen  to 
desert)  shall  be  shot. 

The  general  has  ordered  that  all  those 
who  have  deserted  shall  be  shot. 


El  general  mando  que  todos  los  que 
descrfaran  fuesen  fusilados. 

El  general  mando  que  todos  los  que 
kubieran  desertado  fuesen  fusilados. 

El  general  ha  mandado  que  todos  los 
que  dcsertaren  scan  fusilados. 

El  general  ha  mandado  quo  todos  los 
que  hubieren  desertado  sean  fusi- 
lados. 


224.  The  future  simple  and  the  compound  future  of  the 
subjunctive  also  act  as  determining  verbs ;  but  they  govern  the 
subordinate  verb  only  in  the  present  or  the  future  simple  of  the 
indicative,  and  in  the  imperative ;  as, 


Quien  lo  dijere,  mienfe. 

Si  vitiiere  sera  bien  recibido. 


Whoever  should  say  so  will  lie. 
If  he  should  come,  he  shall  be  well 
received. 


232  LESSON     XLV, 


If  you  do  so,  may  God  reward  you 

for  it. 
If  at  the  end  of  the  year  he  has  not 

paid  you,  compel  him  to  do  so. 


Si  asi  lo  hicicres.  Dio3  to  lo  premie. 

Si  para  fines  de  afio  no  hubicrcpaga- 
do,  le  apremias,  or  apremiale,  or 
le  apremiards. 

These  determining  sentences  of  the  future  simple  of  the 
subjunctive  may  be  turned  to  the  present  indicative  in  certain 
cases,  and  to  the  present  subjunctive  in  others  ;  as, 


Si  viene,  or  como  venga,  Ber4  bien  re- 

cibido. 
Quien  tal  diga  miente. 
Si  asi  lo  haces,  Dios  te  lo  premie,  etc. 


If  he  comes,  he  shall  be  well  re- 
ceived. 

Whoever  says  so  lies. 

If  you  do  so,  may  God  reward  you 
for  it. 


CONYERSATIOX  AND  VERSIOX. 

1.  Don  Jose,  me  han  dicho  que  es  mal  aguero  al  salir  uno  de  su  casa 
ver  volar  cuervos ;  i  que  piensa  V.  sobre  ello  ?  Yo  pienso  como  Don 
Francisco  de  Qucvedo. 

2.  ^  Y  que  es  lo  que  pensaba  ese  famoso  escritor  sobre  esta  materia? 
Oiga  V.  lo  que  61  decia. 

3.  Si  al  salir  de  tu  casa  vieres  volar  cuervos,  dejalos  volar,  y  mira  tii 
donde  pones  los  pies. 

4.  J  Ah !  i  bah  ;  Quevedo  era  un  criticon  que  no  perdonaba  nada, 
pero  alia  en  su  interior  quiza  creia  uu  poquito  como  todo  el  mundo  en 
los  agueros ;  ^no  cree  Y.  asi  ?  i  Que  si  creia  ?  Por  supuesto  que  si.  Vea 
V.  aqui  otro  de  los  agueros  en  que  creia. 

5.  Si  vas  a  coraprar  algo,  y  al  ir  a  pagar  no  hallares  la  bolsa  adonde 
Uevabas  el  dinero,  es  aguero  malisimo,  y  no  te  sucedera  bien  la  compra. 

6.  i  Toma !  Esa  es  una  verdad  de  Perogrullo,  y  ya  veo  que  V.  no 
cree  en  los  agueros  pero  al  menos  V.  creera  en  las  profecias ;  ^  no  es  ver- 
dad, Don  Jos6?  ;0!  si,  sefiora,  muclio,  sobre  todo  en  las  de  Pero- 
grullo. 

7.  iQu6  profecias  son  esas,  que  nunca  las  he  oido?  Sefiora  no  podr6 
relatarselas  a  V.  todas,  pero  le  dire  k  V.  algunas  si  Y.  lo  desea. 

8.  Con  mucho  gusto,  hagame  Y.  el  favor.  Pues  bien,  oiga  Y. :  "  Si 
lloviere  habra  lodos."     "El  que  tuviere  tendra." 

9.  j  Ah !  ya  caigo ;  es  por  esto  que  se  llama  cualquiera  verdad  que  es 
muy  notoria,  verdad  de  PerogruUo.  j  Yamos !  aqui  viene  Don  Enrique, 
puede  ser  que  61  crea  en  algo,  porque  Y.  no  cree  en  nada. 

10.  A  los  pi6s  do  Y.,  Dofia  Anita. — Beso  a  Y.  la  mano  Don  Enrique. 


LESSON     XLV.  233 

11.  A  las  ordenos  de  V.,  Don  Jos6. — Bien  vcnido,  Don  Enrique. — Aqui 
tiene  V.  a  Doua  Anita  empeflada  en  liaccrrae  supersticioeo. 

12.  Y  V.  cs  tambicn  escdptico,  no  crcc  V.  en  sucuos,  en  cspiritus,  en 
fisonomias,  ^en  que  cree  V.,  Don  Enrique?  Yo,  seflorita,  soy  un  hombro 
muy  cix'dulo,  crecr  en  todo,  creo  basta  las  mujeres. 

13.  Mil  gracias,  Don  Enrique ;  yo  creia  que  la  sinceridad  estaba  siempre 
de  parte  de  la  mujer  y  no  del  bombre,  pues  son  Yds.  todos  a  cual  mas 
falso. — Seflorita,  6  V.  nos  hace  una  injusticia,  6  yo  soy  una  excepcion ; 
pero  volviendo  a  lo  de  las  creencias,  confieso  de  buena  fe  que  soy  un  poco 
supersticioso. — Me  alegro  mucbo,  de  ese  modo  mo  ayudara  V.  a.  convertir 
a  Don  Jos6  que  no  cree  en  nada. 

14.  Perdone  V.,  seflorita,  yo  creo  en  una  de  las  cosas  que  V.  ha  men- 
cionado,  esto  es,  en  las  fisonomias. — ;  Bicn,  bien !  expliquenos  V.,_ent6nces, 
su  significado. 

15.  El  que  tuviere  la  frente  ancha  tendra  los  ojos  debajo  de  la  frente, 
y  vivira  todos  los  dias  de  su  vida. — ;  Por  Dios !  Don  Jose,  bable  V.  for- 
malmente. 

16.  Pues  bien,  con  toda  formalidad.  Todo  bombre  calvo  no  tendra 
pelo,  y  si  tuviere  alguno  no  sera  en  la  calva. 

17.  I  Ya  lo  ve,  Y.  I  se  burla  de  todo,  y  no  cree  en  nada,  es  un  esceptico 
complete.  Defiendase  Y.,  amigo  Don  Joso,  6  quiza  es  verdad  que  no 
cree  Y.  en  nada.     Ent6nces  le  compadezco  d  Y.  de  todo  corazon. 

18.  jllombrel  dejerae  Y.  en  paz,  y  guarde  Y.  su  compasion  para 
todas  esas  pobres  gentes  que  creen,  6  afectan  creer,  todas  esas  ridiculeces ; 
yo  creo  lo  que  veo ;  creo  lo  que  siento,  y  creo  lo  que  mi  razon  me  acon- 
seja  creer ;  por  eso  creo  en  el  sol,  en  el  amor,  en  Dios.— j  Yamosl  abora 
va  a  hacernos  creer  que  es  bombre  muy  religioso. 

19.  Sefior  Don  J036,  esta  seflorita  y  yo  tenemos  grandes  descos  de 
aprender  ol  Padre  nuestro  en  espauol ;  ^  lo  sabe  Y.  ?    No  solamente  lo  se, 

.  siuo  que  es  una  oracion  que  me  gusta  mucbo. 

20.  I  Quiere  Y.  hacernos  el  favor  de  decimosla  ?  Con  mucho  gusto, 
helo  aqui. 

21.  "Padre  nuestro,  que  estas  en  los  cielos,  sautificado  sea  tu  nombre, 
venga  ii  nos  el  tu  reino.  Ilagase  tu  voluntad,  asi  en  la  tierra  como  en  el 
cielo.  El  pan  nuestro  de  cada  dia  danosle  hoy.  Perdonanos  nuestras 
deudas,  como  nosotros  perdonamos  a  nuestros  deudores.  Y  no  nos  dejes 
cacr  en  tentacion.     Y  libranos  de  mal."    Amen. 

22.  Mil  gracias,  Don  Jose ;  voy  a  aprenderlo  de  memoria  porque  me 
suena  muy  bien  en  espafiol. 


234  LESSON     XLV. 


EXERCISE. 


1.  At  what  o'clock  does  the  sun  rise  at  'Sew  York  in  the  month  of 
September  ?  The  sun  rose  here  this  morning  at  twenty-seven  minutes 
past  five  o'clock. 

2.  What  did  your  teacher  say  to  you  to-day  when  your  lessons  were 
finished?  Nothing  to  me  in  particular;  he  spoke  to  all  of  us  about 
reading  good  hooks,  as  very  necessary  in  order  to  acquire  the  love  of 
truth  and  sincerity  in  all  our  actions. 

3.  Here  are  the  works  of  Francis  de  Quevedo ;  have  you  ever  read 
til  em?  Yes,  very  often;  and  I  admire  very  much  his  profound  knowl- 
edge of  the  human  heart. 

4.  He  is  also  somewhat  of  a  jester;  is  he  not?  Yes,  hut  for  a  very 
wise  end ;  he  shows  all  the  ridicule  of  the  belief  in  auguries,  omens — for 
instance,  the  flight  (vuelo)  of  crows,  &c. 

5.  What  do  you  think  of  his  prophecies?  The  only  end  of  his 
prophecies  seem  to  he  to  divert  his  readers,  telling  them  that  all  bald 
persons  will  have  no  hair,  or  if  they  should  have  any,  it  will  not  be  on 
the  bald  place. 

G.  Do  you  know  what  the  general  has  ordered  ?  He  has  given  orders 
that  all  the  soldiers  that  desert  shall  be  shot. 

7.  Do  you  pity  that  poor  soldier  who  is  to  be  shot  ?  I  did  not  know 
there  was  one  to  be  shot ;  what  crime  did  he  commit  ?     He  deserted. 

8.  What  will  they  do  to  that  robber  if  they  find  him  ?    He  wiU  be  shot. 

9.  Do  you  not  think  he  deserves  to  be  shot  ?  There  can  be  no  doubt 
of  it :  he  who  kills  a  man  must  die  by  the  hand  of  man. 

10.  Are  there  stiU  superstitious  people  in  the  world  ?  Yes,  a  very 
great  many ;  and  I  must  say,  that,  even  amongst  the  learned,  we  find  a 
great  number  whose  education  should  lead*  us  to  have  a  higher  opinion 
of  them. 

11.  Has  that  gentleman  paid  you  yet  the  money  he  owed  you  such  a 
long  time  ?    Not  yet ;  indeed  I  begin  to  fear  ho  will  never  pay  me. 

12.  If  he  should  not  pay  you  before  he  leaves  the  country,  compel  him 
to  do  so.     So  I  intend  to  do. 

13.  How  long  does  your  father  intend  to  remain  in  Germany  ?  Perhaps 
two  or  three  months ;  but  should  he  remain  longer,  he  will  write  for  me 
to  go  to  him. 

14.  Welcome,  Mr.  Martinez !  how  long  have  you  been  in  town  ?  Only 
a  few  days ;  and  I  shall  return  home  as  soon  as  I  hear  from  my  brother. 

15.  What  a  fine  forehead  that  young  lady  has !  I  have  never  seen 
such  a  beautiful  countenance,  with  the  exception  of  that  of  a  lady  whom 
I  met  in  Spain  a  few  years  ago. 

*  Debcria  haccrnos. 


LESSON     XLVI. 


235 


LESSON    XLVI. 


Adivinar. 

To  guess. 

Acordar. 

To  agree,  to  tune. 

Acordarse 

, 

To  recollect,  to  remember. 

Colocar. 

To  lay,  to  place. 

Meter. 

To  put,  to  make  (noise). 

Peinar. 

To  comb. 

Picar, 

To  prick,  to  chop,  to  hash. 

Persist!  r. 

To  persist. 

Romper. 

To  break. 

Coger. 

To  take,  to  catch. 

Esconder. 

INTEKJI 

To  hide,  to  conceal. 

CTI0K8. 

lAyl 

Ay! 

[Zape!                 Heaven  preserve 

jEal 

Cheer  up !  come, 

us! 

come ! 

[  Victoria !            Victory  ! 

jEh! 

Oh  I  ah! 

[  C6mo !                How ! 

iHuy! 

Whew! 

;  Anda !                Go !  go  away  I 

iOx! 

Get  you  gone ! 

i  Calle !                 Strange ! 

i  Sns ! 

Come!  come! 

i  Chito  (or  chi-     Hush ! 

i  Uf  {or  liuf ) ! 

Ugh! 

ton)! 

jITola! 

Halloa ! 

i  Diantre !             The  deuce ! 

jTatc! 

Take  care ! 

^  .  I   -.    .          \  Look  oui ! 
I  Cuidado            1 T  1            1       r     1 
'                          (Take  care!       [us I 

jCa! 

Pshaw ! 

;  Viva ! 

Hurrah ! 

i  Dios  nos  libre !  Heaven  preserve 

I  Dale! 

Go! 

i  Vamos !              Come ! 

J  Qu6  horror ! 

0  horror ! 

jVuelta!              Turn  about  (or 
round) ! 

Finalmcnte. 

Finally. 

Llevar  a.  cabo. 

To  accomplish. 

Llevarse  cbasco. 

To  be  disappointed. 

Cabal. 

Just,  exact. 

Fresco. 

Cool,  fresh. 

Listo. 

Ready,  quick. 

Restante. 

Remaining,  remainder. 

Telegruficc 

. 

Telegraphic. 

Extraordinario. 

Extraordinary. 

Dichoso. 

1 

Happy. 

236 


LESSON     XL  VI, 


Aire. 

Air. 

Camisa. 

Shirt,  chemise. 

Cambio. 

Change. 

Cuenta. 

Account. 

Alfiler. 

Pin. 

Empresa. 

Enterprise. 

Atl4ntico. 

Atlantic. 

Cualidad. 

Quality. 

fl^ito. 

Issue. 

Austria. 

Austria. 

Buen  6xito. 

Success. 

Palangana. 

Wash-basin,  wash 

Cable. 

Cable. 

bowl. 

Peine. 

Comb. 

Prusia. 

Prussia. 

Presidente. 

President. 

Procesion. 

Procession. 

Euido. 

Noise. 

Constancia. 

Constancy. 

Chasco. 

Disappointment. 

Prueba. 

Proof,  trial. 

Patio. 

Yard,  pit  (theatre). 

Tranquilidad. 

Tranquillity. 

Tratado. 

Treaty,  treatise. 

Victoria. 

Victory. 

Dolor. 

Pain,  grief. 

Gaceta. 

Gazette,    news- 

Asombro. 

Amazement 

paper. 

Maullido. 

Mewing. 

Gato. 

Cat. 

COMTOS 

[TIOX. 

Ah !  que  desgracia ! 
Ay  de  mi ! 
Oh !  dolor  ! 
Ah!  bribon! 
Ah !  que  alegria ! 
Oh  !  asombro ! 
Ay,  si  le  cojo  ! 
Oh  !  ya  nos  Teremos  ! 
Bah  !  no  hables  de  esa  manera  ! 
i  Huy !  me  quem6  con  el  cigarrillo  ! 

i  Uf !  que  calorazo  ! 

j  Ea,  a  trabajar ! 

i  Tate !  tate !  no  pase  V.  por  ahi,  que 

veo  un  hombre  escondido  ! 
j  Zape  !  ese  gatazo  no  me  deja  dormir 

con  sus  mauUidos ! 
J  Toma  !  toma  !  eso  ya  lo  sabia  yo. 
;  Viva  la  Ubertad  ! 
i  Diantre  de  muchachos !  y  que  ruido 

meten ! 
j  Hola !    D.   Francisco  !    dichosos   los 

ojos  que  lo  ven  a  V  ! 


Ah !  how  unfortunate ! 

Woe  is  me ! 

Ah  !  how  sad ! 

Ha !  rascal ! 

Ah  !  what  joy  ! 

Oh  !  wonder ! 

Let  me  get  hold  of  him  ! 

Oh  !  I  shall  see  you  again  ! 

Phsaw  !  don't  talk  that  way ! 

A\Tiew  !  I  have  burned  myself  with  the 

cigarette ! 
Oh  !  how  warm  it  is  ! 
Come  to  work ! 
Take  care  !  don't  go  that  way ;  I  see  a 

man  hiding ! 
Heaven  preserve  us !  that  confounded  cat 

will  not  let  me  sleep  with  its  mewing ! 
That's  all,  eh !  I  knew  that  much  myself 
Hurrah  for  liberty ! 
Did  you  ever  hear  such  children  ?  what 

a  noise  they  make ! 
Halloa  !   Mr.  Francis !   it  is  good  for 

sore  eyes  to  see  you ! 


LESSON     XLVI. 


237 


^  Que  me  so  yo  ? 
La  cucuta  esta  cabal. 
Espcro  no  llevarme  chasco,  y  quo  lle- 
vare  a  cabo  mi  empresa. 


How  can  I  tell  ? 
The  account  is  exact  (correct). 
I  hope  not  to  be  disappointed,  and  that 
I  shall  carry  out  my  undertaking. 


EXPLANATION. 

225.  Interjections  are  words  which  serve  to  express  the 
diflferent  emotions  and  affections  of  the  soul.  There  sliould  be  a 
separate  interjection  to  express  each  passion  or  emotion  ;  but  this 
not  being  the  case,  we  often  use  the  same  ones  to  express  joy, 
grief,  affright,  astonishment,  mockery,  anger,  &c.,  the  significa- 
tion of  each  interjection  changing  accordiug  to  the  voice,  ges- 
ture and  manner  of  the  speaker. 

The  exclamations  that  are  properly  called  interjections  in 
Spanish,  inasmuch  as  they  have  no  other  use,  and  because  they 
consist  of  only  one  word,  are  the  following :  Ah^  ay,  bah,  ca, 
eh,  huy,  oh,  ox,  sus,  uf,  ea,  hola,  ojald,  tate,  zape,  and  a  few  others. 

Ah,  ay  and  6  are  used  indifferently  to  express  pain,  joy, 
mockery,  surprise,  scorn,  anger,  or  admiration  ;  as, 
/  Ah  !  que  desgracia !  Ah !  what  misfortune  1 


/  Ay  de  mi ! 

iOh!  dolor! 

/  All !  bribon  ! 

/  All !  que  alegria  I 

/  Oh  !  asombro  ! 

/  Ah  !  que  necio  ! 

/  Ay  si  le  cojo  ! 

/  Oh  '.  ya  nos  veremos !  etc.,  etc. 


Woe  is  me ! 

Ah  !  how  sad  I 

Ha !  rascal ! 

Oh!  what  joy! 

Oh !  wonder ! 

Ah  !  what  a  fool ! 

Let  me  get  hold  of  him  ! 

Oh  !  I  shall  see  you  again  ! 


226.  /  Bah  !  expresses  displeasure,  and  sometimes  wonder 
and  admiration,  j  He  !  besides  being  used  to  attract  the  atten- 
tion, is  often  employed  in  the  sense  of  alas  !  /  8us  !  serves 
only  to  encourage,  j  Huy !  is  an  exclamation  expressive  of 
pain.  I  Ea!  serves  to  encourage,  and  sometimes  to  call  the  at- 
tention. We  use  /  hola !  to  call  otir  inferiors,  and  intimate 
friends,  and  to  manifest  joy  and  surprise.  /  Tate  !  expresses 
surprise,  and  serves  to  warn  anyone  of  some  danger.  /  Ojaldl 
serves  to  manifest  ardent  desire  for  something. 


238  LESSON     XLVI. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jE:x!  ca!  muchachos,  arriba!  que  ya  es  hora  de  levantarse. — 
jPues  qu6  hora  es,  papa?  Ya  son  las  seis  y  quiero  que  os  vistais,  lavels 
y  tomeis  el  cafe  prontito,  para  ir  a  tomar  el  aire  fresco  de  la  maQana  en 
la  plaza  de  Madison. 

2.  1  Sus !  arriba  1  y  el  que  se  me  presente  primero  listo  ira  a  comprar- 
me  el  Heraldo  y  tendra  el  centavo  del  cambio. — Helena,  ponme  agua 
para  lavarme. — No,  Helena,  no  ayudes  a  Alejandro  que  ese  ya  puede  ves- 
tirse  solo,  ayuda  a  Carlotita  y  a  Manolito. 

3.  Luisa,  dame  mis  zapatos  y  mis  medias. — Buscalos  tii  raismo,  yo  no 
voy  a  ayudarte  para  que  te  vistas  antes  que  yo. 

4.  i  Cuidado !  i  no  veis  que  vais  a  romper  esa  palangana  ?  Es  este 
Manuel  que  todavia  no  se  lia  puesto  mas  que  ima  media  y  un  zapato  y  se 
quiere  lavar  antes  que  yo,  que  me  he  puesto  ya  la  camisa,  los  zapatos  y 
el  pantalon. 

5.  ;  Ay  !  ay  ! — iCl\XG  es  eso,  Luisa?  Me  he  picado  con  el  alfiler  que 
estaba  ponieudo  en  mi  vestido. 

6.  I  En  d6nde  esta  el  jabon  ?    Qu6  me  s6  yo. 

7.  I  Carlota,  me  quieres  dar  el  peine,  6  te  vas  a  estar  peinando  todo  el 
dia  ?     D6jame  en  paz,  ahora  acabo  de  principiar. 

8.  Mama,  mire  V.  que  Alejandro  no  me  deja  ayudar  a  vestir  a  Manuel. 
I  Mama,  en  donde  esta  mi  sombrero  ? 

9.  Papa,  ya  estoy  listo,  deme  V,  el  dincro  para  comprar  el  Heraldo. — 
No,  no,  papa ;  mire  V.  que  se  ha  puesto  el  sombrero  sin  peinarse. 

10.  j  Como !  eso  no,  Alejandro,  no  se  sale  a  la  calle  sin  peinarse. — Papa, 
ya  estoy  listo. — Y  yo. — Y  yo. 

11.  ;  Chiton  !  \  Diantre  de  muchachos  y  que  ruido  meten !  Aqui  tc- 
neis  diez  centavos,  cuatro  para  el  Heraldo  y  de  los  seis  restantes  uno  para 
cada  uno,  cuenta  cabal,  metraeis  f\  Heraldo  y  despues  os  vais  a  la  plaza  y 
no  volvais,  a  lo  menos  en  un  par  de  horas. 

12.  Margarita,  ahora  que  tenemos  tranquilidad  traeme  la  pipa,  antes  de 
ponerme  a  escribir,  furaare  un  poco  y  leere  las  noticias  en  el  patio  al  fresco. 

13.  Hola!  grandes  noticias!  ^  Que  hay  de  nuevo  ?  ^\  Great  Eastern 
ha  llegado,  y  se  dice  que  el  gran  cable  telegrafico  ha  sido  finalmente  colo- 
cado,  uniendo  asi  la  Europa  y  la  America. 

14.  i  Es  posible !  entonces  pi-onto  tendremos  noticias  todos  los  dias  de 
Europa. — Asi  lo  espero,  pero  no  debemos  estar  muy  seguros  de  ello,  por- 
que  ya  te  acordards  del  chasco  que  llevtlmos  afios  pasados. 

15.  i  Ah !  si,  ya  me  acuerdo ;  en  1858,  cuando  se  celebro  el  (*xito  del 
cable  telegrafico  con  aquella  grande  procesion,  y  se  vendia  por  la  calle  la 
gaceta  extraordinaria  con  el  parte  telegrafico  de  la  Reina  Victoria  al 


LESSON      XLVI.  239 

Prcsidento  de  los  Estados  Unidos. — Espero  que  no  nos  llevemos  alrora  el 
misrao  cliasco. 

16.  j  i  La  extraordiiiaria ! !  ;  j  La  gaceta  cxtraordinaria ! !  ;  Eh !  mucba- 
cho,  aqui,  aqui. 

17.  ^  Cuanto  vale  ?    Dicz  contavos. 

18.  ; Victoria!  Viva!  Viva!  ^Que  dice  de  irnevo?  El  cable  del 
Atlantico  ha  tenido  bucii  6xito,  el  primer  parte  recibido  por  el  es  el  trata- 
do  de  paz  entre  cl  Austria  y  la  Prusia. 

19.  Esta  cs  una  prueba  mas  de  lo  que  puede  llevar  a  cabo  el  hombre, 
si  tiene  constancia  y  persiste  en  una  empresa. — ^Cree  V.  que  yo  tambien 
tendre  bucn  exito  en  mi  empresa  ? 

20.  I  Que  empresa  es  esa  ?  j  Como  !  j  no  la  adivina  V.  ?  La  empresa 
de  aprender  cl  espafiol. 

21.  I  Ah!  No  dudo  que  V.  hablara  espailol  si  persiste  y  tiene  cons- 
tancia ;  puesto  que  con  estas  cualidades  se  ha  logrado  quo  liable  cl  cable 
del  Atlantico. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Can  you  tell  me  "what  kind  of  weather  we  will  have  to-morrow? 
Oh,  what  a  question  !  Do  you  suppose  that  I  can  guess  the  weather  we 
will  have  before  it  comes  ? 

2.  Did  the  pianist  say  he  would  come  to  tune  the  piano  ?  lie  said  he 
would  come  to-morrow,  but  that  he  could  not  come  to-day. 

3.  Have  you  seen  that  the  Atlantic  telegraph  cable  is  laid  at  last? 
Yes;  I  am  glad  to  see  that  the  undertaking  has  been  so  successful. 

4.  Do  you  know  who  sent  the  first  dispatch  by  the  cable  ?  I  am  not 
sure ;  but  I  remember  that  the  first,  at  the  time  of  the  former  cable,  in 
1858,  was  that  sent  by  the  President  of  the  United  States  to  the  Queen 
of  England. 

5.  What  was  the  reason  of  laying  a  second  cable  ?  Ah,  come  now ! 
do  you  not  know  tliat  the  first  one,  liaving  bi'oken  shortly  after  it  had 
been  laid,  became  entirely  useless  (inutiT)  ? 

6.  Have  you  seen  the  news  to-day  by  Atlantic  telegraph  ?  IsTo  ;  what 
is  the  news  ?  That  a  treaty  of  peace  has  been  signed  {celebrar)  between 
Prussia  and  Austria. 

7.  Charles,  go  and  find  the  comb,  wherever  you  put  it  when  you  had 
done  with  it.  I  have  not  seen  it  since  Henry  was  using  it;  and  even  if 
I  had,  I  would  not  tell  you  where  it  was. 

8.  Ah,  you  little  rogue !  there,  you  have  broken  the  wash-basin.  It 
is  not  my  fault,  Henry  wanted  it  first,  and  I  had  already  commenced  to 
wash  myself;  but  he  persisted  and  would  take  it  from  me.* 

9.  0  horror !  just  look  at  the  state  his  hair  (pelo)  is  in  I     Go  tliis 

*  Persistio  en  qiiit;innela. 


240  LESSON      XLVI. 

instant  and  get  the  comb  and  comb  your  hair  before  you  dare  to  appear 
before  me. 

10.  Have  you  a  pin  to  give  me?  Yes,  here  is  a  paper  of  pins;  take 
all  you  want  and  give  me  back  the  rest. 

11.  Did  you  know  your  lessons  well  this  morning?  Yes,  very  well, 
and  the  proof  is  that  papa  allowed  me  to  go  to  see  the  procession. 

12.  What  did  you  kill  that  poor  little  fly  for  ?  Have  I  not  told  you 
many  times  that  I  don't  wish  you  to  catch  or  kill  flies  ? 

13.  Is  that  bread  fresh  ?  Yes,  sir,  tlie  baker  has  just  brought  it  a  few 
minutes  ago. 

14.  We  were  to  have  gone  to  the  yard  to  play  at  twelve  o'clock.  You 
may  go  now  ;  but  do  not  make  much  noise. 

15.  Where  were  you  going  when  I  met  you  ?  We  were  coming  home 
to  dine. 

16.  Has  the  shoemaker  sent  you  his  bill  ?     Yes,  but  it  is  not  correct. 

17.  Has  not  your  uncle  written  to  you  since  he  went  away?  He  has 
sent  several  telegraphic  dispatches  to  my  father  on  business ;  but  he  has 
not  written  to  us  once  (una  sola  ves). 

18.  Is  there  not  to  be  a  new  opera  to-night?  Xo;  but  I  understand 
there  is  to  be  a  new  play  (comedia)  at  the  theatre. 

19.  That  is  nothing  extraordinaiy ;  there  are  new  pieces  very  often  now. 

20.  If  Louisa  were  a  little  taUer  would  she  not  be  handsomer  than 
Jane  ?     She  would  at  least  be  quite  as  handsome. 

21.  Would  you  wish  to  have  the  window  opened?  I  think  it  would 
be  much  cooler  if  it  were  open. 

22.  Would  you  not  like  mo  to  repeat  to  you  that  story  I  told  you  the 
other  day  ?  If  you  had  time  I  should  be  much  obliged  to  you  to  tell  it 
to  me  once  more. 

23.  Would  not  quietness  be  much  better  for  that  gentleman  than  so 
much  noise  ?     He  could  not  live  without  noise. 

24.  Might  you  not  have  broken  your  arm  or  your  leg  when  you  fell 
out  of  yom-  carriage  ?    Yes,  if  I  had  not  taken  care. 

25.  If  I  had  wanted  money  when  I  was  in  the  country  would  you  not 
have  brought  me  some  ?     If  I  could  have  got  (conseguir)  itJ  would, 

26.  Would  your  aunt  not  have  been  disappointed  if  she  had  not  been 
in  time  to  take  the  three  o'clock  train  ?  Slie  woidd  have  been  terribly 
disappointed,  for  she  was  going  to  spend  the  day  at  a  friend's,  about  ten 
mUes  out  of  town. 


LESSO]!f     XLVII. 


241 


LESSON    XLVII. 


Acorn  paQar. 

Cargar. 

Curar. 

DaQar. 

Deleitar. 

Incomodar, 

Incomodarse. 

Equivocar. 

Evitar. 

Instrair. 

Ocupar. 

Padecer. 

Solicitar. 


Acento. 

Bolsillo. 

Autor. 

Esfuerzo. 

Efecto. 

Fastidto. 

Ciudadano. 

Hospital. 

M6todo. 

Trabajo. 

Napoles. 

Real. 

Sonido. 

Chelin. 


To  accompany. 

To  load,  to  charge. 

To  cure,  to  attend  (as  a  physician). 

To  injure,  to  damage. 

To  delight. 

To  incommode. 

To  get  out  of  temper. 

To  mistake. 

To  avoid,  to  shun. 

To  instruct. 

To  occupy. 

To  suffer. 

To  solicit,  to  apply  for,  to  urge. 


Dimes  y  diretes. 

Ifs  and  ands. 

El  no  se  qu6. 

An  inexplicable  something. 

Dolor  de  cabeza. 

Headache. 

Masculino. 

Masculine. 

Amable. 

Amiable. 

Agradable. 

Agreeable. 

Extrangero. 

Foreign,  foreigner. 

Interesante. 

Interesting. 

Moribundo. 

Dying. 

Valiente. 

Valiant,  arrant. 

Femenino. 

Feminine. 

Accent. 

Purse. 

Author. 

Effort,  bravery. 

Effect.  [ness. 

Unease,  uneasi- 

Citizen. 

Hospital. 

Method. 

Labor,  work. 

Naples. 

Real. 

Sound. 

Shilling. 


Alma. 
Comcdia. 

Vara. 

Libra. 
Manteca,  or 

Mantequilla. 
Calidad. 
Cantidad. 


Soul. 
Comedy. 

Rod,  yard  (meas- 
ure). 
Pound. 
Butter. 

Quality. 
Quantity. 
41 


11 


242 


LESS0  2J     XL  VII, 


COMPOSITION. 


El  porqu6  de  todas  las  cosas. 


Los  ayes  del  moribundo. 

Los  dimes  y  diretes. 

£1  cuando. 

El  no  s6  qu6. 

El  tener  amigos  no  dafia. 

Hay  horabres  de  un  saber   extraordi- 

nario. 
Un  nada  le  incomoda. 
La  constancia  y  el  trabajo  son  necesa- 

rios  al  hombre  en  todas  sus  empresas. 

La  America  63  mayor  que  la  Europa. 

La  Francia  es  una  nacion  muy  poblada. 

El  clima  de  Espana. 

Los  esfuerzos  de  la  Espana. 

Cuatro  pesos  la  vara. 

Dos  reales  la  libra. 

Trdnta  centavos  la  docena. 

Dos  reces  al  dia. 

Cuatro  pesos  por  vara. 

La  fe,  la  esperanza  y  la  caridad. 

El  Senor  De  Yargas  tiene  tres  nifios. 

La  Senora  Martinez  es  muy  prudente. 

Ella  me  dio  la  mano. 

Puso  la  mano  ea  el  bolsillo. 

Muchos  caballeros  solicitaron  mi  mano. 

El  caballero  a  quien  vio  V.  ayer  en  mi 
casa. 


The  why  and  the  wherefore  of  all 
things. 

The  groans  of  the  dying. 

The  iis  and  ands. 

The  time. 

I  know  not  what. 

It  is  hurtful  to  no  one  to  have  friends. 

There  are  men  of  extraordinary  knowl- 
edge. 

A  mere  nothing  incommodes  him. 

Constancy  and  labor  are  necessary  to 
mankind  in  all  their  enterprises  (or 
undertakings). 

America  is  larger  than  Europe. 

France  is  a  very  populous  nation. 

The  climate  of  Spain. 

The  bravery  of  Spain. 

Four  dollars  a  yard. 

Two  reals  a  poimd. 

Thirty  cents  a  dozen. 

Twice  a  day. 

Four  dollars  a  yard. 

Faith,  hope  and  charity. 

Mr.  Yargas  has  three  children. 

Mrs.  Martinez  is  very  prudent. 

She  shook  hands  with  me. 

He  put  his  hand  in  his  pocket. 

Many  gentlemen  have  solicited  my 
hand. 

The  gentleman  whom  you  saw  yesterday 
in  my  house. 


EXPLAXATIOX. 

227.  Use  of  the  Aeticle. — All  or  any  of  the  parts  of 
speech,  and  sometimes  even  whole  sentences,  may  be  used  as 
nounSj^d  as  such  adrart  the  article,  as  has  just  been  observed 
in  the  Uomposition  of  the  present  lesson,  in  which  we  see  exam- 
ples of  verbs,  adverbs  and  interjections  preceded  by  the  article, 
and  treated  in  every  respect  as  nouns  substantive. 

228.  The  definite  abticle  is  to  be  used  before  all  com- 


( 


LESSON     XLVII.  243 

mon  nouns,  taken  in  a  general  sense  and  in  the  full  extent  of 
their  signitication  ;  as, 

La  constancia  y  el  trabajo  son  neccsa-  I  Constuncy  and  labor  are  necessary  to 
rios  al  hombre  en  todas  sus  empresas.  |      mankind  in  all  undertakings. 

229.  The  article  is  expressed  before  the  names  of  the  four 
parts  of  the  globe :  before  the  names  of  empires,  k^gdoms, 
provinces  and  countries ;  and  before  the  four  seasons  of  the 
year;  as, 


America  is  larger  than  Europe.* 
France  is  a  very  populous  nation. 


The  winter  in  the  South  is  more  agree- 
able than  the  summer. 


La  America  es  mayor  que  la  Europa. 
La   Francia   es   una   riacion  muy  po- 

blada. 
El  invierno  en  cl  Sur  es  mas  agradable 

que  el  verano. 

But  it  is  omitted  before  the  names  of  kingdoms,  provinces, 
&c.,  when  they  are  preceded  by  a  preposition  ;  unless  they  bo 
personified,  as  has  been  observed  in  Lesson  XXX. ;  as. 

El  clima  de  Esparia.  I  The  climate  of  Spain, 

Los  esfuerzos  de  la  Espana.  \  The  bravery  of  Spain. 

Kingdoms  bearing  the  same  name  as  their  capitals  do  not 
admit  the  article  ;  as,  JVdpoles,  Naples. 

230.  Nouns  of  measure,  weight,  &c.,  when  preceded  by 
the  indefinite  article  in  English,  as  an  equivalent  to  each,  re- 
quire the  article ;  as, 


Cuatro  pesos  la  vara. 
Dos  rcales  la  libra. 
Trcinta  ccntavos  la  doccna. 
Dos  veces  al  dm. 


Four  dollars  a  yard. 
Two  reals  a  pound. 
Thirty  cents  a  dozen. 
Twice  a  day. 


If  the  preposition  ^;o;'  be  used,  we  omit  the  article ;  as, 
cuatro  pesos  por  vara^  &c. 

231.  The  article  is  generally  repeated  before  every  noun 
enumerated,  especially  if  they  differ  in  gender;  as, 

La  fe,  la  esperanza  y  la  caridad.  I  Faith,  hope  and  charity. 

Los  dias  y  fos  noches.  |  The  days  and  nights. 

232.  The  definite  article  is  used  before  nouns  indicating 
rank,  office,  profession  or  titles  of  persons,  when  these  are  spoken 
of,  but  not  when  spoken  to  ;  as. 


El  General  Sheridan  cs  valieute. 
El  Soiior  De  Vargas  tiene  tres  niiios. 
La  Senora  Martine?,  ft  muy  prudente. 


General  Sheridan  is  brave. 

Mr.  De  Vargas  has  three  children. 

Mrs.  Martinez  is  very  prudent. 


244  LESSON     XLVII. 

233.  Tho  definite  article  is  used  instead  of  the  possessive  ad- 
jective when  the  possessives  refer  to  parts  of  our  own  body  ;  as, 
Me  be  cortado  la  majio.  I  I  have  cut  my  hand. 

Me  duele  la  cabcza.  \  My  head  aches. 

This  applies  even  to  parts  of  the  body  of  other  persons  ;  as, 

Ella  me  di6  la  mano.  She  gave  me  her  hand  (or  shook  hands 

■with  me). 
He  put  his  hand  in  his  pocket. 


Puso  la  mano  en  el  bolsillo. 


But  the  pronoun  must  be  used  when  the  pereonal  article  would 

occasion  ambiguity ;  as, 

Muchos  caballerossolicitaron  mi  mano.  |  Many  gentlemen  solicited  my  hand. 

234.  The  definite  article  is  also  employed,  as  in  English, 
before  nouns  taken  in  Vi  particular  or  definite  sense  ;  as. 

El  caballero  a  quien  viu  V.  aycr  en  mi  I  The  gentleman  whom  you  saw  yester- 
casa.  I      day  in  my  house. 

AVe  forbear  from  adding  many  more  rules  which  we  might 
give,  if  they  were  not  subject  to  numerous  exceptions,  and, 
especially,  if  we  were  not  of  opinion  that  practice  and  reading 
will  teach  better  than  any  rules  when  to  employ  and  when 
to  omit  the  article. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  dial  de  las  partes  del  mundo  es  la  mayor  ?    El  Asia  es  la  mayor. 

2.  jEs  Asia  nombre  masculino?    No,  seflor,  es  feraenino. 

3.  Entonees,  i  porqu6  le  pone  V.  el  articulo  masculine  ?  Per  evitar 
cl  mal  sonido  que  resultaria  de  poner  dos  aes  juntas. 

4.  I  Luego,  V.  pone  siempre  el  articulo  masculino  delante  de  todo 
nombre  femenino  que  empieza  per  a?  liTo,  seQor;  esto  solo  sucede  en 
singular,  y  cuando  sobrc  dicha  vocal  carga  el  acento  de  la  palabra. 

5.  ^Ila  leido  V.  el  "Si  de  las  ninas"  de  Moratin?  Si,  sefior,  lo  lef 
hace  muchos  afios ;  pero  d  mi  me  gusta  mas  la  "  Comedia  nueva "  del 
mismo  autor. 

6.  ^Qn6  tal  le  gasta  a  V.  su  nueva  vecinita?  Dicen  que  es  muy 
bonita. — En  efecto  lo  es ;  pero  a  mi  no  me  gusta,  porque  anda  siempre  en 
dimes  y  diretes,  y  un  nada  la  incomoda. 

7.  gCuales  son  las  virtudes  del  alma?  La  fe,  la  esperanza  y  la  ca- 
ridad. 

8.  I  Tiene  V.  alguna  cosa  interesante  que  decirme  hoy  ?    Muchisiraas 


LESSON   XLVII.  245 

interosantisimas  e  importantisimas para  practicar  y  aprender  el 

espafiol. 

9.  I  Uf !  ya  va  V.  a  principiar  con  sus  adverbios,  prcposiciones  y  arti- 
culos;  va  V.  ii  decirme,  por  supuesto,  que  estas  partes  de  la  oracion  unas 
veces  se  ponen  antes  las  unas  que  las  otras,  y  vice  versa ;  que  las  unas 
gobiernan  ii  las  otras  y  las  gobernadas  gobiernan  d  su  vez  d  otras,  que 
se  acuerden  6  no  entre  si.  i  Cree  V.  quo  todo  eso  sera  interesante  para 
mi  con  el  fastidio  quo  tengo,  y  el  dolor  de  cabeza  quo  padezco  ?  ;  Callc ! 
entonces,  caballerito,  V.  ha  equivocado  la  casa. 

10.  ^Que  quiere  V.  decir  con  eso  de  equivocar  la  easa?  Qniero  decir 
que,  en  lugar  de  venii*  ji  la  clase,  debio  Y.  ir  hoy  al  hospital  y  de  alii  al 
teatro. 

11.  ^Para  qu6  ?  Para  que  le  curasen  en  una  parte  de  sus  dolores  y  en 
la  otra  del  fastidio. 

12.  Si ;  pero,  Sefior  Profesor,  yo  siempre  creia  que  el  mejor  metodo  de 
enseflanza  es  aquel  que  "instruye  deleitando."  V.  tiene  mil  razoncs, 
pcro  ha  olvidado  una  pequefla  circunstancia  que  requiere  su  metodo. 

13.  lY  cual  es  esa  circunstancia?  Que  no  puede  aplicarse  sino  con 
aquellos  discipulos  que  se  deleitan  aprendiendo. 

14.  Y  ahora  volviendo  al  articulo. — SeQor  Profesor,  V.  me  escusara, 
pero  no  volvamos  al  articulo  porque  no  puedo  quedarme  mas  aqui  hoy. 

15.  ^Como  es  eso?  el  tiempo  de  la  leccion  no  ha  acabado  todavia. — 
Y.  tiene  razon  ;  pero  hoy  es  necesario  que  me  vaya  temprano,  porque  he 
prometido  acorapailar  a  unas  sefioritas  a  la  opera. 

16.  [Oh!  entonces  es  necesario  no  faltar  a  su  palabra. — SeQor  Pro- 
fesor, buenas  noches  (este  buen  sefior  me  fastidia  con  sus  explicaciones). 
— Diviertase  Y.  mucho,  Sefior  Don  Pepito  (este  amable  joven  aprendera 
espafiol,  para  el  tiempo  que  yo  compre  una  casa  en  la  Quinta  Avenida, 
ensefiandolo). 

EXERCISE. 

1.  If  I  should  come  for  you  this  evening,  would  you  come  with  me 
to  see  the  Martinez  ?  I  would,  with  great  pleasure,  if  Charlotte  would 
accompany  us. 

2.  IIoAV  does  that  lady  speak  French  ?  They  say  she  speaks  very 
correctly,  though  with  a  slightly  foreign  accent. 

3.  Might  he  not  be  cured  if  he  called  in  a  good  physician  ?  He  is  of 
opinion  that  physicians  do  more  injury  than  good  to  mankind, 

4.  Do  you  know  any  thing  of  the  author  of  that  play  ?  Yes,  I  have 
read  (or  heard)  all  his  plays ;  they  are  very  interesting,  and  delighted 
me  exceedingly. 

5.  What  is  death  ?     The  separation  of  soul  and  body. 


246  LESSON     XLVII. 

6.  Can  one  be  a  citizen  of  the  United  States  without  having  been 
born  (nacer)  in  the  country  ?  Yes,  after  having  resided  in  the  United 
States  a  certain  number  of  years  any  one  may  become  a  citizen. 

7.  "^liere  is  that  poor  man  going  ?  To  the  hospital ;  he  has  broken 
his  leg. 

8.  Pardon  me,  I  tbink  you  are  mistaken ;  it  is  rather  his  arm  that  is 
broken,  for  if  his  leg  were  broken  he  coidd  not  walk. 

9.  Do  you  remember  the  name  of  the  principal  city  of  Naples?  Yes, 
the  name  of  the  principal  city  is  that  of  the  kingdom  also. 

10.  Did  you  shake  hands  witb  that  young  lady  ?  Yes,  as  soon  as  she 
saw  me  she  came  towards  me  and  gave  me  ber  band. 

11.  Is  that  cloth  {pafio)  sold  very  bigh?  Xot  very;  it  costs  only 
three  dollars  a  yard. 

12.  How  often  do  you  take  yonr  Spanish  lessons  ?     Twice  a  week. 

13.  Would  you  not  learn  faster  if  yon  took  a  lesson  every  other  day 
(un  dia  s'l  y  otro  no)  ?  My  teacher  says  I  would ;  but  I  have  not  time  to 
take  lessons  so  often. 

14.  "Would  you  like  summer  to  return  again  ?  No,  thank  you,  I  am 
glad  it  is  past,  for  I  assure  you  I  have  suffered  enough  with  the  heat. 

15.  How  sad  it  is  on  the  field  of  battle  {campo  de  hatalla)  to  hear  the 
groans  of  the  dying !  Yes ;  and,  notwithstanding,  men  will  persist  in 
killing  each  other  for  a  foot  *  of  ground  (terreno). 

16.  How  is  butter  sold  a  pound?  Tlairty  cents  for  one  kind,  and  forty 
cents  a  pound  for  the  best. 

17.  Do  you  think  it  can  injure  any  one  to  have  fi-iends  ?  No,  it  can 
injure  nobody  to  have  fi-iends. 

18.  Is  not  that  person  very  amiable  and  agreeable  ?  Very  rarely,  for 
a  mere  nothing  incommodes  him. 

19.  Are  there  many  learned  men  in  that  country?  There  have  been 
and  there  are  at  present  men  of  extraordinary  learning. 

20.  Which  are  the  three  principal  virtues?     Faith,  hope  and  chanty. 

21.  Is  Miss  Cabargas  married  yet?  Not  yet,  although  a  large  number 
of  gentleman  have  solicited  her  hand. 

22.  I  suppose  you  have  all  read  some  Spanish  comedies?  Several 
Spanish  and  some  French  comedies,  by  the  best  dramatists. 

23.  Which  of  all  the  French  comedies  that  you  have  read  do  you  like 
best  ?    Those  of  Moliere. 

*  Paimo  (literally  a  span). 


LESSON     XLVIII. 


247 


LESSON    XLVIII. 


Afirmar. 

Aiiigir. 

Admitir. 

Atrcversc. 

Criticar. 

Condcscendcr. 

Convencor. 

Declarar. 

Depender. 

Disponer. 

Diferenciar. 

Edificar. 

Entretenerse. 

Fabricar. 

Suponer. 

Nombrar. 

Influir. 

Ocultar. 

Observar. 

Obedcccr. 

Proporcionar. 

Pretender. 

Publicar. 

Quejarso. 

Eegularizar. 

Eeflexionar. 

Eidiculizar. 

Reforraar. 

Lo  que  se  decir. 

Sin  que  V.  me  lo  diga. 

Volver  a  las  andadas. 

Para  mi  ten  go. 

A  trueque. 
Sin  embargo. 
Candidamente. 
De  modo. 


To  affirm. 

To  afflict. 

To  admit,  to  accept. 

To  dare. 

To  criticise. 

To  condescend,  to  consent. 

To  convince. 

To  declare. 

To  depend. 

To  dispose,  to  arrange. 

To  differ. 

To  edify,  to  buUd. 

To  amuse. 

To  construct,  to  make,  to  build. 

To  suppose. 

To  name,  to  appoint. 

To  influence,  to  affect. 

To  conceal,  to  bide. 

To  observe. 

To  obey. 

To  proportion,  to  procure,  to 

offer,  to  afford. 
To  pretend,  to  lay  claim  to,  to 

aspire  to,  to  sue  for. 
To  publisb. 

To  complain,  to  moan. 
To  regulate. 
To  reflect. 
To  ridicule. 
To  reform. 

"What  I  know. 

Without  you  telling  me. 

To  do  so  again,  to  return  to 

(one's)  old  habits. 
It  is  my  opinion. 

On  condition. 

Nevertheless,  notwithstanding. 

Candidly. 

In  such  a  manner,  tliat,  so  that. 


248 


LESSOK     XLVIII 


I  Bravo! 


I  Very  good  !     Bravo ! 


Bruto. 

Brutish.  - 

Cierto. 

Certain. 

A6reo. 

Airy,  aerial. 

Angelical, 

Angelical. 

Ideal. 

Ideal. 

Interior. 

Interior. 

Incompleto, 

Incomplete. 

Imperfecto. 

Imperfect. 

Exterior. 

Exterior. 

Extrafio. 

Strange. 

Igual. 

Equal,  the  same. 

Human  0. 

Humane. 

Positivo. 

Positive. 

Eeal. 

Eeal,  royal. 

Arquitecto. 
Anciano. 
Ciego. 
Cal  y  canto. 
Bruto. . 
Idiota. 
Espacio. 
Complemento. 
Goce. 
Mai. 

Material. 
Objeto. 
Palacio. 
Pajaro. 
Enfermo. 
Prisionero. 
Pensamiento. 
Castillos  en  el 
aire. 


Architect. 

Old  man. 

Blind. 

Stone. 

Brute. 

Idiot. 

Space. 

Complement. 

Enjoyment. 

Evil. 

Material. 

Object. 

Palace. 

Bird. 

Sick. 

Prisoner. 

Thought. 

Castles  in  the  air. 


Oarrera. 

Desgracia. 

Diferencia. 

Curiosidad. 

Exageracion. 

Franqueza. 

Juventud. 

Ilnsion. 

Fehcidad. 

Risa. 

Realidad. 

Ruindad. 

Riquezas. 


Career. 

Misfortune. 

Difference. 

Curiosity. 

Exaggeration. 

Frankness. 

Youth. 

Illusion. 

Happiness. 

Laugh,  laughter. 

Reality. 

Meanness. 

Riches. 


COMPOSITIOX. 


Adivino  el  motive  por  el  cual  nos  ha- 
bian  adulado  lo3  mismos  que  des- 
pues  nos  critican,  criticaban,  critica- 
ron,  ban  criticado,  criticaran. 

Leiamos  una  noticia  que  acababa  {or 
acaba)  de  publicarse. 


I  guess  the  motive  for  which  those  same 
persons  who  had  flattered  us  before, 
criticise,  did  criticise,  criticised,  have 
criticised,  will  criticise  us  afterward. 

We  were  reading  some  news  just  pub- 
Hshcd  (that  had  just  been  published, 
or  hds  just  been  publislied). 


LESSON      XLVIir. 


249 


Contaba  la  Jcsgracia  que  los  afligio. 

No  sere  yo  el  primero  que  se  atreva. 
Aprcnded  vosotros,  los  que  os  quejais, 

quejabais,  quejasteis,  habeis  quejado, 

quejareis. 
1^1  quiere  jugar. 
Nosotros  queremos  estudiar. 
El  hubo  dc  condesccnder. 
Tengo  que  callar. 
ElIo9  deben  cstar  muy  ocupados. 
Quiero  (or  pienso)  salir. 
Afirmo  (or  declaro)  que  saldre. 
Digo  que  saldr6. 
Es  util  estudiar  las  lenguas. 
Conviene  d  los  hombrcs  instruirse. 

El  estudio  de  las  lenguas  es  util. 

La  instruecion  conviene  a  los  hombres. 

Conviene  que  yo  estudie. 

Es  util  que  los  hombres  se  instruyan. 

Les  mando  callar.  ) 

Les  mando  que  callasen.  j 
Impedir  que  se  comctan  injusticias  cs  el 

objeto  de  las  leyes. 
Deseo  que  me  comprendas. 
No  lograras  que  le  castiguen. 

Se  le  ayudarii  si  fuere  necesario. 

lie  sentido  que  no  se  convenza  (con- 

venciera  or  convenciese). 
Habra  Uamado  para  que  le  abran  (abrie- 

ran  or  abriesen)  la  puerta. 
Creo  que  le  convencere  facilmcnte. 
Reflesionar6  lo  que  he  de  hacer. 
Pense  que  iba  a  matarla. 
Pense  que  enviara  (or  enviaria)  la  carta. 


He  Teas  telling  the  misfortune  that  affict- 
cd  them. 

I  shall  not  be  the  first  to  dare. 

Know,  you  who  complain,  were  com- 
plaining, complained,  had  complained, 
will  complain. 

He  will  (is  detennined  to)  play. 

We  will  study. 

He  had  to  consent. 

I  have  to  be  silent. 

They  must  be  very  busy. 

I  wish  (or  intend  to)  go  out 

I  affirm  (or  declare)  that  I  shall  go  out. 

I  say  that  I  shall  go  out. 

It  is  useful  to  study  languages. 

It  is  man's  interest  to  acquire  knowl- 
edge. 

The  study  of  languages  is  useful. 

Knowledge  is  useful  to  man. 

It  is  my  interest  to  study. 

It  is  useful  to  mankind  to  possess 
knowledge. 

He  ordered  them  to  be  silent. 

To  prevent  the  commission  of  injustice, 

such  is  the  object  of  laws. 
I  wish  you  to  understand  me. 
You  will  not  succeed  in  having  him 

punished. 
He  shall  have  help  if  it  be  necessary. 
I  was  sorry  he  would  not  be  convinced 

(or  was  not  convinced.) 
He  knocked,  of  course,  in  order  that 

the  door  may  (or  might)  be  opened. 
I  think  I  shall  convince  him  easily. 
I  shall  reflect  on  what  I  shall  do. 
I  thought  he  was  going  to  kill  her. 
I  thought  he  would  send  the  letter. 


EXPLANATION. 
235.    CORRESPONDEXCE    OF  THE  TeXSES  WITH  EACH  OTHER. 

— When  one  A-crb  is  connected  with  another  by  a  relative,  there 
are  mauy  combinations  in  whicli  the  determining  and  the  (fe- 
ll* 


250 


LESSON     XLVIII. 


termined  verbs  may  be  found ;  both  may  be  in  the  indicative 
or  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  or  one  in  the  indicative  and  the 
other  in  the  subjunctive ;  but  both  cannot  be  in  the  infinitive 
or  in  the  imperative ;  as, 


Adivino  el  motivo  por  el  cual  nos  ha- 
bian  adulado  lo3  mismos  quo  nos 
critican,  criticaban,  a'itlcaron,  han 
criticado,  criticardn. 

Leiamos  una  noticia  57^5  acababa  (or 
(icahd)  de  publicarse. 

Contaba  la  dcsgracia  qiie  los  afligid. 

No  sere  yo  el  primero  que  sc  atreva. 
Aprended  vosotros  los  que  os  quejais, 

guejabais,  quejasteis,  habeis  quejado, 

qtcejariis. 


I  guess  the  motive  for  which  those  same 
persons  who  have  flattered  us  before, 
criticise,  did  criticise,  criticised,  have 
criticised,  will  criticise  us  afterward. 

We  were  reading  some  news  that  had 
(or  has)  just  been  published. 

Ho  was  telling  the  misfortune  that 
afflicted  them. 

I  shall  not  be  the  first  to  dare. 

Learn,  you  who  complain,  were  com- 
plaining, complained, had  complained, 
will  complain. 


236.  The  determined  verb  is  put  in  the  infinitive  whenever 
it  has  the  same  subject  as  the  determining  verb ;  as, 


El  quiere  jugar. 

Nosotros  queremos  csludiar. 


He  wishes  to  play. 
"We  wish  to  study. 


This  is  the  reason  Avhy  the  auxiliaries  hdber  de^  tener  que, 
deber,  always  require  the  governed  verb  in  the  infinitive,  be- 
cause the  subject,  or  nominative,  is  the  same  for  both  verbs ;  as, 


El  hubo  dc  condescender. 

Tengo  que  callar. 

Ellos  deben  estar  may  ocupados. 


He  had  to  consent. 
I  have  to  be  silent. 
They  must  be  very  busy. 


An  exception  to  this  rule  occurs  vrhcn  the  determining  verb 
expresses  a  firm  and  decided  aflirmation ;  and  so  we  say : 
Quiero  (or  picnso)  salir.  I  I  wish  (or  intend)  to  go  out. 

Afirmo  (declaro)  que  saldre.  j  I  affirm  (or  declare)  that  I  shall  go  cut. 

We  must  also  except  the  verb  decir,  which  cannot  govern 
another  verb  in  the  infinitive,  because  whenever  we  employ  it 
to  announce  our  own  actions  it  is  not  with  the  purpose  of  re- 
lating them,  but  to  manifest  our  resolution  to  execute  them ;  as, 

Digo  que  saldre.  |  I  say  I  shall  go  out. 

237.  TVhen  the  determining  verb  is  ser,  or  any  iinperson- 


LESSOX     XLVIII. 


251 


E!  csiudio  de  las  lenguas  es  util. 

La  insiruccion  conviene  a  los  hombres. 


al  verb,  and  the  governed  verb  has  no  subject,  the  latter  is 
placed  in  the  infinitive ;  as, 

Es  util  estiidiar  las  lenguas.  It  is  useful  to  study  languages. 

Conviene  a  los  hombres  instruirse.  It  is  the  interest  of  mankind  to  acquire 

knowledge. 

And  such  is  the  natural  construction,  because  the  tnie  sub- 
ject of  this  proposition  is  the  very  infinitive  itself,  which  stands 
there  as  a  noun,  an  office  that  cannot  be  performed  by  the 
other  moods.     The  above  sentences  are  equivalent  to  these : 

The  study  of  languages  is  usefiil. 
It  is  the  interest  of  mankind  to  acquire 
knowledge. 

238.  But  if  the  determined  verb  also  has  a  nominative,  then 
it  must  be  placed  in  the  subjunctive;  as, 

Conviene  que  yo  estudie.  i  It  is  my  interest  to  study. 

Es  util  que  los  hombres  se  instrtiyan.      I  It  is  useful  to    mankind   to    possess 

I      knowledge. 

Those  verbs  that  express  command,  govern  either  of  the 

two  forms,  since  we  say  equally  well : 

Les  mando  callar.  )  I 

T  J  /  77         r  He  ordered  them  to  be  silent. 

Les  mando  que  callasen. )  \ 

239.  When  the  determining  verb  is  in  the  infinitive,  in 
the  present  or  future  of  the  indicative,  or  in  the  imperative, 
connected  with  the  governed  verb  by  a  conjunction,  this  latter 
verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  ordinarily  in  the  present 
or  in  the  future  ;  as, 


Iinpedir  que  se  cometan  injusticias  es  el 

objeto  de  las  leycs. 
Deseo  que  me  comprendas. 
No  logrards  que  Ic  castigucn, 

Se  le  ayudard  sifuere  necesario. 


To  prevent  the  commission  of  injustice, 
such  is  the  object  of  the  laws. 

I  wish  you  to  understand  me. 

You  will  not  succeed  in  having  him 
punished. 

He  will  have  help  if  it  be  necessary. 

240.  -The  preterit  indefinite  and  compound  future  of  the 
indicative  govern  the  determined  verb  in  the  present  or  imper- 
fect of  the  subjunctive ;  as, 


He  seniido  que  no  se  convenza  {conven- 

ciera  or  convenciese). 
Habr&    llamado    para    que    le  abran 

{abrieraa  or  abriesen)  la  puerta. 


I  was  sorry  he  should  not  be  (or  was 

not)  convinced. 
He  knocked,  of  course,  in  order  that 

the  door  may  (or  might)  be  opened. 


252  LESSON     XLVIII. 

241.  When  the  determioing  verb  is  in  the  indicative,  it  ^er.- 
erally  governs  the  determined  one  in  the  same  mood,  if  the 
nominative  is  the  same  for  both  verbs  ;  as, 
Oreo  que  le  convencere  facilmente.  I  I  think  I  shall  convince  him  easily. 

Rejlexionare  lo  que  he  de  hacer.  |  I  shall  reflect  on  what  I  have  to  do. 

But  if  each  verb  has  a  different  nominative,  the  second 
verb  may  be  placed  in  the  indicative  or  in  the  subjunctive ;  as. 


I  thought  he  wag  going  to  kill  her. 
I  thought  he  would  send  me  the  letter. 


Pense  que  iba  t  matarla. 
Petise  que  me  aiviara  (or  enviarid)  la 
carta. 

Much  more  might  be  said  upon  this  subject,  did  we  not  fear 
to  exceed  the  limits  prescribed  by  the  nature  of  the  present 
work. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Dofia  Luisita,  jLe  gnsta  a  V.  formar  castillos  en  cl  aire  ?  Muclio ; 
pero  creo  que  forino  demasiados. 

2.  Me  alegro  mucho  que,  como  a  mi,  le  guste  /i  V.  el  mundo  de  las  ilu- 
siones,  7  tambien  apruebo  su  franqneza  de  V.  en  confeearlo. — Y  ^porque 
lo  habia  de  ocultar?     j  Qu6  mal  hay  en  eso? 

3.  No  s6  si  hay  mal  6  no,  lo  que  se  decLr  es,  que  todo  el  mundo  afecta 
no  formarlos  y  con  cierta  risita  burlona  pretenden  ridiculizar  a  los  que, 
como  V.  y  yo,  confesamos  candidamcnte  que  los  hacemos. 

4.  ^Y  cree  V.,  D.  Jose,  que  esas  gentes  vivan  sin  ilusiones  deninguna 
especie?  No,  seQorita,  no  lo  creo.  Dios  ha  dado  d  todo  hombre,  d 
diferencia  del  bruto,  un  mundo  ideal  interior  ademas  del  mundo  positive 
exterior,  t  excepcion  de  los  idiotas. 

5.  j  Cudnto  me  alegro  de  oirlo !  ;  porque  yo  tenia  tanta  verguenza  de 
mis  pobres  castillos  en  el  aire !  i  De  modo  es  que  V.  cree  que  yo  no  soy 
sola  ?  De  ningon  modo,  todo  el  mundo  los  forma,  la  diferencia  solo  existe 
en  la  manera. 

^.  I  Ah !  Don  Jos6,  V.  me  va  pareciendo  un  bnen  arquitecto  de  casti- 
llos en  el  aire  y  uno  de  estos  dias  voy  a  pedirle  que  me  muestre  uno  de  los 
muchos  que  babrd  edificado. — Con  mucho  gusto,  sefiorita,  a  trueque,  sin 
embargo,  de  que  V.  me  adraita  en  uno  de  sus  palacios  aereos. 

7.  No,  eso  no,  jamas  podria  yo  poner  en  evidencia  mis  castillos :  pero 
V.  dice  que  la  diferencia  solo  existe  en  la  manera  de  formarlos ;  explique- 
me  V.  esto,  quiza  asi  lograr6  refomiar  los  raios,  porque  he  observado  que 
son  incompletes ;  siempre  les  falta  algo. — Pues  es  extrafio,  sefiorita,  por- 


LESSON     XLVIII.  253 

que  yo  creia  que  solo  las  cosas  huinanas  eran  imperfectas  y  sus  ilusiones 
do  V.  siendo 

8.  Por  supuesto,  iangelicales!  [Vamos!  d6jeseV.  de  cumplimientos, 
ya  sabe  V.  que  no  mo  gustan,  y  resp6ndame  V.  4  mi  pregunta  si  V. 
gusta,  porque  tengo  curiosidad  de  saber  c6mo  forman  otros  sus  castillos. 
— Obedezco,  sefiorita,  y  para  principiar  debo  decir  que  yo  me  equivoqu6 
cuando  dijo  quo  solo  se  diferenciaban  en  la  manera,  porque  tambien  in- 
fluye  mucho  el  material. 

9.  J  Como  el  material  ?  j  si  se  fabrican  en  el  aire  I  ;  Espero  que  no  los 
fabrique  V.  de  cal  y  canto  I — No,  seQorita,  no  de  cal  y  canto;  pero  se  fa- 
brican ;  y  si  se  fabrican,  de  algo  se  fabrican. 

10.  I  Pero  de  qu6,  seQor,  de  qu6  ?  Yo  formo  castillos,  pero  no  necesito 
n;;da  para  hacerlos;  vuelo  mas  que  los  pajaros,  mando  hasta  en  las  vo- 
luntades  de  los  otros,  bago  volver  al  tiempo  en  su  carrera,  dispongo  del 
espacio,  de  la  fortuna,  y  bago  que  me  obedezca  basta  el  amor. — Eso  lo 
creo  sin  que  V.  me  lo  diga,  sefiorita. 

11.  [Dale!  no  vuelva  V.  a  las  andadas,  y  cu6nteme  V.  qu6  materiales 
son  esos  de  que  V.  me  hablaba. — V.  misma  acaba  de  norabrar  algunos. 

12.  I  Cuiiles?  i  Oomo !  ^quo  mas  materiales  quiero  V.  para  formar  un 
Castillo  en  el  aire,  que  poder  disponer,  como  V.  dice  que  puede,  de  las 
voluntades  de  los  otros,  del  tiempo,  del  espacio,  la  fortuna  y  hasta  del 
amor? 

13.  jToma!  Pero  yo  no  poseo  ninguna  do  esas  cosas  en  realidad,  y 
sin  embargo  mis  castillos  me  entretienen  y  divierten  mucho. — Perdone 
v.,  sefiorita,  V.  las  posee  y  con  ellas  forma  V.  ese  bonito  mundo  interior, 
que  le  proporciona  6.  V.  los  goces  que  no  le  da  el  exterior. 

14.  T  en  eso  tiene  V.  razon,  que  mis  ilusiones,  6  sea  como  V.  las  Uama, 
mi  mundo  interior,  me  consuelan  muchas  voces  de  la  ruindad  del  munda 
exterior. — Eso  sucede  d  todo  el  mundo,  de  ese  modo,  el  ciego  ve,  el  ^n- 
fermo  goza  de  salud,  el  prisionero  do  libertad,  el  pobre  de  las  riquezas  y 
el  anciano  do  la  juventud,  las  ilusiones  bacon  los  males  menores.  En  este 
mundo  ideal  es  en  donde  los  bombros  son  verdaderamente  igualos,  y  para 
mi  tengo  que  no  es  ilusorio,  sino  real,  puesto  que  de  61  depend©  nuestra 
felicidad. 

15.  I  No  crce  Y.  que  hay  alguna  exageracion  en  lo  qno  V.  dice  ?  No, 
sefiora,  pero  si,  creo,  que  debemos  tenor  buen  cuidado  de  regularizar 
nuestros  pensamientos  y  de  basar  siempre  nuestros  castillos  en  el  aire  en 
la  virtud  y  la  religion. 

16.  J  Bravo !  bravo !  muy  bien,  asi  me  gustan  a  mi  los  castillos  en  el  aire. 


254  LESSON     XLVIII. 


EXERCISE. 


1.  "WTio  built  the  liouse  you  are  living  in  at  present?  An  excellent 
ai'cMtect,  a  friend  of  my  father. 

2.  Are  you  certain  it  was  an  old  man  that  was  suing  for  her  hand  ? 
I  cannot  affirm  that  it  was  an  old  man. 

3.  What  a  misfortune  that  he  will  not  study !  It  would  he  a  real 
misfortune  if  it  were  true ;  I  think  it  is  not  true. 

4.  Do  you  ever  build  castles  in  the  air  ?  Seldom ;  for,  in  my  opinion, 
real  castles  built  of  stone  are  to  be  preferred  to  the  aerial  ones  you  speak  ofl 

5.  "What  a  pretty  bird  you  have  there  1  docs  it  sing  ?  It  sings  the 
whole  day  long. 

6.  Do  you  think  our  young  friend  is  really  as  happy  as  he  appears  to 
be  ?    No,  there  must  be  some  exaggeration  in  what  he  says. 

7.  In  what  respect  do  these  two  authors  differ  from  each  other  ?  Read 
the  works  of  both,  and  you  will  observe  for  yourself. 

8.  Do  they  both  write  equally  well?  No,  one  of  them  arranges  his 
thoughts  in  a  very  strange  manner,  so  that  it  is  sometimes  impossible  to 
understand  his  meaning,*  and  at  all  times  disagreeable  to  read  him. 

9.  Is  Peter  punished  now  in  school  as  often  as  formerly  ?  As  often 
as  ever ;  but  it  is  useless  to  punish  him,  for  though  he  is  good  for  a  few 
days,  yet  he  always  gets  back  to  his  old  habits. 

10.  Docs  that  man  always  say  what  he  thinks?  lam  sitrel  cannot 
say;  but  it  seems  to  me  that  there  is  in  his  manner  of  speaking  a  some- 
thing I  cannot  explain  that  hides  his  real  thoughts. 

11.  Is  he  liked  in  general  by  those  who  know  him  ?  On  the  contrary, 
everybody  hates  him  and  ridicules  him  for  his  meanness. 

12.  Have  you  any  curiosity  to  see  the  interior  of  a  royal  palace  ?  If 
Uie  occasion  offered  (presented  itself),  I  would  like  to  see  it ;  otherwise  I 
am  perfectly  content  with  the  interior  of  my  own  house. 

13.  You  are  wise  for  that;  happiness  is  not  at  all  times  to  be  found  in 
palaces.    Ah  !  I  see  you  aref  something  of  a  philosopher. 

.  14.  How  is  this,  sir  ?  your  exercise  is  incomplete.  I  confess  that  had 
I  wished  I  might  have  finislied  it ;  but  you  v.-ill  find  that,  as  far  as  it  goes, 
it  is  not  imperfect. 

15.  That  is  to  say  that  the  quality  does  not  depend  on  tlie  quantity. 
Precisely  so ;  you  may  complain  of  my  not  having  done  the  whole  of  the 
exercise,  but  I  do  not  think  you  can  criticise  the  part  I  have  brought  to  you. 

16.  "What  sizet  is  the  book  your  friend  has  just  published  ?  The  same 
size  as  the  one  he  published  before. 

*  Loque  quiere  decir.  t  Titne  V.  X  Tamano. 


LESSON     XLIX. 


255 


LESSON    XLIX. 


Acudir. 

Agregar. 

Afiadir. 

Componcr. 

Contencr. 

Incluir. 

Facilitar. 

Ofreccr. 


Artificial. 

Anterior. 

Aborrecible. 

Celeste,  azul  celeste. 

Celestial. 

Celico. 

Chinesco. 

Creible. 

Desprcciable. 

Familiar. 

Gigantesco. 

Terrestre. 

Territorial. 

Terroso. 

Terrado,  terrero. 

Terrenal. 

Terron. 


To  hasten  (to  a  place),  to  refer. 

To  add. 

To  add. 

To  compose,  to  mend,  to  fix. 

To  contain.    • 

To  include. 

To  facilitate. 

To  offer. 


Por  instruido  que  sea. 

Ilowever  learned  lie  m 

Anteriormente. 

Formerly,  previously. 

Compar  ati  vamente. 

Comparatively. 

Corrientemente. 

Currently,  fluently. 

Fluidamente. 

Fluently. 

Suficiente. 

Sufficient. 

En  general. 

In  general. 

Generalmente. 

Generally. 

Considerablemente. 

Considerably. 

Particularmeate. 

Particularly,  prirately. 

En  cuanto  a. 

As  to,  as  for. 

Artificial. 

Anterior,  previous. 

Hateful. 

Celestial,  sky-blue. 

Celestial,  heavenly. 

Celestial,  heavenly. 

Chinese. 

Credible. 

Despicable. 

Familiar. 

Gigantic. 

Terrestrial,  earthly. 

Territorial. 

Terreous,  earthy. 

Terrace. 

Terrestrial,  earthly. 

Lump  (or  clod)  of  earth. 


256 


LBSSON     XLIX. 


Eicacho. 

Very  rich. 

Picaresco, 

Roguish. 

Patronimico. 

Patronymic. 

Propio. 

Proper,  own. 

Mudable. 

Changeable. 

Verbal. 

Verbal. 

Arena]. 

Sapdy  (ground). 

Arboleda. 

Grove. 

Ascenso. 

Promotion. 

Ascension. 

Ascension. 

Alvarez. 

Alvarez. 

Carnuza. 

Bad  meat. 

Calvinista. 

Calvinist. 

Creencia. 

Belief,  credence 

Catolicistno. 

Catholicism. 

Ciencia. 

Science. 

Diccionario. 

Dictionary. 

Gentualla. 

Rabble. 

Escobajo. 

A  bad  broom. 

Madrastra. 

Step-mother. 

Boticario. 

Druggist,  apothe- 

Terminacion. 

Termination. 

cary. 

Dicha. 

Happiness. 

Domi'nguez. 

Dominguez. 

Isla. 

Island. 

Ferniiadez. 

Fernandez. 

Educacion. 

Education. 

Idiotismo. 

Idiom, 

Escoba. 

Broom. 

Filosofastro. 

PhUosophaster. 

Excusa, 

Excuse. 

Hij  astro. 

Step-son. 

Explicacion. 

Explanation. 

Herman  astro. 

Step-brother. 

Espada. 

Sword. 

Hombraclio. 

Corpulent. 

Exclamacion. 

Exclamation. 

Libraco. 

A  contemptible 

Firma. 

Signature. 

book. 

Gota. 

Drop. 

Pajarraco. 

An  ugly  bird. 

Figura. 

Figure,  appear- 

Latinajo. 

Dog  Latin. 

• 

ance. 

Manzanar. 

Apple  orchard. 

Faccion. 

Feature. 

Pinar. 

Pine  grove. 

Factura. 

Invoice. 

Protestante. 

Protestant. 

Facultad. 

Faculty,  power. 

Padrastro. 

Step-father. 

Adquisicion. 

Acquirement. 

Sigaificado. 

Signification, 

Astronomia. 

Astronomy. 

meaning. 

Afluencia,  fluidez 

.  Fluency. 

Vinacho. 

Bad  wine. 

Protestantismo. 

Protestantism. 

Habanero. 

Havanese. 

Madrileno. 

Madrilenian. 

Eodrigucz. 

Rodriguez. 

Sanchez. 

Sanchez,     [heart. 

Amante. 

Lover,         sweet- 

• 

Arbol, 

Tree. 

Amador. 

Lover. 

LESSON     XLIX. 


267 


COMPOSITION. 


i  Porquo  lee  V.  ese  librae©  ? 


Porque  no  tengo  otro  ;  pero  V.  se  equi- 
voca,  es  un  libro  clasico  excelente. 

(,  Conocc  y.  a  aquel  ricacho  ? 

Le  conozco ;  pero  no  le  trato,  porque  es 

iin  hombracho  que  solo  le  gusta  tra- 

tarse  con  gentualla. 

Juan,  no  barras  con  ese  escobajo,  que 
ensucia  mas  que  limpia. 

La  came  buena  se  vende  &  treinta  cen- 
tavos  la  libra ;  la  camuza  a  veinte. 

Ese  estudiante  suele  decir  latinajos, 
pero  no  sabe  Latin. 

En  la  America  del  Norte  hay  mas  pro- 
testantes  que  catolicos. 

Los  boticarios  en  los  Estados  Unidos 
no  solo  venden  medicinas,  sino  per- 
fumeria,  cigarros  y  otras  muchas 
cosas. 

iVive  el  Seflor  Fernandez  con  su  pa- 
dre? 

No,  scSor,  porque  no  quiere  vivir  con 
su  madrastra  y  hermanastros. 

i  Es  V.  madrileSo  ? 

No,  senor,  soy  Ilabanero. 

Aquel  filosofastro  es  despreciable. 

Esa  senorita  es  muy  amable ;  pero  muy 
mudable. 


"Why  do  you  read  that  contemptible  old 

book  ? 
Because  I  hare  no  other ;  but  you  are 

mistaken,  it  is  an  excellent  classic 

(book). 
Do  you  know  that  j;ich  man  ? 
I  know  him  ;  but  I  have  no  intercourse 

with  him,  because  he  is  a  low  man, 

whose  taste  is  to  associate  only  with 

the  rabble. 
John,  do  not  sweep  with  that  old  stump 

of  a  broom ;   it  dirties  more  than  it 

cleans. 
Good  meat  sells  at  thirty  cents  a  pound, 

poor  (bad)  meat  at  twenty. 
That  student  is  in  the  habit  of  reciting 

dog  Latin,  but  he   does  not  know 

Latin. 
There  are  more  Protestants  than  Catho- 
lics in  North  America. 
In  the  United  States  the  druggists  sell 

not  only  medicines,  but  perfumery, 

cigars,  and  many  other  things. 

Does  Mr.  Fernandez  live  with  his 
father  ? 

No,  sir ;  because  he  docs  not  wish  to 
live  with  Ids  step-mother  and  step- 
brothers. 

Are  you  a  Madrilenian  ? 

No,  sir,  I  am  a  Havanese. 

That  philosophaster  is  a  despicable 
(man). 

That  young  lady  is  very  amiable,  but 
very  changeable. 


EXPLANATION. 

242.  Derivative  Nouns. — These  nouns  constitute  one  of 
tlie  c])ief  sources  of  the  richness  of  tlie  Spanish  language  ;  we 
have  already  introduced  some  of  them  in  previous  lessons, 
when  treatincr  of  augmentative  and  diminutive  terminations. 


258  LESSON    XLIX. 

These  terminations  are  very  numerous,  both  for  the  sub- 
stantives and  adjectives,  and  each  one  of  them  determines  the 
general  signification  of  the  derivative  noun.  As  it  would  be 
impossible  to  give  in  this  place  a  complete  list  of  all  these 
terminations,  we  shall  endeavor  to  lay  before  the  student  such 
of  them  as  are  to  be  found  in  most  common  use. 

243.  The  tft:minations  aco,  acho^  alia  and  wza,  denote  in- 
feriority; as 


Libraco. 

Pajarraeo. 

Vinac/io. 

Gentua^a, 

Camw^a. 


A  contemptible  old  book. 

An  ugly  bird. 

Bad  wine. 

Rabble. 

Bad  meat. 


The  termination  aeho  is  sometimes  augmentative ;  as, 

RicacAo.  I  Very  rich. 

Hombrac/to.  I  A  big  (or  corpulent)  man. 

244.  Ajo  implies  meanness,  and  the  consequent  contempt 
inspired  by  it ;  as, 

Escoba/o.  I  An  old  stump  of  a  broom. 

Latina/o.  |  Dog  Latin. 

245.  The  terminations  al^  ar,  e(/o,  ico,  il,  iscOj  in  adjectives, 
commonly  denote  the  quality  of  the  thing  ;  as, 


Artificial. 

Familiar. 

Gigantesco. 

Picaresco. 

Clasico. 

Chinese©. 


ArtificiaL 

Familiar. 

Gigantic. 

Roguish. 

Classic. 

Chinese. 


246.  In  substantives  the  same  terminations,  al,  ar,  and 
also  eda  and  edo,  serve  to  form  collective  nouns  ;  as, 


Arbolerfa. 
ArenaZ. 
Manzanar. 
Pinar. 


Grove. 

Sandy  ground. 
Apple  orchard. 
Pine  grove. 


247.  The  terminations  ante,  ario,  ente,  ero,  ista  and  or  are 


LESSON     XLIX.  259 

for  the  most  part  expressive  of  use,  sect,  profession,  trade,  or 
occupation;  as, 


Estudia?ife 

Boticario, 

Zapatero. 

Organtsta. 

Protestanfe. 

Calvin?'s/a. 

Pintor. 


Student. 
Druggist. 

Shoemaker. 

Organist. 

Protestant. 

Calvinist. 

Painter. 


248.  The  termination  as^ro  signifies  inferiority  in  a  super- 
lative degree ;  as,  filosof  astro,  a  despicable  philosopher ;  poctas- 
tro,  poetaster ;  and  it  is  curious  to  observe  that  it  also  serves 
to  express  the  degrees  of  relationship  existing  between  those 
persons  who  more  generally  hate  than  love  each  other;  as, 


Hcrmanasiro. 
Hijosiro. 
Padras^ro. 
Madras^ra. 


Step-brother. 
Step-son. 
Step- father. 
Step-mother. 


249.  Ble  corresponds  to  the  same  termination  in  English; 


Aborreci6/e. 
Gvcihle. 
•  Mudai/e. 
AmaLlc. 


Hateful. 
Credible. 
Changeable. 
Amiable. 


250.  Zs?3zo  corresponds  to  the  English  termination  «5m;  as, 
Catolicismo.  I  Catholicism. 

Pi'otestant  ('smo.  |  Protestantism. 

251.  The  names  of  nationalities  are  also  derivatives,  and 
have  their  terminations  in  ero,  es,  eno  ;  as, 

ITabanero.  I  Havanesc. 

Frances.  French,  Frenchman. 

MadrilcMo.  I  Madrilenian. 

252.  Many  patronymic,  or  family,  names  are  also  deriva- 
tives ;  for  instance,  Alvarez,  Dommguez,  Fernandez,  Rodriguez, 
Sanchez,  &c.,  were  the  names  that  were  given  to  the  sons  of 
the  Alvaros,  Domingos,  Fernandos,  Rodrigos,  Sanchos,  &c., 
changins;  the  final  o  into  ez. 


260  LESSON     XLIX. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jEs  necesario  para  hablar  una  lengua  aprender  todas  las  palabras 
que  contlene  dicha  lengua?  De  ningun  niodo,  aderaas,  yo  no  creo  que 
exista  un  bombre,  por  instruido  que  sea,  que  las  sepa  todas. 

2.  I  Cuantas  palabras  piensa  V,  que  scan  suficieutes  para  podcr  hablar 
el  espaflol  corrientemeate  ?  De  tres  a  cuatro  mil  palabras  primitivas  con 
sus  dcrivados  cs  todo  lo  que  se  requiere,  para  liablar  una  lengua  fldida- 
mentc. 

3.  Si,  pero  probablemente  los  dcrivados  soi-an  en  tanto  6  mayor 
mimero  que  los  primitives. — Asi  cs,  pero  una  vez  que  se  conocen  las 
terminaciones,  cs  muy  facil  el  forraarlcs,  aunque  nunca  se  hayan  visto  an- 
teriormente. 

4.  ;  Es  posible !  entdnces  esto  debe  facilitar  mucbo  el  cstudio  de  la 
lengua. — Muchisimo,  porque,  como  ya  hemos  dicho,  sabiendo  los  primi- 
tivos  no  tiene  mas  que  aiiadirseles  las  terminaciones,  segun  cl  significado 
que  qui  era  darseles. 

5.  I  Quiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  fonnar  algunos  dcrivados  ?  Si, 
seQor,  con  mucho  gusto ;  deme  V.  los  primitives. 

6.  I  Cuales  son  los  dcrivados  de  cielo  ?     Celeste  y  celestial. 

7.  I  De  tierra  ?     Terrestre,  terrenal,  y  otros. 

8.  I  Porqu6  no  me  los  da  V.  todos  ?  Porque  me  parece  mcjor  que 
aprenda  V.  primeramente  los  de  mas  uso,  pues  sobre  haber  muchos,  los 
hay  de  poco  uso  comparativamente. 

9.  Cuales  otros  se  pudieran  formar  de  cielo  y  tierra  ?  Cclico ;  terroso, 
terron,  y  otros  muchos. 

10.  I  Se  pueden  formar  dcrivados  de  los  verbos  ?  Si,  seDor,  y  a  estos 
se  les  da  el  nombre  de  verbales. 

11.  ^Cuales  se  derivan  del  verbo  amar?  Amador,  amante,  amado, 
amable. 

12.  jDe  ascender?     Ascenso,  ascension. 

13.  jDe  creer?     Creyente,  creencia,  creible,  credulo,  crcJdito. 

14.  J  De  estudiar  ?  Estudiante,  estudio ;  pudiendo  agregar  ademas  los 
aumentativos  y  diminutives  que  tambien  son  dcrivados,  como  estudian- 
tUlo,  estudianton,  etc. 

15.  I  De  que  se  derivan  los  norabres  de  farailia  Gonzalez,  Doiaainguez, 
etc.  ?    Se  derivan  de  los  nombres  propios  Gonzalo,  Domingo,  etc. 

16.  ^Cuantas  palabras  cree  V.  que  contendra  esta  gramiitica?  Mas  de 
tres  mil  palabras  primitivas  y  un  gran  ntiraero  de  derivadas. 

17.  J  En  acabando  la  gramatica  podre  traducir  y  hablar  sobre  cual- 
quiera  materia  que  se  ofrezca?  Podrd  V.  hablar  de  todo  y  seguir  una 
conversacion  en  general  como  V.  ve  que  ya  lo  hacemos  5  pero  para  tra- 


LESSOX     XLIX.  261 

ducir  y  hablar  de  cualquicra  ciencia,  arto  u  oficio  ea  particular,  tendra  V. 
que  acudir  al  diccionario,  porque  es  imposible  introducir  en  una  gramjitica 
todas  las  palabras  necesarias  para  podcr  hacer  esto. 

18.  Y  en  cuanto  a  los  idiotismos  de  la  lengua,  ^se  Lallarun  todos  en 
esta  gramatica?  Tampoco,  puesto  que  se  podrian  componer  trcs  6  cuatro 
voliiraenes  como  este  y  quizii  no  incluirian  todos  los  de  la  lengua. 

19.  2  Como  los  aprendere  entonces?  En  la  conversacion  de  personaa 
instruidas  y  en  la  lectura  de  buenos  libros. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  Chai-les  go  to  another  regiment  at  the  time  of  his  promotion? 
Yes,  he  left  the  71  st  and  went  to  the  7th. 

2.  What  do  you  know  about  the  names  Sanchez,  Dominguez,  and  all 
those  ending  in  ez  ?  That  they  mean  son  of  Sancho,  son  of  Domingo, 
and  are  formed  from  those  names  by  adding  the  termination  you  have 
just  mentioned. 

3.  To  whom  does  that  magnificent  pine  grove  belong  ?  To  the  step- 
son of  the  gentlo'man  Avho  owns  that  pretty  little  house  you  see  over 
there  in  the  distance  {.d  lo  lejos). 

4.  "What  contemptible  old  book  is  that  you  are  reading  so  attentively? 
It  is  no  contemptible  old  book  at  all  (nin</uno),  it  is  the  dictionary ;  I 
always  go  to  the  dictionary  for  a  word  of  which  I  do  not  know  the 
meaning. 

5.  Do  you  know  the  names  of  all  the  heavenly  bodies  ?  Xo,  nor  you 
cither ;  the  science  of  astronomy  is  still  imperfect,  and  there  are  besides 
many  of  the  heavenly  bodies  hidden  from  human  sight. 

G.  Is  not  that  young  gentleman  a  great  lover  of  the  sciences  ?  Yes, 
but  most  particularly  of  the  exact  sciences. 

7.  Why  do  you  sweep  with  that  old  stump  of  a  broom?  It  is  the 
best  I  have. 

8.  Did  you  say  he  was  a  philosopher  ?  Xo,  on  the  contrary,  I  said 
ho  was  but  a  miserable  philosophaster. 

9.  How  does  that  rich  fellow  amuse  himself?  Eeading  history  in 
general,  and  that  of  his  own  country  in  particular. 

10.  I  observe  that  you  speak  German  very  fluently  now;  have  you 
changed  your  book?  ISTo,  I  have  stiU  the  same  one,  but  I  myself  study 
more  than  I  did  formerly. 

11.  Do  you  know  whether  your  cousin  speaks  as  fluently  as  your 
sister?  Mrs.  Alvarez  says  that  in  familiar  conversation  they  speak 
equally  fluently. 

12.  Do  you  do  any  compositions  ?  Yes,  our  father  requires  us  to  do 
two  compositions  a  week  on  the  idioms  of  the  language. 


262 


LESSON    L. 


13.  Is  it  not  a  despicable  habit  to  offer  to  do  things  vre  never  intend 
to  perform  (lletar  a  cdbd)  ?  I  should  say  it  is  more  than  despicable,  it  is 
even  hateful. 

14.  Does  not  the  study  of  grammar  considerably  facilitate  the  acquisi- 
tion of  a  language  ?  Yes,  but  that  alone  is  not  sufficient :  something 
more  is  required. 

15.  Have  you  much  fruit  at  your  house  in  the  country  ?  We  have  a 
very  fine  orchard  of  apples. 

16.  What  language  was  that  your  young  friend  spoke  in  a  moment 
ago  ?  AVhat  he  takes  for  Latin ;  but  what  is  not  in  reality  any  thing  but 
dog  Latin. 

17.  Would  not  that  letter  have  been  better  if  you  had  not  added  that 
last  word  ?  It  appeared  to  me  to  be  necessary  to  add  that  to  what  I  had 
akeady  said,  so  that  the  meaning  might  be  more  easily  understood. 


LESSOR    L. 


Amenazar. 

Apoyar. 

Disgustar, 

Recurrir. 

Sacar. 

A  pesar  de. 

Y  diciendo  y  haciendOo 

i  Todo  sea  por  Dios ! 
Tomar  las  de  villadiego. 
Sobre  todo. 
Desproporcionadisimamente. 

Adverbial. 

Antisocial. 

Antepenultima. 

Iniitil. 

Componente. 

Izquierdo. 

Derecho. 

Pemiltima. 

Superlative. 


To  threaten,  to  menace. 

To  lean  upon,  to  support. 

To  displease,  to  disgust,  to  grieve. 

To  recur,  to  have  recourse. 

To  take  out. 

In  spite  of. 


And  suiting  the   action  to  the 

word. 
I  hope  aU  wiU  be  for  the  best ! 
To  take  to  one's  lieels,  to  make  off. 
Above  all. 
Without  any  proportion. 

Adverbial. 

Antisocial. 

Antepenultimate.  , 

Useless. 

Component. 

Left. 

Right. 

Penultimate. 

Superlative. 


LESSON     L. 


263 


Anteqjos, 

Aguardiente. 

Barbilampiflo. 

Correveidile. 

Bienhcchor. 

Director, 

Dolor  de  muelas 

Dentista. 

Disgusto. 

Ilazmereir. 

Condiscipulo, 

Pisaverde. 

Pormenor. 

Puntapid. 

Parasol. 

Paraguas. 

Quitasol. 

Socialismo. 

Sacamuelas. 

Pueblo. 

Vicerector. 


Spectacles. 

Braudy. 

Beardless. 

Tell-tale. 

Beaefactor, 

Director. 

Tootbaclie. 

Dentist. 

Disgust,  grief. 

Laugbiug-stock. 

Schoolmate. 

Fop,  coxcomb. 

Detail. 

Kick. 

Parasol. 

Umbrella. 

Parasol. 

Socialism. 

Tootb-drawer. 

People,  town. 

Vice-rector. 


Equivocacion. 
Ganapierde. 

Barberia. 
La  derecba. 
La  izquierda. 
Sinrazon. 
Particula.    . 
Quijada. 
Las  damas. 


Mistake. 

A  game  in  check- 
ers. 

Barber-shop. 

The  right  hand. 

The  left  hand. 

Injustice. 

Particle. 

Jaw. 

Draughts,  check- 
ers. 


COMPOSITION". 


No  Ic  esta  bien  a  un  anciano  ol  ser  pisa- 
verde, eso  03  propio  de  bai-bilampiuos. 

6  Quien  ha  dado  un  puntapie  a  aquel 
muchacho  ? 

Yo  se  lo  he  dado,  porque  cs  un  corre- 
veidile. 

Este  hombre  juega  muy  bicn  a  las  da- 
raas,  sobre  todo  a  la  ganapierde. 

6  Tiene  V.  un  quitasol  6  un  paraguas  ? 

Tengo  ambos. 

Ese  joven  bebe  mucho  aguardiente  y  no 
bace  case  do  los  consejos  de  su  bien- 
hcchor. 

Esa  C3  la  razon  porque  cs  cl  bazmereir 
de  todo  el  mundo. 

6  Tiene  V.  bucna  vista  ? 

No,  scnor,  y  esta  es  la  razon  porque 
uso  anteojos. 

Mi  condiscipulo  Manuel  me  ha  ayuda- 
do  a  bacer  la  ccmposicion. 


It  is  not  becoming  to  an  old  man  to  be 
a  fop ;  that  belongs  to  beardless  boys. 
Who  gave  that  boy  a  kick  ? 

I  did,  for  he  is  a  tell-tale. 

This  man  plays  very  well  at  draughts,  and 
especially  at  gaiiapierde  (give  away). 

Have  you  a  parasol  or  an  umbrella  ? 

I  have  both. 

That  young  man  drinks  a  great  deal  of 
brandy,  and  pays  no  heed  to  the  ad- 
vice of  his  benefactor. 

That  is  the  reason  why  ho  is  the  laugh- 
ing-stock of  every  one. 

Have  you  good  sight  ? 

No,  sir,  and  that  is  the  reason  why  I 
use  spectacles. 

My  school-fellow  Emanuel  has  helped 
me  to  do  my  composition. 


264 


LESSON     L. 


Es  inutil  que  me  cuente  V.  los  porrae- 

nores. 
El  director  y  el  viccrector  dc  la  escuela 

son  hombres  excelentes. 
Me  disgustan  las  sinrazones. 
El  socialismo,  a  pesar  de  la  opinion  de 

los  que  lo  apoyan,  cs  antisocial  6  im- 

posible. 


It  is  useless  for  you  to  tcU  mo  the  de- 
tails. 

The  director  and  sub-director  of  the 
school  are  excellent  men. 

Unreasonableness  disgusts  me. 

Socialism,  in  spite  of  the  opinion  of 
those  who  support  it,  is  antisocial 
and  impossible. 


EXPLANATION. 

253.  Compound  Notjks. — These  are  very  numerous  in  the 
Spanish  language ;  some  are  formed  of  two  nouns,  as  barbilam- 
piiio,  beardless ;  puntapie,  a  kick ;  aguardiente^  brandy  ;  others 
are  formed  of  a  noun  and  a  verb,  as  quitasol,  parasol ;  saoa- 
muelas,  tooth-drawer;  others  of  an  adjective  and  a  verb,  as 
pisaverde,  coxcomb ;  others  of  a  noun  and  an  adverb,  as  hien- 
hechor,  benefactor ;  others  of  a  noun  and  a  preposition,  as  an- 
teojos,  spectacles ;  others  of  two  verbs,  as  ganapierde,  a  mode 
of  playing  draughts ;  others  of  two  verbs  and  a  pronoun,  as 
hazmereir^  laughing-stock ;  three  verbs,  a  pronoun  and  a  con- 
junction enter  into  the  formation  of  correveidile,  tale-bearer ; 
and,  finally,  others  are  composed  of  a  noun  and  some  one  of 
the  following  component  particles :  a,  ab,  abs,  ad,  ante,  anti^ 
circion  or  circun,  cis,  citra,  co,  com,  con,  contra,  de,  des,  di,  dis, 
€,  em,  en,  entre,  equi,  es  or  ex,  extra,  im,  in,  infra,  inter,  intro,  o, 
ob,  per,  por,  jjos,  pre,  preter,  pro,  re,  retro,  sa  or  za,  se,  semi, 
sesqui,  sin,  so,  sobre,  son,  sos,  su,  subj  stiper,  sus,  tra,  trans  or 
tra^,  -ultra,  and  mce  or  vi\  as. 


-4«/zsociaL 

Cowiposicion, 

Co?jdiscipulo. 

i)irector. 

Dtsgusto. 

/r/iposible. 

/nutil. 

Pormenor. 

Pospuesto. 

/S/wrazon. 

Ficerector. 


Antisocial. 

Composition. 

School-fellow. 

Director. 

Displeasure. 

Impossible. 

Useless. 

Detail. 

Post-fixed. 

Unreasonableness. 

Sub-director. 


LESSON     L.  265 

We  call  them  component  particles^  because  the  majority  of 
them — although  they  are  true  Latin  and  Greek  prepositions — 
have  no  signification  in  Spanish,  except  as  prefixes,  in  which 
case  the}'  serve  to  augment,  diminish,  or  modify  the  significa- 
tion of  the  simple  word  in  proportion  to  the  strengtli  or  value 
they  have  in  the  languages  from  which  we  have  taken  them. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Don  Jose,  i  sabe  V.  el  significado  de  las  palabras  pen  ultima  y  ante- 
peniiltiraa?  Si,  seflor,  porque  corresponden  alas  palabras  inglesas  penul- 
timate y  antepemiUimate. 

2.  Pues  bien,  ahora,  quo  hablamos  de  "  caflonazos,"  quiero  deeir,  ahora 
que  liablamog  de  estas  palabras,  le  contar6  a  V.  un  cuentecito. — Muy  bien, 
i\  mi  me  gustan  mucho  los  cuentos,  sobre  todo  cuando  no  son  largos  y 
vieiien  a  pelo. 

3.  Pues  este  vienc  a  pelo  y  no  es  largo. — ^Ent6nce3  cuentdmelo  V., 
Don  Pedro,  escucho  con  la  mayor  atencion. 

4.  Pues  vaya  de  cuento :  Un  caballero  tenia  un  fuerte  dolor  de  muelas, 
y  fu6  a  un  sacamuelas  para  que  le  sacase  una. 

5.  [  Hombre !  i  y  porque  no  fue  a  casa  de  xm  dentista  ?  Porque  en 
aquel  pueblecito  no  liabia  dentistas  y  tuvo  quo  ir  a  una  barberia,  cuyo 
bai'bero  unia  a  su  oficio  el  de  sacamuelas. 

6.  ;  Pobre  bombre  !  adelante. — Este  barbero,  6  sea  sacamuelas,  pero 
que  de  ningun  modo  era  dentista,  le  pregunto  : 

7.  "  I  Que  muela  le  duel©  a  V.  ?  "  "  La  penuUima  del  lado  izquierdo  de 
la  quijada  inferior." 

8.  "  Muy  bien,"  y  diciendo  y  haciendo  le  sac6,  no  la  penliltima,  sino  la 
ultima. 

9.  "  jHuy!  ^qu6  ha  hecho  V.,  hombre?  yo  le  dije  a  V.  que  me  sacase 
la  penultima,  y  V.  me  ha  sacado  la  ultima." — "  [  Calle!  pues  yo  creia  que 
penultiraa  y  ultima  era  todo  una  misma  cosa." 

10.  "  No,  hombre,  no ;  la  penultima  es  la  que  esta  antes  de  la  liltima." 
— "  iDiautre !  Mil  perdones,  y  sientese  V.  que  esta  vez  no  me  equivocar^." 

11.  "iVamos,  y  todo  sea  por  Dios!  "  "jAy!  ay!  hombre  dado  a 
Barrabas ! " 

12.  "jToma!  ^y  ahora  porque  se  queja?  ^  no  vengo  de  sacarle  la  que 
estaba  antes  de  la  ultima?"  "Si ;  pero  V.  olvid6  contar  la  que  me  sac6 
anteriormente,  de  modo  que  ahora  me  ha  sacado  la  antepenult ima.^'' — La 
ante  ....  jque?  Pero  no  importa,  dejeraos  estos  raalditos  nom- 
bres,  que  ban  sido  causa  de  mi  equivocacion,  y  sientese  V.  que  yo  le  ase- 
gnro  a  V.  que."     .... 

12 


2G6  LESSON     L. 

13.  Pero  el  parroquiano,  dandolo  a  todos  los  diablos,  torao  las  de  vUla- 
diego,  y  se  cree  que  nunca  mas  recurrio  a  un  sacamuelas  pai-a  que  le  sa- 
case  la  penultima  muela. 

14.  I  Cual  es  la  palabra  compuesta  mas  larga  en  espafiol  ?  Despro- 
porcionadlsimamente. 

15.  I  De  que  palabras  se  compone  ?  De  la  particula  componente  dea, 
el  nombre  j^foporcion,  la  tenninacion  superlativa  sima  y  la  termininacion 
adverbial  mente. 

EXERCISE, 

1.  Do  you  use  spectacles  because  it  is  fashionable  with  some  people  to 
"wear  (gastar)  them,  or  because  you  cannot  see  without  them  ?  Because 
I  cannot  see  without  them. 

2.  My  toothache  is  not  any  better  yet.  Then  you  had  better  go  to 
the  dentist's  and  get  him  to  extract  (sacar)  the  tooth. 

3.  Do  you  often  see  the  beardless  youth  who  came  to  walk  with  us 
without  being  asked  *  last  evening  ?  Not  often,  nor  do  I  care  to  see  him 
very  often,  he  is  too  mucli  of  a  fop  for  my  taste. 

4.  Which  way  do  I  turn  here  to  go  to  the  new  hotel  ?  Turn  to  the 
right ;  it  is  not  more  tban  two  streets  to  the  hotel. 

5.  "What  did  he  do  Avhen  you  said  that  ?  He  took  to  his  heels,  and  I 
have  neither  heard  of  nor  seen  him  since. 

6.  "What  were  your  two  school-fellows  doing  at  the  door  a  few 
ininutes  ago  ?  One  of  them  had  told  the  director  of  a  mistake  in  the 
other's  exercise,  and  this  one  threatened  to  punish  him  for  his  trouble 
{molestia) ;  so,  suiting  the  action  to  the  word,  he  gave  him  a  kick,  and 
called  him  a  despicable  tell-tale. 

7.  Has  your  brother  bought  the  house  yet  that  he  intended  to  buy  ? 
No ;  when  he  came  to  examine  the  details  he  found  the  price  of  the  house 
entirely  out  of  proportion  to  the  value. 

8.  Do  you  always  take  an  umbrella  when  it  rains  ?  I  seldom  use  an 
umbrella ;  when  it  rains  I  never  go  out,  if  I  can  avoid  it. 

9.  "What  a  strange  man  that  is !  Yes,  he  is  the  laughing-stock  of 
every  one  who  knows  him. 

10.  "What  kind  of  wine  do  they  give  you  in  yonr  hotel  ?  They  give  us 
very  poor  wine,  and  so  I  dinnk  very  little  of  it;  I  prefer  water. 

11.  Do  you  often  play  at  draughts  (or  checkers)  ?  Very  often ;  but  I 
prefer  the  losing  game. 

12.  "What  is  that  man's  business?  He  keeps  a  barber's  shop  in  Sixth 
or  Seventh  Avenue, 

13.  I  want  you  to  be  good  enough  to  translate  this  letter  for  me.    Oh  ! 

*  Invitasen.  ■ 


LESSON     LI. 


207 


it  is  useless  to  talk  to  me  of  translating  any  thing  just  now  (^jor  ahora\ 
for  I  have  a  headache. 

14,  Wliere  is  that  family  living  now  ?    In  a  small  town  in  the  western 
part  of  the  State. 


LESSON    LI. 


Atravesar. 

To  traverse,  to  cross. 

Atropellar. 

To  run  over,  to  hurry  one's  self 

too  much. 

Causar, 

To  cause. 

Correr. 

To  run. 

Calcular. 

To  calculate. 

Dividir. 

To  divide. 

Exponer. 

To  expose. 

ExtraQar. 

To  wonder  at. 

Hospedar. 

To  lodge  and  entertain. 

Ineendiar. 

To  set  fire  to. 

Llorar. 

To  cry,  to  weep. 

Manifestar. 

To  manifest,  to  show,  to  inform. 

Ordenar. 

To  order,  to  arrange. 

Oponer. 

To  oppose.                     * 

Proponcr. 

To  propose. 

Parar. 

To  stop. 

Procurar. 

To  procure,  to  try. 

Eesistir. 

To  resist. 

Rivalizar. 

To  rival. 

Sirapatizar. 

To  sympathize. 

M  con  mucho. 

Far  from,  far  from  it. 

A  decir  terdad. 

To  say  the  truth. 

En  lo  que  rcspecta. 

With  respect  to. 

En  marcha. 

Let  us  go,  let  us  start. 

A  lo  largo. 

Lengthwise, 

A  esta  parte. 

Within  the  last. 

A  pie. 

On  foot. 

En  frente. 

In  front,  opposite. 

Continuaraente. 

Continually. 

Perpendicularmente. 

Perpendicularly. 

Alrededor. 

Around. 

268 

LESSON     LI. 

Admirable. 

Admirable. 

Apto. 

Apt. 

Curioso. 

Curious. 

Desocupado. 

Disengaged,  unoccupied. 

Directo. 

Direct. 

Indirectc 

>. 

Indirect. 

Figurado 

. 

Figurative. 

Inepto. 

Unsuitable 

Gramatical. 

Gramatical 

Complemento. 

Complement. 

Academia. 

Academy. 

Cosmopolita. 

Cosmopolite. 

Admiracion. 

Admii'ation,  won- 

Carruaje. 

Carriage. 

der. 

Delito. 

Crime. 

Arquitectura. 

Architecture. 

Dibujo. 

Drawing. 

Construccion. 

Construction. 

Individuo. 

Individual,  mem- 

BeUeza. 

Beauty. 

ber. 

Frase. 

Phrase. 

Literato. 

Man  of  letters. 

Distancia. 

Distance. 

Gozo. 

Enjoyment. 

Esquina. 

Corner. 

Museo. 

Museum. 

Lagriraa. 

Tear. 

Paseo. 

Promenade. 

Laboriosidad. 

Industry. 

Panto. 

Point,  place. 

Marcha. 

March. 

Edificio. 

Edifice. 

Metr6poli. 

Metropolis. 

Peligro. 

Danger. 

Madurez. 

Ripeness,  maturi- 

Omnibus. 

Omnibus. 

ty,  prudence. 

Soltero. 

Bachelor. 

Permanencia. 

Permanence,  stay 

Publico. 

Public. 

Sorpresa. 

Surprise. 

Trascurso. 

Course  (of  time). 

Vista. 

Sight,  view. 

Rincon. 

Corner. 

Orilla. 

Bank,  border. 

Tablero  de  da- 

Checker-board. 

Batalla. 

Battle. 

mas.   - 

COMPOS 

Remuneraciou. 
51X10^. 

Remuneration. 

Oriente  y  Occidente. 

Cielo  y  tierra. 

El  hombre  discreto  ordena  siempre  las 

cosas  con  madurez. 
La  casa  de  Juan  se  ha  incendiado. 
Un  individuo  inepto  para  escribir  puede 

ser  apto  para  otras  cosas. 
El  reo,  a  quien  se  castiga,  ha  cometido 

grandes  delitos. 


East  and  West. 

Heaven  and  earth. 

The  sensible  man  always  arranges  his 
affairs  with  prudence. 

They  have  set  fire  to  John's  house. 

An  individual  that  is  unsuited  for  wri- 
ting may  be  apt  at  other  things. 

The  culprit  that  is  being  punished  has 
committed  great  crimes. 


LESSON     LI. 


269 


Un  hombre  pobre  es  muy  difcrente  de 
un  pobre  hombre. 

Hemos  dado  un  gran  paseo. 

Hemes  dado  un  paseo  grande. 

Lo  que  V.  dice  es  una  cosa  cierta. 

Yo  he  observado  cierta  cosa. 

Madrid,  k  23  de  Agosto  de  1866  (or 
Madrid,  Agosto  23  de  1866,  or  Ma- 
drid y  Agosto  23  de  1866)' 

Yo  aoy  quien  probare  que  tu  te  equi- 
vocas. 

Dios  es  admirable  en  todas  sus  obras, 
pues  todas  ellas  manifiestan  su  poder 
y  su  bondad  (or  admirable  se  muestra 
Dios  en  todas  sus  obras ;  su  poder  y 
su  bondad  manifiestan  todas  ellas). 

Solo  Dios  es  grande,  hermanos  mios. 

Adios,  Juan  ;  j  que  tal  ? 

Hasta  manana.     Buenos  dias. 

Nueva  York,  ciudad  de  los  Estados 
Unidos. 

Yo  mismo  le  vi  Uorar  lagrimas  do 
gozo. 

Pronto  se  calmar4n  las  borrascas  que 
agitan  la  nave  del  Estado. 

^  Ha  estado  V.  alguna  vez  en  el  Museo 
de  Nueva  York  ? 


A  poor  man  (a  man  in  poverty)  is  very 

different  from  a  poor  fellow. 
We  have  had  an  excellent  walk. 
We  have  taken  a  long  walk. 
What  you  say  is  certain. 
I  have  observed  a  certain  thing. 
Madrid,  August  23d,  1866. 


It  is  I  who  shall  prove  that  you  are 

mistaken. 
God  is  wonderful  in  all  His  works,  for 

they  all  set  forth  his  power  and  Hia 

goodness. 


God  only  is  great,  my  brethren. 

Good  morning,  John ;  how  do  you  do  ? 

I  shall  see  you  to-morrow. 

New  York,  a  city  of  the  United  States. 

I  myself  saw  him  shed  tears  of  joy. 

The  tempests  by  which  the  ship  of 
State  is  tossed  shall  soon  be  calmed. 

Have  you  ever  been  in  the  New  York 
Museum  ? 


EXPLANATION. 

Notwithstanding* ^ve  have  already  made  some  general  ob- 
servations relative  to  the  place  each  part  of  speech  occupies  in 
sentences,  Ave  deem  it  expedient  to  add  here  a  few  rules  which 
the  learner  Avill  find  of  considerable  utility  in  composition. 

254.  The  natijeal  cokstruction  demands  that  the  sub- 
stantive be  placed  before  the  adjective,  because  the  thing  is 
before  its  quality ;  that  the  governing  word  precede  the  one 
governed,  for  it  is  natural  that  the  former  should  present  itself 
to  the  mind  before  the  latter;  that  the  subject  precede  the 
verb ;  that  the  verb  precede  the  adverb  by  which  it  is  modi- 
fied ;  that  the  complement  come  after  the  verb  and  the  adverb, 
if  there  be  one  ;  and  that  when  two  or  more  things  are  to  be 


210  LESSON     LI. 

expressed,  of  wliich  one,  from  its  nature,  comes  before  the 
other,  this  order  be  preserved ;  as, 


Oriente  y  Occidente. 
Cielo  y  tierra. 
Norte  y  Sur. 
Este  y  Oeste. 


East  and  West. 
Heaven  and  earth. 
North  and  South. 
East  and  West, 


255.  FiGUEATivE  CoNSTEUCTiON. — The  genius  of  the  Span- 
ish language,  and,  above  all,  use,  allow  us  to  depart  in  some 
cases  from  the  above  rules ;  thus  avoiding  the  monotonous  uni- 
formity which  would  otherwise  take  place,  and  leaving  the 
writer  more  latitude  for  the  constniction  and  arrangement  of 
his  periods.  So  long  as  sense  and  perspicuity  do  not  suffer, 
thei-e  is  ordinarily  no  fixed  position  for  any  of  the  parts  of 
speech.     Therefore : 

1st.  Personal  pronouns  subjects  of  verbs  may,  with  a  few 
exceptions,  be  expressed  or  suppressed  at  will. 

2d.  "When  the  pronoun  subject  is  expressed,  it  may  be 
placed  either  before  or  after  the  verb. 

3d.  The  same  liberty  exists  with  respect  to  the  verb,  adverb 
and  complement. 

4th.  Nevertheless,  for  the  sake  of  clearness  in  our  sentences, 
it  is  essential  that  certain  words  which  together  form  a  wliole 
(such  as  adjectives  with  the  substantives  they  qualify,  or  parts  of 
sentences,  acting  the  part  of  subject  or  complement)  should  be 
arranged  in  the  same  order  as  that  in  which  the  ideas  they  ex- 
press are  naturally  presented  to  the  mind.. 

5th.  There  are  also  certain  words  which,  when  placed  be- 
fore certain  others,  have  a  signification  very  different  from  that 
which  they  have  when  placed  after  them. 

Of  all  the  modem  languages  the  Spanish  is  certainly  the 
most  flexible ;  indeed,  in  no  other  can  the  same  idea  be  ex- 
pressed with  the  same  words  in  so  endless  a  variety  of  con- 
structions. 

Let  the  following  sentence  serve  as  a  proof  of  the  truth  of 
this  assertion : 

Esta  senorita  era  hija  de  Don  Manuel  I      This  young  lady  was  the  daughter  of 
Sanchez.  I       -  Mr.  Emanuel  ^nchcz. 


LESSON     LI.  271 

256.  Words  which,  from  their  nature,  cannot  be  separa- 
ted :  Esta  sefiorita.    JJe  Don  Manuel  Sanchez. 

Natural  Construction.    Esta  sefiorita  era  hija  do  Don  Manuel  Sanchez. 

1st  inversion.  Era  esta  sefiorita  bija  do  Don  Manuel  Sanchez. 

2d  "  Era  hija  esta  sefiorita  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez. 

3c?  "  Era  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  hija  esta  sefiorita. 

Ath  "  De  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  era  hija  esta  sefiorita. 

5th         "  Hija  era  esta  sefiorita  do  Don  Manuel  Sanchez. 

Gth         "  Hija  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  era  esta  sefiorita. 

T/A  "  Hija  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  esta  sefiorita  era. 

Sth         "  De  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  hija  era  esta  sefiorita. 

257.  The  natural  construction  is,  of  course,  the  most  gram- 
matical, but  the  best  writei's  generally  give  preference  to  the 
figurative,  as  being  more  easy  and  elegant,  and  as  giving  at 
the  same  time  more  freedom  to  imagination  and  genius,  and 
finally,  as  being  better  suited  to  express  the  grand  emotions  of 
the  soul. 

CONVEKSATION  AND  VERSION 

1.  [Oh!  fimigo  mio,  V.  por  Nueva  York !  ;Cuanto  lo  celebro!  Si, 
seilor,  aqui  me  tiene  V.,  Don  Fernando,  no  he  podido  resistir  la  tentacion 
do  venir  a  ver  la  America. 

2.  [  Me  alegro  infinito  !  i  Pero  porqn6  no  se  vino  Y.  a  hospedar  a  mi 
casa  ?  En  primer  lugai',  porquo  Uegu6  anoche  mny  tarde ;  y  en  segundo, 
porque  a  los  solteros  nos  gusta  la  libertad  y  la  vida  del  hotel. 

3.  Bien,  no  me  opongo,  ti  condicion  de  que  vendra  V.  a  pasar  con 
nosotros  algunos  dias. — Lo  liai'6  asl  con  mucho  gusto,  ademas,  Don 
Fernando,  que,  como  no  se  hablar  ingles  y  esta  ciudad  es  tan  grande, 
tcngo  raiedo  de  perderme  si  salgo  solo,  y  quisiera  que,  durante  ml  per- 
manencia  en  ella,  tuviese  V.  la  bondad  de  ser  mi  cicerone,  de  modo  es  que 
me  propongo,  pasar  la  mayor  parte  del  tiempo  en  su  compaQia. 

4.  En  eso  me  hara  V.  mucho  placer,  ademas  de  que  yo  gozare  tanto 
como  V.  con  la  sorpresa  y  adrairacion  que  le  causaran  a  V.  las  vistas  de 
esta  metrupoli.  glla  estado  Y.  jamas  en  L6ndres  6  en  Paris?  No,  se- 
ilor, jamas  ho  salido  de  Espaila  hasta  ahora. 

5.  I  Ouando  quiere  V.  que  principiemos  nuestros  paseos  ?  Cuando  Y. 
giiste ;  ahora  mismo  si  esta  Y.  desocupado,  porque,  a  decir  vcrdad,  tengo 
una  gran  curiosidad. 

G.  ^Quiere  Y.  que  vayamos  a  pie  6  en  coche?  A  pie,  si  Y.  gusta; 
me  parece  que  podremos  ver  mas  c6modamente ;  pero  tomaremos  un 
coche  cuando  haya  que  salir  de  la  ciudad. 


272  LESSON     LI. 

7.  Plies  en  marcha,  venga  el  brazo. — Yo  temo  que  voy  a  molestar  a  V., 
Don  Fernando,  porque  soy  muy  curioso,  como  dicen  los  franceses,  soy  un 
flaneur^  y  me  Hainan  la  atencion  hasta  las  cosas  mas  pequefias. 

8.  Ent6nces  sinipatizaremos,  porque  a  mi  me  gusta  observarlo  y  criti- 
carlo  todo. — i  Q.u6  calle  es  esta  en  que  estamos  ahora  ?  Esta  es  la  Cuai'ta 
Avenida,  y  esa  que  la  atraviesa  es  la  calle  Veinte  y  tres. 

9.  I  Como  es  eso  ?  Las  calles  en  Nueva  York  estan  divididas  en 
avenidas,  que  son  las  que  atraviesan  la  ciudad  a  lo  largo,  y  en  calles,  que 
la  atraviesan  de  occidente  a  oriente,  cortando  las  avenidas  en  angulos 
rectos  y  formando  toda  la  ciudad  como  un  tablero  de  damas,  de  modo 
que  sabiendo  el  niimero  de  la  calle  6  avenida  y  el  de  la  casa  a  donde  se 
va,  puede  calcularse  facilmente  la  distancia. 

10.  Y  este  edificio  de  ai-quitectura  tan  curiosa  de  la  esquina,  ^qu6  es? 
Esta  es  la  nueva  academia  de  dibujo,  donde  se  exponen  al  publico  muy 
buenas  pinturas. 

11.  I  Hay  aqui  tan  buenas  pinturas  como  en  el  museo  de  Madrid  ?  No, 
ni  con  mucho ;  este  pais  es  aun  nuevo,  y  aunque  puedan  hacerlo  en  otras 
cosas,  todavia  no  pueden  rivalizar  en  lo  que  respecta  a  las  beUas  artes 
con  Europa. 

12.  i  Hombre,  que  hermosa  plaza !  Esta  es  la  plaza  de  Madison  y  todos 
estos  bellos  edificios  que  V.  ve  a  su  alrededor,  y  la  plaza  misma,  ban  sido 
lieclios  de  veinte  afios  a  esta  parte. 

13.  I  Qu6  edificio  es  aquel  de  enfrente  que  es  tan  grande  como  un  pala- 
cio  ?  Ese  es  el  hotel  de  la  Quinta  Avenida,  y  en  efecto  V.  tiene  razon  en 
compararlo  a  un  palacio,  porque  los  hoteles  son  en  realidad  los  palacios  de 
los  Estados  Unidos,  y  se  dice  que  son  los  mejores  del  mundo. 

14.  i  Cuidado !  hombre,  por  poco  se  deja  V.  atropellar  por  el  6mnibu3. 
— I  Caspita !   \  que  mujer  tan  hermosa ! 

15.  Si ;  pero  no  debe  V.  pararse  a  admirar  las  bellezas,  en  medio  de 
Broadway  en  su  punto  de  reunion  con  la  Quinta  Avenida,  porque  corre  V. 
peligro  de  ser  atropellado  por  los  carruajes  de  todas  especies  que  conti- 
nuamente  lo  atraviesan. 

16.  Don  Fernando,  i  son  todas  las  sefioras  en  Nueva  York  tan  hermo- 
sas  como  esa  que  acaba  de  pasar?  No  se,  porque  yo  solo  mire  donde 
ponia  los  pies,  procurando  escapar  al  mismo  tiempo  de  los  carruajes; 
pero  si  podre  decide  a  V.  que  mujeres  mas  hermosas  que  las  que  he  visto 
yo  en  Nueva  York  no  creo  que  se  encuentren  en  ninguna  parte  del 
mundo. 

17.  jOiga  V.  I  £no  bablan  espailol  csos  que  van  delante  de  nosotros? 
Eso  no  debe  Y.  extranarlo ;  esta  es  una  ciudad  cosmopolita ;  en  ella  hay 
gent«s  de  todas  las  naciones  y  V.  oira  en  el  trascurso  de  poco  tiempo 
hablar  aleman,  espaCol,  frances  y  otras  nmchas  lenguas. 


LESSON     LI.  273 


EXERCISE. 


1.  What  do  you  imderstand  by  the  complement  of  a  verb?  It  is  a 
phrase  or  a  part  of  a  phrase  that  serves  to  complete  the  idea  expressed 
by  the  verb. 

2.  Caa  you  tell  me  what  a  cosmopolitan  is  ?  A  cosmopolitan  is  one 
who  is  not  a  stranger  in  any  country,  a  citizen  of  the  world. 

3.  "Where  does  that  gentleman  live  ?  In  Fifth  Avenue,  on  the  comer 
of  Twenty-second  Street. 

4.  How  long  has  your  uncle  been  a  member  of  the  Royal  Academy 
of  Madrid  ?  He  is  not  a  member  of  the  Royal  Academy  of  Madrid  ;  but 
he  has  been  a  member  of  the  Academy  of  Sciences  for  the  last  ten  years. 

5.  Take  tliat  book  from  Charles  and  give  it  to  Peter.  I  will  give  him 
some  other  book,  because  if  I  took  that  one  from  Charles  he  would  cry. 

6.  Is  your  friend  a  married  man  ?     No,  sir,  he  is  a  bachelor. 

7.  Have  you  ever  seen  Da  Vinci's  celebrated  painting  of  "The  Last 
Supper"  ?*  No;  but  I  have  seen  the  engraving  of  tliat  painting,  made  by 
Morghen,  and  it  is  a  truth  admitted  by  every  one,  that,  notwithstanding 
the  absence  of  coloring,  that  engraving  is  a  happy  expression  of  the 
original. 

8.  How  long  does  it  take  to  go  from  here  to  the  Central  Park  ?  But 
a  short  time ;  the  distance  is  not  very  great. 

9.  Could  you  run  there  in  as  short  a  time  as  one  could  go  in  a  car- 
riage ?  I  do  not  doubt  that  I  could,  if  I  started  from  the  same  place  and 
at  the  same  time  as  the  carriage. 

10.  How  are  the  several  States  of  the  Union  divided  ?  Into  Northern, 
Southern,  Eastern,  and  Western. 

11.  Is  that  not  the  tallest  man  you  have  ever  seen?  Far  from  it;  I 
have  seen  several  much  taller. 

12.  Have  they  been  able  to  fill  that  oflSce  (or  position)  yet  ?  I  believe 
not;  I  understand  that  one  of  our  friends  was  about  to  apply  for  it  {pre- 
tenderlo),  but  his  father  was  opposed  to  his  doing  so,  and  so  he  would  not 
persist. 

13.  How  far  did  you  go  before  you  found  him?  I  walked  about  half 
an  hour  by  the  river  side,  inquiring  of  every  one  I  met  whether  he  had 
seen  a  young  man  on  horseback ;  and  at  last  an  old  man  told  me  he  had 
seen  him  cross  the  river,  nearly  opposite  the  new  building  they  are  put- 
ting up  (erecting),  at  a  short  distance  from  the  entrance  to  the  public 
promenade. 

14.  Are  there  any  fine  public  walks  in  the  metropolis  ?     About  seven 

or  eight  beautiful  ones,  the  most  of  which  have  been  made  within  thetl  •  /» 
last  five  years. 

"'  ^  *  La  cena. 

12* 


274 


LESSON     lill. 


LESSON    LII. 


Aconsejar. 

To  counsel,  to  advise. 

Aprovechar 

To  profit,  to  embrace  (profit  by). 

Oonsistir. 

To  consist. 

Colorir. 

To  color  (paintings). 

Citar.  » 

To  quote,  to  cite. 

Costar. 

To  cost. 

Comimicav. 

To  communicate. 

Deraostrai-. 

To  demonstrate,  to  point  out. 

Deteriorar. 

To  deteriorate. 

Expresar. 

To  express. 

Freir. 

To  fry.                                      (ory. 

Grabar. 

To  engrave,  to  fix  (in  the  mem- 

Tomarse  (cl  trabajo). 

To  take  the  trouble. 

Preiider. 

To  take  up,  to  arrest. 

Perfeccionai 

To  perfect. 

Merecer. 

To  merit,  to  deserve. 

Eeunir. 

To  gather,  to  assemble,  to  re- 
unite. 

Remunerar. 

To  remunerate. 

Visitar. 

To  visit,  to  search. 

Por  ejemplo 

For  instance. 

Que  yo  sepa 

For  all  I  know. 

List  of  the  Irregular  Past  Participles  of  all  the  Vcrls  alreadij  introduced. 

Abierto. 

Opened. 

Frito.                     Fried. 

Bendito. 

Blessed. 

Hecho.                   Done. 

Contradicho. 

Contradicted. 

Impuesto.              Imposed. 

Convicto. 

Convicted. 

Muerto.                  Died. 

Compuesto. 

Composed. 

Maniflesto.            Manifested. 

Dicho. 

Said,  told. 

Oculto.                  Hidden,  con- 

Devuelto. 

Given  back,  re- 

cealed. 

turned. 

Opuesto.               Opposed. 

Dispuesto. 

Disposed. 

Preso.                   Taken,  arrested. 

Escrito. 

Written. 

Puesto.                  Placed,  put. 

Electo. 

Elected. 

Provlsto.                Provided. 

Expreso. 

Expressed. 

Roto.                      Broken. 

Expuesto. 

Exposed. 

Satisfecho.             Satisfied. 

Visto.  ■ 

Seen. 

Vuelto.                  Returned. 

LESSON     LII. 

27S 

Amplio. 

Ample. 

Actual. 

Present. 

Antiguo. 

Ancient,  old. 

Contemporaneo. 

Contemporai 

y- 

Enemistadc 

. 

At  vai-iance, 

on  bad  terms. 

Draraatico. 

Dramatic. 

Moderno. 

Modern. 

Ilonroso. 

Honorable. 

Politico. 

Political. 

•    . 

Cocinero. 

Cook. 

Amenidad. 

Agreeablesiess, 

Capitan. 

Captain. 

amenity. 

Acierto. 

Success. 

Biblioteca. 

Library. 

Colorido. 

Coloring. 

Cena. 

Supper. 

Grabado. 

Engraving. 

Comedia. 

Comedy,  play. 

Fresco. 

Cool,  refreshing 

Costumbre. 

Custom,  habit. 

air. 

Erudicion. 

Erudition. 

Empleo. 

Employment. 

Fuente. 

Fountain,  source. 

Drama. 

Drama. 

Existencia. 

Existence. 

Estilo. 

Style. 

Elegancia. 

Elegance. 

Joven. 

Youth. 

Instruccion. 

Instruction,  learn- 

Mercader. 

Dealer. 

ing. 

Paisano. 

Countryman. 

Ignorancia. 

Ignorance. 

Iledio. 

Action,  fact. 

Mencion. 

Mention. 

Siglo. 

Century. 

Literatura. 

Literature. 

Yerso. 

Verse. 

Mediania. 

Moderation,  me- 

Soldado. 

Soldier. 

diocrity. 

Prosa. 

Prose. 

Novela. 

Novel. 

Politica. 

Politics. 

Tragedia. 

Tragedy. 

Vasija. 

Vase,  vessel. 

COMPOJ 

5ITI0N. 

Esta  enemistado  con  su  prime. 
Colocado  en  vasijas. 
Ila  cantado  una  cancion  espauo'a. 
Los   caballos    que  ban   comprado   los 

mercaderes  no  son  buenos. 
Los  caballos  que  fueron  comprados  per 

los  mercaderes  son  buenos. 
Estan  (or  quedan)  demostradas  estas 

Tcrdadcs. 


He  is  on  bad  terms  with  his  cousin. 

Placed  in  vases  (or  vessels). 

He  has  sung  a  Spanish  song. 

The  horses  the  dealers  have  bought  are 
not  good. 

The  horses  that  were  bought  by  the 
dealers  are  good. 

These  truths  are  (or  remain)  demon- 
strated. 


276 


LESSON     LII. 


La  cocinera  habia  frito  (or  freido)  el 

pescado. 
Han  prendido  (or  preso)  al  culpable. 
No  s6  si  liabran  ya  proveido  (or  pro- 

Tisto)  el  empleo. 

Has  roto  el  vaso. 

6  Ha  visto  V.  un  caballo  muerto  ? 

No,  pero  he  visto  un  caballo  matado. 

6  Qui^n  ha  muerto  a  ese  caballo  ? 
Un  paisano  le  ha  muerto. 
El  capitan  fu6  muerto  por  sus  soldados. 
El  se  ha  matado. 
El  se  ha  muerto. 

Ese  es  un  joven  muy  leido,  muy  apro- 
vechado  y  muy  callado. 

Es  un  hecho  que  la  Cena  de  da  Vinci  est& 
felizmente  expresada  en  cl  grabado 
de  Moi^hen,  no  obstante  que  le  falta 
el  colorido  de  la  pintura. 

Aunque  el  fresco  de  la  Cena,  hecho  por 
da  Vinci,  est&  mal  colorido  y  deterio- 
rado,  ha  sido  grabado  con  acierto  por 
Morghen. 


The  cook  had  fried  the  fish. 

They  have  arrested  the  offender. 

I  do  not  know  whether  they  have  al- 
ready provided  (a  person  to  fill)  the 
office. 

You  have  broken  the  glass. 

Have  you  seen  a  dead  horse  ? 

No,  but  I  have  seen  a  horse  with  a  sore 
back. 

Who  killed  that  horse  ? 

A  countryman  killed  it. 

The  captain  was  killed  by  his  soldiers. 

He  killed  himself. 

He  died. 

That  young  man  is  well  read,  makes 
the  most  of  his  opportunities,  and 
talks  little. 

It  is  a  fact  thai  Da  Vinci's  "Last  Sup- 
per "  is  happily  expressed  in  Morg- 
hen's  engraving,  notwithstanding  the 
latter  lacks  the  colorbg  of  the  paint- 
ing. 

Although  the  fresco  of  the  "  Last  Sup- 
per," made  by  Da  Vinci,  is  badly 
colored,  and  deteriorated,  it  has  b^en 
engraved  with  success  by  Morghen. 


EXPLANATION. 

258.  Past  Paeticiples. — Some  past  participles  retain  the 
regimen  of  their  verbs ;  as, 

Enemistado  con  su  primo.  |      On  bad  terms  with  his  cousin. 

259.  The  past  participle  must  agree  in  gender  and  number 
with  the  subject  or  determining  verb,  except  when  that  de- 
termining verb  is  haber ;  in  which  case  the  past  participle  is 
indeclinable,  whatever  be  the  gender  and  number  of  the  sub- 
ject; as, 

Ha  cantado  rma  cancion. 
Los  caballos  que  ban  comprado  los 
mercaderes. 


Ho  has  sung  a  song. 
The  horses   that   the  dealers 
bought. 


have 


But  the  past  participle,  if  it  comes  after  the  auxiliaries  ser. 


LESSON     LII. 


211 


esiar,  quedar,  or  any  other,  except  haber,  agrees  with  the  subject 
iu  gender  and  number ;  as, 
Los  caballos  que  fueron  comprados 

por  los  mercaderes. 
Estau  {or  quedan)  demostrados  estas 
verdades. 


The  horses  that  were  bought  by  the 
dealers. 

These  truths  are  (or  remain)  demon- 
strated. 


260.  Some  verbs  have  two  past  participles,  one  regular  and 
the  other  irregular.  These  are  used  very  differently,  since  the 
irregular  one,  being  a  .true  noun,  is  employed  in  an  absolute 
sense  only,  and  never  signifies  motion,  whether  in  the  active 
or  in  the  passive  form.  For  this  reason  the  latter  may  be 
accompanied  by  the  verbs  ser,  estar,  qicedar,  and  others,  but 
never  by  the  auxiliary  haber ;  inasmuch  as  it  would  be  im- 
proper to  say :  hubo  convieto,  he  contractor  instead  of,  hubo 
convencido^  he  contraido. 

261.  Tlie  irregular  participles  frito^  fried;  preso,  taken 
prisoner;  provisto,  provided,  and  roto,  broken,  are  the  only 
ones  that  can  be  used  with  the  verb  haber^  to  form  the  com- 
pound tenses ;  as. 


La  cocinera  habia  /rilo  (or  freido) 

el  pescado. 
Han  prendido  (or  preso)  al  culpable. 

No  se  si  habn'm  ya  provcido  (or  pro- 
visto) el  empleo. 


The  cook  had  fried  the  fish. 

They  have  taken  (or  arrested)  the 

offender. 
I  do  not  know  whether  they  have 

already  provided  (a  person  to  fill) 

the  oflBce. 
You  have  broken  the  glass. 


Has  roto  el  vaso  {sounds  better  than 
has  rompido  el  vaso). 

262.  The  verb  matar^  in  the  sense  of  to  take  away  life,  has 
the  extraordinary  irregularity  of  appropriating  for  its  past  par- 
ticiple that  of  the  verb  morir ;  the  participle  matado  being 
used  to  express  wounds  or  sores  in  animals,  resulting  from  the 
rubbing  of  the  harness,  or  from  cruel  treatment ;  as,  • 

Un  caballo  matado. 

Un  caballo  nmerto. 

Un  paisano  le  ha  muerlo. 

El  capitan  fue  nmerto  por  sus  soldados. 

But  iu  speaking  of  a  person  that  has  committed  suicide,  we 
must  say : 

Se  ha  matado  (and  not  Se  ha  muerto).  |      He  has  killed  himself. 


A  horse  with  a  sore  back. 

A  dead  horse. 

A  countryman  killed  him. 

The  captain  was  killed  by  hLs  soldiers. 


278  lessOjS"    lii. 

263.  Some  past  or  passive  participles  take  an  active  signifi- 
cation, but  only  referring  to  persons  ;  as, 

Un  joven  leido,  aproveehado,  caUado.  \      A  well  read,  thrifty  and  silent  youth. 

264.  Past  participles  may  sometimes  take  the  place  of 
substantives,  and  tlie  diflference  can  be  known  only  by  the  ante- 
cedents and  subsequents,  as  in  this  sentence : 


Es  un  hecho  que  la  Cena  de  da  Vhici 
osta  felizmente  expresada  en  el 
grahado  de  Morghen,  no  obstante 
que  le  falta  el  colorido  de  la  pin- 
tura. 


It  is  a  fact,  that  "  The  Last  Supper  " 
by  Da  Yinci  is  happily  expressed 
in  the  engraving  of  Morghen,  not- 
v.'ithstanding  the  latter  lacks  the 
coloring  of  the  painting. 


Where  the  words  hecho,  grahado  and  colorido,  are  substan- 
tives. The  same  words  appear  as  participles  in  the  following 
phrases  : 

Aunque  el  fresco  de  la  Cena,  hccho        Although  the  fresco  of  "  The  Last 
por  da  Yinci,  esta  mal  colorido  y  Supper,"   made  by  Da  Yinci,   is 

deteriorado,  ha  sido  grahado  con  badly  colored  and  deteriorated,  it 

acierto  por  Morghen.  has  been  engraved  with  success  by 

Morghen. 

265.  Other  grammarians  add  one  more  tense  in  the  infini- 
tive mood;  as, 

Haber  de  amar.  I      To  have  to  love. 

Habiendo  de  amar.  |      Having  to  love. 

But  such  a  classification  is  no  longer  essential,  nor  even  correct. 
In  early  Spanish  literature  that  form  frequently  occurs,  per- 
forming the  office  now  almost  exclusively  filled  by  the  regular 
terminations  of  the  tenses,  and  chiefly  those  of  the  future  indic- 
ative and  the  imperfect  of  the  subjttnctive. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  j  Que  le  gusta  u  V.  mas,  la  conversacion  6  la  lectura  ?  Ambas  cosas 
iQC  gnstan  mucho. 

2.  I  Que  g6nero  do  lectura  le  gusta  a  Y.  mas  ?  La  Instoria,  la  come- 
dia,  y  la  novela. 

3.  ^Prefiere  V.  la  prosa  al  verso?  No,  sefior,  la  poesia  me  gusta 
mas ;  pero  ha  de  ser  miiy  buona,  porque  en  poesia  no  me  gusta  la  me- 
diania. 

4.  Que  autores,.  en  la  literatura  modema,  me  aconsoja  V.  que  lea 


LESSON     LII.  279 

para  perfeccionai-me  en  el  espanol.— En  liistoria  y  politica  lea  V.  a  La- 
fuente,  y  a  Miflano. 

5.  ^  Y  para  la  comedia  ?  A  Moratin,  Breton  de  los  Herreros  y  Don 
Ventura  De  la  Vega. 

6.  J  No  tieuen  Vds.  otros?  Si,  sefior;  pero  yo  le  cito  a  V.  solamente 
Ids  mejores  y  solamente  a  los  conteraporaneos. 

Y.  eY  poetas?  Zorrilla,  Espronceda,  Hartzenbusch,  y  otros  mu- 
cbos. 

8.  I  Tienen  Vds.  algun  bnen  critico  contemporaneo  por  el  estilo  del 
antiguo  Quevedo  ?  Yo  creo  que  no  pueden  encontrarse  dos  Quevedos ; 
pero,  sin  embargo,  teneraos  criticos  de  costumbres  muy  buenos,  tales  corao 
Larra  (Figaro),  Don  Ramon  de  Mesonero  Romanes,  Pelegrin,  y  otros. 

9.  J  Tienen  Vds.  buenos  autores  para  la  tragedia  y  el  drama?  Si, 
sefior,  muy  buenos,  por  ejemplo,  Martinez  de  la  Rosa,  Garcia  Gutierrez, 
Gil  y  Zdrate,  etc.,  etc. 

10.  Yo  no  sabia  que  tuviesen  Vds.  tantos  autores  buenos  en  la  litera- 
tura  actual. — Yo  pudiera  citarle  a  V.  otros  mucbos ;  pero  si  V.  reune 
las  obras  de  los  catorce  mencionados  lograra  V.  tener  una  pequenita 
libreria  de  literatura  modernii,  que  le  ensefiara  a  V.  mas  espauol  que 
todas  las  gramaticas  y  metodos  que  se  ban  compuesto  para  ensefiar  esta 
lengua  basta  el  dia,  y  que  le  remuneraran  a  V.  ampliamente  por  el  tra- 
bajo  que  le  ba  costado  el  aprenderla,  con  el  placer  y  la  instruccion  que 
le  comunicaran. 

11.  jEs  posible!  Yo  babia  oido  decir,  y  asi  lo  babia  Uegado  a  creer 
yo  mismo,  que  Espafia  no  poseia  nada  que  mercciese  mcncion  en  su  litera- 
tura moderna,  y  a  decir  verdad,  los  unices  libros  buenos  que  creia  que 
Vds.  poseian  eran  el  Don  Quijote  de  Cervantes  y  las  obras  dramaticas  de 
Calderon  de  la  Barca. — Asi  lo  he  oido  yo  decir  tambien,  y  en  verdad 
que  es  una  cosa  que  no  puedo  coraprender,  esa  general  ignorancia  de  la 
existencia  de  una  literatura  espanola  contemporanea,  que  ba  producido 
mas  y  mejores  obras  que  las  que  se  ban  producido  en  algun os  siglos  no 
solamente  en  Espafia  sino  en  otras  nacioncs. 

12.  gSe  conocen  en  Espafia  nuestros  autores  ingleses  contemporaneos  ? 
So  conocen  mucbo  mas  de  lo  que  aqui  son  conocidos  los  espanoles ;  la 
prueba  es  que  la  mayor  parte  estan  traducidos  al  castellano,  y  Vds.  no 
tienen  ninguna  traduccion,  que  yo  sepa,  de  todos  esos  autores  que  acabo 
de  citarle  a  V. 

13.  Probablemente  consiste  en  que  los  Americanos  6  Ingleses  no  apren- 
den  mucho  el  espafiol. — Entre  los  Americanos  debo  bacer  tres  bonrosas 
escepciones,  que  son  :    Washington  Irving,  Prcstcott,  y  Ticbnor.    Estos 
distinguidos  escritores  no  solo  aprendieron  el  espafiol,  sino  que  viajaron    ■ 
en  Espafia,  visitaron  nuestras  mejores  bibliotecas  y  quiza  adquirieron  en 


280  LESSON     LII. 

aquellas  fuentes  mucho  del  saber,  la  erudicion,  el  gusto  y  la  clegancia  en 
el  decir  quo  comunican  a  sus  obras  tanto  inter6s  y  amenidad. 


EXERCISE. 

1.  Ought  we  not  to  make  the  most  of  (profit  by)  every  occasion  that 
oflfers  for  acquiring  knowledge  ?  That  is  the  only  way  to  arrive  at  the 
possession  of  knowledge. 

2.  Tell  the  cook  I  do  not  wish  that  fish  to  be  fried.  It  is  too  late  to 
tell  her  so ;  she  has  already  fried  it. 

3.  Has  that  work  been  translated  into  Spanish  ?  Not  that  I  know ; 
but  It  was  translated  with  success  into  French,  by  M.  de  TOrme,  a  few 
years  ago. 

4.  Is  not  that  gentleman  to  whom  you  introduced  me  a  short  time 
since  a  dramatist?  He  is,  and  his  pkiys  might  serve  as  a  model  of  ele- 
gance for  many  dramatists  of  higher  pretensions  {pretensiones)  than  he. 

5.  Have  they  found  out  yet  who  set  fire  to  your  uncle's  house  ?  Yes ; 
and  the  offender  has  been  arrested  and  convicted  of  the  crime. 

6.  Would  you  be  good  enough  to  lend  me  that  novel  of  which  you 
read  a  chapter  to  me  the  day  before  yesterday?  I  would  with  great 
pleasure  if  it  were  mine;  but  it  belongs  to  Alexander;  and,  as  we  are  on 
bad  terms  at  present,  I  should  not  hke  to  ask  him  for  any  favors. 

7.  "Would  that  painting  be  deteriorated*  by  being  exposed  to  the  heat 
of  the  sun  {sol)  ?  Certainly;  and  the  Jieat  of  a  strong  fire  would  produce 
the  same  effect  upon  it. 

8.  Did  your  friend,  the  captain,  return  with  his  regiment  jfrom  the 
war  ?  No ;  he  was  killed  in  the  first  battle  that  took  place  after  his 
arrival  at  the  seat  (teatro)  of  war. 

9.  I  saw  no  mention  made  of  his  death  in  the  newspapers.  No ;  I 
believe  his  name  did  not  appear  in  the  list  (lista)  of  the  killed ;  but  the 
sad  news  was  communicated  to  his  brother  by  an  oflSoer  of  the  same 
regiment. 

10.  Do  you  like  to  walk  in  the  garden  in  the  morning  before  breakfast  ? 
I  generally  go  to  the  garden  every  morning  and  evening  to  read  and 
smoke  in  the  cool  air. 

11.  I  wish  you  had  bought  that  work  on  English  literature.  So  do  I ; 
it  would  have  been  very  useful  to  Louisa,  who  is  so  desirous  of  becoming 
perfect  in  that  language. 

12.  Did  your  father  think  Peter  merited  the  remuneration  he  received? 
I  do  not  know  whether  he  did  or  not ;  but,  at  all  events,  Peter  must  have 
merited  some  remuneration,  or  else  he  would  have  got  none. 

*  Deteriora:: 


LESSON     LIU. 


281 


13.  Are  you  going  to  have  your  name  engraved  on  your  watch?  I 
shall  only  have  my  initials  (inicial)  engraved  on  it. 

14.  What  kind  of  literature  does  your  aunt  like  best?  Ha!  you  ask 
me  more  than  I  can  tell  you ;  I  really  cannot  say  whether  she  has  any 
taste  in  the  matter ;  for  the  fact  is,  never  having  taken  her  for  a  woman 
of  much  erudition,  I  have  not  taken  the  trouble  to  ask  her. 


LESSON    LIII. 


Agradar. 

To  please. 

Agnantar. 

To  bear  with,  to  put  up  with,  to 

suffer. 

Alcanzar. 

To  reach,  to  overtalceytto  catch. 

Alimentar. 

To  feed. 

Armar. 

* 

To  arm. 

Bajar. 

To  go  (or  come)  down. 

Corretear. 

To  run  about. 

Conceder. 

To  concede,  to  grant. 

Distar. 

To  be  distant. 

Descomponer. 

To  decompose,  to  put  out  of 
order. 

Determinar. 

To  determine,  to  induce. 

Echar. 

To  throw,  to  put  (in). 

Exceder. 

To  exceed. 

Hinchar. 

To  swell. 

Nadar. 

To  swim. 

Prohibir. 

To  prohibit. 

Quitar. 

To  take  off,  to  take  away. 

Contrario. 

Contrary. 

Descompuesto. 

Decomposed,  out  of  order. 

Dotado. 

Endowed,  gifted. 

Excelentc. 

Excellent. 

Indigno. 

Unworthy. 

Improviso. 

Improvised,  unexpected. 

Terrible. 

Terrible. 

Antojo.                Desire,  longing, 

Alabanza.             Praise. 

whim. 

Apariencia.          Appearance. 

Alcance.               Reach. 

Estocada.              Thrust. 

282 


LESSOir     LIII, 


A 

Consejo. 

Counsel. 

Busca. 

Search. 

Discurso. 

Speech,  discourse. 

Comida. 

Dinner. 

GatiUo. 

Pincers  (dentist's). 

Custodia. 

Keeping. 

Juicio. 

Judgment,  trial. 

Edad. 

Age. 

Juramento. 

Oath,  affidavit. 

Hermosura. 

Beauty. 

Mar. 

Sea. 

Obligacion. 

Duty. 

Navio. 

Ship. 

Vela. 

Sail,  candle. 

Piso. 

Floor,  story. 

Travesura. 

Trick,  pertness 

Tiro. 

Shot. 

Corrida  de  toros 

Bull-fight. 

Preccpto. 

Precept. 

Oposicion. 

Opposition. 

Torero. 

Bull-fighter. 

Toro. 

Bull. 

Tribunal. 

Tribunal,  court. 

COMPOJ 

5ITI0N. 

Correr  per  las  calles. 

Hablo  de  {or  sobre)  ese  negocio. 

I  Que  esta  V.  haciendo  ? 

Estaba  para  decirselo  k  V. 

No  alcanzo  ^  comprenderlo. 

Hace  las  cosas  a  su  antojo. 

Iba  en  busca  de  un  amigo. 

Me  opuse  a  ello. 

A  lo  largo  del  rio. 

Venga  V.  conmigo. 

No  se  que  detenninar. 

De  ningun  modo. 

Esta  comiendo. 

Entro  por  la  ventana. 

Delante  de  mi  ventana. 

Ante  el  juez. 

Antes  de  ahora. 

Tales  acciones  son  indignas  de  i 

ballero. 
Parecia  fuera  de  sf. 
Excede  &  toda  alabanza. 
Sin  duda  alguna. 
De  dia. 
Uno  &  uno. 

6  Per  donde  le  vino  a  V.  ? 
Luego. 
Por  mar. 
A  la  mano. 


To  nm  about  the  streets. 

He  spoke  about  that  affair. 

What  are  you  about  ? 

I  was  about  to  tell  it  to  you. 

It  is  above  my  comprehension. 

He  does  things  after  his  own  fancy. 

I  was  in  search  of  a  friend. 

I  set  my  face  against  it. 

By  the  river  side. 

Come  along  with  me. 

I  am  at  a  loss  how  to  act. 

Not  at  all. 

He  is  at  dinner. 

He  came  in  by  the  window. 

Before  my  window. 

Before  the  judge. 

Before  now. 

Such  actions  are  beneath  a  gentleman. 

He  appeared  to  be  beside  himsel£ 

It  is  beyond  all  praise. 

Beyond  all  doubt. 

By  day. 

One  by  one. 

How  did  you  come  by  it  ? 

By  and  by. 

By  sea. 

At  hand. 


LESSON     LIII. 


283 


Echolo  V.  en  ticrra. 

En  cuanto  a  mi. 

Di'gasclo  V.  (le  mi  parte. 

A  coDsequcucia  do  eso. 

Do  acuerdo  con. 

Tenia  esperanza  do  que  scrviria. 

Bajar  al  jardin. 

Todos  nosotros. 

Le  pido  a  V. 

I  Cuanto  dista  ? 

De  improviso. 

Quitesc  V.  el  sombrco. 

So  la  llevo. 

Le  dejc  ir. 

For  ese  motive. 

Adelante. 

Sobre  mi  palabra. 

Al  contrario. 

No  se  tratan. 

Lcs  impuso  esa  obligacion. 

Alimentarse  de  esperanzas. 

Venga  V.  el  doce  de  Mayo. 

Al  (or  del)  otro  lado. 

Se  acabo. 

Vuelva  v.  k  leerlo. 

Do  miedo. 

Fuera  do  peligro. 

Fuera  de  casa. 

Esta  sin  dincro. 

Descompuesto. 

Perdio  el  juicio. 

For  curiosidad. 

Estar  de  raal  humor. 

Fasare  a  su  casa  de  V. 

Pasamos  por  Francia. 

Le  atraveso  de  parte  a  parte. 

For  61. 

For  medio  de  el. 

De  dia  en  dia. 

Segun  las  apariencias. 

Eso  esta.  aun  por  venir. 

Diez  contra  uno. 

Hasta  hoy. 

El  navio  esta  a  la  vela. 


Throw  it  down. 

As  for  me. 

Tell  him  that  from  me. 

In  consequence  of  that. 

In  accordance  with. 

I  was  in  hopes  that  it  would  do. 

To  go  down  to  the  garden. 

All  of  us. 

I  beg  of  you. 

How  far  is  it  ? 

Off-hand. 

Take  off  your  hat. 

He  carried  her  6ff. 

I  let  him  off. 

On  that  account. 

Go  on. 

On  my  word. 

On  the  contrary. 

They  are  not  on  good  terms. 

He  imposed  that  duty  upon  them. 

To  live  on  hope. 

Come  on  the  12  th  of  May. 

Over  the  way,  on  the  other  side. 

It  is  all  over. 

Read  it  over  again. 

From  fear,  for  fear. 

Out  of  danger. 

Out  of  doors. 

He  is  out  of  money. 

Out  of  order. 

She  is  out  of  her  mind. 

Out  of  curiosity. 

To  be  in  bad  humor. 

I  will  go  round  to  your  house. 

We  passed  through  France. 

He  ran  him  through. 

Through  (?.  e.,  on  account  of)  him. 

Through  («.  e.,  by  means  of)  him. 

From  day  to  day. 

By  all  appearances. 

That  is  yet  to  come. 

Ten  to  one. 

To  this  day. 

The  ship  is  under  sail. 


284 


LESSON     LIII. 


Es  mehor  de  cdad. 

Bajo  de  juramento. 

Hacia  alia. 

i,  Estan  levantados  ? 

Al  segundo  piso. 

Que  suban  la  comida. 

Le  pusieron  en  custodia. 

Hincharse  de  soberbia. 

No  la  puedo  aguantar. 

Armese  V.  de  paciencia. 

Su  hermosura  me  sorprendi6. 

No  la  conozco. 

Dotado  de  virtudes. 

Me  agrado  su  discureo. 

A  tiro  de  pistola. 

A  mi  alcance. 

No  hay  nadie  en  casa. 

Asomado  &  una  ventana. 


He  is  imder  age. 

Under  oath. 

Up  that  way. 

Are  they  up  ? 

Up  two  flights  of  stairs. 

Let  them  bring  up  the  dinner. 

He  was  taken  into  custody. 

To  be  puiTed  up  with  pride, 

I  cannot  put  up  with  her. 

Arm  yourself  with  patience. 

I  was  struck  with  her  beauty. 

I  am  not  acquainted  with  her. 

Endowed  with  virtues. 

I  was  pleased  with  his  discourse. 

Within  pistol-shot. 

With  my  reach. 

There  is  nobody  within. 

At  a  window. 


EXPLANATION. 


266.  Idioms  are  certain  peculiar  modes  of  expression  ■which 
cannot  be  translated  literally  into  another  language.  We  have 
already  introduced  some  Spanish  as  well  as  English  idioms ; 
but  they  are  very  numerous  in  all  languages,  and  it  would  be 
as  unnecessary  to  give  within  the  compass  of  a  grammar  all 
those  peculiar  to  the  Spanish  language,  as  it  would  be  to  intro- 
duce all  its  words.  The  learner  will  find  them  in  the  several 
dictionaries,  and  principally  in  the  works  of  good  writers. 

However,  we  have  introduced  in  the  "Composition"  of  this 
lesson  as  many  as  the  limits  of  this  book  would  allow ;  giving 
examples  of  phrases  in  which  the  English  preposition  differs  in 
meaning  from  that  which  most  generally  constitutes  its  proper 
signification,  and  consequently  must  be  translated  by  words 
coiTesponding  to  those  in  whose  place  it  stands  ;  as, 

No  sc  que  determinar.  I      I  am  at  a  loss  how  to  act, 

De  ningun  modo.  Not  at  all. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  En  d6nde  esta  Alejandro  ?    Esta  corriendo  por  las  calles. 

2.  2Porqu6  no  me  lo  dijiste  antes?    Estaba  para  decirselo  d  V. 


LESSON     LIU.  285 

3.  Yo  no  quiero  que  ande  correteando  calles. — Creo  que  iba  en  busca 
de  su  amigo. 

4.  Se  lo  tengo  prohibido ;  pero  el  no  rao  obedece,  y  hace  las  cosas  d 
su  antojo. — ^Yo  me  opuse  a  ello,  y  le  dije  qu6  V.  qugria  ir  a  paseo  con 
todos  nosotros. 

5.  Don  Carlos,  si  V.  quiero,  ir6  d  buscarlo. — De  ningun  modo,  V.  no 
lo  encontraria ;  lo  que  temo  es  que  haga  alguna  travesura  quo  le  cueste 
cara. 

6.  Yo  creo  que  subiendo  a  lo  largo  del  rio  lo  encontrar6,  porquo  si  no 
me  engafio  le  oi  declr  que  queria  ir  a  nadar. — No  s6  qu6  determinar,  pero 
no,  mejor  sera  dejarlo,  vamonos  nosotros  a  paseo  (or  vamos). 

7.  Su  hermano  Manuel  es  muy  diferente,  excede  d  toda  alabanza  j 
eiempre  obedece  los  preceptos  de  su  papa. — Sin  duda  alguna  Manuel  ea 
un  excelente  mucbacbo, 

8.  [  Hola !  aqui  viene  Juanito.  ^  Tiene  Y.  al  campo  con  nosotros  ? 
Con  mucbo  gusto  ;  pero  antes  tengo  que  pedir  a  V.  un  favor. 

9.  Delo  V.  por  concedido. — ^  Palabra  de  honor  ? — Sobre  mi  palabra. 
I  Que  es  ? 

10.  Que  perdone  V.  a  Alejandro. — ;  Yaya !  sea  asi,  puesto  que  di  mi 
palabra;  ^pero  donde  esta?  Se  escondio  y  no  se  atreve  a  preseutarse  do 
miedo,  pero  abora  lo  veo  asomado  a  ima  ventana  en  el  segundo  piso  do 
su  casa  de  Y. 

11.  Yo  creo  que  ha  perdido  el  juicio  ese  muchacho;  venga  Y.  aca, 
sefior  mio,  y  cu6ntenos  que  ha  hecho  eu  todo  este  tiempo  que  ha  estado 
fucra  de  casa. — Papa,  perdoneme  Y.,  que  no  lo  volver6  d  hacer  otra 
vez. 

12.  Bien,  bien,  dejemoslo  asi  por  esta  vez. 

13.  I  Don  Jos6,  corao  esta  su  hermana  de  Y.  ?  Esta  mejor  y  esperamos 
que  ya  esta  fuera  de  peligro. 

14.  ^  Mat6  el  torero  al  toro  a  la  primera  estocada  ?  Si,  seQor,  d  la 
primera  estocada  lo  atraveso  de  parte  d  parte. 

15.  ^  No  se  trata  Y.  con  su  vecino  ?  No,  seiior,  es  un  hombre  lleno 
de  soberbia,  a  quien  no  puedo  aguantar. 

16.  ^Se  di6  el  navio  d  la  vela  para  la  llabana?  Si,  sefior,  el  navio 
esta  a  la  vela. 

17.  jPusieron  al  culpable  en  custodia?  No,  sefior,  le  dejaron  bajo 
juramento  de  que  se  presentaria  en  el  tribunal. 

18.  ^Conoce  Y.^dla  Sefiorita  Sanchez?  Hace  poco  tiempo  que  hice 
su  conocimiento,  su  hermosura  me  sorprendio  y  es  una  sefiorita  dotada 
de  grandes  virtudes. 

19.  ^  Yiaj6  Y.  el  verano  pasado  por  mar  6  por  tierra?  Por  supuesto 
por  mar,  puesto  que  fui  a  Eiu-opa. 


286  LESSON     LIU. 

20.  I  Pasaron  Yds.  por  Francia  ?     Si,  seiior,  pasaraos  por  Francia,  y  el 
doce  de  Mayo  entranios  en  Paris. 

21.  ^Esta  V.  de  mal  humor?    Si,  senor,  mallsimo,  porque  tengo  un 
terrible  dolor  de  njuelas. 

22.  Le  aconsejo  a  V.  que  se  arme  de  paciencia. — Mil  gracias,  por  sa 
buen  consejo,  pero  creo  que  sera  mejor  armarse  de  uu  buen  gatillo. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  How  does  that  man  spend  his  time  ?  He  seems  to  do  nothing  but 
run  about  the  streets. 

2.  Is  your  uncle's  sight  not  good  ?  No,  sir ;  and  that  is  the  reason 
.why  he  wears  spectacles. 

3.  Is  that  the  way  you  spell  (escribir)  that  word  ?  Ob,  no,  of  course 
not ;  I  must  take  out  one  of  the  e's. 

4.  Does  your  watch  keep  good  time  (andar  hien)'i  Yes,  when  it 
goes,  which  occurs  very  rarely* ;  it  gets  out  of  order  about  twice  a  month. 

5.  Did  you  see  the  Spanish  man-of-war  (ship  of  war)  that  came  into 
port  {jpu£rto)  last  month  ?  Yes,  I  saw  it  the  day  it  set  sail  {darse  a  la 
Tela)  to  return  to  Spain. 

6.  Did  you  go  to  see  a  bull-fight  during  your  stay  at  Madrid  ?  I  did ; 
and  although  I  do  not  like  it  myself,  yet  I  could  not  help  (no  poder  menos 
de)  admiring  the  amazing  dexterity  of  the  men  (bull-fighters)  who  dared 
to  expose  their  lives  attacking  the  furious  animal. 

7.  How  many  stories  are  tliere  in  the  house  you  live  in  ?  Three ;  I 
generally  sleep  on  the  third  fioor. 

8.  Can  you  not  induce  him  to  stay  at  home  ?  l^o,  he  wants  to  go ; 
it  is  a  whim  of  his,  and  he  will  not  bear  with  any  opposition. 

9.  "Were  you  in  court  at  the  time  of  the  trial  ?  No,  I  could  not  go 
down  town  that  day. 

10.  How  far  had  he  gone  before  you  overtook  him  ?    I  caught  up  with 
him  at  the  corner  of  the  street. 

11.  llow  is  your  cousin  getting  on  ?    Pretty  well ;  but  his  arm  is  still 
swollen,  and  to  all  appearance  it  pains  him  very  much. 

12.  I  wonder  how  he  can  bear  up  under  so  much  sufieriug.     He  lives 
in  the  hope  of  getting  better  one  day  or  other. 

13.  Did  that  man  swear  he  had  not  been  there  ?    He  made  (prestar) 
affidavit  tliat  he  had  never  set  (put)  his  foot  in  the  house. 

l-±.  What  a  beautiful  young  lady  that  is !    That  is  true ;  but  her  learn- 
ing by  far  exceeds  her  beauty. 

*  Jiara  tez. 


LESSON     LIV. 


287 


LESSON    LIV. 


Apegarse. 

Criar. 

Concebir. 

Continuar. 

Encerrar. 

Guardar. 

Pintar. 

Presidir. 

Ponderar. 

Combatir, 

Reducir. 

Rodar. 

Sacudir. 

Tirar. 

Llenar. 
Entnsiasmar. 

Al  cabo. 
De  repente. 

No  obstante. 
Si  acaso. 
Si  bien. 

Amarillo. 

Aziil. 

Anaranjado. 

Atento. 

Confuse. 

Feroz. 

Bondadoso. 

Favorito. 

Griego. 

Afiil. 

Ligero. 

Lleno. 

Montaraz. 

Vistoso. 

Colorado,  rojo. 


To  adhere  to,  to  be  attached. 

To  raise  (breed),  to  bring  up. 

To  conceive. 

To  continue. 

To  shut  up. 

To  guard,  to  take  care,  to  keep.  ^ 

To  paint. 

To  preside. 

To  make  much  of,  to  praise. 

To  combat.  • 

To  reduce. 

To  roll. 

To  shake,  to  shake  off. 

To  pull,  to  draw,  to  throw,  to 

throw  out  (or  away). 
To  fill. 
To  render  enthusiastic. 


After  all,  finally,  at  the  end. 
Suddenly,  on  a  sudden. 

Notwithstanding. 
If  at  aU,  in  case. 
Although. 


Yellow. 

Blue. 

Orange. 

Attentive. 

Confused. 

Fierce. 

Kind. 

Favorite. 

Greek. 

Indigo. 

Light,  slight,  speedj. 

FuU. 

Mountaineer,  wild. 

Conspicuous,  showy. 

Red. 


288 


LESSON     LIV. 


Romano 

Roman. 

Particular. 

Particular,  private,  rare- 

Picante. 

Pungent. 

Temerario. 

Dariug,  rash. 

Violado. 

Violet  (color) 

. 

Verde. 

Green. 

Prismatico. 

Prismatic 

Cabo. 

End. 

Algazara. 

Shouts  (of  joy). 

'Oirco. 

Siege,  circus. 

Autoridad. 

Authority. 

Color. 

Color. 

Confusion. 

Confusion. 

Bullicio. 

Rumpus,  noise, 

Carcajada. 

Burst  of  laughter. 

• 

bustle. 

Corrida, 

Fight  (bull),  race. 

Ceremonial. 

Ceremony. 

Violeta. 

Violet  (flower). 

Espectro  solar. 

Solar  spectrum. 

Diversion. 

Diversion. 

Goce. 

Delight,  joy. 

Clase. 

Class. 

Dicho. 

Saying. 

Infancia. 

Infancy. 

Desierto. 

Desert. 

Idea. 

Idea. 

Interns. 

Literest. 

Fiesta. 

Feast,  festival. 

Guante. 

Glove. 

Guifiada. 

"Wink. 

Leon. 

Lion. 

Ocupacion. 

Occupation. 

Local. 

Situation. 

Corrida  de  toros. 

BuU-fight. 

Entusiasmo. 

Enthusiasm, 

Pelota. 

Ball. 

Enemigo. 

Enemy. 

Plaza  de  toros. 

Arena. 

Lloros. 

Tears,  cry. 

Proeza. 

Prowess,  exploits. 

Paso. 

Step,  pace. 

Sonrisa. 

Smile. 

Prisma. 

Prism. 

Valentia. 

Bravery. 

Eumor. 

Rumor. 

Jaula. 

Cage. 

S6r. 

Being. 

Traje. 

DresiJ,  costume. 

Recibimiento. 

Reception. 

Suelo, 

Ground. 

Grito. 

Shout,  cry. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

* 

Los  vimos  cuando  entrabamos. 

Si  no  hubiera  sido  por  mi,  le  habrian 

matado. 
Yo  iria  si  no  crcycra  que  fuese  inutil. 
Diga  V.  si  vendra  6  no. 
Que  venga  6  que  no  venga. 
Dudo  que  lo  sepa. 


We  saw  them  as  we  were  going  in. 
But  for  me,  they  would  have  killed  him. 

I  would  go,  but  that  I  think  it  useless. 
Say  whether  you  will  come  or  not 
Whether  he  come  or  not, 
I  doubt  whfither  she  knows  it 


LESSON     LIV. 


289 


Por  atentos  y  bondadosos  que  scan  {or 

no  obstante  lo  atentos  que  son)  y  por 

bondadosos  que  sean. 
Es  raenester  que  se  cuide  V.,  porque  si 

no  se  enfermara. 
Es  menester  que  obedezca  V.  las  orde- 

nes  ;  de  lo  contrario  sufrira  las  con- 

secuencias. 
0  yo  tengo  razon  6  el  la  tiene. 
Ni  prometas  ni  obres  sin  pensar. 

No  lo  haria  si  me  importara  la  vida  (i.  c, 
aunque,  or  por  mas  que  me  importa- 
ra la  vida). 

Valienta  si  los  hay. 

Tuvo  el  valor,  si  tal  nombre  merece  una 
aceion  tcmeraria  de  combatir  solo 
contra  tantos  enemigos. 

Quiero  saber  si  emplea  bien  el  tiempo. 

6  Si  habra  Uegado  el  correo  ? 
Mira  si  viene. 
No  se  si  lo  haga. 
Si  (es  que)  acabo  de  entrar. 
Si  (cuando)  el  al  cabo  ha  de  vcnir. 
Si  (cs  que)  no  es  eso. 
Si  (ya)  lo  dije. 

Si  (porque)  no  hay  cosa  que  yo  haga. 
Apenas  si  se  oia  el  confuso  rumor  do 
los  pasos. 


However  attentive  they  arc,  and  how- 
ever kind  they  may  be. 

You  must  take  care  of  yourself,  for  if 
you  do  not  you  will  be  ill. 

You  must  obey  the  orders  ;  for  if  you 
transgress  them,  you  will  suffer  the 
consequences. 

Either  I  am  right  or  he  is. 

Neither  promise  nor  act  without  think- 
ing. 

I  would  not  do  it,  though  my  life  were 
at  stake. 

A  valiant  man,  if  there  are  any  in  the 

world. 
He  had  the  courage,  if  the  rash  action 

of  fighting  alone  against  so  many 

enemies  is  worthy  of  such  a  name. 
I  wish  to  know  whether  he  employs  his 

time  profitably. 
If  the  mail  should  have  arrived  ? 
See  if  he  is  coming. 
I  do  not  know  whether  to  do  it  or  not. 
I  have  but  just  come  in. 
For,  after  all,  he  must  come. 
But  that  is  not  it. 
But  I  said  so. 
For  I  do  nothing  at  all. 
The  confused  tramping  of  feet  could 

scarcely  be  heard. 


EXPLANATION. 

267.  There  are  several  conjunctions  in  English  that  are 
frequently  used,  as  substitutes  for  other  words ;  these  conjunc- 
tions are  generally  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  words  which 
they  stand  in  the  place  of;  as, 

Los  vimos  cuando  entrabamos.  I      We  saw  them  as  we  were  going  in. 

Diga  V.  si  quiere  venir  6  no.  |      Say  whether  you  nvill  come  or  not. 

268.  The  Spanish  conjunctions  are  also  often  used  as  sub- 
stitutes for  other  words  of  very  different  meanings.  Let  si  and 
que  serve  as  examples  ; 

13 


290  LESSON     LIV. 

Si,  as  an  adverb,  is,  as  we  have  already  observed,  affirmative, 
except  when  employed  ironically. 

Si,  as  a  conjunction,  may  be  employed  in  a  variety  of  signi- 
fications.    The  following  are  some  of  its  principal  uses; 

1st.  To  denote  the  condition  on  which  depends  the  accom- 
plishment of  an  action  ;  as, 

Si  quicrc3  acompauarme,  voy  a  salir.  I      If  you  will  accompany  me,  I  am  go- 

I  ing  out. 

2d.  To  express  indispensable  conditions ;  as, 

Tendras  el  caballo  si  lo  pagas.  I      Yoa  will  have  the  horse  if  you  pay 

I  for  it. 

3.d.  In  the  sense  of  although,  or  even  though  ;  as, 


I  would  not  do  it, .  even  though  my 
life  were  at  stake. 


No  lo  haria  si  me  importara  la  vida 
(i.  e.,  aunque  or  por  mas  que,  me 
importara  la  vida). 

4th.  In  familiar  conversation  this  conjunction  is  often  em- 
ployed in  meanings  very  different  from  those  we  have  just  ex- 
plained. For  instance,  it  is  often  used  instead  of  es  que,  it  is 
because  ;  cuando,  when ;  porque,  because ;  and  not  unfrequent- 
ly  instead  of  ya,  already,  as  we  read  in  one  of  Moratin's  come- 
dies : 


Si  (es  que)  acabo  de  entrar. 

Si  (cuando)  el  al  cabo  ha  de  venir. 

Si  (es  que)  no  es  eso. 

Si  (ya)  lo  dije. 

Si  (porque)  no  hay  cosa  que  yo  haga. 


I  have  but  just  come  in. 
For,  after  all,  he  must  come. 
But  that  is  not  it. 
But  I  said  so  (or  did  say  so). 
For  I  do  nothing  at  all. 


5th.  It  is  often  used  redundantly  ;  as, 

Apenas  si  se  oia  el  confuso  rumor  de  I      The  confused  tramping  of  feet  could 
los  pasos.  I  scarcely  be  heard. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  jlria  V.  11  ver  ii  su  hennano  si  tuviora  tieinpo  ?    Yo  iria  si  no  cre- 
yera  quo  fuese  imitil. 

2.  Diga  V.  si  vendra  6  no. — Amigo  mio  tcmo  salir,  porque  hace  mal 
tiempo,  y  es  menester  que  mc  cuide  porque  si  no  onferraar6. 

3.  ^Estuvo  Y.  aycr  a,  ver  el  recibimicnto  del  rresidcnte?    No,  seuor, 
mis  ocupaciones  no  me  lo  permitieron, 


LESSON     LIV.  291 

4.  I  Cuiiles  son  lo3  colores  en  quo  se  descompono  el  espectro  solar  ? 
Violado,  aflil,  azul,  verde,  amarillo,  anaranjado  y  rojo. 

5.  I  De  que  color  tine  V.  sus  guantes  ?    Los  tiflo  de  anwrillo. 

G.  I  Que  tal  le  gusta  ii  V.  este  ejercicio  ?  No  me  gusta  de  ningnn 
modo,  J  si  contiuua  tan  interesante  como  hasta  aqoi,  creo  que  me  hard 
dormir. 

7.  I  Que  costumbres  le  gustan  &  V.  mas,  las  de  Espafia  6  las  de  los 
Estados  Unidos?  Naturakaente,  como  espailolj  me  gustan  mas  las  de 
Espafia. 

8.  Pero  I  cuales  son  las  mejores  ?  No  sabr6  decirselo  a  V.,  cada  nacion 
tiene  las  suyas  y  cada  individuo  se  apega  desde  su  infancia  a  las  de  su 
propio  pais. 

().  i  Cual  es  la  diversion  favorita  del  pueblo  espailol  ?  Las  corridas  de 
toros ;  esto  se  entiende  hablando  del  pueblo  en  general  y  aun  de  muclios 
caballeros  de  la  primera  clase  de  la  sociedad ;  pero  no  de  todos,  porquo 
hay  muchos,  principalmente,  sefioras,  que  jamas  han  visto  una  corrida  de 
Toros. 

10.  Debe  ser  una  diversion  muy  cruel  y  muy  peligrosa. — No  deja  do 
scr  peligrosa,  pues  los  toros  do  Espafia  son  mas  feroces  y  ligeros  que  los 
de  ninguna  parte  del  mundo,  criados  con  este  objeto  montai'aces,  de  modo 
que  cuando  de  improvise  se  encuentran  en  la  plaza  rauestran  una  feroci- 
dad  y  una  valentia  en  nada  inferior  a  la  de  un  leon  de  los  desiertos  del  Afri- 
ca, que  se  encontrase  de  repente  en  estos  circos  llenos  de  s6res  humanos. 

11.  gQuiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  relatarme  una  corrida  de  toros? 
Lo  haria  con  mucho  gusto  ;  pero  se  que  no  podria  Lacerlo  como  mercco 
esta  antigua  diversion,  en  algo  scmejantc  a  los  circos  de  los  Griegos  y 
Eomanos. 

12.  i  Vamos !  pruebe  V. — Pero  si  es  imposible,  y  aunque  llegara  a  pia- 
tarle  a  Y.  el  local,  los  vistosos  trajes,  tanto  del  pueblo  como  de  los  tore- 
ros, los  curiosos  ceremoniales  de  la  fiesta,  las  autoridades  que  la  presiden, 
las  tropas  que  la  guardan  ;  la  rausica,  el  bullicio,  los  dicbos  picantes,  la.s 
sonrisas,  las  giiifiadas,  los  Uoros  y  carcajadas,  todo  esto  no  servii-ia  de 
nada  pai-a  hacerle  a  V.  concebir  una  pequefla  idea  del  gozo  y  entusiasmo 
que  auima  al  pueblo  espafiol  en  una  corrida  de  toros. 

13.  jEs  posible!  iCon  que  todo  eso  hay!  pues  yo  creia  que  se  redu- 
cia  a  una  carniceria  de  vacas  y  caballos. — Pues  si  V.  estnviora  en  Madrid 
le  sutederia  como  a  todos  los  extrangeros,  que  ii  pesar  de  criticai-nos  esta 
diversion,  jamas  pierdcn  una  corrida  de  toros. 

14.  Pero  ^en  que  puede  consistir  cse  goce  que  V.  me  pondera  ?  ;  Goce! 
hombrc,  lie  vi<;to  yo  tirar  a  la  plaza  el  baston,  el  bolsillo  y  hasta«l  reloj, 
entusiasmado  do  la  proeza  de  algun  toreador.  Eso  era  lo  que  yo  le  decia 
a  V.  que  no  era  facil  de  pintar,  porque  no  consiste  en  la  cosa  misma  por 


292  LESSON     LIV. 

mas  int^r^s  que  tenga  sino  en  la  disposicion  particular  y  el  entusiasmo  de 
cada  uno.  Y  si  no  digame  V.  en  el  jucgo  del  fragata'^  americano  en 
que  no  se  ve  otra  cosa  quo  una  pelota  que  rueda  por  el  suelo,  6  se  eleva 

por  el  aire,  despedida  por  un  garrote i ; ;  Que  es  lo  que  mueve 

toda  aquclla  algazara  y  ruido  y  confusion  y  giftos  de,  Ilola ! ! !  Willie  ! ! ! 
Chai-ley ! !  !  Here  ! ! !  Uere  ! ! !  Eun ! ! !  James ! ! !  Hurra ! ! !  Hurra ! !  ! 
15.  Ha,  ha,  ha;  V".  mo  hace  reir  con  su  corrida  de  toros.     j  Vaya!  me 
alegro,  algo  se  ha  ganado,  porque  al  principio  yo  creia  que  V.  se  iba  a 
dormir. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Had  you  not  better  leave  a  line  for  him  in  case  he  should  come? 
I  think  it  would  be  better ;  notwithstanding  that  it  seems  impossible  for 
him  to  get  here  to-night. 

2.  Do  the  boys  still  continue  to  take  lessons  ?  One  of  them  stiU  con- 
tinues, although  the  least  studious  of  the  three ;  the  other  two  gave  up 
all  of  a  sudden  last  month. 

3.  What  shouts  are  those  I  hear  up-stairs  ?  Charles  has  some  friends 
with  him,  and  they  are  getting  enthusiastic  on  the  occasion  of  the  Presi- 
dent's visit  to  the  city. 

4.  Do  you  know  how  to  keep  a  secret  ?  I  want  to  know  that  before  I 
tell  you  this  one. — I  do. — Well,  so  do  I. 

5.  I  suppose!  they  gave  the  General  a  grand  reception  when  he  re- 
turned from  the  war?  A  magnificent |  one,  fit  for  a  king;  it  was  Peter's 
uiicle  that  presided  at  it. 

6.  Can  you  tell  me  how  many  prismatic  colors  there  are,  and  their 
names  ?  I  shall  try ;  let  us  see :  Green,  blue,  violet,  red,  orange,  yellow, 
indigo. 

7.  What  is  the  best  time  for  learning  a  language  with  the  least 
trouble  ?  During  infancy ;  in  that  age  the  study  of  languages  is  reduced 
to  its  simplest  expression. 

8.  What  would  the  earth  be  without  the  light  and  heat  which  we  re- 
ceive from  the  sun  ?  A  perfect  desert ;  man  nor  no  living  being  could 
exist,  and  there  would  be  no  vegetation,  for  all  animated  nature  is  sus- 
tained by  the  vivifying  (civificador)  effects  of  the  sun. 

9.  What  is  the  use  of  the  prism  ?  It  possesses  the  power  of  decom- 
posing the  sunbeam  (ray a  del  soI\  thus  enabling  {2^odcr)  us  to  see  separate- 
ly the  rays  of  different  colors  which  unite  to  form  what  is  called  light. 

10.  Where  are  you  going  now  ?  it  is  not  yet  time  for  the  theatre.  Why, 
it  is  half-past  seven,  and  the  play  begins  at  eight  precisely. 

11.  If  my  friend  should  have  come  while  I  was  out?    Oh,  I  imagine 
that  if  ho  had  come  he  would  have  left  some  word  (dejar  dicho)  for  you. 

*  Base  ball.  t  Suponer.  %  Magmifico. 


LESSON"     LV. 


293 


12.  "VVliat  is  that  confused  tramping  of  feet*  that  I  hear  in  the  street? 
A  crowd  of  people  running  to  see  a  fire  in  the  next  street. 

13.  Do  you  liear  how  that  lady  praisesf  the  courage  of  the  man  who  has 
just  got  into  the  lion's  cage  (jaula)  ?  I  do,  and  I  was  just  thinking  she 
might  find  an  occupation  of  more  interest ;  besides,  I  do  not  see  any 
proof  of  courage  in  such  a  rash  action  as  to  shut  one's  self  up  with  a  fe- 
rocious animal  like  the  lion. 

14.  What  sort  of  a  dress  did  Miss  II.  wear  at  the  ball  ?  A  blue  silk 
(seda)  dress,  with  violet  and  orange  trimmings  {guarniciones).  Can  you 
conceive  of  any  thing  more  detestable  ? 


LESSON    LV. 


Afianzar, 

To  secure,  to  fasten,  to  prop. 

Oonquistar. 

To  conquer. 

Construir. 

To  construct, 

to  build. 

Fundai'. 

To  found,  to  go  upon  (a  pi*inciple) 

Medir. 

To  measure. 

Portarse. 

To  conduct  one's  self,  to  behave. 

Tirar. 

To  throw. 

Desigual. 

Unequal. 

Extremado. 

Extreme. 

Ilorrendo. 

Horrific. 

Distinto. 

Distinct. 

Eidiculo. 

Eidiculous. 

In  memorial 

Immemorial. 

Recto. 

Eight,  straight. 

Auxilio. 

Help. 

Andalucia. 

Andalusia. 

Castellano. 

Castilian. 

CastUla. 

Castile. 

Arabe. 

Arab. 

Cataluiia. 

Catalonia. 

Crimen. 

Crime. 

Corona. 

Crown. 

Catalan. 

Catalonian. 

Avila. 

Avila.      « 

Cimiento. 

Foundation, 

GaHcia. 

Galicia. 

Dialecto. 

Dialect. 

Isabel. 

Elizabeth,  Isa- 

Fulano. 

Such    a    one,    so 

bella. 

and  so. 

Imperfeccion. 

Imperfection. 

Gallego. 

Galician. 

Irregularidad. 

L-regularity. 

Modelo. 

Model. 

Guipuzcoa. 

Guipuzcoa. 

♦ 

Rumor  de  pasos. 

t  Aplaudir. 

294 


LESSON     LV. 


Defecto. 

Defect. 

M6rito. 

Merit. 

Reino 

Kingdom, 

Terrene. 

Ground. 

Titulo. 

•   Title. 

Vascuence. 

Basque. 

Zutano. 

Such  a  one. 

Escritorio. 

Office. 

Igualdad. 
Medida. 

Equality. 
Measure. 

Pesa. 

Weight  (for 

Noblcza. 
Persona. 

weighing) 
Nobility. 
Person. 

e. 

Moneda. 

Coin. 

Kegularidad. 
Valencia. 

Regularity. 
Valencia. 

Vizcaya. 
Universidad. 

Biscay. 
University. 

COMrOS 

[TIOK 

Tratemos  ahora  de  descansar  que  sera 

lo  mcjor. 
Si  no  hay  virtudcs,  que  son  el  cimicnto 

de  la  libertad,  no  so  afiauzavii  csta  en 

los  pueblos. 
j  Qud  herraosa  que  est&s ! 
Ese  si  que  es  un  mode  dc  portarse  con 

honor. 
Que  llaman. 
Que  me  deje  en  paz. 
i  Que  me  matan ! 
En  muchas  obras  no  se  encucntra  otro 

{or  mas)  merito  que  el  cstilo. 
Es  que  estoy  ocupado. 
Es  que  se  encuentra  sin  ningun  auxilio. 
Con  la  perdida  de  su  madre  est&  todo 

el  dia  llora  que  llora. 
i  Que  no  lo  hubiera  yo  sabido  ! 
i  Qu6  siempre  has  de  ser  un  holgazan  ? 
;  Qu6  hermoso  cielo  ! 
i  Qu6  horrenda  noche ! 
J  Qu6  cielo  tan  hermoso ! 
A  que  si. 
A  que  no. 
Aque  lo  digo. 
A  que  lo  hago. 
i  Que  de  crimenes  se  vieron  ! 
i  Que  de  injusticias  no  se  cometen ! 

i  Qu6  !  i  no  vienes  ? 


Let  us  try  to  rest  now ;  that  will  be 
best. 

If  there  are  no  virtues,  which  are  the 
foundation  of  liberty,  the  latter  will 
have  no  firm  foothold  among  nations. 

How  beautiful  you  are ! 

That,  nov,-,  is  an  honorable  mode  of 
acting. 

Some  one  is  calling  (knocking). 

Let  him  let  me  alone. 

Murder ! 

Many  works  are  void  of  all  merit  save 
the  style. 

Well,  but  I  am  busy. 

Well,  but  he  is  entirely  forsaken. 

She  does  nothing  the  whole  day  over 
but  lament  the  loss  of  her  mother. 

Ah !  could  I  but  have  known  it ! 

Are  you  always  to  bo  a  sluggard  1  ^ 

What  a  beautiful  sky  ! 

What  a  horrific  night ! 

What  a  beautiful  sky  ! 

I  will  bet  you  it  is. 

I  will  bet  you  it  is  not. 

I  will  bet  you  I  can  say  it. 

I  will  bet  you  I  can  do  it. 

How  much  crime  there  was  ! 

How  much  injustice  is  there  not  com- 
mitted ! 

What !  are  you  not  coming  ? 


LESSON     LV. 


295 


jFulano!— 6Qu6? 

Ir6  a  paseo,  que  no  estare  siempre  me- 

tido  en  casa. 
Quo  quiera  que  no  quiera. 
No  C3  hijo  mio,  quo  si  lo  fuera  .... 


Such  a  one !    What  ? 

I  shall  go  and  take  a  walk,  for  I  will 

not  be  always  stuck  in  the  house. 
Whether  he  will  or  not 
Ho  is  no  sou  of  mine,  for  if  he  were  .  .  . 


EXPLANATION. 

269.  Que,  as  a  conjunction,  is  employed  in  so  many  differ- 
ent ways  and  meanings,  tending  to  perplex  the  learner,  that 
we  deem  it  essential  to  mention  here  some  of  its  principal  uses  : 

It  is  employed  as  a  copulative  ;  as, 
Tratcmos  ahora  de  descansar,  que  sera  I  Let  us  go  to  rest  now ;    that  will  bo 
lo  mejor.  I      best. 

It  sometimes  serves  to  introduce  an  incidental  proposition 
dej)endent  on  the  principal  one  ;  as, 


Si  no  hay  virtudes,  que  son  el  cimiento 
de  la  libertad,  no  so  afianzara  esta 
en  los  pueblos. 


If  there  are  no  virtues,  which  are  the 
foundation  of  liberty,  the  latter  will 
have  no  firm  foothold  among  nations. 


It  is  employed  instead  of  sino^  but  after  either  of  the  ad- 
jectives otro  or  tnas ;  as, 

En  muchas  obras  no  se  encuentra  otro  I  Many  works  are  void  of  all  merit  ex- 
(or  mas)  m^rito  que  el  estilo.  |      cept  the  style. 

It  is  ^employed  instead  of  pero^  but  in  the  phrase  es  que^ 
with  which  we  convey  the  reason  why  something  is  or  is 
not  done ;  as, 

Es  que  estoy  ocupado.  I  But  I  am  busy. 

JEs  que  se  encuentra  sin  ningun  auxilio.  |  But  ho  is  entirely  forsaken. 

The  conjunction  qxie^  placed  between  two  words  of  the 
same  meaning,  besides  uniting  them  as  a  conjunction,  gives 
more  energy  to  the  expression  ;  as, 

Con  la  p6rdida  de  su  madre  esta  todo  I  She  is  the  whole  day  over  lamenting 
el  dia  Uora  que  llora.  |      the  loss  of  her  mother. 

At  other  times  it  serves  to  confirm  more  and  more  tlie  ex- 
pression ;  as, 


/  Que  hermosa  que  estis !  {instead  of, 
J  Que  hermosa  est4s  !) 

i  Ese  si  que  es  un  modo  de  portarse  con 
honor  !  {iiistcad  of  \  Ese  si  es  un  mo- 
do do  portarse  con  honor !) 


How  beautiful  you  are  ! 

That,  now,  is  an  honorable  mode  of 
acting ! 


296  LESSON     LV. 

The  conjunction  que^  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  implies 
a  proposition  going  before  it ;  as, 

Que  llaman. 

Qiie  me  deje  en  paz. 

/  Que  me  matan  ! 


Some  one  is  calling. 
Let  him  let  me  alone. 
Murder ! 


In  all  these  examples  a  proposition  is  understood  before  the 
que ;  as,  mirad,  in  the  first ;  deseo  or  quiero^  in  the  second ;  and 
reparad  or  sabed,  in  the  third. 

When  the  sentence  is  interrogative  or  exclamatory,  qice 
denotes  desire  and  expostulation  ;  as, 

/  Que  no  lo  hubiera  yo  sabido  !  I  Ah !  could  I  but  have  known  it ! 

/  Que  siempre  has  de  ser  im  holgazan  !    |  Are  you  always  to  be  a  sluggard ! 

In  an  exclamatory  sentence,  and  when  it  precedes  a  noun 
adjective,  it  is  equivalent  to  cicdn ;  as, 

/  Que  hermoso  cielo  !  I  What  a  beautiful  sky  ! 

/  Que  horrenda  noche  !  |  What  an  horrific  night ! 

But  if  in  these  sentences  the  substantive  comes  first,  the  particle 
tan  must  be  put  between,  because  we  cannot  say:  /  Qice  cielo 
hermoso  !  but,  /  Qu'e  cielo  tan  hermoso ! 

In  some  sentences  a  determining  verb  is  understood ;  as, 


A  <pie  SI. 
A  que-ao. 
A  qu£  lo  digo. 
A  que  lo  hago. 


I  will  bet  you  it  is. 
I  will  bet  you  it  is  not 
I  will  bet  you  I  can  say  it. 
I  will  bet  you  I  can  do  it, 


in  which  is  understood  the  "present  indicative  apuesto^  I  bet. 

In  other  sentences  it  is  equivalent  to  a  collective  noun  or  a 
plural  adjective,  and  requires  to  be  followed  by  tlie  preposition 
de\  as, 

/  Que  de  crimenes  so  vieron  !  I  How  much  crime  there  was  ! 

/  Que  de  injusticias  no  se  cometen  !  How  much  injustice  is  there  not  com- 

1      mitted ! 

instead  of  saying :  /  Cudntos  crimenes  !    /  Cudntas  injusticias  ! 
or,  /  Que  multitud  de  crimenes  e  injusticias  / 

It  also  denotes  surprise,  and  is  used  as  an  inteiTogative,  and 
for  answering ;  as, 
/  Que  /  i  no  vienes  ?  |  What !  are  you  not  coming  ? 


LESSON     LV.  297 

and  is  equivalent  to  an  entire  proposition  answering ;  as, 

jFulano  !     i  Qua?  {i.  c.  iQui  quieres  ?)  I  Such  a  one  !  What  ?  (/.  e.  What  do  you 

I      want  ?) 

At  other  times  it  is  employed  instead  of  the  adversative 
sino,  and  the  copulative  y,  in  periods  where  the  second  member 
denotes  opposition  to  what  is  expressed  in  the  first ;  as, 


He  will  not  get  it,  but  will  remain  with 
the  desire. 

I  shall  go  out  to  walk,  for  I  will  not  be 
always  stuck  in  the  house. 


No  !o  conseguirii ;  que  se  quedara  con 
el  deseo  {instead  of  sino  que  se  que- 
dara, etc.). 

Ir6  &  paseo,  que  no  estard  siempre  me- 
tido  en  casa  (instead  of  y  no  estare, 
etc.). 

It  is  not  unfrequently  used  in  the  place  of  a  disjunctive  con- 
junction ;  as, 

Que  quiera  que  no  quiera  (i.  e.,  quiera  I  Whether  he  will  or  not. 
6  no  quiera).  | 

It  is  sometimes  substituted  for  one  or  other  of  the  causals, 
pues,  porque,  pues  que ;  as. 

No  es  hijo  mio,  que  si  lo  fucra  .  .  .  {i.  e.,  I  He  is  no  son  of  mine,  for  if  he  were  .  .  . 
porque  or  pues,  si  lo  fuera).  | 

In  this  meaning  it  is  more  used  in  poetry  than  in  prose ;  as, 

"  Que  quien  se  opone  al  cielo, 
Cuanto  mas  alto  sube,  viene  al  suelo." 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION.   • 

1.  ^Se  habla  el  castellano  en  todas  las  proviiicias  de  Espaua  ?  En  los 
Iribnnalcs,  imiversidades,  j  oficinas  publicas,  si  seCor ;  pero  el  pueblo  ha- 
bla diferentes  dialectos. 

2.  iQn&  dialectos  son  cstos?  El  Catalan,  que  se  habla  en  Catalufla; 
el  valenciano,  en  Valencia ;  el  gallego,  en  Galicia ;  y  el  vascuence  que  se 
habla  en  las  pro\T:ncias  vascongadas,  que  son  Alava,  Guiplizcoa  j  Vizca- 
ya ;  se  cree  quo  cste  ultimo  es  lerigua  inadre  y  una  de  las  mas  antiguas 
de  Europa. 

3.  ^En  dondo  se  habla  el  castellano  ?  En  las  demas  provincias,  Cas- 
tilla,  Aragon  y  Andalncia. 

4.  e  Porque  no  se  habla  el  espaflol  en  toda  Espafia  ?  Porque  Espafia 
estuvo  anteriormente  di\adida  en  varios  reinos ;  de  estos  algunos  fueron 
conquistados  por  los  Arabes,  otros  pertcnecieron  a  Francia,  y  otros  final- 
mentc  permauecieron  iiulcpendientcs  por  muchos  siglos,  hasta  que  Fernan- 

13* 


293  LESSON     LV. 

do  6  Isabel,  echando  a  los  Arabes  de  Espafla,  reunieron  las  coronas  do 
Aragon  y  Castilla. 

5.  I  Son  diferentes  las  costumbres  de  las  provincias  de  Espafia  ?  Mu- 
cho ;  no  solamente  no  se  babla  la  misma  lengua  en  todas,  sino  que  basta 
poco  tiempo  bace  cada  provincia  tenia  leyes  diferentes,  y  auu  boy  dia 
tienen  pesas,  medidas,  traje  y  basta  caracteres  muy  distintos, 

6.  Pues  eso  debc  ser  rany  incomodo ;  en  los  Estados  Unidos  tenemos 
la  ventaja  de  bablar  una  misma  lengua  y  tenemos  las  mismas  pesas,  me- 
didas y  monedas. — Verdad  es,  pero  tambien  es  cierto  que  Vds.  ban  becbo 
todo  esto  con  la  experiencia  adquirida  en  el  antiguo  niundo. 

7.  I Y  porque  no  lo  bacen  Vds.  asi  en  EspaQa  ?  Porque  nosotros 
tenemos  ya  establecidas  estas  cosas  de  tiempo  inmemorial,  y  no  es  facil 
cambiar  costumbres  arraigadas  por  tantos  siglos. 

8.  Cuando  Vds.  fundan  una  ciudad  en  cste  nuevo  mundo,  eligen  el 
terreno  necesario,  tiran  Vds.  bneas  rectas  y  trazan  calles  y  plazas ;  para 
esto  no  siguen  el  modelo  de  una  antigua  ciudad  de  Europa,  pero  las  an- 
tiguas  ciudades  de  Europa  con  sus  imperfecciones  6  u-regularidades  les  ban 
mostrado  a  Vds.  el  modo  de  construir  ciudades,  cuyo  solo  defecto  con- 
siste  en  su  extremada  regulai'idad. 

9.  I Y  no  cree  V.  que  de  csta  igualdad  resultan  grandes  ventajas  ? 
Sin  duda  alguna,  y  seria  do  desear  que  en  todo  el  mundo  se  bablase  la 
misma  lengua,  bubiese  la  misma  moneda,  pesas  y  medidas,  y,  tanto  como 
el  clima,  las  costumbres  y  otras  circunstancias  lo  permitiesen,  las  mismas 
leyes. 

10.  Tambien  me  ban  dicbo  que  bay  en  Espafia  varias  clases  de  socie- 
dad;  ^no  es  asi?  Si,  sefior;  pero  eso  succdc  en  todas  las  naciones  del 
mundo. 

11.  No  en  los  Estados  Unidos.  V.  t6  que  aqui  no  se  dan  titulos  do 
nobleza,  no  bay  diferencia  en  el  traje,  y  decimos  Mr.  Jobnson,  bablando  del 
presidente,  and  Mr.  Jobnson,  bablando  de  un  carnicero,  y  el  mismo  Presi- 
dente  Jobnson  era  antes  sastre,  de  modo  que  la  igualdad  existe  en  las 
pcrsonas  como  en  las  cosas. 

12.  No  olvide  V.,  sin  embargo,  que  Dios  no  ba  becbo  dos  cosas  ignales 
en  el  mundo,  y  que  los  bombres  son  quiza  mas  desigualcs  entre  si  que 
las  mismas  cosas. — Concedido,  y  no  bay  cosa  que  mas  ridicula  me  parezca 
que  las  lavanderas  vestidas  de  sefioras,  y  los  roicdies  del  Bowery  afectan- 

^do  ser  caballeros. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  meet  tbem  as  you  were  going  in,  or  as  you  vrcrc  coming 
out  ?    As  we  were  going  in. 


LESSON     LVI, 


299 


2.  What  is  the  name  of  that  province  in  Spain  in  which  they  speak 
the  Oatalonian  language  or  dialect  ?     Catalonia. 

3.  In  which  province  do  they  speak  the  Basque  ?  In  the  three  Bas- 
que provinces. 

4.  And  do  these  dialects  differ  very  materially*  from  the  Castilian 
language?  Yes,  very  materially;  in  general  they  are  more  like  the 
French  than  the  Spanish. 

5.  Have  you  ever  heard  the  Spanish  name  for  the  natives  of  Galicia  ? 
Yes,  sir,  for  I  am  weU  acquainted  with  several  Galicians  living  in  New 
York. 

6.  Can  you  tell  me  the  weights  and  measures  principally  used  in  the 
Peninsula  {Pemnsula)  ?  The  principal  weight,  entirely  different  from  all 
those  of  the  United  States,  is  the  arrdba. 

7.  How  many  Isabellas  have  there  been  on  the  throne  of  Spain? 
Two ;  the  fii'st  was  Isabella  the  Catholic,  and  the  present  queen  is  Isa- 
bella II. 

8.  By  what  event  is  the  reign  of  Isabella  the  Catholic  distinguished 
from  all  other  reigns  ?  By  tlie  discovery  of  America  by  Christopher 
Columbus  {Crhtobal  Colon\  in  the  year  1492. 

9.  Was  there  not  some  other  very  important  event  that  occurred  about 
the  same  time?  Ah!  yes;  at  the  commencement  of  that  queen's  reign ; 
you  mean,  I  suppose,  the  conquest  of  the  Arabs,  and  union  of  the  crown 
of  Castile  and  Aragon. 

10.  Are  railroads  very  common  in  the  Peninsula?  Xot  so  common  as 
in  other  European  countries ;  but  of  late  years  the  spirit  of  enterprise 
seems  to  bo  revived  in  Spain,  and  to  the  few  which  now  exist  we  shall 
soon  see  a  large  number  of  others  added. 

11.  Let  us  sit  down  and  rest  for  half  an  hour,  for  I  am  very  tired,  and 
you  must  be  so  too. 

12.  How  beautiful  the  sky  looka  (is)  to  night !  That  is  true  ;  but  how 
it  rained  all  day ! 

13.  How  long  has  that  newspaper  been  published?  Ten  years,  for  it 
was  established  (founded)  in  1856. 


LESSON    LVI, 


Apreciar. 
Apresurar. 
Favorecer. 
Invitar. 


To  appreciate. 
To  haste. 
To  favor. 
To  invite. 


*  Muclio. 


300 


LESSON     LVl. 


Apreciable. 

Appreciable. 

Corriente. 

Current,  fluent. 

Estimado. 

Esteemed. 

Escelentisimo. 

Very  (or  most)  excellent. 

Favorecida. 

Favored. 

Invariable. 

Invariable. 

Intirao. 

Intimate. 

Fino. 

Fine. 

Servidor. 

Servant. 

Mercantil. 

Mercantile. 

Comercio.        Commerce, 

trade. 

Atencion.               Attention. 

Corazon.           Heart. 

Correspondencia.  Correspondence. 

Convite.           Invitation, 

feast. 

Esquela.                 Note. 

banquet,  party. 

Formula.                Form,  formula. 

Formulario.      List  of  formulas. 

Expresion.             Expression. 

Eespeto.           Kespect. 

Estructura.            Structure. 

Sobrescrito.      Address. 

Intimidad.              Intimacy. 

Corresponsal.    Correspondent. 

Inicial.                   Initial. 

Giros.               Manner  (of  style). 

Eesidencia.           Eesidence. 

COMPO 

3ITI0K 

Sefior  D.  Jos6  Romero. 

Mr.  Joseph  Romero. 

Muy  Sr.  mio. 

Dear  Sir,  My  Dear  Sir, 

Muy  Sr.  nuestro. 

Dear  Sir. 

Muy  Sres.  mios. 

Gentlemen. 

Muy  Sres.  nuestros. 

Gentlemen. 

Senora  Da.  Isabel  Jimenez. 

Mrs.  Isabella  Jimenez. 

Muy  Sra.  mia. 

Madam. 

Muy  Sra.  nuestra. 

Madam. 

Hemos   recibido    su    ap'''*,  apreciable 

We  have  received  your  favor  (or  your 

(or  su  est^a,  estimada,  or  su 

favor^, 

esteemed  favor). 

favorecida). 

Las  de  V.  del  2  del  corriente  (pi 

•  cort«). 

Your  favors  of  the  2d  instant. 

4  del  pp^"  (proximo  pasado). 

4th  ult. 

Se  repite  a  las  ordenes  de  Y. 

■ 

S.  S.  S. 

(Su  seguro  servidor). 

Q.  S.  M.  B. 

^ 

Yours  very  truly. 

(Que  su  mano  besa). 

M.  De.  T 

Q.  S.  P.  B. 

(  To  ladies,  que  sus  pies  besa).  ^ 

LESSON     LVI. 


301 


Muy  Sr.  mio  y  amigo. 
TAi  querido  amigo. 

Mande  Y.  con  toda  franqueza  a  su  in- 
variable amigo  y  S.  S. 
El  Sr.  A.  De  L.  presenta  (or  ofrece)  su3 
respetos  al  Sr.  D.  I.  De  H.,  y  le  hace 
baber  que. 
Sr.  D.  Jose  Martinez, 

Del  Comercio  de  Madrid. 
Sres.  D.  Francisco  Sanchez, 

Hermanos  y  Ca.,  Cadiz. 

Senora  Da.  Teodora  Jimenez  y 
Arteta,  Calle  Mayor  N".  10, 

Zaragoza. 
Al  Ex°».  (Excelentfsimo), 

Sr.  D.  Juan  Yalero  y  Arteta. 
B.  L.  M., 

Al  Sr.  De  V. 

S.  s.  s., 

A.  Do  T. 


My  Dear  Sir  and  Friend. 

My  Dear  Friend. 

Command    with    freedom    your    true 

friend   and   faithful  servant. 
Mr.  A.  De  L.  presents  his  compliments 
to  Mr.  I.  De  H.,  and  begs  to  inl'orm 
him  that. 
Mr.  Joseph  Martinez, 

Merchant,  Madrid. 
Messrs.  Francis  Sanchez  Bros.  &  Co., 

Cadiz. 
Mrs.  Theodora  Jimdnez  y  Arteta, 
10  Mayor  Street, 

Saragossa. 
To    His    Excellency,   John  Valero    y 

Arteta. 
(Form  of  addressing  letters,  notes,  &c., 
to  persons  living  in  the  same  place  as 
the  writer.) 


EXPLANATION. 

270.  Epistolary  Cokrespoxdexce. — We  could  not,  with- 
out overstepping  the  limits  of  a  grammar,  give  hei'e  all  the 
terms  peculiar  to  mercantile  cori-espondence ;  those  desirous  to 
become  perfect  in  that  branch  may  consult  the  several  works 
written  on  the  subject,  among  which  we  particularly  recommend 
Mr,  De  Veitelle's  "Mercantile  Dictionary,"  published  by  D. 
Appleton  &  Co.  We  merely  give  here  the  general  forms  for 
beginning  and  ending  letters. 

In  addressing  persons  of  different  classes  of  society,  except 
those  having  titles,  letters  begin  as  follows : 

Muy  Sefior  mio. 

Muy  Senor  nuestro. 

Muy  Senores  mios.        ) 

Muy  Senores  nuestros,  f 

And  to  ladies : 

Muy  Senora  mia.  |      Madam. 

These  expressions  are  most  generally  abbreviated  thus : — 
Mui/  Sr.  mio;  Muy  Sr.  n^<'i  Muy  Sres.  mios ;  3fiiy  Sres.  n^'^'j 
Muy  Sra.  mia;  Muy  Sra.  w*"*;  3fuy  Sra^.  w^^^. 


My  Dear  Sir, 
Sir ;  Dear  Sir, 

Gentlemen. 


302 


LESSON     LVI. 


In  the  body  of  the  letter,  su  ap^^^  (su  apreciable),  or  su 
est^"-  (su  estimada),  or  sufavor^^  (su  favorecida) — carta,,  letter, 
being  understood — are  equivalent  to  your  favor  or  your  es- 
teemed letter. 

Such  expressions  as  these  are  translated  thus : 

Yours,  of  the  2d  inst. ;  4th  ult ;  Sth 
of  May,  &c. 


Las  de  Y.  del  2  del  cor*»  (corriente) ; 
4  del  pp^o  (proximo  pasado) ;  8  de 
Mayo,  etc. 


The  following  forms  are  employed  at  the  end  of  letters 


Se  repile  a  las  ordenes  de  Y., 

s.  s.  s. 

(Su  seguro  serridor). 
Q.  S.  M.  B. 

(Que  su  mano  besa). 
Manden  Yms.  cuanto  gusten  a 
S.  S.  S., 
Q.  S.  M.  B. 


I  am,  Dear  Sir, 

Yours  respectfully. 

Command  at  pleasure  your  faithful 
servant. 


To  a  lady,  the  form  is  the  same,  only  changing  the  letter 
M.  into  ^.,  thus.: 

s.  s.  s., 

Q.  S.  P.  B. 
(Que  sus  pi6s  besa). 


In  a  more  familiar  style  : 

Muy  Sr.  mio  y  amigo. 
Mi  querido  amigo. 

Mande  Y.  con  toda  franqueza  a  su 
invariable  amigo  y  S.  S. 


My  Dear  Sir  and  Friend. 
My  Dear  Friend. 

Command   with  freedom   your  true 
friend  and  faithful  servant. 


^qtielas,  notes,  are  also  written  in  Spanish,  as  in  English, 
in  the  third  person ;  as. 


El  Sr.A.  De  L.  presenta  (or  ofcece)  sus 
respetos  al  Sr.  Dn.  I.  De  H.,  y  le 
hace  saber  que,  etc. 


Mr.  A.  De  L.  presents  his  respects  to 
Mr.  I.  De  H.,  and  begs  to  acquaint 
him  that,  &c. 


The  most  usual  manner  of  addressing  letters  is : 

Sr.  Dn.  Jose  Martinez,  del  Comcrcio  de  Madrid. 
Sres.  Dn.  Fran"  Sanchez,  Hermanos  y  Ca.,  Cadiz. 
Sra.  Dna.  Teodora  Jimenez  y  Arteta,  Calle  Mayor  N°.  10. 
Al  Ex""  Sr.  D.  Juan  Yalero  v  Arteta,  Madrid. 


LESSON     LVI.  303 

In  the  city : 

TO  A   GENTLEMAN.  TO   A   LADY. 


B.  L.  M., 

Al  Sr.  D.  P., 

s.  s.  s., 

A.  T. 


B.  L.  P., 
A  la  Sra,  Da.  F.  V., 
S.S.  S., 
A.T. 


COXVERSATIOX  AXD  TERSIOX. 

1.  gLe  gusta  a  V.  cscribir  cartas?  Mc  gusta  escribir  a  mis  amigos 
intimos  ;  pero  me  gusta  mas  recibir  cartas  que  escribirlas. 

2.  Yo  no  s6  bien  el  ceremonial  6  formulario  de  cartas,  ^quiere  V. 
hacermo  el  favor  de  decirme  como  se  principia  una  carta  i  Con  mucho 
gusto,  pregiinteme  V.  aquello  que  no  sepa. 

3.  ^Como  se  principia  una  carta  dirigida  a  una  persona  cualquiera 
con  quien  no  tenemos  intimidad  ?  Si  es  un  caballero,  principiamos  con 
la  formula  de  Muy  Sr.  mio,  y  si  cs  una  sefiora  con  la  de  Muy  Seflora  mia. 

4.  ^  Y  para  acabar  ?  Escribiendo  a  un  caballero  solemos  decir  entre 
otras  muchas  expresiones,     "  Queda  de  V., 

s.  s.  s., 

Q.  S.  M.  B., 

Fulano  do  tal." 

5.  ^  Y  si  es  una  sefiora  a  quien  escribimos  ?  Lo  mismo,  solo  cambia- 
mos  la  inicial  de  mano,  M.,  en  la  inicial  de  pies,  P.,  asi, 

"Queda  de  v., 

s.  s.  s., 

Q.  S.  P.  B., 

Fulano  de  tal." 

6.  g  Y  cudndo  es  a  un  iutimo  amigo  ?  Entonces  es  mas  parecido  al  ingles 
y  principiamos  diciendo :  "  Querido  amigo,"  y  para  acabar,  cualquiera  de 
las  muchas  expresiones  que  se  usan,  como : 

"  Tu  amigo  que  te  ama  de  corazon, 

Fulano  de  tal." 

7.  ^Como  se  escriben  las  esquelas  de  invitacion,  etc.,  d  las  personas 
que  viven  en  la  ciudad  ?  Se  escriben,  como  en  ingles,  en  la  tercera  persona. 

8.  I  Quiere  V.  escribirme  una  esquela  invitandome  a  comer  ?  Si,  se- 
Oor,  vea  V.  asi :  "  Lqs  Sres.  De  V.  presentan  sus  respetos  a  los  Sres.  De 
T.,  y  les  suplican  que  les  hagan  el  honor  de  venir  a  comer  con  ellos  el 
mattes  a  las  cinco.     Liines,  Abril  8  de  1866." 

9.  Veamos  si  Y.  puede  responderme  en  espaCol. — Vea  V.,  "  Los  Sres. 
De  T.  se  apresuraran  a  acudir  al  amable  convite  de  los  Sres.  De  V.,  y  les 
presentan  sus  mas  finas  atenciones." 


804  LESSON     LVI. 

10.  Muy  bien,  muj  bien,  aliora  solo  falta  poner  la  dlreccion  (el  sobre). 
— Estando  las  personas  a  quien  me  dirijo  en  la  ciudad,  creo  que  el  sobres- 
crito  debe  ponersc  asi : 

B.  L.  M. 

Al  Sr.  De  V. 

s.  s.  s., 

A.  De  T. 

11.  jCree  V.  que  podro  abora  traducir  una  carta  mercautil  en  ingles? 
Si,  sefior,  y  escribirla  tambien,  puesto  que  V.  sabe  ya  la  estructura  de  la 
lengua,  ademas  de  poseer  uq  gran  niimero  de  sus  giros,  idiotismos  y  pala- 
bras  mas  necesarias ;  pero  todavia  tendra  V.  necesidad  de  acudir  al  dic- 
cionario,  porque  no  es  posible  introducir  en  una  gramatica  todas  las  pala- 
bras  y  frases  que  requiere  una  correspondencia  mercantil. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  ever  do  any  of  the  correspondence  in  your  office  {cscri- 
torio)  ?  Not  often,  for  I  do  not  know  how  to  write  letters  in  Spanish, 
and  the  greater  part  of  our  correspondence  is  carried  on  (llevar)  in  that 
language. 

2.  You  ought,  in  that  case,  to  make  that  branch  the  object  of  par- 
ticular study  for  a  time.  That  is  what  I  desire  to  do ;  and  I  woidd  be 
obliged  to  you  to  give  me  some  instructions  (imtruir)  in  the  forms  most 
observed  in  Spanish  houses. 

3.  I  shall  have  much  pleasure  in  showing  you  all  I  know  myself;  but 
as  I  have  never  been  in  business,  there  are  many  points  of  which  I  am 
ignorant  (ignorar). 

4.  Wliat  is  the  first  thing  to  write  in  a  letter?  In  Spanish,  as  in 
Eqglish,  the  date  is  generally  the  first  thing ;  it  is  written  thus : 

Cadiz,  October  1st,  1866. 
6.  What  comes  next  ?     The  name  and  residence  of  the  person  we  are 
writing  to,  thus : 
Messrs.  Lafuente,  Soxs  &  Co.,  Malaga : 

6.  So  far  there  is  little  difference  between  the  two  languages.  Yery 
little ;  we  next  go  on  to  say  {luego  se  pone)  : 

Gentlemen  (or  Sir,  or  My  Dear  Sir,  or  Dear  Sirs,  or,  if  we  write  to  a 
^  lady.  Madam)  : 

7.  Ah !  there  I  observe  a  decided  difierence  :  is  that  tlie  form  always 
followed  for  commencing  letters  ?  For  business  letters,  yes ;  but  for  fa- 
miliar correspondence,  we  have  many  others ;  indeed,*  they  are  mostly 
always  suited  to  the  taste  of  the  writer. 

8.  Be  good  enough  to  show  me  one  or  two.      "With  the  greatest 

*  El  heclio  es. 


LESSOK     LVII. 


305 


pleasure :  My  Dear  Friend :  My  Very  Dear  Alexander :  Esteemed  Fi-iend: 
My  Ever  Dear  Mother,  &c.,  &c.,  &c. 

9.  How  do  you  acknowledge  (acusar)  the  receipt  of  a  favor  ?  In  this 
manner  :  I  have  duly  received  your  esteemed  favor  (or  letter)  of  the  17th 
instant. 

10.  As  for  the  body  of  the  letter,  the  form  depends  entirely  on  the 
nature  of  the  business ;  and,  in  general,  aU  that  is  required  is  to  say  just 
what  is  necessary  and  nothing  more,  and  to  avoid  obscurity  (oscuridad), 
in  order  tliat  our  ideas  may  be  completely  understood  by  our  corre- 
spondent (corresponsal). 

11.  The  usual  manners  of  closing  a  letter  are  : 

I  am,  dear  sir, 

Your  most  obd't  ser't ;  or, 

I  am,  sir, 

Yours  very  truly. 

12.  And  for  familiar  letters : 
1  am,  dear  Charles, 

Your  true  friend  and  loving  cousin ;  or. 
With  kindest  expressions  to  your  brother. 

Believe  me  to  remain  your  ever  faithful  and  loving  friend. 


LESSON    LVII, 


Abalanzarse. 

Concordar. 

Cumplir. 

Conversar. 

Entregar. 

Escapar. 

Ilonrar. 

Participar. 

Eegir. 

Auxiliar. 

Honrado. 
Plural. 

Sinsnilar. 


To  rush,  to  spring. 

To  agree. 

To  fulfil,  to  keep,  to  do  (duty). 

To  converse. 

To  give,  to  hand,  to  deliver. 

To  escape. 

To  honor. 

To  participate,  to  partake. 

To  govern. 

To  help. 

Honest,  honored. 
Plural. 

Singular, 


308 

LESSON     LVII. 

Baron. 

Baron. 

Alhaja. 

Jewel. 

Cr6dito. 

Credit. 

Agudeza. 

Wit,  witty  say- 

Encargo. 

Commission, 

ing. 

charge,  order. 

Cocina. 

Kitchen. 

G6nero. 

Kind,  cloth. 

Confianza. 

Confidence. 

Empleo. 

Employment, 

Espada. 

Sword. 

office. 

Fuga. 

Flight. 

Plato. 

Plate,  dish. 

Gracia. 

Favor,      good 
graces. 

Numero. 

Number. 

Mania. 

•Mania. 

Eegimen. 

Regimen. 

Promesa. 

Promise. 

Tema. 

Theme,  exercise. 

Pretension. 

Pretension,  claim 

Diptongo. 

Diphthong. 

Concordancia. 

Concord,  agree- 

Trjptongo. 

Triphthong. 

ment. 

Varon. 

Man. 

Version. 

Version. 

Error. 

Error,  mistake. 

Tema. 

Whim. 

COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

Acordarse  con  alguno. 

Acordarse  de  alguno. 

Caer  4  la  plaza. 

Caer  en  la  plaza. 

Caer  de  la  gracia  de  alguno. 

Caer  en  gracia  4  alguno. 

Contar  una  cosa. 
Contar  con  una  cosa. 
Convenir  4  uno. 
Convenir  con  uno. 
Cumplir  con  uno. 
Cumplir  por  xmo. 
Dar  algo. 
Dar  con  algo. 
Dar  en  una  cosa. 
Dar  por  algo. 
Dar  credito. 
.  Dar  4  crddito. 
Dar  la  mano. 
Dar  de  mano. 
Dar  en  manos  de. 
Dar  con  el  pie. 
Dar  por  el  pie. 


To  agree  with  any  one. 

To  remember  any  one. 

To  front  on  the  square  (said  of  a  bouse). 

To  fall  in  the  square. 

To  fall  from  any  one's  favor  (or  good 

graces). 
To  get  into  any  one's  favor  (or  good 

graces). 
To  relate,  to  tell  a  thing. 
To  count  upon  a  thing. 
To  suit  (to  be  convenient  for)  any  one. 
To  agree  with  any  one. 
To  do  one's  duty  toward  any  one. 
To  act  in  the  place  of  any  one. 
To  give  any  thing. 
To  find  any  thing. 
To  be  obstinate. 
To  give  for  any  thing. 
To  give  credit,  to  beUevc. 
To  give  on  credit. 

To  give  the  hand  (or  to  shake  hands). 
To  lay  aside,  to  abandon. 
To  fall  into  the  hands  of. 
To  despise,  to  scorn,  to  make  light  of. 
To  overthrow. 


LESSON     LVII, 


307 


Dai-  fin  [or  cabo)  u  una  cosa. 
Dar  fiii  (le  una  cosa. 
Declai-arse  a  alguno. 
Deelararae  por  alguno. 

Dejar  hacer  algo. 
Dejar  de  hacer  algo. 
Dcsi)aecrse  alguna  cosa. 
Deshacerse  de  alguna  cosa. 
Disponer  su3  alhajas, 
Disponer  de  sus  alhajas. 
Echar  tierra  a  una  cosa. 

Echar  un  genero  en  tierra. 

Entender  una  cosa. 
Entender  en  una  cosa. 
Entregarse  al  dinero. 
Entregarse  del  dinero. 
Escapar  a  buenas. 
Escapar  de  buenas. 
Estar  en  alguna  cosa. 
Estar  sobre  alguna  cosa. 
Estar  h  todo. 
Estar  en  todo. 
Estar  con  cuidado. 
Estar  de  cuidado. 
Estar  en  si. 
Estar  sobre  si. 
Estar  con  alguno. 

Estar  por  alguno. 

Estar  en  hacer  alguna  cosa. 

Estar  para  hacer  alguna  cosa. 

Estar  por  hacer  alguna  cosa. 

Estar  alguna  cosa  por  hacer, 

Gustar  un  plato. 

Gustar  de  un  plato. 

Hacer  confianza  6  una  persona. 

Hacer  confianza  de  una  persona. 

Hacer  una  cosa  con  tiempo. 


To  bring  to  an  end,  to  finish. 

To  destroy. 

To  confide  one's  secrets  to  any  one. 

To  side  with  any  one,  to  declare  one's 

self  in  favor  of  any  one. 
To  let  any  thing  be  done. 
To  leave  any  thirg  undone. 
(Speaking  of  things)  to  be  destroyed. 
To  dispose  of  (or  part  with)  any  thing. 
To  arrange  one's  jewelry. 
To  dispose  of  one's  jewelry. 
To  forget  any  thing,  to  cast  it  into  ob- 
livion. 
To  throw  any  thing  on  the  ground  (or 

down). 
To  understand  a  thing. 
To  be  a  judge  of  a  thing. 
To  make  a  god  of  one's  money. 
To  receive,  to  take  charge  of  money. 
To  make  the  best  of  one's  escape. 
To  make  a  happy  escape. 
To  be  aware  of  any  thing. 
To  push  an  afiair. 

To  be  ready  for  whatever  may  come. 
To  pay  attention  to  every  matter. 
To  be  anxious,  solicitous. 
To  be  dangerously  ill. 
To  have  complete  consciousness. 
To  be  proud. 
To  be  with  any  one,  to  be  of  any  one's 

opinion. 
To  favor  any  one. 
To  be  resolved  (or  disposed)  to  do  any 

thing. 
To  be  about  to  do  any  thing. 
To  be  inclined  to  do  something. 
To  remain  to  be  done. 
To  taste  a  dish  (of  any  kmd  of  food). 
To  be  fond  of  a  dish. 
To  tell  a  secret  to  any  one. 
To  make  a  confident  of  any  one,  to 

trust  to  any  one. 
To  do  a  thing  at  one's  leisure  (so  as  not 

to  be  pressed  for  time). 


308 


LESSON     LVII. 


Hacer  una  cosa  en  tiempo. 
Hacerse  a  una  cosa. 
Hacerse  con  una  cosa. 
Hacerse  de  una  cosa. 
Ilallarse  algo. 
Ilallarse  con  algo. 

Ir  con  alguno. 


Ir  sobrc  alguno. 
Mayor  de  edad. 
Mayor  en  edad. 
Participar  una  cosa. 
Participar  de  una  cosa. 
Poner  una  cosa  en  tierra. 
Poner  una  cosa  por  tierra. 
Poner  con  cuidado. 
Poner  en  cuidado. 
Preguntar  a  uno. 
Preguntar  por  uno. 
Quedar  en  hacer  una  cosa. 
Quedar  una  cosa  por  hacer. 

Responder  una  cosa. 
Eesponder  de  una  cosa. 
Saber  d  cocina. 
Saber  de  cocina, 

Salir  con  una  empresa. 
Salir  de  una  empresa. 
Salir  a  su  padre. 
Salir  con  su  padre. 
Salir  de  su  padre. 

Sahr  por  su  padre. 
Ser  con  alguno. 
Ser  de  alguno. 
Ser  para  alguno. 
Tener  consigo. 
Tener  para  si. 
Tener  de  hacer  algo. 
Tener  que  hacer  algo. 
Tirar  la  espada. 


To  do  a  thing  in  time,  at  a  suitable  time. 

To  get  used  to  a  thing. 

To  get  (or  procure)  a  thing. 

To  provide  one's  self  with  a  thing. 

To  find  any  thing. 

To  be  in  possession  of  (or  have)  any 

thing. 
To  go  with  anybody,  to  be  of  any  one's 

opinion,  to  be  on  any  one's  side,  to 

listen  to  any  one. 
To  fall  upon  (or  attack)  any  one. 
To  be  of  age. 
To  be  older. 

To  communicate  any  thing  (to  another). 
To  participate  in  any  thing. 
To  lay  any  thing  on  the  ground. 
To  make  Uttle  of  a  thing. 
To  put  (or  place,  or  lay)  with  care. 
To  alarm,  to  give  anxiety. 
To  ask  any  one  (interrogate). 
To  ask  (or  inquire)  for  any  thing. 
To  agree  to  do  any  thing. 
To   remain  to   be  done  (speaking  of 

things). 
To  answer  something  (giving  an  answer). 
To  answer  for  any  thing. 
To  smell  (or  taste)  of  the  kitchen. 
To  be   skilful  in  (or  to   understand) 

cooking. 
To  carry  out  an  enterprise. 
To  give  up  an  enterprise. 
To  resemble  one's  father. 
To  go  out  with  one's  father. 
To  be  released  from  the  wardship  of 

one's  father. 
To  go  bail  for  one's  father. 
To  be  of  any  one's  opinion. 
To  belong  to  any  one's  party. 
To  be  for  any  one  (of  things). 
To  have  with  (or  about)  one. 
To  be  persuaded. 
To  be  going  to  do  any  thing. 
To  have  to  do  any  thing. 
To  throw  down  (or  away)  one's  sword. 


LESSON     LVII. 


309 


Tirar  dc  la  espada. 
Tratar  de  vinos. 
Tratar  en  vinos. 
Vender  al  contado. 
Vender  de  contado. 
Volver  a  la  razon. 
Volver  por  la  razon. 

Volver  en  razon  de  tal  cosa. 


To  draw  one's  sword. 

To  talk  about  wines. 

To  deal  in  wines. 

To  sell  for  cash. 

To  sell  on  the  instant. 

To  recover  one's  reason. 

To   stand  up  for  reason  (or  what  is 

right). 
To  retium  for  such  a  reason  (or  motive). 


EXPLANATION. 

271.  It  is  a  general  custom,  amongst  authors  of  Spanish 
grammars  and  Spanish  methods,  to  copy  entire  the  forty  pages 
devoted  by  the  Spanish  Academy  in  its  Grammar  to  a  list  of 
verbs  requiring  certain  prejiositions  after  them.  But  we,  not- 
withstanding our  most  profound  respect  for  the  body  just 
mentioned,  refrain  from  following  in  the  footsteps "of  our  pre- 
decessors, and  that  not  merely  on  account  of  the  useless- 
ness  of  the  list,  but  for  the  more  potent  reason  that  we  bilieve 
it  to  be  calculated  to  misguide  the  student  at  every  step.  An 
exaniple  : — Any  one  not  thorouglily  acquainted  with  Spanish 
syntax  would,  on  reading  the  very  first  article  in  the  list  above 
referred  to,  Abalanzarse  a  ?osjoc?/<7ros,  naturally  conclude  there- 
from that  the  verb  ahalanzar  governs  at  all  times  and  under 
all  circumstances  the  preposition  6.  Now  that  would  be 
absurd,  for  nothing  is  more  usual  than  to  see,  and  hear  the  ex- 
pressions : — Ahalanzar SQ  contra  {or  sobre)  su  enemigo,  abalan- 
zarse con  (or  sin)  Jicicio,  abalanzarse  para  sacicdir,  de  repente, 
&c.  And  so  of  all  tlie  other  verbs,  each  of  which  may,  accord- 
ing to  the  idea  to  be  conveyed,  govern  almost  any  preposition 
in  the  language. 

It  would  be  vain  to  attempt  to  give,  in  a  work  of  the 
nature  of  the  present  one,  a  complete  set  of  rules  for  determin- 
ing the  various  significations  of  every  verb  as  decided  or 
modified  by  the  attendant  preposition ;  but,  as  much  can  be 
done,  even  here,  toward  helping  the  student  through  the  most 
difficult  parts,  we  could  not  resist  giving  in  this  day's  Composi- 
tion a  list  composed  of  those  verbs  which  are  at  the  same  time 
of  most  frequent  occurrence  in  general  every-day  conversation, 


310  LESSON     LVII. 

and  susceptible  of  the  greatest  diversity  of  meaning,  according 
to  the  preposition  by  which  they  are  followed. 

Before  dismissing  this  subject  we  deem  it  convenient  to  re- 
mark that  a  large  number  of  English  vei'bs,  to  determine  the 
mearfing  of  which  a  preposition  is  indispensable,  are  rendered 
in  Spanish  by  a  verb  alone.     For  example  : 

To  go  down. 

To  come  in. 

To  go  out. 


Bajar. 

Entrar. 

Salir. 

Subir. 

Sacar. 

Partir. 

Caer. 


To  go  up. 
To  draw  out. 
To  set  out. 
To  fall  down. 


This  may  be  the  reason  why  many  Spanish  grammarians 
have  thought  that  in  Spanish  the  same  thing  does  not  exist. 
"We  regret  that  the  dimensions  of  our  book  do  not  allow  of  our 
giving  a  more  complete  list  in  corroboration  of  the  fact  that 
Spanish  verbs  too  enjoy  that  transition  of  signification  which 
is  so  frequent  in  English  verbs. 

CONVERSATION  AXD  VERSION.  ^ 

1.  2  A  que  lado  caen  las  ven tanas  de  su  cnarto  de  V.  ?  Tres  caen  a 
la  plaza  de  Madison  j  las  otras  tres  caen  d  la  calle  Veintc  y  cinco. 

2.  ^Le  cae  a  V.  en  gracia  ese  muchachito?  Si,  sefior,  porque  res- 
ponde  con  mucha  agudeza. 

3.  I  Puedo  contar  con  su  promesa  de  V.  ?  V.  puede  contar  con  ella, 
porque  yo  cumplo  siempre  lo  que  prometo. 

4.  iDsL  Y.  credito  a  todo  lo  que  oye?  !N"o,  senor,  a  m^uos  que 
conozca  las  person  as. 

5.  gDa  Y.  la  raano  a  aquel  pobre?  Si,  sefior,  porque  aunque  pobre 
83  honrado. 

6.  i  Ha  dado  Y.  fin  a  su  tarea?  Todavia  no  ;  pero  pronto  dare  de  mano. 

7.  Si  Y.  deja  esos  llbros  en  raanos  de  ese  muchacho,  pronto  dara  fin 
de  ellos. — Asi  lo  creo ;  pero  es  necesario  que  los  niflos  tengau  algo  para 
eutretenerse. 

8.  I  Como  lia  dispaesto  Y.  de  sus  alhajas  ?  Las  lie  guardado,  porque 
pude  encontrar  dinero  sin  venderlas. 

9.  I  Que  se  hizo  de  aquel  mal  negocio  cu  que  se  meti6  su  primo  de 
Y.  ?    Se  le  ha  echado  tierra,  y  nadie  se  acuerda  mas  de  61. 

10.  J  En  qu6  se  ocupa  su  amigo  de  Y.  ?    Entiende  en  vinos  ;  pero  es 
cosa  que  no  entiende. 


LESSON     LVII.  311 

11.  I  C6mo  ostu  su  esposa  de  V.  ?  EUa  csta  do  cuidado,  y  yo  con  cuidado. 

12.  jEsti'i  V.  en  hacor  aquel  ncgocio?    Estoy  para  baeerlo. 

13.  I  Queda  V.  en  hacer  ese  encargo  por  mi  ?     Qucdo  en  hacerlo  y 
pierda  V.  cuidado,  que  no  se  quedara  por  hacer. 

14.  jEs  V.  mayor  de  edad?     No,  seflor,  todavia  no;  pero  soy  mayor 
en  edad  con  respecto  a  mis  hermanos. 

15.  No  ponga  V.  eso  por  tierra. — No  lo  pongo  por  tierra,  Sino  en  tierra. 

16.  jPiensaV.  salir  con  su  empresa?    No,,  seflor,^ pero  pienso  salir 
pronto  de  ella. 

17.  I  Tii'6  ese  bombre  do  la  espada  ?    Tir6  de  la  espada,  porquo  la  sac6 ; 
pero  el  miedo  le  liizo  emprender  la  fuga  y  la  tir6.  • 

18.  Don  Juan,  ^le  gusta  a  V.  vender  al  fiado?    No,  sefior,  me  gusta 
vender  al  contado  y  de  contado. 

19.  ^Volvio  D.  Francisco  por  la  razon?    No,  seQt)r,  D.  Francisco  no 
ha  vuelto  a.  la  razon,  y  por  consiguiente  no  volvio  por  la  razon. 

20.  I  Se  acuerda  ese  hombre  con  su  esposa?    No,  sefior,  no  so  acuerdan. 

21.  I  Se  acuerda  V.  de  lo  que  le  dijo  a  V.  ayer  ?    No,  sefior,  lo  he 
olvidado. 

22.  I  Oonvieno  V.  ahora  conmigo  en  que  el  espafiol  es  mas  facil  que  el 
ingl6s  ?     Convengo  con  V.  en  ello. 

23.  jLe  conviene  a  V.  hacer  eso  ?     No,  sefior,  no  me  conviene. 

24.  •jDi6  V.  por  fin  con  lo  que  buscaba ?    No,  sefior,  todavia^no  lo  ho 
encontrado. 

25.  Este  hombro  ha  dado  en  la  tema  de  querer  aprender  sin  estudiar ; 
J  no  le  pareco  a  V.  quo  es  una  pretension  muy  ridicula  ?    Eidicuhsima. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Has  the  Baron  given  up  his  project  ?  He  told  me  he  would  like  to 
give  it  up,  if  he  could  do  so  honorably. 

2.  I  understand  ho  is  an  honorable  man  ?  Yes,  and  he  is  therefore 
respected  by  all  who  know  him. 

3.  Has  your  brother  come  to  an  agreement  with  that  dealer  for  the 
purchase  of  the  horse  he  was  speaking  of?  It  appears  not,  and  that,  on 
the  contrary,  ho  desu'es  to  get  ind  of  the  one  he  has. 

4.  Did  you  inform  the  merchant  of  the  order  you  received  fi-om  the 
West  ?     Not  yet ;  but  I  intend  to  let  him  know  of  it  this  very  day. 

5.  Does  that  woman  understand  cooking?  She  says  she  docs;  and 
she  handed  me  a  letter  from  a  lady  with  whom  she  lived  two  years. 

C.  Did  the  captain  draw  his  sword  as  soon  as  ho  heard  his  antagonist's 
reply?'  IIo  had  already  drawn  it;  but  when  ho  heard  the  reply  lie 
threw  down  his  sword,  and  ran  dfid  gave  his  hand  to  the  man  whoni,  a 
few  moments  before,  he  was  resolvW  to  kill. 


312 


LESSON     LVIII, 


7.  Has  your  brother  sent  you  the  books  he  promised  you  ?  Ko  and 
that  need  not  surprise  you,  for  I  can  never  rely  (count)  on  him  for  any 
thing. 

8.  That  is  to  say,  he  never  keeps  his  promise?  That  is  precisely 
what  I  mean  to  say. 

9.  Do  past  participles  always  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
subject  of  the  verb  ?  Yes,  always,  except  when  governed  by  the  auxili- 
ary to  have. 

10.  Are  there  not  some  participles,  past  and  present,  that  do  not  re- 
tain the  regimen  of  the  verbs  to  which  they  belong  ? — There  are  very 
many;  and,  if  you  like,  I  will  mention  some  of  them. — Be  good  enough 
to  do  so. 

11.  I  hope  you  have  provided  yourself  with  every  thing  necessary  for 
your  journey  ?  Every  thing,  except  one  or  two  articles  which  I  have 
been  unable  to  find. 

12.  How  do  you  advise  me  to  arrange  (dispose)  all  these  books  ?  I 
have  only  one  advice  to  give  you  in  the  matter,  and  that  is,  to  dispose 
of  them  as  quickly  as  you  can. 

13.  Would  you  like  to  taste  this  dish  ?  i^o,  thank  you,  I  am  not  fond 
of  it. 

14.  Is  he  not  of  your  opinion?  Not  at  all;  he  always  goes  (sides) 
with  his  father. 


LESSON    LYIII, 


Notar. 

To  note,  to  observe,  to  perceive. 

Cazar. 

To  hunt,  to  chase. 

Chancear. 

To  jest. 

Combinar. 

To  combine. 

Concertar. 

To  concert,  to  agree. 

Concluir. 

To  conclude,  to  finish. 

Enfriarse. 

To  cool,  to  get  (or  grow)  cold. 

Eucargar. 

To    charge,   to    commission,    to 

order. 

Flotar. 

To  float. 

Improvisar. 

To  improvise. 

Inspirar. 

To  inspire. 

Eepartir. 

To  divide. 

Saltar, 

To  leap,  to  jump. 

Trinchar. 

To  carve,  to  cut. 

Cobrar.     Brindar. 

To  collect.    To  tonst. 

LESSON     LVIII, 


313 


A  lo  lejos. 
A  euestas. 
A  la  espaflola. 
Atras. 


At  a  distance,  in  the  distance. 
On  one's  back,  on  one's  shoulder. 
In  the  Spanish  fashion. 
Backward,  ago,  behind. 


Blanco. 

White. 

Bonito. 

Pretty. 

Durable,  duradcro.               , . 

Durable. 

Elocuente. 

;^oquent. 

Galante. 

Gallant. 

Bello  sexo. 

Fair  sex. 

Magnifico. 

Magnificent. 

Negro. 

Black. 

Eodeado. 

Surrounded. 

Vacio. 

Empty.    - 

Abanico. 
Apetito.  ' 
Aficionada 

Baul. 

Buoy. 

Brindis. 

Carro. 

Oanasto. 

Conductor. 

Prctexto. 

Pefiasco. 

Embarcadero. 

Piropos  (pi.). 

Pasaje. 

Sitio. 

Salon. 

Vooabulario, 


Fan. 

Appetite. 
Amateur,  one 

fond  o£, 
Trunk. 
Ox. 
Toast. 
Car,  cart 
Basket. 
Conductor. 
Pretext. 
Rock. 
Ferry. 

Sweet  things. 
Fare. 

Place,  spot. 
Saloon. 
Vocabulary. 


Ala. 

Botella. 

Caza. 

Chanza. 

Cima. 

Colina. 

Dama. 

Imaginacion. 

Llave,  clave. 

Milla. 

Pechuga. 

Fuerza. 

Suerte. 

Tarea. 

Vocal. 

Voz. 

Sorabra. 

Elocuencia. 


Wing. 

BotUc. 

Hunt. 

Jest. 

Top,  summit 

HiU. 

Lady. 

Imagination. 

Key. 

Mile. 

Breast  (of  fowl). 

Force,  strength. 

Luck,  sort. 

Task. 

Vowel. 

Voice,  word. 

Shade,  shadow. 

Eloquence. 


COMPOSITION. 


Qucdamos   en   qae    saldriamos    a   las 

cinco. 
Este  oanasto  e3  superior  a  mis  fuerzas. 

A  la  salud  de  las  seiioras. 
14 


We  agreed  (or  appointed)  to  set  out  (or 

start)  at  five  o'clock. 
This  basket  is  more  than  I  am  able  to 

manage. 
To  the  health  of  the  ladies. 


314 


LESSON     LVIII, 


Decir  piropos  a  las  sefioritas. 
Sirvase  V.  pagar  al  conductor, 
i  Mire  V.  que  gracia ! 
i  Qu6  tal  le  gusta  (a  V.  ? 
Pongamos  los  canastos  a  la  sombra. 
La  subida  de  la  colina  con  un  gran 

canasto  a  cuestas,  me  ha  abierto  cl 

apetito. 
Me  alegro  dc  ver  a  V. 
Se  alegr6  de  la  noticia. 
Lo  siento  mucho. 

Me  pesa  mucho  saberlo. 

6  Cudntas  personas  caben  en  esta  igle- 

sia? 
No  cabiamos  todos  en  el  salon. 
jPuede   caber   en  tu  imaginacion  tal 

cosa? 
Cabe  mucho  en  este  baul. 
No  caber  de  pies. 
A  mi  me  cupo  en  suerte  vcnir   a  la 

America. 
No  caber  dc  gozo. 


To  say  sweet  things  to  the  young  ladies. 

Please  pay  the  conductor. 

Only  think  ! 

How  do  you  lilie  ? 

Let  us  set  the  baskets  in  the  shade. 

Coming  up  the  hill  with  a  large  bxsket 
on  my  back  has  sharpened  my  appe- 
tite. 

I  am  glad  to  see  you. 

He  was  rejoiced  at  the  news. 

I  am  very  sorry  for  it  {i.  e.,  I  feel  it 
much). 

I  am  very  sorry  to  know  it  (i.  e.,  it 
grieves  me  much  to  know  it). 

How  many  persons  does  this  church 
hold? 

The  saloon  could  not  hold  us  all. 

Can  such  a  thing  enter  your  imagina- 
tion ? 

This  trimk  holds  a  great  deal. 

To  have  no  room  to  stand. 

It  was  my  lot  to  come  to  America. 

To  be  overjoyed. 


EXPLANATION. 
IDIOMATIC  USE  OF  CEETAEf  TERES. 

272.  Aeegeakse. — The  verbs  to  be  glad  and  to  he  rejoiced 
at  are  translated  by  the  reflective  verb  alegrarsc,  as, 

Me  alegro  de  ver  a  V.  I      I  am  glad  to  see  you. 

Se  alegro  de  la  noticia.  |      He  was  rejoiced  at  the  news. 

273.  Sentir  and  pesae. — To  be  sorry  and  to  grieve,  are 
translated  by  these  verbs ;  as, 

I  am  very  sorry  for  it  (i.  c,  I  feel  it 
much). 


Lo  siento  mucho. 

Me  pesa  mucho  saberlo. 


I  am  very  sorry  to  know  it  {i.  e.,  it 
grieves  me  much  to  know  it). 

274.  Caber,  to  be  capable  of  containing,  &c. — This  verb 
is  employed  in  diflferent  manners  in  Spanish ;  as, 


6  Cuantas    porsonas    cabeji   en   esta 
ijclesia  ? 


How  many  persons  does  this  church 
hold  (or  is  it  capable  of  contain- 
ing)? 


LESSON     LVIII. 


315 


No  cabiamos  todos  en  el  salon. 
^Puede   caber   eu  tu  imaginacion  tal 

cosa? 
Cube  mucho  en  este  baul. 
No  caber  de  pics. 
A  mf  me  cujjo  en  suerte  venir   a  la 

America. 
No  caber  en  si. 
No  caber  de  gozo. 


The  saloon  could  not  hold  us  alL 
Can  such  a  thing  enter  your  imagina- 
tion? 
This  trunk  holds  a  great  deal. 
To  have  no  room  to  stand. 
It  was  my  lot  to  come  to  America. 

To  bo  well  satisfied  with  one's  self. 
To  be  overjoyed. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Buenos  dias,  seilores,  ^conquo  ya  todos  estan  Hstos?  Pues  no 
habiamos  de  estar,  si  son  ya  las  seis  y  quedamos  en  que  saldriamos  a  las 
cinco. 

2.  Habriamos  estado  aqui  de  los  primcros,  si  no  Imbiera  sido  que,  des- 
pues  de  haber  andado  dos  6  tres  manzanas,  echo  de  ver  mi  esposa  que 
habia  olvidado  la  Have  del  cuarto,  el  paraguas,  el  abanico,  y  yo  no  s6 
cuantas  otras  cosas  mas ;  pero  en  fin  ya  c&taraos  aqua,  i  cnando  partimos  ? 
Estamos  esperando  el  caiTo  que  va  al  cmbarcadero  de  la  calle  Treiuta 
y  tres. 

3.  SeHoras,  esten  Vds.  prontas,  porque  veo  venii*  el  can-o. — Don  Mar- 
tin, ayiideme  V.  a  Uevar  este  canasto,  porque  es  superior  a  mis  fucrzas. — 
Llamo  V.  a  Don  Pepito,  que  no  hace  mas  que  decir  piropos  a  las  seQo- 
ritas,  porque  yo  tengo  ya  dos  paraguas  y  tres  niilos  de  que  cuidar. 

4.  Don  Pepe,  V.  que  no  tiene  niilos,  ni  canastos,  etc.,  sirvase  V.  pagar 
al  conductor. — (;  El  diantre  del  bombre !  aliora  me  pesa  no  babei*  tomado 
un  canasto.) 

5.  jEl  pasaje  caballeros!  ^Cudntos  somos?  uno,  dos,  tres,  cuatro, 
caballcros ;  una,  dos,  tres,  cuatro,  siete  scCoras,  esto  es :  once  personas 
mayores  y  catorce  niuos. 

6.  Papa,  I  esta  muy  lejos  el  sitio  a  dondc  vamos  a  pasar  el  dia?  No, 
Luisita,  solamente  unas  diez  millas. 

7.  I  De  este  lado  6  del  otro  del  rio  ?  Del  otro,  desde  aqui  lo  puedes  ver. 

8.  ^  Ko  ves  alia  a  lo  lejos,  en  la  cima  de  aquella  colina,  una  casa  blanca 
en  donde  flota  la  bandera  americana  ?  Si,  seflor,  es  muy  bonito  sitio  y 
debe  tener  muy  buenas  vistas. 

9.  Cuidado  con  los  nifios  al  saltar  en  tierra,  no  se  caiga  alguno  al  agua. 
—I  Estan  todos  fuera  ?  g  No  se  ha  olvidado  nada?— No,  seflor.— Pucs  en 
marcha. 

'  10,  Don  Pepito,  tome  V.  ese  canasto,  y  cuidado  no  lo  deje  caer  y 
rompa  las  botellas  que  contiene. — ;  Hombrc,  por  Dios !  con  el  prctexto  de 
que  venia  con  las  manos  vacias,  me  ha  hecho  V.  pagar  los  carros  y  cl  va- 


316  LESSON     LVIII. 

porcito  por  veinte  y  tres  personas,  y  Jiliora  me  quiere  V.  hacer  cargar 
cou  el  canasto  del  vino. 

11.  Vamos,  Don  Pepito,  Uevelo  V.  aboi'a  Lasta  la  cima  de  aquclla  co- 
lina,  que  si  la  yuelta  li  casa  yo  me  encargo  de  llevarlo. — j  Mire  V.  que 
gracia !  a  la  vuelta !  que  es  lo  quo  quedara  de  una  doccna  de  botellas, 
despues  de  bcber  veinte  y  trcs  personas. 

12.  Nada ;  el  que  no  ayude  a  Uevar  Ids  canastos  no  participara.  de  su 
contenido. — Sres.,  repartamos  la  tarea ;  que  los  hombres  lleven  los  ca- 
nastos, las  mamas  a  los  nifios,  los  niQos  los  paraguas,  y  las  sefioritas  a 
Don  Pepito. 

13.  Da.  DelSna  i  qu6  tal  le  gusta  a  V.  este  sitio  ?  ;  Ob  !  es  delicioso ; 
i  que  vistas  tan  bonitas ! 

14.  Pongamos  los  canastos  a  la  sombra  de  ese  hermoso  arbol. — Si,  y 
pongdmonos  nosotros  tambien  a  la  sombra,  que  al  sol  liace  calorcito. 

15.  I'So  le  parece  a  V.,  Don  Enrique,  que  es  tierapo  de  poner  la  mesa? 
Asi  me  parece,  porque  la  subida  de  la  colina  con  un  gran  canasto  a 
cuestas  me  ba  abierto  el  apetito. 

16.  Sres.,  la  coraida  estti  en  la  mesa. — Sefloras,  ^qu6  es  lo  que  Vds.  di- 
cen  ?  ;  en  la  roesa !  i  Ah !  si,  ya  vemos,  sobre  un  gran  peflasco  a  la  sombra 
de  aquel  arbol  jmagnifica  idea! 

17.  Don  Pepito,  traiga  V.  un  par  de  sillas  mas,  que  faltan  para  dos 
sefloras.  Alia  voy,  jcdspita  con  las  sillitas!  cada  una  pesa  cienlibras; 
pcro,  eso  si,  son  durables,  no  baya  miedo  de  que  se  rompan. — Tomen 
Vds.  asiento,  sefloras. 

18.  Pase  v.,  Don  Martin,  primero.  No,  seflor,  despues  de  Y. — SeQo- 
res  sin  cumplimientos  que  se  enfi-ia  la  couiida. 

19.  ^Quien  quiere  sopa?  illombre,  sopa!  yo,  yo,  sirvame  V.  un 
plato,  Don  Enrique. 

20.  Poco  a  poco,  Don  Pepito,  en  el  campo,  no  tenemos  sopa. — Pues  yo 
crei  que  V.  me  la  ofrecia. — Yo  pregunt6  por  saber  quien  era  aficionado 
d  la  sopa. 

21.  Sellor  Don  Pedro  i  quiere  V.  bacerme  el"  favor  de  trincbar  eso 
polio  ?     Con  mucbo  gusto. 

22.  Da.  Margarita  i  voy  a  inandarle  a  V.  un  pedazo  de  pecliuga  ?  No, 
Bouor,  gracias,  raandeme  V.  el  ala  6  la  pierna,  que  me  gusta  mas. 

23.  Don  Pepito,  un  brindis,  vamos  un  brindis. — Excuseume  Yds., 
seuores,  yo  no  s6  hacer,  y  ra6nos  iinprovisar  brindis. 

24.  Pcro  hombre,  j  eso  dice  Y.  quo  es  tan  galante  y  elocuento  con  las 
damas !  ^  No  le  inspira  a  Y.  algo  el  hello  sexo  de  que  se  halla  Y.  ro- 
deado  ?    Pues  bien,  a  la  salud  de  las  sefloras. — Y  ^  porqu6  no  ? 


LESSON     LVIII.  317 


EXERCISE. 


1.  Has  the  baker  uot  come  yet?  You  are  in  a  jesting  mood  {Immor) 
this  morning ;  he  came  long  before  you  were  up. 

2.  Never  mind;  1  have  got  change  enough  to  pay  for  all. — You  arc 
too  late,  I  have  akeady  paid ;  the  conductor  has  no  time  to  vi^ait  half  au 
hour  collecting  the  fare  of  each  passenger. 

3.  Your  appetite  seems  to  be  a  little  better  to-day  than  usual ;  how- 
do  you  account  for  that  ?  Keally  you  flatter  my  appetite  beyond  what  it 
deserves ;  I  am  happy  to  say  that  it  is  at  all  times  in  excellent  order. 

4.  Do  you  not  find  it  good  exercise  to  climb  to  the  top  of  the  hill 
with  that  heavy  basket  on  your  arm  ?  The  fact  is  I  shall  have  to  give  it 
to  some  one  else  for  a  while,  for  my  strength,  is  not  equal  to  the  task. 

6.  I  wonder  whom  you  can  give  it  to;  you  see  that  we  have  each  of 
us  something  to  carry.  "WeU,  in  that  case,  I  must  change  with  some  one 
that  has  a  lighter  burden  {cargo)  than  my  own. 

G.  Does  not  John  intend  to  become  a  soldier  ?  He  does,  though  en- 
tirely contrary  to  the  will  of  his  father,  who  set  his  face  against  it  in  the 
most  determined  manner. 

7.  How  many  trunks  is  each  passenger  {pasajero)  allowed  to  keep 
■with  him  in  his  berth  {camarote)'i  Only  one,  supposed  to  contain  the 
articles  he  will  require  to  have  at  hand  during  the  passage. 

8.  Did  you  ever  go  to  a  lion-hunt  while  you  were  in  South  Africa  ? 
Several  times,  and  I  can  assure  you  it  is  a  most  interesting  and  exciting 
scene. 

9.  Did  you  go  there  entirely  for  pleasure  ?  No,  I  managed  to  com- 
bine business  and  pleasure,  otherwise  I  should  probably  never  have  seen 
that  country,  for  you  know  that  such  a  voyage  as  that  costs  a  great  deal 
of  money. 

10.  Did  they  drink  many  toasts  during  the  dinner?  A  good  many, 
and  the  first  one  I  proposed  was  to  the  fair  sex. 

11.  Nothing  surprising  in  that ;  I  know  it  would  scarcely  be  possible  to 
surpass  you  in  gallantry.  You  are  flattering  me  now,  for  the  ladies  agree 
on  all  hands  in  calling  you  the  most  gallant  young  gentleman  in  the 
country. 

12.  Just  try  if  yovu'  eloquence  Vv^ill  not  succeed  in  persuading  your 
young  friend  to  come  with  us  to-morrow.  With  all  my  heart;  but  un- 
fortunately he  does  not  speak  French,  and  you  know  how  much  my  elo- 
quence loses  in  English. 

13.  Does  the  art  of  pleasing  depend  on  what  we  do  and  what  we  say? 
It  does  not,  in  my  opinion,  depend  so  much  on  what  we  do  and  say  as  on 
how  we  do  things  and  how  wo  say  them. 


318 


LESSON      LIX. 


14.  Is  it  not  surprising  that  your  sister  has  not  yet  come  ?  I  believe 
she  has  gone  round  to  see  her  young  Spanish  friend  {fem.\  although  she 
left  me  but  half  an  hour  ago,  imder  pretext  of  having  to  write  a  letter. 

15.  Do  you  generally  dine  in  the  Spanish  fashion  at  home  ?  We  gen- 
erally eat  in  the  French  fashion,  notwithstanding  we  are  all  very  fond 
of  the  Spanish  manner  of  cooking. 


LESSON    LIX, 


Amenazar. 

Cojear. 

Oolgar. 

Corregir. 

Cubrir. 

Cubrirse. 

Descubrir. 

Descubrirse. 

Despedir. 

Definir. 

Durar. 

Eodar. 

Prestar. 

Veneer. 

Cosa  de. 

Capaz. 

Condicional. 

Cariredondo. 

Casero. 

Compafiero. 

Claro. 

Copulative. 

Generoso. 

Defectivo. 

Libre. 

Vulgar. 

Vistoso. 


To  menace. 

To  be  lame,  to  limp. 

To  hang. 

To  correct. 

To  cover. 

To  put  on  one's  hat. 

To  discover,  to  uncover. 

To  take  off  one's  hat. 

To  send  away,  to  put  away,  to 

give  up. 
To  define. 
To  last. 

To  roll,  to  run  on  wheels. 
To  lend. 
To  conquer. 


About. 

Capable,  able. 

Conditional. 

Eoundfaced. 

Household,  family,  domestic. 

Companion. 

Clear. 

Copulative. 

Generous. 

Defective. 

Free,  unembarrassed. 

Vulgar,  common,  usual. 

Showy. 


LESSON     LIX, 


319 


Asesino. 

Assassin. 

Barba. 

Beard,  chin. 

Aumento. 

Increase,  augmen- 

Carcajada. 

Burst  of  laughter 

tation. 

Decena. 

About  ten. 

Cerrojo, 

Bolt. 

Dehnicion. 

Definition. 

Campo. 

Field,  country. 

Evidencia. 

Evidence. 

Corredor. 

Broker. 

Espalda. 

Back. 

Dedo. 

Finger. 

Gana. 

Desire,  mind. 

Dialogo. 

Dialogue. 

Hoja. 

Leaf. 

Dolox-  de  costado 

.  Pain  in  the  side. 

Loteria. 

Lottery. 

Deseo. 

Desire,  wish. 

Llave. 

Key. 

Descuido. 

Carelessness. 

Pena. 

Difficulty,  pain. 

Grito. 

Shout. 

Pera. 

Pear. 

Gemido. 

Groan,  moan. 

Pobreza. 

Poverty. 

Pagare. 

Promissory  note. 

Pascua. 

Easter. 

Presidio. 

State-prison. 

Kodilla. 

Knee. 

Peral. 

Pear-tree. 

Vuelta. 

Turn,  change. 

P6same. 

Condolence. 

Posicion. 

Position, 

Premio. 

Prize,  premium, 
reward. 

Excusa. 

Excuse,  apology. 

Salto. 

Jump,  spring. 

Semblantc. 

Look. 

Trago, 

Draught,  drink. 

COMPOf 

3ITI0N. 

Su  pagaro  de  V.  cae  el  mes  que  viene. 

Le  ba  caido  la  loteria. 

Este  edificio  cae  al  {or  hacia  el)  Xorte. 

Mis  ventanas  caen  a  la  mano  derecha. 

Este  vestido  to  cae  bien. 

No  cay  6  en  la  cuenta. 

Ya  caigo  en  ello, 

Estar  al  caer. 

Caer  de  pies,  de  rodillas. 

Lo  doy  por  hecbo. 

Lo  dieron  por  libre. 

Me  doy  por  vencido. 

Le  dio  un  dolor  de  costado. 

La  lectura  de  ese  libro  te  dara  ganas 

de  dormir. 
Al  fin  dio  en  la  dificultad. 
Dar  los  buenos  dias. 
Dar  las  pascuas. 


Your  note  falls  due  next  month. 

He  has  won  a  prize  in  the  lottery. 

This  building  looks  toward  the  North. 

My  windows  are  on  the  right  hand. 

This  dress  fits  her  well. 

He  did  not  see  the  drift  (of  what  was 

said). 
Ah,  now  I  see ! 
To  be  about  to  take  place. 
To  fall  on  one's  feet,  on  one's  Icnees. 
I  take  for  granted  it  is  done. 
They  let  him  free, 
I  give  it  up. 

He  took  a  pain  in  his  side, 
Reading  this  book  will  put  you  asleep 

(or  make  you  sleep). 
Finally  he  fell  upon  the  difficulty. 
To  wish  one  good  day. 
To  wish  a  happy  Easter. 


820 


LESSON     LIX. 


Dar  el  pesame. 

Dar  la  enhorabuena, 

Dar  gritos. 

Dar  gemidos. 

Dio  una  carcajada. 

Dar  ii  comprender, 

Darsc  ;i  couoccr. 

Dar  una  vuelta. 

Dar  peua. 

Dar  gusto. 

Dar  gana. 

Dar  saltos. 

Di6  que  decir. 

Esto  no  dice  bien  con  aquello. 

El  bianco  dice  bien  con  el  azul. 

Su  vestido  dice  su  pobreza. 

El  semblante  de  Juan  dice  bien  sn  mal 

genio. 
Este  peral  echa  muchas  peras. 
Esta  planta  no  ha  ecliado  hojaSv 
He  echado  un  trago, 
Eclie  V.  la  Have  a  la  puerta. 
Echar  pie  a  tierra. 
Echar  d  cerrojo. 
Echarlo  ^juego  {or  ohanza). 
Hoy  echan  la  comcdia  nueva. 
Ha  echado  coche. 
Ecliar  a  presidio. 
Echar  por  los  campos. 
Echaron  a  correr. 
Lo  echo  todo  a  perder. 
Echar  a  rodar. 
No  echo  de  ver  este  defecto. 
g  Echa  V.  de  menos  algo  ? 
No,  senor ;  echo  de  m^nos  d  alguien. 
Me  ech6  a  dormir. 
Se  echo  a  reir. 
Se  echo  a  corredor. 
Lo  puso  de  patitas  en  la  calle. 


To  express  condolence. 

To  congratulate. 

To  give  shouts. 

To  utter  groans. 

He  burst  out  laughing. 

To  give  to  understand. 

To  make  one's  self  known. 

To  take  a  turn,  to  go  round. 

To  cause  displeasure. 

To  give  pleasure. 

To  have  a  mind  ;  to  take  the  notion. 

To  jump  about. 

He  left  room  for  talk. 

This  is  not  in  stiict  accordance  with 

that. 
White  goes  very  well  with  blue. 
Her  dress  tells  of  her  poverty. 
John's  bad  temper  is  pictured  on  his 

countenance. 
This  pear4ree  bears  a  great  many  pears. 
This  plant  has  not  had  any  leaves. 
I  have  taken  a  drink. 
Lock  the  door. 
To  dismount. 
To  draw  the  bolt. 
To  take  it  in  play  (or  in  jest). 
The  new  play  comes  out  to-night. 
He  has  bought  a  carriage. 
To  send  to  State-prison. 
To  set  out  across  the  fields* 
They  set  out  rimning. 
He  spoiled  all. 
To  send  rolling. 
I  do  not  perceive  the  defect. 
Do  you  miss  any  thing  ? 
No,  sir ;  I  miss  some  one. 
I  went  asleep. 
He  began  to  langb. 
He  became  a  broker. 
He  threw  him  into  the  street. 


EXPLANATION. 


275.  The  verbs  caer,  to  fall ;  dar,  to  give;  decir,  to  tell, 
or  to  say ;  echar,  to  throw  ;  differ  from  the  English  in  meanin!? 


LESSON     LIX.  821 

as  conveyed  by  the  sentences  "which  are  given  in  the  Composi- 
tion, and  to  which  we  refer  without  putting  them  here,  in  order 
to  avoid  repetition. 

There  they  are  to  be  found,  with  their  English  translations, 
which  is  the  only  explanation  they  admit  of. 

CO^^YERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Don  Gonzalo,  ^le  ha  caido  ii  V.  la  loteria?  No,  sellor;  pero  mi 
pagare  lia  caido. 

2.  Luisita,  ^quicn  ha  lieclio  esc  vcstido  que  to  cae  tan  Men?  Mi  mamd 
lo  corto  y  yo  lo  cosi., 

3.  ^No  sabo  V.  porqu6  mo  hacc  aliora  tantos  cumplimientos  Don  En- 
rique ?  No,  sefior,  no  s6  qu6  motivo  tenga  para  ser  ahora  mas  politico 
con  Y.  que  lo  ha  sido  hasta  aqui. 

4.  i  No  sabe  V.  que  me  ha  caido  cl  preraio  de  los  cien  mil  pesos  on  la 
loteria  de  la  Habana  ?     Si,  seiior ;  ya  me  lo  ha  dicho  V.  antes. 

5.  Pues  bien,  i  no  cae  V.  aliora  en  la  cuenta  ?  ;  Ua !  ya  caigo  en  ello, 
Don  Enrique  quiere  pedirle  li  V.  dinero  prestado. 

6.  I  Han  dado  las  doce  ?    Estan  al  caer. 

Y.  ^  Dieron  garrote  a  los  asesinos  ?  No,  sefior,  al  fin  los  dieron  por 
libres,  porque  no  habia  evidencia  suficiente  para  sentenciarlos. 

8.  2  Que  ha  teuido  su  hermano  de  V.  que  no  lo  he  visto  por  tanto 
tiempo  ?  Le  dio  im  dolor  de  costado  y  ha  tenido  que  guardar  cama  por 
una  scmana. 

9.  J  A  que  no  adivina  Y.  lo  que  acabo  de  hacer  ?  Seguramente  quo 
no  lo  adivinar6,  porque  Y.  es  capaz  de  hacer  muchas  cosasbuenas  y  nialas. 

10.  I  Se  da  Y.  por  vencido  ?    Me  doy. — Pues  vengo  de  echar  un  trago. 

11.  J  Que  comedia  eehan  hoy?  Hoy  dan  la  tragedia  de  "Medea,"  en 
donde  representa  la  Sefiora  Eistori ;  ^  ira  Y.  ? 

12.  Siendo  en  italiano  no  ire,  porque  no  comprendo  el  italiano  y  mo 
daria  ganas  de  dormir. 

13.  Sr.  D.  Alejandro,  vengo  a  darle  li  Y.  los  buenos  dias. — T6ngalos  Y. 
may  buenos. 

14.  ^  No  me  quiere  Y.  dar  alguna  otra  cosa  ?  Si,  sefior,  le  doy  d  Y.  la 
cnhorabuena  por  el  auraento  que  ha  tenido  Y.  en  su  familia. — ^Yiva  Y. 
mil  afios. 

15.  Todo  eso  es  muy  bueno,  D.  Pepito ;  pero  sea  Y.  generoso  y  deme 
Y.  alguna  cosita  mas. — Hombre,  si  Y.  no  se  da  a  comprender  yo  no  s6 
qu6  mas  darle  AY.  j  Ha !  si,  ya  caigo !  que  estaraos  en  tiempo  de.  .  .  . 
Doy  a  Y.  feliccs  pascuas. 

16.  Dale,  Dale,  si  no  es  eso,  yo  liable  del  dinero  que  presto  a  Y.  bace 

14^- 


322  LESSON     LIX. 

mas  de  un  alio. — jHa!  Seuor  D.  Alejandro,  no  crea  Y.  que  yo  lo  haja 
echado  en  saco  roto, 

17.  Pues  bien;  ^porque  no  me  lo  da  Y.  ?  jPorque!  hombre,  abora 
ha  dado  Y.  en  la  dificultad,  y  esta  es  que  yo  no  tengo  dlnero,  y  por  consi- 
guiente  no  puedo  darlo. 

18.  Ent6nces,  i  que  es  lo  que  Y.  puede  dar  ?  ;  0  !  en  cuanto  a  cso  yo 
puedo  dar  muchas  cosas. 

19.  ;  Ha !  me  alegro  mucbo,  veamos  lo  que  Y.  puede  dar. — En  primer 
lugar  puedo  dar  gemidos. 

20.  [Puf!  (pshaic). — Tarabien  puedo  dar  gritos. 

21.  [Dale! — Puedo  dar,     ....     que  decir. 

22.  No  lo  dudo. — Puedo  dar  un  p6f?ame. 

23.  ;Dio3  me  libre  ! — Puedo  dar  saltos. 

24.  Yaya  acabe  Y.,  hombre,  acab6  Y. — Puedo  dar  a  comprendcr. 

25.  Si,  eso  si,  demasiado  comprendo. — Puedo  darme  a  conocer. 

26.  Ya,  ya,  conozco  de  que  pie  cojea  Y. — Puedo  dar  una  vuelta. 

27.  Pues  vuelvase  Y.,  por  donde  ha  venido  y  nunca  de  Y.  mas  vueltas 
por  esta  casa.— Y  todavia  mas,  puedo  dar  una  carcajada. 

28.  i  Juan  !  Juan !  echa  a  ese  hombre  de  casa,  y  despues  echa  la  Have 
y  el  cerrojo  a  la  puerta.     ;  Ilaya  picai'O  I  lo  he  de  echar  a  un  presidio ! 

29.  I  Has  echado  a  ese  hombre  a  la  calle  ?  Si,  seflor,  ya  lo  puse  de  pa- 
titas  en  la  calle. 

30.  Y  I  qu6  dijo  ?  Primero  se  echo  d  reir,  yo  le  amenac6  que  lo  echaria 
a  rodar  y  ent6nce3  echo  a  correr. 

31.  El  diantre  del  hombre  siempre  esta  pidiendo  dinero  prestado  y 
sobre  no  pagarlo  se  viene  a  reir  de  uno  en  sus  barbas.— Sefior,  ^manda 
V.  alguna  otra  cosa  ?  No,  te  puedes  h\  yo  voy  a  echarme  a  dormir,  ese 
bx'ibon  me  ha  dado  un  gran  dolor  de  cabeza. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Is  there  any  thing  in  the  papers  this  morning  relative  to  the  trial 
of  the  murderer  of  Smith  ?  I  understand  his  trial  is  not  to  take  place 
before  a  month  from  this  time. 

2.  Why  did  you  not  bring  your  friend  with  you  ?  He  is  not  able  to 
walk  very  far  to-day,  owing  to  a  pain  in  his  side,  which  has  troubled  him 
for  the  last  three  days. 

3.  Did  you  tell  the  servant  to  draw  the  bolt  of  the  door  ?  No,  but  I 
told  him  to  lock  the  door. 

4.  Who  is  that  I  hear  groaning?  You  hear  no  one  groaning;  it  is 
some  one  shouting  in  the  distance. 

5.  How  did  your  cousin  lose  his  situation  ?  He  owes  that  misfortune 
entirely  to  his  own  carelessness. 


LESSON     LX. 


323 


6.  Charles,  arc  you  not  going  to  say  good  morning  to  that  gentleman  ? 
I  need  not  say  good  morning  to  him  now,  for  I  have  already  wished  him 
a  happy  Easter. 

7.  Did  that  merchant  pay  his  correspondent  at  Malaga  after  all?  He 
did  not  pay  him ;  hut  he  gave  him  a  note  at  three  months. 

8.  What  do  you  understand  hy  parlor  phiys  (household  comedies)  in 
Spain  ?  They  are  plays  represented  hy  private  individuals*  sometimes  in 
private  houses,  from  which  circumstance  they  take  their  name. 

9.  Do  you  know  that  roimd- faced  little  man  who  is  sitting  next  to 
your  uncle  ?  That  is  one  of  the  principal  actors  {actor)  in  the  parlor 
plays  given  at  Mr.  Gutierrez'. 

10.  What  became  of  the  offender?  The  evidence  not  being  sufficient 
to  pi'ove  the  crime  of  which  he  was  accusedfhe  was  let  off;  otherwise 
he  would  have  been  sent  to  State-prison. 

11.  Did  they  refuse  to  give  him  the  things  he  wanted  on  credit  ?  Of 
course  they  did,  because  no  one  can  rely  on  him  nor  give  credit  to  any 
thing  he  says. 

12.  Will  that  young  man  probably  obtain  the  employment  he  has  ap- 
plied for  ?  Most  probably  he  will,  because  he  has  had  the  good  fortune 
to  get  into  the  president's  favor. 

18.  How!  do  you  not  attend  your  classes  this  week?  No,  I  am  not 
very  well ;  and  so  a  friend  of  mine  was  good  enough  to  offer  to  act  in 
ray  place. 

14.  Was  the  error  corrected  before  the  letter  was  dispatched  ?  No,  it 
was  not  discovered  in  time  to  be  corrected. 


LESSON    LX. 


Dccidir. 

Ejecutar. 

Ejercer. 

Ensuciar. 

Enemistar. 

Escuchar. 

Exagerar. 

Exhibir. 

Extrafiar. 

Enfriarse. 


*  Aficionados. 


To  decide. 
To  execute. 
To  exercise. 
To  dirty,  to  soU. 
To  put  at  enmity. 
To  listen  to,  to  hearken  to. 
To  exaggerate. 
To  exhibit. 

To  wonder  at,  to  find  strange. 
To  grow  cold,  to  got  (become) 
cold. 

t  Acnsar. 


324 


LESSON     LX. 


Encargan 

Esclamar. 

Exceptuar. 

Esforzar. 

Estrechar. 

Sospechar, 

Tardar. 


Atolladero. 

Camino. 

Astr6nomo. 

Colera, 

Com  eta. 

Cofi-e. 

Cajon. 

Capriclio. 

CueUo. 

Cargo, 

Exterior. 

Extranjero. 

Embarcadero. 

Espejo. 

Estrecho. 
Elemento. 
Gobernador. 
Grado. 


To  commission,  to  order,  to  give 

charge. 
To  exclaim. 
To  except. 

To  endeavor,  to  make  effort. 
To  press. 
To  suspect. 
To  delay. 


Extra. 
Empero. 

Extra. 
But. 

Eliptico. 

Agrio. 

Estrecho. 

Preciso. 

Elocuentc, 

Tonto. 

Travieso. 

Elliptical. 

Sour. 

Close,  narrow. 

Essential,  indispensable,  precise 

Eloquent. 

Foolish,  stupid. 

Mischievous. 

Entrambos. 
Entretanto. 
Excepto. 

Both. 

In  the  mean  time. 

Except. 

IXfficultj. 
Eoad,  way. 
Astronomer, 
Cholera. 
Comet. 
Chest. 

Drawer,  box. 
Caprice. 
Neck. 

Cargo,  charge. 
Exterior,  outside. 
Foreigner. 
Landing. 
Mirror,  looking- 
glass. 
Strait. 
Element, 
Governor. 
Grade,  degree. 


Casaca. 

Colocacion. 

Civilizacion. 

Colera. 

Corte, 

Cometa. 

Cita. 

Charla. 

Claridad. 

Compaiiia. 

Caja. 

Cartilla. 

Calentura. 

Casualidad. 

Cantidad. 

Capa. 

Cara. 


Coat,  dress-coat. 
Situation. 
CiviUzation. 
Anger. 
Court. 
Kite. 

Appointment. 
Chat. 
Clearness. 
Company. 
Box,  case,  cash 
{commercial). 
Primer. 
Fever. 
Chance. 
Quantity. 
Cloak. 
Face. 


LESSOK     LX, 


325 


Homo. 

Oven. 

Carga. 

Charge  (of  a  gun, 

Luto. 

Mourning. 

&c.). 

Litre. 

Litre* 

Cuchara. 

Spoon. 

Katemdtico. 

Mathematician. 

Culpa. 

Fault,  blame. 

Tonel. 

Cask. 

Criatura. 

Creature,  infant. 

Termumctro. 

Thermometer. 

Costa. 

Cost,  coast. 

Fcrro-carril. 

Railroad. 

Disculpa. 

Apology. 

Fruto. 

Fruit  (result). 

Estacion. 

Season. 

Fondo. 

Bottom. 

Existencia. 

Existence. 

Fluido. 

Fluid. 

Fragata. 

Frigate. 

Mascara. 

Mask. 

Tontera. 

Foolish  action. 

Pretension. 

Pretension, 
claim. 

Yerba. 

Grass. 

COMPOSITIOX. 


Hoy  entra  la  primavera. 
Manana  entra  el  mes  de  Octnbre. 

Entra  en  el  numero  de  los  sabios. 

Entro  a  reinar  a  los  quince  aiios. 

Este  tonel  bace  cien  litres. 

No  le  hago  tan  tonto. 

Yo  le  hacia  mas  rico. 

Haz  per  veiiir. 

Hace  de  gobeniador. 

Esa  pobrc  muchacba  estii  haciendo  de 

madre  a  sus  hermanos. 
A  eso  voy. 
Voy  de  paseo. 
Van  de  mdscara. 
Va  de  luto. 
Le  va  en  cllo  la  vida. 
Vengo  en  cllo. 

i  Cuanto  me  lleva  V.  por  csto  ? 
Estos  do3  amigos  se  llevan  muy  bien. 

No  nos  lleramos  bien. 
Este  camino  lleva  a  Madrid. 
Le  Ilevo  do3  afios  y  medio. 
Me  lleve  chasco. 


Spring  commences  to-day. 

The  month  of  October  commences  to- 
morrow. 

He  is  of  the  number  of  the  learned. 

He  began  to  reign  at  fifteen  years  of  age. 

This  cask  holds  100  Utres. 

I  do  not  take  him  for  such  a  fool. 

I  took  him  to  be  richer. 

Try  to  come. 

He  is  acting  as  governor. 

That  poor  girl  is  acting  the  part  of  a 
mother  to  her  brothers  and  sisters. 

That  is  the  point  I  am  coming  to. 

I  am  going  for  pleasure. 

They  arc  going  in  masks. 

He  is  in  mourning. 

His  life  is  at  stake. 

I  agree  to  that. 

How  much  will  you  charge  rac  for  this  ? 

These  two  friends  agree  very  well  to- 
gether. 

We  do  not  agree  well  together. 

This  road  leads  to  Madrid. 

I  am  two  years  and  a  half  older  than  he, 

I  was  disappointed. 


*  Eqnal  to  2.113  American  pints. 


326 


LESSON     LX, 


Lleva  una  casaca  a  la  francesa, 

Se  liizo  a  la  vela. 

Manda  que  nos  traigan  el  almuerzo. 

Hare  que  nos  I9  traigan. 

6  Hace  V.  tenir  su  vestido  de  azul  ? 

No,  senor,  lo  ho  mandado  tenir  de  verde. 

Saldrd  buen  matcm^tico. 

Salio  muy  travieso. 

Ya  he  salido  de  todos  mis  granos. 

Me  salio  una  buena  colocacion. 

Este  negocio  me  ha  salido  bien. 

Lc  salio  mal  su  empresa. 

Este  nino  ha  salido  a  su  padre. 

Salio  de  la  regla. 

Pronto  saldre  de  hijo  de  familia. 

Esta  capa  me  sale  en  cincucnta  pesos. 

Se  salio  con  su  pretension. 

Sirve  al  rey. 

No  sirve  para  nada. 

Sirvase  V.  admitir  mis  disculpas. 

El  tarda  mucho  en  decidir. 

J  Cuanto  tarda  en  responder ! 

i  Adios  !     Volvere  a  ver  a  V.,  y  le  vol- 

ver6  a  hablar  de  esc. 
Este  vino  sc  vuelve  agrio. 
Se  volvera  bueno  con  el  tiempo. 
Este  melon  sabe  a  melocoton. 
Este  vino  huele  h  vinagre. 
D.  Juan  hace  un  gran  papel  en  la  corte. 
Napoleon  III  hace  un  gran  papel  en  la 

politica  del  mundo. 


He  wears  a  coat  made  in  the  French 
fashion. 

He  set  sail. 

Order  the  breakfast  to  be  served  up. 

I  shall  have  it  brought  to  us. 

Are  you  getting  your  dress  dyed  blue  ? 

No,  sir,  I  have  ordered  it  to  be  dyed 
green. 

He  shall  turn  out  (to  be)  a  good  mathe- 
matician. 

He  (or  she — the  child)  turned  out  very, 
naughty. 

I  have  got  rid  of  all  my  grain. 

A  good  situation  turned  up  for  me. 

This  business  has  turned  out  well  for  me. 

His  undertaking  turned  out  badly. 

This  child  resembles  his  father. 

He  departed  from  the  rule. 

I  shall  soon  be  of  age. 

This  cloak  cost  me  fifty  dollars. 

He  obtained  what  he  desired. 

He  serves  the  king. 

It  is  good  for  nothing. 

Be  good  enough  to  accept  my  apology. 

He  is  slow  in  deciding. 

How  long  he  is  in  answering ! 

Good-by !  I  shall  see  you  again,  and 
talk  more  to  you  on  the  subject. 

This  wine  is  turning  sour. 

It  will  become  good  again  in  time. 

This  melon  has  the  taste  of  a  peach. 

This  wine  smells  of  vinegar. 

John  makes  a  great  noise  at  court. 

Napoleon  III.  plays  a  great  part  in  the 
politics  of  the  world. 


EXPLANATION. 

276.  In  the  Composition  of  this  lesson  we  give  tlie  princi- 
pal idioms  with  the  verbs  entrar,  to  go  (or  come)  in  ;  haeei\  to 
do,  to  make;  ^>,  to  go;  llevai\  to  take,  to  charge;  mandar, 
hacer^  in  the  sense  of  to  order,  to  cause  to  be  done ;  oler  a,  to 
to  smell  of;  and  saber  a,  to  taste  of;  salir,  servir,  tardar  and 
volver. 


LESSON     LX.  '  327 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 


1.  gCuando  entra  la  primavera?  Debo  confesar  francamente  que  no 
s6  el  dia  precise  en  que  entra  y  sale  cada  estacion. 

2.  Entonces  V.  no  entra  en  el  niimero  do  los  sabios,  puesto  que  no 
sabe  cuando  cstamos  en  invierno  y  cuando  en  verano. — Poco  a  poco, 
sefior  Don  Pedro,  eso  seria  hacerme  eatrar  en  el  numero  de  los  idiotas. 

3.  I  Pues  no  acaba  V.  de  decirlo  ?  Yo  acabo  de  decir  que  no  s6  el 
dia  preciso  en  que  entra  cada  estacion ;  pero  cuando  veo  crecer  la  yerba 
y  las  hojas  de  los  arboles,  y  abrirse  las  flores,  sospecho  que  estamos  en  la 
primavera. 

4.  i  Ha !  V.  sospecba !  Vamos,  ya  es  algo. — Si,  sefior,  y  del  misrao 
modo,  cuando  veo  el  terraometro  en  la  sombra,  que  marca  98°,  creo 
•adivinar  que  estoy,  una  de  dos,  6  en  un  homo  6  en  Nueva  York  en  la 
estacion  del  verano. 

5.  Vamos,  yo  le  hacia  d  V.  mas  ignorante  de  lo  que  en  efecto  es; 
Ij  como  adivina  V.,  6  sospecha,  que  se  encuentra  V.  en  el  otofio? 
Cuando  los  melocotones  so  acaban  y  las  hojas  caen. 

G.  j  Bien !  bien !  e  y  el  invierno  ?  Cuando  por  la  maflana  no  puedo 
lavarme  por  hallar  que  se  ha  helado  el  agua  en  la  palangana. 

7.  Ya  veo  que  es  V.  un  sabio  perfecto.  Veamos  en  historia  j  a  que 
edad  entro  a  reinar  el  Rey  Pepino  ? — jCaspita!  Sefior  Don  Pedro!  es 
mas  fiicil  criticar  que  ejecutar,  y  mas  facil  hacer  preguntas  que  respon- 
derlas,  y  sino  resp6ndame  V.  que  la  echa  de  sabio. 

8.  ^  Cuiintos  litros  liace  ese  toncl  ?  \  Ilombre  I  yo  ^  qu6  he  de  entcnder 
de  medir  toneles  ? 

9.  Pues  cambiare  de  materia,  ^quien  hace  de  gobcrnador  en  Manila? 
J  Y  a  mi  qu6  me  importa ! 

10.  1  Vaya!  ese  es  un  buen  modo  de  salir  del  atolladcro. — No,  sefior,  sir- 
vase  V.  recibir  mis  disculpas,  tengo  que  irme  ahora,  pero  volver6  d  vcr  a 
v.,  y  volveremos  a  ti-atar  de  esa  materia.     Adios,  sefiores. 

11.  iQue  le  parece  a  V.,  Don  Enrique,  de  ese  caballero?  Me  parece 
que  este  j6ven  saldra  buen  matematico,  porque  ha  salido  en  todo  a  su 
padre. 

12.  I  Sabe  V.  si  salio  bien  6  mal  de  su  cmprcsa  ?  Es  un  negocio  que 
le  ha  salido  muy  bien, 

13.  I  Se  lleva  bien  Luisa  con  sus  hermanos  ?  Si,  sefior,  y  aunque  no  Ics 
Ueva  mas  de  tres  6  cuatro  afios,  les  sirve  de  madre. 

14.  jCudnto  le  cuesta  a  V.  esa  capa?  Me  sale  en  unos  cincuenta 
pesos, 

15.  I  Cuanto  tardard  la  fragata  en  hacerso  d  la  vela  ?  Xo  s^,  creo  que 
el  capitan  es  hombre  que  tarda  en  decidirse. 


328  LESSOK     LX. 

IG.  gDo  qu6  color  liaco  V.  toilir  su  vestido?  Lo  mande  tefiir  de 
amarillo. 

17.  Don  Manuel,  raande  V.  que  nos  suban  el  almuerzo. — Ilarc  que  no3 
lo  traigan. 

EXERCISE. 

1 .  "When  does  Spring  commence  ?  It  commences  in  Marcli  and  ends 
in  May. 

2.  Has  your  young  friend  passed  Lis  examination  yet  ?  The  exami- 
nations have  not  taken  place ;  but  when  they  do,  he  will  prove  to  be  the 
best  Spanish  scholar  in  the  country. 

3.  In  what  month  does  the  cold  weather  generally  commence  in  the 
North  of  Spain  ?     Winter  usually  sets  in  about  the  middle  of  November. 

4.  How  much  does  this  cask  hold  ?     It  holds  from  100  to  120  litres. 

5.  How  soon  do  you  set  out  for  Europe  ?  As  soon  as  the  fine  weather 
sets  in. 

6.  Are  you  going  on  business,  or  for  pleasure  ?    For  pleasure  only. 
v.  How  are  they  going  to  the  ball  ?     They  are  going  in  masks. 

8.  How  much  did  your  tailor  charge  you  for  that  coat  ?  It  cost  mo 
forty-five  dollars. 

9.  What  age  do  you  take  my  cousin  to  bo  ?  I  would  take  him  to  be 
about  the  same  ago  as  his  friend. 

10.  You  had  better  guess  again.     I  give  it  up. 

11.  How  old  is  he,  then  ?  He  is  two  years  and  four  months  older  than 
his  friend. 

12.  Do  you  know  whether  the  pianist's  brother  succeeded  in  obtaining 
the  position  he  applied  for?  He  did  not;  but  an  excellent  situation 
turned  up  for  liim  a  short  time  after. 

13.  How  long  will  you  take  to  dye  this  dress  for  me  ?     About  a  week. 

14.  What  color  do  you  wish  it  to  be  dyed  ?  I  wish  to  have  it  dyed 
blue. 

15.  Do  you  think  this  boy  Avill  turn  out  to  be  as  good  a  musician  as 
his  father  ?  I  have  not  the  least  doubt  about  it,  for  he  resembles  him  in 
every  respect  {en  todo). 

16.  Be  good  enougli  to  accept  my  apology  for  not  having  come  yester- 
day as  I  had  promised.  Certainly,  sir;  I  know  very  well  that  you  have 
a  great  deal  of  business  to  attend  to. 

17.  Who  is  Mr.  Terrero  in  mourning  for?  For  his  uncle,  who  died 
about  a  year  ago  in  Manila. 


LESSON    LXI. 


329 


LESSON    LXI. 


Felicitar. 

Fiar. 

Ignorar. 

Lastimai". 

Improvisar. 

Inquietar. 

Intentar. 

Interrogar. 

Invertir. 

Interesar. 

Invitar. 

Imprimir. 

Obligar. 

Rehusar. 

Lisonjear. 

Llevar. 


De  Zeca  en  Meca. 
A  ciegas. 
A  gatas. 
En  el  interin. 


To  felicitate,  to  congratulate. 

To  trust. 

To  be  ignorant  of,  unaware  of. 

To  liui-t,  to  wound. 

To  improvise,  to  do  (any  thing)' 

off-hand. 
To  make  uneasy,  to  cause  anxiety. 
To  attempt,  to  intend. 
To  interrogate,  to  question. 
To  invert,  to  invest. 
To  interest,  to  bo  of  interest. 
To  invite. 
To  print. 

To  force,  to  oblige. 
To  refuse. 
To  flatter. 
To  carry,  to  take,  to  charge. 


Descuidado. 

Careless. 

Final. 

Final. 

Ignorante. 

Ignorant. 

Impersonal. 

Impersonal. 

Increible. 

Incredible. 

Indefinido. 

Indefinite. 

Inexplicable. 

Inexplicable. 

Ingenioso. 

Ingenious. 

Inmediato. 

Immediate,  close  by,  next. 

Inquieto. 

Uneasy,  restless. 

Justo. 

Just,  right. 

Ultimo. 

Last. 

Lisonjero. 

Flattering. 

Especicro. 

Grocer. 

Loco. 

Mad. 

Lento. 

Slow. 

Solemnc. 

Solemn,  cruel. 

To  and  fro. 

"With  one's  eyes  shut. 

On  all  fours. 

In  the  mean  time. 


330 

LESSON    LXI. 

Ampo  de  la  nie-  Wliiteness  of 

Ancburas  {f.pl.).  Ease. 

ve. 

sngw. 

Cuba. 

Cask,  toper. 

Asno. 

Ass. 

drunkard. 

Descuido. 

Carelessness. 

Cara. 

Face. 

Hueso. 

Bone. 

Cartilla. 

Primer. 

Golpe. 

Blow,  stroke. 

Calabaza. 

Pumpkin,  refusal. 

Dares  y  tomares.  Dispute. 

Imaginacion. 

Imagination. 

Indice. 

Index. 

Intencion. 

Intention.' 

Ingenk). 

Genius. 

Interrogacion. 

Interrogation. 

Insecto. 

Insect. 

Inversion. 

Inversion. 

Instinto. 

Instinct. 

Justicia. 

Justice. 

Instrumento. 

Instrument. 

Llave. 

Key. 

Interrogante. 

Question,  note  of 

Lluvia. 

Eain. 

interrogation. 

Lista. 

List. 

Italiano. 

Italian. 

Lisonja. 

Flattery. 

Arco  iris. 

Eainbow. 

Luna. 

Moon, 

Galicismo. 

Gallicism. 

Luz. 

Light. 

Hierro. 

Iron. 

Latitud. 

Latitude. 

Juego.  • 

Play. 

Longitud. 

Longitude. 

Loco. 

Madman. 

Legua. 

League. 

Lugar. 

I^lace. 

Letra. 

Letter. 

Latin. 

Latin. 

Limosna.    • 

iilms. 

Sonido,      ) 
Son.          } 

Sound. 

Limpieza. 

Cleanness. 

Liuea. 

Line. 

Pico. 

Beak. 

Levita. 

Frock-coat. 

Levita. 

Levite. 

Eama. 

Branch. 

Uso. 

Use,  custom. 

Teja. 

Tile. 

Objeto. 

Object. 

Ocasion. 

Occasion. 

Oido. 

Ear,  hearing. 

Yerguenza. 

Shame. 

Olfato. 

SmeU. 

COMPOS 

5ITI0N. 

A  mas  tardar. 

At  latest. 

A  media  palabra. 

At  the  slightest  hint. 

A  medida  de  sua 

deseos. 

According  to  one's  wishes. 

A  sus  anchuras. 

At  one's  ease. 

Al  descuido  y  con  cuidado.                      | 

Studiously  careless 

Abrir  el  ojo. 

To  be  upon  the  alert 

Alia  se  las  haya. 

Let  him  look  to  that. 

Andar  a  degas. 

To  grope  in  the  dark. 

Andar  a  gatas. 

To  creep  on  all  fours. 

A  todo  correr. 

With  all  speed. 

LESSON     LXI. 


331 


Vaya  V.  con  Dios. 

El  va  de  capa  caida. 

El  va  de  Zcca  en  Meca. 

Ir  de  puntillas. 

Andar  on  dares  y  tomares. 

Andarse  por  las  ramas. 

De  tejas  ubajo. 

Asir  la  ocasion  por  los  cabcUos. 

Bailar  al  son  que  se  toca. 

Beber  los  aires  or  los  vientos. 

Beber  como  una  cuba. 

Blanco  como  el  ampo  de  la  nicve. 

Bocado  sin  liueso. 

Burla  burlando. 

Buscar  cinco  pies  al  gato. 

No  caber  de  gozo. 

No  caber  en  si. 

No  cabc  en  el. 

Caer  de  su  asno. 

Caersele  b.  uno  la  cara  de  vcrgiicnza. 

Callar  el  pico. 

Chanzas  aparte. 

Con  mil  amores. 

fcon  su  -pan  sc  lo  coma. 

Conque,  hasta  la  vista. 

Cosa  que  no  csta  en  la  cartilla. 

Dar  A  alguno  con  las  puertas  en  la  cara. 

Bar  ii  luz. 

Dar  por  supuesto,  or  por  sentado. 

Dar  chasco. 

Dar  el  si. 

Dar  golpe  una  cosa. 

Dar  calabazas. 
No  se  le  da  nada. 


Go  in  peace. 

He  is  crest-fallen. 

He  goes  roving  about,  to  and  fro. 

To  go  on  tiptoe. 

To  quarrel. 

Not  to  come  to  the  point. 

Humanly  speaking. 

To  take  time  by  the  forelock. 

To  go  with  the  stream. 

To  desire  anxiously. 

To  drink  like  a  fish. 

White  as  the  driven  snow. 

An  employment  without  labor ;  a  sine- 
cure. 

Between  joke  and  earnest. 

To  pick  a  quarrel. 

To  be  overjoyed. 

To  be  bursting  with  pride. 

He  is  not  capable  of  such  a  thing. 

To  acknowledge  one's  fault. 

To  blush  with  shame. 

To  hold  one's  tongue. 

Jesting  aside. 

Most  willingly. 

That  is  his  own  business. 

I  hope  we  may  soon  meet  again. 

Something  out  of  the  common  way. 

To  shut  the  door  in  one's  face. 

To  publish ;  to  give  birth  to. 

To  take  for  granted. 

To  disappoint. 

To  consent. 

To  strike  one  with  admiration,  or  as- 
tonishment (said  of  things). 

To  give  the  mitten. 

He  cares  nothing  about  it. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^Le  salen  a  V.  las  cosas  ii  medida  de  sns  deseos?  Chanzas  aparte, 
Don  Juan,  V.  sabe  bien  que  de  tejas  abajo  eso  nunca  sucede. 

2.  Si,  pero  como  V.  baila  al  son  que  se  toca  y  sabe  asir  la  ocasion  por 
los  cabellos,  siempre  esta  a  sus  anchuras  y  tienc  siempre  algun  bocado 
sin  hueso. — Araigo,  caiga  V.  de  su  asno  j  confiese  de  buena  f6  que  si 


332  LESSON     LXl. 

anda  dc  capa  caida,  es  porque  va  siemprc  de  Zeca  en  Meca,  y  porque 
bebe  mas  que  una  cuba. 

3.  Adios,  Don  Pedro,  me  voy,  porque  no  quiero  buscar  cinco  pies  al 
gato. — Vaya  V.  con  Dios,  Don  Juan. 

4.  Don  Pedro,  me  parece  que  V.  ha  dado  con  la  puerta  en  la  cara  u 
Don  Juan. — Xo,  sefior,  Don  Enrique,  a  otro  se  le  caeria  la  cai'a  de  ver- 
guenza,  pero  a  61  no  se  le  da  nada,  y  pronto  lo  volvera  V.  d  ver  por  aca. 

5.  Ent6nces  41  no  entiende  a  media  palabra. — A  mas  tardar  lo  vera, 
V.  aqui  otra  vez  dentro  de  media  bora. 

6.  El  pobre  bombre  anda  a  ciegas,  y  si  no  abrc  el  ojo,  ira  a  parar  a 
un  hospital. — Con  su  pan  se  lo  coma,  y  alia  se  las  baya ;  yo  lo  siento  so- 
lamente  por  su  nilla,  que  es  una  sefiorita  perfecta. 

7.  Me  ban  dicbo  que  V.  queria  casarse  con  ella,  ^  es  verdad,  Don  En- 
rique?— Si,  sefior,  y  lo  bubiera  becho  con  mil  amores,  porque  ademas  de 
ser  muy  araable  6  instruida,  cs  muy  bonita,  tiene  ojos  negros  muy  her- 
mosos  y  es  tan  blanca  como  el  ampo  de  la  nieve. 

8.  Pues  ^porqud  no  se  caso  V.  con  ella?  Por  una  pequefia  difi- 
cultad. 

9.  Quiza  V.  se  andaria  por  las  ramas  y  no  sabria  asir  la  ocasion  por 
los  cabcllos. — No,  sefior,  nada  de  eso,  antes  al  contrario  yo  lo  daba  todo 
por  supuesto,  porque  V.  sabe  que  soy  rico,  y  crei  que  la  nifia  me  daria 
cl  si  sin  bacerse  de  rogar. 

10.  ^Pues  qu6,  no  se  lo  di6  ?  No,  sefior,  no  me  dio  cl  si,  pero  me  di6 
calabazas. 

11.  jMiren  la  rapazuela!  ^y  V.  qu6  bizo?  To  que  bebia  los  vientos 
por  ella,  y  creia  que  sus  calabazas  eran  cosa  que  no  estaban  en  la  cartilla, 
recurri  a  su  padre,  creyendo  que  61  no  me  negaria  la  mano  dc  su  hija. 

12.  I Y  bien  y  que  ?  Que  me  lleve  un  solerane  chasco,  el  padre  mo 
rebuso  la  mano  de  su  bija  ni  mas  ni  m^nos  que  ella  lo  babia  becho. 

13.  jPero  qu6  razon  le  di6  a  V.  para  ello?  Me  dijo  que  su  bija,  aun- 
que  pobre,  era  bija  de  un  caballero  y  que  ni  ella  qucrria  ni  61  la  obMgaria 
jamas  a  casarse  con  un  especiero  comun  6  ignorante  ;  que  cl  dinero  era 
nna  gran  cosa,  pero  que  no  lo  compraba  todo. 

14.  ^T  V.  qn6  dijo?  Yo,  por  no  andar  en  dares  y  tomares  y  dimes 
y  dir6tes,  me  calle  el  pico  y  sali  de  su  casa  a  todo  correr. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Would  you  not  be  more  likely  to  obtain  what  you  -wish,  if  you 
came  to  the  point  at  once  ?  Perhaps  I  would ;  but  the  matter  is  an  im- 
portant one,  and  I  considered  it  necessary  to  enter  into  some  explanation 
relative  to  it. 


LESSON     LXI.  333 

2.  Do  you  think  ho  would  understand  mo  ?  Of  course  ho  would,  at 
the  slightest  hint. 

3.  IIow  did  your  cousin  Charles  succeed  in  that  affair  ?  Every  thing 
tui'ned  out  according  to  his  wishes. 

4.  How  soon  do  you  suppose  this  hook  will  he  puhlished  ?  I  hope  it 
will  he  published  in  a  very  short  time ;  I  know  they  are  working  at  it 
with  all  possible  speed. 

5.  Have  you  ever  seen  a  more  active  man  than  that  merchant? 
Never ;  and  I  have  never  seen  a  less  active  man  than  his  brother,  ho 
ahvays  goes  with  the  stream,  and  troubles  himself  about  nothing. 

6.  Ought  you  not  to  have  shown  that  letter  to  your  brother?  I 
would  have  done  so,  of  course,  but  I  took  for  granted  that  he  had  already 
heard  the  news. 

7.  You  had  better  tell  your  friend  to  bo  upon  the  alert,  and  not  get 
into  a  quarrel  v/ith  that  man.  That  is  his  ov/n  business,  let  him  look  to 
it  liimsclf. 

8.  Is  it  possible  that  ho  could  be  capable  of  such  an  action  ?  Yes, 
but  the  v/orst  of  all  is,  that  he  is  not  ashamed  to  acknovv'ledgo  it  to  every 
one  he  meets. 

9.  When  is  Peter  to  bo  married?  I  cannot  say  certainly;  but  I 
suppose  in  about  a  month  at  latest. 

10.  I  don't  know  any  one  who  has  a  better  position  than  your  uncle : 
plenty  of  money  and  scarcely  any  thing  to  do.  That  is  a  fact,  his  situ- 
ation is  a  real  sinecure. 

11.  What  has  occurred  to  that  gentleman  ?  he  looks  quite  crest-fiillen. 
Bo  not  bo  astonished  at  that ;  he  has  been  unfortunate  in  business,  and 
has  lost  almost  all  he  possessed  in  the  world. 

12.  Are  you  trying  to  pick  a  quarrel  with  me?  No,  I  assure  you, 
jesting  aside,  that  the  matter  stands  exactly  as  I  say. 

13.  IIow  was  he  received  by  the  lady's  father?  lie  was  not  received 
at  all,  they  shut  the  door  in  his  face.  4 

14.  If  you  desire  so  anxiously  to  see  him,  why  do  you  not  go  to  his 
house  ?  I  cannot  make  up  my  mind  (decidirme)  to  do  that ;  you  know 
ho  is  bursting  with  pride,  and  ho  would  very  probably  refuse  to  receive  me. 

15.  "Well,  I  hope  we  may  soon  meet  again;  present  my  respects  to 
your  family.  "With  the  greatest  pleasure.; — Please  not  to  forget  the  letter. 

IG.  That  I  care  nothing  about ;  all  I  desire  to  know  is  whether  he  wUl 
be  here  in  time  or  not.     I  think  you  may  rely  on  his  being  punctual. 

IT.  I  have  been  told  that  your  brother  was  about  to  be  married  to 
Miss  Ramirez ;  is  it  true  ?  I  really  cannot  say  how  the  matter  will  turn 
out ;  so  far  every  thing  seems  to  go  on  according  to  the  desire  of  both 
parties. 


334 


LESSON    LXII. 


LESSON    LXII. 


Aplicar. 

Ccbarse. 

Echar  d  perder. 

Errar. 

Ocurrir. 

Murraurar. 

Madrugar. 

Medir. 

Montar. 

Mudar. 

Nacer. 

Sazonar. 
Reunirse. 

Modificar. 


To  apply. 

To  feed,  to  gloat. 

To  spoil. 

To  err,  to  miss. 

To  occur. 

To  murmtir,  to  grumble. 

To  rise  eai-ly. 

To  measure. 

To  mount,  to  amount. 

To  change,  to  move. 

To  be  born,  to  spring  up,  to  pro- 
ceed. 

To  season,  to  ripen. 

To  unite,  to  collect  together,  to 
assemble. 

To  modify. 


Desprevenido. 

Unawares,  unprepared. 

Intachable. 

Unimpeachable,  unquestionable 

Maldito. 

Perverse,  confounded. 

Mayuscula. 

Capital  (letter). 

Mimiscula. 

SmaU  (letter). 

Numeral. 

Numeral. 

Noble. 

Noble. 

Nominativo. 

Nominative. 

Neutro. 

Neuter. 

Masculino. 

Masculino. 

Objetivo. 

Objective. 

Quieto. 

Quiet,  at  rest. 

Cnmpleafios. 
Menoscabo. 

Pique. 
Rayo. 
Socio. 
Sabor. 
Menudo. 


Birthday. 

Detriment,  less- 
ening. 

Point,  verge. 

Thunderbolt. 

Associate,  partner. 

Taste,  savor. 

Change,  small 
change. 


Apariencia. 

Bravata. 

Botica. 

Fiesta. 

Centclla. 

Siesta. 

Suerte. 


Appearance. 
Bravado. 
Drug  store. 
Feast,  holiday. 
Spark,  flash. 
Siesta  (afternoon 

nap). 
Luck,  fortune, 

chance. 


LESSON     LXII. 

Meridiuno. 

Meridian. 

Murmuracion. 

Murmurings. 

Metal. 

Metal. 

Malicia. 

Malice. 

Miembro. 

Member. 

Mente. 

Mmd. 

Mineral. 

Mineral. 

Muestra. 

Sample,  sign. 

Momento. 

Moment. 

Manera. 

Manner. 

Mozo. 

Youth,  waiter. 

Man'teca,  or  man 

-  Butter. 

Macho. 

Male. 

tequilla. 

Maestro. 

Ma.ster,  teacher. 

Medida. 

Measure. 

Mauuscrito. 

Manuscript. 

011a  podrida. 

Sort  of  mixed 

Mar. 

Sea. 

dish. 

Olor. 

Smell,  odor. 

Ostra. 

Oyster. 

Olivar. 

Olive  ground. 

Negacion. 

Negation. 

Ostion.     (See 

Oyster. 

Mar. 

Sea. 

Ostra.) 

Negativa. 

Negative. 

Palo. 

"Wood,  stick. 

Nota. 

Note. 

Polvo. 

Dust,  powder. 

Zaga. 

Eear-guard. 

Pano. 

Cloth. 

Parabien. 

Felicitation,  con- 
gratulation. 

COMPO 

SITIOX. 

335 


De  bucnas  k  primeras. 

De  buena  fe. 

Dc  mala  fe. 

De  intento. 

De  oidas. 

Decir  por  decir. 

Dcjar  4  uno  colgado. 

Dejar  a  uno  en  la  calle. 

Dejar  atras  los  vientos. 

Dejar  correr. 

Dejar  cl  campo  librc. 

Dejar  en  bianco. 

Dejarso  alguna  cosa  en  cl  tintcro. 

Dia  do  cumpleauos. 

Saber  algo  de  buena  tinta. 

Dc  dia  en  dia. 

De  un  dia  para  otro. 

De  hoy  en  ocho  dias. 

Un  dia  si  y  otro  no. 

Hoy  dia. 

Dicho  y  hccho. 


Without  ceremony. 

"With  sincerity. 

Deceitfully. 

On  purpose. 

By  hearsay. 

To  talk  for  the  sake  of  talking. 

To  frustrate  one's  hopes. 

To  strip  one  of  his  all. 

To  go  quicker  than  the  wind. 

To  go  with  the  world. 

To  yield  to  one's  competitors. 

To  leave  blank. 

To  forget  to  say  something. 

Birthday. 

To  know  any  thing  on  good  authority. 

From  day  to  day. 

From  one  day  to  another. 

This  day  week. 

Every  other  day. 

Xow-a-days. 

No  sooner  said  than  done 


330 


LESSON     LXII. 


Dormir  a  picrna  suelta. 

Dormir  la  siesta. 

Echar  a  perder  algo. 

Echar  bravatas. 

Ecliar  rayos  y  centellas. 

Echar  la  culpa  a  alguno. 

Echar  sucrtcs. 

EmpcSarsc  ea  haeer  algo. 

Empenarse  por  alguno. 

En  un  abtir  y  cerrar  de  ojos. 

Enceaderse  ea  eolera. 

Errar  el  tiro. 

Erre  que  erre. 

Escarmentar  on  cabeza  agena. 

Estar  a  pique  de  perderse. 

Estar  de  casa, 

Estar  de  fiesta. 

Estar  ea  ascuas. 

Estar  ea  lo  que  se  dice, 

Estar  a  sus  aachuras. 

Estar  sobre  si. 

Estar  despreveaido. 

Estar  maao  sobre  maao. 

;.  Estus  ea  tus  ciaco  seatidos  ? 


To  sleep  at  oae's  ease. 

To  take  aa  afteraooa  aap. 

To  spoil  aay  thiag. 

To  brag,  to  boast. 

To  be  furious,  earagcd. 

To  throw  the  blame  oa  aay  one. 

To  cast  lots. 

To  iasist  upon  doing  any  thing. 

To  interest  oae's  self  for  any  one. 

In  the  twinkling  of  an  eye,  in  a  trice. 

To  fly  into  a  passioa. 

To  miss  oae's  aim, 

Obstiaately. 

To  take  warning  by  others'  misfortunes. 

To  be  within  an  ace  of  being  lost. 

To  be  in  dishabille. 

To  be  merry. 

To  be  upoa  thorns. 

To  comprehead  what  is  said. 

To  be  at  oae's  ease. 

To  be  on  one's  guard. 

To  be  oflf  one's  guard. 

To  be  idle.  | 

Are  you  in  your  senses  ? 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION, 

1.  Sell  ores,  dejen  Vds.  el  campo  libre,  que  aqui  viene  Don  Pepito 
cchando  bravatas  y  rayos  y  centellas. — Bien  venido,  Don  Pepito,  ^qu6 
trae  V.  de  nuevo,  que  parece  estar  fuera  de  si  ? 

2.  Ko,  seiior,  yo  estoy  en  mis  cinco  sentidos,  pero  bay  gcntes  de  mala 
fe  que  hablan  por  bablar  y  se  ocupan  de  critical*  al  pr6jinio. — i  Y  eso  a 
que  viene? 

3.  Yo  no  lo  digo  por  V.,  Don  Enrique,  pero  "V.  sabe  que  bay  mucbos 
desocupados  que  se  vienen  d  su  botica  de  V.  y  critican  ii  todo  elmundo. — 
j  Vanios,  vamos !  Don  Pepito,  que  u  V.  tambien  le  gusta  un  poquito  la 
murmuracion. 

4.  Ciertameute,  porque  sino  i  que  scria  de  la  conversacion  sin  un  po- 
quito de  critica  que  la  sazone  y  le  de  interes  ?  Muy  bien,  pero  entonces 
no  ecbe  V.  la  culpa  a  nadie  de  hacer  lo  mismo  que  V.  bace. 

5.  Si,  pero  yo  bablo  sin  malicia,  de  bnena  fe  y  digo  lo  que  me  ocuri-c 
por  decirlo,  nada  mas. — Asi  pueden  decir  los  demas. 

6.  Si,  pero  yo  no  soy  como  Don  Carlos,  que  viene  aqui  dc  dia  cu  din, 


LESSON     LXII.  337 

y  de  la  mafiana  a  la  tardc  hablando  mas  que  un  sacamuelas  y  sin  dejar  a 
nadie  bueso  sano. — Si,  pues  apliquese  V.  el  cuento. 

7.  No,  seQor,  yo  no  soy  ni  tan  hablador  ni  tan  murmurador  como 
ninguno  de  los  que  so  reunen  aqui,  y  si  no,  observe  V.  un  poquito  a  cada 
uno  do  cllos,  D.  Gonzalo,  por  ejemplo,  ^ba  venido  boy?  No,_  seilor,  no 
lia  venido,  ni  vendra,  porquo  es  el  dia  de  su  cumpleauos  y  lo  celebra  con  su 
familia  en  el  oampo,  por  consiguiente  puede  V.  cebarse  en  61  a  su  sabor. 

8.  D,  Gonzalo  cs  horabre  de  buenos  sentiraientos  y  hombre  bonrado, 
no  liaya  miedo  que  yo  diga  nada  en  menoseabo  suyo,  pero  tieue  un 
maldito  genio  que  lo-hace  ecbar  a  perder  toda  conversacion. 

9.  Pues  yo  no  habia  observado  cso. — ;  Corao  bombre  !  pues  si  vieno 
aqui  un  dia  si  y  otro  no,  d  criticar  a  los  que  so  reunen  en  la  botica  de  la 
esquina,  y  los  dias  que  no  viene  aqui  va  a  la  botica  de  la  esquina  a  criti- 
carnos  a  nosoti'os, 

10.  ;^  Y  que  cs  lo  que  lo  liaco  ecbar  ti  perder  las  convcrsaciones  como 
decia  V.  pocos  minutos  ba  ?  Que  en  un  abrir  y  cerrar  do  ojos  se  en- 
ciende  en  c61era, 

11.  Bien,  por  D.  Gonzalo,  ^y  nuestro  vecino,  D,  Alberto,  eso  si  que  9s 
intacbable,  no  le  parece  a  V.  ?  ;  Ho !  en  cfecto  es  un  escelente  hombre, 
lastima  que  errase  el  tiro. 

12.  ^Que  quiero  V.  decir  con  eso  do  crrar  cl  tii'o?  Ilablo  con  respocto 
a  sus  negocios. 

13.  Y  bien,  ^  qu6  lo  sucedio  ?  Que  escogio  malos  socios,  y  le  ban  de- 
jado  en  la  calle. 

14.  Pero  eso  no  puede  ser,  Don  Alberto  goza  de  muy  buena  reputa- 
cion,  V.  habla  de  oidas. — No,  sefior,  que  lo  s6  de  buena  tinta,  y  hoy  dia 
csta  a  pique  de  perderse. 

lu.  Pues  61  parece  dormir  a  pierna  suelta. — Esta  obligado  ii  haccrlo  asi 
por  guardar  las  apariencias. 

IG.  J  No  se  ha  dejado  V.  algo  en  el  tintero?  Sin  duda  quo  mc  lie  de- 
jado,  pero  es  tarde  y  voy  a  dormir  la  siesta. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Is  tlie  custom  of  taking  an  afternoon  nap  as  common  in  Spain 
now-a-days  as  in  former  times  ?  It  is  quite  as  common  now-a-days  as  it 
ever  was,  not  only  in  Spain,  but  in  almost  every  country  of  Europe. 

2.  Are  you  perfectly  certain  that  he  acted  with  sincerity  in  that  mat- 
tor  ?     I  am  quite  sure,  as  I  know  it  on  good  authority. 

3.  Who  told  yon-  that  young  man  had  acted  deceitfully  toward  your 
cousin  ?  I  do  not  care  to  say  much  in  the  mattei',  especially  as  all  I 
know  respecting  it  I  only  know  by  hearsay. 

15 


338 


LESSON     LXIII. 


4.  Can  you  tell  me  how  that  merchant's  enterprise  turned  out  ?  Very 
badly ;  for  shortly  after  ho  had  engaged  in  it,  he  heard  of  his  brother's 
misfortune,  which  frustrated  all  his  hopes. 

5.  Did  Alexander  manage  to  pay  his  debts  after  all  ?  No,  he  did  not ; 
and  although  his  intentions  were  strictly  honorable,  his  creditors  {acree- 
doren)  would  wait  no  longer,  and  they  stripped  him  of  all  he  possessed  in 
the  world. 

6.  What  date  do  you  wish  me  to  put  here  ?  Just  leave  a  blank,  and 
Charles  will  put  in  the  date  before  he  sends  the  letter  off. 

7.  When  do  you  think  they  will  be  able  to  give  me  some  of  the 
papers  ?    Probably  by  this  day  week. 

8.  What  did  he  say  when  he  saw  how  the  tailor  had  spoiled  his  coat  ? 
Fortunately  for  the  latter  he  was  in  a  merry  mood,  and  did  not  fly  into  a 
passion  as  he  usually  does  when  any  thing  occurs  to  displease  him. 

9.  Are  you  in  your  senses,  my  dear  friend  ?  arc  you  not  aware  that 
such  a  thing  is  impossible  ? 

10.  Did  he  shut  the  door  on  purpose  ?  Yes,  but  he  sent  his  servant  to 
take  us  into  another  room,  for  he  was  in  dishabille,  and  did  not  wish  to 
be  seen  until  he  had  dressed. 

11.  How  often  do  you  go  to  dine  at  your  uncle's?  I  generally  go 
every  other  day. 

12.  Have  your  friends  returned  yet  from  the  country  ?  'iSo,  they  have 
been  putting  it  off*  from  day  to  day  for  some  time,  and  I  shall  not  bo  in 
the  least  astonished  if  they  do  not  return  before  November. 

13.  Why  did  you  not  bring  your  sister  with  you  ?  I  did  all  I  possibly 
could  to  persuade  her  to  come,  but  she  insisted  upon  staying  at  home. 

14.  How  did  they  decide  on  who  should  go  first  ?    They  cast  lots  for  it. 


LESSON    LXIII. 


Eetirar. 

Pegar. 

Pescar. 

Posponer. 

Preceder. 

Prometer. 

Eazonar. 

Eesfriarse. 

Eegalar. 


To  retire,  to  withdraw. 

To  stick,  to  adhere,  to  beat. 

To  fish. 

To  place  after. 

To  precede. 

To  promise. 

To  reason. 

To  take  cold. 

To  regale,  to  present. 


'  Posponer. 


LESSON     LXIII. 


339 


.[ 


En  frente. 
Frente  por  frente 
De  hito  en  hito. 
De  grado. 
Por  fas  6  por  ncfas, 


In  front,  opposite. 

Fixedly,  with  open  eyes. 
By  fair  means. 
Justly  or  unjustly. 


j  Cascaras ! 

Dear  me!  Oh! 

Afortunado. 

Fortunate. 

Ageno. 

Foreign,  belonging  to  others. 

Formal. 

Formal,  steady,  respectable. 

Pasivo. 

Passive. 

Perezoso. 

Lazy. 

Personal 

Personal. 

Posesivo. 

Possessive. 

Potencial. 

Potential. 

Precise. 

Precise,  necessary,  obligatory. 

Prelirainar. 

Preliminary. 

Preterite. 

Preterit. 

Pimtual. 

Punctual. 

Partitivo. 

Partitive. 

Radical. 

Eadical. 

Earo.                                   » 

Eare,  cmious. 

Eeciproco. 

Eeciprocal. 

Eeflexivo. 

Reflective. 

Eubio. 

Fair  (of  the  haii*  and  complexion) 

Euin. 

Mean. 

Alardo. 

Bulto. 

Ganso. 

Bledo. 

Diente. 

Desafio. 

Espadachin. 

Estribo. 

Mequetrefe. 

Pasaje. 

Pedazo. 

Perro. 

Plazo. 

Plomo 


Boast. 

Bulk,  bundle. 

Goose. 

Straw. 

Tooth. 

Challenge,  duel. 

Bully. 

Stirrup. 

Trifling  fcllov/, 

meddler. 
Passage. 
Piece. 
Dog. 
Term. 
Lead. 


Bulla. 
Baza. 

Huespeda. 

Puntuacion. 

Puntualidad. 

Paciencia. 

Paja. 

Polvora. 

Perseverancia, 

Porcion. 

Prendn. 

Pronunciacion. 


Noise,  nproar. 

Trick   (card-play- 
ing). 

Hostess. 

Punctuation. 

Punctuality. 

Patience. 

Straw. 

Gunpowder. 

Perseverance. 

Portion,   number. 

Good     quality, 
jewel. 

Pronunciation. 


340 


LESSON     LXIII, 


Porque. 

Reason  why. 

Propiedad. 

Propriety,    prop- 

Publico. 

Public. 

erty. 

Principio. 

Priaciple,  begin- 

Pulgada. 

Inch. 

ning. 

Raiz, 

Root. 

Rasgo. 

Trait. 

Rebanada. 

Slice. 

Eecado. 

Message,  errand. 

Reforma. 

Reform,  reforma- 

Eecibo. 

Receipt. 

tion. 

Rector. 

Rector,  director. 

Regla. 

Rule. 

Refran. 

Proverb. 

Reina. 

Queen. 

Relampago. 

Flash  of  light- 

Repeticion. 

Repetition,     re- 

ning. 

hearsal. 

Relqjero. 

"Watchmaker. 

Resolucion. 

Resolution. 

Regalo. 

Present. 

Rosa. 

Rose. 

Reposo. 

Rest,  repose. 

Ratina. 

Routine. 

Resfriado. 

Cold. 

Suma. 

Sura. 

Reumatismo. 

Rheumatisin. 

Sutileza. 

Subtilty,  fineness. 

Reves. 

"Wrong  side,  back. 

Salida. 

Departure. 

Rincou. 

Corner. 

Silaba. 

Syllable. 

Ruisefior. 

Nightingale. 

Soledad. 

Solitude. 

Sustancia. 

Substance. 

Subida. 

Rising    ground, 
going  up. 

Suegra. 

Mother-in-law. 

COMPOSITIOX. 


Faltar  a  su  palabra. 
Guardarse  de  alinina  cosa. 


Hablar  a  bulto. 

Hablar  a  tontas  y  a  locas. 

Hablar  al  aire. 

Hablar  al  oido. 

Hablar  al  alma. 

Hablar  entre  dientes. 

Hablar  por  boea  de  ganso. 

Hacer  a  uno  perder  los  cstribos. 

Hacer  de  las  suyas. 

Hacer  alarde  de. 

Hacer  la  caenta  sin  la  hudspeda. 

Hacer  caso  de. 

Habcrla  (or  habersclas)  con  alguno. 

Irse  de  la  memoria. 

Irsclc  u  uno  la  cabeza. 


To  break  one's  word. 

To  take  care  not  to  do  a  thing  (not  to 

attempt  to  do  a  thing). 
To  speak  at  random. 
To  speak  without  rhyme  or  reason. 
To  talk  vaguely. 
To  whisper  into  one's  ear. 
To  speak  one's  mind. 
To  mutter. 

To  echo  what  another  has  said. 
To  make  one  lose  his  temper. 
To  show  off  one's  tricks. 
To  boast  of. 

To  reckon  without  the  host. 
To  pay  attention  (or  respect)  to. 
To  dispute  (or  contend)  with  any  one. 
To  escape  one's  memory. 
To  lose  one's  reason. 


LESSON     LXIII. 


341 


Van  cien  duvos  &  que  cs  cierto. 

Llevar  a  mal. 

Mai  de  su  grado. 

Mal  que  le  pese. 

Manos  a  la  obra. 

Meter  bulla. 

Meterse  {i  caballcro. 

Meterse  a  sabio. 

Meterse  con  alguno. 

Meterse  en  camisa  dc  once  varas. 

Meterse  en  todo. 

Meterse  en  vidas  agenas. 

Mirar  de  hito  en  hito. 

Mostrar  las  suelas  de  los  zapatos. 

Naccr  de  pies. 

Nada  se  me  da  de  e'lo, 

No  dejar  meter  baza. 

No  cabe  mas. 

No  estar  para  fiestas. 

No  le  pesa  de  haber  nacido. 

No  se  me  da  un  bledo. 

No  tener  arte  ni  parte  en  alguna  cosa. 

Perder  cuidado. 

For  ce  6  por  be. 

For  fas  6  nefi\s. 

No  llearara  la  sangre  al  rio. 


I  wager  a  hundred  dollars  tliat  it  is  true. 

To  take  any  thing  amiss. 

Unwillingly. 

In  spite  of  him. 

To  set  about  a  work. 

To  make  a  noise,  a  bustle. 

To  assume  the  gentleman. 

To  affect  learning  and  knowledge. 

To  pick  a  quarrel  with  any  one. 

To  interfere  in  other  people's  business. 

To  meddle  in  every  thing. 

To  dive  into  other  people's  affairs. 

To  look  steadfastly  at. 

To  take  to  one's  heels. 

To  be  bom  to  good  luck. 

I  care  nothing  about  it. 

Not  to  allow  one  to  slip  in  a  word. 

Nothing  more  can  be  desired. 

To  be  out  of  temper. 

He  has  no  mean  opinion  of  himself. 

I  do  not  care  a  Ftraw.  - 

To  have  no  hand  in  any  thing. 

Not  to  fear,  to  make  one's  self  easy. 

Some  way  or  other. 

Right  or  ^vrong. 

There  is  nothing  to  be  feared. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1 .  D.  Pepito  ha  faltado  d  sn  palabra,  6  i  cree  V.  qn6  vendrd  todavia  ? 
;  Que  ha  de  venh" !     Si  61  habla  siempre  d  tontas  y  d  locas. 

2.  Pues  yo  crei  que  prometi6  formalmente  venir  hoy. — Don  Pepito 
no  habla  nunca  formalmente. 

3.  ^De  qu6  mancra  habla  entonces?  De  muchas,  el  habla  al  aire, 
d  bulto,  al  oido,  entre  dientes,  por  boca  de  ganso;  pero  nunca  habla 
al  alma. 

4.  Esto  hard  perder  a  cualquicra  los  cstribos. — A  esto  le  Uama  cl,  ha- 
cicndo  alarde,  hacer  de  las  suyas. 

5.  Si ;  pero  61  se  las  habrd  conmigo,  porque  ha  hecho  la  cucnta  sin 
la  hu6spoda. — D.  Luij^,  no  haga  V.  caso,  es  un  mequetrefe,  si  Yds.  quieren 
yo  ire  d  su  casa  y  le  hare  vcnir  mal  de  sn  grado,  6  mejor  dicho,  mal  que 
le  pese. 

6.  iN'o,  seuor,  no  vaya  V.,  cs  un  horabre  que  se  mete  en  todo. — Y  en 
eso  tieno  V.  razon,  porque  61  so  mete  con  todo  el  mundo. 


342  LESSON     LXIII. 

7.  Y  hasta  se  mete  a  sabio  y  d  caballero.  —  Lo  poor  es  que  mete 
mucha  bulla. 

8.  jVaraos,  sefiores,  en  que  mas  se  mete  el  pobre  D,  Pepito?  Se 
mete  en  camisa  de  once  varas,  en  vidas  agenas,  etc.,  etc. 

9.  Pero,  sefiores,  no  olviden  Yds.  que  si  por  ce  6  por  be,  lo  Uegase  d 
saber,  D.  Pepito,  y  por  fas  6  por  nefas  bubiese  un  desaf  io,  no  lo  olviden 
Vds.,  vuelvo  d  repetir  que  Don  Pepito  es  un  gran  espadacbin.  ;  Vaya ! 
pierda  V,  cuidado,  que  no  llegard  la  sangre  al  rio. 

10.  ; Don  Pepito  espadacbin!  Oascaras! — Van  cicn  pesos  a  que  si  lo 
miro  de  hito  en  bito,  muestra  las  suelas  de  los  zapatos. 

11.  V.  no  debe  llevarlo  a  mal,  aunque  Don  Pepito  sea  tan  su  araigo; 
pero  es  muy  bablador  y  no  deja  d  nadie  meter  baza. — Yo  no  tcngo  arte 
ni  parte  en  ello  y  no  se  me  da  un  bledo. 

12.  I  Se  acord6  Y.  de  decir  aquello  a  su  vecino  el  Sr.  Foster  ?  Xo,  se- 
fior,  se  me  fue  de  la  memoria. 

13.  I  Es  un  joven  muy  afortunado  ?  Si,  -sefior,  ba  nacido  de  pies  ;  pero 
$6  que  no  le  pesa  de  baber  nacido. 

14.  Y.  no  debe  criticarlo,  porque  abora  no  estd  para  fiestas. — A  mi  no 
se  me  da  un  bledo  de  que  este  6  no  de  mal  bumor. 

15.  liable  Y.  bajo  6  bdblemo  Y.  al  oido,  porque  veo  al  Seuor  Foster 
alii  en  frente  y  Y.  debe  guardarse  de  que  le  oiga  bablar  de  ese  modo, 
porque  lo  llevaria  a  mal. — Pierda  Y.  cuidado  que  no  llegard  la  sangre  al 
rio. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Does  tbat  man  alvrays  keep  bis  word?  I  bave  never  known  bira 
to  break  bis  word  on  a  single  occasion. 

2.  Peter  is  very  sorry  tbat  Alexander  went  away  witbout  bim,  and 
I  do  not  know  wbat  be  would  bave  done  if  Jobn  bad  left  bim. 

3.  Jobn  took  good  care  not  to  start  at  tbe  same  time  as  his  elder 
brother,  for  he  well  knew  that  he  would  have  been  obliged  to  show  him 
every  thing  worth  seeing  in  the  city. 

4.  He  very  often  talks  for  hom's  together  without  rhyme  or  reason, 
to  tbe  very  great  annoyance  of  those  who  bave  to  listen  to  him. 

5.  Beheve  me,  it  is  no  proof  of  talent  to  talk  away  at  random  for  an 
hour  at  a  time,  without  saying  any  thing  that  could  be  called  either  new 
or  agreeable. 

6.  I  cannot  support  a  man  who  is  so  ignorant  as  to  come  and  whisper 
something  in  my  ear  while  I  am  engaged  in  conversation  with  another. 

7.  2fot  one  of  those  ideas  is  bis  own,  he  only  echoes  what  he  has 
heard  said  by  others. 

8.  I  would  advise  you  to  pay  no  attention  to  any  thing  he  tells  you. 


LESSON     LXIV. 


343 


9.  Judging  by  his  manner  of  speaking,  one  would  say  he  had  lost  his 
reason. 

10.  I  will  wager  fifty  dollars  that  not  one  word  of  all  you  have  read 
and  heard  on  that  score  {sobre  csa  materia)  is  true. 

11.  I  suppose  you  have  already  heard  of  my  good  fortune?  I  have; 
and  I  need  not  tell  you  how  glad  I  was  to  know  you  had  succeeded. 

12.  Did  you  hear  all  the  president  said  ?  Every  thing ;  he  spoke  very 
loud,  so  that  all  those  that  were  present  might  not  lose  a  word. 

13.  Although  he  affects  great  learning  and  knowledge,  I  have  had  oc- 
casion to  find  out  (discover)  tliat  he  is  a  very  ignorant  man. 

14.  I  know  vei'y  well  that  he  has  no  mean  opinion  of  himself;  but, 
after  all,  his  greatest  fixult  is  to  dive  a  little  too  much  into  other  people's 
affairs. 


LESSON    LXIV, 


Alumbrar. 

Soltar, 

Suponer. 

Situar. 

Significar. 

Saludar. 

Sobrar. 

Sonreirse. 

Soplar. 

Sonrojarse. 

Sufrir. 

Suplicar. 

Suspirar. 

Rasgar. 

Rebajar. 

Rebanar. 

Recitar. 

Recomendar. 

Referir. 

Regular. 

Remendar. 

Remediar. 


To  light. 

To  loose,  to  let  go. 

To  suppose. 

To  situate. 

To  signify. 

To  salute,  to  bow  to. 

To  remain  over,  to  be  too  much, 

too  many. 
To  smile. 

To  blow,  to  prompt. 
To  blush. 
To  suffer,  to  bear. 
To  supplicate,  to  beseech. 
To  sigh,  to  long  after. 
To  tear. 
To  lower. 
To  cut  in  slices. 
To  recite. 
To  recommend. 
To  refer,  to  tell,  to  relate. 
To  regulate. 
To  mend. 
To  remedy,  to  help. 


844 


LESSON     LXIV. 


Eepasar. 
Eepresentar. 
Kesolver. 
Zafar. 


To  look  over  (a  lesson,  &c.). 
To  represent,  to  lay  before. 
To  resolve. 
To  disembarrass. 


De  gorra. 

Sponging,  at  the  expense  of  others. 

Dc  perilla. 

To  the  purpose,  at  the  proper 

time. 

Cascos  a  la  gineta. 

On  one's  high  horse. 

A  raya. 

Within  bounds,  at  bay. 

A  solas. 

All  alone. 

Siquiera. 

Even,  only. 

En  suma. 

In  a  word,  in  fine. 

Santo. 

Holy,  saintly. 

Sutil. 

SubtU,  fine. 

SUencioso. 

Silent. 

Bordo. 

Deaf. 

Sustantivo. 

Substantive. 

Sucio. 

Dirty,  filthy. 

Atrevimiento. 

Cnerpo. 

Inconveniente. 

Esfuerzo. . 

Descaro. 

Fondos  (pi.). 

Matrimonio. 

Modismo. 

Provecho. 

Yugo. 

Trapo. 

Saber. 

Sacacorchos. 

Saldo. 

Salto. 


Assurance,  dar- 
ing. 

Body. 

Objection. 

Effort,  endeavor. 

Barefacedness. 

Funds. 

Matrimony. 

Idiom. 

Profit,  benefit. 

Yoke. 

Rag. 

Learning,  knowl- 
edge. 

Corkscrew. 

Balance. 

Leap,  jump. 


Blanca. 
Bula. 

Flaqueza. 
Gorra. 

Csi^zas  (fern.  2^1.) 

Pieza. 

Trastienda. 

Tienda. 

Tigeras. 

Tarjeta. 

Traza. 

Trampa. 

Traduccion. 


Iklite. 

BuU  (of  the  Pope). 

"Weakness. 

Cap,  lady's  bon- 
net. 

Breeches. 

Piece. 

Back  shop. 

Store,  shop. 

Scissors. 

Card  (visiting  or 
business). 

Mien,  appearance. 

Trap,  cheat. 

Translation. 


COMPOSITION. 


Quedarse  en  bianco. 

Quedarse  hecho  una  pieza  (or  belado). 


To  be  left  in  the  lurch. 
To    be   thunderstruck,  to   remain   as- 
tonished. 


LESSON     LXIV^ 


545 


Querer  dccii-. 

Sacar  fuerzas  de  flaqueza.  * 

Sacar  provecho. 

Sacudir  el  yugo. 

Salir  a  luz. 

Salir  con  algo. 

Salir  los  colorcs  d  la  cara. 

Saiga  lo  que  salicre. 

Salirsc  con  la  suya. 

Santo  y  bueno. 

Sin  mas  aca  ni  mas  alia. 

Sin  que  ni  para  que. 

En  nombrando  al  ruin  de  Roma  lucgo 

asoma. 
Sobre  la  marclia. 

Tan  claro  como  el  sol  {cr  como  el  agua). 
Tener  a  m6nos  hablar  a  uno. 
Tener  d  mio  a  raya. 
Tener  algo  en  la  punta  de  la  lengua. 

Tener  buen  diente. 
Tener  bula  para  todo. 

Tener  el  pie  en  dos  zapatos. 
Tener  los  cascos  I'l  la  gineta. 

Tener  su  alma  en  su  cuerpo. 
Tomar  el  cielo  con  las  manos. 

Tomar  la  ocasion  por  los  cabcUoy. 

Tomar  las  (calzas)  de  Villadiego. 

Vamos  claros. 

Venir  h  mdnos. 

Venir  al  caso. 

Tcnir  con  las  manos  lavadas. 

Venir  de  perilla. 

Yenir  una  cosa  pintada. 

Verse  negro. 

Vestirse  con  vcinto  y  cinco  alfileres. 


Dicho  y  hccho. 


To  mean. 

To  make  a  virtue  of  a  necessity. 

To  turn  to  account. 

To  shake  off  the  yoke. 

To  be  produced,  to  be  published. 

To  gain  one's  end. 

To  blush. 

Come  what  may. 

To  have  one's  own  way,  to  accomplish 
an  object. 

Well  and  good. 

Without  ifs  and  ands. 

Without  rhyme  or  reason. 

Speak  of  the  devil,  and  his  imps  ap- 
pear. 

Off-hand  (instantly). 

As  clear  as  daylight. 

Not  to  deign  to  speak  to  one. 

To  keep  one  at  bay. 

To  have  any  thing  on  the  tip  of  one's 
tongue. 

To  have  a  good  appetite. 

To  have  permission  to  do  what  one 
likes. 

To  have  two  strings  to  one's  bow. 

To  be  hare-brained,  to  have  little  judg- 
ment. 

To  do  what  one  thinks  proper. 

To  be  transported  with  rapture,  to  be 
enraged. 

To  profit  by  the  occasion. 

To  take  to  one's  heels. 

Let  us  understand  one  another. 

To  decUnc  in  any  way. 

To  come  to  the  point. 

To  wish  to  enjoy  the  fruit  of  another's 
labor. 

To  come  at  the  nick  of  time,  or  to  fit 
exactly. 

A  thing  to  suit  (or  fit)  exactly. 

To  be  afllicted,  embarrassed. 

To  be  dressed  in  style,  to  be  decked 
out. 

No  sooner  said  than  done. 


ITaccr  <Je  la  nccaiihul  rirtud. 


346  LESSON     LXIV. 


Vivir  de  gorra. 

Vivir  k  sus  anchas  (aiichuras). 

Zafarse  de  aljnina  cosa. 


To  live  at  auother's  expenSe. 

To  live  at  one's  ease. 

To  get  clear  (or  rid  of)  any  thing. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  J  Que  quiere  decir  quedarse  en  bianco?  Qniere  decir  lo  inismo 
que  quedarse  a  la  luna  de  Valencia,  esto  es,  quedarse  sin  nada. 

2.  i  Y  quedarse  hecho  una  pieza  6  helado,  que  quiere  decir  ?  Son 
modisraos  que  indicau  adrairacion  6  sorpresa. 

3.  I  Quiere  V.  explicarme  algunos  modismos  espafioles  ?  Xo  tengo 
inconveniente,  pregunteme  V.  el  significado  de  los  que  no  comprenda  V. 
— Muy  bien. 

4.  Sacar  fuerzas  de  flaqueza,  j  que  quiere  decir  ?  To  creo  que  es  baccr 
csfuerzos ;  pero  tambien  significa,  hacer  de  la  necesidad  virtud. 

5.  Sacar  provecho,  creo  que  no  necesita  explicacion  y  si  la  ocasion  se 
presenta,  creo  que  sabre  sacarlo. — i  Y  que  me  dice  V.  accrca  de  sacudir  el 
yugo  ?  Que  aquellos  que  tengan  algun  raal  yugo  que  sacudir  deben  ba- 
cerlo  sobre  la  marclia. 

6.  Santo  y  bueno,  pero  V.,  i  no  tiene  ningun  yugo  que  sacudir  ?  No, 
sefior,  es  verdad  que  estoy  bajo  el  yugo  del  matrimonio  ;  pero  no  deseo 
zafarme  de  el,  porque  para  mi  aunque  es  yugo,  es  un  yugo  santo  que  me 
ha  becbo  muy  feliz  y  bajo  el  cual  deseo  vivir  todavia  muchos  afios. 

7.  ^Xo  le  parece  a  V.  que  aquel  hombre  vive  de  gorra?  Si,  sefior, 
aqui  se  venia  todos  los  dias  con  sus  manos  lavadas  y  se  nos  comia  un  codo. 

8.  J  Y  porque  no  lo  ecb6  V.  de  su  casa  ?  ;  Asi  lo  bice  aycr,  y  si  V.  lo 
hubiera  visto !  parecia  querer  tomar  el  cielo  con  las  manos ! 

9.  I  Vaya  un  atreviiniento  !  Al  fin  me  vi  obligado  a  amenazarlo  con 
ima  silla,  y  entonces  tom6  las  de  Villadiego. 

10.  Creo  que  antes  era  rico,  pero  abora  ha  venido  a  menos. — Xo,  lo  que 
es  tener,  todavia  tiene. 

11.  Xo  hombre,  si  no  tiene  sobre  que  caerse  mnerto. — Perdone  V.,  si 
y.  qniere  que,  para  practicar  en  los  modismos  del  verbo  tcner,  le  diga  a 
V.  lo  que  ese  buen  seilor  tiene,  se  lo  dir6  a  V. 

12.  Santo  y  bueno. — Pues  entonces  alia  va  sin  qnd  ni  para  que. 

13.  Pero  hombre,  ^para  que  sacar  a  la  colada  los  trapos  de  ese  buen 
hombre  ?     Si  eso  es  tan  claro  como  el  sol  que  nos  alurabra. 

14.  Vamos  claros,  i  quiere  V.  6  no  que  le  diga  lo  que  ese  seOor,  que 
se  viste  con  veinte  y  cinco  alfileres,  tiene  ?    Pero  si  no  viene  al  caso. 

15.  Entonces  se  acabara  el  ejercicio  sin  poder  introducir  en  la  practica 
la  mitad  de  los  modismos  que  tenemos  en  la  Icccion. — ;  Ah!  si,  si,  tiene 
V.  mil  razones,  escucho,  ^  que  cs  lo  que  esc  buen  senor  tiene  ? 


LESSOX     LXIV.  *        347 

16.  En  pi-imer  Ingar  tieno  buen  apetito  y  bacn  diente. — jCaspita!  quo 
si  lo  tiene !  ^  y  a  quien  se  lo  cuenta  V.  ? 

17.  Tiene  siempre  algo  en  la  punta  de  la  lengua  y  nunca  tieno  nada  en 
el  bolsillo. 

18.  y  segun  el  descaro  con  que  obra,  pareco  tener  bula  para  todo; 
tambien  tiene  los  cascos  a  la  gineta  y  con  tanto  tener  creo  que  cs  mas  lo 
que  le  falta  que  lo  que  tiene. 

19.  Yo  no  s6  c6mo  tenerlo  a  raya,  ^  no  me  hara.  V.  el  favor  do  aconse- 
jarle  que  no  venga  mas  por  aqui  ?  Amigo  mio,  digaselo  V.  mismo,  por- 
que  yo  tengo  a  m^nos  hablar  a  una  persona  de  sn  cspecie. 

20.  Y  sin  embargo,  vca  Y.,  ^1  tiene  cl  pi6  en  dos  zapatos,  ^  y  que  mas 
tiene  ? 

21.  Dejeme  V.  pensar,  [  ab  !  si,  el  pobre  sefior  tiene  todavia  otra  cosa 
mas. — Bien,  pues,  digala  V.,  que  se  acaba  el  ejercicio. 

22.  Tiene  su  alma  en  su  cuerpo.  Hombre,  calle  V.,  que  aqui  rieno 
61  en  persona, — Si,  en  nombrando  al  ruin  de  Eoma,  luego  asoma. 

23.  Buenos  dias,  D.  Juan. — Tengalos  V.  muy  buenos,  D.  Periquito, 
I  qu6  se  ofrece  ?  Vengo  a  pedirle  a  V.  diez  pesos  prestados,  que  me  ven- 
<Ii'ian  de  perilla,  ;  porque  me  veo  negro  ! 

24.  Hombre  pidaselos  V.  al  Sr.  De  V.  que  csta  en  fondos,  en  cuanto  a 
mi  me  encuentro  sin  blanca. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  I  understand  your  brotber  was  left  entirely  in  tbe  lurch  ?  Not  at 
all ;  on  tbe  contrary,  be  came  off  (turned  out)  much  better  than  I  did. 

2.  How  did  he  feel  when  be  learned  that  I  had  heard  of  the  whole 
matter  ?     He  was  thunderstruck,  and  could  not  give  me  any  reply. 

3.  How  are  yon  going  to  manage  in  such  a  case  as  that  ?  I  have  only 
to  make  a  virtue  of  necessity. 

4.  I  think  there  is  little  danger  of  his  not  succeeding ;  what  do  you 
think  (what  appears  to  you)  ?  Not  the  least ;  he  is  very  prudent,  and 
knows  how  to  turn  every  thing  to  account. 

5.  Do  you  remember  when  that  article  was  published  ?  I  do  not  re- 
member exactly ;  but  it  appears  to  mo  it  must  have  been  some  time  in 
last  November. 

6.  You  see  that  is  what  I  told  you  the  other  day  would  take  place. 
Yes,  that  is  true ;  but  you  seem  to  have  forgotten  tlio  condition  I  men- 
tioned to  your  friend  as  he  was  going  out. 

7.  Is  Mr.  Martinez  not  going  to  bo  here,  as  he  promised  ?  I  am  ex- 
pecting him. — We  shall  wait  until  seven  o'clock ;  if  he  comes  before  that 
time,  well  and  good;  if  not,  we  shall  go  on  with  the  business  of  tbe 
eveniuff  without  him. 


348 


LESSON      LXV. 


8.  Well,  let  us  understand  each  other  before  going  any  farther.  It 
seems  to  me  we  understand  each  other  perfectly ;  the  thing  is  as  clear  as 
daylight. 

9.  Oh,  Charles !  I  am  so  glad  to  see  you !  you  have  just  come  at  the 
nick  of  time ;  "we  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  your  company  at  dinner. 
You  are  very  kind ;  but  really  you  must  excuse  rae ;  I  have  a  friend 
waiting  for  me. 

10.  You  lost  your  coat?  how  did  you  come  home  in  the  cold  without 
it  ?    Alexander  lent  me  one  of  his  that  fitted  me  exactly. 

11.  No  sooner  said  than  done  ;  he  took  his  hat  and  went  out  in  search 
of  him,  notwithstanding  it  rained  in  torrents. 

12.  You  may  be  at  ease  in  your  mind  on  that  score ;  I  shall  manage  to 
get  rid  of  hira  very  soon. 

13.  I  wish  you  would  come  to  the  point,  for  up  to  the  present  I  have 
l)een  unable  to  find  out  what  you  mean. 

14.  One  would  have  said,  from  the  manner  in  which  he  was  (tiendolo) 
decked  out,  that  he  was  going  to  the  theatre  or  to  a  ball  instead  of  to 
the  office. 


LESSON    LXV. 


Aventurarse. 
Apretar. 
Cobrar. 
Desafiar. 

Escaldar. 

Enhebrar. 

Enzarzar. 

Enfadarse. 

Hilar. 

Jnntar. 

Madrugar. 

Prevenir. 

Eelucir. 

Sustentar. 

Trasquilar. 

Tapar. 

Trampear. 

Tragar. 


To  venture. 

To  tighten,  to  urge. 

To  collect. 

To  challenge. 

To  scald. 

To  thread  (a  needle),  to  link. 

To  sow  discord. 

To  get  angry. 

To  spin. 

To  join. 

To  rise  early. 

To  warn,  to  inform. 

To  shine. 

To  sustain. 

To  shear. 

To  cover  up,  to  close  up. 

To  impose  upon,  to  deceive. 

To  swallow. 


LESSOIiT     LXV. 


.349 


TrasnocLar. 

To  sit  up  all  night. 

Terminar, 

To  terminate. 

Tolerar, 

To  tolerate. 

Tornar. 

To  return,  to  do  over  again. 

Tranquilizar 

• 

To  tranquillize,  to  make  any  one's 
mind  easy. 

Tutear. 

To  address  any  one  in  the  second 
person  singular,  to  speak  fa- 
mOiarly  to. 

Expresivo. 

Expressive. 

Justo. 

Just. 

Duro. 

Hard. 

Necio. 

Silly,  foolish. 

Practice. 

Practised,  experienced. 

Ciego. 

Blind. 

Tuerto. 

Blind  of  one  eye. 

Trigueuo. 

Dark  (of  the  complexion). 

Tin  to. 

Colored,  red. 

Tonto. 

Foolish. 

Traraposo. 

Deceitful,  swindling. 

Tenninantc. 

Decided. 

Tranquilo. 

Tranquil,  quiet. 

A  boi-botones. 

Bubbling,  hurriedly,  confusedly. 

Palabras  raayores. 

Offensive  words  or  expressions. 

No  ser  rana 

To  be  able  and  expert. 

1  Caramba ! 

Dear  me  ;  Hala ! 

Asador. 

Spit  (for  roasting). 

Cola.                     TaU. 

Copo. 

Flake  (of  snow). 

Dauza.                  Dance. 

Entendedor. 

One  who  under- 

Divisa,                 Motto. 

stands. 

FamUiaridad.        Familiarity. 

Ilerrero. 

Blacksmith. 

Miel.                       Honey. 

Menosprecio. 

Scorn,  contempt. 

Mona.                    Monkey. 

Ilortelano. 

Gardener. 

Fama.                   Fame,  notoriety. 

Dado. 

Dye. 

Moderacion.          Moderation. 

Proverbio. 

Proverb. 

Oveja.                   Sheep. 

Sayo. 

Sort  of  loose  coat 

Necesidad.            Necessity. 

or  jacket. 

Pareja.                  Pair. 

Pccbo. 

Breast. 

Rana.                    Frog. 

350 


LESSON     LXV. 


RatoD. 

Mouse. 

Viga. 

Beam. 

Tio. 

Uncle. 

Tenacidad. 

Tenacity. 

Bebedor. 

Toper,  tippler. 

Tos. 

Cough. 

(All  these  are  masculine.) 

Soliloquio. 

Soliloquy. 

Tirabuzon. 

Corkscrew. 

Suegro. 

Father-ia-law. 

Trineo. 

Sleigh. 

Sugeto. 

Person,    indi- 

Tacto. 

Touch. 

vidual. 

Talento. 

Talent. 

Sobrino. 

Nephew. 

Telegrafo. 

Telegraph. 

Sin6iiimo. 

Synonjme. 

Tenedor. 

Fork. 

Silencio. 

Silence. 

Terraino. 

Terra. 

Sentido. 

Sense. 

Trigo. 

"Wheat. 

Semblante. 

Countenance, 

Term6metro. 

Thermometer. 

looks. 

Torno. 

Lathe. 

Secreto. 

Secret. 

Toque. 

Touch,  ringing 

Trato. 

Intercourse, 

(of  bells). 

treatment. 

Titulo. 

Title. 

Traves. 

Breadth  (of  a 
thing). 

Trago. 

Draught,  driak. 

COMPOt 

5ITI0X. 

A  buena  gana  no  hay  pan  duro. 

A  lo  hecho  pecho. 

A  quien  se  hace  de  miel  las  moscas  se 

lo  comen. 
A  quien  madruga  Dies  le  ayuda. 
Al  buen  entendedor  con  media  palabra 

basta. 
Al  fin  se  canta  la  gloria. 
Antes  que  te  cases  mira  lo  que  haces. 
Antes  cabeza  dc  raton  que  cola  de  leon. 

Aunque  la  mona  se  vista  de  seda  mona 

se  queda. 
Bicn  vengas  mal  si  vienes  solo. 
Cada  oveja  con  su  pareja  {or  Dies  los 

cria  y  ellos  se  juntan). 
Cada    uno   juzga  por  su    corazon  el 

ageno. 
Cada  uno  hace  de  su  capa  un  sayo. 


Hunger  is  the  best  saurc. 
What  is  done  canuot  be  helped. 
Smear  yourself  ■with   honey,   an  1  you 

will  be  devoured  by  flies. 
The  early  bird  catches  the  worm. 
A  word  to  the  wise  is  sufficient. 

Boast  not  till  the  victory  is  won. 

Look  before  you  leap. 

Better  be  the  head  of  a  mouse  than 

the  tail  of  a  lion. 
A  hog  in  armor  is  still  but  a  hog. 

Misfortune  never  comes  alone. 
Birds  of  a  feather  flock  together. 

Every  man    measures    other  people's 

com  in  his  own  bushel. 
Every  one  may  do  as  he  likes  with  his 

own. 


LKSSON      LXV. 


351 


Cada  uno  sube  dondc  le  apricta  cl  za- 

pato. 
Cobra  buena  fama  y  6chate  a  dormir. 

Como    el  perro  del  hortelano,  que  ni 

come  ni  deja  comer. 
Cuenta  y  razon  sustentan  amistad. 
Del  mal  el  menos. 
Debajo  de  una  mala  capa  se  encuentra 

uu  buen  bebedor. 
Dime  con  quien  andas,  y  to  dire  quien 

ores. 
Donde  fueres  baz  como  vieres. 
Lo  mejor  de  los  dados  es  no  jugarlos. 

En  boca  cerrada  no  entran  moscas. 
En  casa  del  herrero  asador  de  palo. 

En  ticrra  de  ciegos  el  tuerto  es  rcy. 

Gato  escaldado  del  agua  fria  huye. 
Ir  por  lana  y  volver  trasquilado. 
Hombre  prevenido  nunca  fue  vencido. 
La  caiidad  bien  ordenada  cmpieza  por 

uno  mismo. 
La  mucba  familiaridad  es  causa  de  me- 

nosprecio. 
La  necesidad  carecc  de  ley. 
La  tenacidad  es  divisa  del  necio. 

Lo  que  no  se  puedc  remediar  se  ba  de 

aguantar. 
Mas  vale  tardc  que  nunca. 
Mar  vale  pajaro  en  mano  que  ciento 

volando. 
Mi6ntras  en  mi  casa  estoy  rcy  soy. 
Nadie  puede  decir  de  esta  agua  no  be- 

bere. 
No  es  oro  todo  lo  que  rcluce. 
No  hay  mal  que  por  bien  no  venga. 
No  la  hagas  no  la  temas. 
Poquito  a.  poco  bilaba  la  vieja  el  copo. 
Quien  bien  te  quiere  te  harii  llorar. 

Quien  muclio  habla  muclio  yerra. 


Every  one  knows  where  the  shoo  pinch- 
es him. 

Get  the  name  of  early  rising,  and  you 
may  lie  a-bed  all  day. 

Like  the  dog  in  the  manger. 

Short  reckoning  and  long  friends. 

Of  two  evils,  the  lesser. 

We  should  not  judge  the  book  by  the 
cover. 

Tell  me  your  company  and  I  will  tell 
you  what  you  are. 

When  at  Rome,  do  as  Rome  does. 

The  best  throw  at  dice  is  to  throw  them 
away. 

A  close  mouth  catches  no  flies. 

No  one  goes  worse  shod  than  the  shoe- 
maker's wife. 

In  the  land  of  the  blind,  the  one-eyed 
man  is  king. 

A  burnt  child  dreads  the  fire. 

The  biter  bit. 

Forewarned,  forearmed. 

Charity  begins  at  home. 

Too  much  familiarity  breeds  contempt. 

Necessity  has  no  law. 

A  wise  man  will  change  his  mind ;  a 

fool  never. 
What  can't  be  cured  must  be  endured. 

Better  late  than  never. 

A  bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two  in  the 

bush. 
A  man's  house  is  his  castle. 
No  one  can  tell  what  is  to  happen  to 

him. 
All  is  not  gold  that  glitters. 
It's  an  ill  wind  that  blows  nobody  good. 
Do  no  evil,  and  fear  no  harm. 
Rome  was  not  built  in  a  day. 
Spare  the  rod,  and  you  will  spoil  the 

child. 
Who  speaks  much  often  blunders. 


LESSON     LXV. 


Qiilen  no  so  avcntura  no  pasa  la  mar. 
Ya  que  la  casa  sc  quema  calentemonos. 
Vcmos  la  paja  en  el  ojo  ageno  y  no  la 

viga  en  cl  nucstro, 
Tu  enemioro  cs  dc  tu  oflcio. 


Xcver  venture,  never  win. 

Lot  us  make  the  best  of  a  bad  job. 

We  see  the  mote  in  our  neighbor's  eye, 

and  not  the  beam  in  our  ov/n. 
Two  of  a  trade  never  agree. 


CON YERSATION  AND  YEESION. 

1.  J  Hay  muclios  proverbios  en  espafiol  ?  Uay  inucliisimos ;  en  todas 
las  lenguas  los  hay,  pero  en  la  espauola  creo  quo  liay  tantos  que  si  sc  reu- 
niesen  todos  forraarian  varies  vohimencs. 

2.  jLe  gustan  a  V.  los  proverbios?  Si,  sctiov,  son  muy  expresivos, 
pero  debemos  usarlos,  como  decia  B.  Quijotc,  con  moderaclon  y  no  a 
borbotones  como  Sanclio  Panza, 

3.  En  eso  tieno  Y.  razon,  porque  quien  mucho  Labia  muclio  yerra.— 
V.  acaba  de  aplicar  eso  muy  bien ;  pero  es  imposible  que  practiquemos  con 
todos  los  que  trae  esta  leccion,  en  este  ejercicio, 

4.  Sin  embargo,  al  que  madruga  Dios  Ic  ayuda. — Y.  dice  bien,  y  quien 
no  sc  aventura  no  pasa  la  mar. 

5.  Espero  que  quien  nos  oiga  conversar  introduciendo  tanto  refran, 
no  diga  de  ellos  lo  que  se  dice  de  los  males. — i  Qu6  dicen  dc  los  males  ? 
Bien  vengas  mal  si  vienes  solo. 

6.  ;  Oh  1  no,  seflor,  en  primer  lugar  los  proverbios  no  son  males,  y  en 
scgundo  lugar  a  nosotros  nos  gustan,  y  quereraos  practicar  con  ellos,  para 
aprenderlos. — Y.  esta  en  lo  justo,  y  ademiis,  cada  uno  hace  de  su  capa  ua 
sayo. 

7.  i  Ola,  amiguito !  Y.  mc  parece  practice  en  la  materia,  pero  no  pienso 
Y.  quo  yo  soy  rana,  porque  debajo  de  una  mala  capa  se  encuentra  un 
bucn  bebedor. — Cararaba  [  que  no  me  deja  Y.  meter  baza !  no  so  dira  do 
Y.  aquello  de,  en  boca  cerrada  no  entran  moscas. 

8.  Yamos  amigo,  ese  refran  vino  por  los  cabcUos. — Pnes  si  vino  por 
los  cabellos,  a  polo  vino,  ademas,  que  Y.  me  parece  ser  de  aquellos  que 
vea  la  paja  en  el  ojo  ageno  y  no  la  viga  en  el  suyo. 

9.  No  se  ,enfade  Y.,  amigo,  que  quien  bien  lo  quiere  le  hard  llorar. — 
No,  ssilor,  no  me  enfado,  pero  ya  veo  que  no  es  oro  todo  lo  que  reluce. 

10.  J  Bravo !  bravo !  ya  va  Y.  aprendiendo  a  enzarzar  refranes,  lo 
hace  Y.  cual  otro  Sancho  Panza,  j  yo,  coa  toda  mi  pructica,  he  ido  por 
lana  y  he  vuelto  trasquilado. — Su  ejemplo  de  Y.  me  irii  enseilando ;  po- 
quito  d  poco  hilaba  la  vieja  el  copo,  y  dime  con  quien  andas  j  te  dire 
quidn  eres. 

11.  |Qu6  hombre!  si  Y.  va  a  ganar  a  su  maestro!  pero  no  hay  mal 
quo  por  bien  no  venga ;  Y.  me  hace  reir  con  sus  refranes. — Bien,  del  mal 
el  meuo.?,  pero  D.  Manuel,  ^os  posible  que  Ic  haya  dc  ganar  su  discipulo? 


LESSON     LXV.  353 

12.  No  se,  no  pucdo  decir  de  esta  agua  no  bebcre,  y  lo  quo  no  se  pucdo 
remediar  se  lia  de  aguantai*,  y  al  fin  se  cauta  la  gloria.— jZape,  como  los 
enhebra !  pero  yo  no  me  doy  por  vencido,  seflor  maestro,  porqne  yo  ya 
se  aquello  de  cobra  buena  fama  y  6chato  a  dormir. 

13.  La  tenacidad  es  divisa  del  nccio,  y  al  buen  entendedor  con  media 
palabra  basta. — Si,  pero  esas  ya  son  palabras  mayores,  y  a  quien  se  haco 
de  raiel  las  moscas  se  lo  comen,  y  mi^ntras  en  mi  casa  estoy,  I'ey  soy. 

14.  Espero,  D.  Carlos,  quo  no  me  quiera  V.  poner  fuera  do  su  casa. — 
No  hombre,  pero  estos  refranes  son  tan  expresivos  que  le  bacon  decir  a 
uno  mas  do  lo  que  quiere ;  pero  a  lo  becho  pecbo  y  ya  que  Y.  me  dcsa- 
fio,  siga  la  danza. 

15.  Bueno,  si  V.  lo  quiere,  ya  quo  la  casa  se  quema  calentemonos ;  pe- 
ro bien  haria  V.  antes  que  se  case  en  mirar  lo  que  bace,  porque  cada  uno 
sabe  donde  le  aprieta  el  zapato. — ^Amigo  mio,  V.  no  sabo  de  la  misa  la 
media ;  yo  nunca  doy  mi  brazo  a  torcer,  y  antes  quiero  scr  cabeza  de 
raton  que  cola  do  Icon. 

IG.  Si,  seuor,  pero  aunque  la  mona  so  vista  de  seda,  mona  se  queda,  no 
sea  V.  como  el  perro  del  bortelano,  quo  ni  come  ni  deja  comer,  y  acudr- 
dese  V.  que  cuenta  y  razon  sustcntan  amistad  y  lo  mejor  de  los  dados  es 
no  jugarlos. — Basta,  basta,  hombre  me  doy  por  vencido. 

17.  No  la  hagas  no  la  temas;  tu  eneraigo  es  de  tu  oficio. — Pero,  D. 
Cai'los,  lo  repito.     .     .     . 

18.  La  caridad  bien  ordenada  entra  por  si  misma. — Pero  si  repito 
que.     .     .     . 

19.  Donde  quiera  que  fueres  baz  como  vieres. — Sellor,  mo  rindo. — Mas 
vale  tarde  que  nunca. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  "Well,  Charles,  so  you  have  come  at  last.  Tes,  better  late  than 
never,  you  knovr ;  but  if  it  bad  continued  raining  I  Avoidd  not  have 
como  at  all. 

2.  Are  you  going  out?  I  thought  vre  were  going  together  to  the 
theatre  tbis  evening. — I  must  go  out  now ;  but  should  I  get  back  as  soon 
as  I  expect,  we  shall  still  have  time  to  go  to  the  theatre. 

3.  If  you  undertake  that  journey,  I  should  like  to  be  your  companion. 
It  is  rather  doubtful  at  present  whether  I  shall ;  but  if  I  do,  I  would  bo 
delighted  to  have  your  company. 

4.  If  the  directors  establish  that  as  a  general  rule,  very  many  persons 
wiU  suffer  great  loss. 

5.  The  conditions  were,  that  if  ho  did  not  discover  the  error,  or  if, 
after  having  discovered  it,  he  could  not  rectify  it,  he  should  lose  his  place. 


354  LESSOK     LXV. 

6.  lie  said  ho  would  have  no  rest  until  lie  should  hear  some  news  of 
that  poor  young  man. 

7.  He  promised  that  I  should  have  the  place,  if  it  were  in  his  power 
to  procure  it  for  me. 

8.  In  case  his  efforts  should  not  be  attended  with  success,  you  may 
rely  upon  me  to  do  all  in  my  power  to  advance  {proynover)  your  interests, 

9.  Their  embarrassments  will  not  cease  so  long  as  they  do  not  intro- 
duce some  system  of  reasonable  economy. 

10.  Peter  tells  his  stories  so  well,  and  with  such  an  appearance  of 
truth,  that  one  is  actually  tempted  to  believe  them. 

11.  They  made  so  many  conditions,  that  it  was  clear  they  had  no  wish 
to  help  us. 

12.  "Why  did  you  not  take  that  book?    I  would  not  take  it  because 
some  leaves  were  wanting. 

13.  If  there  is  any  thing  within  (in)  my  reach  with  which  I  can  serve 
you,  just*  let  me  know. 

14.  "Whatever  he  may  have  been  in  his  youth,  he  is  now  a  respectable 
man,  and  beloved  (loved)  by  everybody  that  knows  him. 

*  English  words  la  italics,  not  to  bo  translated. 


GENERAL  OBSERVATIONS 


GRAMMATICAL  AND  IDIOMATICAL  PECULL\RITIES  OF  THE  SPANISH  LAN- 
GUAGE, NOT  HITHERTO  TREATED  OF  IN  THE  GRAMM^VR. 


In  order  to  acquii-e  a  thorough  knowledge  of  a  language,  it 
is  necessary  to  compare  carefully  the  different  uses  of  the 
several  parts  of  speech  in  the  native  language  and  in  the  one 
proposed  to  be  learned. 

The  sense  of  a  whole  passage  is  very  often  changed  by  the 
undue  suppression  or  omission  of  an  article,  a  preposition,  or  a 
conjunction;  by  using  one  tense  of  a  verb  for  anotlier;  placing 
an  adjective  before  its  noun  when,  in  order  to  convey  the  idea 
intended,  it  should  go  after  it ;  and  not  unfrequently  by  trans- 
lating a  certain  part  of  speech  by  a  word  which,  although  its 
appearance  would  lead  us  to  take  it  for  the  equivalent  of  the 
word  to  be  interpreted,  bears  in  reality  no  relation  to  the  sense 
designed  to  be  expressed. 

We  have  deemed  it  convenient,  therefore,  to  devote  a 
few  pages  of  our  Combined  Method  to  suc^i  general  remarks 
as  are  necessary  to  guide  the  learner,  and  which,  if  attentively 
observed,  will,  after  the  study  of  the  Spanish  exercises  con- 
tained in  the  preceding  lessons,  enable  him  to  compose  purely 
and  idiomatically  in  the  Castilian  language. 

The  Definite  Article. 
1.  It  has  already  been  observed  in  previous  lessons,  which 
are   the   most  usual   cases    where   the   definite   article  is   ex- 
pressed in  the  Spanish  language ;    but  there  are  many  others 
in  which  it  would  be  altogether  incorrect  to  express  or  omit  it 


356 


GRAMMATICAL      PECULIArwITIES. 


in  Spanish,  as  in  English,  as  may  be  seen  from  the  following 
example?,  v/hich  may  serve  as  a  general  rule  for  all  those  of 
the  same  kind  : 


6  Esta  cl  rey  en  palacio  ? 
Es  costumbre  en  Espaiia. 
Su  tio  firmo  por  61,  en  ausencia  dc 

su  padre. 
Dccia  vcrdad, 
A  tres  de  junio. 
Tuvo  valor  para  respondcr. 
A  mediados  de  ajiosto. 


Is  the  king  in  the  palace  ? 
It  is  the  custom  in  Spain. 
His  uncle  signed  for  him,  in  the  absence 

of  his  father. 
He  told  Oie  truth. 
On  the  3d  of  June. 
He  had  the  courage  to  answer. 
In  the  middle  of  Aufnist. 


2.  In  Spanish  the  article  is  at  times  accompanied  by  a 
preposition  not  required  in  English ;  as, 

Hace  del  caballero.  |  He  plays  tlie  gentleman. 


Indefinite  Article. 
3.  The  so-called  indefinite  article  (more  properly  adjective) 
is,  as  has  been  observed  in  one  of  the  early  lessons,  fi-equently 
employed  in  English;  and  when  translating  from  the  latter 
language  into  Spanish,  we  either  suppress  it  entirely  or  render 
it  by  some  other  part  of  speech ;  as. 


Tiene  derecho  sobre  este  caudal. 

A  distancia  de    .    .     , 

Cadiz  es  puerto  de  mar. 

Es  otro  Alejandro. 

En  medio  siglo  {or  dentro  de  medio 

Biglo).  |> 

Volveremos  dentro  de  media  hora. 
Las  obras  de  otro  (or  obras  agenas). 

Hubo  tiempo  en  que    .     .    . 


He  has  a  right  to  (or  a  claim  upon) 

this  capital. 
At  a  distance  of    .     .     . 
Cadiz  is  a  seaport  (town). 
He  is  awother  Alexander. 
In  half  a  century. 

We  shall  return  in  half  an  hour. 

The  works   of  another  (or  another's 

works). 
There  was  a  time  in  which    .     .    . 


Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns. 

4.  The  use  and  repetition  of  the  personal  and  possessive 

pronouns  are  more  frequent  in  English  than  in  Sjjanish ;  and 

that  seeming  redundance  is  essential  to  the  clearness  and  f)rc- 

cision  of  the  English  language ;  but  Spanish  syntax  docs  not 


GRAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES.  357 

submit  to  such  encumbrances,  and  they  are,  therefore,  generally 
supi^ressed,  as  will  be  seen  from  the  following  examples  : 


Es  verdad, 

Llueve. 

Hace  frio. 

6  Porque  es  raeaester  ? 

El  mismo  principe. 

Su  misma  madre. 

El  mismo  lo  vi6. 


It  is  true. 

//  is  raining  (or  it  raius). 

It  is  cold. 

Why  is  it  necessary  ? 

The  prince  /timselE 

His  mother  /jereelf. 

He  saw  it  Aunself. 


5.  Before  leaving  the  .pronouns,  it  is  proper  to  remark  that 
07ie  and  07}es,  so  often  used  in  English  composition,  to  avoid 
the  unpleasant  repetition  of  nouns,  have  no  equivalent  what- 
ever in  Spanish,  and  are  lience  to  be  left  out  in  translating  from 
the  former  language  to  the  latter ;  as, 

ft  Tiene  V.  caballos  ?  I  Have  you  horses  (or  any  horses)  ? 

Tengo  dos  buenos.  |  I  have  two  good  ones. 

6.  Personal  pronouns,  when  used  redundantly  in  English, 
as  in  the  following  example,  are  never  expressed  in  Sjjanish : 

Ambos  perecieron.  |  Both  of  them  perished  (or  were  lost). 

7.  Even  whole  members  of  sentences  are,  not  unfrequently, 
suppressed  in  translating  from  English  into  Spanish ;  as, 

Todo  no  podia  entrar  en  un  clogio,  I  All  could  not  find  place  in  a  eulogy, 
mas  si  en  una  satira.  |      but  all  could  find  place  in  a  satire. 

Observe  that  the  repetition  of  the  Avords  italicized  in  the 
English  sentence  is  avoided  by  means  of  the  adverb  s'l  in  Span- 
isli,  which  serves  to  correct  the  negation  expressed  in  the  first 
member  of  the  phrase,  thus  rendering  the  fatter  at  once  shorter 
and  more  elegant. 

Ellipsis. 

8.  There-  are  certain  short  modes  of  expression,  certain 
grammatical  laconicisms,  peculiar  to  the  English  language, 
which  are  not  admissible  in  Spanish ;  the  ellipses  must  in  such 
cases  often  be  filled  up ;  as. 

Jamas    hubo    orador    que    hablase     Never  did  orator  speak  better. 

mejor. 
De  ahi  dimanan  estos  errores.  Hence  these  errors. 


358 


GRAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES. 


No  puede  pensar  en  haar  mal. 
La  ciudad  reducida  a  cenizas. 
No  va  mal  para  ser  nifio. 
Su  madre  bahada  en  lagiimas. 
Aunqiie  todos  estuviesen  juntos. 
Esto  es  por  lo  que  loca  d  su  persona. 


He  cannot  think  of  evil. 

The  city  in  ashes. 

■Not  bad  for  a  child. 

Her  mother  in  tears. 

They  were  all  together. 

So   much  for  his  person  (or  personal 

appearance). 
For  and  against. 
Sword  in  hand. 


En  pro  y  e7i  contra. 

Con  la  espada  en  la  mano. 

N.  B. — It  is  also  correct  to  say,  Espada  en  mano. 


Inversion. 

Although  we  have  spoken  at  some  length,  in  Lesson  LI.,  on 
the  subject  of  inversion,  we  imagine  the  learner  will  not  be 
displeased  to  meet  here  a  few  well-chosen  examples  which  will 
give  him  a  still  clearer  idea  of  the  order  observed  in  Spanish 
for  the  expression  of  ideas,  and  the  consequent  difference  of 
construction  between  that  language  and  the  English. 

9.  The  substantive  often  precedes  its  adjective;  as, 

He   is   the   most  perfect  man  in  the 

world. 
False  key. 
False  witness. 
Her  youngest  son. 


Es    el    hombre    mas    perfecto    del 

mundo. 
Llave  falsa. 
Testigo  falso. 
Su  hijo  mas  jovcn. 


10.  Instances  occur,  however,  of  the  inversion  taking  place 
in  English,  while  the  natural  construction  is  followed  in  Span- 
ish ;  especially  in  the  case  of  past  participles  acting  as  verbal 
adjectives ;  as, 

Una  vez  destruido  este  fundamento, 
todo  se  viene  abajo. 


Admitida  esta  libertad, 
puede    .     .     . 


el  hombre 


This  foundation  being  once  destroyed, 
the  whole  (edifice)  comes  to  the 
ground. 

This  liberty  (being)  once  admitted,  man 
'may    .     .    . 


11.  In  all  cases  similar  to  that  of  the  following  example, 
the  possessives  mlo,  tuyo,  siiyo  are  placed  alter  the  substantive, 
and  then,  of  course,  they  retain  their  final  syllable ;  as. 

El  otro  hijo  myo.  (  His  other  son. 

12.  The  same, ideas  are  in  not  a  few  instances  presented  in 


GRAMMATICAL     P  E  C  UL  I A  KIT  I  E  S  . 


359 


Spanish  in  an  order  very  different  from  that  followed  in  Eno-- 
lish;  as, 

It  is  not  to  destroy  that  he  has  come, 

but  to  build  up. 
I  see  (very)  well  that     .     ,     . 
If  you  had  an  agreement  to  make. 


No  ha  veiiido  para  destruir,  sine  para 

edificar. 
Bien  veo  que         .     . 
Si  tuviese  V.  que  hacer  una  contrata. 


{If  you  had  to  make  an  agreement  woold,  of  course,  also  be  an  allowable  constmction 
in  English.) 


No  tenia  razon  aqucl  filosofo  que 

decia  que    .     .     . 
Toca  remunerar  los  servicios  al  que 

los  recibi6. 
Entre  los  Griegos,  los  que     .     .     . 
El  que  mas  hablaba. 
Cien  veces  mas  quisiera  yo  que   .  .  . 
Solo  Dios  es  inmutable. 


That  philosopher  who  said  that    .    .    . 

was  wrong. 
It  is  for  him  who  received  the  services 

to  reward  them. 
Those  amongst  the  Greeks,  who    .    .   . 
He  who  spoke  the  most. 
I  would  prefer  a  thousand  times  that .  . 
God  alone  is  unchanging. 


Nouns. 
13-  There  is  a  striking  difference  to  be  observed  in  the  use 
of  nouns  in  the  two  languages ;  we  sometimes  meet  nouns  in 
the  singular  in  English,  while  in  Spanish  they  are  used  in  the 
plural  only,  and  vice-versd : 


Plural 
Mirar  con  malos  ojcs, 
Puso  los  ojos  en  mi. 
Dar  oidos  a     .     .     . 
Prestar  oidos. 
De  pies  a  cabeza. 
Por  todas paries. 
Juego  de  77ianos. 
Se  presento  con  los  ojos  en  el  suelo. 

Sirtffular. 
A  pie  descalzo. 
Estar  en  pie. 
A  remo  y  vela. 
En  toda  suerte  de  n^ocios. 
No  son  ducuos  de  si. 


Siiijular. 
To  look  with  evil  eye. 
He  set  his  eye  on  me. 
To  give  ear  to     .     .     . 
To  lend  an  ear. 
From  head  to  foot. 
In  every  direction. 
Sleight  of  hand. 
He  came  forward  with  dovmcast  eye. 

Plural. 
With  haircfeet  (or  in  (his)  haxQfeet). 
To  stand  on  (one's) /(?rf. 
With  oars  and  sails. 
In  all  sorts  (or  kinds)  of  business. 
They  are  not  masters  of  tlicmselvcs. 


One  Part  of  Speech,  for  Another. 
14.  It  is  not  uncommon,  in  comparing  English  and  Spanish 
composition,  to  see  adjectives  translated  by  substantives,  ad- 


3Q0 


GRAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES. 


verbs  by  substantives,  substantives  by  verbs,  and  vice-versa. 
Sometioies,  in  translating,  difficulties,  appearing  at  first  sight 
almost  insurmountable,  are  overcome  by  tlie  simple  substitu- 
tion of  one  part  of  si^eech  I'or  anotber. 


Adjectives  for  Substantives. 


Pica    de    ffiiapo    {or  presumido  de 

guapo). 
Es  acusado  de  impio. 
Sc  ^ouQfurioso. 


He  piques  himself  on  his  bravery. 

He  is  accused  of  impiety. 
He  gets  into  a  fury. 


Substantives  for  Adverbs,  and  vice-versS.. 


Aunque  idolatras  de  orlgen. 
Come  ezcesivamenle. 
Tuvo  la  dicha  de  salvarse. 
Por  desgracia  nada  oyeron. 


Although  originally  idolaters. 
He  eats  to  excess. 
Happily  for  him  he  escaped. 
Unforimiaiehj  they  heard  nothinj 


Substantives  for  Verbs,  and  vice-versa. 


IIabl6  lo  mejor  que  jow^o. 
Debe  probar  su  diclw. 
Como  acoslumhra. 
Despues  de  almorzar. 
Antes  de  comer. 


He  spoke  to  the  best  of  his  ability. 
He  must  prove  what  he  says. 
According  to  his  custom. 
After  breakfast. 
Before  dinner. 


Verbs  for  Pronotins. 

Hay    historiadores     que     aseguran  I  Some  historians  assure  us  that     ,     , 
que    ...  I 

Of  Verbs  in  General. 
15.  We  very  often  find  verbs  active  with  tb.e  indefinite  se, 
and  sometimes  the  passive  verb  with  the  particle  se,  used  in 
Spanish  to  express  the  same  idea  conveyed  in  English  by 
passive,  and  sometimes  also  by  active  verbs;  one  tense  trans- 
lated by  another  difierent  tense,  one  number  substituted  in  the 
place  of  another,  one  person  for  other  persons,  and  at  tinies 
even  the  same  person  translated  by  any  or  all  the  others,  ac- 
cording to  the  sense  desired  to  be  conveyed. 

Passive  in  English. 


El  concilio  sc  cclebrdba  en  Pisa. 
El  libro  que  se  Ic  atribiaje. 
Esto  se  encien-a  en  la  proposicion. 
Esto  debe  contarse  por  nada. 
Cuando  se  les  ruega  que  respondan. 


The  council  was  add  at  Pisa. 
The  book  which  is  aitrilulcd  to  him. 
That  is  contained  in  the  proposition. 
This  is  to  be  counted  for  nothing. 
When  they  a?-e  requested  to  answer. 


GRAM.  ilATICAL     PKCULIARITIES. 


361 


Active  in  £iig:lish. 


Viene  4  junlarse  con  su  familia. 
Se  caso  con  la  duquesa. 
Se  hicieron  u  la  vela. 


He  comes  to  join  his  family. 
He  married  the  duchess. 
They  set  sail. 


The  Indicative  or  Subjunctive  for  the  Infinitive. 


Le  mando  que  callase. 

Es  reputado  per  hombre  que  nada 

posee. 
Espero  me  responda  V. 


He  ordered  him  to  hold  his  tongue  (or 

to  he  silent). 
He  is  supposed  to  possess  nothing. 

I  expect  you  to  a-nswer  me. 


One  Tense  for  Another. 


(J^e  habre  yo  dado  un  derecho  que  \  Have  I  then  given  thee  a  right  which  I 


no  tengo  ? 
4  Porque  solo  los  hombres  habrdn  de 

dcgcncrar  ? 
Cuanto  mas  hagan,  mduos  ganaran. 


do  not  possess  myself? 
Why  must  mankind  alone  degenerate  ? 


The  more  they  do,  the  less  they  will 
gain. 

Que  un  mucrto  rcsuscile,  no  es  cosa  !  It  is  no  common  thing  for  a  dead  (man) 
comun.  I      to  resuscitate. 

One  ITuaiber  for  Another  in  Verbs. 

Son  las  seis.  I  It  is  six  o'clock. 

No  le  quedan  mas  que  trcs  hijos.         |  He  has  only  three  children  left. 

One  Person  for  Another. 

Xosotros  somas  los  barbaros.  ]  It  is  we  that  are  barbarians. 

Si  hubiesai  sido  ellos  los  vituperados.  |  IfitAat/ been  they  that  they  had  blamed. 

Ilode  of  Asking:  Questions  and  forming  Negations  with  Verbs. 

16.  The  auxiliary  do,  used  in  English  in  asking  questions, 
whether  negatively  or  positively,  is  to  he  lost  sight  of  in  trans- 
lating into  Spanish,  inasmuch  as  the  simple  form  of  the  verb 
contains  all  that  is  required  for  that  purpose,  as  may  be  seen  in 
the  following  examples: 


^  Van  Yds.  algunas  veces  4  la  opera  ? 
/  Sabia  V.  que   debiamos  venir  tan 

temprano  ? 
Xo   crcia  que   debiesen  Vds.  venir 

hasta  las  tres. 


Do  you  sometimes  go  to  the  opera  ? 
Did  you  know  *bat  we  were  to  come  so 

early  ? 
I  did  not  think  you  were  to  come  until 

three  o'clock. 


17.  Nor  is  it  to  be  translated  into  Spanish  when  it  stands 
IG 


362  GKAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES. 

in  the  English  sentence  merely  for  the  purpose  of  giving  more 
emphasis  to  the  expression ;  as, 

Yo  creia  que  no  iban  nunca  al  teatro.  I  I  thought  they  never  \f  ent  to  the  theatre. 

Si,  senor,  van  a  menudo.  |  Yes,  sir,  they  do  go  often. 

18.  It  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  a  verb,  to  avoid  the 
repetition  of  the  latter ;  in  all  such  cases  it  is  to  bo  rendered 
into  Spanish  by  a  simple  particle  (positive  or  negative,  as  re- 
quired by  the  sense),  or  else  the  verb  expressing  the  action 
must  itself  be  repeated ;  as, 

i  Escribe  V.  todos  los  meses  a  su  tio  ?     Do  you  write  to  your  uncle  every  month  ? 
Si,   senor  (or  le   escribo   todos  los     Yes,  sir,  I  do. 
meses). 

19.  To  what  has  already  been  remarked  relative  to  conju- 
gations, we  have  but  a  few  words  to  add,  respecting  a  limited 
number  of  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation.  Those  which  have 
either  of  the  letters  c/i,  II,  or  n,  immediately  preceding  the  ter- 
mination, make  their  past  participle  in  endOy  instead  of  lendo  ; 
as,  cinendo,  mullendo,  nnendo,  hmchendo,  bnolendo,  r/nolendo, 
taiiendo,  instead  of  cimendo,  mulliendo,  riniendo,  hinchiendo, 
hT^mendo,  grunxendo,  tamendo. 

For  the  same  reason  the  i  is  also  suppressed  in  the  third 
persons  singular  and  plural  of  the  preterit  definite  of  the  indica- 
tive, and  in  all  the  persons  of  the  second  and  third  terminations 
of  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  and  of  the  future  of  the  same 
mood ;  as,  cino,  midlo,  rinero7i,  hinchera,  bnciiese,  grunere,  in- 
stead of  ciiiid,  midlio,  rvneron,  hincKxera,  hriinxese,  gnimere. 

There  is  but  one  exception  allowable  to  this  rule,  and  that 
occurs  in  the  verb  henchir,  which  generally  retains  the  i  in  the 
third  person  singular  preterit  definite  of  the  indicative,  making 
it  hinchio,  in  order  to  avoid  confounding  it  witli  hincho,  same 
person  and  tense  of  hinchar,  a  regular  verb  of  the  first  conju- 
gation. 

The  reason  of  the  suppression  of  the  i  in  the  cases  pointed 
out  above  is  obvious,  inasmuch  as  the  letters  cA,  II,  or  n,  when 
forming  a  syllable  with  e,  cannot  be  sounded  without  the  con- 
currence of  the  i  element  to  a  certain  extent.  If,  therefore,  the  i 
were  retained  in  those  combinations,  a  forced  and  disagreeable 
sound  would  be  the  result. 


GRAMMATICAL     PECULIARITIES.  363 

20.  Tlicre  are  in  English  certain  verbs  of  very  frequent 
occurrence,  and  whose  signification,  if  not  detennined  by  some 
other  part  of  speech,  it  would  often  be  difficult  to  explain. 
Amongst  this  class,  the  verb  to  get  plays  a  very  important,  if 
not  the  most  important  part,  and  English  persons  are  some- 
times at  as  great  a  loss  to  knoAV  how  exactly  to  translate  it  into 
a  foreign  language,  as  foreigners  are  to  know  how  and  when 
to  use  it  idiomatically  in  English.  This  verb  {to  get)  has  no 
exact  equivalent  in  Spanish,  but  there  are  in  that  language 
many  verbs  of  something  of  a  like  nature,  and  by  which  it  may 
at  times  be  correctly  rendered,  according  to  the  signification  in 
w^hich  it  is  used.  We  venture  to  say  that,  in  the  most  knotty 
cases,  a  little  thought,  a  moment's  reflection  would  go  far  in 
removing  all  difficulty. 

Before  making  some  uncouth  makeshift  of  a  translation, 
pause  a  moment,  and  look  what  is  the  real  meaning  of  to  get  in 
the  case  before  you ;  then  see  what  other  verb  would  serve  in 
its  place,  or  what  other  form  of  expression  you  can  substitute 
for  the  one  proposed  to  be  translated.  This  you  will  soon  dis- 
cover, for  perhaps  in  no  language  can  an  instance  be  found  of 
the  impossibility  to  express  the  same  idea  in  more  than  one 
way.  For  instance,  let  it  be  required  to  translate  into  Spanish, 
To  GET  i:Nr  by  the  window  ;  here  is  a  difficulty  just  as  great  as 
any  other  case  where  the  verb  to  get  can  be  used. 

Let  us  now  see  how  else  we  can  express  that  idea  :  To  go 
IX,  or  to  come  in  by  the  window ;  that  is  to  say,  we  have  to 
convey  the  idea  of  motion  into.  This  same  idea  is  to  be  ex- 
pressed thus  :  To  ENTER  by  the  window =extrar  por  la  ven- 
tana ;  entear  then  is  the  standard  and  usual  verb  expressive 
of  motion  into.  Let  us  now  change  the  preposition  and  reverse 
the  sense,  for  the  preposition  in  determines  the  signification  of 
get  in  the  case  under  consideration. 

Required  to  translate :  To  get  oft  by  the  window ;  tlie 
same  process  as  above  gives  us  motion  out]  hence,  SALiRjoor 
la  ventana,  salir  being  the  standard  and  usual  Spanish  vcj'b 
expressive  of  motion  out. 

This  mode  of  reasoning  Avill  in  all  cases  lead  to  the  desired 
end.     Let  your  object  be  to  find  some  verb  in  English  which 


364 


G  U  A  M  M  A  T  I  C  A  L     PECULIARITIES. 


alone  will  mean  the  same  tiling  as  get  and  its  determining  prepo- 
sition together.  tc.  i 
Get,  used  in  connection  with  adjectives,  is  no  more  ditncult 
to  be^li'sposed  of  than  when  accompanied  by  prepositions,  and 
it  may  in  general  be  turned  into  Spanish  by  one  of  the  three 
verbs  iion^se,  hacerse,  or  volverse  (according  to  the  nature  of 
the  case),  and  an  adjective  corresponding  to  the  English  one 
determining  get ;  as. 


Hacer&e  rico. 

Volverse  or  ponerse  rojo. 

Ponersc  fiirioso. 


To  gel  rich. 
To  gel  red. 
To  gel  furious. 


These  ideas  in  Spanish  may  be  expressed  by  single  verbs 
derived  from  each  of  the  adjectives  respectively;  as. 


Enriquecerse. 

Enrojeeerse. 

Enfureccrsc. 


To  gel  rich. 

To  get  red  (i.  e.,  to  redden). 

To  get  furious. 


21.  To  GET,  as  an  active  verb,  is  usually  translated  into 
Spanish  by  any  of  these  :  corisegidr,  obtener,  procxircu\  hacerse 
de,  hacerse  con,  according  to  the  sense  ;  as. 


Coiisiguid  lo  que  deseaba. 

Ohtendrun  el  privilegio. 

^  Puede  V.  conseguirme  or  proeurar- 

me  un  cjemplar  de  ese  libro  ? 
Se  hho  de  un  caballo  para  el  viijje. 


lie  got  what  he  wanted. 

They  will  gel  the  patent. 

Can  you  get  me  a  copy  of  that  book  ? 


lie  got  {i.  e.,  bought)  a  horse  for  his 
journey. 

22.  As  for  to  get,  used  redundantly  (and  incon-ectly)  with 
the  verb  to  have,  it  disappears  in  the  Spanish  translation ;  as, 

Tenemos  uno.  |      We  have  got  one. 

23.  The  above  remarks  are  equally  applicable  to  all  verbs 
of  the  class  alluded  to,  as  for  instance  to  become ;  which  latter, 
as  well  as  to  get,  is  often  elegantly  translated  by  llegar  d  ser ;  as, 


Sc  Iiizo  ciudadano   de  los  Estados 

Unido3. 
L'egd  a  ser  hombrc  muy  distinguido. 


He  became  a  citizen  of  the  United 

States. 
He  became  a  very  distinguished  maa 


EECAPITULACIOI^ 

DE  LAS  REGLAS  DE  LA  GRAMAtIOA. 


LEOOION    I.  i 

1.  jEa  qu6  letras  acaban  los  infiQitivos  de  todos  los  verlx)3  en  espafiol? 

—  ^Ouantas  conjugaciones  bay? 

2.  I  Oomo  se  Hainan  las  letras  que  anteceden  (precede)  a  las  tennina- 
ciones  ar,  cr,  ir  ? 

3.  I  C6mo  se  forman  las  conjugaciones  de  todos  los  vcrbos  regnlares 
de  la  lengua  ? 

—  J  Se  puede  suprimir  el  pronombre  nominativo  ? 

—  jPorque? 

—  I  Puede  suprimirse  el  pronombre  Usted  f 

4.  J  En  qu6  persona  se  pone  el  verbo  cuando  se  emplea  el  pronombre 
Vsted? 

—  J  En  que  casos  se  emplea  la  segunda  persona  del  verbo?  esto  es, 

^  cuando  se  tutea  en  espafiol  ? 

— t— — 

LEOOION    II. 

6.  I  Que  significa  la  palabra  seilor  cuando  se  nsa  en  vocativo  ? 

—  I  Que  palabra  se  debe  emplear  en  lugar  de  seilor  en  el  caso  vocativo  ? 

—  I  Cuando  so  emplea  la  palabra  seflor  ? 

—  I  Cuando  se  emplean  las  palabras  seilora,  seflorita  j  seflorito? 

6.  jDe  qu6  modo  so  usan  los  vocablos  (words)  Don  y  Dofla? 

7.  I  En  d6ndo  so  coloca  la  negacion  no,  con  respecto  al  verbo  ? 


LECCIOl^    III. 

8.  i  Cuando  se  cambia  la  conjuncion  y  por  la  vocal  ef 

9.  I  Cuando  so  escribe  el  acento  sobro  el  que  ? 


366  EECAPITUL  ACIOK. 

10.  J  En  qu6  casos  se  traduce  lut  por  sino  ? 

11.  ^En  qu6  caso  se  traduce  hut  por  pero  ? 

12.  ^Pueden  las   palabras   espaflol,  frances,  lieru,  y  otras  muchas, 
pertenecer  k  diferentes  partes  de  la  oracion  {speech)  ? 


leccio:n'  IV. 

13.  jCu^do  rigen  los  vcrbos  activos  a  su  objeto  con  ayuda  de  la  pre- 
posicion  A  ? 

14.  Qu6  preposicion  sirye  para  denotar  la  posesion  6  la  materia  de 
que  una  cosa  esta  heclia  ? 

15.  ^Qu6  nombrcs  determina  cl  articulo  el? 

—  I  Qu6  variacion  sufre  el  articulo  el  cuaudo  viene  despues  de  la  pre- 
posicion d  6  de? 

16.  jDelante  de  que  parte  de  la  oracion  se  coloca  el  articulo  indefini- 
do  un  ? 

—  I  Cuul  es  cl  uso  de  la  palabra  uno  ? 


LECCION    V. 

17.  ^Cuantos  g^neros  hay  en  espafiol? 

—  I  Cuando  se  emplea  el  articulo  femenino  iina  ? 

18.  jOorao  se  traduce  y^?  2'?*.^ 


LECCI02^    VI. 

19.  gEn  que  letra  acaban  todos  los  verbos  en  la  primera  persona  de 
indicativo  ? 

—  ^En  qu6  se  diferencia  la  scgunda  conjugacion  de  la  primera,  en 
el  presente  de  indicativo  ? 

20  I  C6mo  se  traduce  muy  ? 

21.  I  C6mo  se  forma  la  terminacion  femenina  de  los  nombres  acaba- 
dos  en  o  ? 


LECCION    VII. 

22.  I  C6mo  forman  sn  terminacion  femenina  los  adjetivos  que  acaban 
en  0,  oTi  il  on  ? 


KECAPITULACION.  367 

—  j  Y  lo3  gentilicios  ? 

—  I  En  donde  so  colocan  generalraento  los  adjetivos  con  respecto  d 
los  sustantivos  ? 

—  ^  En  donde  so  colocan  los  adjetivos  usados  metaforicamento  (meta- 
phorically) ? 

—  I  Pierdcn  algunos  adjetivos  su  liltima  letra  6  silaba  cuando  se  colo- 
can delante  dc  los  sustantivos? 


LEOOION    VIII. 

23.  I  En  qu6  se  diferencian  las  terminaciones  de  la  segunda  y  tercera 
conjugacion  en  el  presente  dc  indicativo  ? 

24.  I  Cuando  se  cambia  la  conjuncion  6  por  la  letra  u  ? 

25.  I  Oomo  se  traduce  neither  y  nor  ? 

26.  ^  Como  se  forma  el  plural  de  los  nombres  ? 

27.  ^Concuerda  el  adjetivo  con  el  sustantivo? 

28.  I  Concuerda  el  articulo  con  el  nombrc  a  que  se  refiere  ? 
—  I  Qu6  nombres  femeninos  toman  el  articulo  masculine  ? 

29.  I  Cuando  se  usa  el  articulo  neutro  lo  ? 


LECCION    IX. 
80.  jC6mo  forman  el  plural  los  nombres ^apa,  mamdj pie? 

31.  gComo  forman  el  plural  los  nombres  de  mas  de  una  silaba  quo 
acaban  en  s,  tales  como  lunes,  mdrtes  ? 

—  I  Cuiil  es  el  plural  dejuez,  Idpiz,  y  demds  nombres  que  acaban  en  s  ? 

32.  I  C6mo  se  forma  el  plural  de  los  nombres  compuestos  ? 

33.  I  Cuando  toman  articulo  los  dias  de  la  semana  ? 

34.  I  Qu6  lugar  ocupan  en  la  oracion  los  adverbios  donde,  adonde  j 
cuando ? 

35.  J  Cuando    requieren    el  acento  los  adverbios  donde,  adonde  y 
cuando ? 


LECCION    X. 
36.  jQu6  son  verbos  irregulares? 
—  I  Qu6  so  advierte  acerca  de  tener  y  los  demas  verbos  auxiliares  ? 


368  BECAPITDLACIOSr. 

—  J  C6m6  se  traduce  los  pronombres,  regimen  directo  de  un  verbo 
ingles  ? 

37.  I  C6rao  so  usara  del  le  y  el  lo  en  el  caso  acusativo,  esto  es,  como 
r^ghnen  directo  ? 

—  I  Como  se  traducen  en  algnnos  cases  it  y  so? 

38.  ^Eequieren  el  articulo  los  pronombres  intcrrogativos  quien,  cudl, 
que,  de  quien  ? 

39.  Cuando  en  nna  pregunta  esta  re^do  un  pronombre  interrogativo 
por  una  preposicion  j  qa6  debe  hacerse  en  la  respuesta  ? 


LECCIOX    XI. 

40.  I  Caando  se  eraplea  dlguien,  j  cuando  alguno  f 

—  {En  qu6  caso  se  traducira  any  one,  6  anybody  por  cualquiera? 

41.  iC(ymo  se  usa  de  Tiadie  j  ninguno? 

42.  I  Cuando  pierden  alguno  y  ninguno  la  o  fiual  ? 

43.  ^En  qu6  caso  se  usara  de  algo  y  alguna  cosa  ? 

44.  I  Cuando  se  usard  de  nada  y  ninguna  cosa  ? 

45.  I  Qae  negaciones  se  colocan  delante  del  verbo  ? 

—  I  Que  efecto  producen  en  espafiol,  dos  negativas  en  la  misma  sen- 
tencia  ? 

46.  I  En  qu6  casos  no  se  traduce  el  articulo  indefinido  a  6  an? 


LECCION    XII. 

47.  I  Cuando  se  usa  del  verbo  Tidber  y  cuando  del  verbo  tener  ? 

—  ^Como  se  traducen  los  anxiliares  to  hate  y  to  le  seguidos  de  un 
infinitivo  ? 

48,  jEn  qu6  casos  se  emplea  eipreterito  indefinido? 


LECCION   XIII. 

49.  I  De  qu6  modo  forman  su  terminacion  femenina  los  pronombres 
mio,  tuyo,  suyo,  nuestro,  vuestro  ? 

50.  I  Que  concordancia  tienen  los  pronombres  posesivos  ? 

51.  J  En  donde  se  colocan  y  que  letras  pierden  cuando  so  usan  como 
adjetivos  pronominales? 


KECAPITULACION.  369 

52.  I  En  donde  so  coloca  cl  pronombrc  mio,  cuando  so  nsa  en  el  caso 
vocativo  ? 

53.  ^  Quo  concordancia  ticneu  los  adjetivos  posesivos  cuando  so  usan 
como  pronombres  ? 

—  I  Requieren  el  articulo  en  esta  caso  ? 

54.  I  Qu6  articulo  requieren  cuando  se  usan  de  un  modo  indefinido  ? 
65.  I  Cuando  se  omito  el  articulo  con  los  pronombres  posesivos  ? 
56.  I  Cuando  so  emplean  los  pronombres  vuestro  y  vucstra  f 


LECCION    XIV. 

57.  eQu6  orden  se  sigue  en  la  formacion  de  los  niimeros  compuestos? 

58.  I  Cuales  son  los  niimeros  declinables  ? 

59.  I  Cuando  pierdo  uno  la  letra  o  ? 

60.  ^Qu6  concordancia  tiene  ciento  j  cuando  pierdo  la  tiltima  silaba? 


LECCIOK    XV. 

61.  2  Que  concordancia  tienen  los  mimeros  ordinales  y  donde  se  colo- 
can? 

—  I  Qu6  ndmeros  ordinales  pierden  su  liltima  letra  ? 

62.  I  Qu6  niimeros  ordinales  se  usan  y  cuando  ? 


•  LECCION    XVI. 

63.  I  Cuando  se  usa  el  prcterito  definido,  y  en  qu6  se  diferencia  del 
preterito  indefinido  ? 

64.  I  Que  significa  la  preposicion  ante  f 

65.  I  Como  so  usan  los  adverbios  mas  y  menos^  y  en  d6nde  se  colocan 
ea  la  oracion  ? 


LECOIOI^^    XVII. 

66.  ^De  que  modo  se  emplea  el  pronombre  relativo  quien? 

67.  I  Cuando  se  traduce  icTio  por  que  y  cuando  por  quien  ? 

68.  i  dial  y  que  pueden  referirse  a  personas  y  cosas  ? 

16* 


370  EECAPITULACION. 

69.  ^Con  que  palabra  concuerda  cuyo? 
—  I  Que  especie  de  pronombre  es  ? 

70.  I  Se  usa  del  pronombre  relativo  en  espaflol  del  mismo  mode  que 
en  ingles ;  esto  es,  precedido  6  no  de  una  preposicion  ? 

71.  gPuede  suprimirse  el  pronombre  relativo? 


LECCIOX    XVIII. 

72.  I  C6mo  se  declinan  los  pronombres  demostrativos  este,  eae,  aquel  ? 

73.  ^En  que  caso  se  emplea  este  ? 

74.  I  Que  sucedia  en  lo  antiguo  cuando  este  y  ese  precedian  al  adjctivo 
otro  ? 

75.  I  Oomo  se  emplean  los  pronombres  demostrativos  en  su  calidad  de 
adjetivos  ? 

76.  ^Como  se  traducen  las  palabras  the  former  j  the  latter? 

77.  I  Como  se  traduce  el  pronombre  demostrativo  ingles  that,  soguido 
de  la  preposicion  qf,6de  cualquiera  de  los  relativos  who  6  which  ? 

78.  I  Corao  se  traducen  generalmente  los  pronombres  personales  in- 
gleses,  cuando  van  seguidos  de  un  relativo  ? 

79.  I  Qu4  diferencia  bay  entre  el  significado  de  los  adverbios  aqui  y 
alii,  y  acd  y  alld? 


LECCIOX     XIX. 

80.  I  Cuando  debe  usarse  de  la  preposicion  para,  y  cuando  de  por  ? 

81.  I  Cuul  es  el  significado  de  la  preposicion  entre  ? 

82.  I  Cual  es  el  significado  de  la  preposicion  Tiasta  ? 


LECCION"   XX. 

83.  I  Cuando  pierden  los  adverbios  tanto  y  cuanto  sii  liltima  silaba  ? 

84.  gC6mo  se  forma  el  comparativo  de  igualdad? 

85.  gEn  qu6  caso  puede  emplearse  euan  ? 

86.  I  C6mo  se  forma  el  comparativo  de  auperioridad  f 


EECAPITULACION.  371 

87.  1 06mo  se  forma  el  comparativo  de  inferioridad  ? 

88.  I  Porqu6  los  adjetivos  mayor^  meiior,  mejor  j  peor,  no  necesitan 
de  laa  palabras  mas  6  menos,  pai'a  formar  sus  grados  de  comparacion  ? 

89.  J  En  qu6  caso  se  traduce  than  por  de  j  en  cudl  otro  por  que? 

90.  ^Pueden  tambien  forrtiar  grados  de  comparacion  los  nombres,  ver- 
bos  J  adverbios  ? 


LECCION    XXI. 

91.  ^Como  se  traducen  los  supcrlativos  ingleses  que  acaban  -por  est, 
6  so  forman  con  la  palabi-a  most  ? 

92.  J  En  que  caso  se  traduce  most,  6  most  of,  por  la  mayor  parte? 

93.  I  Que  preposicion  corresponde  en  espailol  al  in  ingles  despues  de 
un  superlativo  ? 

94.  Los  superlativos  que  se  forman  en  ingles  por  medio  de  most,  very, 
&c.,  I  c6mo  se  forman  en  cspafiol  ? 

95.  I  Cuando  pierden  los  adjetivos  la  ultima  vocal  ? 

96.  ^Digame  V.  lo  que  se  advierte  acerca  do  los  superlativos  en 
errimo  ? 

97.  I  Qu6  adjetivos  cambian  sus  letras  finales  tintes  do  recibir  la  ter- 
minacion  isimo  ? 

98.  I  Cuales  son  los  superlativos  en  tsimo  formados  irregularmente  ? 

99.  I  Cuales  son  los  comparatives  y  superlativos  irrcgulares  ? 
100.  I  Cuando  admiten  grados  de  comparacion  los  sustantivos  ? 


LECCION    XXII. 

101.  I  Qu6  se  advierte  acerca  de  los  verbos  ser  j  estar  ? 

102.  I  Cuando  se  traduce  el  verbo  to  he,  por  scr,  j  cuando  por  estar  ? 
—  I  Cuales  son  los  verbos  cuyos  gerundios  no  admiten  el  verbo  estar 

como  auxiliar  ? 


LECCION    XXIII. 

103.  I  Cuando  se  emplea  elfuturo  simple  ? 

104.  I  C6mo  se  usaa  los  numerales  que  indican  las  boras  del  dia  ? 


372  EECAPITULACIOS". 

105.  I  Porque  palabra  se  traduce  evening  6  night  1 

106.  I  En  qu6  caso  no  rige  al  subjuntivd  la  conjuncion  «i  ? 


LECCION"    XXIV. 

107.  I  Cuando  ee  cm  plea  c\futuro  compuesto  ? 

108.  I  Como  se  traduce  en  ingles  acdbar  de  ? 

109.  I  En  qu6  letra  acaban  en  espaiiol  la  mayor  parte  de  las  palabras 
que  en  ingles  terminan  en  tion  ? 

110.  I  Con  que  nfuneros  se  cucntan  los  diss  del  raes  ? 


LECCION     XXV. 

111.  jQn6  difercncia  se  encucntra  en  el  significado  dc  los  verbos 
saber  y  conocer  ? 

112.  I  Qae  diferencia  cxiste  entre  los  advcrbios  aun^  ya  y  todavia  f 

—  I  C6mo  se  traduce  oncey  twice,  etc.  ? 

—  I  Qud  se  observa  en  el  uso  de  la  palabras  micdo,  talor,  vergucn- 
sa,  Idstima,  y  tiempo  ? 

113.  Cuando  el  verbo  to  le  precede  a  los  adjetivos  hungry,  thirsty^ 
afraid,  ashamed,  right,  wrong,  cold,  sleepy,  Jqu6  verbo  so  cmplea  en 
espafiol  ? 

114.  I  C6mo  se  emplean  j'aTwaa  y  nunca  ? 


LECCIOX    XXVI. 

115.  ^En  d6nde  se  colocan  los  pronombres  nominativos  con  respecto 
al  verbo  ? 

116.  I  Qu6  peculiaridad  se  nota  en  los  pronombres  persouales? 

117.  ^En  donde  se  coloca  el  complemento  directo  {oijcctite  case) 
cuando  no  le  precede  una  preposicion,  y  el  verbo  esta  en  infinitivo  6 
imperativo  ? 

118.  I  En  que  tiempos  pierde  el  verbo  la  letra  final  cuando  se  le  afiadc 
nno  de  los  pronombres  nos  u  as  ? 

—  I  Con  que  objeto  se  bace  csto  ? 

119.  ^Cudndo  podra  colocarse  el  pronombre  complemento  directo 
despues  del  verbo  en  el  modo  indicativo  6  subjnntivo  ? 


KECAPITULACION.  373 

120.  Cuando  un  verbo  rija  a  otro  en  infinitivo,  i  en  cI6nde  se  colocara 
el  pronombre  objcto  ? 

121.  I  Quo  caso  rigcn  las  prcposiciones  expresas  ? 

122.  I  Que  se  nota  cuando  la  preposicion  con  antecede  a  los  pronora- 
bres  mi,  t'l,  si  ? 

123.  ^  Cuando  so  usa  do  la  preposicion  entre  con  el  caso  nominativo  ? 

124.  ^Qu6  pronombre  complemento  (i.  e.,  1st  objective  or  2d  objec- 
tive case)  se  usa  despues  de  los  comparatives  ? 

125.  Cuando  en  ingles  el  caso  objetivo  de  la  primera  6  segunda  per- 
sona es  el  r6gimen  del  verbo  6  de  la  preposicion  to,  tacita  (understood) 
6  expresa,  ^  como  se  traduce  ? 

126.  I  Como  se  traduce  el  complemento  indirecto  ingles  de  la  tercera 
persona  ? 


LECCION    XXYII. 

127.  Cuando  la  tercera  persona  va  regida  de  la  preposicion  to  en 
ingle.-,  tacita  6  expresa,  siendo  el  regimen  del  verbo  un  pronombre  de  la 
tercera  persona,  i  por  que  palabra  se  traduce  ? 

—  I  Cual  03  la  razon  de  csto  ? 

128.  En  caso  de  encontrarse  en  una  sentencia  dos  pronombres,  uno 
complemento  dirccto  y  el  otro  indirecto,  i  cual  so  coloca  primero  ? 

129.  I Y  cuando  el  regimen  del  verbo  es  un  pronombre  reflexivo  ? 

130.  ^  Qu6  se  observa  cuando,  para  dar  mas  energia  a  la  frase,  se  ponen 
dos  pronombres  do  la  miama  persona  ? 

131.  I  Que  debc  observarso  con  respecto  a  las  frases,  d  el  quiero,  d  ti 
amo  ? 

132.  I  Que  se  debe  toner  presente  para  no  confundir  los  pronombres 
personales  el,  la,  lo,  los  j  las,  con  los  articnlos  el,  la,  lo,  los  y  las  ? 

138.  ^Para  qu6  sirve  el  adjetivo  mismo? 


LECCION    XXVIII. 

134.  ^Cuiindo  se  usa  el  imperfecto  ? 

135.  I  Cuando  so  usa  el  plusciiamperfeeto  ? 


374  BECAPITULACION. 

136.  I  Como  se  traducen  las  expresiones  to  liate  justy  to  he  just  de- 

lante  de  un  participio  pasado  ? 

« — 

LECCION    XXIX. 

137.  I  Cuando  se  usa  el  preterite  anterior  ? 

138.  jDe  d6nde  se  derivan  los  adverbios  de  modo  y  calidad  ? 

139.  I  C6mo  se  forman  los  adverbios  que  se  derivan  de  adjetivos  ? 

140.  I  Qu6  adverbios  admiten  grados  de  comparacion  ? 

141.  iQu6  adverbios  pueden  sustituirse  sin  cambiar  de  significado? 


LEOCION    XXX. 

142.  ^  Qu6  son  verbos  impersonales  ? 

143.  ^En  qu6  caso  se  usan  los  verbos  amaneccr  j  anochecer  en  las  tres 
personas  ? 

144.  I  C6mo  se  traducen  en  ingl6s  los  verbos  Jiaber  j  hacer  cuando  se 
usah  como  impersonales  ? 

—  I  Que  se  observa  con  respecto  a  la  primera  persona  del  presente  de 
indicativo  del  verbo  haber,  usado  impersonalmente  ? 

—  I  Hay  otros  verbos  que  pueden  usarse  como  impersonales  ? 

145.  J  En  qu6  caso  no  se  traduce  el  pronombre  ingl6s  it? 

—  I  Kequieren  articulo  los  nombres  tornados  en  sentido  indetinido  ? 

—  I  Toman  el  articulo  los  nombres  usados  en  toda  la  extension  de  su 
significado? 

146.  gUevan  articulo  los  nombres  de  naciones,  paises,   provincias, 
montes,  rios  y  estaciones  ? 

147.  I  Cudndo  no  admiten  articulo  los  nombrej  de  naciones,  paises  y 
provincias,  etc. 

—  I  Cuales  requieren  siempre  el  articulo  ? 


LECCION    XXXI. 

148.  I  C6mo  se  conjuga  el  verbo  gustar  cuando  significa  to  please  ? 

149.  I  Qu6  significa  el  verbo  gustar  seguido  de  la  preposicion  de  f 

150.  2  Qu6  significa  y  como  se  conjuga  el  verbo  gustar  como  verbo 
activo  ? 


EECAPITULACION.  375 

151.  g  Qu6  otros  verbos  requieren  la  misma  construccion  idiomatica 
del  verbo  gustar  ? 

152.  I  Qu6  so  observa  en  la  conjugacion  del  v^xho  pesar  cuando  signi- 
fica  to  regret  f 


LECCION    XXXII. 

153.  I  C6mo  se  forma  la  voz  pasiva  ? 

-r-  I  Cuando  se  forma  con  el  vcrbo  estar  ? 

154.  ^En  que  caso  no  podrd  usarse  la  voz  pasiva  con  el  verbo  8er  en 
el  presento  y  el  imperfecto  de  indicativo  ? 

155.  I  Cuando  se  usai'd  de  la  preposicion  de  y  cuando  Aopor  en  la  voz 
pasiva  ? 

156-157.  ^ En  qu6  casos  se  forma  la  voz  pasiva  con  el  pronombre  se? 


LECCION    XXXIII. 

158.  I  C6mo  se  conjugan  los  verbos  reflesivos  ? 

159.  I  Cuando  se  usa  la  forma  reflexiva  ? 

160.  ;,  Como  se  conjugan  los  verbos  reciprocos  ? 


LECCION    XXXIV. 

161.  i  Que  constituye  la  irregularidad  de  los  verbos  ? 

162.  2  Que  debe  tenerse  presente  para  no  confundir  con  los  verbos 
irregulares  algunos  que  annque  sufren  un  cambio  oi:togr4fico  no  dejan  per 
eso  de  ser  regulares  ? 

163.  I  Que  cambio  sufren  los  vei'bos  que  acaban  en  eer  ? 

164.  I  Qu6  cambio  se  nota  en  los  que  acaban  en  uir  ? 

165.  J  En  cuantas  clases  6  grupos  se  dividen  los  verbos  irregulares? 

166.  J  Qu6  se  observa  en  la  construccion  del  verbo  pagar  f 


LECCION    XXXY. 

167.  I  Cual  es  la  irregularidad  del  verbo  acostar  ? 

168.  I  Cuando  se  usa  el  modo  imperativo  ? 


376  EECAPITULACI  ON. 

169.  I  Qu6  letras  pierde,  y  en  que  personas,  el  modo  imperativo  cuando 
se  le  afiade  el  pronombres  nos  j  os  ? 

170.  ^En  d6nde  se  colocan  los  pronombres  en  espallol  cuando  el  im- 
perativo se  usa  en  la  forma  negativa  ? 

171.  jPnede  usarse  el  futuro  de  indicativo  por  el  imperativo  ? 

172.  ^Como  se  traducen  en  espafiol  los  adjetivos  ingleses  acabados 
en  ous  ? 

173.  I Y  los  nombres  y  adjetivos  ingleses  que  acaban  en  ic  6  ical  ? 


LECCION    XXXYI. 

174.  I  Cadi  es  la  irregularidad  del  verbo  mover  ? 

175.  Cuando  se  usa  del  se  como  pronombre  indefinido,  i  h  qu6  palabras 
correspondc  en  ingles  ? 

176.  I  Cuales  son  las  cuatro  ftmciones  que  desempella  el  pronombre  se  ? 

177.  ^Como  se  ti'aducen  en  espafiol  los  nombres  ingleses  que  acaban 
en  ty  ? 

—  J  A  que  genero  pertenecen  estos  nombres  ? 

178.  I  Qu6  peculiaridad  se  nota  en  el  verbo  doler  ? 


LECCION    XXXVII. 
179.  g  Cual  es  la  irregularidad  del  verbo  atender? 
180-181-182-183.  I  Cuando  se  emplea  el  modo  subjuntivo  ? 

184.  I  Cudndo  se  usa  eFpresente  de  subjuntivo  ? 

185.  I  Cuando  se  usa  el  perfecto  de  subjuntivo  ? 


LECCIOX    XXXYIII. 

186.  I  Tienen  los  verbos  espauoles  otro  participio  ademas  del  pasado  ? 
—  I  Qu6  terminacion  tienen  los  particiiiios  presentes,  y  como  se  usan  ? 

187.  I  Cu4ndo  se  usan  los  gerundios  ? 

188.  J  Cual  es  el  auxiliar  de  los  gerundios? 

189.  I  C6mo  se  traduce  en  espafiol  el  participio  presents  in^6s,  prc- 
cedido  de  una  preposicion  ? 

190.  jPuede  usarse  el  infinitivo  como  nombre  verbal? 


EECAPITULA.C10N.  377 

191.  I  Como  se  traduce  en  ingl6s  el  intinitivo  espafiol,  regido  por  otro 
verbo  ? 


LEOOION    XXXIX. 

192.  I  Cudl  OS  la  irregularidad  del  verbo  pedir  ? 

193.  I  Cuales  son  las  formas  mas  usuales  para  saludar  ? 


LEOOION    XL. 

194.  J  Caal  es  la  irregularidad  del  verbo  conducir? 

195.  I  Quo  so  nota  sobre  la  palabra  sejun  ? 

196.  I  C6mo  concucrdan  los  nombres  colectivos  ? 


LECCION    XLI. 

197.  J  Que  son  verbos  defectivos? 

198.  I  En  quo  personas  y  cuando  se  usa  el  verbo  yacei'  ? 

199.  ^En  qu6  tiempos  se  usa  el  vevbo  soler  j  qu6  peculiaridad  se  nota 
en  61? 

200.  I  Qu6  significacion  tiene  la  preposicion  desde  ? 

201.  I  Como  se  usa  la  preposicion  contra  ? 

202.  I  Cual  es  la  significacion  do  la  preposicion  sobre? 

203.  I  Cual  es  la  significacion  de  la  preposicion  tras  ? 

204.  I  Cuando  se  usa  de  la  conjuncion  pues? 

« 
LECCION    XLII 

205.  ^En  que  se  dividen  las  conjunciones  ? 

206.  jQu6  debe  observarse  acerca  del  regimen  de  ias  conjunciones? 

207.  I  Qu6  conjunciones  rigen  ol  verbo  al  modo  subjuntivo  ? 

208.  I  Cuales  le  rigen  al  modo  infinitivo  ? 

209.  I  Cuales  le  rigen  al  modo  indicativo  ? 


318  EECAPITULACION. 

LECCION"    XLIII. 

210.  ^Cuando  se  emplea  el  imperfecto  de  subjantivo,  y  caando  el 
pluscuamperfecto  ? 

211.  ^C6nio  se  traducen  en  espaCol  los  auxiliares  wiay,  might,  can, 
could,  will,  would  y  should  ? 

212.  I  De  qu6  manera  expresa  la  accion  del  verbo  el  imperfecto  de 
subjantivo  ? 

213.  I  De  qu6  manera  la  representa  el  pluscuamperfecto  ? 


LECCION    XLIV. 

214.  jQa6  son  nombres  aumentativos  y  diminutives,  y  c6mo  se 
forman? 

215.  I  Hay  algunos  nombres  que  forman  sus  diminutivos  con  otras 
terminaciones  distintas  de  las  designadas  por  este  objeto  ? 

216.  I  Pueden  formarse  dirainutivos  con  otras  partes  de  la  oracion? 

217.  I  Qu6  nombres  primitivos  no  admiten  algunas  de  las  terminaciones 
designadas  ? 

218.  J  A  qn6  nombres  se  designa  con  el  de  despreciatitos  ? 


LECOION    XLV. 

219.  1 06mo  representa  la  accion  del  verbo  el  futuro  simple  de  sub- 
juntivo  ? 

220.  I  Cuando  puede  sustituirse  el  presente  do  subjuntivo  al  futuro 
simple  ? 

221.  iC6mo  representa  la  accion  del  verbo  el  futuro  compuesto  de 
subjuntivo? 

222.  I  Cudndo  pnede  sustituirsele  el  perfecto  de  subjuntivo  ? 

223.  I  Qu6  debe  tenerse  presente  para  no  confundir  el  imperfecto  y 
pluscuamperfecto  del  modo  subjuntivo,  con  el  futuro  simple  y  compuesto 
del  mismo  modo  ? 

224.  Cuando  el  verbo  que  esta  en  futuro  simple  6  compuesto  fnnciona 
como  verbo  determinante  jaqu^  modo  y  tiempos  puede  regir  al  verbo 
determinado  ? 


KECAPITULACION.  379 

LEOOION    XLVI. 

225-226.  I  Qu6  son  conjunciones,  7  coal  es  el  signiticado  de  las  prin- 
cipales  ? 


LEOCION    XLVII. 

227.  I  Que  partes  dc  la  oracion  pueden  llevar  articulo  ? 

228.  ^Llevan  articulo  los  nombres  comunes  que  se  usan  en  toda  la 
extension  de  su  signlficacion  ? 

229.  iSe  pone  articulo  delante  de  los  nombres  dc  iraperios,  reinos, 
provincias  y  paises  ? 

—  I  Ouando  se  omite  ? 

230.  I  Cuando  reqnieren  articulo  los  nombres  de  medidas,  pesos,  &c. 

231.  I  Cuando  se  repite  el  articulo  ? 

232.  I  En  que  caso  se  pone  el  articulo  delante  dc  los  nombres  que 
expresan  rango,  oficio,  profesion  6  titulo  de  personas  ? 

233.  I  En  qu6  caso  se  usa  el  articulo  en  lugar  del  adjetivo  posesivo  ? 

234.  I  En  qu6  caso  se  usa  el  articulo,  como  en  ingles  ? 


LEOCION    XLVIII. 

235.  ^  Como  se  corresponden  los  verbos  cuando  estan  unidos  por  un 
relativo  ? 

236.  I  Cuando  se  pone  en  infinitivo  el  verbo  detenninado  ? 

237.  Si  el  verbo  determinante  fuere  ser,  6  cualquiera  de  los  imperso- 
nales,  i  en  que  modo  se  pondra  el  verbo  detenninado,  en  el  caso  de  carc- 
cer  este  de  sugeto  ? 

—  J  Porqu6  sucede  esto  asi  ? 

238.  Y  cuando  dicbo  verbo  tuviere  sugeto,  j  en  qu6  modo  se  pondi-d  ? 

—  Los  Tcrbos  que  expresan  mandato,  i  a  qu6  modo  rigen  el  verbo 
dcterminado  ? 

239.  Cuando  el  verbo  determinante  esta  en  infinitivo,  en  presente  6 
futuro  de  indicativo,  6  en  imperativo  unido  al  verbo  dcterminado  por 
una  conjuncion  i  en  que  modo  se  pone  este  ultimo  ? 

240.  J  A  qu6  modo  y  en  que  tiempos  rige  al  verbo  detenninado  el 


380  EECAPITULACION. 

determinante,  cuando  este  liltimo  se  encucntra  en  el  pretdrito  indefinido 
6  en  el  future  compuesto  de  indicativo  ? 

241.  Cuando  el  norainativo  es  el  mismo  para  arabos  verbos  y  el  de- 
terminante se  encuentra  en  indicativo,  j  d  que  modo  rige  este  al  deter- 
minado  ? 


LECCION    XLIX. 

242.  ^  Que  son  nombres  derivados  ? 

243,  244,  245,  246,  247,  248,  249,  250,  251,  252.  gQu6  denotan,  y 
cnales  son  las  principales  terminaciones  ? 


LECCION    L. 

253.  I  Como  se  forman  los  nombres  compuestos? 


LE0CI02T    LI. 

254.  I  Cual  es  la  constmccion  natural  ? 

255.  ^  Cual  es  la  figurada  ? 

256.  I  De  cuantos  modes  puede  construirse  una  frase  ? 

257.  I  Qu6  constmccion  es  la  preferible  ? 


LECCION    LII. 

258.  I  Conservan  algunos  participles  el  rdgiraen  de  sns  verbos  ? 

259.  I  Cual  es  la  cencerdancia  del  participle  pasado  ? 

260.  Cuando  nn  verbo  tiene  dos  participles  pasades,  uno  regular  y 
otro  irregular,  i  come  se  emplcan  ? 

261.  I  Cuales  son  los  participles  pasades  irregularcs  que  se  puedcn 
usar  con  el  verbo  haber  ? 

2G2.  I  Qu6  irregularidad  peculiar  tiene  el  verbo  morir  ? 

263.  I  Hay  algunos  participios  pasades  6  pasivos  que  toman  una  signi- 
ficacion  activa  ? 


P.ECAPITULACIOK.  381 

264.  I  Pueden  aJguuos  participios  pasados  Iiacer  las  veces  de  sustan- 
tivo? 

265.  I  Que  so  debe  obscrvar  acerca  de  otros  tiempos  que  algunos  gra- 
maticos  agregan  al  modo  infinitivo  ? 


LECOION    LIII. 

266.  I  Que  son  modismos  6  idiotismos  ? 

—  I  C6mo  se  traducen  en  espaflol  las  frases  en  que  la  preposicion 
inglesa  toma  un  significado  diferente  de  aquel  que  generalmente  so  le 
atribuye  ? 


LECCION    LIV. 

267.  I  Como  se  traducen  en  espaflol  las  conjunciones  inglesas  que  se 
usan  frecuentemente  en  lugar  de  otras  palabras  ? 

268.  I  Hay  tambien  en  espaflol  conjunciones  que  se  usan  en  lugar  de 
otras  palabras? 

—  ^  Ciiiilcs  son  los  principales  usos  de  la  conjuncion  si? 


LECCIOK    LV. 
269.  I  Cuales  son  los  principales  usos  de  la  conjuncion  que  ? 


LECCIO^    LVI. 

270,  I  Cuales  son  las  formas  mas  usuales  para  principiar  y  acabar 
cartas  ? 


LEOCION    LVII. 

271.  I  Qu6  se  advierte  acerca  de  las  preposiciones  que  cambian  su 
significado  de  los  verbos  a  que  se  juntan  ? 


LEOOION    LVIII. 

272.  1 06mo  se  traducen  los  verbos  to  Ic  glad  y  to  le  rejoiced  at  f 


382  EECAPITITLACIOIS'. 

273.  I  Como  se  traducen  los  verbos  to  he  sorry  y  to  grieve  ? 

274.  I  C6ino  se  emplea  el  verbo  caber  ? 


LECOION    LIX. 
275.  i  A  qu6  raodimos  se  prestan  los  verbos  caer,  ddr,  decir  j  echar  ? 


LEOCION    LX. 

276.  I  Cuales  son  los  principales  idiotismos  d  que  se  prestan  los  verbos 
entrar,  hacer,  ir,  llevar,  mandar,  oler  a,  saber  d,  salir^  serviry  tardar  y 
xolver  f 


COMPLETE    LIST 

OF   THE 

CONJUGATIONS  OF  ALL  THE  SPANISH  VERBS,  AUXILIARY,  EKGULAE,  IR- 
REGULAR, REFLECTIVE,  IMPERSONAL  AND  DEFECTIVE,  WITH 
AN  EXAMPLE  OF  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE, 


AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

INFINITIVE. 

PEESENT. 


To  hate. 


Tole. 


Haber. 


Tener. 


Ser. 


Estar. 


Having 

. 

Being. 

Ilabiendo. 

Teniendo. 

1      Siendo. 

PAST   PAETICTPLE. 

Had. 

Been. 

Habido. 

Tenido. 

1      Sido. 
INDICATIVE. 

PEESENT. 

/  Time. 

/  am. 

1.  He. 

Ten  go. 

Soy. 

2.  Has. 

Tienes. 

Eres. 

3.  Ha. 

Tiene. 

Es. 

1.  Hemos. 

Tenemos. 

Somos. 

2.  Habeis. 

Teneis. 

Sois. 

3.  Han. 

Tienen. 

Son. 

IMPEEFECT. 

Iliad. 

Ittas. 

1.  Habia. 

Tenia. 

Era. 

2.  Habias. 

Tenias. 

Eras. 

8.  Habia. 

Tenia. 

Era. 

Estando. 


Estado. 


Estoy. 
Estas. 
Est4 

Estamos. 

Estais. 

Estan. 


Estaba. 

Estabas. 

Estaba. 


384 


CONJUGATIONS, 


1. 

Habiamos. 

Teniamos. 

2. 

Habiais. 

Teniais. 

3. 

Habian. 

I  had. 

Tenian. 

PEETERIT 

1. 

Hube. 

Tuve. 

2. 

Hubiste. 

.  Tuviste. 

3. 

Hubo. 

Tuvo. 

1.  Habimos.  Tuviifios. 

2.  Hubisteis.         Tuvisteis. 

3.  Hubieron.        Tuvieron. 


Eramos. 

Estabamos. 

Erais. 

Estabais. 

Eran, 

Estaban, 

FIMTE. 

I  was. 

Fui. 

Estuve. 

Euiste. 

Estuviste. 

Fu6. 

Estuvo. 

Ftumos. 

Estuvimos. 

Fuisteis. 

Estuvisteis. 

Fueron, 

Estuvieron. 

I  shall  have. 

1.  Habr6.  Tendr6. 

2.  Ilabras.  Tendrds. 

3.  Habra-  Teudrd. 


1.  Habr^mcs. 

2.  Habr6is. 

3.  Habran. 


Tendr^DQOs. 

Tendr6is. 

Tendran. 


FTJTCEE   SniPLE, 

I  shall  he. 

Ser6.  Estar6. 

Seras.  Estar^. 

Sera.  Estard. 

Ser6mos.  Estar^mos. 

Sereis.  Estar6is. 

Seran.  Estaran. 


Let  me  have. 


2.  Have  thou. 

3.  Let  hiin  have. 

1.  Let  us  have. 

2.  Have  ye. 

3.  Let  them  have. 


Ten  tii. 
Tenga  el. 

Tengamos. 

Tened. 

Tengan. 


IMPERATIVE. 

[      Se. 
Sea. 


Let  me  he. 


Seamos. 

Sed. 

Sean. 


Estd. 
Est4. 

Estemos. 

Estad. 

Esten. 


SUBJUKCTIVE. 

PEESEXT. 


1.  Hay  a. 

2.  Hayas. 

3.  Haya. 

1.  Hayamos. 

2.  Hayais. 

3.  Hayan; 


I  may  have. 


Tenga. 

Tengas. 

Tenga. 

Tengamos. 

Tengais. 

Tengan. 


Sea. 

Seas. 

Sea. 

Seamos. 

Seais. 

Sean. 


I  may  he. 


Este. 

Estes. 

Est6. 

Estemos. 

Esteis. 

Esten. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


385 


liiPEEFECT. — First  Termination.* 
I  would  have.  I  would  he. 


1. 

2. 
3. 

Habria. 

Habrias. 

Habria. 

Tendria. 

Tendrias. 

Tendria. 

Seria. 

Serias. 

Seria. 

Estaria. 
Estarias,  * 
Estaria. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

Habriamos. 
Habria!  s. 
Habrian. 

Tendriamos. 

Tendriais. 

Tendrian. 

Seriamos. 

Serials. 

Serian. 

Estariamos 

Estariais. 

Estarian, 

Second  Termination. 

1. 

2. 
3. 

/  would  have, 
Hubiera.  ,       Tuviera. 
Hubierais.        Tuvieras. 
Hubiera.           Tuviera. 

I  would  le. 
Euera.              Estuviera. 
Fueras.              Estuvieras. 
Fuera.               Estuviera. 

1.  Hubicramos.     Tuvieramos. 

2.  Hubierais.        Tuvierais. 

3.  Hubieran.        Tuvieran. 


Fueramos.         Estuvieramos. 
Fuerais.  Estuvierais. 

Fueran.  Estuvieran. 


Third  Termination. 


I  should  have. 

•  I  should  le. 

1. 

Hubiese.           Tuviese, 

Fuese.               Estuviese. 

2. 

Hubieses,         Tuvieses, 

Fueses.              Estuvieses 

3. 

Hubiese,           Tuviese. 

Fuese.              Estuviese. 

1.  Hubiesemos.     Tuviesemos. 

2.  Hubieseis.        Tuvieseis. 

3.  Hubiesen,         Tuviesen. 


Fuesemos.         Estuviesemcs. 
Fueseis,  Estuvieseis. 

Fuesen.  Estuviescn. 


FUTDEE. 


I  might  or  should  have. 

1.  Hubiere.  Tuviere. 

2.  Hubieres.         Tuvieres. 
8.  Hubiere.  Tuviere. 


I  might  or  should  le. 
Fuere.  Estuviere. 

Fueres.  Estuvieres. 

Fuere.  Estuviere. 


1.  Hubieremos.     Tnvieremos. 

2.  Hubiercis.        Tuviereis. 

3.  Hubiercn.         Tuvieren. 


Fuereraos.         Estuvieremos. 
Fuereis.  Estuviereis. 

Fueren.  Estuvicrcn. 


*  It  will  bo  observed  that,  differing  from  almost  all  other  grammars,  we  give  ria  r.s  the 
first  termination,  this  order  appearing-  to  us  more  logical  and,  above  all,  more  grammatical, 
and  more  In  accordance  with  the  signification  and  uses  of  the  three  terminations. 

IV 


386 


CONJUGATIONS. 


MODELS  OF  THE  THREE  REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS. 

,  FIRST  CONJCGATION. 

INFINITIYE. 

I         To  speak. 


Hablar. 

Hablando. 

Hablado. 


1.  Hablo. 

2.  Hablas. 

3.  Habla. 


1.  Hablaba. 

2.  Hablabas. 

3.  Hablaba. 


Sinfftdar. 
I  speak. 


GEEUKD. 

I         Speaking. 

PAST   PAETICIPLE. 

I         Spoken. 
INDICATIVE. 

PEESEKT. 

Plural. 

1.  Hablamos. 

2.  Hablais. 

3.  Hablan. 


IMPBEFECT. 


I  spoke,  was 
speaking,  &c. 


1.  Hablabamos. 

2.  Hablabais. 

3.  Hablaban. 


1.  Habl6. 

2.  Hablaste. 

3.  Hablo. 


1.  Hablar^. 

2.  Hablar  as. 

3.  Hablara. 


2.  Habla. 

3.  Hable, 


PEETEEIT  DEFr^^TE. 

I  spoke.  I         1.  Hablamos. 

I         2.  Hablasteis. 
I  3.  Hablaron. 


FUTTJEE   SIMPLE, 


I  shall  or  will 


Speak  (thou) 


1.  Hablardmos. 

2.  Hablar6is. 

3.  Hablardn. 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Hablemos. 

2.  Hablad. 

3.  Hablen. 


CONJUGATIONS. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PEESENT. 


387 


1. 

2. 

Hable. 
Hables. 

I  may  speak. 

1.  Hablemos. 

2.  Hableis. 

3. 

Hable. 

3.  Hablen. 

LMPEEFECT. — First  Termination. 

1. 

Hablai-ia. 

I  should  or  would 

1.  Hablariamos 

2. 

Hablarias. 

speak. 

2.  Hablariais. 

3. 

Hablaria. 

3.  Hablarian. 

Second  Termination. 

1. 

Hablara. 

I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 

1.  Hablaramos. 

2. 

Hablaras. 

speak. 

2.  Hablarais. 

3. 

Hablara. 

3.  Hablaran. 
Third  Termination. 

1. 

Hablase. 

I  might,  &c.,                    1.  Hablasemos. 

2. 

Hablases. 

speak. 

2.  Hablaseis. 

3. 

Hablase. 

3.  Hablasen. 

FCmEE. 

1. 
2. 

Hablare. 
Hablares. 

I  might,  &c., 
speak. 

1.  Hablaremos. 

2.  Hablareis. 

3. 

Hablare. 

3.  Hablaren. 

Aprender. 

Aprendiendo. 

Aprendido. 


SECOND  CONJDGATION. 

IXFIMTITE. 

I         To  learn. 


GEEIJ^^). 


Learning. 


PAST  PABTICIPLE. 

I         Learned. 


388 


C0  2f  JUGATiaKS 


INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Aprendo. 

2.  Aprendes. 

3.  Aprende. 

I  learn. 

1.  Aprendemos. 

2.  Aprendeis. 

3.  Aprenden. 

IMPEEFECT. 

1.  Aprendia. 

I  learned,  was                 1.  Aprendiamos. 

2.  Aprendias. 

3.  Aprendia. 

learning,  &c. 

2,  Aprendiais. 

3.  Aprendian. 

PEETEEIT  DEFINITE. 

1.  Aprendi. 

2.  Aprendiste. 

3.  Aprendio. 

I  learned. 

1.  Aprendimos. 

2.  Aprendisteis. 

3.  Aprendieron. 

FUTTTEE   SIMPLE. 

1.  Aprendei'6. 

I  sliall  or  will 
leai-n. 

1.  Aprender6mos. 

2.  Aprcnderas. 

3.  Aprendera. 

2.  Aprender^is. 

3.  Aprenderan. 

IMPEEATIVE. 

1.  Aprendamos. 

2.  Aprende. 

3.  Aprenda. 

Learn  (thou). 

2.  Aprended. 

3.  Aprendan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Aprenda. 

2.  Aprendas. 

3.  Aprenda. 

I  may  learn. 

1.  Aprendamos. 

2.  Aprendais. 

3.  Aprendan. 

IMPEEFECT. — First  Termination. 

1.  Aprendcria. 

I  would  or  should 
learn. 

1.  Aprenderiamos 

2.  Aprenderias. 

2.  Aprenderiais. 

3.  Aprenderia. 

3.  Aprenderian. 

C  O  :X  J  U  G  A  T I  O  N  S . 


389 


Second  Termination. 


1.  Aprendiera. 

2.  Aprendieras. 

3.  Apreudiera. 

1.  Aprendiese. 

2.  Aprendieses. 

3.  Aprendiese. 

1.  Aprendiere. 

2.  Aprendieres. 

3.  Aprendiere. 


I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
learn. 


1.  Aprendieramos, 


2.  Aprendierais. 

3.  Aprendicran. 

Third  Termination. 


I  might,  &c., 
learn. 


I  might,  «&c., 
learn. 


FtJTUEE. 


1.  Aprendiesemos. 

2.  Aprendieseis. 

3.  Aprendiesen. 


1.  Aprcndieremos. 

2.  Aprendiereis. 

3.  Aprendieren. 


Escribir. 

Escribiendo. 

Escrito.* 


XmSD  CONJlGATiOX. 

IXFIXITIVE. 

I  To  write. 


GEEUXD. 


Writing. 


PAST  P^VETICIPLE. 

I         Written. 
INDICATIVE. 

PEESENT. 


1.  Escribo. 

2.  Escribes. 

3.  Escribe. 


1.  Escribia. 

2.  Escribias. 

3.  Escribia. 


I  write. 


1.  Escribimos. 

2.  Escribis. 

3.  Escriben. 


IMPEEFECT. 


I  wrote,  was 
writing. 


1.  Escribiamos. 

2.  Escribiais. 

3.  Escribian. 


*  This  is  tho  only  instance  of  irregularity  in  tho  verb  Escribir. 


390 


CONJUGATIONS. 


PEETEEIT  DEFINITE. 

1.  Escribi.            I  -wrote.  1.  Escribimos. 

2.  Escribiste.  2.  Escribisteis. 

3.  Escribi6.  3.  Escribieron. 


FUTTJEE   SIMPLE. 


1.  Escribire. 

2.  Escribirds. 

3.  Escribira. 


I  sball  (or  will) 
■write. 


1.  Escribir^raos. 

2.  Escribir6is. 
8.  Escribiran. 


2.  Escribe. 

3.  Escriba. 


Write  (tbou). 
Let  him,    «&c., 
write. 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Escribamos. 

2.  Escribid. 

3.  Escriban. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


1.  Escriba. 

2.  Escribas. 

3.  Escriba. 


1.  Escribiria. 

2.  Escribirias. 

3.  Escribii'ia. 

1.  Escribiera. 


2.  Escribieras. 

3.  Escribiera. 


1.  Escribiese. 


2.  Escribieses. 

3.  Escribiese. 


I  may  write. 


1.  Escribamos. 

2.  Escribais. 

3.  Escriban. 


IMPEEFEOT. — First  Termination. 


I     would     (or 
should)  write. 


1.  Escribiriamos. 

2.  Escribiriais. 

3.  Escriblrian. 


Second  Termination. 


I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
write. 


1.  Escribieramos. 


2.  Escribierais. 

3.  Escribieran. 


Third  Termination. 


I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
write. 


1.  Escribiesemos. 


2.  Escribieseis. 

3.  Escribiesen. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


391 


1.  Escribiere. 

2.  Escribieres. 

3.  Escribiere. 


I    might,    &c., 
write. 


1.  Escribieremos. 

2.  Escribiereis. 

3.  Escribieren. 


COMTOUSD  TEXSES. 

These  ai'O  formed  by  joining  the  several  tenses  of  the  auxiliary  hdber 
to  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  expressing  the  action. 

INDICATH'E  MOOD. 

PRETEHIT   INDEFINITE. 


/  have  spoken. 
I  have  learned. 
I  have  written. 

1.  Ho  1       hablado, 

2.  Has  I      aprendido. 

3.  Ha  escrito. 


To  he  hallado. 

Yo  he  aprendido. 

Yo  he  escrito. 
Hemos  "]       hablado. 

Habeis  I      aprendido. 

Han  I       escrito. 


PLUPEEFECT. 


I  had  spoTcen. 
I  had  learned. 
I  had  written. 

1.  Habia  "i       hablado. 

2.  Habias  I      aprendido. 

3.  Habia  escrito. 


Yo  hahia  hahlado. 

Yo  habia  aprendido. 

Yo  hahia  escrito. 
Habiaraos      l       hablado. 
Habiais  |-      aprendido. 

Ilabiau  J       escrito. 


PRETEEIT   ANTERIOK. 


I  had  spoken. 
I  had  learned. 
I  had  written. 

1.  Hube  1       hablado. 

2.  Ilubiste         \      aprendido. 

3.  Hubo  J       escrito. 


Yo  hube  hablado. 

Yo  hube  aprendido. 

Yo  hiibe  escrito. 
Hubimos        "i       hablado. 
Hubisteis        I      aprendido. 
Ilubieron       I       escrito. 


COMPOUND  FUTURE. 


I  shall  have  spoken. 

I  shall  hate  learned. 

I  shall  have  written 
Habre  ^       hablado. 

Habrtis  |- 

Habra  J 


aprendido. 
escrito.  * 


Yo  habre  hablado. 

Yo  habre  aprendido. 

Yo  habre  escrito. 
Habr^mos      "]       hablado. 
Habr6is  I      aprendido. 

Habran  J       escrito. 


•  The  other  componnd  tenses  are  conjugated  in  like  maimer. 


392 


C  O  X  J  U  G  A  T  I  O  X  S  . 


THE  SEVEN  PEIKCIPAL  CLASSES  OF  lEREGULAR 
VERES. 


AcEnTAK. 


FffiST  CLASS. 


To  hit  the  marJc. 


INDICATIVE. 

PBESEXT. 

1.  Acierto. 

I  hit  the  mark. 

1.  Acertamos. 

2.  Aciertas. . 

2.  Acertais. 

3.  Acierta. 

3.  Aciertan. 

IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Acertemos. 

2.  Acierta. 

2.  Acertad. 

3.  Acierte. 

SUBJm 

PEES 

3.  Acierten. 
fCTlVE. 

EXT. 

1.  Acierto. 

1.  Acertemos. 

2.  Aciertes. 

2.  Acerteis. 

' 

3.  Acierte. 

3.  Acierten. 

The  following  terhs,  and  their  compounds^  are  conjugated  like  Aceetak  : 

Acrecentar. 

To  increase. 

Derrengar. 

To  break  the  back. 

Adestrar. 

To  render  skilful. 

Despernar. 

To  cut  off  the  legs. 

Alentar. 

To  breathe. 

Despertar. 

To  awake. 

Apacentar. 

To  feed. 

Desterrar. 

To  banish. 

Apretar. 

To  squeeze. 

Empedrar. 

To  pave. 

Arrendar. 

To  hire. 

Empezar. 

To  begin. 

Asentar. 

To  place. 

Encerrar. 

To  lock  up. 

Aserrar. 

To  saw. 

Encomendar. 

To  recommend. 

Aterrar. 

To  throw  down. 

Enterrar. 

To  bury. 

Atestar. 

To  staflf. 

Escarmentar. 

To  take  warning. 

Atravesar. 

To  cross. 

Fregar. 

To  rub. 

Aventar. 

To  winnow. 

Gobemar. 

To  govern. 

Calentar. 

To  warm. 

Helar. 

To  freeze. 

Cegar. 

To  blind. 

Herrar. 

To  shoe. 

Ccrrar. 

To  shut. 

Invemar. 

To  winter. 

Comenzar. 

To  commence. 

Mentar. 

To  mention. 

Concertar. 

To  agree. 

Mercndar. 

To  t.ake  a  collation 

Confesar. 

To  confess. 

Negar. 

To  deny. 

Decentar. 

To   taste  for  the 

Xevar. 

To  snow. 

first  time. 

Pcnsar. 

To  think. 

COKJUGATIONS, 


393 


Qucbrar. 

To  break. 

Sosegar. 

T<j  quiet. 

Recomendar. 

To  recommend. 

Soterrar. 

To  bury. 

Regai'. 

To  water. 

Temblar. 

To  tremble. 

Reventar. 

To  burst. 

Tentar. 

To  tempt. 

Segar. 

To  cut  down. 

Trasegar. 

To  rake. 

Sembrar. 

To  sow. 

Tropezar. 

To  stumble. 

Scntar. 

To  set. 

SECOJfD  CLASS. 

ACOSTAR. 

1              To  put  in  led. 

INDICATIVE. 

PEESENT. 

1.  Acucsto. 

I  put  in  bed. 

1.  Acostamos. 

2.  Acuestas. 

2.  Acostais. 

• 

3.  Acuesta. 

IMPER 

3.  Acuestan 
ATIVE. 

• 

1.  Acostemos. 

2.  Acuesta. 

2.  Acostad. 

3.  Acucste. 

SUBjm 

3.  Acuesten 
TOTIVE. 

PEES 

EXT. 

1.  Acueste. 

1.  Acostemos. 

2.  Acuestes. 

2.  Acosteis. 

3.  Acueste. 

■ 

^>  Acuesten 

• 

The  following  verbs,  and  their  compi 

7und8,  are  conjugated  liTce  Ac<ys,Tj 

Acordar, 

To  agree. 

Consolar. 

To  console. 

Agorar. 

To  divine. 

Contar. 

To  count. 

Almorzar. 

To  breakfast. 

Costar. 

To  cost. 

Amolar. 

To  grind. 

DegoUar. 

To  behead. 

Aporcar. 

To  hoe. 

Demostrar. 

To  demonstrate. 

Apostar, 

To  bet. 

Descollar. 

To  surpass. 

Aprobar. 

To  approve. 

Dcsconsolar. 

To  discourage. 

Asolar. 

To  waste. 

Desolar. 

To  desolate. 

Atronar. 

To  thunder. 

Desollar. 

To  skin. 

Avergonzar. 

To^ame. 

Desvergonzarse. 

To  be  impudent 

Colar.                e'^ 

-  To  strain. 

Emporcar. 

To  dirty. 

Colgar.- 

To  hang. 

Encordar. 

To  string. 

Coraprobar. 

To  verify. 

Encontrar. 

To  meet. 

17^ 


394 


C  O  X  J  U  G  A  T  1  O  2i  3  , 


Engrosar. 

To  engross. 

Resollar. 

To  breathe. 

Forzar. 

To  force. 

Rodar. 

To  roll. 

Holgar. 

To  rest. 

Rogar. 

To  entreat. 

Hollar. 

To  tread. 

Soldar. 

To  solder. 

Mostrar. 

To  show. 

Soltar. 

To  lessen. 

Poblar. 

To  people. 

Sonar. 

To  sound. 

Probar. 

To  prove. 

Sonar. 

To  dream. 

Recordar. 

To  remind. 

Tostar. 

To  toast. 

Recostar. 

To  lie  down. 

Trocar. 

To  barter. 

Regoldar. 

To  belch. 

Tronar. 

To  thunder. 

Renovar. 

To  renew. 

Volar. 

To  fly. 

Reprobar. 

To  reprove. 

Volcar. 

To  overturn. 

Rescontar. 

To  compenf 

sate. 

THIBD  CLASS. 

MOVEE. 

1              To  move. 
INDICATIVE. 

PEESENT. 

1.  Muevo. 

1.  Movemos 

. 

2.  Mueves. 

2.  Moveis. 

3.  JIueve. 

3.  Mueven. 

IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Movamos 

2.  Mueve. 

2.  Moved. 

3,  Mueva. 

3.  Muevan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1,  Mueva. 

1.  Movamo? 

, 

2.  Muevas. 

2.  Movais. 

3.  Mueva. 

3.  Muevan. 

The  following  terbs^  and  their  compounds^  are  conjugated  like  Mov 

Absolver. 

To  absolve. 

Morder. 

To  bite. 

Disolver. 

To  dissolve. 

Retorcer. 

To  twist  again. 

Doler. 

To  grieve. 

Solver. 

To  solve. 

Llover. 

To  rain. 

Torcer. 

To  twist 

Moler. 

To  grind. 

Volver. 

To  turn. 

FOCRTH  CLASS. 

Atendeb. 

1 

To  attend 

. 

CONJUGATIONS, 


895 


INDICATIVE. 

PEESENT. 

1.  Atiendo. 

1. 

Atendemos. 

2.  Atiendes 

2. 

Atendeis. 

3.  Atieade. 

3. 

Atienden. 

IMPEKATIVE. 

1. 

Atendamos. 

2.  Atiende. 

2. 

Atended. 

3.  Atieada. 

3. 

Atiendan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

PEESENT. 

1.  Atienda. 

1. 

Atendamos. 

2.  Atiendas. 

2. 

Atendais. 

3.  Atienda. 

3. 

Atiendan. 

The  following  verbs^  and  their  compounds^ 

have  the  same  irregulari 

as  Atender: 

Ascender. 

To  ascend. 

Entender.                 To  understand. 

Cerner. 

To  sift. 

Extender.                 To  extend. 

Condcsceiider. 

To  condescend. 

Heder. 

To  stink. 

Contender. 

To  contend. 

Hcnder 

To  split. 

Defender. 

To  defend. 

Perder. 

To  lose. 

Desatender. 

To  neglect. 

Tender. 

To  stretch  out. 

Descender. 

To  descend. 

Trascender.              To  transcend. 

Encender. 

To  kindle. 

Verter. 

To  pom-  out. 

FIFTH  CLASS. 

Sentie. 

1 

INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

To  feel 

1.  Siento. 

k: 

1. 

Sentimos. 

2.  Sientes. 

2, 

Sentis. 

3.  Siente. 

3. 

Sienten. 

IMPERATIVE. 

1. 

Sintamos. 

2.  Siente. 

2. 

Sentid. 

3.  Sienta. 

3. 

Sientan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Sienta. 

1. 

Sintaraos. 

2.  Sientas. 

2. 

Sintais. 

3.  Sienta. 

3. 

Sientan. 

396 


COKJUGATIONS, 


- 

IMPERFECT. 

First  Termination. 

1.  Sentiria,  &c. 

Second  Termination. 

1. 

Sintiera. 

1.  Sinticramos. 

2. 

Sintieras 

2.  Sinticrais. 

3. 

Sintiera. 

3.  Siutieran. 

Third  Termination. 

1. 

Sintiese. 

1.  Sinticsemos. 

2. 

Sintieses. 

2.  Sintieseis. 

3. 

Sintiese. 

3.  Sintiescn. 

riJTTIEE. 

1. 

Sintiere. 

1          1.  Sintieremos. 

2. 

Sintieres 

2,  Sintiereis. 

3. 

Sintiere. 

3.  Sintieren. 

The  following  nerbs^  and  their  compounds,  have  the  same  irregul 

as  Sextie: 

Adhorii 

. 

To  adhere. 

Digerir.                     To  digest. 

Advertir. 

To  advert. 

Herir.                       To  wound. 

Arrepentirse. 

To  repent. 

Hervir.                     To  boil. 

Asentir 

To  assent. 

Ingerir.                     To  ingraft. 

Conferir. 

To  confer. 

Invertir.                   To  invert. 

Consentir. 

To  consent. 

Pervertir.                 To  pervert. 

Controvertir. 

To  controvert. 

Preferir.                   To  prefer. 

Convertir. 

To  convert. 

Referir.                    To  refer. 

Diferir. 

To  defer. 

Requerir.                 To  require. 

Diferir. 

To  differ. 

SIXTH  aiss. 

Pedir. 

1              To  ash. 
DsT)ICATm:. 

PRESENT. 

1. 

Pido. 

1.  Pedimos. 

2. 

Pides. 

2.  Pedis. 

3. 

Pide. 

3.  Piden. 

PRETEEIT. 

1. 

Pedi. 

1.  Pedimos. 

2. 

Pediste. 

2.  Pedisteis. 

3. 

Pidi6. 

3.  Pidieron. 

CONJUGATIONS. 


397 


IMPERATIVE. 

2. 
3. 

Pide. 
Pida. 

1.  Pidamos. 

2.  Pedid. 

3.  Pidan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PEESEXT. 

1. 
2. 
8. 

Pida. 

Pidas. 

Pida. 

1.  Pidamos. 

2.  Pidais. 

3.  Pidan. 

1.  Pidiera. 

2.  Pidieras. 

3.  Pidiera. 


IMPEEFECT. — First  Termination. 
1.  Pediria,  &c. 

Second  Termination. 

1.  Pidieramos. 

2.  Pidierais. 

3.  Pidieran. 


1.  Pidiese. 

2.  Pidieses. 

3.  Pidiese. 


TJiird  Termination. 

1.  Pidiesemos. 

2.  Pidieseis. 

3.  Pidiesen. 


1.  Pidicre. 

2.  Pidieres. 

3.  Pidiere. 


1.  Pidieremos. 

2.  Pidiereis. 

3.  Pidieren, 


The  following  verds,  and  their  compounds,  have  the  same  irregularities 


as  Pedir  : 


Arrecir. 

Cenir. 

Colejir, 

Competir. 

Conccbir. 

Constrcnir. 

Derretir. 

Desleir. 

Elejir. 

Embestir. 


¥o  benumb. 
To  belt. 
To  collect. 
To  contend. 
To  conceive. 
To  constrain. 
To  melt. 
To  dissolve. 
To  elect. 
To  attack. 


Gcmir. 

Medir. 

Kegir. 

Rendir. 

RcSir. 

Repetir. 

Seguir. 

Servir. 

Teiiir. 

Vcstir. 


To  groan. 
To  measure. 
To  rule. 
To  render. 
To  quarrel. 
To  repeat. 
To  follow. 
To  serve. 
To  dye. 
To  dress. 


398 


C  O  N  J  U  G  A  T  I  O  ]sr  S  , 
SEVENTH  CLASS. 


COITDUCIE. 


To  conduct. 


INDICATIVE. 

PEESENT. 

1.  Conduzco. 

2.  Conduces,  &c. 

1.  Conducimos. 

2.  Conducis,  &c. 

PEETEEIT. 

1.  Conduje. 

2.  Condujiste. 

3.  Condujo. 

1.  Condujimos. 

2.  Condujisteis. 

3.  Condujeron. 

IMPERATIVE. 

2.  Conduce. 

3.  Conduzca. 

1.  Conduzcamos. 

2.  Conducid. 

3.  Conduzcan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Conduzca,  &c. 

1         1.  Conduzcamos,  &c. 

IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 

1.  Conduciria,  &c. 

1          1.  Conduciriamos,  &c. 

Second  Termination. 

1.  Coudujera,  &c. 

1         1.  Condujeramos,  «fec. 

Third  Termination. 

1.  Condujese,  &c. 

1         1.  Condujesemos,  &c. 

FUTTTRE. 

1.  Condujere,  &c. 

1          1.  Condujeremos,  &c. 

• 

The  following  verbs  are  conjugated  lihe  Coxducik  . 

Aducir.                    To  adduce.                | 

Producir.                 To  produce. 

Deducir.                  To  dedi 

ice. 

Reducir.                   To  reduce. 

Introducir.              To  introduce.            1 

Traducir.                 To  translate. 

N.  B.—  Corwcer,  and  all  verbs  ending  in  cer,  of  more  than  two  syllables,  lollow  the 
irregularity  of  Cmducir  in  the  present  indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  in  the  imperative. 
ElBewhere  regular. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


399 


H 


m 

^ 

p; 

>J 

p^ 

a 

w 

!2q 

> 

M 

^ 

U2 

< 

h-i 

H 

P 

&H 

^ 

O 

w 

Uk 

« 

o 

1— 1 

n 

3 

1^ 

O 

O 

h-1 

« 

M 

U, 

^i* 

P 

O 

M 

H 

<1 

O 

t" 

»-9 

'H^ 

o 

u 

.2       « 


•c 


•n 

•3 


.J;        ^       .^ 


a     a     a 


■<   <   < 


V        V 


tn         t. 


-:  "2, 


<{    <5    <J 


5    o 


I 


400 


COXJUGATIOXS. 


eo  "H 


2  rQ 


.2      ^ 


s    .a     a 


s     b 


.2       .1 


s    s 


§     «     «     « 

9      •«      M      "N 


n   5 


^ 


1^' 


(^ 


^ 


^ 


A      a 


f^    fc, 


•p9/.l3du'J         fc, 


CONJUGATIONS. 


401 


in 


C£       s->        o        cu 


'53 


-J)    <1 


U) 


61) 


<)      <1      •<      •< 


is 


61) 


in    .2     ^- 

m  to  w 

-<         <1        <1 


&c 


o 


•p9/.i3di(ij       k, 


402 


CONJUGATIOKS, 


3 


^       ^      ^ 


i 

a 

a 

Q 

u 

h 

» 

fa 

V 

« 

4> 

.? 

» 

S* 

a 


T 

QQ 

-< 
o 

I— I 

fit 

o 


0 

g 

S 

a 

a 

ii 

i£ 

^      y> 


U) 


«>    ^    :2      ^ 


2 


a 

fa 

.1? 

p 


ID 


OS 

4> 

0 


«*      ."P      !? 


« 

9! 

in 

« 

e 

e 

s 

g 

g 

a 

S 

^ 

fa 

» 

M 

« 

& 

V 

» 

s* 

55 

pqMncqpg        eq«p;n« 


hJ    "S 


S       «;;       S 
M      «      P3 


it     o 


«     M     n     p 


ill 

3 


«      «     « 


s 


fa 
eq 


►5     o 


9- 


■pa/Mdtt/j 


CONJUGATIONS. 


403 


«  S 

ft  ^ 

s  5 

c'  2 


&     &     & 
d      S      iS 

V        V        V 


•«       IP*       IP* 


1    i 


o     o 


I 

S 


>m       U 


2      5      .5      .5 
'2     a     a     S^ 


1^ 

is 


o 


p^ 


•2'  ft 


0 

C3 

t 

0 
ft 

2 

5< 

S' 

u 

V 

V 

«» 

•\ 

X 

% 

OB 

es 
ft 

n4 

cT 

2 

t 

ft 

ft 

ft 

^ 

d 

S 

s 

u 

c* 

u 

V 

w 

ON 

^ 

„ 

RS 

& 

& 

ft 

» 
g 

it 

« 

t 

ft 

ft 

ft 

3 

.g 

g 

S 

;j 

©• 

o 

» 

«» 

V 

o 


K         ^ 


■psfMdwi 


404 


CONJUGATIOKS. 


N 

N 

a 

i) 

s 

0 

•S        ^ 


„•   8 


^  n 


a      s 


O  o 


O 


CO     QJ         .5 


N 

N 

O 

« 

B 

0 

«Si 


=Q 


h5     O 


"§* 

-^ 

■g' 

'^ 

«1 

S'' 

f^ 

1 

1 

(ij        'pa/Mdwf       f^ 


COKJUGATIONS. 


405 


N  '3 


ft 


S3         "^ 


!S       •»^       S 


c3 


■a         "O         "O 


•5       o 


I   I- 


«    ft 


8         ^ 


•pj/^dwj      fc, 


406 


CONJUGATIOKS. 


•I?       WN 


* 

9 

a 


T 


?•  -* 


^  ^  ^ 


S  W  O 

§     a     a 


C3 

'Sj 

1-^ 

«J> 

p 

e 

O 

=? 

W 

-J 

^ 

1—1 

5 

1 

■s 

J." 

§ 

f 

r 

f 

1 

g 
3 

■s 

•3 

1 

1 

«•  it 


^  C3  C4 

E      §      I 
.5     o     ph 


.2 

«r 

-© 

0) 

:? 

a 

fl 

p 

Q 

"S 

"tr* 

t* 

C) 

V 

^ 

"S* 

^ 

f^ 

^ 

S        ?'        =5        d 

s     a*    2?    5» 


-S       a 

•c      ^  Sj  tp*       M 


s?  »  s> 

"^  'O  r3  -s 


ef 

CS 

t4 

^ 
m 

'2 

P 

« 

ft 

« 

« 

'pa/uadiuj       fe, 


COXJUGATIONS. 


407 


•2      .2 


M  it 


I 


.2      •» 


.2     -o- 


gi 


9  O 


a     t- 


p^ 


e;   s; 


V 

S 

.2 

k 

g 

g 

s 

o 

^ 

0 

B 

s 

^ 

'O 

"O 

-a 

5^' 

^ 

^ 

2 

<ll 

.S 

.2 

9 

1 

0 

« 

P 

P 

'psf.(ddmj 


408 


CONJUGATIONS, 


T 


W3 

«a 

P3 

f 

w 

i 

> 

XS 

P3 

■s 

-5l 

§^ 

^ 

P 

■!3 

CD 

I" 

« 

«, 

(« 

3* 

»-( 

•^ 

P^ 

"o 

O 

•< 

o 

•** 

EH 

^ 

fcT 

l-H 

'% 

tr 

H 

8 


t? 


pq 


^.i 


9 

be 
.  it 


S) 


S) 


■g, 


a 

0 

SS 

a 

if) 

bli 

h 

h 

u 

«; 

^ 

^ 

w     w     w     « 


to      to 


& 


8)     §) 


5i     So 


■| 


•3 


TJ 

a 

g) 

t' 

o 

•m 

» 

, 

« 

» 

0 

e 

a 

g 

A 

c: 

bt 

il 

fa 

u 

n 

H 

•3        •- 


g) 


§     a     a 


*-  iT         t- 


V         o 


■fo 


www 


i"  u 


g> 


io     §) 


M     o 


?:  t^ 


I 


s       " 


(5^        -pi/usdutj 


CONJUGATIONS. 


409 


a      « 


-I 


» 


a     a 


m 


> 


1^- 


c3  O 


www 


E     g 


w 


w 


w     w     w     w 


o 


4  § 


b;    Si 


•pd/j^wj       C^ 


18 


410 


COKJUGATIONS. 


^    3 


in     -E 


.2      '"^      •»< 


Ul 


.2      "^ 


0)  <i> 

3    3 


"  o  2  2 

1 1  I  -i 

o  o  «  fe 

L    w  w  n  w 


w 


s 

03 

w 


I     a 


.S      "S      w^ 


►rt      H      a      w' 
W      H      H      W 


ui      m   •§ 


^1    '« 


1j 


ib    -g 


«        «        W 
•S        M         tiN 


w  o  o 

cS  cJ  <U 

HUM 


-  ^ 


-t. 


w    ti    w    tn 


OJ  lU  O) 

•N  tf^  WN 

«  W  « 

a  M  •»* 


www 


Cl,        •p^/.(9dmj      c^ 


CONJUGATIONS. 


411 


0 

U 
a       9 


2< 

J3    > 


•i     I 


iS  £  2 


*   ®   « 

•2         W         •N 


'S 

S^ 

■w 

« 

« 

E 

^ 

h 

ill 

h 

►» 

Vj 

V 

« 

4) 

^ 

es 

,3 

.0 

B 

a 

12 

> 

[fa 

c 

c 

C 

e 

^ 

9> 

9\ 

tB^ 

<c    . 

m 

9 

9 

e 

0  S 

9 

i 

g 

C8  » 

CS 

o 

h 

IB 

h 

Kb 

K 

« 

0 

V 

eS  ° 

es 

§ 

S 

S 

S 

> 

k 

^ 

^ 

^ 

tQ 


•  .     -4) 

es     S     S 


A"      ^ 


,5     o 


0      a      a       ~ 

iS  fi  fe  :§ 


3 


I 


•8'      '^ 


• 

es 

g 

(4 

V 

V 

4) 

^ 

.2 

.a 

,8 

.a 

> 

•^ 

cS 

«PN 

C 

9> 

CS 

b 

» 

h 

t/T 

4> 

0 

o 

eS 

.2 

.a 

a 

,3 

>■ 

*E 

C 

«M 

(m 

#t 

es 

0 

es 

h 

« 

h 

K 

« 

» 

S 

es 

cf 

0 

a 

a 

k 

S 

& 

b 

l« 

1 

1 

^         OJ         W 

1 

1 

•pa/Usduij 

1 

^ 

1 

65 

a 


412 


CONJUGATIONS. 


t 

o 

1 

i> 

tn 

ftn 

to 

3 

s 

3 

D 

<>»     bO 


a     a     s 


CO     9 


^ 


.5     ^ 
a,     R, 

5     S 


■P 

!» 


V  to 
3  3 
1-9        »-S 


g> 


'^» 


'^ 

f^ 


a      ^ 


g  V ;§ 


^ 


CONJUGATIONS. 


413 


►.     .2      b     -^ 


bS 


611 


:s    ^ 


^ .. 


gsl     aa        ^a 


Ul     -s 


^     ►> 


-I 


g 

g 

lifl 

bo 

O 

o 

@     a 


o 


o 


o 


CO    ^      .2        ►»      .i 


ill 


61) 


^ 


.yi     :5:       ^      )^      >? 


o 


i£ 

o 


o 


o 


o 


c 


o 


"s 


•p3/u9dmj      k^ 


414 


CONJUGATIONS, 


A      ^ 


TO      .a      -i=      -s> 
^      ^      ;a       o 


^-  a 


ty  C3  C5  QJ 


r 


O         8 


Si 


&    o 


CO     0  03 

.4     "3 


»S<      "o      "3 


;3      13      ^ 


Qj  ^2 


i-S  ^         m 


•5        =3        ^ 


"§* 

'J^ 

'^ 

c^ 

4> 

"^S 

^ 

f^ 

s       ^ 


'ps/Mdmj 


CONJUGATIONS. 


415 


fj 

g 

d 

a 

g 

m 

.2J 

to 

.2 

•s    g 


0       0       0 


I 


a     a     a 


^     0 


-s 


c<J 


(N      « 


_0  Qj 


Ph 


Pui 


►3     o 


"S 


e;    ft. 


ftj        'p^/uadwf      ^ 


416 


CONJUGATIOKS. 


•E       -E 


•2     S 


-•| 


a     s  1' 


£ 


**      -S 


•S  c>        .X 


l.i 


.  5 


»=i     o 


?•  'b 


«5 


I 

s 


f^  ^ 


&3 


CONJUGATIONS. 


417 


it 


i 

in    "9 


•  8 


1 

u 

*3 

C3 
'g 

2 

0) 

s 

1 

-S 

U) 

'3 

» 

'S 

m 

a 
o 

o 

§ 

d 
o 

0 

i 

t 

p. 

P. 

*<• 

P. 

P< 

p. 

p< 

p< 

Pi 

1 

§" 

o 

1 

o 

a 

a 

a 

o 

^g 

a 

a 

•g 

s 

9i 
(4 

a 

'S 

s. 

h 

tS 

eS 

h 

2 

<u 

V 

'S 

&£ 

in 

« 

'S 

■« 

'S 

§ 

o 

§ 

§ 

s 

0 

e 

fS 

Ph 

Ph 

P-( 

Ph 

Ph 

Ph 

Ph 


i. 


•a 


^ 


o 

C3 

9 

1 

g 

"a 
o 

d 

§ 

p. 

p. 

Pi 

p< 

• 

«r 

-es 

s" 

i 

— 

'S 

1 

§ 

1 

i 

p 

o 

p. 

P4 

p. 

Pi 

ill 

§ 

§ 

0 

o 

fW 

Ph 

Ph 

Ph 

■«* 

:^ 

' 

1 

1 

^ 

1 

it 


it 


'9 

it) 

«! 

m 

§ 

s 

0 

i 

p, 

Pi 

P. 

p< 

« 

{S 

oT 

tn~ 

?r 

t 

2 

o 

CO 

1 

"3 

'5 

'S 

« 

§ 

0 

0 

0 

Pi 

Pi 

Pi 

Pi 

Ph 


to        a) 


f^  'p9/U9dtUJ 


418 


CONJUGATIONS. 


t    '3 


.2       « 


S  cj  o  5 

&  -s  ^  -s 

I  U  E  "s 

a*  c*  c  C7' 


o        2 
.2      "S 


O"      O" 


a 


§     S     i 


g    'g    "S    "S 


<y 


•s 


■€ 


aj       -Ta 


1^^ 
«3 


c.  .S 


ro"       in 

2      wN 


.is  a>  <u  o 

r  tN  n^  tN 

B  <B  «fi  K 

§  •  -g  "S  -g 

o<  c  c  cr 


C      C      O' 


O?      O"      O"      c 


5 


Qj 

C 

» 

« 

» 

•g 

§ 

•g 

•g 

•g 

c 

c 

c? 

c 

O" 

•p9/U9dwj         fc, 


CONJUGATIONS. 


419 


.  a 


s    .a 


•a   «   « 


1^ 


■§ 


.S      -2 


.2 


s     i 


^  a    i    I    :§ 

.  I  ;§  «  « 


p^ 


P5 


C  O  aj 

2    S    S 


^y  W  >2 

•e    "5    •« 


►g_ 


S'    w       •?, 


.S     .is 


M       «        « 


O 


Ph 


1^ 


» 


'^ 


jj        .3  «  <u  oi 

S    ^    S    2    S 


f^  •f09/.l9dwj 


420 


COKJUGATIONS. 


g<     'ft     'ft 
P:      9      9 


a>        o        <i> 


I        1       I 


CQ        CC 


ft 

ft 

V 

« 

CQ 

M 

g 

a 

a 

S 

s 

m 

2 

v 

o 

<i> 

'ft 

'ft 

'ft 

S 

s 

9 

m 

m 

w. 

■^ 

« 

i^ 

P3 

•g 

1— 1 

s 

o 

s 

P=« 

o 

-1 

s 

O 

iJd 

s 

_o 

o" 

-ii 

^ 


A     O 


CO    ^ 


.2       ^ 
■«      -^      I 


CQ 


a,     "S      .S 


ft      h 

W        02 


0)        _o 


ft 


'■p}f.i.9dmi 


ft 

9 


CONJUGATIONS. 


421 


•  S      3      s     )0 

«  ^       ;3       ;S       ,25 


it 
-a 


2      ;=      :§ 

el         ci         d 


.a     .a 


•M 


a      ;s      ,2 


^      ;a      ^      =3 


r4  a 


"d      "*      "3      "3 


OQ        CQ 


1 

s 

J> 

"3 

CQ 

CQ 

02 

_^  ffl  .2  ^  ;2 


S      ^ 


m 


-  o  o 

02  M  M 

s  §  ^ 

3  B  f- 

I  g  S3 

►3  o  pt, 


^-  Hi 


s 


^     g      :2      ;2      ;S 


iP     2      a      a      « 
"*      "3     "3      d      « 

02        CQ        CQ        CQ        CO 


C        "^ -S 


422 


CONJUGATIONS. 


J 


T 


•? 


bll 


•1^  IM 


SB     -E 


V  •:?  V 


-^ 


r-i  a 


o 

o 

F1 

PI 

a 

d 

■■? 

il 

H 

H 

Eh 

a 


•5    •5 


•5»-r 


P4 

■< 

ij 

0 

G5 

?> 

w 

1 

-l 

O 

•. 

o 

^    s 


PM 


? 


1 


Ul    -s 


3f 


3      V 


ii    -H 


•?•?•!? 


60     -g 


?    •?  ¥ 


El     -H 


•8 


"5^ 


•ps/uadutj      ^    « 


'CONJUGATIONS. 


423 


o       9 
2     '2 


3       C 


^ 


oT 

•S 

••-1 

•i 

«a> 

1 

"3 

I* 

t» 

.2     .a 


10      s 


-•I 


>:>:>: 


-a 


8 

i?     S      ;a      a 
t>     t>     >►     t* 


§     a     g 


aj     .2     :2     S 

cd  oj  o3  c3 


U) 


6fi    >d 


13      ^ 


ca 


^   "3 


U)     J§      j§      .2      .2 


.  jll      jg       ;s       2 


a   jg    j2 
k    ^    ^ 


A     o 


'^ 


'^ 
•^ 


■^       to       -rJ       "« 

S  rH  (M  M 

g    ' » ' 


424 


CONJUGATIONS, 


§  .3  .2 

_  3  J 

•K  «  •a 

(►  >  f» 


a 


in     ^ 


>      > 


l     l     'i 


I 


s    i 


11^ 
t^   f>   p> 


i 

« 

«>s 

s 

«• 

•S 

1 

fe 

o 

§ 

^ 

o 

C 

o 

u 

1 

o 
-a 

1^ 

•§ 

1 

1 

t> 

t> 

t^ 

s    -a 

•pi         o 


t 


.2      'fl 


&£ 


•e 


if  *« 


o 


.2 

« 

>« 

'3 

a 

a 

L* 

<M 

S 

t> 

k 

(> 

1' 

"fe^ 

f 

f^ 

g 

1 

^' 

s 

s 

„v 

3 

►? 

^1 

fc< 

« 

o 

2 

J 

1 

'S 

;> 

^ 

l> 

;§    -s    3 

•pi      f*      "H 


(^        •pa/Mdiuj      fe, 


CONJUGATIONS. 


425 


•p     -s 


in      •-      .a 
:§      «     "2 

!>        P        t»- 


s     a 
a    .1 


g     a 


t^    fc>    t*    t> 


•s 


23 


SPSS" 


k    }>    t> 


.     I>     t>     t>     |> 


k        t>        t>        t^ 


o 


(^        'py/jiddxuj 


426 


CONJUGATIONS. 


CONJUGATION  OF  A  VERB  IN  THE  REFLECTIVE  FORM, 

INTEslTlVE. 


Lavarse. 


To  wash  one's  self. 


Lavandose. 


"Washing  one's  self. 


Lavadose. 


PAST  PAETIOIPLE. 

I         "Washed  one's  self. 


IXDICATIVE. 


1.  Me  lavo.  I  wash  myself. 

2.  Te  lavas. 

3.  Se  lava. 


1.  Nos  lavamos. 

2.  Os  lavais. 

3.  Se  lavan. 


IMPKEFECT. 


1.  Me  lavaba,       I   was    washing, 

washed,  or  used 
to  wash  myself. 

2.  Te  lavabas. 

3.  Se  lavaba. 


1.  Kos  lavabamos. 


2,  Os  lavabais. 

3.  Se  lavaban. 


PRETERIT   DEFINITE. 


1.  Me  lave. 

2.  Te  lavaste. 

3.  Se  lav6. 


I  washed  myself. 


1.  Nos  lavamos. 

2.  Os  lavasteis. 

3.  Se  lavaron. 


1.  Me  lavar6.        I  shall  wash  my 

self 

2.  Te  lavaras. 

3.  Se  lavarS. 


FCTUEK  SIMPLE. 

1.  Nos  lavar6mos. 


2.  Os  lavar^is. 
8.  Se  lavaran. 


3,  Lavate.  "Wash  thyself 

3.  Lavese. 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Lavdmonos. 

.  2.  Lavaos. 

3.  Lavense. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


427 


1.  Me  lave. 

2.  Te  laves. 

3.  Se  lave. 


1.  Me  lavaria. 

2.  Te  lavarias. 

3.  Se  lavaria. 


1.  Me  lavara. 


2.  Te  lavaras. 

3.  Se  lavara. 


1.  Me  lavase. 


2.  Te  lavases. 

3.  Se  lavase. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PEESENT. 

I  may  wasli  my- 


self. 


1.  Noslavemos, 


2.  Os  laveis. 

3.  Se laven. 


IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 


I  would  wash  my- 
self. 


1.  Nos  lavariamos. 

2.  Os  lavariais. 

3.  Se  lavariaQ. 


Second  Termination. 


I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
wash  myself. 


1.  Nos  lavaramos. 


2.  Os  lavarais. 

3.  Se  lavaran. 


Third  Termination. 


I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
wash  myself. 


1.  Nos  lavasemos. 


2.  Os  lavaseis. 

3.  Se  lavasen. 


1.  Me  lavare. 

2.  Te  lavares. 

3.  Se  lavare. 


I  might  or  should 
wash  myself. 


Ayadarse. 

Ayudandose. 

Ayudadose. 


1.  Nos  lavaremos. 

2.  Os  lavareis. 

3.  Se  lavaren. 


INFINITIYE. 


To  help  each  other. 


I         Helping  each  other. 

PAST  PABTIOIPLE. 

I         Helped  each  other. 


428 


CONJUGATIONS. 


PRESEOT'. 

1.  Nos  ayuda-     We  help  each 

mos.  other. 

2.  Os  ayudais. 

3.  Se  ajrudan. 


INDICATIVE. 

DIPEBFECT. 

1.  Nos  ayuda-     We  used  to  help 
bamos.  each  other. 

2.  Os  ayudabais. 
I  3.  Se  ayudaban. 


PRETEEIT  DEFIOTTE. 

1.  Nos  ayuda-     We  helped   each 

mos.  other. 

2.  Os  ayudasteis. 

3.  Se  ayudaroD. 


FUTUEE   SIMPLE. 

1.  Nos  ayuda-     We     shall     help 

reraos.  each  other. 

2.  Os  ayudar^s. 

3.  Se  ayudaran. 


1.  Ayudemonos. 

2.  Ayudaos. 

3.  Ayiidense. 


IMPERATIVE. 


Let  us  help  each  other. 

Help  each  other. 

Let  them  help  each  other. 


PKESEHT. 

1.  Nos  ayude-     We  may  help  each 

mos.  other. 

2.  Os  ayudeis. 

3.  Se  ayuden. 

Second  Termination., 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 

1.  Fosayudaria-  We    would    help 
mos.  each  other. 

2.  Os  ayudariais. 

3.  Se  ayudarian. 


1.  Nos  ayuda- 

ramos. 

2.  Os  ayudarais. 

3.  Se  ayudaran. 


We  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
help  each  other. 


TJiird  Termination. 
1.  Nos  ayudase-  We  might,  could, 
mos.  would,  or  should 


2.  Os  ayudaseis. 

3.  Se  ayudasen. 


help  each  other. 


1.  Nos  ayudaremos, 

2.  Os  ayndareis. 

3.  So  ayudaren. 


We  might  or  should  help  each 
other. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


429 


Amajteoeb. 


IMPERSONAL  VEEBS. 

I  To  grow  light. 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
Pret.  Def. 


Amanece. 
Araanecia. 
Amaneci6. 


Fut.  Simple.     Amaaeceri. 


INDICATIVE. 

Simple  Texses. 

It  grows  light. 

It  "was  growing  light. 

It  grew  light. 


It  will  grow  light. 


COJCPOITND  TeXSES. 


Pret.  Indef.      Ha  amanecido. 
Pluperfect.       Habia  amanecido. 
Anterior.  Ilubo  amanecido. 

Comp.  Future.  Habra  amanecido. 


It  has  grown  light 
It  had  grown  light. 
It  had  grown  light. 
It  will  have  grown  light. 


IMPERATIVE. 


Amanezca. 


Let  it  grow  light. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Simple  Tenses. 

Present.  Amanezca.  It  may  grow  light. 

fAmaneceria.  1                  f   might,    1 

Imperfect.      -I  Amaneciera.  I  It  J  should,  or  I  grow  light. 

[Araaneciese.  J                  |^    would    J 

Future.             Amaneciere.  "  It  should  grow  light. 


CoMPOx:>T)  Tenses. 


Perfect.  Haya  amanecido. 

/  Habria     "] 
Plnperf.        J  Hubiera    l^^^" 

[Hubiese   J     "^°- 
Comp.  Future.  Hubiere  amanecido. 


It  may  have  grown  light. 

r  might  have,    '\ 
It  J  should  have,  or  U^f.^ 

[    would  have    J      ^'g^*' 
It  should  have  grown  light. 


I^.  B. — Anoehecer,  to  grow  dark,  is  conjugated  in  the  same  manner, 
and  has  the  same  irregularity. 


430 


Neyai?. 


COKJUGATIONS. 

I  To  snow. 


INDICATIVE. 

Si.MPLE  Tenses. 

Present. 

Nieva. 

It  snows. 

Imperfect. 

Nevaba- 

It  was  snowing. 

Pret.  Def. 

Nev6. 

It  snowed. 

Future. 

Nevaxd. 

It  will  snow. 

CoMPOXJXD  Tenses. 


Pret.  Indef.      Ha  nevado. 
Pluperfect.       Habia  nevado. 
Anterior.  Hubo  nevado. 

Comp.  Future.  Habra  nevado. 


It  Las  snowed. 
It  had  snowed. 
It  had  snowed. 
It  will  have  snowed. 


Nieve. 


IMPERATIVE. 

I         Let  it  snow. 


Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

Perfect. 
Pluperfect. 


Nieve. 
'Nevaria.' 
Nevara. 
Nevase, 
Nevare. 


SUBJT7NCTIVE. 
Simple  Tenses. 


Haya  nevado. 

{Habria  "] 
Hubiera  I  nevado 
HubieseJ 


It  may  snow. 

r  might,  ^ 
It  \  should,  or  I 

I  would  J 
li  should  snow. 


CoMPOTJND  Tenses. 

It  may  have  snowed. 

f   might  have,    I 
It  J  should  have,  or  I  snowed. 

[    would  have    J 


Comp.  Future.  Hubiere  nevado. 


It  should  have  snowed. 


N.  B. — Helar,  to  freeze,  is  conjugated  in  the  same  manner,  and  has 
the  same  tenses  irregular. 


CONJUGATIONS. 

Tboxae 

1             To  thunder.    . 

INDICATIVE. 
Simple  Texses. 

Present. 
Imperfect. 
Fret.  Def. 
Future. 

Truena. 
Tronaba. 
Trono. 
Tronara. 

It  thunders. 
It  was  thunderuig. 
It  thundered. 
It  will  thunder. 

4ai 


Compot:>t)  Texses. 


Fret.  Indef.      Ha  tronado. 
Pluperfect.       Habia  tronado. 
Anterior.  Hubo  tronado. 

Comp.  Future.  Habra  tronado. 


It  has  thundered. 
It  had  thundered. 
It  had  thundered. 
It  wiU  have  thundered. 


Truene. 


IMPERATIVE. 

I         Let  it  thunder. 


Present. 


Imperfect. 


Future. 


Truene. 
fTronaria." 
■I  Tronara. 
[Tronase. 

Tronare. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Simple  Texses. 


It  may  thunder. 

r  might,  1 
It  J  should,  or  I  thunder. 

[  would  J 
It  should  thunder. 


Compound  Tenses. 


Haya  tronado. 

{Habria    1 
Hubiera  I  tronado. 
Hubiese  J 
Comp.  Future.  Hubiere  tronado. 


Perfect. 
Pluperfect. 


It  may  have  thundered. 

{might  have,    "j 
should  have,  or  I  thundered, 
would  have    J 
It  should  have  thundered. 


N.  B, — Llover,  to  rain,  is  conjugated  like  this  verb,  and  changes  also 
the  0  into  ue  in  the  same  tenses.  Esearchar^  to  freeze ;  granizar,  to 
hail ;  lloviznar,  to  drizzle ;  and  relampaguear,  to  lighten,  are  all  regular. 


432 


CONJUGATIONS. 


Haceij,  to  he  (when  employed  va.  reference  to  time  and  weather). 

INDICATIVE. 
Simple  Tenses. 
Hace.  It  is. 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
Pret.  Def. 
Future. 


Pret.  Indef.      Ha  hecho. 
Pluperfect.        Habia  hecho. 
Anterior.  Eubo  hecho. 

Comp.  Future.  Habra  hecho. 


Haga. 


Hacia.  It  was. 

Hizo.  It  was. 

Hara.  It  will  be. 

CoAipouKD  Tenses. 

It  has  been. 
It  had  been. 
It  had  been. 
It  will  have  been. 


IMPERATIVE. 

I         Let  it  be. 


Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

Perfect. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Simple  Tenses. 

Ilaga.  It  may  be. 

fHaria.     1  (    might, 

J  Hiciera,   I  It  J  should,  or 

[Hiciese.  J  [    would 

Hiciere.  It  should  be. 

Compound  Tenses. 


be. 


Haya  hecho.' 
fHabria    "] 

Pluperfect.    \  Hubiera   I  hecho. 
[Hubiese  J 

Comp.  Future.  Hubiere  hecho. 


It  may  have  been. 

(  might  have,  "j 
It  J  should  have,  or  vbeen. 

(^  would  have  J 
It  should  have  been. 


Habee,  when  signifying  there  to  he. 


Hay. 

Habia. 
Hubo. 
Habrl 


J  There  is, 
I  There  are. 
( Tliere  was. 
I  There  were. 
There  will  be. 


Ha  habido. 

Habia  habido. 
Hubo  habido. 
Habra  habido. 


J  There  has  been, 
j  There  have  been. 

There  had  been. 

There  had  been. 

There  shall  have 
been. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


433 


Hay  a. 

Let  thex'o  be. 

Haya  habido 

There  may  have 

Haya. 

There  may  be. 

been. 

Habria. 
Hubiera. 
Hubiese. 
Hubiere. 

'There  might, 

could,  would,  or 
.     should  be. 
There  might  or 

Habria  habido. 
Hubiera  habido. 
Hubiese  habido. 

'There  might, 
could,  would,  or 
should  have 
been. 

should  be. 

Hubiere  habido. 

There  might  or 
should    have 
been. 

DEFECTIVES. 

Tliefotlowing  verbs  are  found  itsed  only  in  the  tenses  and  persons  given 
in  the  annexed  examples  : 


PlACEK. 


To  please. 


IXDICATIVE. 


Present,  Zd  pers.  sing.,  Place. 
Imperf.       "  "       Placia. 

Pret.  Def.  "  "        Plugo. 


It  pleases. 

It  was  pleasing. 

It  pleased. 


Present.  Zd  pers.,  sing.,  Plegue. 
Imperf.      "  «     ^PJuguiera. 

^    ''  \  Pluguiese. 

Comp.  Future.       "       Pluguiere. 


SOLER. 


SUBJUXCTIYE. 

It  may  please. 
It  would  please. 
It  might  please. 
It  should  please. 


To  le  wont. 


Suelo. 

Sueles. 

Suele, 

Solemos. 

Soleis. 

Suelen. 


]3n)ICATIYE. 

PRESENT. 


I  am  wont. 
Thou  art  wont. 
He  is  wont, 
^e  are  wont. 
You  are  wont. 
They  are  wont. 


19 


434 


CONJUGATIONS. 


IMPEEFECT. 


Solia. 

Solias. 

Solia. 

Soliaraos. 

Soliais, 

Solian. 


Yacer. 


I  was  wont. 
Thou  wast  wont. 
He  was  wont. 
We  were  wont. 
You  were  wont. 
They  were  wont. 


To  lie  dead. 


No  part  of  this  verb  is  made  use  of  except  the  third  persons  of  the 
present  indicative,  yace  and  yacen,  which  are  generally  inscribed  on 
tombstones. 


CONJUGATION  OF  A  VERB  IN  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

Ser  perdonado. 


INTIMTIVE. 

I  To  be  pardoned. 


GEETIND. 

Siendo  perdonado.  |  Being  pardoned. 

PAST   PAETICIPLE. 

Habiendo  sido  perdonado.  |  Having  been  pardoned. 

INDICATIVE. 


1.  Soy  perdona-   I  am  pardoned. 

do. 

2.  Eres  perdo- 

nado. 

3.  Es  perdonado. 


1.  Somos  perdonados. 

2.  Sois  perdonados. 

3.  Son  perdonados. 


IMPEEFECT. 


1.  Era  perdona-       I  was  or  used  to 

do.  be  pardoned. 

2.  Eras  perdonado. 

3.  Era  perdonado. 


1.  Eramos  perdonados. 

2.  Erais  perdonados. 

3.  Eran  perdonados. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


435 


PBETEEIT   DEFIXITE. 


1.  Fui  perdona-      I  was  pardoned. 

do. 

2.  Fuiste  perdonado. 

3.  Fue  perdonado. 


1.  Fuimos  perdonados. 

2.  Fuisteis  perdonados. 

3.  Fueron  perdonados. 


FUTURE   SIMPLE. 


1 .  Sere  perdo-        I  shall    be  par- 

nado.  doned. 

2.  Serjis  perdonado. 

3.  Sera  perdonado. 


1.  Ser^mos  perdonados. 

2.  Ser6is  perdonados. 

3.  Seran  perdonados. 


IMPERA.TIVE. 


2.  S6  perdonado.  Be  pardoned. 

3.  Sea  perdonado. 


1.  Seamos  perdonados. 

2.  Sed  perdonados. 

3.  Sean  perdonados. 


SUBJUXCTrV^E. 


1.  Sea  perdonado.  I  may  bo  par- 

doned. 

2.  Seas  perdonado. 

3.  Sea  perdonado. 


1.  Seamos  perdonados. 

2.  Seais  perdonados. 

3.  Sean  perdonados. 


liiPEEFECT. — First  Term ination. 


1 .  Seria  perdona-   I  woidd  be  par- 

do.  doned. 

2.  Serias  perdonado. 

3.  Seria  perdonado. 


1.  Seriaraos  perdonados. 

2.  Serials  perdonados. 

3.  Serian  perdonados. 


1.  Fuera  perdona-  I  might,  could, 

do.  wonld,  or 

should  be  par 
doned. 

2.  Fneras  perdonado. 

3.  Fuera  jierdonado. 


Second  Termination. 

1.  Fueramos  perdonados. 


2.  Fuerais  perdonados. 

3.  Fueran  perdonados. 


436 


CONJUGATIONS. 


Third  Termination. 


1.  Fuese  perdona-  I  might,  could, 

do.  would,  or 

should  be  par- 
doned. 

2.  Fueses  perdonado. 

3.  Fuese  perdonado. 


1.  Fuesemos  perdonados. 


2.  Fucseis  perdonados, 

3.  Fuesen  perdonados. 


FUTUKE. 


1.  Fuere  perdona-  I  might  or 

do.  should  he  par- 

doned. 

2.  Fueres  perdonado. 

3.  Fuei-e  perdonado. 


1.  Fueremos  perdonados. 


2.  Fuereis  perdonados. 

3.  Fueren  perdonados. 


1.  He  sido  pcrdo-  I  have  been  par 

nado.   •  doned. 

2.  Has  sido   per- 

donado. 

3.  Ha  sido  perdo- 

nado. 


Compound  Tenses. 

INDICATIVE. 

PfiETERIT  INDEFINITE. 

1.  Hemos  sido  perdonados. 


2.  Haheis  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Han  sido  perdonados. 


PLUPERFECT, 

1.  Habia  sido       I  had  been  par- 

perdonado.        doned. 

2.  Habias  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Habia  sido 

perdonado. 


1.  Habiamos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Habiais  sido  perdoandos. 
8.  Habian  sido  perdonados. 


ANTEEIOR 

1.  Hube  sido        I  had  been  par- 

perdonado.        doned. 

2.  Hubiste  sido 

perdonado, 

3.  Hubo  sido 

perdonado. 


1.  Hubimos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Hubisteis  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Hubieron  sido  perdonados. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


437 


1.  Habre  sido 

perdonado. 

2.  Ilabras  sido 

pordonado. 

3.  Ilabra  sido 

perdonado. 


1.  Haya  sido 

perdonado. 

2.  II ay  as  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Ilaj'a  sido 

perdonado. 

1.  Habria  sido 

perdonado. 

2.  Ilabrias  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Habria  sido 

perdonado. 

1.  Ilubiera  sido 
perdonado. 


COilPOTJJTD  FtTTTJEE 

I  sbaU  have  been 
pardoned. 


1.  Habr6mos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  IIabr6is  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Habran  sido  perdonados. 


SUBJUXCTIYE. 

PEBFECT. 

I  may  have  been 
pardoned. 


1.  Ilayamos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  HayaJs  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Ilayau  sido  perdonados. 


PLTJPEKFECT. — First  ^Fmination. 


I  would  have  been 
pardoned. 


1.  Habriamos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Habriais  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Ilabrian  sido  perdonados. 


Second  Termination. 


2.  Ilubieras  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Ilubiera  sido 

perdonado. 

1.  Uubiese  sido 
perdonado. 


I  might,  'could, 
Avould,  or 
should  have 
been  pardoned. 


1.  Ilubieramos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Hubierais  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Hubieran  sido  perdonados. 


Third  Termination. 


2.  Hubieses  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Ilnbiese  sido 

perdonado. 


I  might,  could, 
■would,  or 
should  have 
been  pardoned. 


1.  Hubiesemos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Hubieseis  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Hubiescn  sido  perdonados. 


438 


CONJUGATIONS, 


FUTURK  COMPOUND. 


1.  Hubiere  sido    I  might  or  should 

perdonado.       have  been  par- 
doned. 

2.  Hubieres  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Hubiere  sido 

perdonado. 


1.  Hubieremos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Ilubiereis  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Ilubieren  sido  perdonados. 


LIST 

OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  THE  SPANISH 
IMGUGE. 


N.  'B.— The  figures  jUaced  after  each  verb  refer  to  the  page  at  which  the  model  conjugation 

for  that  verb  is  to  befouTid.    For  instance,  the  number  398  shows  that  Aducib 

is  conjugated  like  CoNDucrB,/oMnd  at  page  398. 


Absolver,  39 1. 
Abstraer,  423. 
Acertar,  392. 
Acordar,  393. 
Acostar,  393. 
Acrecentar,  392. 
Adestrar,  392. 
Adhcrir,  395. 
Adquirir,  399. 
Advertir,  395. 
Aducir,  308. 
Aatorar,  393. 
Alentar,  392. 
Almorzar.  393. 
Amolar,  .393. 
Andar,  400. 
Apacentar,  .392. 
Aposfar,  393. 
Aprobar,  393. 
Apretar,  392. 
Arrecirse,  396. 
Arrendar,  392. 
Arrepentirse,  395. 
Ascender,  ,394. 
Asentar,  .392. 
Ascntir,  .395. 
Aserrar,  392. 
Ascstar,  392. 
Asir,  401. 
Asolar.  393. 
Asoldar,  .393. 
Atender,  394. 
Atentar,  .392. 
Aterrar  (echar  por  tier- 

ra),  392. 
Atestar  (rcllenar),  392. 
Atraer,  422. 
Atravesar.  392. 
Aventar.  392. 
Avcntarse,  392. 
Avergonzar,  393. 

Bendeclr,  402. 


Caber,  403. 
Caer,  422. 
Caleutar,  .392. 
Cegar,  392. 
Cenir,  390. 
Cemer,  394. 
Cerrar,  392. 
Cimentar,  392. 
Coccr,  404. 
Colar,  393. 
Colcgir,  396. 
Colgar,  393. 
Comedirse,  390. 
Comenzar,  392. 
Compctir,  396. 
Concebir,  396. 
Concemir,  395. 
Conccrtar,  392. 
Concordar.  393. 
Condescender,  394. 
Condolcrse.  394. 
Conducir,  398. 
Conferir,  395. 
Confesar,  .392. 
Conocer,  .398. 
Conseguir,  .396. 
Consentlr,  395. 
Consolar,  .393. 
Constreriir,  396. 
Contar,  393. 
Contener,  like  Teneii. 
(See  auxiliary  verbs.) 
Contender.  394. 
Contradeclr,  406. 
Controvert  ir.  .395. 
Contraer.  422. 
Convert  ir.  395. 
Corregir,  396. 

Dar,  403. 
Decaer,  422. 
Decentar,  392. 
Decir,  406. 


Dcducir,  398. 
Defender,  394. 
Deferir,  395. 
Degollar.  39.3. 
Demoler,  394. 
Demostrar,  393. 
Denegar,  392. 
Denostar,  393. 
Derrengar,  .392. 
Derretir,  396. 
Desavenir,  424. 
Descender,  .394. 
Descollar,  393. 
Descordar.  .393. 
Descomedirse,  396. 
Dcsflocar,  393. 
Deshaccr,  410. 
Deshelar.  ."'^a. 
Dcsteir,  .396. 
Desembrar,  392. 
Desolar,  393. 
Desollar,  .393. 
Desovar.  .393. 
Despedir,  ,396. 
Degpemar.  392. 
Despertar,  392. 
Desterrar,  392. 
Desplesrar.  392. 
Desvergonzarse,  393. 
Dezmar.  .392. 
Discemir,  395. 
Diferir.  .395. 
Digcrir.  395. 
Discordar.  :'03. 
Difolver,  ."9 1. 
Dlvertir.  395. 
Doler.  394. 
Dormir,  407. 


Elegir.  .396. 
Etnbestir,  396. 
Empedrar,  392. 


410 


LIST    OF    IKKEGULAR    VEEBS. 


Empezar,  892. 
Kmporciir,  393. 
Eiiceudur,  :i94. 
Eiiceusar,  3'J2. 
Eiicerrar,  392. 
Eucomcudar,  392. 
Encoiurar,  393. 
Eucordar,  3!)3. 
Engrcirse,  396. 
Eugrosar,  393. 
Enmendar,  392. 
Enrodar,  393. 
Ensaugrentar,  392. 
Entender,  394. 
Euterrar,  392. 
Envestir,  390, 
Erguir,  408. 
Errar,  409. 
Escarmentar,  392. 
Escocer,  404. 
Esforzar,  393. 
EsTAR.    (See  auxiliaiy 

verb.?.) 
Estrenir,  390. 
Expedir,  >m. 
Extender,  394. 


Forzar,  393. 
Fregar,  392. 


Gemir,  396. 
Gobcrnar.  392. 


IIaber.    (Sec  auxiliaries 

and  impersonals.j 
Hacer,  410. 
Hedcr,  .394. 
nelar,  392. 
Henchir,  .396. 
Render,  394. 
Hcnir,  ,396. 
Ilcrir,  39.5. 
Hcrrar,  392. 
Hervir,  S9.5. 
Hollar,  393. 
Hollar,  393. 


Impedir,  396. 
Inccnsar,  ,392. 
Indiidr.  398. 
Inferir,  .393. 
Inserir.  ,396. 
Inquirir,  399. 
Introducir.  398. 
Invemar,  392. 
Invertir.  395. 
Investir,  396. 
Ir,  411. 


Jngar,  412. 


Llover,  391. 


Maldecir,  402. 
Manifestar,  392. 
Mantencr,  like  Tener. 
(See  auxiliary  verbs.) 
Medir,  396. 
Mentar,  392. 
Meutir,  395. 
Merendar,  392. 
Moler,  391. 
Morder,  394. 
Morir,  407. 
Mostrar,  392. 
Mover,  390. 


Ncgar,  392. 
Nevar,  392. 


Oir,  413. 
Oler,  414. 


Pedir,  396. 
Pcnsar,  892. 
Perder,  394. 
Pervertir,  395. 
Placer,  4.33. 
Plegar,  392. 
Poblar,  393. 
Poder  415. 
Podrir,  416. 
Poner,  417. 
Preferir,  395. 
Probar,  393. 
Producir,  .398. 
Proferir,  395. 


Quebrar,  392. 
Querer,  418. 


Ttacr,  422. 
Recomendar,  392. 
Kecordar,  393. 
Recostar,  393. 
Reducir,  898.. 
l^eferir.  395. 
Regar,  .392. 
Rcarir.  396. 
Regoldar,  392. 
Reir,  419. 
Remendar,  392. 
Rendir,  396. 
Renovar.  393. 
Reflir,  396. 
Repetir,  ,396. 
Requebrar,  392. 
Reqiierir,  .395. 
Rescontrar,  393. 


Resollar,  393. 
Retentar,  -392. 
Reventar,  892. 
Revolcar.  393. 
Rodar,  393. 
Eoer. 
Rogar,  393. 


Saber,  420. 
Salir,  421. 
Satisfaccr,  410. 
Segar,  392. 
Seguir,  396. 
Sembrar,  392. 
Sentar,  ,392. 
Setir,  395. 
Seb.    (See  auxiliary 

verbs.) 
Servir,  396. 
Serrar,  392. 
Soldar,  39a 
Soler,  4.33. 
Soltar,  89.3. 
Solver,  891. 
Sonar,  893. 
Soilar,  39,3. 
SoBcgar,  392. 
Sotcrrar,  392. 
Sugerir,  395. 


Temblar,  .392. 

Tender,  394. 

Tener.    (See  auxiliary 

verbs.) 
Tcfiir,  396. 
Tcntar,  392. 
Torcer,  404. 
Tostar,  393. 
Traducir,  398. 
Traer,  422. 
Trascendcr,  394. 
Trascordarse.  393. 
Trasegar,  392. 
Trocar,  393. 
Tronar,  393. 
Tropczar,  392. 


Valer,  423. 
Vcnir,  424. 
Ver,  425. 
Verier,  394. 
Vestir,  396. 
Volar.  393. 
Volcar,  .393. 
Volver,  394. 


Tacer,  4M. 
Zaherir,  395. 


YOOABTJLAET, 

COXTAIXIXG  ALL  THE  SPANISH  WORDS  USED  IN  THE  GRAMMAR. 

N.  J^.-TIvefmres  after  each  d^nition  refer  la  tl^  lessons  in  which  the  words- 
have  been  explained  in  the  Grammar. 


A,  ah,  prep.,  to,  at,  in.-Voy  A  Francia,  I. 
am  "oiu"  to  France;  it  \o  mcnos,  at 
least;  a  la  vcrdad,  indeed ;  a  la  espafiola, 
in  the  Spanish  fashion.    L.  4. 

Abajo,  ah-bah'-ko,  adv.,  below,  down, 
down-stairs.    L.  33. 

Abalanzar,  ah-bah-lan-thar\  to  spring,  to 
rush.    L.  57.  ,  ,      .,        . 

Abaudonar,  ah-ban-do-nar',  to  abandon,  to 
j^ive  up,  to  leave.    L.  53. 

Abanico,  ah-bah-ne'-co,  s.  m.,  fan.    L.  5i. 

Abierto,  ah-bl-alr'-to,  p.  p.  irr.  of  Abbib, 
(which  see).    L.  52. 

Abo.sado,  ah-bo-gah'-do,  s.  m.,  lawyer,  ad- 
vocate.   L.  49.  ,.     ,    , 

Aborreciblc,  ah-bor-rai-thW -blai,  adj.,  hate- 
ful.   Ta.-a.  .,     ,     „ 

Abril,  ah-breel\  s.  m.,  April.    L.  28. 

Abrir,  ah-breer\  to  open.     Abrirse,  to  be 
opened,  to  blow  (of  flowers).    L.  23. 
cJi,  a'l-ca',  adv.,  here.— Acd  y  alia,  here 


Acji, 
and  there, 


L.  18, 


Acabar.  ah-c.ih-bar\  to  flnish,  to  unA.—Acc^^ 

bar  dc,  to  be  just,  to  have  just.— yica&<^ 

con,  to  kill,  to  put  an  end  to,  to  destroy. 

L.  28. 
Acadeiuia,  ah-cah-dai-me-a,  s.  f.,  academy 

L.  51. 
Acaso,    ah-cah'-so,    adv.,    perchance,    by 

chance.— Si  acaso,  if  at  all.— For  si  acaso, 

in  case  that.  .  L.  32. 
Accidcnte,  ac-the-dain'-tal,  s.  in.,  accident. 

L.  40. 
Accion,  ac-thl-dne' ,  8.  f.,  action,  share.    L. 

24. 
Accuto,  ah-thain'-to,  s.  m.,  accent.     L.  47. 
Aceptar,  ah-tJiaip-tar',  to  accept.    L.  45. 
Acerca,  ah-lhair'-ca,  prep.  Accrca  de,  about 

L.  49. 
Acertar,  ah-thair-(ar' ,  to  make  ont.  to  hit 

the  mark,  to  succeed,  to  be  right  {i.  e.,  to 

conjecture  right).    L.  8^1. 
Acierto,  ah-lM-air'-to,  s.  m.,  success.  L.  52. 
Acoraodar,  ah-co-mo-dar' ,  to  accommodate, 

to  suit.    L.  31. 
Acompailar,   ah-com-pan-yar',   to    accom 

pnny.    L.  47. 
Aconsejiir,  ah-cijn-sai-har',  to  counsel,  to 

advise.    L.  45. 
Acordir,  aJi-cdr-dar' ,  to  accord,  to  agree,  to 

tni  '.—Ac97-.!arsf,  to  remember.    L.  46. 


AcoBtar,  ah-cos-tar',  to  lay  down.— ^cos- 
torse,  to  lie  down,  to  go  to  bed.    L.  35. 
Actual,  ac-twal',  adj.,  present.    L.  52. 
Acudir,  ah-coo-deer' ,  to  haste,  to  run,  to 

turn  (to),  to  refer  (to).    L.  49. 
Acuerdo,  uli-cwair'-do,    s.  m.,  agreement, 

accord,  decision  (of  a  court).    L.  42.   ^ 
Aculla,    ah-cool-ya',   adv.,  there.— Aqui   y 
acuUd,  to  and  fro ;  here  and  there,    h.  la. 
Adolantar,  ak-dai-lan-tar' ,  to  advance,  to 

make  progress.    L.  3G. 
Adelante,  ah-dai-lan' -tai,  adv.,  forward.— 
En  adelante,  henceiorward.— /Adelante/ 
go  on  I   go  ahead !    L.  43. 
Adenian,  ah-dai-man',  s.  m.,  posture,  air. 

L.  44. 
Ademas,  ah-dai-mas',  prep.,  besides ;  adv., 

mprjover,  besides.    L.  37. 
Adentro,  ah-dain'-tro,  adv.,  in,  within,  in- 
side.   L.  47. 
Adivinar,  ah-dee-vee-nar' ,  to  guess,  to  di- 
vine.   L.  46. 
Adjetivo,  ad-hai-fec'-vo,   s.  m.,   adjective. 

L.  43. 
Admirable,  ad-mee-rah'-blai,  adj.,  admira- 
ble, wonderful.    L.  51. 
Admiracion,  ad-mee-rah-thl-one' ,  e.  f.,  ad- 
miration, wonder.    L.  51. 
Admirar,  ad-mee-rar',  to  admire,  to  won- 
der at.    L.  01. 
Adonde.  *(See  Donde.")    L.-9. 
Adquirir,  ad-ke-reer'.  to  acquire.    L.  42. _ 
Adverbial,    ad-vair-bl-al' ,   adj.,  adverbial. 

L.  50. 
Adverbio,  s.  m.,  adverb.    L.  43. 
Advertir,  ad-rair-teer' ,  to  advise,  to  men- 
tion, to  point  out,  to  warn,  to  observe. 
L.  43. 
A6reo,  ah-al'-rai-o,  adj..  aerial.    L.  48. 
Afectacion   ah-faik-tdh-thZ-Hne',  s.  f.,  affec- 
tation.   L.  24. 
Afectar,  ah-faik-tar',  to  affect.    L.  45. 
Afeitar,  ah-fai-l-tar',  to  shave,  to  paint  (the 

face).    L.  .33. 
Afirmacion,  ah-feer-maJi-tlie-one' ,  s.  f.,  af- 
firmation.   L.  24. 
Afirmar,  ah-feer-mar' ,  to  affirm,  to  make 

firm,  to  strenErthen.    L.  48. 
Aflijir,  ah-ficc-hecr',  to  afflict.    L.  48. 
Afo'rtunado.  ahfore-too-nah'-do,  adj.,  fortu- 
nate.   L.  63. 
Ageno.  ah-hai'-nn,  adj.,  foreign,  belonging 
to  others.    L.  63. 


442 


VOCABULAKY. 


Agitacion,  dh-hee-tdh-thl-one' ,  6.  f.,  ajita- 

tion.    L.  ai. 
Agradar,  aJi-grah-dar' ,  to  please.    L.  53. 
Agradecer,  ati-grah-dai-tliaii-' ,  to  thank,  to 

DC  obliged  to.    L.  39. 
Agregar,  a/i-grai-gar' ,  to  add,  to  unite.    L. 

49. 
Agrio,  ah'-gre-o,  adj.,  sour.    L.  22. 
Agua,  ah'-gwa,  8.  f.,  water.    L.  7. 
Aguautar,  ah-gwan-tar' ,  to  support,  to  put 

up  with,  to  Dear,  to  bear  with.    L.  53. 
Aguardiente,    uh-ywar-de-ain'-tai,    8.    m., 

Drandy.    L.  50. 
Agudeza,  ah-goo-dai'-tka^  s.  f.,  wit,  witty 

saying.    L.  oT. 
Agiicro,  ah-gwai'-ro,  b.  m.,  aufrnry,  omen. 

J...  45.  ., 

Ahora,  ah-o-ra,  adv.,  now.    L.  27. 
Aire,  i'-rai,  s.  m.,  air.    L.  4C. 
Ajedrez,  ali-hai-dmUk' ,  8.  m.,  chess.    L.  42. 
Ala,  ah'-la,  s.  f.,  wing.    L.  56. 
Alabauza,  ali-lafi-ban'-tlia,  s.  f.,  praise.    L. 

Alarde,  s.  m.— Hacer  alarde,  to  boast.  L. 
CJ. 

Alberto,  al-bair'-to,  b.  m.,  Albert.    L.  3S. 

Alcance,  al-kan'-thai,  s.  m.,  reach.    L.  53. 

Alcauzar,  al<an-tltur' ,  to  reach,  to  over- 
take, to  take  up  with,  to  catch.    L.  53. 

Alegrar,  ak-lai-grar',  to  give  joy,  to  make 
glad.    L.  37. 

Alegrc,  ali-lai'-grai,  adj.,  joyful,  glad,  merry. 

Alejandro,  ah-lai-kan'-dro,  s.  m.,  Alexan- 
der.   L.  a 

Aleli.  ah-lai-lee',  s.  m.,  gilliflower.    L.  9. 

Aleman.  ah-lai-man',  s.  m.,  German  (lan- 
guage).   L.  2. 

Aleman,  s.  m.,  German ;  adj.,  German.  L.  3. 

Alemania,  a/i-lai-mah-ne-a,  s.f.,  Germanv. 
L.  9.  ■ 

Alfilcr,  al-/ee-lair'.  s.  m.  and  f..  pin.    L.  40. 

Algazara,  al-gahihah'-ra,  a.  f.,  shouts  of 
joy.    L.  &4. 

Algodon,  al-go-dtine' .  s.  m.,  cotton.    L.  5. 

Altruien,  al'-gain,  pron.,  somebody,  any- 
body, some  one.  any  one.    L.  17. 

Alqnino,  a,  al-noo'-no.\Ay.  some.    L.  17. 

Algnno,  a,  prbn.  ind.,  and  adj.,  somebody, 
some  one,  anybody,  any  one,  some.  L. 
17. 

Alhaja.  aJ-ah'-hn,  s.  f..  jewel.    L.  .'57. 

Alimentar,  fi7i-ke-main-tar\  to  feed. — Ali- 
mentarse  de  espcranzas,  to  live  on  hope. 
L.  53. 

Alimento.  s.  m.,  food.    L.  40. 

Alia,  al-va'.  adv..  there,  yonder.    L.  18. 

Alma,  (O'-mn.  s.  f.  soul. "  L.  47. 

Almacon,  a^-mnh-1hnii\\  s.  m..  store.  L.  62. 

Almor^^ar.  al-mbr-thar\  to  breakfast,  to  take 
breakfast.    L.  &5. 

Almiierzo,  al-mv-air'-tho.  s,  m.,  breakfast. 
L.  5.5. 

Alrededor,  al-rai-dai-dor' ,  adv.,  around.   L. 

.  m. 

Altemcion,  al-tah-rah-tJie-one',  s,  f.,  altera- 
tion, chance.    L.  Sfi. 

Alto.  nl'-in.  adi..  hitrh.  tall.    L.  91. 

Alturn.  a'-ino'-ra.  s.  f.,  hei£rht.    L.  37. 

Alnmbrar.  nh-lnwn-hrar' .  to  Msrbt.    L.  64. 

-onable,  ah-maJi'-blai,  adj.,  amiable.  L. 
47. 

Amado?,  ah-fnah-ddr',  e,  m.,  lover.    L.  19. 


Amanecer,  ah-mah-nai-thair' ,  to  get  morn- 
ing, to  be  in  a  place  at  dayDrcak,  or 
morning.    L.  30. 

Amante,  aJi-tnaii'-tai,  p.  p.  and  s.,  lovin^', 
lover,  sweetheart.    L.  36. 

Amar,  aJi-vuir\  to  love.    L.  21. 

Amarillo,  ali-tnali-i-ed'-yo,  adj.,yellow.  L.  54, 

Ambicion,  am-bl-tkl-viu.' ,  s.  f.,  ambition, 
L.  00. 

Ambos,  am' -bos,  pron.,  both,    L.  28, 

Amenazar,  afi.-inai-nah-thar\  to  menace,  to 
threaten.    L.  59. 

Amenidad,  ali-rnai-nl-dath' ,  s,  f.,  amenity. 
L.  32.  ■* 

Amigo,  ah-mi'-go,  b.  m.,  friend.    L.  13. 

Amlstad,  ah-mces-tatk' ,  b.  f.,  friendship, 
L,  01, 

Amor,  ak-more',  b,  m,,  love,    L,  45, 

Amplio,  ain'-pli-o,  adj,,  ample,    L,  52, 

Ampo,  s,  m,,  whiteness  (of  snow),    L.  01. 

Analitico,  uli-nah-te'-te-co,  adj.,  analytical, 
L.  35. 

j:Vnaraujado,  ah-nah-ran-haJi'-do,  adj.,  or- 

•  auge  (color).    L.  51. 

Ancho,  an'-c/io,  adj.,  wide,  broad.    L.  47. 

Anchura,  an-choo'-ra,  s.  f.,  width,  breadth. 
L.  01. 

j\uciano,  an-the-ah'-no,  adj.  and  s.,  old,  old 
man.    L.  48. 

Andar,  an-dar',  to  walk,  to  go.    L,44, 

Anecdota,  ah-naik'-dO-ta.  8,  f,,  anecdote, 
L,  44. 

Angel,  an'-haM,  s,  m.,  angel.    L.  60. 

Angulo,  an'goo-lo,  b.  m.,  ande.— En  dngulos 
rectos,  at  right  angles.    L.  (iO. 

Animal,  a/i-ric-mal'.  s.  m..  animal.    L.  02. 

Animar,  ah-nZ-mar' ,  to  animate,  to  encour- 
age.   L.  38. 

Anoche.  ah-no'-chai,  adv.,  last  niaht.    L.  28. 

Anochecer,  ah-no-chai-thair' ,  to>et  nidit, 
to  be  (in  such  a  place)  at  nightfall.    L."30. 

Antagonista,  an-tah-go-nees'~-ta,  s.  m.,  an- 
tagonist.   L.  30. 

Ante,  an'-tai,  prep.,  before,  in  presence  of. 
L.  10. 
Il^tcayer.  an-iai-ah-yair' ,  adv.,  the  day  be- 
^Tbre  yesterday.    L.  10. 

Antecedcnte,'  an-tai-ihai-dain'-im,  e.  m., 
antecedcut.    L.  01. 

Antcnoche,  an-tai-n5'-chai,  the  night  be- 
fore last.    L.  23. 

.iVntcojo.  an-(ai-b'-Iio,  s.  m.,  eye-glass.— 
Anfeojo'',  spectacles.    L.  53. 

Antepenultimo,  an-tai-pai-nool'-G-mo,  adj, . 
and  s.  m.,  antepenultimate,    L.  5Q, 

Anterior,  an-tai-rl-or' .  adj.,  preceding,  fore- 
going, .previous,  former.    L.  49. 

Antes,"  an'-icuss,  prep. — Anks  dc,  before, 
L.  42. 

Antes,  adv.,  rather,  first,  sooner  than.  L.  16. 

Antepuesto,  an-fai-pwais'-to,  p.p.,  prefixed ; 
s..  prefix.    L.  52. 

Antigno,  an-ie'-gico,  adj.,  ancient,  old.  L. 
52. 

Antisocial,  an-te-s^the-al',  adj.,  antisocial. 
L.  50. 

Antoio,  an-io'-ho,  s.  m.,  whim,  Icacin'?. 
L.  63. 

Anadir,  an-yah-deer' .  to  add.    L.  49.  , 

Anil,  an-yeel'.  s.  m..  indigo  (rolor).    L.  6f. 

Ano,  nn-yo,  s.  m..  year.  "L.  10. 
Apariencia,  ah-pdh-re-ain'-t!ii-ay  s.  f.,  cp- 
pcarance.    L.  53, 


VOCABULARY. 


443 


Apcgar,  ah-pai-gar,  to  adhere,  to  attach. 
L.  W. 

Apenas,  afi-pai'-nas,  adv.,  scarcely,  hardly. 
L.  29. 

Aplicar,  ah-ple-car',  to  apply.    L.  02. 

Aposlar,  ah-pos-tar' ,  to  bet,  lo  wager.  L.  03. 

Apoyar,  ali-po-yar\  to  lean,  to  support,  to 
protect.    L.  50. 

Apreciablo,  uh-prah-tM-ah'-blai,  apprecia- 
ble, respectable.    L.  56. 

Apreuiiar,  ah-pnU-niS-ar' ,  to  press,  to  urge. 
L.  45. 

Apreuder,  ah-prain-dair' .    L.  6. 

Apretar,  ah-prai-tar' ,  to  tighten,  to  press, 
to  urge.    L.  05. 

Aprisa,  ah-pri'-sa,  adv.,  quickly.    L.  6. 

Aprobacion,  ah-pro-buh-lki-om',  s.  f.,  ap- 
probation.   L.  24. 

Aprobar,  ah-pru-bar\  to  approve.    L.  35. 

Aprovecliar,  ak-pro-val-cliar\  to  progress, 
to  make  tlic  most  of.    L.  53. 

Aproxiniar,  ah-pro-hse-mar' ,  to  approxi- 
mate, to  approach.    L.'4t. 

Apto,  a//-(o,  adj.,  apt,  fit.    L.  51. 

Apurado,  ah-poo-raii'-do,  adj.,  embarrassed. 
L.  41. 

Aquel,  ah-kail',  pron.,  that  one,  he;  the 
former.    L.  18. 

Aqui,  uh-ke\  adv.,  here.    L.  18. 

Arbol,  ar'-bOl,  s.  m.,  tree.    L.  49. 

Arbolcdia,  ar-bO-lai'-da,  s.  f.,  grove.    L.  49. 

Arena),  ah-rai-nal',  s.  m.,  sandy  ground. 
L.  49. 

Argiiir,  ar-goo-eer\  to  arOTe.    L.  34. 

Aristocracia,  ak-rees-tihkraJi'-the-a,  s.  f., 
aristocracy.    L.  (50. 

Aristocriitico,  adj.,  aristocrat.    L.  .35. 

Aritmclica,  ah-reei-7nai' -ll-ka,  s.  f.,  arith- 
metic.   L.  21.  . 

Armar,  ar-mar',  to  arm.    L.  59. 

Arpa,  (ir'-pa,  s.  f.,  liarp.    L.  15. 

Arquitccto,  ar-kl-tai1^-to,  s.  m.,  architect. 
L.  48. 

Arquitectura,  ar-kl-taik-too'-ra,  s.  f.,  archi- 
tecture.   L.  51. 

Arreglar.  ar-rai-gtar' ,  to  regulate,  to  ar- 
range, to  settle.    L.  CO. 

Arrcpcntirgc,  ar-rai-pain-teer'-sai,  to  re- 
pent.   L.  ;38. 

Arrcstar,  ar-rais-tar'.  to  arrest.  •  L.  37. 

Arriba,  ar-rS'-ba,  adv.,  above,  up-stairs.  L. 
33. 

Arte.  s.  ar'-taiy  m.  and  f.,  art.    L.  31. 

Articulo,  ar-tw-coo-lo.  s.  m.,  article.    L.  43. 

-Artllicial,  ar-tl-fe4hl-aL\  adj.,  artificial.  L. 
49. 

Artista,  ar-tees'-ta,  s.  m.,  artist.    L.  30. 

Asador,  s.  m.,  spit  (for  roasting).    L.  05. 

Ascender,  at-thain-dair',  to  ascend,  to 
amount.    L.  37. 

Ascension,  as-t/iaiii-se-one',  s.  f.,  ascension. 
L.  49. 

Asegurar,  ak-nai-ffoo-rar',  to  secure,  to  as- 
sure.   L.  38. 

Aecsino,  ah-sai-si'-no,  8.  m.,  assassin.  L. 
.59. 

Asi,  ah-m\  adv.,  so,  thus.  L.  20.— ^.n  que, 
so  that,  as  soon  as.  L.  29. — Asi  asi,  so 
so.    L.  39. 

Asicnto.  ah-.t^-ain'-to,  s.  m.,  seat.    L.  39. 

Asir,  ah-seer'y  to  seize,  to  make  the  most  of. 
L.  42. 

Asno,  as'-no,  s.  m.,  ass.    L.  01. 


[L.  40. 

Asombro,  ah-som'-bro,  s.  m.,  amazement. 

Astronomia,  OM-trd-nd-ml'-a,  s.  f.,  astrono- 
my.   L.  49. 

Atencion,  ah-tain4M-dne' ,  s.  f.,  attention 
L.  50. 

Ateuder,  ah-tain-dair',  to  attend.    L.  37. 

Atlantico,  al-lan'  le-ko,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  At- 
lantic.   L.  46. 

AtoUadero,  ah-tol-lya-dai'-ro,  s.m.,  dilBcul- 
ty.    L.  00. 

Atraccion,  ah-trak-the-one' ,  s.  f.,  attraction. 
L.  24. 

Atras,  ah-tras\  adv.,  behind,  ago.    L.  .58. 

Atreverse,  ali-trai-vair'-sai,  to  dare.    L.  48. 

Atrevimieuto,  ah-trai-re-7ne-ain'-to,  s.  m., 
assurance,  daring.    L.  04. 

Atrocidad,  ah-tro-lhe-datli' ,  s.  f.,  atrocily. 
L.  30.  . 

Atropellar,  a-tro-pail-yar' ,  to  trample  upon, 
to  run  over.    L.  51. 

Aullar,  ali-col-yar' ,  to  howl.    L.  44. 

Aumento,  ah-oo-main' -to,  s.  m.,  augmenta- 
tion, increase.    L.  59. 

Aun,  ak-oon\  adv.,  still,  yet.    L.  25. 

Aunque,  ah-wn-ke',  adv.,  althougli,  though 
L.  30. 

Aueencia,  ah-oo-sain'-the-a,  b.  f.,  absence, 
L.  35. 

Auscnte,  ah-oo-sain'-iaL  adj.,  absent.  L, 
59. 

Autor,  ah-oo-tor\  s.  m.,  author.    L.  47. 

Autondad,  ali-oo-td-re-dath\  s.  f.,  authority 
L.  59. 

Auxiliar,  ah-oo-ksi-lZ-ar\  s.m.  and  adj.,  aux 
iliary.    L.  57. 

Auxiliar,  to  help,  to  aid.    L.  02. 

Auxilio,  ah-oo-hse'-Ci-o,  s.  m.,  help,  assist 
ance.    L.  55. 

Avcnida,  ah-vai-ne'-da,  e.  f.,  avenue.  L 
15. 

Avcnturarse,  ah-tain-too-rar'-mi,  to  ven- 
ture.   L.  05. 

Avlsar,  ah-ve-sar',  to  inform,  to  let  know. 
L.  45. 

Ay  I  ah-e\  int.,  alas  !    L.  40. 

Ayer,  ah-yalr\  adv.,  yesterday.    L.  10. 

Avudar,  ah-yoo-dar',  to  aid,  to  help.  L. 
38. 

Azul,  ah-thcol',  adj.,  blue.    L.  54. 

B. 

Bailar,  bah-t-lar',  to  dance.    L.  28. 
Baile,  bah-S-lai,  s.  m.,  dance,  ball.    L.  30. 
Bajar,  bah-har',  to  go  or  come  down,  to 

lower.    L.  53. 
Bajo,  bah'-ho,  adj.,  low,  base,  mean.    L.  21. 
Banco,  ban'-ko,  s.  m.,  bench,  bank.    L.  31. 
Bandera,   ban-dai'-ra,  s.  f.,  flag,  slaudanl. 

L.  58. 
Banar,  ban-yar',  to  bathe.    L.  49. 
Barato,  bah-rah'-to,  adj.,  cheap.    L.  13. 
Barba,  bar'-ba,  s.  f.,  chin,  beard.    L.  59. 
Barberia,  bar-bai-re'-a,  s.  f.,  barbers  shop. 

L.  50. 
Barbero,  bar-bai'-ro,  s.  m.,  barber.    L.  33. 
Barbilampino.     bar-be-lam-peen'-yo,     adj., 

ha\ing  a  thin  beard.    L.  .50. 
Barco,  s.  m.,  vessel,  boat.    L.  CO. 
Baron,  ba/i-rone',  s.  m.,  baro"n.    L.  51. 
Barrer,  bar-rair\  to  sweep.    L.  24. 
Basta !  bas'-ta,  int.,  enough  !    L.  30. 
Bastante,  ba-s-tan'-tai,  adv.,  enough.    L.  25. 


14  i 


VOCABULAKY. 


Bastur,  hai-tur',  to  be  cnouj;li,  sufficient. 
L.  3). 

Baston,  btis-idne,  s.  m.,  cane,  stick.    L.  10. 

Baza,  bM-tlia,  s.  f.,  trick  (at  cards).— No 
dojar  meter  baza,  not  to  lut  any  one  pat 
in  a  single  word.    L.  Oj. 

B.jbedor,  bai-b(u-ddre' ,  e.  m.,  tippler,  toper, 
drinker.    L.  05. 

Bijb'jr,  bai-bair\  to  &nnk.—Beber  Io3  vien- 
tos  por  algo,  to  solicit  with  much  eager- 
ness, to  desire  urdenUy.—Beber  como  una 
cnba,  to  drink  like  a  fish.    L.  7. 

Beileza,  bail-yai'-tha,  s.  f.,  beauty.    L.  51. 

BoUo,  bail'-yo,  adj.,  beautiful,  liandsome. 
L.  31. 

Bondccir,  baiii-dal-theer\  to  blesa.    L.  41. 

BjQdito.  baiiirdi'-to,  adj.,  blessed.    L.  5-i. 

Besar,  bai-sar',  to  kiss.    L.  39. 

Beso,  bai'-so,  s.  m.,  kiss.  L.  39. 

Bibiioteca,  be-bU-i}-tai'-ka,  8.  f.,  library.    L. 

m. 

Bicn,  bi-ain'  (pronounce  in  one  syllable), 
adv.,  well.  L.  3. — Esta  bien,  very  well, 
all  rijjht. — No  bien,  scarcely,  no  sooner. 
L.  29. 

Bienhccbor,  bl-ain-ai-chor' ,  b.  m.,  benefec- 
tor.    L.  50. 

Bien  vcnido !  bd-ain'  vai-iiZ'-do,  int.,  wel- 
come !    L.  43. 

Billete,  bsd-yai'-tai,  g.  m.,  note,  ticket.  L. 
7. 

Blaaca,  blan'-ka,  s.  f.— Encontrarsc  sin  b'.aiir 
ca,  not  to  have  a  cent.    L.  6t. 

Blanco,  blctii'-ko,  adj.,  white.    L.  58. 

Blanco,  s.  m.,  mark  (to  aim  at). — (Jucdarse 
en  Uanoo,  to  be  left  in  the  lurch.    L.  57. 

Bledo,  blai'-do,  8.  m.,  straw. — No  ee  me  da 
uu  Wedo,  I  do  not  care  a  straw  for  it.  L. 
03. 

Boca,  bo'-ka,  s.  f.,  mouth.  L.  44.— Ilablar 
por  boca  de  ganso,  to  repeat  what  another 
has  said.    L.  63. 

Eocado,  bo-kah'-do,  s.  m..  mouthful,  bite.— 
Bocado  sin  hueso,  sinecure.    L.  01. 

Bolsa,  bM'-sa,  s.  f.,  purse.    L.  45. 

Bolsillo,  b^l-ssd'-yo,  s.  m.,  pocket,  purse. 
L.  47. 

Boudad,  bdns-daih',  s.  f.,  goodness,  liind- 
ness.    L.  39. 

Bondadoso,  bom-dah-dd'-so,  adj., good,  kind. 
L.  51. 

Bonito,  bo-nV-to,  adj.,  pretty.    L.  5S. 

Borboton,  bore-ho-tme' .—A.'borbotone'^,  bub- 
bling, hurriedly,  confusedly.    L.  03. 

Bo?que,  bos'-kaL  s.  m.,  wood,  woody  place. 
L.  40. 

Bata,  65'-^a.  s.  f ,  boot.    L.  10. 

Botica,  bo-tl'-ka,  s.  f.,  drus-storc.    L.  02. 

Boticario,  bb-fe-kah' -rl-o,  s.  m.,  drucrfrist. 
L.  43. 

Bravata,  braJi-vak'-ta,  s.f.,  bravado.— Echar 
brara>a%  to  brai,  to  boast.    L.  Gi. 

Tiravo,  brah'-vo.  aSj.,  brave.    L.  41. 

i  ■;-a\o  I  int.,  bravo !    L.  48. 

I' azo,  brah'-tho,  s.  m.,  arm.    L.  41. 

iJribon,  bre-bone',  6,  m.,  scoundrel,  rascal. 
L.  3:3. 

Bruto,  broo'-fo,  8.  m.,  brute,  ignorant  per- 
son.   L.  48. 

Brato,  adj.,  brutish,  ignorant.    L.  4!5. 

Baono,  bwai'-no,  adj.,  good.  L.  "i.— Buenos 
dias.  good  morning,  good  day.- De  buenas 
a  primeras,  all  at  once.    L.  02.  i 


Buey,  bwaV-e,  b.  m.,  ox.     L.  CS. 

Bula,  boo'-la,  s.  f. — Tenor  bula  para  todo,  to 

act  according  to  one's  fancy.    L.  01. 
Bulla,  bool'-ya,   s.  -t'.,  noise.— Meter  bulla, 

to  make  a  noise.    L.  03. 
Bnllicio,  bod-ye'-tlie-o,  s.  m.,  bustle,  noise, 

uproar.    L.  54. 
Bulto,  bod'-io,  s.  m.,  bundle.  —  Hablar  a 

buUo,  to  talk  at  random.    L.  tW. 
Buria,  boor'-la,  s.  f.,  jest,  joke.— Hablar  do 

bunas,  to  speak  in  jest.    L.  S3. 
Burlar,  boor-lar',  to  iust. —Burlarse  de  al- 

guno,  to  make  fun  of,  to  laugh  at  any  one. 

— Burla  burlando,  half  jest,  half  earnest. 

L.  S3. 
Burlon,  boor-lone',  s.  m.,  wag,  jester.  L.  41. 
Busca,  boos'-ka,  s.  f ,  search. — En  busca  de, 

in  search  of.    L.  55. 
Buscar,  boos-kar',  to  search,  to  look  for. 

L.  4. — Buscar  cinco  pies  al  gato,  to  pick 

a  quarrel.    L.  4. 


Caballejo,  ka7i-bal-yai'-7io,  s.m.  QHm.  of  CA- 

BALLO),  nag,  contemptible  old  horse.    L. 

49. 
Caballcro,  kah-bal-yai'riv,  s.  m.,  gentleman, 

knight. — Buenos  tardea,  cabalitro,  good 

afternoon,  sir.    L.  'i. 
Caballo,  kah-bal'-yo,  s.  m.,  horse.    L.  4. 
Cabello,  kaJi-baW -yo,  s.  m.,  hair.    L.  3:5.— 

Toniarla  ocasionporlos  cabeUos,  toproQt 

by  the  occasion.    L.  01. 
Caber,  kah-bair',  to  hold,  to  contain. — No 

caber  dcgozo,  to  bo  overjoyed. — iPucde 

caber  en  tu  imaginacion  ?    can   such   a 

thing  enter  into  your  imagination 't — No 

cabe  mas,  nothing  more  can  be  desired. 

L.  42. 
Cabeza,  kah-bai'-tha,  s.  f.,  head.    L.  28. 
Cable,  kah'-blai,  s.  m.,  cable.    L.  46. 
Cabo,  kah'-bo,  s.  m.,  end. — Al  cabo,  at  last. 

L.  51. 
Cada,  kah'-da,  pron.,  each,  every. — Cada 

vcz,  every  time.— Carfauno,  each,  every 

one.    L.  43. 
Caer,  kah-air',  to  fall,  to  see,  to  understand, 

to  be,  fall  due.    L.  41.— Caer  de  pies,  to 

foil  on  one's  feet. — Ya  caiao  en  ello,  now 

I  sec,  understand.— Las  ventarias  caen  a 

la  plaza,  the  v.-indows  look  on  the  square. 

—  Caei'sele  a  uno  la  cara  de  vergucnza,  to 

blush  with  shame.    L.  59. 
Cafe,  kah-fai',  b.  m.,  coflec,  coffee-house. 

L.  14. 
Caja,  kah'-Jia-,  b.  f.,  case,  box,  cash  (com- 

luercinl).    L.  CO. 
Cal,  8.  f.,  lune.— De  cal  y  canto,  of  stone. 

L.  43. 
Calabaza,  kaMah-bah'-t^ia.  s.  f..  pumpkin. 

— Dar  cclabazas,  to  give  the  mi  tten .  I..  01 . 
C.ilcnlar,  kal-koodar', "to  calculate.    L.  51. 
Caldo,  kal'-do,  s.  m.,  broth.    L.  44. 
Calducho,  kai-doo'-cho,  s.  m.,  poor  broth. 

L.44. 
Calcntar,  Juih-lcJn-tar' ,  to  heat,  lo  wami. 

L.  U. 
Calentura,  kah-lain-too'-ra,  s.  f.,  fir\-er.    L. 

fjO. 
Caliente,  iah-lS-ain'-taL  adj.,  hot,  warm. 

L.  44. 


V  O  C  A  B  U  L  A  K  Y  , 


4-15 


Callado,  kal-yah'-do,  adj.,  silent,  taciturn. 

L.  20. 
Callar,  kal-yar\  to  be  silent,  to  keep  ei- 

Icuce.— 6'a^/«;'  sii    pico,  to   liold    one'8 

tongue,  to  say  nothing.    L.  42. 
Calle,  kai'-yai,  s.  f.,  btruet.— Dcjar  a  uuo  en 

la  c(Ule,  to  strip  one  of  his  all.    L.  15. 
Calor,  kah-lor',  s.  m.,  heat,  warmth.    L.  25. 
C'alva,  kal'-v(i,  s.  f.,  bald  place,  bald  part  of 

the  head.    L.  45. 
C'alvo,  ka'.'-ro,  adj.,  bald.    L.  45. 
Calza,  kai'-tha,  s.  l'.,  stockings. — Tomar  las 

calzas  de  Yilladiego,  to  make  oil',  to  make 

a  hurried  escape.    L.  50. 
Cama,  kah'-ma,  s.  f.,  bed. — Guardar  cama, 

to  be  confined  to  one's  bed.    L.  14. 
Cambiar,  ka//i-be-ar',  to  change.    L.  59. 
Cambio,  kam'-be-o,  s.  m.,  change.    L.  40. 
Cainino,  kah-ml'-no,  s.  m.,  way,  road.  L.  60. 
Camisa,  A'aA-wie'-.«a,  s.  f.,  sliirt. — Metcrsc  en 

camisa  de  once  varas,  to  interfere  in  other 

people's  affairs.    L.  46. 
Campo,  kam'-jx),  s.  m.,  field,  camp. — Dejar 

el  cainpo  libre,  to  leave  the  field  to  one's 

competitors.    L.  5'J. 
Canasto,  kah-nas'-lo,  s.  m.,  basket.    L.  58. 
Candidamente,  kan'-dS-clah-main-tai,  adv., 

candidly.    L.  48. 
Cansado,  kan-sah'-do,  adj.,  tired,  tiresome. 

— Estar  caiisado,  to  be  tired.— ber  cansa- 
do, to  be  tiresome.    L.  20. 
Cansar,  kan-mr',  to  tire,  to  ftitiguc.    L.  33. 
Cautar,  kan-Oxr',  to  sin^.    L.  15. 
Cantatriz,  kan-tah-treeUi.' ,  8.  f.,  singer.    L. 

15. 
C.iutidad,  kan-tZ-dath' ,  quantity,  sum.    L. 

60. 
Canto,  kan'-to,  s.  m.,  singing,  stone. — Do 

cal  y  canto,  of  stone.    L.  48. 
Cantor,  kan-tor',  s.  m.,  singer.    L.  15. 
Canon,  kan-yone',  s.  m.,  cimnon.    L.  44. 
Ca&onazo,  kan-yb-nah'-iho,  6.  m.,  cannon- 
shot,  g;m-shot.    L.  44. 
•Cajia,  ka'i'-pa,  s.  f.,  cloak. — Andar  do  capa 

caida,  to  bo  crestfallen.    L.  60. 
Capacidad,  kah-pah-the-daih' ,  s.f.,  capaciiy, 

capability.    L.  86. 
Capaz,  kah-path\  adj.,  capable.    L.  59. 
C^^piUln,  kah-pe-tan' ,  s.  m.,  captain.    L.  6i. 
Capricho,  kah-pre'-cko,  s.m.,  caprice,  fancy, 

whim.    L.  60.  ;' 

Gara,  kah'-ra,  s.  £,  face. — Dar  d  alguno  con 

la  pnerta  en  la  cara.  to  shut  the  door  in 

any  onc^  face.    L.  60. 
Caracter,  kah-rak,'-tair  (pi.  caracteres),  s. 

m.,  character,  disposition.    L.  40. 
Caramba !    k'lli-ram'-ba,    inter.,    strange  ! 

zounds!    L.  6.5. 
Caicajada,    kar-kah-Jia?i'-da,    b.    f.,    loud 

lati;'h,  burst  of  laughter.    L.  fA. 
C.irccl,  kar'-thail,  s.  f.,  prison.    LifcSl. 
Carga,  kar'-ga,  s.  f.,  load,  burden,  charge. 

L.  6-0. 
Cargar,  kar-ffar\  to  charge,  to  load,   to 

heap.    L.  47. 
C'arLTo,  kar'-go,  s.  jn.,  load,  employment, 

ciiargc,  office.    L.  60. 
Caridad,  kah-ri-dath\  s.  f.,  charity.    L.  41. 
Cariredondo,      kah-re-rai-done'-do,      adj., 

roundfaced.    L.  59. 
Carne.  kar'-nai,  s.  t.,  flesh,  meat.    L.  7. 
Carnero,  kar-nai'-ro,  s.  m.,  mutton,  sheep. 

L.  40. 


Carniceria,  kar-ne-thai-ri'-G,  s.  f.,  butcher's 
shop,  meat  market.    L.  11. 

Caruicero,  kar-nl-llmi'-iv,  s.  m.,  butcher. 
L.  11. 

Camuza,  kat'-noo'-tha,  s.  f.,  bad,  disgust- 
ing, spoiled  meat.    L.  49. 

Caro,  kah'-ro,  adj.,  dear,  at  a  high  price. 
L.  13. 

Carpintero,  kar-peen-tai'-ro,  s.  m.,  carpen- 
ter.   L.  m. 

Carrera,  kar-rai'-ra,  s.  f ,  career,  course, 
race,  profession.    L.  48. 

Carro,  kar'-jv,  s.  m.,  car,  wagon.    L.  53. 

Carruage,  kar-roo-ah' -liai,  a.  m.,  can-iagc, 
L.  51. 

Carta,  kar'-ta,  s.  f.,  letter.    L.  7. 

Cartilla,  kar-teel'-ya,  s.  f.,  primer.— Cosa 
que  no  estii  en  la  cartilla,  something 
strange  or  uncommon.    L.  61. 

Casa,  kah'-sa,  s.  f..  house.    L.  9. 

Cascaras !  kas'-ka/i-ras,  int.,  oh  I  dear  me ! 
L.  63. 

Casero,  kah-sai'-ro,  adj.,  domestic,  house- 
hold.— Comedia  camra,  parlor  play.  L.  59. 

Casi,  kah'-sZ,  adv.,  almost.    L.  o2. 

Caso,  Icah'-DO,  s.  m.,  case,  event.— No  haga 
V.  caso  de  eso,  take  no  notice  of  that. 
L.  60. 

Castaua,  kas-tan'-ya,  s.  f.,  chestnut.    L.  40. 

Castellano,  kas-tail-yah'-no,  s.  m.,  Castilian 
language.    L.  55. 

Castellano,  adj.,  Castilian.    L,  55. 

Castillo,  kas-ieel'-yo,  e.  m.,  castle.— Ilaccr 
casiiUos  en  el  aire,  to  build  castles  in  the 
air.    L.  48. 

Casualidad,  kah-soo-a7i-le-dath' ,  s.  f.,  casual- 
ty, chance,  hazard.    L.  69. 

Casucba,  kah-aoo'-cha,  s.  f.,  contemptible 
old  house.    L.  44. 

Catolicismo,  ka-tMl-tlicess' -mo,  s.  m.,  Ca- 
tholicism.   L.  49. 

Catorce,  kah-tor' -thai,  num.  adj.,  fourteen. 
— Luis  Catorce,  Louis  the  Fourteenth. 
L.  14. 

Causa,  kaJi'-oo-sa,  s.  f.,  cause. — A  cmica  de, 
on  account  of.    L.  40. 

Cansar,  kah-cosar',  to  cause.    L.  51. 

Caza,  kak'-iha,  s.  f.,  chase,  hmit,  hunting. 
— Ir  a  la  caza.  to  go  hunting.    L.  58. 

Cazar,  kah-thar',  to  chase,  to'hnnt.    L.  58. 

Celebracion,  thai-lai-tfrah-tlii-one' ,  b.  f., 
celebration.    L.  39. 

Celebrar,  thai-lai-bj-ai'' ,  to  celebrate.- Ct?c'<?- 
bi'o  que  V.  haya  venido,  I  am  glad  you 
have  come.    L.  30. 

Celeste,  thai4ais'-tai,  adj.,  heavenly,  celes- 
tial.—Los  cuerpos  celesiei,  the  heavenly 
bodies.    L.  49. 

Celestial,  thai-lais-tZ-al' ,  adj.,  celestial, 
heavenly.    (See  Celeste.)    L.  49. 

Ceiico,  thai'-lv-Jco,  adj.,  heavenly  (used  in 
poetry  only).    L.  49. 

Celo,  thai' -to,  8.  m.,  zeal.    L.  55, 

Cena,  thai'-na,  s.f.,  supper.  Last  Supper. 
L.  52. 

Ccnar,  thai-nar',  to  sup,  to  lake  supper. 
L.  .'J9. 

Ccniavo,  tham-tah'-ro,  s.m.,  cent.    L.  14. 

Ccntclla,  thaln-tail'-ya,  s.f,  flash,  spark. — 
Echar  rayos  Yccntkku,  to  foara  with  raire, 
L.  62. 

Centena,  thain-tai'-na,  s.f,  about  a  hun- 
dred.   L.  40. 


446 


VOCABULARY, 


Centenar,  thain-tai-nar' ,  s.  m.,  a  hundred, 

L.  40. 
Ccrca,  tJiair'-ka,  adv.,  near,  close  by.     Cer- 

ca  de  8u  casa,  ucar  his  house.    L.  31. 
Ceremonial,  (/Mi-rai-mo-ne-al',  adj., ceremo- 
nial, ceremonious.    L.  54. 
Cerrar,  thair-ra/-'.  to  shut,  to  close.    L.  34. 
Cerrojo,  (hair-rO'-ho,  s.  m.,  bolt.    L.  5'J. 
Cerveza,  (hair-vai'-tha,  s.  f.,  ale,  beer.   L.  7. 
Chaleco,  chah-lai' -ko,  s.  m.,  vest.    L.  10. 
Chancear,  dian-thai-ar',  to  jest,  to  joke. 

L.  58. 
Chanza,  chan'-tha,  e.  f.,  jest,  joke.    L.  53. 
Charla,   c/iar'-la,   s.  f.,  chit-chat,    prattle. 

L.  60. 
Charlar,  char-lar',  to  chat,  to  prattle.  L.  37. 
Chaaco,  chas'-ko,  s.  m.,  disappointment. — 
Llevarse  un  cliasco  solcmne,  to  be  greatly 
disappointed.    L.  40. 
Chelin,  chai-leen' ,  s.  m.,  8hillin<j.    L.  61. 
Chico,  c/ie'-ko,  adj.,  little,  small.    L.  44. 
Chlquirritico,  chi-keer-re-tc'-lco,  adj.,  very 

small,  vciy  little.    L.  41. 
Chito!  cA?'-to,  int.,  hush !  eilence!    L.  4fi. 
Chocolate,  cho-ko-lah'-tai,  s.  m.,  chocolate. 
.     L.  14. 
Cicgo,  tM-ai'-go,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  blind. — A 

cieyas,  blindly,  in  the  dark.    L.  48. 
Ciclo,  the-ai'-lo,  s.  m.,  heaven,  sky.— Tomar 
cl  ado  con  las  manos,  to  be  transported 
with  joy,  grief,  or  passion.    L.  45. 
C!ien,  ike-airi',  num.  adj.,  a  hundred. — (Sec 

Cjlexto.)    L.  14. 
Cicncia,  fhi-ain' -the-a,  s.  f,  science.    L.  49. 
Cicnto,  thl-ain'-io,  num.  adj.,  a  hundred. — 

(SeeC'iEN.)    L.  14. 
Ciorto.  t/ie-air'-to,  adj.,  certain.    L.  4S. 
Cimiento,  t/ie-me-ain'-lo,  s.  m.,  foundation. 

L.  5'.).  i 

Cinco,  thean'-ko,  num.  adj.,  Ave,  fifth.   L.  14. 
Cincnenta,  ttieen-kwaiii'-ta,  num.  adj.,  fifty, 

liftieth.    L.  14. 
Circanspeccion,    tkeer-koonss-paik-ihS-i/ne' , 

s.  f.,  circumspection.    L.  24. 
Circanstancia,  t/iecr-koonss-tan'-thS-'a,  s.  f., 

circoirtstance.    L.  40. 
Cila,  fhe'^a,  s.  f.,  appointment,  quotation. 

L..(jO. 
Citar,  tfie-tar',  to  make  an  appointment 

(with  any  one),  to  quote.    L.  oi. 
Ciudadano,  t't'c-oo-dah-dah'-no,  citizen.    L. 

47. 
Civilizacion,    tfic-vS-fd-l/iah-the-<ms',    e.  f., 

civilizaticn.    L.  00. 
Claridad,  klah-re-dalli' ,  s.  f.,  clearness,  per- 
spicuity.   L.  36. 
C'laro,  klah'-ro,  adj.,  clear,  bright.    L.  53. 
Clase.  klah'-sai,  s.  f.,  class.    L.  5t. 
Cldsico,  klaU'-si-ko,  adj.,  classic,  classical. 

L.  ijo. 
Clar^ificacion,    ldah-se-fe-ka-ihZ-cne\    s.  f., 

classiilcation.    L.  24. 
Ciima,  k!e'-ma.  s.  m.,  climate.    L.  40. 
Cccer,  ktj-thair',  to  boil,  to  cook.    L.  42. 
Coclie,  kv'-chai,  8.  m.,  'Coach,  carria^  in 
general. — Ir  en  coclie,  to  go  in  a  carriage. 
L.  42. 
Cocinero,  ko-thS-nai'-ro,  s.  m.,  cook.    L.  11. 
Cofre,  ku'-frai.  s.  m.,  chest,  trunk.    L.  00. 
Coger,  ku-hair',  to  catch,  to  take,  to  pick 

lip.    L.  40. 
Cojear,  ko-hai-ar',  to  limp,  to  walk  lame. 
L.  30. 


Cojo,  ko'-ho,  adj.  and  s.  m.,  lame.    L.  44. 
Colada,  ko-luh'-da,  s.f.,  stiftening  of  clothes. 
— Todo  saldra  en  la  colada,  all  will  be 
brought  to  light.    L.  05. 
Colectivo,  ko-laik-te'-vo,  adj.,  collective     L 

40. 
Colgar,  kole-gar',  to  hang.    L.  59. 
Colina,  kO-le'-iia,  e.  f.,  hfll.    L.  58. 
Colocacion,    kO-lO-kah-t/ie-one',   s.  f,    em- 
ployment, place,  situation.    L.  60. 
Colocar,  kO-lO-kar',  to  put,  to  an-ange,  to 

place,  to  employ.    L.  46. 
Colorado,  ko-lO-rah'-do,  adj.,  red.    L.  M. 
Colorido,  kv-lo-re' -do,  8.  m.,  coloring  (paint- 
ing).   L.  52. 
Color,  ko-lor',  s.  m.,  color,    L.  52. 
Conibatir,    kirtne-bah-teer' ,   to  combat,   to 

fight.    L.  5J. 
Combiuacion,    kome-be-nah-lM-xJne' ,   s.  f., 

combination.    L.  iiA. 
Combinado,  ki/me-bl-nah'-do,  p.p.  and  adj., 

combined.    L.  58. 
Combinar,  komc-bt-nar' ,  to  combine.     L. 

58. 
Comedia,  ko-mai'-de-a,  e.  f.,  comedy.  L.  52. 
Comer,  ko-mair',  to  eat,  to  dine.    L.  7. 
Comerciante,     ko-mair-t/u-an'-tai,    s.  m., 

merchant.    L.  5. 
Comcta,    ko-mai'-ta,   s.  m.,   comet;  s.  f., 

kite  (toy).    L.  CO. 
Cometer,  kO-mai-lair',  to  commit.    L.  43. 
Comico,  kO'-me-ko,  s.  m.,  actor,  comedian. 

L.  63. 
C6mico,  adj.,  comic,  comical.    L.  35. 
Como,  ko'-tno,  adv.,  how,  as. — ^  Corno  csta 
V.  ?  how  are  you  »— Yo  scr6  tan  rico  como 
el,  I  shall  be  as  rich  as  he.    L.  15. 
Comodidad,  ko-md-de-dath' ,  s.  f.,  commodi- 
ty, convenience,  comfort.    L.  ai*. 
Comodo.  ko'-mo-do,  adj.,  commodious,  com- 
fortable.   L.  20. 
Companero,  kijme-pan-yai'-ro,  s.  m.,  com- 
panion, comrade.    L.  60. 
Compailia,  kome-pan-yl'-a,  s.  f.,  company. 

L.  60. 
Comparativo,     kome-paft-rah-tl'-to,     adj., 

comparative.    L.  61. 
Compasion,  kome-pali-se-dne' ,  s.  f.,  compas- 
sion.   L.  45. 
Complacencia,  kome-pla?i-thain'-the-a,  b.  f., 

complacency,  pleasure.    L.  SO. 
Complemento,    karne-plai-maiii'-to,    e.    m., 

complement.    L.  51. 
Componentc,  kome-po-iiain'-tai,  part.,  com- 
ponent.   L.  49. 
Componer,  k&me-po-nalr' ,  to  compose,  to 

mend,  to  arrange,  to  compound.    L.  49. 
Composicion,  kOinc-po-^c-thZ-Ziie' ,  s.  f.,  com- 
position, mending,  anauging,  compound- 
ing.   L.  24. 
Comprar,  kome-prar',  to  buy,  to  purchase. 

L.  4. 
Comprender,  kome-prain-dair' ,  to  compre- 
hend, to  understand,  to  comprise.    L.  50. 
Con,  kOite,  prep.,  with,  by.    L.  10. 
Concebir,   Jcuns-thcU-beer' ,  to  conceive  of. 

L.  54. 
Conceder,  kune-thai-dair' ,  to  grant,  to  con- 
cede.   L.  5.'}. 
Concertar,    kDne-thair-tar',  to  concert,  to 

agree.    L.  58. 
Conciencia,  kone-tM-ain'-tlil-a,  s.  f,  con- 
science.   L.  40. 


VOCAliULAEY, 


447 


Coacierto,   kiJiie-thS-air'-to,  B.  m.,  concert, 

ii'Touuieut.    L.  IT.  ,   J     .    ^ 

Coucluir,  koiie-cloo-eer' ,  to  conclude,  to  un- 

isli,  to  bo  over.     L.  68. 
Coucordaacia,    kone-kore-dan' -the-a,    s.  f., 

coucordauco,  agreement.    L.  50. 
Coadesccnder,  kOne-dais-tliain-dair  ,  to  con- 
descend, to  agree.     L.  4S. 
Condicion,  kone-di-the-diie' ,  b.  f.,  condition. 
L.  43.  „       ,. 

Condicional,  kdne-dl-thM-one-al\  adj.,  con- 
ditioaat.     L.  51). 

Condiicir,  k!im-doo-theer\  to  conduct,  to 
convey,  to  lead.    L.  40. 

Confesar,  kom-fai-sar\  to  confess,  to  ac- 
knowledge, to  avow.     L.  St. 

Coiifdso,  liom-foo' -so,  adj.,  confused,  con- 
founJel.    L.  54. 

Coujugacioa,  ktJns-hoo-gah-lliS-one',  b.  f, 
coajii^atloa.     L.  43. 

Conjiigar,  kjm-lioo-gar' ,  to  conjugate.  L. 
43. 

Cjnjtinoioa,  kone-hooii-tlii-one' ,  s.  f.,  con- 
jiiu3tioa.     L.  43. 

Cja:n;gj,  k'}iie-iti&' -go,  pron.,  with  me,  with 
ra/djif.     L.  26. 

Cjaacjr,  k'jtio-thalr' ,  to  know,  to  be  ac- 
qaiiatjJ  witU.     L.  25. 

Ciajjiia.ii.itj,  kj-nd-tlii-niS-aiii'-to,  s.  m., 
knjjvljjge,  biU  of  lading  (commerce). 
L.  4J. 

Cjuijcusncia,  kone-sai-kwaiii'-tlve-a,  s.  f., 
coajJiaeaoa.     L.  34. 

Ciasegair,  kj.is-sai-gfieer',  to  obtain,  to 
get,  tJ  aacseed.     L.  42. 

CjMijo,  kjii3-sai' -ho,  a.  m.,  counsel,  ad- 
vice.   L.  53. 

Cja-ieatir,  kjri2-min,-tser' ,  to  consent,  to 
a^re3  (to).    L.  33. 

Cjaiiitir,  k'tm-seais-tsir' ,  to  consist.    L.  52. 

Cj:n3lar,  kjiiz-so-lir' ,  to  console.    L.  35. 

Cjastaasia,  kjihi-tJik'  -tJiS-a,  8.  f.,  constancy, 
BtJ.iJiasii.     L.  4'j. 

Cjajtra:3ioa,  kom-trook-thl-btii' ,  construc- 
t^oa.    L.  51. 

Cj.iuite.  kj;i3-(ai'-(3i,  s.  m.  and  adj., 
raaJy  moaey.     L.  33. 

Coata.*,  kj.n-tar',  to  count,  to  relate,  to  tell. 
L.  3i. 

Cjatja3r,  k'in.^-ial-nair' ,  to  contain,  to  re- 
strain, to  stop,  to  clieslc.     L.  49. 

CoataaiJo,  k3-i3-tcU-/isa'-do,  a.  m.,  contents. 
L.  4). 

Coateatar,  kli;-tain-tar',  to  content,  to 
mVceglal.    L.  3J. 

Coateato,  k'yni-tain'-to,  adj.,  content,  con- 
tenteJ,  gla  I,  satislieJ.     L.  ?>i. 

Cjali,M,  £5.tJ-^2'-,7J,  proa.,  with  thee.  L.26. 

Coatiuair,  k^ti^(&-n90-ar' ,  to  continue.  L. 
54. 

Cjatra,  kJn^'-fra,  prep.,  against.    L.  11. 

Cjntradecir,  koni-irah-dai-tlieer' ,  to  contra- 
dict.   L.  41. 

Co.itrario,  kins-trah' -rc-o,  adj.,  contrary.— 
Al  contrario,  on  the  contrarv.    L.  5.3. 

Coavencer,   kone.-vaiii-tMir' ,  'to  convince. 

^  L.  43. 

Cjiivenir,  kone-vai-neer' ,  to  suit,  to  be  con- 
venient, to  agree.    L.  30. 

Cjaver^acion,  kdne-vair-sah-tM-dne' ,  8.  f , 
conversation.     L.  24. 

Conversar,  kdne-vair-sar',  to  converse.    L. 


Convertir,  kOne-vair-teei'',  to  convert.  L.  45. 

Couvicto,  koiie-ceek'-to,  in:  past  part,  (.of 
CoNVEN'CER),  convicted.    L.  52. 

Couvile,  kOiie-cee'-tai,  s.  m.,  invitation,  feast 
or  banquet  to  winch  any  one  is  invited. 
L.  50. 

Copulativo,  ko-jxKhla/irle'-w,  adj.,  copula- 
tive.   L.  5'J. 

Coqueta,  ko-kai'-ta,  s.  f.,  coquette.    L.  32. 

Corazou,  ko-iaJi-UiOiie' ,  s.  m.,  heart.    L.  5C. 

Corbata,  kOre-baii'-ta,  cravat.    L.  10. 

Corona,  ko-rO'-na,  s.  f.,  crown.    L.  56. 

Correcio,  kOr-raik'-to,  adj.,  correct.    L.  29. 

C'orredor,  kOr-rui-durt',  s.  m.,  corridor, 
broker.    L.  49. 

Corregir,  k&r-rai-heer',  to  correct.— Corre- 
girne,  to  mend.    L.  59. 

Correo,  kor-rcu'-o,  s.  m.,  courier,  post. — Ca- 
sa  dc  corrects,  post-othce.    L.  29. 

Correr,  kor-rair',  to  run. —  C(/rrerse,  to  be 
ashamed  or  confused,  to  blush.    L.  51. 

Corretear,  kdr-rai-tai-ar' ,  to  run  about.  L. 
5:3. 

Correveidile,  kdr-i'di-vai-Z-dS'-lai,  s.m.,  tale- 
'  bearer,  tattler.    L.  50. 

Corriente,  kur-ri-uin'-tai,  adj.,  current; 
s.  m.,  al  con-ierde  de,  aware  of;  s.  f.,  cur- 
rent, stream.    L.  50. 

Corrientemente,  kdr-rS-cdn-tai-niain'-tai, 
adv.,  currently,  fluently.    L.  49. 

Corro,  kor^-ro,  s.  m.,  circle  of  people  col- 
lected together  for  talking.    L.  41. 

Coriante,  /core-fan'-tai,  adj.,  cutting,  sharp, 
edged.    L.  38. 

Cortaplumas,  kOre-tah-ploo'-masf,  penknife. 
L.  9. 

Cortar,  kure-iar',  to  cut.    L.  .3.3. 

Corto,  kOre'-to,  adj ,  short.    L.  21. 

Cosa,  kO'-sa,  s.  f.,  thing.— A  cvsa  de  las  seis, 
about  six  o'clock.    L.  11. 

Coser,  ko-mir',  to  sew.    L.  2-1. 

Cos'.uopolita,  kot^-mu-pij-lee'-ta,  s.  m.,^,cos- 
uiopolite.     L.  51. 

Costa,  koce'-ta,  s.  f.,  cost,  coast.— A  costa 
mia,  at  my  csipense. — A  coi.ta  de»  at  the 
expense  of.    L.  00. 

Costado.  kus-tah'-do,  s.  m.,  side.    L.  Gl. 

C'ostar,  koi-(ar\  to  cost.    L.  01. 

Costumbre,  kvs-toom'-l/rai,  8.  f.,  custom, 
habit.    L.  5-1.  ^^ 

Creacion,  krcu-ali-tlii-one' ,  b.'^TT creation. 
L.  41. 

Crear,  krai-ar',  to  create.    L.  41. 

Credito,  krai'-dS-to,  s.  m.,  credit,  credence. 
L.57. 

Creencia,  krai-ain'-tJie-a,  s.  f.,  credence,  be- 
lief.   L.  49. 

Creer,  k~rai-mr',  to  believe,  to  think.  L.  27. 

Creyente,  krai-yaiii'-tui,  present  part,  (of 
Ckeee),  8.  m.  and  f.,  believing,  neliever. 

•    L.  33. 

Criado,  kr'i-ah'-do,  s.  m.,  scrv-ant.    L.  17. 

Criado.  past  part,  of  Ciuar.    L.  51. 

Criar,  kre-ar',  to  breed,  to  bring  up.    L.  TA. 

Criatnra,  kr?-aJi-(oo'-ra,  s.  f.,  creature,  in- 
fant.   L.  CO. 

Crimen,  kre'-maiii,  s.  m..  crime.    L.  50. 

Criticar,  krS-f?-ka)-' ,  to  crtticiee.    L.  43. 

Critico,  krS'-(e-ko.  s.  m..  critic.    L.  45. 

Cronologista,  kro-no-lS-heess'-ta,  chrcno'o- 
gist.    L.  .36. 

Cnieldad,  kroo-ail-datk',  s.  f.,  cruelty.  L. 
86. 


us 


V  O  C  A  li  U  L  A  li  Y 


Ciiaderno,  cwah-dair'-no,  s.  m.,  copy-book. 

1..  4. 
Cual,  cwal,  pron.,  which.    L.  10. 
Cuoiidad,  cwali-le-Uatli' ,  s.  f.,  quality.  L.  36. 
Cuaiquici'a,  cwul-ke-(u'-ra,  piuu.  uud  adj., 

auy  oue,  wnodoever,  some  oue.    L.  'Ai. 
Ciiaa,  cuan,  adv.,  how,  aj  (used  ouly  bc- 

I'ore  adjectives  or  other  adverbs).    L.  1-1. 
Cuaudo,  cwu/i'-Uo,  adv.,  when.    L.  9. 
Cuauto  y  cwu/i'-lo,  adj.,  how  much?  how 

many? — Cuunio  antes,  at  once,  immedi- 
ately.— Por  cuanto,  inasmuch  as.    L.  1-1. 
Cuarto,  cwar'-to,  ord.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  fourtli, 

room,  chamber.    L.  40. 
Cuatro,  cwak'-tro,  num.  adj.,  four.    L.  15. 
Cuba,  koo'-Oa,  b.  1.,  cask,  tub. — Cuba  (island 

of).    L.  61. 
Cubrir,  koo-Oreer',  to  cover.    L.  59. 
Cuchara,  koo-chaJi'-ra,  b.  f.,  gpoon.    L.  CO. 
Cuchillo,  koo-ched' -yo,  s.  m.,  knife.    L.  S3. 
Cuello,  cwaW-yo,  b.  m.,  neck,  collar.    L.  00. 
Cuenta,  cwam'-ta,  s.  f.,  account,  bilL  L.  4U. 
Cueuto,  cwain'-lo,  s.  m.,  etory,  tale.    L.  44. 
Cucrpo,  cwaii-'-po,  s.  m.,  body.    L.  64. 
Cuervo,  cicai)''-co,  s.  m.,  crow.    L.  45. 
Cuesta,  cicam'-ta,  s.  f.,  hill.— A  cuestas,  on 

one's  back  or  shoulders.    L.  63. 
Cuestiou,  cwais-le-dne',  b.  f.,  question.    L. 

40. 
Caldado,  cwe-dah'-do,  b.  m.,  care.— Estar 

do  ctiuiaU.-},  to  be  dangerously  iU. — Estar 

con  cuidado,  to  be  very  anxious.    L.  23. 
Cnidar,  cwe-Uar',  to  care,  to  take  care.    L. 

44. 
Culpa,  kod'-pa,  e.  f.,  fault,  blame.    L.  60. 
Culpar,  kool-iiai-',  to  blame.    L.  GO. 
Cultivar,  kool-ie-cai-',  to  cultivate.    L.  60. 
Campleaaos,  kvom-j;lai-aii'-yosy  s.m.,  birth- 
day.   L.  m. 
Cnaiplimieato,  koom-pR-ml-ain'-to,  b.  m., 

compliment.    L.  4S. 
Cunipiir,  koiyin-j)lee}-' ,  to  accomplish,  to  fal- 

lil. —  Cuinplir  por  otro.  to  act  lor  or  in 

the  name  of  another.    L.  57. 
Cuiiado,  a,  k'Mit-i/a/i'-do,  da,  s.  m.  and  f., 

brother-in-law,  sister-in-law.    L.  64. 
Craioi^C;  koo-)-e-d'-eo,  adj.,  curious,  worthy 

of  note.    L.  51. 
Cnreo,  koor'-io,  s.  m.,  course.    L.  &1. 
Cuslodia,  kocii--(o'-de-a,  s.  f.,  custody.  L.  53. 
Cutis,  koo'-kess,  s.  m.  and  f.,  skin.  "  L.  01. 
Cuyo,  koo'-yo,  pron.,  of  whom,  of  which, 

whose,  which.    L.  IT. 


Dale !  daJi'-Uii,  int.,  have  at  it  1    L.  &1. 
Dama,  dOiV-ina,  s.  f.,  lady,  dame. — JJamas, 

draughts,  or  checkers.    L.  5y. 
Daaza,  dan'-tlia,  s.  f.,  dance.    L.  64. 
Danar,  dan-yar\  to  damage,  to  hurt,  to 

harm.    L.  47. 
Dafio,  dan'-yo,  s.  m.,  damage,  hurt,  harm. 

L.h. 
Dar,  to  give.— Z>aresytomare6,  disputes,  if3 

and  axids.—Darse  a  la  vela,  to  set  sail. 

L.  26. 
Dc,  dat,  prep.,  of,  from. — Be  dia,  by  day. — 

Be  intento,  on  purpose.    L.  4. 
Deber.  dai-bair',  s.  m.,  duty.    L.  25. 
Dcber,  to  owe,  must. — Deben  scr  l.is  echo, 

it  must  be  eight  o'clock.    L.  2.3. 


Dccena,  dal-thai-na,  s.  f.,  about  ten.  L.  59. 

Decidir,  dai-t/ie-Uee/-',  to  aecido.    L.  6U. 

Decimo,  dai'-t/tZ-mo,  ord.  adj.,  and  s.  m., 
tenth.    L.  15. 

Decir,  dai-thcei-' ,  to  say,  to  tell.    L.  27. 

Ueclarar,  dai-duh-ra/-' ,  to  declare..   L.  48. 

Dedal,  dai-dal\  s.  m.,  thimble.    L.  S4. 

Dedo,  dai'-do,  s.  m.,  finger.    L.  59. 

Defective,  dai-/aik-(S'-iv,  adj.,  defective. 
L.  63. 

Defecto,  dtti-faik'-to,  b.  m.,  defect,  failing. 
L.  55. 

Defender,  dai-fain-dair' ,  to  defend.     L.  Z1. 

Dcfinicion,  diu-jZ-nl-thi-vne',  s.  f.,  defini- 
tion.   L.  69. 

Dcfinir,  dai-J'Z-nea-' ,  to  define.    L.  59. 

Dejar,  dai-har',  to  leave,  to  let,  to  allow. 
L.  44. 

Delante,  dal-lan'-fai,  prep.— 2>f/anfe  de,  be- 
fore, in  the  presence  of.    L.  16. 

Deleitar,  daUai-l-tar' ,  to  delight.    L.  47. 

Delicado,  dai-B-kaJi'-do,  adj.,  delicate.  L. 
39. 

Dclicioso,  dai-U-ViS-o' -so,  adj.,  delicious. 
L.  35. 

Delincuente,  dai-Ieen-cwain'-tai,  b.  el,  de- 
linquent, transgressor.    L.  £-1. 

Dclinquir,  dqi-leenkccr' ,  to  transgress.    L. 

Deiito,  dai-l?'-to,  s.  m.,  crime,  transgres- 
sion.   L.  51. 

Demas,  dai-mass'.niy.,  over  and  above,  too 
much;  adj.  (generally  used  with  lo,  los, 
las),  tlie  rest,  the  others,  others.    L.  43. 

Demasiado,  dai-iiiah-ie-ah'-do,  adj.  and 
adv.,  too  much,  too.    L.  25. 

Deutro,  daiii'-tro,  prep.,  in,  within,  inside 
(always  followed  by  dc).    L.  'i\. 

Dcrccho,  dai-rai'-dio,  aty.,  right,  even, 
straight.    L.  50. 

Dcsaflar,  dai-sa/i-fS-ar',  to  challenge.  L. 
65. 

Dcsaflo,  dai-saJt-/l'-o,  a.m.,  challenge,  duel. 
L.  63. 

Desanimar,  daisah-nZ-mar',  to  dishearten, 
to  discourage.    L.  38. 

Descansadamente,  duu-kan-eah-daJi-main'- 
tai,  adv.,  easily,  at  one's  ease.    L.  Zi. 

Dcscansado,  dais-kan-sah'-do,  adj.,  easy, 
quiet-,  refreshed.    L.  .S.3. 

Descansar,  daif-kan-sar',  to  rest.    L.  .33. 

Descanso,  dais-kan'so,  b.  m.,  rest,  repose, 
ease.    L.  83. 

Descaro,  dais-kaJi'-ro,  s.  la.,  barefacedEess. 
L.  64. 

Descender,  daii-thain-dair' ,  to  descend.  L. 
37. 

Descomponcr,  dai^-kome-pd-r.air',  to  disar- 
range, to  discompose,  to  put  out  of  order. 
L.  53. 

Dcscompuesto,  dak-kdme-pwfUs'-to,  adj., 
disarranged,  discomposed,  out  of  order, 
disorderlj'.    L.  53. 

Desconfiar,  daU-kOne-fZ-ar' ,  to  distnist,  to 
mistrust.    L.  43. 

Desgracia,  dais-graJi'-thZ-ck,  s.  f.,  misfor- 
tune, ill-luck.    L.  48. 

Deshaccr,  dau-ah-thair' ,  to.  undo,  to  de- 
stroy, to  take  or  put  .asunder.    L.  57. 

Desierto,  dai-iC-aii'-io,  s.  m.,  desert, -wil- 
derness.   L.  51. 

DesijTnal,  dai-ie-gucal' ,  adj.,  xiEcq«al,  un- 
even.   L.  55. 


VOC AKULARY. 


449 


Desocnpar,  clai-sv-loo-par',  to  quit,  to 
evacuate,  to  empty.    L.  50. 

Despacio,  daU-puu' -the-o,  adv.,  elowly.  L.  C. 

Dcspedir,  iluU-pui-dcer' ,  to  dismiss,  to  ecuil 
or  put  away,  to  discharge.    L.  5'J. 

Dcsportar,  duin-iKdr-tai-' ,  to  awake,  to 
awaken,  to  arouse,  to  rouse.    L.  &1. 

Despierto,  davi-jie-air'-to,  adj.,  awake, 
brisk,  sprightly,  lively.    L.  52. 

Desproporcionadisimamcntc,  rf«is-prc!-7)(/re- 
t/iS-uiui-ah-de'-^e-mah-main-tai,  adv.,  out 
of  all  proportion.    L.  50. 

Dcspues,  dais-pwaks',  prep,  a^d  adv.,  after, 
afterward.    L.  l(i. 

Determinante,  dai-tair-m'i-nan'-tai,  adj.,  de- 
termining.— Verbo  dtierminante,  deter- 
mining verb.    L.  53. 

Determiuar,  dai-tair-ml-nar'.  to  determine. 
L.  53. 

Detrfis,  dai-trass',  prep,  and  adv.,  behind. 
L.  33. 

Deudor,  dai-oo-dCre',  8.  m.,  debtor.    L.  45. 

Devolver,  dai-toletai)-',  to  return,  to  give 
back.    L.  43. 

Dia,  dZ'-a,  s.  m.,  day. — ^Dc  dia,  by  day,  in 
the  daytime. — Dar  los  dia«,  to  say  good 
morning  (to  any  one).    L.  9. 

Diablo,  de-ah'-blo,  s.  ni.,  devil.  X.  C5. 

Dialecto,  dl-cdi-laik'-io,  b.  m.,  dialect.  L. 
5o. 

Dialogo,  di-ah'-lo-go,  a.m.,  dialogue.  L.  59. 

Diantre,  de-an'-trai,  s.  m.,  deuce.    L.  4(). 

Dibujo,  de-boo'-/u),  s.  m.,  drawing,  design. 
L.  51. 

DiccioimTio.deek-ihe-o-nah'-re-o,  s.  m.,  dic- 
tionary,   li.  49. 

Dicha,  dS'-cha,  s.  f.,  happiness,  good  luck, 
good  fortune.    L.  G4. 

Dicho,  dZ'-cho,  s.  m.,  saying.    L.  6^1. 

Dicicmbre,  di-tlie-aim'-brm,  s.  m.,  Decem- 
ber.   L.  34. 

Dicnte,  dS-ain'-tai,  s.m.,  tooth.— Hablar  cn- 
tre  dkiitcK,  to  mumble,  to  mutter.    L.  C3. 

Diez,  d^-aith',  num.  adj.,  ten.'    L.  14. 

Diferencia,  dd-fai-rain'-thS-a,  b.  f.,  differ- 
ence.   L.  48. 

Difcrcnciar,  dZ-faz-rain-thi-ar',  to  differ. 
L.  48. 

Dificil,  dZ-fe'-iheel,  adj.,  difBcitlt.    L.  21. 

Dilicultad,  de-fl-kod-tath' ,  b.  f.,  dilllculty. 
L.  38. 

Digno,  deeg'-no,  adj.,  worthy,  deserving.- 
L.  5:i. 

Diluviar,  di-loo-ri-ar' ^  to  rain  like  a  deluge, 
to  pour.    L.  80. 

Dimes,  dl'-maise.—ATx&ax  en  dimes  y  dire- 
tes,  to  use  ifa  and  auds,  to  quibble.  L.  47. 

Dlminutivo,  di-me-iioo-tS'-vo,  s.  m.,  diminu- 
tive.   L.  44. 

Dinero,  de-nai'^ro,  a.  m.,  money.    L.  13. 

Dio3,  dS-oce',  b"  m.,  God.    L.  31. 

Diptongo,  deep-tune' -go,  s.  m.,  diphthong. 
L.  57. 

Direccion,  dZ-raik-thS-dne',  8.  f.,  direction, 
address.    L.  24. 

Dirccto,  de-raik'-t<r,  adj.,  direct.    L.  51. 

Director,  dl-raik-tor' ,  director.    L.  50. 

Dirigir,  dl-re-heer',  to  direct. — Dirigirse,  to 
apply.    L.  03. 

Discipulo,  dees-lM-poo-k),  a.  m.,  pupil,  dis- 
ciple.   L.  18. 

Discrcto,  deesi:-krai'-(o,  adj.,  discreet,  cir- 
cumspect.   L.  39. 


Disculpa,  deess-kool'-im,  s.  f.,  apology,  ex- 
cuse.   L.  00. 

Discurso,  deess-Tcoen-'-so,  s.  m.,  discourse, 
speech,  course.    L.  53. 

Disgustar,  deess-goos-tar' ,  to  disgust,  to 
displease.    L.  60. 

Disgusto,  deeas-goos'-to,  s.  m.,  disgust,  dis- 
pleasure, unpleasautuess.    L.  50. 

Disponer,  deess-pd-nair\  to  dispose,  to  lay 
out,  to  arrange,  to  prepare.    L.  48. 

Disposicion,  deegs-pd-ne-t/ie-dne',  s.  f.,  dis- 
position, arrangement,  distribution.  L. 
33. 

Distancia,  deess-tan'-tlie-a,  b.  f.,  distance. 
L.  51. 

Distantc,  deess-tan'-tai,  adj.,  distant.    L.  88. 

Distar,  deess-tar',  to  be  distant,  far  Horn. 
L.  53. 

Distinguir,  deess-teen-gheer' ,  to  distinguish. 
L.  43. 

Divertir,  de-vair-leer' ,  to  divert,  to  amuse. 
L.  39. 

Dividir,  di-vl-deer\  to  divide.    L.  61. 

Divisar,  dl-vl-sar',  to  descry,  to  perceive, 
to  catch  a  glimpse  of.    L.  42. 

Dol)Ie,  db'-Uai,  adj.,  double.    L.  40. 

Dobic,  s.  m.,  double.    L.  40. 

Doce,  do' -thai,  num.  adj.  and  b.  m.,  twelve, 
twelfth.    L.  14. 

Doceua,  do-thai' -na,  s.  f.,  dozen.    L.  40. 

Doler,  db-lair' . — JJolerXa  i\  uno  la  cabeza, 
los  dientes,  to  have  a  headache,  tooth- 
ache.   L.  30. 

Dolor,  do-lore',  b.  m.,  pain.    L.  50. 

Domingo,  db-meen'-go,  8.  m.,  (Sunday.  L.  9. 

Donde,  dbne'-dai,  adV.,  where.    L.  9. 

Doiia,  dbne'-ya,  s.  f.,  lady,  madam,  Mrs. 
D.  2. 

Dormir,  dbr^^meer',  to  sleep.    L.  41. 

Dos,  dbce,  num.  adj.  and  8.  m.,  two,  seccnd. 
L.  14. 

Drama,  drah'-ma,  s.  m.,  drama.    L.  52. 

Dramatico,  drah-mah' -tl-ko,  adj.,  dramatic. 
L.  52. 

Duda,  doo'-da,  s.  f.,  doubt.    L.  43. 

Dudar,  doo-dar',  to  doubt.    L.  28. 

Durable,  doo-rah' -blai,  adj.,  durable.   L.  E8. 

Durante,  doo-ran' -tai,  pres.  pait.,  during. 
L.  59. 

Durar,  doo-rar',  to  last,  to  continue.  L.  69. 

Duro,  doo'-ro,  adj.  and  s.  m.,  hard:  dollar. 
L.  CO. 

E.  , 

Ea !  ai'-a,  int.,  say  !  hollo  !    L.  46. 

Echar,  az-c/icir',  to  throw,  to  put,  (ocast. — 

Echar  de  ver,  to  notice,  to  observe. — 

Echar  a  correr,  to  nni  away. — hcUav  a 

perder,  to  spoil.     L.  53. 
Econ6mico,  ai-ko-nb' ^iil-ko,  adj.,  cconcmi- 

cal.    L.  35. 
Edad,  s.  f.,  atre.    L.  53. 
Edicion,  ai-de-th^-bne' ,  s.  f.,  edition.    L.  GO. 
Edificar,  ai-de-fl-kai-' ,  to  edify.    L.  48. 
Efecto,  ai-faiJc'-to,  s.  m.,  effect.    L.  47. 
Ejecutar,  ai-hai-koo-tar' ,  to  execute,  to  put 

into  execution,  to  put  into  practice.    L. 

m. 

Ejcmplo,  ai-haim'-r)lo,  a.  m.,  example.  L. 
32. 

Ejercer,  ni-hair-thair' ,  to  exercise,  to  prac- 
tise.   L.  GO. 


450 


VOCAliULAKY. 


Ejercicio,  aihair-tJil'-thl-o,  s.  m.,  exercise. 
L.  8. 

El,  la,  lo,  los,  la?,  dcf.  art.,  the.    L.  1. 

El,  ella,  ail,  aU'-i/a,  pers.  pron.,  he,  she,  it. 
L.  1. 

Eleccion,  ai-laikthl-one',  e.  f..  election, 
choice,    ti.'i'i.  „      , 

Elegancia,  aitai-gan'-the-a,  s.  f.,  elegance. 
L.  52. 

Elci^ante,  ai-lai-gan'-tal,  adj.,  clesant.  L.  05. 

Eloiir,  ai-lai-lieer\  to  elect,  to  cnoose.  L. 
.3!T. 

Element©,  ai-lai-rnain'-to,  8.  m.,  element, 
constituent  part.    L.  00. 

Elena,  ai-hii'-na,  s.  f.,  Helena,  Ellen.    L.  19. 

Eliptico,  ai-kej)'-ti-ko,  a4j.,  elliptic,  ellipti- 
cal.   L.  00. 

Embarcadero,  aim-bar-kah-dai'-ro,  s.  m., 
landin:^,  ferry.    L.  58. 

Embargo,  aiin-bar'-go,  s.  m.,  embargo. — Sin 
embargo,  notwithstanding,  however.  L. 
48. 

Empefiar,  aiin-pain.-yar',  to  engage,  to 
pledge,  to  hituX.—Emjxname,  to  bind 
one's  seir,  to  persist,  to  desire  eagerly. 
L.  45. 

Empero,  aim-pcU'-ro,  conj.,  yet,  however, 
but.    L.  00. 

Emplcar.  aim-plai-ar\  to  employ.    L.  44. 

Empleo,  ai.'ii-j)!ai'-o,  s.  m.,  employ,  em- 
ployment, oifice.    L.  57. 

En,  ain,  prep.,  in,  at,  on.    L.  8. 

Enamorar,  ai-nah-ino-rar' ,  to  court,  to 
make  love  \.o.—Enamorarse  de,  to  be 
enamonred  of,  to  fall  in  love  with.    L.  30. 

Encargo,  ain-kar'-go,  s.  m.,  charge,  com- 
mission, command.    L.  57. 

Encar^-,  a  n-kar-gar' ,  to  charge,  to  com 
miision,  to  order.    L.  58.        • 

Encender,  uiii-thaiii-dair' ,  to  light,  to  kin- 
dle.   L.  37. 

Encerrar,  ain-t/iair-rar',  to  shut  up,  to  con- 
tain, to  comprehend.    L.  Co. 

Encima,  ain-the'-ma,  prep,  and  adv.,  above, 
over.    L.  SJ. 

Encontrar,  ain-kdne-irar',  to  meet,  to  find. 
L.  35. 

Enemigo,  ai-nai-mS'-go,  s.  m.,  enemy.  L.  3 1. 

Enemistar,  ai-nai-niee$s-tar' ,  to  set  at  en- 
mity.—^/i««^»7rtr  a  alguno  con  otro,  to 
put  any  one  at  enmity  with,  or  against 
another.    L.  00. 

Energia.  ai-nair-hl'-a,  s.  f,  energy.    L.  CI. 

.Enfermar,  ain-fair-mar\  to  become  or  sret 

sick.    L.  38.  " 

Enfermo,  ain-fair'-mo,  adj.,  sick.  ill.    L  48 

Enfrente,  ain-frain'-tai,  adv.,  opposite,  in 
front.    L.  51.  ' 

Enganar,  aiiigan-yar' ,  to  deceive,  to  take 
in.    L.  32. 

Enhebrar,  ain-ai-brar' ,  to  thread,  to  link 
L.  05. 

Enhorabnena.  ai-no-rah-bicai'-na  s  f 
congratulation,  felicitation.    L.  39.    '     "' 

Enrique,  ain-re'-kai,  s.  m.,  Henry.    L  13 

Ensenar,  ain-sain-yar' ,  to  show,  to  teach. 
L.  27. 

Ensuciar,  ain-soo-tM-ar' ,  to  dirty  to  soil 
to  daub.    L.  00. 

Entendedor,  ain-fain-dai-ddre',  s  m  he 
who   nndcrstand.s.-A   buen   entendedor 


En  tender,   ain-tain-dair',   to   understand. 

L.  37. 
Entonccs,  ain-ione'-thaiss,  adv.,  then.  L.  23. 
Enirambos,  aiu-lrani'-OOce,  pron.  pi.,  both. 

L.  CO. 
Entrar,  ain-(rar',  to  enter,  to  begin,   to 

commence,  lo  come  or  go  in,  to  get  in. 

L.  28. 
Entre,  ain'-trai,   prep.,   between,  in   the 

course  of.    L.  I'j. 
Entretanto,    aiii-oai-tan'-to,  adv.,    in   the 

mean  time.    L.  (iO. 
Entreteuer,  aui-traitai-nair',  to  entertain, 

to   amuse,    lO    divert. — Eiitrtttuerne,    to 

spend  one"8  time,  to  be  eugageU  in.    L.  48. 
Eniusiasmo,    ain-loo-ni-asg  -mo,  s.  m.,  en- 
thusiasm.   L.  54. 
Enviar,  aiiv-ve-ar',  to  send.    L.  14. 
Envidiar,  ain-ce-Ui-ar\  to  envy.    L.  40. 
Equivocacion,    ai-ke-rO-kah-tlte-one\   s.  f., 

mistake,  misconception.    L.  50. 
Equivocar,  ai-kl-to-kar' ,  to  mistake.— £'gi/i- 

rocarse,  to  be  mistaken,    i..  47. 
Erguir,  air-gheer\  to  hold  erect   (as   the 

head,  &c.).    L.  42. 
Errar,  air-rar\  to  err,  to  miss.    L.  41. 
Erudicion,  ai-roo-dethe-dne\  8.  f.,    cradi- 

tion.     L.  52. 
Escaldar,  aiss-kal-dar' ,  to  scald.    L.  03. 
Esceiia,  aine-thai'-na,  s.  f.,  scene.    L.  05. 
Esceptico,  cuss-t/iaip'-le-ko,  adj.,  skeptical. 

L.  45. 
Escobaj  aisg-ko'-ba,  s.  f.,  broom.    L.  49. 
Escobajo,  aiBs-kd-bah'-ho,  s.  m.  (augmenta- 
tive of  EscoBA),  stump  of  a  broom.    L. 

49. 
Escoger,  aisx-ko-kair'.  to  choose.    L.  05. 
Escribano,  aiss-krl-bah'-no.  s.  m.,  notary. 

L.  19.  ... 

Escribiente,  aiss-kr?-bS-ain'-(ai,  b.  m., 
amanuensis,  clerk,  writer  (in  an  office). 
L.  38. 

Escribir,  a^s-krS-beer',  to  write.    L.  8. 

Escritor,  mss-krl-tore' ,  s.  m.,  writer,  au- 
thor.   L.  19. 

Escritnra,  am-kr?-(oo'-ra,  s.  f.,  writing, 
document,  conveyance.    L.  19. 

Escuchar,  aiss-koo-char' ,  to  hearken,  to  lis- 
ten.   L.  CO. 

Escuela,  alss-kwai'-Za,  s.  f.,  school.    L.  21. 

Escultor,  aiss-kool-tore' ,  8.  m.,  sculptor.  L. 
.31. 

Escultura,  alss-kool-ioo'-ra,  s.  f.,  sculpture. 
L.  31. 

Esforzar,  ahg-fore-thar' ,  to  strengthen,  to 
cxQTt.—Eg'orzarse,  to  make  effort,  to  en- 
deavor.   L.  CO. 

Esfuerzo,  aiis-fwair'iho.  p.  m.,  effort,  cn- 
deavor  (pi  J,  courage,  bravery.    L.  47. 

^.spacio,  am-pah'-aa-o,  s.  m.-.'spacc.  L.  43. 

Jr-spada,  aiss-pa?i'-da,  s.  f .  sword.    L.  57. 

l:.sp.idachin.  aiss-pah-dah-cheen' ,  s.  m., 
bully.    L.  03. 

Espalda,  aw>-pal'-da,  b.  f.,  shoulder,  (pi.) 
OiiCK,     L,  59. 

Espana  am-pan'-ya.  s.  f.,  Spain.    L.  9. 

Jispanol.  aiss-pan-yolf',  s.  and  adj..  Spanish  . 
language:    Spanish.— A  la  espanda,   m 
the  Spanish  f;i*hion.    L.  2. 

Especie,  ai^-pai'-tke-ai,  s.  f.,  species,  kind, 
port.    L.  40.  '        '    i  '        ^ 

Espccicro,  aiss-pai-thZ-ai'-ro,  s.  m.,  grocer. 
Ij.  C5. 


VOCABULARY. 


451 


Espejo,  aiss-jmi'-ho,  s.  m.,  looking-glass. 

htpcraiiza,  uhs-pui-rait,' -tha,  s.  f.,  hope.    L. 

Espcrar,  aisn-ixii-rar' y  to  Lope,  to  await,  to 

\>uiL  lur.    1^.  iii, 
Espiiilu,  uioi-pe  -le-too,  s.  m.,  spirit.   L.  45. 
EopOi^a,  uui>-j/o  -aUi  s.  1.,  spouse,  wile.  L.  tJt*. 
iuffpoeo,  tuas-iMJ' -My  ti.  ui.,  tpoutie,  Uusbaud. 

L..  uU. 

Esqucia,  aias-kai'-la,  s.  f.,  note.    L.  50. 
Esquiua,  uim-Kv' -ua,  s.  1.,  coruer.    L.  51. 
Esuiuiucer,  aidn-ta/i-oiui-ucuir' ,  W  establish. 

1..  -m. 
Eijiacion,    aiss-tah-the-one\    8.  f.,  station, 

season.    E.  00. 
Eoiaao,  aidjs-lait'-do,  s.  m.,  state.  State. — 

Eod  jJaluaon  Umaos,  tUo  Lmled  btates. 

L.  I'J. 
Esiai-,  am-tar',  to   be,    to  understand.— 

Mi-itar  para  salir,  to  be  about  to  sot  out. — 

±isUir  por  alguuo,  to  l)e  lor,  or  in  lavor  of, 

auy  one.— ^'  J^lu,  \.i  do  you  understand  t 

L.  -iZ.         ^-' 
Este,  aiss'-tai,  s.  m.,  east.    L.  22. 
Eite,  eata,  esto,  dem.  prorf.,  this,  this  one. 

L.  18. 
Estilo,  ahs-le'-lo,  s.  m.,  style.    L.  52. 
Estimable,  aiss-tt-iiuih'-blaiy  adj.,  estimable. 

L.  a). 
Eatiinar,.  aiss-(e-mar',  to  esteem,  to  esti- 
mate. 'L.  39. 
Esto,  aiss'-(o.    (See  Este.)    L.  18. 
Esiocada,  aUs-tO-kaJi'-da,  s.  f.,  stab,  thrust. 

L.  S). 
Estrauo,  aiss-tran'-yo,  aty.,  strange,  foreign. 

L. -IS. 
Estratagema,   aiss-traJi-tah-hai'-ma,   b.  f., 

etraiagem,  ruse.    L.  44. 
Estrcchar,    aiss-trai-char' ,   to   tighten,   to 

make  narrow,  to  squeeze,  to  press.  L.  GO. 
Estrccho,  am-(rai'-clto,  adj.,  narrow,  tight, 

close,  miimaiQ.—EstrecliO,  s.  m.,  strait. 

L.  (iO.  _    ^ 

Estribo.  aiss-lfS'-bo,  s.  m.,  stirrup.    L.  38. 
Estudiante,  aiss-too-dl-an'-tai,  s.  m.,  stu- 
dent.   L.  3S. 
Estudiar,  aixs-too-de-ar',  to  study.    L.  3. 
Estudio,    aiss-too'-di-d,   8.   m.,    study.    L. 

25. 
Etcmidad,  ai-tair-ne-dath',  b.  f.,  eternity. 

L.  36. 
Eterno,  ai-tair'-no,  adj..  eternal.    L.  41. 
Evidcncia,  ai-ve-dain'-l/ie-a,  s.  f.,  evidence. 

L  50 
Evitar,    ni-r'-tar'.   to   avoid,  to  help  (do 

otherwise  than  has  been  done).    L.  47. 
Exasrcracion,  aiJc-xah-hai-rah-thZ-one' ,  s.  f., 

oxasrsreration.    L.  48. 
ExaL'crar,  aik-sah-hai-rar\  to  exaggerate. 

L.  GO.  .  .      . 

Examen,  aik-sah'^main,  s.  m.,  examination. 

T.  38.  . 

Examinar,  aik-sah-me-nar',  to  examine.    L. 

Exrcdor.  aih<'-ffiai-d(tir'.  to  exceed,  to  over- 
stcn.  to  surpass.    L.  5.3. 

Excclentc,  alks-thai-lain'-tai,  adj.,  exccl- 
loTit.    L.  53.  ,       ^  . 

Excopcion,  aiks-thaii)-thl-one' ,  s.  f.,  excep- 
tion.   L.  45.  ,  .  .      T 

Exccptuar,  aiks-thalp-too-ar',  to  except,  h. 
60. 


Exclamacion,  aiks-kla/i-mah-(/u-dne',  s.  f., 

cxciauiaiiou.    L.  'M. 
Exeiamar,  utlcis-klah-mar' ,  to  exclaim.    L. 

00. 

Excusa,  aiks-koo'-sa,  s.  f.,  excuse,  apology. 
L.  00. 

Excusar,  aiks-koo-sar\  to  excuse,  to  apolo- 
gize.   L.  at. 

Exiiibiciou,  (ukisl-^e-lhe-<jne\  s.  f.,  exhibi- 
tion.   1,.  4S. 

Exliibir,  aikse-beer' ,  to  exhibit.    L.  CO. 

Exigir,  uik-st-heer\  to  exact,  to  require,  to 
demand.    L.  38. 

Exititeucia,  aik-beess-tain'-thl-a,  s.  f.,  exist- 
ence, (j)l.)  stock.    L.  52. 

Existir,  uik-teest-leer',  to  exist.    L.  40. 

Kxito,  (Uk'-il-to,  s.  m.,  result,  issue. — Con 
buen  exito,  successfully.    L.  40. 

Experiencia,  aikn-pai-re-ain'-ihe-a,  s.  f.^  ex- 
perience.   L.  41. 

Explicacion,  aiks-pH-kah-the-one',  s.  f.,  ex- 
planation.   L.  48. 

Explicar,  aiks-pH-kar' ,  to  explain.    L.  45. 

Exponer,  aiks-po-nair' ,  to  expose,  to  ex- 
pound, to  explain.    L.  51. 

Expresar,  aiks-prai-sar',  to  express.    L.  52. 

Expresion,  aiks-prai-sl-vne' ,  e.  f.,  expres- 
sion.   L.  50. 

Expresivo,  aiks-prai-si'-vo,  adj.,  expressive. 
L.  05. 

Exterior,  aiks-iai-re-ore',  exterior.    L.  48. 

Extra,  aiks'-tra,  adv.,  extra.    L.  00. 

Extrangero,  aiks-tran-hai'-iv,  s.  m.,  foreign- 
er.   L.  00. 

Extrafiar,  aiks-tvan-yar\  to  wonder  at,  to 
liud  (a  thing)  strange.    L.  CO. 

Extrafio,  aikv-tra/i'-yo,  adj.,  strange.    L.  48. 

Extraordinario,  aiks-lrah-0re-dt-nah'-7'l-d, 
adj.,  extraordinary.    L.  40. 

Extreinado,  aiks-trui-mah'-do,  adj.,  ex- 
treme.   L.  55. 


F. 

Fabricar, /a A-*r?-A:ar',  to  make,  to  manu- 
facture, to  build.    L.  48. 

Taccion,/ak-ik€-one',  s.  f.,  feature;  foction. 
L.  35. 

'P&c\\,fah'-theel,  adj.,  easy.    L.  21. 

Facilidad,  fah-lkl-Ce-daih' ,  s.  f.,  facility, 
ease.    L.  30. 

Facilitar,  fa/i-ffie-l?-far\  to  facilitate,  to 
make  easy,  to  procure.    L.  49. 

Facilmente,  fah'-thetl-main-taU  adv.,  easi- 
ly.   L.  49. 

Factura. /aA--<oo'-m,  s.  f.,  invoice.    L.  03. 

Facultad,/aA-Aoo/-/ai'A',  s.  f.,  faculty,  power 
of  doing  any  thing,  liberty  to  do  any 
thing.    L.  &3.  ^    ^^ 

Falso,  fal'-so,  adj.,  false.    L.  45. 

Falta,/ar-to,s.f.,  fault,  want.    L.  27. 

Faltar  fal-tar',  to  want,  to  lack,  to  be  lack- 
incr.    L.  31. 

Fama.  fah'-7na,  b.  f.,  fame,  reputation,  re- 
pute.   L.  65.  .       ,    ,     .,       T    oo 

Familia,/a/;-f/it-'-/S-a.  s.  f.,  family.    L.  2.. 

Familiar.  fah-nie-lS-a?-'.  adj.,  familiar.  L.  4i). 

Familiariliad,  fa/i-mi-l^-ah-re-dath',  s.  f.,  fa- 
miliarity.   L.  05. 

Faraoso,/a/i-ff?<5'-.w,  adj.,  famous.  >•  4J- 

l-aniiUco,fak-nah'-(e-ko,  adj.,  fanatical.  L. 
35. 


V  O  C  A  B  U  L  A  K  Y 


Fas,  /a^g.—ToT  fas  6  por  nefas,  right  or 
wroug ;  justly  or  unjustly.    L.  63. 

Yasti(Xio,jUiis-le'-(ie-o,  s.  in.,  trouble,  annoy- 
ance,   ii.  47. 

Fa\'or,  J'a/i-ti/re',  s.  m.,  favor,  mercy,  help. 
— Ajacor  de,  in  t>cliall'  of.    L.  3a. 

Favorecer,  jUli-tO-rai-tliair' ,  to  favor.  L. 
66 

Favorito,/aA-r5-?2'-to,  aflj.,  favorite.  L.  5t 

Fe,yai,  s.  f.,  laith.    L.  45. 

Vc\iV(iTO,J'ai-b)(n'-ro,  8.  m.,  Februarj'.  L.  24. 

Feclia, /««'-<■/(«,  s.  f.,  date.    L.  20. 

FcHcidad,  j'(u-li-lhl-dath,\  8.  f.,  happiness, 
felicity.    L.  48. 

Felicitar,/««-/2-Wi?-tor',  to  felicitate,  to  con- 
gratulate.   L.  61. 

Fcliz,  fai-leeth\  adj.,  happy,  fortunate, 
lucky.    L.  21. 

reliziiiente,/fli-/c«/A-7«aj«'-to',  adv.,  happi- 
ly, fortunately,  luckily.    L.  49. 

Femenino,  fai-mai-ne'-no,  adj.,  feminine. 
L.  47. 

Fco,/ai'-o,  adj.,  ugly,  unbecoming^.    L.  7. 

Feroz,  fai-rot/i',  adj.,  ferocious,  hcrce,  rav- 
enous.   L.  54. 

Fcrrocarril, /air-r5-car-r«6i',  b.  m.,  railroad. 
L.  GO. 

Fiado,/g-aA'-rfo,  adj.,  confident,  trusting. — 
Al  Jiado,  on  credit,  on  tnist.    L.  61. 

Fiar,/?-ar',  to  trust,  to  bail.    L.  01. 

Ficl,/e-aa',  adj.,  Ciithful.    L.  21. 

Fiesta, /?-fl&s'-/a,  s.  f.,  feast,  festival.— Dia 
de  fimla,  holiday.    L.  02. 

'Fig\iTn,fS-goo'-ra,  s.  f.,  figure,  form,  shape. 
— Uacer  Jir/ura,  to  make,  to  cut  a  figure. 
L.  03. 

FiOTrado,  fd-goo-rah'-do,  adj.,  figurative. 
L.  51. 

TUosoTastro,  ft-lo-sd-fass'-tro,  b.  m.,  philoso- 
phaster.    L.  49. 

Filosofo,  fS-iu'su-fo,  B.  m.,  philosopher.  L. 
49. 

Fin,  feen,  e.  m.,  end,  object,  point. — ^A  fin 
de,  in  order  to.    L.  45. 

Tinal,  j'e-nal',  b.  m.  and  adj.,  end,  termina- 
tion; final.    L.  01. 

Finalniente, /g-7Mi/-7«ain'-te',  adv.,  finally. 
L.  49. 

Fino,/e'-no,  adj.,  fine.    L.  50. 

Firma,/eer'-7««,  s.  f.,  signature.    L.  5G. 

Fisouomia.  fe-so-no-jne'-a,  e.  f.,  physiogno- 
my.   L.  45. 

Flaqueza,  Jiah-Tcai'-tha.  b.  f.,  leanness, 
Aveakness.  foible,  frailty.    L.  04. 

Fondo,  foJie'-do,  s.  m.,  bottom,  ground 
(of  colored  articles);  pi.,  funds,  cash, 
money.    L.  60. 

Formal,  fore-mal\  a4j.,  formal,  reliable, 
respectable.    L.  45. 

Formalidad./o7-<:-.')ic/i-/?-<7c^//',  s.  f..  formali- 
ty, reliability,  respcctabilitv.    L.  45. 

FonnaTjl/re-iPMr',  to  form,  to  shape.  L.  43. 

Fortuua.  jore-loo'-na,  s.  f.,  fortune,  luck. 
L.  42. 

rragata,/ra/i-^aA'-.'a.  s.  f,  friKite.    L.  GO. 

Fraile,./,ra/('-(-^«j.  s.  f.,  friar.    L.  41. 

JPiaaccs. /ra)i-f/iai-ss\  s.  m.  and  adj.,  French 
(language),  French.    L.  3. 

Francia.jrmn'-Wf-a.  s.  f,  France.    L.  9. 

Francisco;  fran-lkcess'-ko,  b.  m.,  Francis. 
L.44. 

Franco,  fran'-ko.  aty.,  frank,  Itec,  open- 
hearted,  intimate.    L.  SI. 


Franqueza,  fran-kai'-tha,  b.  f.,  frankness, 
open-heartedness,  intimacy.    L.  48. 

Frase,/ra/t '-*•«/,  s,  f.,  phrase,  sentence.  L. 
61. 

Fray,/raA'-?,  b.  m.,  friar.    L.  41. 

Frecuente,  fmi-kwaiii'-tai,  a^j.,  frequent. 

Yrc\r.  frai-eer',  to  fry.    L.  52. 

Frente,  frain'-tai,  s.  f.,  forehead,  ftcnt.— 

EnfreiUe,  opposite.    L.  45. 
Fresco,  fraiss'-ko,  aty.,  fresh,  cool.— Pintu- 

ra  al  jresco,  fresco  painting.    L.  46. 
Fresco,  s.  m.,  cool  breeze,  cool,  refreshing 

air,  fresco  (painting).    L.  46. 
Frio,//-?'-5.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  cold.    L.  25. 
Friolera,/7fc-W««'-»'a,  s.  f.,  trifle.    L.  37, 
FvaiSi,  froo'-ta,  s.  f.,  fruit.    L.  31. 
Fruto,  fivo'-to,  B.  m.,  firuit  (produce).    L. 

40. 
Fuego,fwai'-go,  s.  m.,  fire.    L.  3i. 
Fuente,  fivain'-tai,  6.  f.,  foimtain,  spring, 

source.    L.  52. 
Fnera,/;c<M'-ra,  adv.,  out.— Fueyu  de  que, 

besides.    L.  81. 
Fuera !  inter.,  out !  be  gone !  away !    L.  31. 
Fuerza,  fivair'-tka.  s.  i..  force,  strength. — 

A  fuerza  de,  by  dint  of.    L.  58. 
Fuga, /oo'-gra,  s.  f.,  flight,  escape.    L.  57. 
Fmtoio.foo-lah'-no,  s.  m..  such  a  one.    L.  55. 
Fumar,/oo-wGr',  to  smoke.    L.  42. 
Fusil,. /eci-««f/',  s.  m.,  gun.    L.  49. 
Fusilar,/oo-«e-tor',  to  shoot  (military).    L. 

45. 
Futuro,/oo-?a)'-«),  s.  m..  future  (tense).    L. 

43. 
Futuro,  adj.,  future.    L.  4.3. 


G. 

Galan,  gah-lan\  s.  m.  and  adj.,  gallant,  ac- 
tor ;  gallant.    L.  58. 

Galante,  gaJi-lan'-ial,  adj.,  gallant,  courtly. 
L.  58. 

Galicismo,  gah-le-thcess' -mo,  s.  m.,  galli- 
cism.   L.  01. 

Gallego,  gal-yai'-go,  s.  m.,  Galician.    L.  55. 

Gallina,  gal-ye'-n'a,  s.  f.,  hen.    L.  5. 

Gana,  ga/i'-na,  6.  f.,  desire,  will,  appetite. 
L.  59. 

Ganapicrdc.  gaJi-naJi-pe-air'-dai,  s.  m., 
game  of  draughts,  or  checkers,  at  which 
the  loser  wins.    L.  50. 

Ganar,  gah-nar',  to  gain,  to  win.    L.  27. 

Ganso,  gan'-fo,  s.  m.,  goose.— Hablar  por 
boca  de  gan^^,  to  echo  what  has  been 
said  by  others.    L.  03. 

Garrotazo,  gai^rd-tah'-t/io,  s.  m.,  blow  with 
a  cudgel.    L.  44. 

Garrote,  gar-ro'-tai,  s.  m.,  cudgel.    L.  44. 

Gastar,  g'a.^x-tar',  to  waste,  to  use,  to  spend, 
to  expend.    L.  50. 

Gatillo.  gah-Ud'-yo,  b.  m.  (dim.),  little  cat, 
trigger  of  a  gtm.    L.  53. 

GatOj  gali'-to.  s.  m.,  cat.    L.  40. 

Gemido.  hai-mW-do,  s.  m..  groan,  lamenta- 
tion, moan,  howling.    L.'59. 

General,  hcti-nai-ral\  s.  m.  and  adj.,  gen- 
eral.   L.  45. 

Genero,  hai'-noi-ro,  s.  m.,  gender,  genus, 
kind,  sort,  cloth.    L.  57. 

Gentilicio,  hain-te-U'-thl-d,  adj.,  peculiar  to 
a  nation.    L.  49. 


VOCABULARY- 


453 


Gcntio,  /iain-te'-u,  s.  m,,  great  crowd,  mul- 
titude.   L.  40. 
Gentualla,    hain-loo-al'-T/a,    8.   f.,    rabble, 

drc;T3  of  tlic  people.    L.  49. 
Geruudio,  /tai-roon'-dii-o,  s.  m.,  gerund.    L. 

•13. 
Gigantesco,  M-gan-taiss'-ko,  adj.,  gigantic. 

L.  49. 
Gineta,  M-nai'-ta.—TanQv  los  cascoa  a  la 

gimta,  to  be  hare-brained.    L.  04. 
Globo,  gW-fx),  B.  III.,  globe,  balloon.    L.  .^7. 
Goberuador,  gd-bair-nali-dore' ,  8.  m.,  gov- 

cnior.    L.  60. 
Gobernante,  go-bair-nan'-tai,   pros,   part., 

governing.    L.  33. 
Gobernar,  go-balr-nar' ,  to  govern.    L.  34. 
Gobierno,  go-M-air'-no,  s.  m.,  government. 

L.  40. 
Goce,  go'-fhai,  s.  m.,  enjoyment.    L.  54. 
Goipe,  gula'-pai,  s.  m.,  blow,  stroke.    L.  01. 
Gonziilez,    gune-ihah'-kUth,    s.  m.    (dim)., 

Spanish  proper  name  eignifying  son  of 

Oonzalo.    L.  49. 
Gorra,  gure'-ra,   8.   f.,   bonnet.— Vivir  de 

gorra,   to   live  at   others'    expense,   to 

sponge.    L.  04. 
Gozar,  go-(har',  to  enjoy.    L.  23. 
Gozo,  gb'-tho,  s.  m.,  joy,  satisfaction,  pleas- 
ure.   L.  51. 
Grabado,  grah-bah' -do,  s.  m.,    engraving, 

cut  (picture).    L.  52. 
Grabar,  grah-bar',  to  engrave.    L.  53. 
Gracia,  grah'-the-a,  a.  f.,  grace,  f-ivor,  grace- 
fulness, pardon.    L.  51. 
Gracias,  s.  m.  pi.,  thank  you.    L.  23. 
Grado.  qrah'-do,  s.  m.,  grade,  degree. — Dc 

gradOy  willingly.    L.  00. 
Gramiitica,  qrah-mah' -te-ka,  s.  f.,  grammar. 

L.  5. 
Gramatical,    grak-mah-te-kal' ,  adj.,  gram- 
matical.   L.  51. 
Grande,  gran'-dai,  adj.,  great,  large.    L.  7. 
Granizar,  grah-ni-thar' ,  to  hail.    L.  30. 
Grato,    grah'-to,    adj.,    grateful,  pleasing, 

agreeable.    L.  56. 
Grito,  grl'-to,  s.  m.,  cry,  shout,  scream.    L. 

59. 
Guerra,  gair'-ra,  s.  f.,  war.    L.  56. 
Guifiada,  gheen-yah'-da,  s.  f.,  wink.     L.  54. 
Guipuzcoa,  gkS-poofh'-kwa,  s.  f.,  Guipuzcoa 

(province  in  Spain).    L.  55. 
Gustar,    gooss-tar',  to   like,  to  please,  to 

taste.    L.  .31. 
Gusto,  gooss'-to,  s.  m.,  taste,  pleasure.— Con 

mucho  gusto,  with  great  pleasure.    L.  23. 


nabaua  (La),  lah-ah-bah'-na,  s.  f.,  Havana. 
L.  U. 

Eabanero,  ah-bah-nai'-ro,  adj.  and  s.  m., 
Ilavaucse.    L.  49. 

Ilabcr,  ah-bair\  to  have  (used  only  as  an 
auxiliary  verb  in  this  si'TniQcation ;  for 
exceptions  see  Lesson  0(i);  impersonal 
verb,  there  to  be.— //^y  dos  i'jlesias  en 
esta  calle,  there  are  two  churches  in  this 
street.    L.  1-2. 

Ilabil,  ah'-beel,  adj.,  able,  skilful,  expert, 
clever.    L.  21. 

Ilabilidad,  ah-b^-le-daih' ,  s.  f.,  ability,  skil- 
fulness,  expertncss,  cleverness.    L.  30. 


Ilabitantc,  ah-be-ian'-iai,  a.  m.,  inhabitant. 

L.  40. 
Hablador,  ab-lah-ddre' ,  adj.  ands.  m.,  talka- 
tive ;  talker.    L.  20. 
Uablar,  ab-lar',  to  talk,  to  speak.— iZaWar 

a  bulto,  to  talk  at  random.    L.  1. 
Ilacer,  ak-thair',  to  do,  to  make.— 7/acer 

may  bicn,  to  do  well  or  right,  to  be  right. 

—llacur  do,  to  act  as.    L.  19. 
Ilacia,  aJi'-the-a,  adv.,  toward,  towards.    L. 

19. 
Hallar,  cd-yar\  to  find.    L.  37. 
llambrc,    am'-bmi,   s.  f.,  hunger.— Tener 

harnbre,  to  be  hungry.    L.  25. 
Hasta,  ass'-ta,  adv.,  until,  till,  as  far  as, 

even.    L.  19. 
Hazmereir,  ath-mai-rai-eer' ,  8.  m.,  laughing- 
stock.   L.  50. 
He!  ai,  inter.,  ho!  what?  what  do  yoa 

say  ?    L.  41. 
Hecho,  ai'-cho,  s.  m.,  action,  foct.    L.  52. 
Ilelar,  ai-lar',  to  freeze.    L.  30. 
Helena,  ai-lai'-na,  s.  f.,  Helen,  Ellen.   L.  ID. 
Hcrmanastro,  air-mah-nass'-tro,  e.  m.,  aug., 

step-brother,  half-brother,    L.  49. 
Hermano,  air-rnah'-rio,  a.m.,  brother.    L.  0. 
Uermoso,  air-mo'so,  adj.,  beautiful,  hand- 
some.   L.  7. 
Hermosura,    air-mb-soo'-ra,    s.  f.,   beauty, 

handsomeness.    L.  53. 
Herrero,  air-rai'-ro,  s.  m.,  blacksmith.  L.  05. 
Ilielo,  yai'-lo,  s.  m.,  ice,  frost.    L.  30. 
Hicrro,  r/air'-ro,  s.  m.,  iron.    L.  01. 
Hi  go,  I'-go,  8.  ra.,  fig.    L.  40. 
Hijastro,  Z-hass'-tro,  s.  m.,  step-son.    L.  49. 
Hijo,  e'-no,  s.  m.,  son.    L.  0. 
Hilar,  e-lar\  to  spin.    L.  05. 
Hilo,  2'-to,  s.  m.,  thread.    L.  24. 
Ilincliar,  een.-char\  to  swell.    L.  53. 
Historia,  eess-tb'-re-a,  s.  f.,  history.    L.  15. 
Hoja,  5'-ha,  s.  f.,  leaf  (of  a  tree  or  a  book). 

L.  59. 
Hola  !  o'-la,  inter.,  hallo  I    I<.  48. 
HoIgazaUj  ole-gah-tJian' ,  adj.  and  s.  m.,  idle, 

lazy,  loitering ;  idler,  loiterer.    L.  0. 
Hombre,  ome'^rai,  s.  m.,  man.— Es  mas 

liomire  que  sn  hermano,  he  is  more  of  a 

man  than  his  brother.    L.  0. 
Honor,  o-nore\  s.  m..  honor.    L.  39. 
Honroso,  one-ro'-!v.  adj.,  honorable.    L.  52. 
Hora,  o'-ra,  s.  {.,  hour.    L.  23. 
Homo,  bre'-no, s.  m.,  oven.— Cocer  cnTiorno, 

to  bake.    L.  00. 
Horrendo,  bre-rain'-do,  adj.,  horrific  (poet.). 

L.  55. 
Hortelano,  bre-taUah'-m,  s.  m.,  gardener. 

L.  03. 
Hospital,  bce-pMal',  s.  m.,  hospital.    L.  47. 
Hotel,  b-tail\  s.  m.,  hotel.    L.  17. 
Hneso,  wai'-so,  a.  m.,  bone.— Bocado  sin 

niieso,  sinecure.    L.  01. 
Huespcd,  7oaii-9'-paid,  s.  m.,  guest,  host.— 

Echar  la  cuenta.  sin  la  Ivtespeda,  to  reckon 

without  the  host.    L.  63. 
Huir,  rveer,  to  flee,  to  make  off.    L.  34. 
Huniano,  oo-mnh'-no,  adj..  human.    L.  43. 
Humor,  oo-mbre'  s.  m.,  "humor,  wit.     L.  27. 


I. 

Idea,  ?-dn>:'-a.  s.  f.,  ideal.  L.  54. 
Ideal,  ?-dai-al\  adj.,  ideal.  L.  48. 


454 


VOCABULARY, 


Idioma,  l-d6-d'-ma,  s.  m.,  idiom,  language. 
L.  55. 

Idiota,  l-dl-d'-ta,  s.  m.,  idiot.    L.  48. 

ldioti»mo,  l-di-d-teesn'-iiio,  e.  m.,  idiom, 
form  of  expression  peculiar  to  a  language. 
L.  49. 

Iglesia,  e-glai'-si-a,  s.  f.,  church.    L.  16. 

Igaoraucia,  eeg-nO-ran'-the-a,  s.  f.,  igno- 
rance,   i,.  5-i. 

Iguorantc,  eeg-no-ran'-tai,  adj.,  ignorant. 
L.  61. 

Ignorar,  eeg-ruH-ar' ,  to  be  ignorant  of,  not 
to  know.    L.  6i. 

Igual,  e-gwal',  adj.,  equal,  alike,  like.  L.  43. 

Igualdad,  ^-qwal-daih' ,  s.  f.,  equality.  L.55. 

liusion,  e-loo-ne-one' ,  s.  f.,  illusion.    L.  43. 

Imaginiicion,  l-/nah-/iS->ia/t,-t/il-one',  s.  f., 
imagination.    L.  58. 

ImpeUir,  ecm-jmi-deer' ,  to  impede,  to  hinder. 
L.  43. 

Imperativo,  eem-pai-rdh-tl'-vo,  adj.  and  s. 
m.,  imperative,  imperative  mood.    L.  43. 

Imperfeccion,  eem-pair-faik-tM-one',  s.  f., 
imperfection.    L.  55. 

Imperfecto,  eein-pair-faik'-to,  adj.,  imper- 
fect.   L.  43. 

Impersonal,  eem-pairsd-nal',  adj.,  imper- 
Bonal.    L.  61. 

Imponcr,  eem-p^nair',  to  impose,  to  in- 
form, to  acquaint.    L.  44. 

Importante,  eem-pore-tan'-tai,  adj.,  impor- 
tant.   L.  38. 

Importar.  eem-pore-tar' ,  to  import,  to  be  of 
importance,  to  amount  to.    L.  31. 

Imposible,  eem-po-si'-blai,  adj.,  impossible. 
L.  31. 

Impreso,  eem-pral'-so,  past  part,  of  Ijipki- 
Min.    L.  61. 

Imprimir.  eem-prl-nieer\  to  print.    L.  CI. 

Improvisar,  eem-pro-ve-sar' ,  to  improvise, 
to  extemporise.    L.  53. 

Improviso.  eem-prd-rl'-fo. — De  impwviso, 
unexpectedly,  on  a  sudden.    L.  33. 

Imprudencia,  eem-proo-dain'-th'i-a,  s.  f.,  im- 
prudence.   L.  43. 

Imprudente,  eem-proo-dain'-tai,  adj.,  im- 
prudent.   L.  20. 

Impnesto,  eem-picaiss'-to,  past  part,  of  Im- 
POXER.    L.  52. 

In,  em.,  Latin  prop,  used  in  Rpmish  a?  a 
prefix  only,  and  generally  with  a  nega- 
tive signification.    L.  .50. 

Incendiar,  een-fhaen-dd-ar'.  to  kindle.    L.  51. 

Inclnir,  een-cloo-eer' ,  to  inclndo.    L.  40. 

Inc6modamente,  cm-W-mo-flah-mam-tai, 
adv.,  incommodion=ly,  iiJconveniently, 
uncomfortably.    L.  20. 

Incomodar,  e^n-l-^-md-dar',  to  incommode, 
to  put  out.    L.  47. 

InciJmodo,  cfn-W -mS-rlo,  adi..  incommodi- 
ous, inconvenient,  uncomfortable.    L.  SS. 

Inromplcto,  fen-Jcome-rjfai'-to,  adj.,  incom- 
plptp.    L.  4S.  .         • 

Inconveniente,  fn-idni'-vrii-n^-ain'-tai,  s. 
m.,  difBcnlty.  obstacle,  obiection.    L.  fit. 

Incrciblc,  een-JcraiS'-blai,  adj.,  incredible. 
L.  fil. 

Indoflnido,  fm-dai-fe-n?'-do,  adj.,  indefi- 
nite.   L.  61. 

Indejjendencia.  fin-dni-pnin-dain'-thl-a,  s. 
f .  independence.    L.  .^5. 

Indicativo,  fen-di-kah-i^'-vo,  adj.,  indica- 
Uve.    L.  4.3. 


Indice,  een'-di-thai,  s.  m.,  index.    L.  61. 

Indigno,  een-deeg'-iw,  adj.,  unworthy,  un- 
deserving.   L.  53. 

Indigo,  een'-di-go,  e.  m.   L.  54.   (See  ASil.) 

Indirecto,  eeu-dSi-aik'-to,  adj.,  indirect. 
L.  51. 

Individuo,  een-(.K-vl'-doo-d,  b.  m.,  individu- 
al, member  (of  academics,  universities, 
&c.).    L.  51. 

Industrioso,  een-doos-tre-o'so,  adj.,  indus- 
trious.   L.  fG. 

Inepto,  een-aip'-to,  adj.,  inept,  unfit.    L.  51. 

Inexplicable,  een-aiks-pti-kuh'-Uai,  adj.,  in- 
explicable.   L.  61. 

Infaucia,  een-fan'-thl-a,  s.  f.,  infancy.  L.  54. 

Inferior,  een-fai-rl-ore' ,  adj.,  inferior.  L.  21. 

Inlimo,  een'-fl->7w,  adj.,  lowest.    L.  21. 

Infinidad,  een-fl-ne-dat/i' ,  s.  f.,  infinity.  L. 
40. 

Inflnitivo,  een-fl-m-te'^o,  adj.,  infinitive. 
L.  43. 

Iniinito,  een-fk-ni' -to,  adj.,  infinite.    L.  89. 

Influir,  een-jloo-eer' ,  to  inlluence.    L.  48. 

Infortunio,  len-Jore-too' -rie-o,  s.  m.,  misfor- 
tune.   L.  41. 

Ingenio,  een-hai'-rii-Oy  s.  m.,  genius.    L.  61. 

Ingenioso,  eeii-hai-nl-d'so,  adj.,  ingenious. 
L.  01. 

Inglaterra,  een-glalL-tair'-ra,  s.  f.,  England. 
L.  9. 

Ingles,  een-glaiss',  s.  m.  and  adj.,  English. 
L.  2. 

Inicial,  ?-ne-(he-al',  adj.,  initial.    L.  56. 

Injusticia,  een-Jwoss-te' -tke-a,  s.  f.,  injustice. 
L.  45. 

Inmcdiato,  een-mai-di-ah'-to,  adj.,  immedi 
ate,  near,  next.    L.  61. 

Inmemorial,  een-mai-nid-re-al',  adj.,  imme- 
morial.   L.  55. 

Inocente,  S-nd-ihain'-iai,  adi.,  innocent. 
L.  .SI. 

Inqnietar,  een-kl-ai-tar' ,  to  make  uneasv. 
L.  61. 

Inqnieto.  een-ke-ai' -to,  adj.,  tmeasy,  restless. 
L.  61. 

Insecto,  eensaik'-fo.  s.  m..  insect.    L.  01. 

Inspirar,  eenx-pp-rar' .  to  inspire.    L.  .58. 

Instante,  eenx-tan'-fp.  s.  m..  instant.— Al 
instants,  immediately.    L.  42. 

Tnstinto.  eem-tcen'-to.  s.  m.,  instinct.  L.  fil. 

Instrnccion,  eens-frook  ihf-nne',  s.  f ,  in- 
struction, leaminor.    L.  52. 

Instniido,  efnxs>-froiyi' -do.  adj.,  instructed, 
learned,  educated.    L.  49. 

Instmir,  eens-troo-eer' .  to  instruct,  to  teach. 
L.  47. 

Instrnmento,  f^nx-iroo-main'-to,  e.  m.,  in- 
strument.   L.  fil. 

Infacbable,  efn-tnh-rhnh'-hlaL  adi.,  imim- 
pcachable,  irrepronchable.    L.  62. 

Intencion,  een-tain-thl-one' ,  s.  f.,  intention. 
L.  61. 

Intentar,  fen-tnin-tar',  to  attempt.    L.  61. 

Interes,  efn-tai-rn)j>x' .  p.  m..  intere«t.  L.  54. 

Interesantc.  een-tai-rai-san'-tai,  adj.,  inter- 
estin?.    L.  47. 

Interesar,  een-tai-rai-mr' ,  to  interest.  L. 
61. 

Interin.  een'-iai-reen,  adv.,  in  the  interim. 
L.  61. 

Interior,  een-tai-re-ore',  adj.,  interior.  L. 
48. 

Interior,  s.  m.,  interior.    L.  45. 


VOCABULARY. 


455 


Intcrjcccion,  een-tair-haik-thl-one' ,  s.  f.,  in- 
terjection.   L.  43. 

Inti-rrogaciou,  een-tair-r5-gah-tM-dne\  8.  f., 
iuterrogation.    L.  01. 

Interrogaiite,  ten-tuir-ro-gan'-tai,  s.m.,  note 
of  iniL-rrogation.  (Pres.  part,  of  Inter- 
liOGAR.)     L.  til. 

Interrogar,  een-tair-rd-gar',  to  interrogate, 
to  question.    L.  (il. 

Interrumpir,  ee)i-tair-room-j)eer\  to  inter- 
rupt.   L.  W. 

lutiuiiclad,  een-K^mS-dath'y  s.  f.,  intimacy. 
L.  50. 

Intimo,  een'-iS-mo,  adj.,  intimate.    L.  56. 

Intro'lucir,  een-trO-Uoo-t/ieer',  to  introduce. 
L.  10. 

Inutil,  een-oo'-ieel,  adj.,  useless.    L.  50. 

Invariable,  een-vuh-re-ah' -blai,  adj.,  invari- 
able.   L.  50. 

Inversion,  een-vairsl-one' ,  s.  f.,  inversion. 
L.  01. 

Invertir,  een-vair-ieer',  to  invert.    L.  61. 

luvicmo,  een-vi-air'-no,  a.  m.,  winter.  L. 
34. 

Invitar,  een-ve-/ar\  to  invite.    L.  56. 

Ir,  cer,  to  go.    L.  18. 

Iris,  I'-reess,  s.  f..  rainbow.    L.  61. 

Irlanda,  eer-lan'-da,  s.  f.,  Ireland.    L.  40. 

Irregular,  eer-rai-goo4ar' ,  adj.,  irregular. 
L.  43. 

Irregularidad,  eer-rai-goo-lah-rZ-dath' ,  s.  f., 
irregularity.    L.  55. 

Isabel,  isah-bail\  s.  f.,  Isabella,  Elizabeth. 
L.  55. 

Isla.  eei's'-la.  s.  f.,  island.    L.  61. 

Italia,  e-tah'-rs-a.  s.f.,  Italy.    L.  40. 

Italiano,  e-tah-le-ah'-no,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  Ital- 
ian.   L.  61. 

Izquierdo,  eeth-Jce-air'-do,  adj.,  left-handed. 
— Mano  izquierda,  left  hand.    L.  50. 


Jabon,  7iah-bone\  s.  m.,  soap.  L.  5.  _ 
Jamas,  hah-mass'.  adv.,  never.  L.  2o. 
Jaquo,  hah'-kaU  check  (at  chess).— ya<7T/e  y 

mate,  checkmate.    L.  42. 
.Tardin,  har-deen'.  s.  m.,  garden.    L.  18. 
Jardinero,  haT--d?-nai'-ro,  s.  m.,  gardener. 

L.  3). 
Joiso.  Jw-'aV,  s.  m.,  .To^oph.    L.  43. 
Joven,  ho'-rain,  adj.  and  s.  m.  and  f..  young; 

younc:  man,  yoniior  woman.   J^.  13. 
Jiian,  whan.  s.  m.,  John.    L.  17. 
Jnana,  wfiah'-na,  s.  f.,  Jane.    L.  17. 
Jup^o,  whai'-go,  s.  m.,  game,  play,  set.    L. 

61. 
.Tiievca.  n-hni'-raUs.  s.m.,  Thursday.    L.  9. 
.Tiiez.  irhaitfi.  p.  m..  judge.    L.  9. 
.Tn"nr.  hnn-nnr'.  to  plav.    L.  41. 
Jnirio.  irhZ'-iM-o.,  S.m.,  judgment,  sense, 

trial.    L.  .5.3. 
Julio.  7ioo'-f?-f>.  s.m.,  July,  (prop,  name) 

Julius.    L.  34. 
Jnnt.nr.  /lOon-tar',  to  join,  to  place  together. 

Junto,  Jioon'-fo,  adv.,  near,  close  to.    L.  39. 
Juramento,  hno-ra-main'-to,  s.  m.,  oath,  affi- 
davit.   L.  53.  ^   ^^ 
Jnsticia.  hon.iit-tc'-th'^-a.  s.  f.,  justice.    L.  61. 
Jiisto.  hoaos'-to.  adi.,  Inst,  ritiht.    L.  01. 
Juventud,  hoo-veti-tooth',  s.  f.,  vouth.    \.  48. 


La,  def.  art.  f.  sing.,  the.    L.  5. 
La,  pron.  f  sing.,  her,  ^.    L.  8. 
Laconico,  lah-kO'-nl-ko,  adj.,  laconic.    L.  3S. 
Laboriosidad,  lah-bo-re-o-ti-daih' ,  s.  f.,  in- 
dustry.   L.  51. 
Lacre,  lah'-krai,  s.  m.,  sealing-wax.    L.  5. 
Lado,  lak'-do,  s.  m.,  side.    L.  18. 
Ladron,  lah-drone\  s.  m.,  thief.    L.  44. 
Lago,  lah'-go,  s.  m.,  lake.    L.  40. 
Liigrima,  lah' -grl-ma^  s.  f.,  tear..    L.  51. 
Liipiz,  lah'-peeth,  s.  m.,  pencil.    L.  51. 
Largo,  lai-'-gOy  adj..  long.— iar^'o  tienipo.  a 
long  time.— A  lo  largo,  alongside.    L.  21. 
Lastima,  laes'-tl-ma,  8.  f..  pity.    L.  25. 
Lastimar,  lass-te-mar' ,  to  hurt,  to  wound, 

to  oflend.    L.  01. 
Latin,  iah-Uen',  s.  m.,  Latin.    L.  61. 
Latinajo,  lah-ll-nah' -Iu>,  8.  m.  ang.,  Dog- 
Latin.    L.  49. 
Latitud,  la/i-tZ-tcoth',  b.  f.,  width,  latitude. 

L.61. 
Lavandera,  lah-van-dai'-ra,  s.  f.,  washer- 
woman.   L.  5. 
Lavar,  lah-rar\  to  wash.    L.  24. 
Le,  lai,  pron.,  him.  it ;  to  him,  to  it.    L.  10. 
Lfccion,  laik-the-one' ,  s.  f ,  lesson.    L.  8. 
Leclie,  lai'-cfiai,  s.  f.,  milk.    L.  7. 
Lectura,  laik-(oo'-ra,  s.  f ,  reading.    L.  88 
Leer,  lai-air',  to  read.    L.  7. 
Legna,  lai'-gua,  s.  f.,  league.    L.  61. 
Lcido,  lai-e  -do,  adj. — Hombre  bien  Itido,  a 
well-read  man.   (Past  pt.  of  Leer.)    L.  52. 
Lejos,  lai'-hoce,  adv.,  far  ofl".— A  lo  Itjos,  in 

the  distance.    L.  31. 
LcniTua,  lain'-gwa,  s.  f.,  tongue,  lanc:Haffe. 

L.""23. 
Lengnage,  lain-g7ra'-hau  s.  m.,  language, 

manner  of  speaking  or  writing.    L.  CO. 
Lento,  lain'-to,  adj.,  slow,  tardy.    L.  61. 
Leon,  lai-one',  s.  m.,  lion.    L.  54. 
Lctra,  lai'-tra,  s.  f.,  letter  (character),  hand- 
writing, letter  (of  credit) ;  pi.,  letters,  lite- 
rature.'—Bellas  ktras.  Belles-lettres.     L. 
61. 
Levantar,  lai-ran-(ar' ,  to  raise,  to  lift  up.— 

LerantaTse,  to  rise,  to  get  up.    L.  S3. 
Levita,    lai-re'-(a,   s.  ni.,  Lc\ilc.—Leii/a, 

8.  f.,  frocli-coat.    L.  61. 
Ley.  lai'-S,  s.  f ,  law.    L.  S. 
Liberal,  U-bai-ial',  adj..  liberal.    L.  62. 
Libcrtad,  R-lair-tath',  s.  f,  liberty.    L.  40. 
Libra,  li'-bra,  s.  f ,  pound.— i?i;a  cstcriiua, 

pound  sterlinsr.    L.  47. 
Librar.  le-brar',  to  free,  to  deliver:  (com- 
mercial) to  draw.    L.  45. 
Libre.  R'-brai.  adj.,  flree.    L.  59. 
Librerfa,  U-hrai-re'-a,  s.  f ,  bookstore,  book- 
seller's shop,  book-trade.    L.  11. 
Librcro.  U-hrai'-ro,  s.m.,  bookseller.  L.  II. 
Ltbro.  /2'-&/o,  s.  m..  book.    L.  4. 
Li-ero,  n-hnV-ro^  adj.,  hght,  ^wift.-A  la 

/i>rff,  litrhtlv.    L.  40.  . 

Liniosna,  U-mocfi'-na,  s.  f,  alms.    L.  oi. 
Limpiar.  Uem-pS-ar'.  to  clean.    L-  '^: 
Limpicza.  leein-pS-ai' -tha,  s.  f.,  cleanliness. 
L.  61.  ,       ,       T 

Limpio,  kem'-pS-o,  adj.,  clean,  cleanly,    l. 

20. 
Linea.  /?'  /?flr?'-^.  s.  f.,  line.    L.  61. 
Lisbon,  l(fss-bu'-a.  s.  f.,  Lisbon.     L.  S.?. 
Lisonja,  le-oone'-hxi,  s.  f,  flattery.    L.  61. 


456 


„V  OC  ABUL  A  R  Y. 


Lisonjear,  lS-sd>U-hai-ar',  to  flatter.    L.  61. 
Lisoujcro,    le-i<5ne-kai'-w,   adj.  aud  s.  m., 

flattering,  flatterer^  L.  01. 
Lista,  leess'-ta,  s.  f..  list.    L.  61. 
Listo,  leess'-to,  adj.nready,  sharp,  quick.  L. 

46. 
Literate,  tS-tai-rah' -to,  8.  m.,  man  of  letters, 

literatas.    L.  51. 
Literatura,  U-t(U-}-ah-too' -m,  8.  f.,  literature. 

L.  53. 
Litro,  W-tro,  s.  m.,  litre.    L.  60. 
L'j,  art.  neut.,  tlie.     (See  explanations  in 

Lesson  8.) 
Lo,  pron.,  it,  (and  sometimes)  him.    L.  26. 
Local,  ld-kal\  adj.,  local.    L.  51. 
Loco,  Id'-ko,  adj..  mad.— A  toatas  y  a  loca% 
inconsiderately,  without  reiiectioa.  L.  61. 
Loco,  s.  ni.,  madman.    L.  61. 
Lodo,  lo'-'iy,  s.  m.,  mad,  mire.    L.  45. 
Lojrar,  Id-grar',  to  succaed,  to  obtain.    L. 

:5. 
L6ndres,  Idne'-draiss,  s.  m.,  London.    L.  12. 
Lon^itud,  VjnB-lii-looth\  s.  f.,  length,  longi- 
tude.   L.  61. 
Loteria,  lo-tal-r'S'-a,  a.  f.,  lottery.    L.  63. 
I.ucir,  loo-tfisir',  to  shine,  to  glitter.    L.  65. 
LueT;o,  loo-ai'-go,  adv.,  by  and  by,  imiusdi- 

ately ;— conj.,  then,  tlierefore.    L.  3  J. 
Lu|ar,  loj-grtr',  s.  m.,  place,  village. — Ea 

lujar  de,  instead  of.    L.  2). 
Luis,  loo-esii',  s.  m.,  Lewis,  Louis.    L.  15. 
Luisa,  loo-S'-sa,  s.  1'.,  Louisa.    L.  3. 
Luna,  loo'-na,  s.  f.  maon.    L.  61. 
Luto,  loo'-lx),  s.  m.,  m3'.irnlug.    L.  01 
Luz,  looth,  8.  f.,  li^ht.— Dar  a  las,  to  pub- 
lish, to  give  birth  to.    L.  01. 


liL. 

Llamir.  liji\-mv\  to  call,  1 1  know.    L.  27. 

Llave,  lyah'-vaU  s.  f.,  key.    L.  5). 

Lle.;ar.  li/ai-gar',  to  attivs.—Llejar  a  ser,  to 

becoma.    L.  3T. 
Llenar,  lyai-iiar\  to  fill,  to  fiilfll.    L.  51. 
Lleno,  lijal'-no,  adj.,  full.    L.  51. 
Llevar.  li/ai-var',  to  take,  to  carry,  to  bear, 

to  briuj  forth.    L.  11. 
Llorar,  ly^-rar',  to  cry,  to  weep.    L.  51. 
Lloro,  lyij'-ro,  a.  m.,  tear,  act  of  crying.    L. 

51.  " 

Llover.  lijo-vair',  to  min.—Llover  d  cantar- 

ros,  to  pour.    L.  31 
Lloviznar.  lyfhveeth-nar' .  to  drizzle.    L.  30. 
Llavia,  lyoo'-vl-a,  s.  f.,  rain.    L.  30 


Macho.  mT,\'-cli'),  &.  m.,  male  (of  animals), 
mule.    L.  62.         i 

Madera,  mQ.h-dai' -m,  s.  f.,  wood,  timber, 
lumber.    L.  4.       ' 

Madrastra.  ?;i3,'i.(f;.45'.;;.a,  s.  f ,  Btep-moth- 
er.    JL,  4!). 

Madre    mah'-draU  s.'f..  mother. -Lengua 

p  Hi.a!;/re,  an  orijrinal  language.    L.  6. 
•"*J^'}rid.  mih-drei'fk' .  s.  m..  Madrid.    L.  12. 

MainlcJlo,  viih-'^lr?Anin'-yo,  s.  m..  Madrile- 
nian,  native  of  Madrid.     L.  49. 

uMadrn^Tida.  mnh-droo-gah'-da,  s.  f,  that 
part  of  the  night  from  12  r.  m.  until  sun- 
ns 3.    L.  03. 


Madrngar,  mah-divo-gar\  to  rise  very  early. 
L.  02. 

Madurez,  mah-doo-raith' ,  s.  f.,  maturity, 
ripeness.    L.  51. 

Maestro,  mah-ains' -tro,  b.  m.,  master,  teach- 
er.   L.  62. 

Magnilico,  iiw.g-n'&'-fl-ko,  ac^j.,  magnificent. 
L.  58. 

Mai,  8.  m.,  evil,  harm,  disease.    L.  48. 

Mai,  adv.,  badly.— J/ai  de  su  grado,  in  spite 
of  him.    L.  3. 

Maldito,  mcU-de'-to,  adj.,  accursed,  perverse. 
L.  02. 

Malicia,  tnah-R' -t/ie-a,  s.  f.,  malice,  wicked- 
ness.   L.  02. 

Malo,  mah'-lo,  adj.,  bad,  ill,  wicked. — Estar 
moto,  to  be  sick. — ber  malo,  to  be  bad,  to 
be  wicked.    L.  7. 

Mamii,  7uah-ma',  s.  f.,  mamma.    L.  5. 

Mandar,  man-dar',  to  send,  to  command,  to 
order.    L.  17. 

Manera,  maJi-nai'-ra,  8.  f.,  manner.— De 
tna/iera  que,  so  as,  so  that.    L.  42. 

Mania,  ma/i-ne'-a,  e.  {.,  mania,  whim.  L.  57. 

Manifestar,  inah-iH-faiss-tar',  to  manifest, 
to  show.    L.  51. 

Mauiflesto,  mah-ne-fi-aiss'-io,  adj.,  mani- 
fest.   L.  52. 

Mano,  mall' -no,  s.  f.,  hand,  quire  (of  paper). 
— Venir  con  sus  maims  lavadas,  to  wish 
to  enjoy  the  fruit  of  another's  labor.  L. 
23. 

Manteca,  man-tai'-ka,  s.  f.,  butter,  lard 
(South  America).    L.  02. 

Manteqiiilla,  man-tai-keel' -ya,  6.  f.,  butter 
(South  America),  lard.    L.  62. 

Manuel,  mak-?ioo-aW,  s.  m.,  Emanuel.  L.  2. 

Manuscrito,  muh-nooss-kre'^-to,  s.  m.,  manu- 
script.   L.  02. 

Manzana,  7nan-(hah'-na,  s.  f.,  apple,  block 
(of  houses).    L.  31. 

Manzanar,  man-thah-nar',  s.  m.,  apple-or- 
chard.   L.  49. 

Mafiana,  man-yah'-na.  s.  f.,  morning,  to- 
morrow.—Pasado  manana,  the  day  after 
to-morrow.     L.  30. 

Mar,  8.  m.  and  f.,  sea.— Qnicn  no  se  arries- 
ga  no  pasa  la  T»ar,  faint  heart  never  won 
fair  lady.    L.  02. 

Marca,  mar'-lri,  s.  f.,  mark,  brand.    L.  42. 

Marcha,  mar'-cha.  s.  f..  march.— Sobre  la 
vmrc/ia,  olT-hand,  on  the  spot.    L.  51. 

Marchar,  mar-char',  to  march.    L.  19. 

Alargarita,  mar-gak-?e'-ta,  s.  f.,  Jlargaret. 

Maria,  mah-re'-a.  s.  f.,  Marv.    L.  44. 
Maries,  mar'-fai^s,  s.  m..  Tnesdav.    L.  9. 
Marzo,  mar'-tho,  s.  m..  March.    L.  24. 
Mas.  »;i«.«,  adv.,  more.— J/as  que  (or  de), 

more  than.    I,.  16. 
Mascara,  mms'koh-rrr.  s.  f.,  mask.    L.  60. 
Mascnliuo,  mass-koo-li'-no,  adj.,  masculine. 

L.  47. 
Matar.  mah-tar'.  to  kill.    L.  4i. 
Matematico,     mnh-tni-mah'-le-kn.     p.    in., 

mathematician;  adj.,  mathematical.    L. 

60. 
Materia,  mah-lai'-re-a,  s.  f,  matter,  subject. 

affair.    L.  54. 
Material,  mah-tai-real',  adj..  material.    L. 

48. 
Materiali.Bfa,  m.n7i-fai-rhaJi-leess'4^.,  b.  m., 

materialist.    L.  36. 


VOCABULAKY. 


457 


Matrimonio,  niah-irS-md'-ni-o,  s.  m.,  matri- 
mony, wedlock,  marriage.    L.  64. 

MauUiUo,  }iut/i-ooi-y£'-do,  s.  m.,  mew  (of  a 
cat).    L.  40. 

Maximo,  mak' -ge-mo,  adj.  (superlative  of 
UKA^•DE},  chief,  uriucipal,  vei-y  great. 
L.  -.il. 

Mayo,  mah'-yo,  s.  m.,  May.    L.  34. 

Mayor,  viah-yore',  adj.,  greater,  larger.— 
i.1  iiiaycn;  tiie  greatest,  the  largest.  L.  20. 

Mayuscula,  ma/i-i/ooss'-JMO-la,  aaj.,  capital 
(said  of  letters).    L.  02. 

Me,  7nai,  pron.,  me,  to  me.    L.  26. 

Meca,  iimi'-ka,  s.  f. — De  zeca  en  meca,  item 
pillar  to  post,  to  and  fro.    L.  01. 

Media,  rnai'-dl-a,  s.  f ,  stocking.    L.  10. 

Medlanamente,  mai<[i-aJi-nah-main'-tai, 
adv.,  middling.    L.  39. 

Mediania,  mai-ul-ali-ne' -a,  s.  f.,  mediocrity, 
moderation.    L.  53. 

Modiauo,  mai-di-ah'-nOy  adj.,  medium,  mid- 
dling, moderate.    L.  39. 

Medico,  mai'-di-ko,  s.  m.,  physician.    L.  19. 

Mcdida,  mai-dl'-da,  s.  f.,  measure.    L.  55. 

Medio,  mai'-de-o,  adj.,  'hsM.—Medwd.in,  mid- 
day, noon.— J/crZ/ffnoche.  midnight.  L.  30. 

Medio,  s.  m.,  middle,  means. — Por  medio 
dc.  bv  means  of.    L.  37. 

Mcdiocfia,  mai-dl-o-dl'-a,  e.  m.,  noon,  mid- 
day, south.    L. -80. 

Medir,  mai-deei^,  to  measure.    L.  39. 

Mcjicano,  mat  he-kah'-no,  s.  m.  and  adj.. 
Mexican.    L.  47. 

Mcjico,  mai'-fu-ko,  s.  m.,  Mexico.    L.  20. 

Mejor,  mai-hore',  adj.  and  adv.,  better. 
—El  mejor,  the  best.    L.  20. 

Melocotoa,  maild-kd-tone',  s.  m.,  peach.  L. 
31. 

Melon,  mailone',  s.  m.,  melon.    L.  31. 

Mcmoria,  inai-mo'-re-a,  s.  f.,  memory,  re- 
collection.—Aprender  dc  memcn'lay  to 
learn  by  heart.    L.  38. 

Memorias,  7nai-mo-rS-as,  e.  f.  pi.,  my  com- 
pliments.   L.  39. 

Mcncion,  main-lhl-one'.  s.  f.,  mention.  L. 
52. 

Mencionar,  main-the-o-nar' ,  to  mention.  L. 
45. 

Mcnestcr,  mai-naiss-tair' ,  s.  m.,  need,  want, 
necessity. — Ser  menester,  to  be  necessary ; 
must.— Haber  menesttr,  to  want,  to  re- 
quire.   L.  30. 

Menor,  mai-nure',  adj..  less,  smaller,  minor, 
younger:  s.  m.,  minor.    L.  20. 

Menos.  mai'-noce,  adv..  less. — A  lo  menos, 
at  least.— Ni  mas  mi  minos,  neither  more 
nor  less.    L.  10. 

Menoscabo,  mai-noce-kah'-lo.  e.  m.,  deteri- 
oration, detriment,  prejudice,  diminu- 
tion.   L.  02. 

Meno'^precio.  mai-niire-jrrai'-tM-n.  p.  m., 
contcmnt.  scorn.— Mncha  familiaridad  cs 
cansa  de  meno^pi'fin.  much  familiarity 
breeds  contempt.    L.  0,5. 

"'•fonte.  mofn'-fai.  s.  f..  mind.    L.  C2. 

Mfntir.  mn/n-U^r'.  to  lie.    L.  45. 

:Mcnudo.  mm-noty-do.  adj..  small,  slender, 
mean.— A  tufm/do.  often.    L.  25. 

Mcqtietrcfc.  maikni-trai'-fai,  s.  m.,  trifler, 
iarkanapes.    L.  0.3. 

Mcrcndor.  mair  kah-dair' .  8.  m.,  dealer, 
trader,  shopkeeper.    L.  52. 

Mercado,  mair-kaJi'-do,  s.  m.,  market.  L  17. 

20 


Mercantil,  mair-kan-ted' ,  adj.,  mercantile. 
L.  50. 

Merecer,  m<ti-rai-Uiair' ,  to  merit,  to  de- 
serve.   L.  52. 

Meremlar,  mai-rcurv-dar' .  to  lunch.    L.  34. 

Meridiano,  tnai-ie-di-ah'-na,  s.  m.,  merid- 
ian.   L.  02. 

Merino,  mui-re'-no,  8.  m.,  merino  (sort  of 
Spanish  sheep).    L.  40. 

Mento,  vmi'-r'e-tOy  s.  m.,  merit.    L.  55. 

Mes,  maiss,  s.  m.,  month. — Al  wife',  by  the 
month.    L.  10. 

Mesa,  mai'-^a,  s.  f.,  table.    L.  14, 

Metal,  mai-tal\  s.  m.,  metal.    L.  62. 

Meter,  mni-tair',  to  put,  to  ylace.— Meter 
nildo,  to  make  noise.    L.  40. 

Met6dico,  mai-to'-de-ko,  adj.,  methodical. 
L.  35. 

Jletodo,  mai'-todo.  s.  m.,  method.    L.  47. 

Metropoli,  mai-tro'  po-tS,  s.  f.,  metropolis. 
L.  51. 

Mi,  ml,  pron.,  me.    L.  25. 

Jli,  poss.  pron.,  my.    L.  5. 

Miedo,  ml-ai'-dOy  s.  f.,  fear. — Tener  viiedo, 
to  be  afraid.    L.  25. 

Mlel,  mZ-aU',  s.  f.,  honey.    L.  05. 

Miembro,  mi-aiin'-bro,  s.  m.,  member,  limb. 
L.  62. 

Aliercoles,  mS-air'-ko-laiss,  s.  m.,  Thursday. 
L.  9. 

Mil,  7n€el,  num.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  a  thousand, 
one  thousand.    L.  14. 

Milla,  med'-ya.  s.  f.,  mile.    L.  62. 

Millar,  meel-yar\  s.  m.,  the  number  of  a 
thousand,  thousand.    L.  40. 

Millon,  med-yoia' ,  num.  adj.  and  s.  m..  mil- 
lion.— MUtones  de  pesos,  millions  of  dol- 
lars.   L.  40. 

Mineral,  me-nai-ral\  e.  m.,  mineral.    L.  62. 

Miniiscula,  rne-nooce'-koo-la,  adj..  small 
(said  of  letters),  as  opposed  to  capital. 
L.  02. 

Minuto,  me-noo'-to.  8.  m.,  minute.    L.  2-3. 

Mio,  mia,  »je'-5,  ml' -a,  poss.  pron.  and  poss. 
adj..  mine.  (As  a  poss.  adj.,  mio  is  al- 
ways placed  after  the  substantive.)  L.  1.3. 

Mirar,  me-rar'.  to  look,  to  look  at,  to  ob- 
ser\c.    L.  29. 

Mismo.  mfess'-mo.  adj..  same,  self,  self- 
same.—El  mismo,  he  himself.    L.  27. 

Mitad.  me-(ath'.  s.  f .  half    L.  40. 

Moda,  mo'da.  e.  f .  fashion.    L.  25. 

Modelo,  mo-dai'-lo,  s.  m.,  model.    L.  55. 

Moderacion.  md-dai-ra/t-lhe-one',  s.  f.,  mod- 
eration.   L.  05. 

Modomo.  mo-dair'-vc,  adj..  modern.    L.  ."2. 

Modiflcar,  mo-de-/e-kar\  to  modify.    L.  Ot 

Modismo,  mo-deesx'-mo.  s.  m.,  pecnliar 
manner  of  expressing  the  fsme  ideas 
in  the  same  language.    L.  64. 

Modo,  mo'-do.  s.  m..  mode,  manner.- Dc 
ningnn  modo.  by  no  means.— De  77Wdo 
que.  so  that.    L.  42. 

Molestar,  viMa/.<<s-tar'.  to  molest,  to  dis- 
turb, to  trouble.    L.  43. 

Moraento,  md-77iain'-lo.  s.  m..  moment.  L. 
02. 

Mona,  mo'-na.  s.  f..  female  monkey.- Ann- 
que  la  mona  se  vista  de  seda.  'mona  se 
queda,  a  hog  in  armor  is  still  but  a  hog. 
L.  f«. 

Monarqnico.  mo-nar'-khko,  adj..  mcoorchi- 
cal.    L.  35. 


458 


V  O  C  A  D  U  L  A  K  Y  . 


iloneda,  md-nai'-da,  s.  f.,  money,  coin.— 

Tupul  nioneUa,  paper  money.    L.  55. 
Momar,  moM-tar'.  lo  mount,  to  ascend,  to 

ride  ion  horseback).    L.  02. 
Moui^roz,  moiit-lak-ratk' ,  adj.,  mountain, 

wild.    L.  51. 
MonlQ,  in6iie''laly  s.  m.,  mountain.— J/o/ite 

de  piedad,  pawn-ofiice.    L.  40. 
Morder,  vwrt-Uair' ,  to  bite,  to  nip.- No  se 

viutrde  los  labios,  he  speaks  out  his  mind. 

L.  30. 
Moribundo,  nw-rhboon'-do,  adlj.,  dying.    L. 

47. 
Morir,  mo-reer',  to  die.    L.  41. 
jMosca,  moce'-ka,  s.  f.,  ily.    L.  44. 
llostrar,  moce-trar\  to  ehow.    L.  35. 
Motivo,  md-tS'-vo,  s.  m.,  motive.    L.  &4. 
Mover,  iTiO-vair',  to  move.    L.  36. 
ilozo,  mo'-tho,  e.  m.,  youth,  young  man, 

waiter.    L.  62. 
Sluchacha,  moo-cJiaJi'-cha,  b.  f.,  girl.    L.  6. 
iluchacho,  moo-chak'-clto,  8.  m.,  boy.    L.  6. 
Mucho,  vwo'-cho,  adj.  and  adv.,  much,  a 

great  deal,  very.    L.  8. 
Mlidable,     moo-'dah' -Idai,     adj.,     mutable, 

changeable,  fickle.    L.  49. 
Mudar,  ■moo-dai-'^  to  change. — Mudarse,  to 

move  (from  one  place  to  another).    L.  02. 
Muela,  moo-ai'-la,  s.  f.,  back  tooth.— Dolor 

de  muelas,  toothache.    L.  50. 
Muerte,  nwo-air'-tai,  s.  f.,  death.    L.  38. 
Mucrto,  tnoo-air'-to,  past  part,  (of  Mokik), 

dead,  killed.    L.  52. 
lluestra,  nwo-aiss' -ira,  b.  f.,  8ample,  sign. 

L.  62. 
Miijer,  moo-liair',  e.  f,  woman,  wife.    L.  0. 
Multitud,  nwd-a-tooUi',  8.  f.,  multitude.    L. 

40. 
Mundo,  mcon'-do,  s.  m.,  world.— Todo  el 

mundo,  everybody.    L.  35. 
Murmaracion,  moor-moo-rah-th'i-Sne' ,  s.  f., 

murmuring,  backbitins.    L.  62. 
Mnrmnrar,  moor-moo-rar',  to  murmur,  to 

backbite.    L.  62. 
Miisco,  moo-fai'-o,  s.  m.,  museum.    L.  51. 
!Musica,  7noo'-se-Aa,  8.  f.,  music.    L.  15. 
Slijsico,  moo's^-ko,  s.  m.,  musician.    L.  15. 
Muy,  nioo'-i,  very.    L.  6. 


N. 

Kacer,  nah-thair\  to  be  horn.— Kacer  dc 
pies,  to  be  bom  to  good  luck.    L.  02. 

Nacion,  nah-ihl-one',  s.  f..  nation.    L.  24. 

Kada,  nali'-da.  adv.,  in  no  degree.— i\'ada 
ni^'nos,  nothing  le??.    L.  11. 

Xada,  8>f..  nothing,  nonentity.    L.  11. 

Nadar,  naJi-dar'.  to  sAvim.    L.  53. 

Nadie,  vah'-<ti-ai,  ind.  pron.,  nobody,  no 
nno.    L.  11. 

?« 'ipolrr-,  nah'-pMahx.  s.  f.,  ?'aples.    Tj.  47. 

Varania.  nal>-ran'hn^  e.  f..  oransrc.    L.  31. 

Natiiml,  vnh-too-raV,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  natu- 
ral :  n.ntive.    L.  44. 

Natnralcza,  vali-too-rah-lai'-tha,  b.  f.,  na- 
ture.   L.  40. 

Naturalista.  vah-too-rdk-leess'-ta,  s.  m.,  na- 
turalist.   I,.  ?f,. 

Navarra,  nah-rar'-ra,   8.  f.,  N.ivarre.     L. 

Nnvarro,  vnh-rnr'-TO.  e.  m.,  Navarrcse  (na- 
t  i  vc  of  Navan-e).    L.  55. 


Navegacion,  nah-vai-gah-thlSne' ,  b.  £,  navi- 
gation.   L.  24. 

Navidad,  nah-ve-da(h\  s.  f.,  nativity,  Christ- 
mas.   L.  43. 

Navio,  nah-ie'-o.  s.  m.,  ship.    L.  53.    . 

Necesario,  tiai-lhai-t>ah'-r'e-d,  adj.,  necc=- 
sarj-.    L.  27. 

Necesidad,  nai-thal-se-dalh' ,  s.  f.,  necessity 
need,  want.    L.  44. 

Necesitar,  nai-tUai-ie-tar',  to  be  necessary 
to  necessitate,  to  require,  to  want,    L.  5*. 

Necio,  jiai'-the-o,  adj.  and  s.  m.  foolish  • 
fool.    L.  05.  '  ' 

Ncfas,  nai'-Jass.—Tor  fas  6  por  nefas,  right 
or  wrong.    L.  63. 

Negacion,  nai-ga/t-(/ti-one',  e.t-  negation. 
L.  62. 

Negar,  nai-gar',  to  deny,  to  refuse.    L.  34. 

Kegativa,  nai-gah-ll'-va,  s.  f.,  negation,  neg- 
ative, refusal.    L.  62. 

Negligente,  nal-gle-liain'-tal,  a^.,  negli- 
gent.   L.  CO. 

Kegocio,  nai-gd'-tlil-c,  e.  m.,  business, 
aiiair,  matter.    L.  27. 

Kegro,  nai'-gro,  s.-  m.  and  adj.,  negro :  black. 
L.  62. 

Keutro,  rtai'-co-tro,  adj,,  neuter.    L.  C2. 

Kevar,  nai-rar',  to  snow.    L.  SO. 

Ki,  «?,  conj..  nehhcr,  nor. — Si  mas  ni  me- 
nos,  neither  more  nor  less.    L.  8. 

Nieve,  nt-ai'-rai,  s.  f.,  snow.    L.  30. 

Isinguno,  neen-gco'-no,  pron.,  no  one,  no- 
body.— A'ingvna  cosa,  nothing.    L.  11. 

Nifia,  neen'-ya,  s.  f.,  little  girl,  young  girl, 
maiden.    L.  17. 

Niiio,  necn'-yo,  e.  m.,  child,  in&nt.    L.  17. 

Ko.  adv.,  no,  not.    L.  1. 

Koble,  no'-ltai,  adj.,  noble.    L.  62. 

Koblcza,  7id-Uai'  tka,  s.  f.,  nobleness,  no- 
bility.   L.  55. 

Noche,  no'-chai,  e.  f..  evening,  night.— Bue- 
nas  i,cc/ies.  good  evening,  good  nitht.— 
;^  Aoche  buena,  Christmas  eve. — Aucche, 
last  night.    L.  23. 

Nombrar,  nome-lrar'.,  to  ncme,  to  appoint. 
L.  48. 

Nombre,  ncnie'-drai,  s.  m..  name,  noun.— 
Sombre  propio,  proper  name,  picper 
noun.    L.  40. 

Nominativo,  no-mt-nah-il'-xo.,  s.  m.,  ncnU- 
native.    L.  C2. 

Nono.     (See  Koveno.)    L.  15. 

No  obstante,  vo-ohc-ftan'-iai,  adv.,  never- 
theless, notwithstanding,  however.  L.  54. 

Norte,  nore'-tai,  s.  ni.,  north.    L.  £2. 

Nos,  nCce,  pers.  pron.,  ns.  to  ns.    L.  26. 

Nosotros,  nuso'-lroce,  pron.,  we,  ourEclvcs. 

L.  1.  ^    ^ 

Nota,  n5'-/ff.  F.  f.,  Eote.    L,.62. 
Notar.  no-tar',  to  note,  to  obscne.    L.  K. 
Noticia,  Po./?'.thc-a,  s.  f.,  notice,  news ;  pi., 
news.    L.  27.  '   ,     •     „     r    jk 

Notcrio,  no-lo'-ff-a.  ^^i-^'I^^.^^X^m  k6\' 
NovecicntoP.  vd-rri-/hS-ain'-loce,  num.  aoj., 

nine  hundred.    L.  14.  i,„  imiil.ip 

Kovcilad,  nd-vai-dath',  s.f.,  novelty,  txoubic. 

Novela,  nd-rai'-la,  s.  f. ,  novel,  romance.  L. 

Nov'cro,    y^-rnt'-ro,    crd.  adj.  and  b.  ™.. 

ninth.    L.  15.  j,        i     *       t 

Noventa,  nO-valn'-ta,  num.  cdj.,  nircty.   - 

14. 


VOCABULAEY. 


459 


Noviembre,  nd-rl-aim'-brai,  s.  m.,  Novem- 
ber.   L.  34. 
Nue.4ro,  no>aiss'-tro,  poss.  pron.,  our,  ours. 

L.  1:5. 
Kueva,   noo-ai'-ra,   a.  f.,  news   (generally 

used  in  the  pi).    L.  60. 
Nueva  York,  Jioo-ai'-va,  s.  f.,  New  York. 

L.  9. 
Nueve,  noo-ai'-vai.  num.  adj.,  nine.    L.  14. 
Nuevo,  noo-ai'-vo,   adj.,    new.— De  iiuevo, 

auew.    L.  31. 
Nuez,  noo-aith'.  s.  f.,  walnut.    L.  40. 
Numeral,  noo-maz-ral' ,  tulj.,  numeral.    L. 

14. 
Numero,  noo'-mai-ro,  s.  m.,  number.— i  Que 

numero  tienc  su  casa  de  V'.  ?  what  is  the 

number  of  your  house  ?    L.  14. 
Nunca,  noon'-ka,  adv.,  never.    L.  25. 


O,  conj.,  or,  either.    L.  8. 

O  !  inter.,  oh  !    L.  30. 

Ohedeccr,  d-bai-dai-thair' ,  to  obey.    L.  43. 

Objetivo,  Obe-hai-ie'-vOy  adj.  and  s.  m.,  ob- 
jective.   L.  62. 

Objcto,  obe-hai'-to,  s.  m.,  object.    L.  48. 

Obli^acion,  o-bCH-gah-lM-diie' ,  s.  f.,  obliga- 
tion, duty.    L.  31. 

Obli:,'ar,  o-bli-gar',  to  oblige,  to  force,  to 
compel.    L.  61. 

Obra,  o'-bra,  s.  f.,  work  (anything  made,  as 
a  book,  a  house,  &c.).    L.  15. 

Ohrar,  o-brar\  to  work,  to  act,  to  operate. 
L.  10. 

Observar,  obe-sair-var' ,  to  observe,  to  re- 
mark.   L.  43. 

Obstante,  obeslan'-tai,  present  part.— No 
oMan!e.    (See  no  obstante.)    L.  54. 

Obvio,  dbc-'rd-o.  adj..  ob\ious.    L.  43. 

Ocasiou,  u-kali-'ii-une',  s.  f.,  occasion,  oppor- 
tunity.— Tomar  \a.ocafioii  por  los  cabellos, 
to  take  time  by  the  forelock.    L.  .30. 

Occidente,  uke-(/iS-dain'-lai,  s.  m.,  the  west. 
L  51.  s 

Ocheuta,  ochain'-ta,  num.  adj.,  eighty.    L. 

Ocho,  o'<ho,  num.  adj.,  eight.    L.  14. 
Ochocientos,  o-cko-thi-cufi'-loce,  num.  adj., 

ei,'ht  hundred.    L.  11. 
Octavo,  6ke-(a/i'-ro,  ord.  adj..  eighth.— En 

octavo,  8vo.    L.  15. 
Octubre,  oke-too' -drai,  s.  m.,  October.    L 

34. 
Ocultar,  5  A'oo/-ter',  to  hide.    L.  43. 
Oculto,  d-kool'-(o,  adj..  hidden.    L.  53. 
Ocupacion,  dkoo-pah-lhii-bne',  e.  f.,  occupa- 
tion, business,  concern.    L.  54. 
Ooupar,  okoo-par',  to  occupy,  to  engao-e,  to 

nil  (a  post).    L.  47. 
Oourrir,  o-koor-reer' ,  to  occur,  to  strike.— 

Le  ocurre  una  idea,  an  idea  strikes  him. 

L.  63. 
OL-ste,  o-am'-lai,  s.  m.,  west.    L.  51. 
Of^Mider,  o-^fain-dair',  to  offend.    L.  37. 
Oiicio,    o-te-lhl-o,    s.  m.,   office,   employ, 

trade.    L.  38.  -        f    j. 

Ofrecer.  o-frai-thair'.  to  offer     L.  49. 
Oido,  v-e'-do,  s.  ra.,  hearincr.  car.— Ilablar  al 

Ohio,  to  whisper  in  one's  ear.    L.  61. 
Oir,  d-ecr\  to  hear.— Ojya  /  just  listen !    L. 


Ojala !  dhah-la',  inter.,  would  to  God  I    L. 

37. 
Ojo,  d'-ho,  s.  m.,  eye.    L.  29. 
Oler.  d-lair\  to  smell.    L.  41. 
Olfato.  Oie-/aJi'-to,  s.  m.,  the  sense  of  smell. 

L.  61. 
011a,  ole'-ya,  s.  f.,  earthen  pot.  — O.'ta  podri- 

da,  Spanish  mixed  dish  of  meats,  vegeta- 
bles. &c.,  cooked  together.    L.  63. 
Olor,  d4dre',  s.  m.,  odor,  scent,  smell.   L.  03. 
Olivar,  o-fe-va/-',  s.  m.,  olive  ground.    L.  63. 
Olvidar,  6levl-dar\  to  forget.  "L.  40. 
Omnibus,    o/ne'-n?-dooce,    a.  m.,  omnibus. 

L.  51. 
Once,  dne'-thai,  num.  adj.,  eleven.— Haccr 

las  once,  to  lunch  about  noon.    L.  14. 
Opera,  o'-jiai-i-a,  s.  f.,  opera.    L.  25. 
Opinion,  o-pS-nS-uM' ,  s.  f.,  opinion.    L.  42. 
Oponcr,  o-iM-nair' .  to  oppose.    L.  51. 
Optimo,   ope'  tS-mo,  adj.,  best,  extremely 

good.    L.  31. 
Opuesto,  'j-pwaiss'-fo,  adj.,  opposite,   op- 
posed.   (Irreg.  past,  part  of  OponeK.) 

L  53. 
Oracion,  o-rah-Uil-one' ,  s.  f.,  prayer,  speech, 

discourse.    L.  45. 
Orden.  ore'-dcun,  8.  m.  and  f.,  order. — A  la 

crrdeii  de  V.,  at  j'our  service.    L.  39. 
Ordcnar,  ore-dai-nar' ,   to   order,  to  com- 
mand.   L.  51. 
Organista,  ore-f/ak-neess'-la,  s.  m.,  organist. 

L.  36. 
Oricnte,  o-ri-ain'-iai,  cast.    L.  51. 
Oro,  o'-i-o,  s.  m..  ^old. — No  es  oro  totlo  lo 

que  rcluce,  aU  is  not  gold  that  glitters. 

L.  8. 
03,-dce,  pron.,  you  (objective  of  verbs).    L. 

26. 
Ost\on,ua!il-dn€',s.m.  (SccOstra.)  L.G3. 
Osti"a,  bce'-ira,  s.  f.,  oyster.  ■  L.  63. 
Otono,  d-tu:K'-ijo,  s.  m.,  autumn,  fall.   L.  21. 
Otro,  o'-tro,  indef.  pron.,  other,  another. 

L.  IS. 
Oveja,  o-vai'  ha,  s.  f.,  sheep.    L.  65. 
Ox !  5kx,  inter,  used  to  frighten  off  fowls, 

&c.    L.  46. 


Paca,  pah'-ka,  s.  f.,  Fanny.    L.  4J. 
Paclencia,  pah-ihl-ain'-Uti-a,  s.  f.,  patience. 

L.  a3. 
Paco.  pah'-ko,  s.  m.,  (contraction  of  Fr.\x- 

cisco,  Francis).  Frank.    L.  44. 
Pmlecer, pa/i-daithair',  to  sutler  pain.    L. 

47.  ^ 

Padrastro,  vali-drass' -tro,  s.  m.,  step-father. 

L.  49. 
Padre. /)aA'-rf/-ai,  s.  m.,  father.— Pa '^/'renucs- 

tro,  the  Lord's  prayer.    L.  6  and  45. 
Pacrar,  pah-gar',  to  pay.    L.  14. 
Pagare.  pah-gaJi-rat' ,  s.  m.,  (comm.)  prom- 
issory note.    L.  59. 
PaLTina,  pah'Ke-na,  e.t.,  page  (of  a  book, 

&c.).    L.  50. 
Pais,  pah-€es>t',    e.  m..  country.— ^  Cnanto 

ticmpo  hace  qu6  esta  V.  en  cst«  paU? 

how  long  have  you  been  in  this  country  ? 

L.  19. 
Paisano.  pah-t-sah'-no,  f.  m.,  conntrjin.in 

(one  from  the  same  countiy).    L.  50. 
Paja.  pah'-ka,  s.  f.,  straw.    L.  0.3. 


460 


VOCABULARY. 


Pajaro,  pah'-hah-ro,  s.  m.,  bird.    L.  48. 
Pajarraco,  pafi-har-rah'-ko,  s.  m.,  (aug.  of 

PAJ.USO),  an  U''ly,  clumsy  bird.    L.  49. 
Palabra,  pah-lah  -bra,  s.  f.,  word,  promise. 

— Palabras  mayores,  oflensive  words.    L. 

15  and  05. 
Palacio,  pak-lah'-tM-o,  e.  m.,  palace.    L. 

48. 
Palangana,  pah-lan-gah'-na,  s.  f.,  washbowl. 

L.  40. 
Palo,  jmh'-Io,  s.  m.,  stick  of  wood.    L.  02. 
Pan.  7>a/!,  s.  m.,  bread,  loaf.    L.  7. 
Panaderia,  pah-mili-dai-ri' -a,  s.  f.,  bakery. 

L.  11. 
Panadero,  paJi-nah-dai' -ro,   s.  m.,  baker. 

L.  11. 
Pantalon,  pan-iah-lone' ,  s.  m.,  pantaloons, 

trousers.    L.  17. 
Pano,  pan'-yo,  s.  m.,  cloth.    L.  62. 
Panuelo,  pan-yoo-ai' 4o,  s.  m.,  pocket-hand- 
kerchief.   L.  5. 
Papa,  pah-pa',  s.  m.,  papa.    L.  5. 
Papel,  pah-imW,  e.  m.,  paper,  part  (in  a 

play).— Hacer  papd,  to  cut  a  figure.    L.  4. 
Paquito,  pah-Jci'-to,  s.  m.,  (contraction  of 

Fkascisco,  Francis),  Franky.    L.  44. 
Par,  par,  s.  m.,  pair,  couple.    L.  40. 
Para,  pah'-ra.  prep.,  for,  to,  in  order  to, 

toward. — Tieue  una  carta  jxtra  V.,  he  has 

a  letter  for  you.— Esta  para  partir,  he  is 

about  to  set  but.    L.  19. 
Parabicn,  jMh-rah-be-ain',  s.  m.,  congratu- 
lation, compliment.— Dar  el  paraJbien,  to 

congratulate.    L.  62. 
Pariigiias,  pah-rah'-gwass,  s.  m.,  umbrella. 

L.  50. 
Parar,  pali-rar\  to  stop,  to  end  (in).    L.  51. 
Parasol,  }xih-raJt-sble' ,  s.  m.,  parasol.  L.  50. 
Parecer,  pa/i-rairihair',  to  appear,  to  seem. 

L.  ,30. 
Pared,  pak-raitk',  s.  f ,  wall.  'L.  50. 
Paris,  pah-reess',  s.  m.,  Paris.    L.  12. 
Parque,  par'-kai,  s.  m.,  park.    L.  17. 
Parte,  par'-tai,  s.  f,  part.— Alguna  parte, 

somewhere. — Ninguna  parte,  nowhere. — 

De  ocho  dias  a  esta  parte,  for  the  last 

eight  days : — s.  m.,   message,  dispatch, 

information.    L.  27. 
Participar,  jmr-t^-thl-par' ,  to  participate,  to 

partake.    L.  57. 
Participio,  par-ti-(Jii'-pS-5,  s.  m.,  partici- 
ple.   L.  4^3. 
Particula,  par-tl'-looo-la,  s.  f.,  particle.    L. 

50. 
Particular,  par-tS-koo-tar' ,  adj.,  particular, 

private.    L.  49. 
Partida,  par-IS'-da,  s.  f ,  departure.    L.  42. 
Partir.  par-leer',  to  depart,  to  set  out,  to 

divide,  to  split.    L.  19. 
Partitivo,  par-te-te'-vo,  adj.,  partitive.     L. 

0.3. 
Pasaje.  pah-mli'-hai,  s.  m.,  passage,  fare. 

L.  58  and  0.3. 
Pasar,  jmhsar'.  to  pass,  to  go  (from  place 

to  place).    L  IG. 
Pascna,  pass'  kica.  s.  f..  Easter.    L.  59. 
Paseante,  pah  eai-an'-tai.  s.  m..  passer-by, 

walker,  promenader.    (Pros.  part,  of  Pa- 

SE-VR.)    L.  .38. 
Pafeear,  jxih-sai-ar',  to  walk,  to  promenade. 

L.  24. 
Paaeo,  pah-sai'-o,  s.  m.,  walk,  promenade. 

I..  51. 


Pasiva,  paJi-s&'-va,  s.  f ,  the  passive  voice. 

L.  50. 
Pasivo,  pah-sS'-vo,  adj..  passive.    L.  03. 
Paso,  x>ali'-so,  s.  m.,  step,  pace.    L.  54. 
Patio,  jxih'-tl-o,  s.  m.,  yard,  pit  (in  theatres). 

L.  46. 
Patronimico,  pah-tro-nl'-me-ko,  adj.,  patro- 
nymic.   L.  49. 
Paz,  liath,  6.  f.,  peace.    L.  43. 
Pecho,  pai'-cho,  s.  m.,  breast.— A  lo  hecho 

pecho,  what  is  done  cannot  be  helped.    L. 

05. 
Pechuga,  pai-choo'-ga,  s.  f.,  breast  of  fowl. 

L.  58. 
Pcda.zo.pai-dah'-tho,  s.  m.,  piece,  morsel, 

bit.    L.  63. 
Pedir,  pai-deer",  to  ask,  to  demand,  to  ask 

for. — A  pedir  de  boca,  as  well  as  could  be 

desired.    L.  39. 
Pedro,  pai'-dro,  s.  m.j  Peter.    L.  19. 
Pegar.  pai-gar',  to  stick,  to  paste,  to  beat. 

f.  03. 
Peinar,  pai-i-nar',  to  comb.    L.  46. 
Peine,  ixii-i'-nai,  s.  m.,  comb.    L.  46. 
Peligro,  pai-le'-gro,  s.  m.,  danger,  peril.    L. 

51. 
Pelo,  pai'-lo,  8.  m.,  hair.— A  pelo,  to  the 

purpose.    L.  33  and  44. 
Pelota,  pai-lo'-ta,  s.  f.,  ball  (for  playing). 

L.  54. 
Pena,  pai'-na,  s.  f.,  pain,  penalty.— A  duras 

perms,  with  much  difflculty.    L.  59. 
Pcnsamiento,  painsah-me-etin'-to,    s.    m., 

thought.    L.  48. 
Pcnsar,  poirt-sa;'',  to  think,  to  intend.     L. 

.34. 
Pcniiltimo,   pai-nool' -te-nw,   adj.,    penulti- 
mate, last  but  one.    L.  50. 
Peuasco,  pain-yass'-ko,  s.  m.,  a  large  rock. 

L.  56. 
Pcor,  pat-ore',  adj.  and  adv.,  worse.     L.  20. 
Pepa,  jxii'-jM,  s.  f.,  (contraction  of  Fean- 

ciscA,  Frances),  Fanny.    L.  44. 
Pepe.    (See  Pepito.)    L.  44. 
Pepito,  pai-0'-fo,    s.  m.   (contraction  of 

JosE,  Joseph),  Joe.    L.  44. 
Pequeiio,  pai-kain' -yo,  adj.,    small,  little, 

young.    L.  7. 
Per,  pair,  Latin  prep,  used  in  Spanish  as  a 

prefix  only ;  as,  peiiurbar.    L.  50. 
Pcra,  pai'-ra,  s.  f.,  pear.    L.  59. 
Peral,  pal-raV .  s.  m..  pear-tree.    L.  G9. 
Pcrder.  pair-dair',  to  lose.    L.  37. 
Perdonar.  pair-do-nar' .  to  pardon.    L.  27. 
Perezoso,  pai-rai-tho'-so,  adj.,  lazy,  sloth- 
ful.   L.  38. 
Perfeccionar.  pair-ftttk-the-d-nar',   to   per-. 

feet,  to  improve.    L.  38. 
Perfocto,  pair-faik'-to,  adj.,  perfect.    L.  29. 
Perilla.  pai-reel'-ya,  s.  f.,  small  pear.— Ve- 

nir  de  jKnlla,  to  suit  exactly.    L.  64. 
Periodico,  pai-rS-O'-dd-ko,  s.  m.,  newspaper. 

L.  8. 
Permanecer,    pair-mah-nai-thair',    to    re- 
main, to  stop,  to  stay.    L.  45. 
Permancncia,   pair-mal>-nain'-tkl-a,    s.    f, 

permanence,  duration,  stop,  stay.    L.  51. 
Pcrmitir,  jyair-me-teer' ,  to  permit, 'to  allow. 

L.  44. 
Pcro,  jxii'-ro.  conj.,  but.    L.  3. 
Perpendicular,    pair-pain-dS-koo-lai^,   adj., 

perpendicular.    L.  51. 
Perro,  pair'-ro,  s.  m.,  dog.    L.  03. 


VOCABULARY. 


401 


Perseverancia,  paii-sai-vai-ran'-tM-a,  s.  f., 

perscverauce.    L.  03. 
Persistir,  pair-senss-teer' ,  to  persist.    L.  50. 
Pcrsoua,  jmir-so'-na,  s.  f.,  person.    L.  38. 
Personal,  pair^o-nal' ,  adj.,  personal.     L. 

03. 
Pesa,  pai'-sa,  s.  f.,  weight  (for  weighing). 

L.  55. 
Pesame,  pai'-sah-mai,  s.  m.,  condolence. 

Pesar,  pai-sar',  to  weigh,  to  regret. — No  le 

^<t«  de  ha"ber  nocido,  he  has  an  excellent 

opinion  of  himsell".    L.  31. 

Pesar,  s.  m.,  regret,  grief,  sorrow. — K  pesar 

dc,  in  spite  of,  notwithstanding.    L.  31. 

Pcscado,  iKtiss-kah'-do,  s.  m.,  fish.    L.  7. 

Pcscar,  ixiiss-kar',  to  flsh.    L.  03. 

Pesimo,  pai'-se-mo,  adj.,  worst,  very  bad. 
L.  21. 

Peso,  pai'-so,  s.  m.,  weight,  heaviness,  dol- 
lar.   L.  14. 

Pianista,  pi-ah-neess' -ta,  s.  m.,  pianist.  L. 
15. 

Piano,  pe-ah'-no,  s.  m.,  piano.    L.  15. 

Picante,  p^-kan' -tai,  adj.,  piquant,  high- 
seasoned,  pungent.    L.  54. 

Picar,  pl-kar^,  to  priclj,  to  bite,  to  pique. 
L.  46. 

Plcaresco,  pi-Jcah-raiss'-ko,  adj.,  roguish. 
L.  49. 

Picaro,  pi&'-kah-ro,  adj.,  rogue,  rascal, 
scoundrel.    L.  32. 

Pico,  pS'-ko,  8.  m.,  beak,  bill.— Callarse  el 
jncOy  to  liold  one's  tongue.    L.  01. 

Pie,  }jS-ai',  s.  m.,  foot.— A  pie,  on  foot. — 
Naccr  ac  pies,  to  be  bom  to  good  luck. 
L.  39. 

Pierna,  fiS-air'-na,  s.  f.,  leg.    L.  33. 

Pieza,  pS-cu'-(/ta,  a.  f.,  piece.    L.  04. 

Pinar,  jie-iiar',  s.  m.,  pine-CTOve.    L.  49. 

Pino,  jH'-no,  s.  m.,  pine.    L.  40. 

Pintar,  peen-lar',  to  paint,  to  represent.  L. 
54. 

Pintor.  jieen-tdre',  8.  m.,  painter.    L.  31. 

Piniura,  jieen-too'-ra,  s.  f ,  painting.    L.  31. 

Pipa,  })e'-pa,  a.  f.,  pipe.    L.  42. 

Pique,  ije'-kai,  s.  m.,  pique,  offence.— Esta- 
bia  pique  de  perderse,  he  was  on  the  brink 
of  ruin.    L.  02. 

Piropos  (Decir).  pS-ro'-poce,  to  say  soft 
things  (to  the  lames).    L.  58. 

J'\savcT(ie,j)S-sa/i-vair'-dai,  s.  m.,  fop,  cox- 
comb.   L.  50. 

Piso,  pS'-so,  B.  m.j  floor,  story  (of  a  house). 
— Tercer  piso,  third  floor.    L.  53. 

Pistola,  }^eess4o'-ta,  s.  f.,  pistol.    L.  44. 

PUtolctazo,  j)eess-(o-lai-ia/i'-t/io,  s.  m.,  pis- 
tol-shot,   t.  44. 

Placer,  plati-thair' ,  to  please.    L.  31. 

Placer,  s.  m.,  pleasure.    L.  31. 

Plata,  ])lah'-ta,  s.  f.,  silver.    L.  8. 

Plato,  plah'-to,  s.  m.,  plate,  dish  (of  viands). 
L.  57. 

Plaza,  plah'tha,  8.  f,  place,  situation, 
square,  market-place.— Ptea  de  tores. 
Arena  (for  buU-flghts).    L.  17  and  54. 

Plazo.  pla/i'-t/u>,  8.  m.,  term  (of  payment). 
L.  0.3. 

Plomo,  plo'-mo,  s.  m.,  lead.    L.  63. 

Piuma,  ploo'-ma,  ».  f.,  pen,  feather.    L.  5. 

Plural,  ploo-ral',  adj.,  plural.    L.  57. 

Pluscuamperfecto,  ptooc£'kicam-pair-faik'- 
(o,  B.  m.,  pluperfect.    L.  43. 


Pobre,  2)d'-brai,  adj.,  poor,  needy,  wretched. 

L.  13. 
Pobreza,  po-hrai' -tha,  s.  f.,  poverty.    L.  59. 
Poco,  po'-ko,  adv.,  little;  pi.,  few.— Poco  a 

poco,  gently,  softly.    L.  32. 
Poco,  8.  m.,  little.    L.  6. 
Poder,  pb-dair',  to  be  able.— No  poder  mas, 

to  be  exhausted.    L.  32. 
Poder,  8.  m.,  power,  possession.    L.  35. 
Podrir,  po-dreer',  to  rot.    L.  41. 
Poesia,  po-ai-sS'-a,  a.  f.,  poesy,  poetry.    L. 

31. 
Poeta,  jMi-ai'-ta,  a.  m.,  poet.    L.  31. 
Poetastro,  rxj-ai-lass' -tro,  a.  m.,  poetaster. 

L.  44. 
Poetico,  pd-ai'-(i-ko,  adj.,  poetic,  poetical. 

Poica,  pUe'-ka,  s.  f.,  polka.    L.  23. 

Politica,  pH-tl'-tl-ka,  s.  f.,  politics ;  polite- 
ness.   L.  52. 

Politico,  po-W -tl-ko,  adj.,  political:  polite. 
L.  52. 

Politico.  «.  m.,  man  of  politics.    L.  52. 

Polio,  pole'-yo,  a.  m.,  chicken.    L.  5. 

Polvo,  pole'-vo,  a.  m.,  powder,  dust.    L.  62. 

Polvora,  pole'-vo-ra,  s.  f.,  gunpowder.  L.  6.3. 

Ponderar,  mne-dai-rar' ,  to  exaggerate,  to 
cry  up.    L.  54. 

Poner,  }}d-nair'.  to  put,  to  place,  to  lay,  to 
set  (as  the  sun).— Pone/re,  to  become,  to 

fet.— Se  puiv  serio,  he  became  serious. 
1.41. 
Por,  pore,  prep.,  by,  for,  in  behalf  of,  in  fa- 
vor of,  about,  through.— Por  las  callcs, 
through  the  streets.- Ir  j)or  pan,  to  go 

for  bread.— Por  si  acaso,  in  case,  if  by  any 

chance.    L.  19. 
Porcion,  pore-tM-one' ,  s.  f.,  portion,  part, 

lot,  number,  quantity.    L.  03. 
Pormenor,  pdre-maz-nore' ,  s.  m.  (generally 

used  in  the  ■g\vixa\).—Porni€nores,  details, 

particulars.    L.  50. 
Porquc,  pure'-kai,  conj.,  because.    L.  18. 
Porque,   pore-kai',   conj.,  why  ?    for  what 

reason  ?— s.  m.,  reason  wherefore.    L.  18. 
VoTXaxse,  2)dr€-tar' -sai,  to  behave,  to  conduct 

one's  self.    L.  55. 
Portugal,  pore-loo-gal',  8.  m.,  Portugal.    L. 

60. 
Portugues,  pore-(oo-g7iaiss',a.  m.  and  adj., 

Portuguese  (language),  Portuguese  (na- 
tive of  Portugal).    L.  *t. 
Poseer,  posai-atr',  to  possess.    L.  34. 
Posesivo,  posai-se'-vo,  adj.,  possessive.    L. 

03. 
Posible,  po-sV-blai,  adj.,  possible.    L.  31. 
Positivo.  pd-sS-ie'-vo,  adj.,  positive.    L.  48. 
Posponer,   jjoce-pd-rtair' ,   to   postpone,  to 

place  after.    L.  63. 
Potencial,   po-tain-tke-al' ,   adj.,   potential. 

L.  fr3. 
Practica,  prak'-tl-ka,  s.  f.,  practice.    L.  23. 
Practicante,  prak-te-kan'-tat,  s.  m.,  practi- 

tioucr.     (Present  part,  of  Practicae.) 

L.  .38. 
Practicar,  prak-ti-kar' .  to  practise.    L.  23. 
Pnictico,  prak'-K-ko,  adj.,  practical.    L.  65. 
Pre,  jjrai,  Latin  prep,  used  in  Spanish  as  a 

prefix  only.    L.  50. 
Prcceder,  prai-thai-dair',  to  precede,  to  go 

before.    L.  03. 
Precepto,  prai-lhaip' -to,  s.  m.,  precept.    L. 

53. 


402 


VOCABULARY, 


Precio,  prai'-i!i?-d,  s.  m.,  price,  prize.  L.  50. 

Preciso,  prai-tkl' -so,  adj.,  necei^sary,  oblig- 
atory, precise. — Es  prechv  que  la  lean, 
they  must  read  it.    ii.  0;3. 

Preferir,  prai-fai-reer' ,  to  prefer.    L.  33. 

Pre?nnta,  nrai-goon'-ta,  s.  f.,  question,  in- 
quiry.   L.  '<ii. 

Pre:^intar,  prcti-goon-tar' ,  to  ask  questions, 
to  qaestioii.    L.  33. 

Preliniinar,  prai-H-inl-nar',  adj.,  prelimi- 
nary.   L.  Gi. 

Premiar,  prai-jM-ar',  to  reward.    L.  63. 

Prcmio,  prai'-fiiS-o,  s.  m.,  premium,  reward, 
prize.    L.  59. 

Prenda,  praiu'-da,  s.  f.,  pledije,  jewel ;  pi., 
endowments,  talents,  parts.    L.  41,  6-3. 

Prcnder,  prain-dair' ,  to  talse,  to  take  up,  to' 
arrest.    L.39'. 

Prcposicion,  prai-pd-sZ-tM-dne\  preposi- 
tion.   L.  43. 

Prescncia,  prai-sain'-thS-a,  a.  f.,  presence. — 
Preseiiciu  de  auimo.  presence  of  miud. 
L.  (53. 

Presentar,  prai-min-tar' ,  to  present,  to  in- 
troduce, to  OiTer.    L.  39. 

Prescnte,  pral-sain'taiy  adj.,  present. — Te- 
nar  presente,  to  bear  in  miuu.    L.  43. 

Preslctente,  prai-nd-dam'-lai,  e.  m.,  presi- 
dent.   L.  4S. 

Presidio,  j)rai-se'-dZ-d,  s.  m.,  state  prison. 
L.  59. 

Presidir,  prai-sd-deer',  to  preside.    L.  54. 

Preso,  prai'-so,  irre:?.  past  part,  (of  Pbex- 
DER).  taken.    L.  52. 

Prestar,  praUs-tar',  to  lend.    L.  59. 

Presto.     praUs'-to,     adj.,    quick,     ready, 

■  prompt.    L.  29. 

Presto,  adv.,  soon,  quickly.    L.  29. 

Pretender,  prai-lafn-dair',  to  pretend,  to 
lay  claim  to,  to  claim,  to  solicit.    L.  48. 

Pretension,  prai-lain-f^c-one',  s.  f,  preten- 
sio".  claim,  thin-^  solicited.    L.  57. 

Preteiito,  pixu-tui' -re-to,  adj.,  preterit.    L. 

m. 

Pretesto,  prai-iaiss'-to,  s.  m.,  pretext.    L. 

58. 
Prevenir,  pral-ral-neer',  to  prevent,  to  fore- 
see, to  warn,  to  prepare.    L.  05. 
Prevcr,  prai-vair',  to  foresee.    L.  39. 
Primavera,  prS-mafi-cai'-ra,  b.  f..  Spring. 

L.  24. 
Primero.  pri-mai'-ro.  adj.,  first. -^De  bnenas 

ii  pri/neras,  all  at  once,  rashly.— 9d v.,  first, 

rather,  sooner.    L.  13. 
Primo,  pre'-mo,  s.  m..  cousin.    L.  1-3. 
Principal.    j)rein-tliZ-pal' ,    a4j.,    principal, 

chief.    L.  36. 
Principiante,  preen-the-pe-an'-tai.  s.  m.  and 

pres.  part,  (of  Principiar),  beginner.    L. 

.38. 
Principiar,  preen-th?-p?-ar',   to   begin,  to 

commence.    L.  33. 
Principio,  preen-t/ie' -pS-o,  s.  m.,  hei^inning, 

commencement,  principle.    L.  63. 
Prisa,  pr?'-m.   s.  f.,  haste,   hurry. — Tener 

prim,  to  he  in  a  hurrv.    L.  30. 
Prisionero,  pri-si-v-tud'-ro,  e.  m.,  prisoner. 

L.  48. 
Prisma,  preeAi'-mu.  s.  m.,  prism.    L.  54. 
Probable,  pro-bah'-blai,  adj.,  probable.    L. 

29. 
Prob.ir,  pro-bar',  to  try,  to  prove,  to  taste. 

—El  clima  de  e&te  paisle  jtrueba  bien,  the 


climate  of  this  country  agrees  well  with 
him.    L.  35. 

Ptocesiou,  prd-thai-3e-dne' ,  s.  f.,  procession. 
L.  46. 

Procurer,  pro-koo-rar' ,  to  procure,  to  en- 
deavor, to  trj'.    L.  51. 

Produccion,  prO-dook-Uil-dne' ,  s.  f.,  produc- 
tion.   L.  4U. 

Pi-oducir,  jyro-doo-lheer' ,  to  produce.    L.  40. 

Procza,  pn'j-ai'-tha,  s.  f.,  prowess.    L.  54. 

Profecia,  pro-fai-tke'-a,  8.  f.,  prophecy.  L. 
45. 

Profesion,  prd-fai-se-one' ,  6.  f.,  professicn. 
L.  38. 

Profesor,  pro-fai-sdre\  s.  m.,  professor.  L. 
18. 

Prohibir,  pro-i-heer',  to  prohibit.    L.  53. 

Projimo,  pro'-hi-mo,  s.  m.,  neighbor  (feilow- 
creature).    L.  28. 

Promesa,  pro-mai'sa,  s.  f.,  promise.    L.  .57. 

Prometer,  j)rd-7nai-(air' ,  to  promise.    L.  25. 

Pronombre,  jtro-mine'-braU  s.  m.,  pronoun. 
L.  43. 

Pronominal,  pro-ruj-me-nal' ,  adj.,  pronomi- 
nal.   L.  61. 

Prontitnd,  jrrone-fi-tooth' ,  s.  f.,  promptness, 
promptitude,  quickness.    Ij.  43. 

Pronto,  prme'-fo.ad}..  prompt,  quick,  ready; 
— adj.,  soon,  promptly,  quickly.    L.  20. 

Pronunciacion,  prO-noo/i-f/ti-ah-t/il-one',  e. 
f.,  pronunciation.    L.  0:3. 

Pronunciar,  pro-noon-the-ar',  to  pronounce. 
L.  15. 

Propiedad,  prb-p^-ai-dalh',,  s.  f.,  propriety, 
property.    L.  63. 

Propio,  pru'-pi-o,  adj.,  proper,  own,  self- 
same, same.     L.  40. 

Proponer,  pru-po-nair' .  to  propose.    L.  51. 

Prosa,  prb'-xa,  s.  f.,  prose.    L.  .31. 

Proporcionar,  pro-pore-Uie-u-nar',  to  pro- 
portion, to  procure,  to  oflcr.    L.  48. 

Protestante,  pro-taiss-tan' -tvd,  8.  m.,  Prot- 
estant.   L.  49. 

Protestantismo.  prd-ial^-tan-teess'-mo,  s. 
m..  Protestantism.    L.  49. 

Provecho,  pro-vai'-cho,  a.  m.,  profit,  benefit. 
L.  64. 

Pro  veer,  pro-rai-air',  to  pro\ide.    L.  34. 

I*roverbio,  pro-vair'-le-d,  s.  m.,  proverb. 
L.  65. 

Provincia,  pro-veen'-tlti-a,  s.  f.,  province. 
L.  19. 

Provieto,  prU-rfesg' -lo,  past  part,  (of  Pbo- 
VEEE),  provided.    L.  53. 

Proximo,  proke'-fZ-nw,  aclj.,  proximo,  next, 
nearest. — El  sjhsAo  proximo,  next  Satur- 
day.   L.  23. 

Prudencia,  proo-dain'-thS-a,  s.  f.,  prudence. 
L.  31. 

Pmdente,  proo-dain'-tai,  adj.,  prudent.  L. 
20. 

Prueba,  proo-ai'-ba,  s.  f.,  proof.    L.  46. 

Prasia.  proo'-sf-a,  s.  f .  Prassia.    L.  46. 

Publicar,  jxxhbte-kar' ,  to  publish.    L.  48. 

Piiblico,  poo'-blS-ko,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  public. 
L.  51. 

Pueblo.  pwai'-Mo.  s.  m.,  town,  people.  L.  50. 

Puerta,  pwair'-ta.  s.  f..  door.     L.  27. 
'-Pnes.  piraUo,  coni.,  then,  therofopo.  inas- 
much as,  since,  because :— inter.,  well ! — 
Pites,  que  ?  well,  what  of  it  ?    L.  41. 

Puesto  que,  pwaiss'-to.  adv.,  since,  inas- 
much as,  supposing  that.    L.  St. 


V  O  C  A  li  U  L  A  K  V  . 


Piii;,-ada,  pool-gah'-da,  s.  f..  inch.    L.  G3. 

Puutapi-j,  i)'Mii,-lah-iJh-ai\  s.  m.,  kick.    L.  50. 

l-'iiuia,  jiojn'-lu,  poiut,  siitch.    L.  50. 

Puiuilla,  itoon-led' -ya,  s.  f.,  small  point. — 
Ue  punliUa-3,  on  tiptoe.    L.  41. 

Puulo,  poon'-io,  a.  m.,  point  (of  time  or 
space),  spot,  place. — Al  purUo,  at  once. 
L.  51. 

Puntuacion,  poon-too-ak-thhdne' ,  b.  f.,  punc- 
tuation.   L.  (K5. 

Piiatual,  poon-loo-a!',  adj.,  punctual,  exact, 
acciiralc.    L.  O.J. 

Piintualidad,  jxxm-toa-ah-lS-dalh',  s.  f., 
puncluaiity.    L.  63. 

Piirista,  ]xxi-ree3s'-la,  s.  m.,  purist.    L.  33. 


a. 

Que,  /.•«£,  rcl.  pron.,  that,  which,  who.— 
/Que  bueno !  how  i^ood ! — /Que  desgracia ! 
what  a  misfortune! — Que  venj^a,  let  him 
come. — ^'Que  se  dice  de  bueuo?  what  is 
the  good  news?— Tarde  que  temprano, 
sooner  or  later.    L.  3,  IG,  17. 

Quebrar,  kai-brar',  to  break,  to  smash.    L. 

Qucdar,  kai-clar',  to  stay,  to  stop,  to  re- 
main, to  become. — El  campo  quedo  por 
lo3  Americanos,  the  Americans  were  vic- 
torious.   L.  38. 

Quejarse,  Jcai-har'-sai,  to  moan,  to  com- 
plain.   L.  4S. 

Qiieinar.  kai-mar',  to  bum.    L.  32. 

Qnercr,  kai-rair',  to  wish,  to  desire,  to  will, 
to  love,  to  like,  to  be  willinsj.    L.  13. 

Querido.  kai-re'-do.  adj.,  dear.    (Past  part. 

OfQ'JEUER.)     L.  13. 

Queso,  kni'-so,  s.  m..  cheese.    L.  7. 

Quien,  k£-ain',  rel.  pron.,  who,  whom.  L. 
17. 

Qnienqniera,  kS-ain-ke-ai'-ra,  indcf.  pron., 
whosoever.    L.  50. 

Quicto,  kS-ai'-to,  adj.,  quiet,  Btill,  at  rest. 
L.  Cyi. 

Quijada,  k^-kah'-da,  s.  f. ,  jaw.    L.  .50. 

Quince,  keen'-thai,  num.  adj.,  fifteen.   L.  14. 

Quinientos,  ki-nl-ain'-toce,  adj.,  five  hun- 
dred.   L.  It. 

Quinto,  keen'-io,  ord.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  fifth. 
L.  .50. 

Quitar,  kl-tar',  to  remove,  to  take  away, 
off,  out ;  to  prevent.    L.  53. 

Qnitasol,  kB-faft-xole',  s.  m.,  parasol.    L.  50. 

(iniy.Ci,  quiziis,  ke-ikah',  -(ha-ss',  adv.,  per- 
haps.   L.  31. 

R. 

Radical,  rah-de-kal',  adj.,  radical.    L.  03. 

Raiz,  rah-eeth',  s.  f.,  root.    L.  63. 

Kama,  rafi'.-ma,  s.  f.,  branch  (of  tree?,  fami- 
lies. &c.)    L.  CI. 

Ilamillcte,  rah-med-yai'-tai,  s.  m.,  bouquet. 
L.  27. 

Eamo,  rah' -mo,  8.  m.,  branch,  department. 
L.  56. 

Rana,  rnh'-tm,  s.  f,  frog.— Xo  ser  rana,  to 
be  wide  awake,  expert.    L.  63. 

Rapaza,  rah-pali'-tha,  s.  f.,  little  girl.— i  Mi- 
rcn  la  rcpaztida  !  the  little  vixen !    L.  01 . 

Haro,  rah'-ro.  adj.,  rare,  odd,  curious, 
scarce.    L.  G3. 


Rasgar,  rass-gar\  to  tear,  to  scratch.  L.  G4. 

Rasgo,  roiss'-ffo.  s.  m..  trait,  stroke,  in- 
stance.   L.  03. 

Rato,  rak'-lo,  s.  m.,  while,  moment.— A  m- 
tos,  from  time  to  time.    L.  44. 

Raton,  rah-Wiie',  s.  m.,  mouse.    L.  65. 

Raya,  rah'-ya,  e.  f.,  stroke,  dash. — Tener  a 
raya,  to  keep  withiu'bouuds.    L.  frl. 

Rayo,  rah'-yo,  s.  m.,  ray,  thunderbolt. — 
Kchar  rayos  y  ceutcUas,  to  foam  with 
rage.    L.  62  and  03. 

Razon,  rah-tliu>ie\  a,  f.,  reason,  right. — 
Tener  razon,  to  be  right.    L.  25. 

Razonar,  raJt-thv-nar',  to  reason.    L.  63. 

Re,  raU  always  used  as  a  prefix.    L.  50. 

Real,  rai-cU',  adj.,  real,  royal ;— s.  m.,  real 
(Spanish  coin).    L.  47  and  4S. 

Realidad,  rai-ak-ll-datk' ,  s.  f.,  reality.  L. 
48. 

Rebajar,  rai-bah-har\  to  reduce,  to  abate, 
to  lower  (i)riccs,  &.C.).    L.  04. 

Rebanada,  rai-bah-na/i'-da,  s.  f.,  slice  (of 
bread,  &c.).    L.  m. 

Rebanar,  rai-bah-nar' ,  to  slice.    L.  64. 

Rcbano,  rai-baii'-yo,  s.  m.,  flock  of  sheep. 
L.  40. 

Rccado,  rai-kah'-do,  s.  m.,  message,  errand. 
L.  6:3. 

Recepcion,  rai-thaip-thl-one' ,  s.  f.,  recep- 
tion.   L.  54. 

Recibimiento,  rai-ihl-bi-m'i-ain'-to,  e.  m., 
act  of  receiving,  reception.    L.  55. 

Recibir,  rai-thl-beer' ,  to  receive.    L.  8. 

Recibo,  rai-tkl'-bo,  s.  m.,  receipt.    L.  63. 

Rcciproco,  rai-thl'-pru-ko,  adj.,  reciprocal. 
L.  (i3. 

Recitar,  rai-lhl-tar' ,  to  recite.    L.  64. 

Recomendacion,  ral-ku-mnin-dcdi-ihe-bne', 
8.  f.,  recommendation.    L.  60. 

Recomcndar,  rai-ko-main-dar' ,  to  recora- 
,    mend.    L.  64. 

Reconocer,  rai-kd-no-thair' ,  to  recognize, 
to  acknowledire.    L.  30. 

Recordar,  rai-kore-dar',  to  remember,  to 
remind.    L.  35. 

Recto,  raik'-fo,  adj.,  ri^ht. — En  angulos 
rectos,  at  ricrht  angles.    L.  53. 

Rector,  raik-tore',  s.  m.,  rector,  director. 
L.  63. 

Recnrrir,  rai-koor-reer' ,  to  recur,  to  have  re- 
course.   L.  50. 

Recurso,  rai-koor'-so,  s.  m.,  recourse,  re- 
source.   L.  40. 

Reducir,  rai-doo-theer' ,  to  reduce.    L.  54r. 

Referir,  rai-fai-reer',  to  refer,  to  relate.  L. 
64. 

Reflesivo,  rai-fiaik-s^'-vo,  adj.,  reflective. 
L.  63. 

Reflesionar,  rai-flaik-sZ-o-nar' ,  to  reflect. 
L.  48. 

Reforma,  rai-fore'-ma,  6.  f.,  reform,  refor- 
mation.   L."  6-3. 

Reformar,  rai-j ore-mar' ,  to  reform,  to  form 
anew,  to  discharge  (from  an  employment 
or  office).    L.  48. 

Refran,  rai-fran',  8.  m.,  refrain,  proverb. 
L.  63  and  (55. 

Regalar,  rai-gah-lar' .  to  regale,  to  present 
with,  to  make  a  present  of.    L.  G3. 

Resalo,  rai-gaJi'-lo,  s.  m.,  gift,  present.  L. 
63, 

Regimen.  rai'-M-main,  s.  m.,  regimen,  gov- 
ernment, object  (of  verbs).    L.  57. 


464 


VOCABULARY 


Rcgimiento,  rai-hhmZ-ain'-to,  b.  m.,  regi- 
nient.    L.  19. 

Ro;^ir,  rai-lteer',  to  govern.    L.  57. 

Kcjla,  raig'-la,  s.  f.,  rule,  ruler.    L.  63. 

Ite^ular,  ixu-goo-lai-',  adj.,  reijnlar,  tolera- 
ble, moderate,  ordinary ;— adv.,  tolerably, 
middliu;^ ;— V-,  to  re^'ulate.  L.  i~,  57,  and 
61. 

Ee^ularidad,  rai-goo-kiA-rS-dat/i' ,  8.  f.,  resu- 
larity.    L.  55. 

Kc^iilarlzar,  rai-goo-laJi-rl-thar',  to  regu- 
late.   L.  48. 

Rchusar,  rai-oo-sar'y  to  refuse.    L.  CI. 

Rctna,  rai-S'-na,  e.  L,  queen.    L.  G3. 

Ruiuante,  rai-4-iian'-(ai,  pres.  part.,  reign- 
ing.   Lu  38. 

Reiuar,  rai-S-nar\  to  reign.    L.  15. 

IJeiuo,  rai-e'-no,  s.  m.,  kingdom.    L.  45. 

Reir,  >ai-eer\  to  laugh.    L.  41. 

Relacion.  rai-la/i-lM-une',  s.  f.,  relation,  ac- 
count, recital.    L.  43. 

Rehimpa^o,  rai-lain' -pah-go,  s.  m.,  flash  of 
light  uiiig.    L.  63. 

Rclampagncar,  rai-lamrpah-gai-ar' ,  to 
lighten,     L.  30. 

Relatar,  rai-lah-lar' ,  to  relate.    L.  45. 

Religion,  rai-ti-liZ-One\  a.  f.,  religion.  L. 
35. 

Eeljgioso,  rai-lS-M-d'-so,  aclj.,  religions.    L. 

Rcloj,  rai-io',  a.  m.,  watch,  clock.    L.  28. 

Relojei-o,  rai-lu-hai'-rv,  s.  m.,  watchmaker. 
L.  6.3. 

Eelncir.  rai-loo-theer',  to  sparkle,  to  glitter. 
—No  cs  oro  todo  lo  que  retucc,  all  is  not 
gold  that  glitters.    L  65. 

Remediar,  rai-maHle-ar',  to  remedy.  L.  64. 

Remedio,  nii-mai'-cle-o,  s.  m.,  remedy.  L. 
53. 

Remendar,  rai-viain-dar',  to  repair,  to 
mend.    L.  64. 

Remimerar.  7-ai-moo-nai-rar',  to  remnner- 
ate.    L.  52. 

Rendir,  rain-deer',  to  render,  to  subdue.— 
liendirse,  to  enrreuder.    L.  .39. 

Reiiir.  rain->/eer\  to  quarrel,  to  dispute,  to 
scold.    L.39. 

Rco,  rai'-o,  s.  m.,  culprit,  offender.    L.  53. 

Repartir,  rai-par-teer' ,  to  divide.    L.  58. 

Rcpasar,  ral-pah-mr',  to  repass,  to  reex- 
amine, to  glance  over  aijain.    L.  64. 

Rcpaso,  rai-jxth'-so,  s.  m.^  revision,  act  of 
goinur  over  anew.    L.  61. 

Repcnte.  7-ai-pam'-(ai.—De  repents,  sudden- 
ly, on  a  sudden.    L.  64. 

RepeticJon,  rai-pai-le-tlie-one\  b.  f,  repeti- 
tion.   L.  6;}. 

Repetir,  Tai-pai-teer\  to  repeat.    L.  39. 

Rcposar,  rai-pO-mr',  to  repose,  to  rest.  L. 
39. 

Reposo,  rai-po'-eo,  s.  m.,  repose,  rest.  L. 
63. 

Reprender.  rai-prain-dair',  to  reprehend, 
rt^primand.    L.  42. 

Representar.  rai-in'ai-min-tar' .  to  repre- 
sent, to  make  appear ;  to  perform  (a  part), 
to  enact.    L.  64. 

Ecprobar,  rai-irru-bar' ,  to  reprove,  to  up- 
braid.   L.  60. 

Repfiblica,  rai-poo'-MS-ka,  s.  f.,  republic. 
L.  35. 

Reputacion,  rcU-poo-tafi-the-One\  s.  f.,  repu- 
tation.   L.  24. 


Resarcir,  rai-sar-thecr' ,  to  indemnify,  to 
compensate,  to  make  up  for.    L.  59. 

Resentirse,  rai-^ain-teir'-mi,  to  feel  the 
eliects  ^of ),  to  resent.     L.  59.  , 

Resfriado,  ral~<-frZ-:ih'-df),  s.  m.,  cold  (dis- 
ease caused  by  cold).     L.-C3. 

Resfriarse,  rais«-fre-ar' -sai,  to  catch  cold. 
L.  t>J. 

Residente,    rai-si-dain' -tai,  adj.   and   past 

Eart.   (of    REsmm),    resident,   residing. 
I.  38. 
Residir,  raise-deer',  to  reside.    L.  9. 
Rcsistir,  rai-seess-ieer'.  to  resist.    L.  51. 
Resolucion,  rai-fo-lco-ihe-one',  e.  f.,  resolu- 
tion.   L.  63. 
Resolver,  rai-eole-iair' ,  to  solve,  to  resolve. 

L.  64. 
Respecta,  rai»s-paik'-fa.—'Ea  lo  que  respccta, 

with  respect  to.    L.  51. 
Respctable,     raiss-pai-tah'-Wai,    adj.,    re-, 

spectable.    L.  39. 
Respctar,  raii's-pai-tar' .  to  respect.    L.  Sfi. 
Respeto,  raiss-pai' -to,  8.  m.,  respect,  regard. 

L.  56. 
Responder,  raifs-pone-dair' ,  to  respond,  to 

answer.    L.  .33. 
Respondou,   raiss-pdr^-done',  adj.,  always 

ready  to  reply.    L.  33. 
Respuesta,  rai'gs-picaifs'-ta,  s.  f.,  response, 

reply,  answer.    L.  30. 
Restante,   rciiiis-tan' -iai,   s.  m.,  and  pres. 

part,  (of  Restae),  remainder,  rest;  re- 

maiiiing.    L.  46. 
Resnltar,  rai-sooMar' ,  to  result,  to  turn  out, 

to  occur.    L.  43. 
Retirar.  rai-(d-rar\  to  retire,  to  withdraw, 

to  retreat.    L.  63. 
Retrato,  rai-traft'-to,  e.  m.,  portrait,  like- 
ness.   L.  17. 
Reumatismo,    rai-co-mah-ieess'-mo,   b.  m., 

rheumatism.    L.  &i. 
Reunir.  rai-oo-neer' ,  to  reunite,  to  assem- 
ble.   L.  52. 
Reves,  rai-raL<^',  b.  m.,  back  part,  wrong 

side. — Al  7-ereg,  on  the  contrary;  upside 

down.    L.  63. 
Revoltoso,    rai-vok-to'so,   adj.,  turbulent, 

rebellious.    L.  44. 
Rey,  rai'-?,  s.  m.,  king.    L.  15. 
Revezuelo.  rai-yai-fhirai'-lo,  s.  m.  (dim.  of 

Set),  petty  kinir.    L.  44. 
Ricacho,  rZ-iah'-cho,  adj.,  very  rich.    L.  49. 
Rico,  re'-ko,  adj..  rich.    L.  13. 
Ridiculez,   r?-dt-koo-lait/i',    s.  f.,  ridicule. 

L.  45. 
Ridiculizar,  rS-de-koo-l?-(/iar',  to  ridicule. 

L.  48. 
Eidiculo,  rl-di'-koo-Io.  adj.  and  s.  m..  ridicu- 
lous, reticule  (sort  of  lady's  basket).  L.  5. 
Rigodon.  rd-go-done' ,  s.  m.,  rigadoon,  couu- 

ti-y  dance.    L.  23. 
Rincon,  reen-kone',  s.  m.,  comer, 
Rio.  rS'-o,  s.  m.,  river.    L.  40. 
Kiqueza,  re-kai'-tha,  s.  f,  riches. 
Risa,  re'-sa,  e.  f.  laugh,  laughter. 
Rivalizar,  rl-rah-le-ihar' ,  to  rival,  to  vie 

with.    L.  51. 
Robar,  rv-bar',  to  rob,  to  steal.    L.  44. 
Rodar.  ro-dar',  to  roll.    L.  5-1. 
Rodear.  ro-dai-ar'.  to  surround,  to  go  round, 

to  revolve.    L.  54. 
Rodeado,  rd-'hii-ah'-do.  adj.  and  past  part. 

(of  Robe Ai:),  surrounded.    L.  53. 


L.  51. 


L.  48. 
L.  4a 


VOCABULARY. 


465 


Eodilla,  ro-ded'-ya,  8.  f.,  knee.— Dc  rodiUas, 

on  one's  knees.    L.  5'J.  . 

Eodriguez,  ro-drl-gaith' ,  s.  m.,  Rodriguez. 

Rogar.VeJ-yar'.  to  pray,  to  beg  of.    L.  35. 
Rojo,  ?5-Ao,  adj.,  red.    L.  W. 
Romano,  w-mali' -no,  adj.,  Roman     L.  54. 
Romper,  ivme-iMir',  to  break,  to  tear.- 
7?a«p«- el  silencio,  to  break  the  silence. 

Ropa,  id'-iya,  e.  f,  clothes,  wearing  apparel. 

Rosa,  ro'-sa,  b.  f,  roae.    L.  6.3. 

Roto.  rO'-lo,  irr.  past  part,  (of  Rompeb), 
broken.     L.  52. 

Rubio,  roo'-bS-o,  adj.,  fair  (of  the  complex- 
ion), ruddy.    L.  63. 

Ruido,  roo.-2'-do.  s.  m.,  noise.    L.  46. 

Rum.  roo-'een.\  adj.,  mean,  churlish.     L.  6.3. 

Ruindad,  roo-eeii-dath',  e.  f.,  meanness, 
churlishness.    L.  43. 

Ruisenor,  roo-l-saln-ydre' ,  s.  m.,  nightin- 
gale.   L.  63. 

Rumor,  roo-inore\  s.  m.,  rumor.    L.  54. 

Ruliua,  roo-tl'-na,  s.  f.,  routine.    L.  63. 


S. 

Sabado,  sah'-bah-do,  s.  m.,  Saturday.    L.  9. 
Saber,  sah-bair',  to  know,  to  have  knowl- 
edge of,  to  hear  from ;  to  savor,  to  taste ; 

— 8.  m.,  learning,  knowledge.    L.  42  and 

21. 
Sabio,  sah'-M-o,  adj.,  wise,  sage,  learned. 

L.  21. 
Sabor,  mh-bore',  s.  m.,  savor,  taste. — A  su 

mfxrr.  at  his  pleasure,  taste.  L.  02  and  66. 
Sacacorchos,    sah-kah-kvre'-didce,    s.    m., 

corkscrew.    L.  64. 
Sacjunuelas,     sah-kah-mwai'-lass,     s.    m., 

tooth-drawer,  dentist.    L.  50. 
Sacar,  sah-kar',  to  take  or  draw  out,  to  pull 

out.    L.  .50  and  60. 
Saco,  mh'-ko.  s.  m.,  sack,  bag.    L.  01. 
Sacudir,  sah-koo-deer' ,  to  shake  off,  to  shake. 

L.  .54. 
Sal.  s.  f.,  salt,  wit.    L.  .55. 
Saldo,  sid'-do,  s.  m.,  balance  (of  accounts, 

&c.).    L.  64. 
Salida,  saii-lS'-da,  s.f.,  going  out,  departure, 

start.    L.  63. 
Salicnte,  sah-Ci-ain'-tai.  adj.  and  pres.  part. 

(of  Salir),  projectiuu'.  salient.    L.  38. 
Salir,  sak-lar',  to  jjo  or  come  out,  to  set 

out.  to  leave,  to  start,  to  go  out,  to  end  or 

finish,  to  rise  (said  of  the  sun,  &c.) :  to 

turn  out,  to  turn  np.—SaUo  a  su  padre, 

he  resembled  his  father.    L.  20. 
Salon,  sah-ldne\  s.  m.,  saloon,  larcehall.  L. 

58. 
Saltar,  sal-tar',  to  jump,  to  leap,  to  bound, 

to  spring.    L.  58. 
Salto,  6tal'-lo,  s.   m.,  leap,  jump,    bound, 

spring.    L.  59. 
Sahid,  sah-looth'  s.  f.,  health.— A  Ueah/d  de 

las  seuoras,  to  the   good  health  of  the 

ladies.    L.  25. 
Saludar,  mh-loo-dar',  to  salute.    L.  R4. 
Sanchez,  san'-dtaith,  s.  m.,  Spanish  family 

name,  signifying  son  of  Sandio.    L.  49. 
Saiigre.  mn'-grai,  s.  f.,  blood.    L.  (>4. 
Sautificar,  sa)i-(e-fe-kar' ,  to  sanctify.  L.  45. 

20* 


Santo,  san'-to,  adj.,  hply,  saintly.— ^tento  y 

bueno,  well  and  good.    L.  64. 
Sasiic.  mus'-trui,  s.  m.,  tailor.    L.  11. 
hastreria,  nass-tiai-rl'-a,  s.  f.,  tailor's  shop. 

L.  11. 
Satirico,  sah-W-re-ko,  adj.,  satirical.    L.  35. 
Satisfacer,   nah-leess-fah-Uiuir',    to  saiibfy. 

Satisfecho,  sah-teess-fai'-cho,  adj.  and  past 
part,  (of  bATisFACEB),  satisued.  L.  44 
and  52. 

Sayo,  sah'-yo,  s.  m.,  sort  of  loose  coat  or 
jacket.    L.  65. 

Sazonar,  sah-t/io-nar' ,  to  season.    L.  03. 

Se  mi,  pers.  pron.  (instead  of  Le,  les,  to 
him,  to  her,  to  thcm>.  L.  20.— Pron.  (used 
to  form  the  passive  voice).  L.  32.— Ke- 
flective  prou.  L.  33.-lmpers.  pron.,  wc^ 
they,  people,  &c.-^  dice,  they  say.-^ 
cree'  it  is  believed.    L.  36. 

Se  prep.,  used  as  a  prefix  in  composition. 
L.  50.   ' 

Secreto,  sai-krai'-to,  b.  m.,  secret,  secrecy. 

Sed,  sam,  a.  f.,  thirst.— Tener  sed,  to  be 

thirsty.    L.  25. 
Seda.  sai'-da,  s.  f.,  silk.    L.  5. 
Seguir,  sai-glieer' ,  to  follow;  to  continue. 

f.  39. 
Segun,  sai-goon'.  prep.,  accordinir  io.—Se- 

gun  y  como,  just  as.    L.  40  and  66. 
Segundo,  sai-goon'-dn,  ord.  adj.  and  s.  m., 

second.    L.  15  and  23. 
Seguro,  mi-goo'-ro.  adi.,  sure,  secure.  L.  43. 
Seis,  sai'-eess,  num.  adj..  six.    L.  14. 
Seiscientos,  mi-eesg-tM-ain'-tdce,  num.  adj., 

SIX  hundred.    L.  14. 
Semana,  xai-maJi'-va.  s.  f,  week.    L.  8. 
bemblante,    saim-blan'-tai,    e.  m..  counte- 
nance, face,  aspect,  appearance,  look.    L. 
59. 
Sentar,  min-tar',  to  set  down,  to  enter  (in 

a  book) ;  to  fit.  to  become.    L.  34. 
Sentencia,  min-tain'-thl-a,  s.  f.,  sentence, 

phrase.    L.  43. 
Sentido,  min-G'-do.  s.  m..  sense.    L.  65. 
Sentir,  sain-teer',  to  feel;  to  be  sorry  for. 

L.  .38. 
Sefior.  sain-yore',  s.  m..  Lord,  sir,  Mr.— 

Muy  smor  mio,  my  dear  sir.    L.  1. 
Seiiora,  sain-yo'-ra,  "s.  f.,  lady,  madam.  Mrs. 

L.  2. 
Sefiorita,  min-yd-re'-ta,  s.  f.,  young  lady, 

miss.    L.  2. 
Sefiorito,  min-yo-re'-io.  s.  m.,  young  gentle- 
man,   sir  (used  generally  by  sen'ants), 
Mr.    L.  2. 
Septimo,  saip'-ft-mo,  ord.  adj.,  seventh.    L. 

15. 
Ser,  sair.  to  be,  to  exist.    (Not  to  be  con- 
founded with  EsTAR,  which  see.)    L.  11 
and  22. 
Ser,  9.  m..  bcinar,  existence.    L.  5-1. 
Servidor.  xalr-rd-diyre' .  s.  m.,  sen-ant. —<S?r- 

ridor  de  V..  your  servant.    L.  39. 
Ser\'ir,  sair-reer' .  to  serve,  to  oblige,  to  do 
a  8cr\'ice. — Senirse.  to  be  srood  enough, 
kind  enouch.  to  pleape.^5'rrr(7.<'<'  V.  to- 
mar  asiento.  please  to  take  a  seat. — Ser- 
rir/>e  de,  to  use.    L.  .39. 
Sesenta,  eai-snin'-fa^nnm.  adj..  sixty.  L.  14. 
Setenta,  sai-tain'-ta,  num.  adj.,    seventy. 
li.  14. 


4G6 


VOCABULAEY. 


Setecientos,  sai-tai-the-ain'-toce,  num.  adj., 

seven  huudred.    L.  14. 
Setiembre,  mi-le-aim'-Orai,  8.  m.,  Septem- 
ber.   L.  •2i.     . 
Sexo,  saik'-io,  s.  m.,  ecs.— El  bcllo  sexo,  the 

lair  ees.    L.  5b. 
Sexto,  saiks'-to,  ord.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  sixth. 

L.  15. 
SI,  see,  adv.,  yes.    L.  1. 
Si,  iudel'.  pron.,   self,   one's   self.— Hablo 

para  si,  be  spoke  to  himself.    L.  SJO. 
Si,  conj.,  if;   Out. — Si  no  \iene,  hombre, 

but  he  is  not  comixig,  my  dear  lellow.    L. 

23. 
Siempre,  sS-aim'-prai,  adv.,  always.— Per 

sieinpie  jixnias,  lor  ever  and  ever.    L.  25. 
Siesta,  se-aiss'-ta,   8.  f.,  siesta,  aftei-noon 

nap.    L.  02. 
Siute,  sl-ai'-tai,  num.  aclj.,  seven.    L.  14 
Siglo,  seeg'-lo,  s.  m.,  century.    L.  53. 
Siguificado,  seeg-m-fl-kah' -do,  8.  m.,  signi- 

lication,  meauing.    L.  49. 
Signilicar,  seeg-ni-j'l-kar' ,  to  signify.   L.  64. 
Silaba,  si'-laJi-ba,  s.  f.,  syllable.    L.  03. 
Silencio,  si-lain' -tliS-o,  s.  m.,  silence.  L.  65. 
Silencioso,  «e-/a2«//t8-<i'-so,  adj.,  silent.    L. 

04. 
Silla,  !^d'-ya,  s.  f.,  chair.    L.  14. 
Simpatizar,    seem-pah-tl-tliar' ,    to  sympa- 
thize.   L.  51. 
Simple,    seem'-plai,   adj.,    simple,    single; 

simple,  silly.    L.  43. 
Sin,  seen,   prep.,  without. — Sin   embargOj 

notwithstanding,  however.— -Siw  que  ni 
'  -para  que,  without  any  cause  or  reason. 

L.  19. 
Sinceridad.  seen-ihai-re-dath',  s.  f.,  smcen- 

tv.    L.  45.  .^     .„ 

S-incoro.  seen-fhai'-ro.  adj.,  sincere.    L- 40- 
Singular,  seon-qoo-lar' .  adj..  singular.  L.  57. 
Sino.  <ie'-wo.  coni.,  but;  if  not.— No  es  el, 

Sim  pu  hermano,  it  is  not  he,  but  his 

hrother.    L.  3. 
Sinonirao,  »i-m'-nt-mo,  a.  m.,  synonyme. 

L.  65.  . 

Sinrazon,  scenrdh-IMne.',  s.  f.,  wrong,  in- 

instice.    L.  .50.  i.  ,      t 

Siqniera,  se-TJe-ai'-ra,  conj.,  even,  at  least. 

L.  40.  ... 

Sitio.  sV-U<i,  B.  m.,  place,  position,  siege. 

Situado,  sl-too-ah'-do,  past.  part.  oISituab. 

T-20.  .,    „, 

Sitnar,  s^-ioo-ar' ,  to  situate.    L.  Gl. 
So.  ,'5.  prep.,  under.- &  pretesto  de,  under 

pretext  of.    L.  41.  ' 

Sobrar.  so-brar\  to  he  over  and  above,  _to 

have  more  of  any  thing  than  one  needs. 

L.  64. 
Sobrc,  so'-hrai.  prep.,  upon,  above,  over, 

about.— Vino  sdbre  las   ocho,   he   came 

about  ei-rht  o'clock.    L.  41. 
Sobrecpcrito,  sd-brai-aiss-'kre' -to,  p.  m.,  en- 

■per?=cription.  address  (of  a  letter).    L.  56. 
Sobrina,  so-hrP'-na,  s.  f.,  niece.    L.  65. 
Sobrino.  so-bre'-no.  s.  to.,  nephew.    L.  6.^. 
Socialismo.  s<)-tM-ah-leess' mo,  s.  m.,  social- 
ism.   L.  .50.  .  .     - 
Sociedarl.  sTf-iU-ai-dalli' .  s.  f ,  society,  firm, 

partnership  (commerciaU.    L.  32. 
Socio,  so'-the-o,  s.  m.,  partner,  companion. 

I,.  62. 
Sofa,  su-fa',  s.  m.,  eofe.    L.  34. 


Sol,  sole,  8.  m.,  sun.    L.  45. 

Solas  (A),  su'-lass,  all  alone.    L.  64. 

Soldado,  sule-dali'-do,  s.  m.,  soldier.    L.  52. 

Soledad,  so-lai-dath' ,  s.  f.,  solitude,  loneli- 
ness.   L.  03. 

Solemne,  so-laim'-nai,  adj.,  Bolemn;  thor- 
ougti,  downright.     L.  61. 

Soler,  dO-lair',  to  be  accustomed  to,  to  he 
wont.    L.  41. 

Solicitar,  so-le-thZ-tar' ,  to  solicit.    L.  47. 

Soliloquio,  so-te-lo' -ke-o,  s.  m.,  soliloquy. 
L.  65. 

Solo,  so'-lo,  adj.,  alone; — adv.,  only.    L.  25. 

Soliar,  sblt-tar',  to  untie,  to  loose,  to  liber- 
ate, to  let  go,  to  let  free.    L.  04. 

Soltero,  soUtai'-ro,  s.  m.,  bachelor,  un- 
married man.    L.  01. 

Sombra,  sbins'-bra,  6.  f.,  shade,  shadow. 
L.  58. 

Sombrero,  sbrm-lrrai'-ro,  s.  m.,  hat.    L.  10. 

Son,  swie,  s.  m.,  sound. — Sin  ton  y  siu  son, 
without  rhyme  or  reason.    L.  47. 

Sonar,  so-nar',  to  sound.    L.  45. 

Sonido,  so-ne'-do,  s.  m.,  sound.    L.  47. 

Sonreirse,  sone-rai-eer'-sai,  to  smile.    L.  64. 

Sonrisa,  ebne-re'-sa,  s.  f.,  smile.    L.  54. 

Sonrojar,  sune-rb-har' ,  to  make  one  blush. 
L.  04. 

Soiiar,  sbne-yar',  to  dream.    L.  35. 

Sopa,  sb'-pa,  s.  f.,  soup.    L.  44. 

Sopeton,  so-pai-tdne' .—De  sopeton,  unex- 
pectedly.   L.  44. 

Soplar,  eo^ar',  to  blow-;  to  prompt.  L.  64. 

Sordo,  fore'-do.  adj.,  deaf.    L.  64. 

Sorprender,  sbre-prain-dair',  to  surprise. 
L.  42. 

Sorprcsa,  sore-prai'-m,  s.  f..  surprise.  L.  51. 

Sospechar.  soce-nai-char' ,  to  suspect.  L.  60. 

Su,  soo.  poss.  adj.,  his,  her,  its,  their.    L.  5. 

Sub,  sooh,  Latin  prep,  used  in  Spanish  as 
a  prefix  only.    L.  50. 

Snbida,  soo-be'-da,  s.  f ,  rising,  rise ;  ascent. 
L.  63. 

Subir,  soo-beer',  to  sro  or  come  up,  to  ascend, 
to  mount,  to  riso.    L.  50. 

Subjuntivo,  soob-hoon-tS'-vo,  adj.,  subjunc- 
tive.   L.  4.3. 

Suceder,  soo-tJiai-dair',  to  happen,  to  take 
place,  to  succeed  (come  after).    L.  45. 

Sucesivo,  soo-thai-se'-vo. — En  lo  sucesixc,  in 
future.    L.  .32. 

Sucio,  soo'-lhl-b,  adj.,  dirty.    L.  64. 

Sud,  sood,  8.  m.,  south.    L.  36. 

Suegra,  swai'-gra,  s.  f.,  mother-in-law.  L. 
63. 

Suegro,  swai'-gro,  s.  m.,  father-in-law.  L. 
63. 

Suela,  sicai'-la,  s.  f.,  sole.    L.  61. 

Suclo,  sivai'-lo,  s.  m.,  ground,  floor,  soil. 
L.  54. 

Snelto,  mvaU'-to,  adj.  and  past  part,  (of 
Soi,tar\  loose,  free. — A  rienda  sueltd, 
with  loose  rein.    L.  64. 

Sneiio,  sirain'-ijo,  s.  m..  sleep,  dream. — Te- 
nor sueno.  to  be  sleepy.    L.  25. 

Sucrte,  swair'-tai.  s.  f.."luck,  chance,  sort 
Echar  svertes.  to  cast  lots.    L.  58. 

Suflcientc,  soo-fe-the-ain'-tai,  adj.,  sufilcient. 
L.  49. 

Sufrir.  soo-freer'.  to  suflfer,  to  bear  with,  to 
undergo.    L.  64. 

Sugeto,  soo-hai'-to,  s.  m.,  individual,  per- 
son ;  topic,  matter,  subject.    L.  27. 


VOCABULABY. 


467 


Bnjeto,  soo-hai'-to,  ailj.  and  past  part,  (of 
fcjuJETAB),  subject ;  subjected,  tied,  Ciat- 
ened.    L.  Go. 

Suma,  soo'-ma,  s.  m.,  sum. — ^En  suma,  in 
short.    L.  Oa  and  64. 

Superior,  isoo-pai-re-ore',  a4i-,  superior.  L. 
ai. 

Superlativo,  foo-jmir-lah-il'-vo,  adj.,  super- 
lative.   L.  50. 

Supersticioso,  ^oo-pairss-tS-thi-o'-so,  adj.,  su- 
perstitious.   L.  -15. 

Suplicar,  soo-pR-kar',  to  supplicate,  to  beg, 
to  cnive.    ii.  Oi. 

Supouer,  soo-po-nair' ,  to  suppose.    L.  M. 

Supremo,  soo-prai' -7iio,  adj.,  supreme,  high- 
est, most  excelieut.    L.  ii\. 

Supuesio,  soo-pwuiss' -to^  past  part,  of  Sdpo- 
NEK. — i'or  supuesto^  of  course.    L.  04. 

Sur.    (Sec  Sui>.)    L.  0(5. 

Sus  :  iooce,  inter.,  holla  I    L.  46. 

Suspirar,  sooce-pe-rar' ,  to  sigh.    L.  64. 

Sustancia,  sooce-tan' -tlii-a,  s.  f.,  substance. 
L.  6:3. 

Sustantivo,  sooce-tan-d'-vo,  8.  m.  and  adj., 
substantive.    L.  64. 

Sustentar,  sooce-lain-lar' ,  to  sustain.    L.  65. 

Sutil,  soo-ied',  adj.,  subtle,  thin,  slender. 
L.  64. 

Sntilcza,  soo-(I-lai'-tha,  e.  f.,  subtlety,  cun- 
ning, thinness,  slendemess.    L.  63. 

Suyo,  soo'-yo,  his,  hers,  its,  theirs,  one's. 
L.  13. 


Tabaco,  tah-bah'-ho,  8.  m.,  tobacco,  cigar. 

L  42 
Tablero.  tah-Hai'-ro.  e.  m..  a  smooth  board. 

—  Tablero  de  ajedrez,  chess-board.    L.  ."il. 
Tacto    tak'-to,  8.  m.,  the  sense  of  touch. 

L-C.5.  .,„. 

Tal.  adi..  puch,  90.—  Tal  cual.  middling,  eo 

so.—  TV?/  vez,  perhaps.    L.  32. 
Talcnto,  tah-Mn'-(o.  s.  m.,  talent,  abilities. 

L.  65.  ,    ^        , 

Tambicn.  iam-m-ain\  conj.  and  adv.,  also, 

as  well,  morcver.    L.  29. 
Tampoco,    tam-po'-ko,    adv.,  neither,   not 

either,  nor.    L.  20. 
Tan.  adv..  so,  so  much,  as,  as  much.    L.  20. 
Tanto,  (an'-fo,  adj.,  so,  in  such  a  manner.— 

Tanio  mojor,  so  much  the  better.— For  lo 

fatilo^  therefore.    L.  20. 
Tapar.  tafi-jxir',  to  cover  up,  to  stop  up 

(with  a  cover).    L.  65. 
Tapete,  (ak-pai'-lai,  s.  m.,  table-cover.    L. 

Tardar,  far-dar',  to  delav,  to  put  off.    L.  60. 

Tarde,  lar'-dai,  s.  f.,  afte"moon  ;— adv.,  late. 
— Al<ro  tarde.  rather  late.    L.  20. 

TarcH.tah'-rai-a,  s.  f.,  task.    L.  .58. 

Tarjeta,  tar-hai'-la,  e.  f.,  card,  visiting  card. 
L.  64. 

Tate !  lah'-tai,  inter.,  easy !  take  care  1  L. 
A",. 

Taza.  /ak'-fha,  s.  f.,  cup.    L.  55. 

Te,  tai,  8.  m.,  tea.    L.  55. 

Te,  pron..  thee,  to  thee.    L.  26. 

Teatro,  tai-ah'-tro,  s.  m..  theatre.    L.  17. 

Teja,  fai'-ha,  s.  f..  tile.— De  t^as  abajo,  hu- 
manly gpeakinsr.    L.  61. 

Telesraflco.  iai-lai-grah'-fi-ko,  aaj.,  tele- 
graph.   L.  65. 


Tel^grafo,  iai-lai'-grah-fo,  b.  m.,  telegraph. 

L.  46. 
Tema,  fai'-ma,  e.  m.,  theme,  exercise; — 

8.  f.,  dispute,  contention.    L.  57. 
Temer,  tai-mair',  to  fear.    L.  28. 
Temerario,  tai-rnai-rak'-ri-d,  aty.,  rash,  in- 
considerate.   L.  54. 
Temor,  tairtndre' .—Pot  temor  de,  for  fear  of. 

L.  42. 
Temprano,  tairn-prah'-no,  adv.,  early,  goon. 

L.  20. 
Tenacidad,  tai-nah-thl-dath',  b.  f.,  tenacity. 

L.  65. 
Tenedor,  lai-nai-dore',  s.  m.,  fork.    L.  65. 
Teuer,  tai-7iah',  to  have,  to. hold:  to  be,  to 
take  (place). — Teuer  hambre,  frio,  sed,  to 
be  huugrj',  cold,  thirely.— Teuer  lugar,  to 
take  place.— ?e«er  que  hacer,  to   have 
something  to  do. — Yo  (encfo  para  mi,  it  is 
my  opinion.- 7Vnya  V.  la  bondad  de  dc- 
cimie,  be  good  enongh  to  tell  me.    L.  10. 
Tentacion,  lain-tah-t/ii-bne',  s.  m.,  tempta- 
tion.   L.  61. 
Tciiir,  iain-yeer',  to  dye.    L.  SO. 
Teoria,  tai-o-te'-a.  s.  f.,  theory.    L.  23. 
Tcrcero,  iair-thai'-ro,  ord.  adj.,  third.    L. 

15. 
Tercio,  tair'-thl-O,  s.  m.,  third,  third  part. 

L.  40. 
Terminacion,  tair-mi-nah-ihl-me' ,  8.  f.,  ter- 
mination.   L.  49. 
Terminante,  tair'-ml-nan'-iai^  aaj.,  conclu- 
sive.   L.  (35. 
Tcrminar,  tair-mZ-nar',  to  terminate.    L. 
65.  *       % 

Termino,  tair'^me-no,  s.  m.,  terminatifln, 

end;  term.    L.  65. 
Termomctro,  tair-mo'-mai-tro,  b.  m.,  ther- 
mometer.   L.  60. 
Tcrrcnal,  tair-rai-nal',  adj.,  terrestrial.    L. 

49. 
Terreno,  iair-rai'-no,  8.  m.,  ground.    L.  55. 
Terrible,  tair-rl'-blai,  adj.,  terrible.    L.  6.3. 
Tcrron,  tair-jone',  s.  m.,  turned  up  earth. 

L.  19. 
Terroso,  iair-ro'-so,  adj.,  terrcous,  earthy. 

L.49. 
Terrcstre,  fair-raUs'-irai,  adj.,  terrestrial, 

earthly.    L.49. 
Tertulia,  iair-ioo'-lt-a.  8.  f,  party.    L.  39. 
Ti    t^.  pron.,  thee  (governed  by  a  prep.). 

Tiempo,  te-aim'-po.  s.  m.,  time,  weather.— 
Con  el  tienijJO,  in  the  course  of  time.  L. 
23. 

Tierffi^-ain'-da.  s.  f.,  store,  shop.    L.  04. 

'nem^K^air'-ra,  s.  f.,  earth,  land,  native 
■  soiK    L.  45.  . 

Tijeras,  thhai'-raJ>,  e.  f.  pi.,  scissors.   L.  frl. 

Tinta,  ^«e«'-^ff,  s.  f.,  ink.    L.  5. 

Tintero,  (een-iai'-ro.  8.  m.,  inkstand.— De- 
jarse  algo  en  el  tintero,  to  forget  to  say 
something.    L.  4.  .,    ,    .       .     t 

Tinto,  teen'-io,  adj.,  red  (said  of  wines).  L. 
65. 

Tio,  te'-d.  8.  m.,  uncle.    L.  65. 

Tirabuzon,  tl-rah-boo-thone' ,  s.  m.,  cork- 
screw.   L.  65,  .    ,     T 

Tiranico,  te-rah'-n?-ko,  adj.,  tyrannical.  JL. 
.35. 

Tirar,  f?-rar'.  to  throw,  to  cast,  to  take 
(speaking  of  a  road).— TVre  V.  por  aqui, 
take  yiis  way.    L.  51. 


468 


V  O  C  A  13  U  I.  A  11  y . 


Tiro,  te'-ro,  f».  m.,  throw,  cast.— A  tiro  de 
pistola,  within  a  pistol-shot.    L.  £3. 

Titulo,  tu'-too-!o,  s.  m.,  title.    L.  &3. 

Tocantc  fi,  to-Uaii'-lai  a,  prep.,  concern- 
ing, rclatin-'  to,  touching.    L.  38. 

Tocar,  (o-Icar,  to  touch,  to  play  (on  an  in- 
strument).   L.  15. 

Todavia.  id-dak-re'-a,  adv.,  yet,  still.    L.  23. 

Todo,  to'-do,  adj.,  aW.—Todos  los  dias,  every 
day.— Del  (odo,  entirely.— Con  todo,  how- 
ever, notwithstanding.    L.  11. 

Todo,  8.  m..  the  whole.    L.  Gl. 

Tolerar,  tO-lai-rar',  to  tolerate.    L.  05. 

Toma!  to' -ma,  inter.,  indeed!    L. 45. 

Tomar,  td-mar',  to  take.    L.  14. 

Toino,  to'-mo,  s.  m.,  volume. — Un  libro  de 
tres  tomos,  a  book  in  three  volumes.  L. 
13. 

Tonel,  tu-naW,  a.  m.,  cask,  barrel.    L.  GO. 

Tonto,  tone'-to.  adj.,  foolish.— A  tontas  y  a 
locas,  at  random.    L.  GO. 

Tontcra,  tone-tai'-ra,  8.  f.,  foolish  action. 
L.  6!). 

Toque,  t&'-kai,  s.  m.,  roll  (of  a  drum),  riny- 
inir  (of  bells).— AhJ  cstii  el  toque,  that  Is 
where  the  difficulty  lies.    L.  Go. 

Torero,  td-rai'-ro,  s.  m.,  bull-fighter.-    L.  53. 

Tornar,  tore-nar',  to  return,  to  begin  anew. 
L.  G5. 

Torno,  tore'-no,  b.  m.,  lathe. — En  torno, 
round  about.    L.  (55. 

Toro,  td'-ro,  s.  m.,  bull.    L.  53. 

Tos.  face,  a.  f.,  cough.    L.  03. 

Trabajador,  trak-bah-hah-dore' ,  adj.  and  s. 
ni..  hardworking,  worker.    L.  17. 

Trabajar,  tnili-bah-har' ,  to  worlc,  to  labor. 
L.  17. 

Trabajo,  trah-bah' -ho,  s.  m.,  work,  labor, 
occupation.    L.  47. 

Traauccion,  trak-dook-the-one' ,  a.  {.,  trans- 
lation.   L.  6t. 

Traducir,  tra/i-doo-theer',  to  translate.  L. 
4(). 

Traer.  trah-alr',  to  bring,  to  carry,  to  wear. 
L.  4->. 

Tragar,  trah-fjar',  to  swallow.    L.  05. 

Tr^edia,  trdh-hai'-dH-a,  s.  f.,  tragedy.  L. 
52. 

Tragico,  trah'-M-ko,  adj.,  tragic.    L.  35. 

Trago,  Irah'-go,  e.  m..  draught,  drink.— 
Echar  nn  (rufto,  to  take  a  dnim.    L.  59. 

Traje,  traJi'-hdi,  s.  m.,  dress,  costume.  L. 
54. 

Trampa,  tram'-pa,  s.  f,  trap,  swindle.— 
Cacr  en  la  trampa,  to  fell  into  the  snare. 
L.  G4.  jy|P 

Trampcar,  tram-pai-ar',  to  swinSifto  im- 
pose upon.    L.  65. 

Trampaso,  tram-iw'-so,  adj..  deceitful, 
swindling;- s.  m.,  cheat,  swindler.  L. 
f«. 

Tranquilidad,  fran-kZ-le-datk'.  s.  f,  tran- 
quillity, peace,  quietness.    L.  46 

Tranquilizar,  tran-ke-le-fhar',  to  tranquil- 
lize.   L.  G5. 

Tranqnilo,  tran-W-lo,  adj.,  tranquil,  quiet, 
peaceful.    L.  60.  »     >  i       ' 

Trapo,  trah'-po.  s."  m..  r^".    L  04 

Tras,  prep.,  behind,  after"!    L.  41. 

irascnrso.  trais-koor'-io,  s.  m.,  coarse,  pro- 
cess (of  time).    L.  51. 

Trasnochar,  t rass-no-char' ,  to  sit  up  all 
night.    L.  65.  . 


Trasquilar,  trass-J:e4ar' ,  to  shear  (sheep). ^ 
Ir  por  laua  y  volver  ti'Osquilado,  the  biter 
bit.    L.  65. 

Trastienda;  trass-te-ain'-da,  s.  f.,  back  shop. 
L.  64. 

Tratado,  trah-iah'-do,  s.  m.,  treatise,  treaty. 
L.  46. 

Tratante,  trah-tan'-tai,  s.  ra.,  dealer.    L.  33. 

Tratar,  trah-lar',  to  treat,  to  have  inter- 
course or  relations  with,  to  trade,  to 
deal,  to  traflic,  to  try.    L.  32. 

Trato,  trah'-to,  s.  ni.,  treatment,  dealings, 
intercourse.    L.  65. 

Traves,  irah-vaiss',  prep.— Al  traves  dc, 
thi'ough.    L.  63. 

Travesura,  trah-vai-soo'-ra,  s.  f.,  trick,  mis- 
chief, naughtiness.    L.  6:5. 

Travieso,  trah-vZ-ai'-so,  adj.,  tricky,  naugh- 
ty, mischievous.    L.  52. 

Traza,  trah'-tha,  s.  f.,  trace.— Tener  buena 
traza,  to  look  well.    L.  64. 

Trcce,  (rai'-thai,  num.  adj.,  thirteen.  L.  14. 

Treinta,  trai-cen'-ta,  num.  adj.,  thirty.  L. 
14. 

Tres,  traiss,  num.  adj.,  three.    L.  14. 

Tribunal,  tre-boo-nal',  a.  m.,  tribunal,  court 
of  justice.    L.  53. 

Trigo,  tre'-go.  s.  m.,  wheat    L.  05. 

Trigaei\o,  t re-gain' -yo,  adj.,  brown,  dark 
(complexion).    L.  65. 

Trinchar,  treen-char",  to  cut  up,  to  carve. 
L.  58. 

Trineo,  tr^-nai'-o,  s.  m.,  sleigh.    L.  63. 

Trjnidad,  trl-ne-dalh' ,  s.  f ,  Trinity.    L.  21. 

Triptongo,  treep-tone' -go,  a.  m.,  triphthong. 
L.  57. 

Triste,  ireess'-tai,  acy.,  sad,  moumfiil,  dull. 
L.  21. 

Tristcza,  treess-tai'-tha,  s.  f.,  sadness,  dul- 
ncss.    L.  41. 

Tronar,  tro-nar',  to  thunder.    L.  30. 

Tropa,  trO'-pa,  a.  f.,  troop.    L.  40. 

Tnieco,  trwai'-ko,  s.  m.,  barter,  exchange. 
— A  trueco,  jjrovided  that.    L.  61. 

Tnieno,  irwai'-no,  s.  m.,  thunder,  clap  of 
thunder.    L.  .30. 

Trueque.    (See  Trueco.)    L.  48. 

Tii,  too,  pers.  pron.,  thou ;— poss.  adj.,  thy. 

Tuerto,  twair'-to,  adj.,  blind  of  one  eye. 

L.  65. 
Tutear,  too-tai-ar',  to  speak  familiarly  (in 

tlie  second  person  sinsularK    L.  65. 
Tuteo.  ton-lai'-o.  s.  m.,  thouing.    L.  65. 
Tuyo,  too'-yo,  poss.  pron.,  thine.    L.  13. 


IT. 

U.  00.  conj.,  used  instead  of  6,  before  words 
beginning  with  o  or  ho.    L.  S. 

T'f  I  oof,  inter.,  u^h !    L.  46. 

ntimo,  ool'-(7-mo.  adj.,  last.— Por  (dtimo 
at  last,  finally.    L.  61. 

Un.  onn.  adj.  and  indef.  art.,  one.  a  (always 
used  before,  never  after,  words).    L.  4. 

Fna.  oo'-na.  fern,  of  Tno.  which  see.    L.  H. 

Universidad,  oo-nZ-rair-g^-dath' ,  s.  f.,  uni- 
versity.   L.  55. 

Uno.  oo'-no,  indef.  art.  and  adj.,  a,  one. — 
Vno  a  nno,  one  by  one.    L.  14. 

Fi5a,  oon'-ya.  s.  f .  finger-nail.    L.  33. 

Usar,  oo-sar',  to  use.    L.  62. 


VOCABUIiAKY, 


469 


Uso,  oo'-so,  8.  m.,  use.    L.  61. 

Usted,  ooss-tail/i,  a.  m.  and  f.,  you.  (Con- 
traction of  VuESTPwA.  MEKCED,  youT  Wor- 
ship.)   L.  1. 

Utll,  oo'-teel,  adj.,  useful.    L.  13. 

Uva,  oo'-va,  s.  f.,  grape.    L.  40. 


Vaca,  vah'-ka,  s.  f.,  cow,  beef.  L.  55. 
Vacio,  vah-the'-O,  adj.,  empty.  L.  58. 
Valencia,  vah-lain'-t/iS-a,   s.  f.,    Valencia. 

L.  55.. 
Valcntia,  vahlain-ie'-a,  B. f., valor, bravery. 

L.  &1. 
Valer,  rah-lair',  to  be  worth,  to  be  good 

for.— Mas  vale  tarde^que  nunca,  better 

late  than  jicycT. —  Vdlgame  Diosl    bless 

me!    L.  41. 
Valiente,  vahU-ain'-tai,  a^.,vallant,  brave. 

L.  47. 
Valor,    iDoh-lore'.   s.   m.,   valor,    bravery; 

worth,  value.    L.  25. 
Vals,  voice,  s.  m.,  waltz.    L.  23. 
Vamos !    vah'-moce,   inter.,    come !    come 


■VlOCi 


along !    L.  41 

Vapor,  vah-g^-e',  s.  m.,  eteam,  steamboat, 
steamer.   T,.  37. 

Vara,  vah'-ra,  s.  f.,  rod ;  yard  measure.  L. 
47. 

Vario,  vah'-rS-o,  adj.,  various,  variable;— 
pi.,  several.    L.  43. 

Varon,  vah-rdne',  s.  m.,  man,  male  human 
beinjr.    L.  62. 

Vascorigadas,  (Las  Provtncias),  vass-kone- 
gah'-Uasx,  s.  f.  pi.,  the  three  Spanish  pro- 
vinces of  Alava,  Guipuzcoa,  aud  Biscay. 
L.  55. 

Vascucnce,  raxs-kwain'-thai,  s.  m.,  the  Bis- 
cayan  dialect.    L.  55. 

Vasfja,  vah-se'-ha,  s.  f.,  cask  for  liquors. 
L.  52. 

Vaso,  vah'-w,  s.  m.,  vase,  glass  (for  drink- 
ing), tumbler.    L.  61. 

Vaya !  vah'-ya,  inter.,  come  now !  indeed ! 
L.  43. 

Vccino,  rai-the'-no,  s.  m.,  neighbor.    L.  28. 

Ifcinte,  rai'-een-tai,  num.  adj.,  twenty.  L. 
14. 

Vela,  vai'-la,  e.  f.,  sail  (of  a  ship),  candle. 
L.  53. 

Veneer,  rain-ihair',  to  vanquish,  to  over- 
come, to  conquer.    L.  59. 

Vender,  rain-(f(ur\  to  sell.    L.  6. 

Venir.  vai-neer',  to  come;  to  fit.  to  suit.— 
Venir  a  pelo,  to  be  just  the  thing.— No 
hay  mal  que  por  bien  no  tenga.  it's  an  ill 
wind  that  blows  good  to  nobody.    L.  18. 

Vcntaja,  vain-tah'-ha,  s.  f,  advantage.  L. 
43. 

Ventana.  rain-fah'-na.  s.  f..  window.  L.  28. 

Vor,  rair.  to  see,  to  look.— A  ri>r.  let  us 
see. — Verse  negro,  to  be  in  great  distress. 
L.  29.«. 

Verano,-rflr/-rff^'-no.  s.  m..  summer.    L.  24. 

Verbal,  rair-hal',  adj.,  verbal.    L.  49. 

Verbo.  rair'-hn.  s.  m..  verb.    L.  41. 

Verdad,  rnir-daiJi' .  s.  f .  truth.— A  la  rer- 
ftarf.  truly :  indeed.    L.  4.3. 

Verdadoramcntc,  rnir-rinh-dai-rah-main' 
lai.  adv..  tnilv.  veritably.    L.  .32. 

Verde,  vair'-dai.  adj.,  green.    L.  51. 


Verdura,  vair-doo'-ra,  s.  f.,  verdure ;  vegeta- 
bles.   L.  »4. 
VcrgUenza,  vair-gwain'-t/ta,  s.  f.,  shame. — 

Toner  vtrgiiema,  to  be  ashamed.  L.  25. 
Version,  vairse-viie' ,  s.  f.,  version.  L.  64. 
Verso,  vair'-so,  8.  m.,  verse;  line  of  poetry. 

L.  52. 
Vcstido,  vaiss-(S'-do,  s.  m.,  di-ess,  wearing 

apparel.    L.  39. 
Vestir,  vaiss-teer',  to  dress,  to  clothe.  L.  25. 
Vez,  vaUh,  s.  f.,  time.- Una  vez,  once. — 

Dos  veces,  twice. — En  vez  de,  instead  of. 

— llacer  las  veces  de,  to  act  as,  serve  as. — 

Tal  vez,  perhaps. — A  mi  vez,  in  my  turn. 

—A  veces,  at  times.    L.  25. 
Viajar,  vS-a/i-har',  to  travel.    L.  21.  ' 

Vicerector,  vl-tliai-^aik-tore' ,  s.  m.,  vice- 
rector.    L.  50. 
Vice  versa,  vl'-thai  vair'-so,  vice  versa.    L. 

47. 
Vicio,  vl'.-thl-o,  8.  m.,  vice.    L.  41. 
Victoria,  veek-tO'-rt-a,  s.  £,  victory.     L.  40. 
Vida,  vr-da,  s.  f.,  life.    L.  50. 
Viejo,  vi-ai'-ho,  adj.,  old.    L.  13. 
Viena,  ve-ai'-na,  s.  f.,  Vienna.    L.  12. 
Viento,  rS-ain'-to,  s.  m.,  wind.    L.  30. 
Viemes,  vS-air'-naiss,  s.  m.,  Friday.— Fier- 

nes  santo.  Good  Friday.  L.  9. 
Viga,  ve'-ga,  s.  f.,  beam.  L.  65. 
Viuadicgo,  veel-yah-de-ai' -go,  s.  m.— Tomar 

las  de  Villadieno,  to  run  away ;  to  take  to 

one's  heels.    L.  50. 
Vinacho,  vl-nah'-ctio,  s.  m.,  bad  wine.    L. 

49. 
Vino,  ve'-no,  s.  m.,  wine.    L.  7. 
Violado,  vl-o-lah'-do,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  violet 

(color).    L.  54. 
Violcta,  re-o-lai'-ta,  s.  f.,  violet.    L.  54. 
Violin,  re-o-leen'.  s.  m.,  violin.    L.  15. 
Violinista,  ve-o-tl-neess'-ta,  b.  m.,  violinist. 

L.  36. 
Virtud,  veer-tooth',  s.  f.,  virtue.— En  virtud 

de,  by  virtue  of.    L.  41. 
Visita,  vZ-se'-ta,  s.  f.,  visit.    L.  28. 
Visitar,  ve-sS-lar',  to  visit;  to   examine. 

L.  52. 
Vista,  reess'-ta.  s.  f.,  view,  sight. —A  vista, 

at  sight.— Pcrder  de  rista,  to  lose  sight  of. 

L.  29  and  51. 
Visto,  veess'-to,  past  part,  (of  Vee),  seen. 

L.  52. 
Vistoso,    veess-tu'-so,     adj.,    conspicuous, 

showy    L.  54. 
Viva!    ve'-i-a,   inter.,  long  live!   hurrah! 

huzza !    L.  46. 
Viviente,  ve-r^-ain'-tai,  s.  m.  and  pres.  part., 

living  being:  living,  animated.    L.  38. 
Vivir,  r?-reer'.  to  live.    L.  9. 
Vivo.   vS'-vo,  adj.,  alive,  lively,  sprightly. 

L.  20. 
Vizcaino,  veefh-kah-^'-no,  s.  m.  and  adj., 

Biscayan.    L.  55. 
Vizc^nva.  reffh-knh'-yn,  s.  f..  Biscay.    L.  .55. 
Vocabulario.  ro-kah-l>oo4ah'-rZ-d,  e.  m.,  vo- 
cabulary.   L.  .*>S. 
Vocal,  vo-kal',  adj.  and  b.  m.,  vocal;  vowel. 

L.  58. 
Volar.  rd-I/tr".  to  fly.    L.  45. 
Volumen.  ro-lno'-m'nin.  s.  m..  volume.  L.  15. 
Voluntad.  ro-Ionn-tath'.  s.  f..  will.    L.  46. 
Volver,  role-rair',  to  come  or  go  back,  to 

return,  to  do  again,  to  tnm. —  Votrer  en 

91,  to  recover  one's  senses.— Tt^rr  a  las 


470 


VOCABULARY. 


andadas,  to  return  to  one's  old  habits. 
L.  3G. 

Vo8,  voce,  pers.  pron.,  you.    L.  66. 

Vosotros,  vo-so'-lrOce,  pers.  pron.,  you,  yc. 
L.  1. 

Yoz,  xoth,  8.  f.,  voice;  word;  rumor;  re- 
port.— Corre  la  voz  que  .  .  .  ,  it  is 
mmored  that    .    .    .    L.  58. 

Vuelta,  xwaU'-ta,  s.  f.,  return,  turn,  trip.— 
A  vuelta  de  correo,  by  return  mail.— Uar 
una  vuelta,  to  take  a  walk.— Dar  la  vuelta 
al  parque,  to  go  round  the  park.    L.  46. 

Vuelto,  vwaU'-to,  past  part,  (.of  Volveb), 
returned.    L.  M. 

Vuestro,  vivaiss'-tro,  poss.  adj.,  your.  L.  13. 

Vulgar,  vool-gar'y  adj.,  vulgar.    L.  59. 


Y,  2,  conj.,  and.    L.  3. 

Ya,  adv.,  already,  yet ;  sometimes.-  Ya  lo 
lino,  ya  lo  otro,  sometimes  one,  some- 
times the  other.    L.  25  and  37. 

Yaccr,  yah-thair',  to  lie.    L.  41. 

Ycrba,  yair'-ba,  s.  f.,  herb,  grass.    L.  60. 

Ycmo,  yair'-no,  s.  m.,  son-in-law.    L.  60. 


Yo,  pers.  pron.,  l.—Yo  mismo,  I  myself. 

X(.  1. 
Yugo,  yoo'-go,  e.  m.,  yoke.    L.  61. 


Z. 

Zafarse,  thah-far' -sai,  to  escape,  to  cet  rid 

of.    L.  64.  '      B        . 

Zaga,  thah'-ga,  s.  f.,  rear.-No  irlc  a  nno 

en  zaga,  not  to  be  lar  behind  any  one. 

L.  44. 
Zapateria,     ihah-pahtai-ii'-a,  s.  f,    shoe 

trade ;  shoemaker's  shop.    L.  17. 
Zapatero,    thah  iiah-tai' -ro,    s.   ni.,    Fhoc- 

maker.    L.  8. 
Zapato,  thah-pah' -lo,  s.  m.,  shoe.    L.  10. 
Zapc!    thah'pai,   inter.,  used  to  frighten 

away  the  cats ;  God  forbid  1    L.  46. 
Zas !    zas !    thass,    inter.,  used  to  imitate 

the  sound  of  repeated  knocks  or  blows. 

L.  62. 
Zcca  en  Meca   (Andak  de),  i/iai'-la  ain 

mai'-ka,  to  wander  about  from  pillar  to 

post.    L.  61. 
Zutano,  thoo-tah' -no,  s.  m.,  such  a  one.    L. 

55.  « 


THE   END. 


D.  APPLETON  <k   CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 


SPANISH  GEAMMAES. 


Ollendorff's  Spanish  Grammar : 

A  New  Method  of  Learning  to  Read,  Write,  and  Speak  the  Spaniab 
Language,  with  Practical  Rules  for  Spanish  Pronunciation,  end 
Models  of  Social  and  Comiuercial  Correspondence.  By  M.  VE- 
LAZQUEZ and  T.  T.  SIMONS! ]6.     12mo,  5G0  pages. 

The  admirable  system  introduced  by  Ollendorff  is  applied  in  tJiis  volume 
to  the  Spanish  language.  Having  received,  from  the  two  distinguished 
editors  to  whom  its  supervision  was  intrusted,  corrections,  emendations,  and 
additions,  which  specially  adapt  it  to  the  youth  of  this  country,  it  is  believed 
to  embrace  every  possible  advantage  for  imparting  a  thorough  and  practical 
knowledge  of  Spanish.  A  course  of  systematic  grammar  underlies  the 
whole ;  but  its  development  is  so  gradual  and  inductive  as  not  to  weary  the 
learner.  Numerous  examples  of  regular  and  in'cgular  verbs  are  presented : 
and  nothing  that  can  expedite  the  pupil's  progress,  in  the  way  of  explana- 
tion and  illustration,  is  omitted. 

KEY  to  th.8  Same.     Separate  volimne. 

Grammar  of  the  Spanish  Language  : 

With  a  History  of  the  Language  and  Practical  Exercises.  By  M. 
SCHELE  DE  YERE.  12mo,  273  pages. 

In  this  volume  are  embodied  the  results  of- many  years'  experience  on 
^he  part  of  the  author,  as  Professor  of  Spanish  in  the  University  of  Vi-ginJa. 
It  aims  to  impart  a  critical  knowledge  of  the  language  by  a  systematic 
couree  of  grammar,  illustrated  with  appropriate  exercises.  The  author  haa 
ftvnilcd  himself  of  the  laboi-s  of  recent  gnimmartJins  and  critics ;  and  by 
oondonsing  his  rules  and  principles  and  rejecting  a  burdensome  superfluity 
of  detail,  he  has  brought  the  whole  within  comparatively  small  compass. 
By  pursuing  this  simple  course,  the  language  may  be  easily  and  quickly 
mastered,  not  only  for  conversational  purposes,  but  for  reading  it  fluentlj 
•od  writing  it  with  elegvnce. 


J).   APPLETOX  <r    CO:S   PUBLICATIONS. 

Seoane,  Neiiman,  and  Baretti^s  Spanish  and 
English,  and  Enghsh  and  Spanish 
Pronouncing  Dictionary. 

By  MARIANO  YEL^VZQUEZ  DE  LA  CADENA,  Profrasor  of  tba 
Spanish  Language  and  Literature  in  Columbia  College,  N.  Y.,  and 
Corresponding  Member  of  the  National  Institute,  Washington. 
Large  8vo,  1,300  pages.    Neat  type,  fine  paper,  and  strong  binding. 

The  pronunciation  of  the  Castilian  language  is  so  clearly  set  forth  in 
Ibia  Dictionary,  as  to  render  it  well-nigh  impossible  for  any  person  who 
can  read  English  readily,  to  fail  of  obtaining  the  true  sounds  of  the  Spanish 
words  at  sight. 

In  the  revision  of  the  work,  mjre  than  eight  thousand  words,  idioms, 
and  familiar  phrases  have  been  added. 

It  gives  in  both  languages  the  exact  equivalents  of  the  words  in  f,eneral 
use,  both  in  their  Uteral  and  metaphorical  acceptations. 

Also,  the  technical  terms  most  frequently  used  in  the  arts,  in  chemistry, 
Dotany,  medicine,  and  natural  history,  as  well  as  nautical  and  mercantilo 
lerms  and  phrases — most  of  which  are  not  found  in  other  Dictionaries. 

Also  many  Spanish  words  used  only  in  American  countries  which  were 
formerly  dependencies  of  Spain. 

The  names  of  many  important  articles  of  commerce,  gleaned  from  the 
price  currents  of  Spanish  and  South  American  cities,  are  inserted  for  the 
benefit  of  the  merchant,  who  will  here  find  all  that  he  needs  for  carrying  on 
a  business  correspondence. 

The  parts  of  the  irregular  verbs  in  Spanish  and  English  arc  here,  for  the 
Orst  time,  given  in  full,  in  their  alphabetical  order. 

The  work  likewise  cont^ns  a  gi-ammatical  synopsis  of  both  languages, 
tmngfcd  for  ready  and  conrenient  reference. 

The  new  and  improved  orthography  sanctioned  by  the  latest  edition  of 
the  Dictionary  of  the  Academy — now  universally  adopted  by  the  pieaa — il 
here  given  for  the  first  tiftie  in  a  Spanish  and  English  Dictionary. 

An  Abridgment  of  Velazquez's  Large  Dictionary, 

Intended  foe  Schools,  Coi  leges,  axd  Travellers. 

Tn  Two  Parts :— I.  Spanish-Engrlish :  H.  Eng-lisli-Spaniak. 

B/  MARIANO  VELAZQUEZ  DE  LA  CVDENA.     12mo,  888  page* 


1).  APPLET  ON  ik   CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 

Elementary  Spanish  Reader 

By  M.  F.  TOLON.     12mo,  156  pages. 

This  is  one  of  the  best  Elementary  Spanish  Readers,  not  only  for  the 
pTU"poses  of  self-instruction,  but  also  as  a  class-book  for  schools,  that  haa 
!Tcr  been  pablished.  A  full  Vocabulary  of  all  the  words  employed  is  ai^ 
jraidsd,  rendering  a  large  dictionary  unnecessary. 

Progressive  Spanisli  Reader : 

With  an  Analytical  Study  of  the  Spanish  Language.  By  ACGUSTIN 
JOSE  MORALES,  A.M.,  H.M.,  Professor  of  the  Spanish  Language 
and  Literature  in  the  New  York  Free  Academy.     12mo,  336  pages. 

The  prose  extracts  in  this  volume  are  preceded  by  an  historical  account 
of  the  origin  and  progress  of  the  Spanish  Language,  and  a  condensed, 
scholarlike  treatise  on  its  gi-ammar ;  the  poetical  selections  are  introduced 
with  an  Essay  on  Spanish  versification.  Prepared  in  either  case  by  the  pre- 
liminary matter  thus  furnished,  bearing  directly  on  his  work,  the  pupil 
enters  intelligently  on  his  task  of  translating.  The  extracts  arc  brief,  spirited, 
and  entertaining ;  drawn  mainly  from  writers  of  the  present  day,  they  are  a 
faithful  representation  of  the  language  as  it  is  now  written  and  spoken.  The 
arrangement  is  progressive,  specimens  of  a  more  difficult  character  being 
presented  as  the  student  becomes  able  to  cope  with  them. 

New  Spanisli  Reader : 

Consisting  of  Extracts  from  the  Works  of  the  Most  Approved  Authors 
in  Prose  and  Verse,  arranged  in  Progressive  Order ;  with  Notts 
explanatory  of  the  Idioms  and  Most  Difficult  Constructions,  and  a 
Copious  Vocabulary.  By  M:  V^iAZQUEZ  DE  LA  CADENA. 
12mo,  351  pages.  . 

This  book,  being  particularly  intended  for  the  use  of  beginners,  has  been 
prepared  with  three  objects  in  view  :  First,  to  furnish  the  learner  with  pleas- 
ing and  easy  lessons,  progressively  developing  the  beauties  and  difficulties 
of  the  Spanish  language ;  secondly,  to  enrich  their  minds  with  valuable 
knowledge ;  and  thirdly,  to  form  their  character,  by  instilling  correct  prind- 
^s  into  their  hearts.  In  order,  therefore,  to  obtain  the  desired  effects,  the 
extracts  have  been  carefully  selected  from  those  classic  Spanish  writers, 
both  ancient  and  modem,  whose  style  is  generally  admitted  to  be  a  pattern 
ti  degancc,  combined  with  idiomatic  pxuity  and  sound  morality 


D.  APPLETON  d   CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 

The  Spanisli  Teaclier  and  Colloquial  Phrase 
^  Book. 

An  Easy  and  Agreeable  Method  of  Acquiring  a  Speaking  Knowledge  ol 
the  Spanish  Langxiage.  By  Professor  BUTLER.  18mo,  293 
pages. 

The  object  of  the  author  is  to  make  the  Spanish  language  a  liviizg, 
jpcflking  tongue  to  the  learner ;  and  the  method  he  adopts  is  that  of  nature. 
He  begins  with  the  simplest  elements,  and  progressively  advances,  applying 
all  former  acquisitions  as  he  proceeds,  until  the  learner  has  mastered  one  oi 
the  most  perfect  languages  of  modern  times. 

From  the  Kew  York  Journal  of  Commerce. 
"This  is  a  pood  book,  and  well  fitted  for  the  puri)ose8  for  which  it  Is  designed.    The 
Spanish  language  is  one  of  great  simplicity,  and  more  easily  acquired  than  any    thei 
modem  tongue.    For  a  beginner,  we  recommend  this  little  book,  which  Is  smal'  and 
designed  to  be  carried  in  the  pocket." 

An  Easy  Introduction  to  Spanish  Conyer- 
sation. 

By  MARIA  XO  VELAZQUEZ  DE  LA  CADEXA.     18mo,  100  pag  .s. 

This  little  work  contains  all  that  is  necessary  for  making  rapid  prcgresa 
ia  Spanish  conversation.  It  is  well  adapted  for  schools,  and  fbr  pc  rsons 
who  have  little  time  to  study  or  are  their  own  instructors. 

Spanish  Grammar. 

Being  a  New,  Practical,  and  Easy  Method  of  Learning  the  Spanish  Lan- 
guage ;  after  the  System  of  A.  P  AHX,  Doctor  of  Philosophy,  and 
Professor  at  the  College  of  Neuss.  First  American  Edition,  re- 
vised and  enlarged.     12mo,  149  pages. 

Prof.  Ahn's  method  is  one  of  peculiar  excellence,  and  has  met  with  great 
Buccess.  It  has  been  happily  described  in  his  own  words  :  "  Learn  a  foreign 
Isuiguage  as  you  learned  your  mother  tongue  " — in  the  same  simple  manner, 
vnd.  with  the  same  natural  gradations.  This  method  of  the  distingviished 
German  Doctor  has  been  applied  in  the  present  instance  to  the  Spanish 
Language,  upon  the  basis  of  the  excellent  Grammars  of  Lespada  and  Marti- 
nez, and  it  is  hoped  that  its  simplicity  and  utility  will  procure  for  it  tb» 
&Tor  that  its  German,  French,  and  Italian  prototypes  have  already  foond  io 
the  Schools  and  Colleges  of  Europe. 


catAlogo 

DE     LOS     LIB  R  OS     PU]JLICADOS     POR 

D.  APPLETOK  Y  COMPASfA. 


Alfabeto  en  Piezas. 

Juguete  para  nifios.  Es  una  cajita  de  seis  pulgadas  do  alto,  qne  cncieira  27  dados 
6  cubes  perfectamente  cortados  6  igualcs,  contenicndo  cada  uno  en  sus  seis  ca- 
ms, una  letra  del  alfabeto,  tres  palabras  que  empiezan  con  csa  letra,  tin  flnogra- 
bado  con  colores  y  un  niimero  en  cifra  y  en  letra. 

Bello.     Compendio  de  la  Gramatica  Castellana, 

Do  D.  Andres  Bello,  cscrito  para  nso  de  las  escuelas  de  la  AmLrica  EspaHola,  por  J. 
Arnaldo  Mdrquez.    Un  tomo  de  165  puginas,  en  IS'. 

Burnouf.     Elementos  de  Gramatica  Latina, 

Extractados  del  Mutodo  para  Estudiar  la  Lengua  Latina,  por  J.  L.  Burnout  Tra- 
ducidos  del  Frances  al  Castellano  por  Juan  Vicente  Gonzalez.  Un  tomo  de 
164  puginas,  en  12°. 

Butler.     El  Maestro  de  Ingles  y  de  Espaiiol,  6  Libro  de 

Frases  Familiares.    Por  Francisco  Butler.    Un  tomo  de  £92  piiginas.  on  IS'. 

Oarreiio.     Manual  de  Urbanidad  y  Buenas  Maneras, 

Para  uso  dc  la  juventud  de  ambos  sexos.    Un  tomo  de  322  puginas,  en  12*. 

Carreno.    Compendio  del  Manual  de  Urbanidad  y  Buenas 

Maneias.    Arreglado  para  uso  de  las  escuelas.    Un  tomo  de  120  piiginas,  en  IS.' 

Cervantes.     El  Ingenioso  Hidalgo  Don  Quijote  de  la 

Mancha,  segun  el  texto  corregido  y  anotado  por  el  Sr.  Ochoa.  Un  tomo  de  C95  pii- 
ginas, en  12'. 

Cervantes.     El  Ingenioso  Hidalgo  Don  Quijote  de  la 

Mancha,  scgnn  el  texto  corregido  y  anotado  por  el  Sr.  Ochoa.  Edlcion  do  lujo  coa 
catorce  lamlnas  y  retrato  de  Cervantes.    Un  tomo  de  695  paginas,  en  8". 

Ooe.     Cartones  de  Dibujo  para  las  escuelas. 

En  diez  partes.    Por  Coe. 


CATALOGO  DE  D.  APPLETON  Y  CA. 


Cornell.     Carton  es  de  Coi-nell  para  Estudio  y  Practica 

del  Dibujo  dc  Mapas.  Designados  para  acompafiar  li  cualquiem  geografia.  Un  jue- 
go  de  13  mapas. 

Cornell.     Mapas  de  Cornell. 

Juego  dc  13  Mapas  Mudos  con  los  lugares  marcados  con  niimcros  en  vcz  de  sua 
nombrcs. 

Cornell.     Una  Clave  de  los  Mapas  IMudos  de  Cornell. 

Dcsignada  para  el  uso  del  profesor.    Un  tomo  de  59  paglnas,  en  12', 

De  Belem.    Libro  de  Frases  Inglesas  y  Espaiiolas. 

Per  E.  M.  De  Belem.    Un  tomo  de  SS  paginas,  en  IS'. 

De  Marchena.     Corapendio  de  la  Historia  Antigua, 

6  Ilistoria  de  los  Priacipalos  Pueblos  de  la  Antigiiedail.  llusta  la  muerte  do  Carlo- 
magno.  Escrita  en  lugK-s,  y  traducida  al  Castellano,  per  A.  II.  De  Marchena. 
Un  tomo  de  252  pagiuas,  en  18°. 

Diccionario  Mercantil,  en  Ingles,  Franees,  y  Espafiol, 

por  D.  1.  de  Veitelle.  Esta  dividido  en  tres  partes.  La  ijrimera  contienc — el  Dic- 
cioNAKio,  propiamente  dicho  en  Ingles — franees — espafiol,  altcrnadamento,  en 
el  cual  sc  hallan  las  voces  mercantiles  empleadas  en  diehas  lengtias,  la  deno- 
minacion  de  las  mercancias  que  circulan  hoy  en  el  comcrcio,  y  tamblen,  los 
termlnos  de  marina  de  mas  frecuente  uso  en  la  correspondencia  comorcial;  la 
segimda— un  gran  niimero  de  cartas  arregladas  al  estilo  moderno,  con  modo- 
los  de  facturas,  cuentas  corrientes,  pagarOs,  Ktras  do  cambio,  conocimiontos, 
etc. ;  la  tercera— un  Vocabulaeio  Geogkafico,  y  una  lista  do  las  principales 
abreviaturas  usadas  en  los  tres  idiomas.    Un  tomo  de  305  paginas,  en  12% 

Dusseldorff.     Perlas  de  la  Galen'a  Dusseldoi-ff, 

Fotografias  originalos  por  A.  A.  Tiu-ner.  Eeproducidas  por  la  voz  primera  bajo 
la  direccion  de^,  Frodsham.  Un  tomo  en  folio  grande  contcniendo  52  foto- 
grafias, clegantemente  encuademado  en  tafllete. 

Elementos  de  la  Historia  Universal. 

Para  uso  de  las  cscuelas  hispano-americanas.    Un  tomo  de  431  paginas,  en  S'. 

El  Lenguage  de  las  Flores  y  de  las  Frutas, 

con  algunos  Emblemas  de  las  Piedras  y  los  Colore?.  Un  tomito  muy  atractivo 
de  14G  paginas.  en  1S°. 

Galeria  de  Pinturas  para  Ninos. 

Un  tomo  de  56  paginas  en  4'.  mayor,  en  mMrnifieo  papel,  contcniendo  cerca  dc  SOO 
fines  grabados.    La  misma  obra  con  los  grabados  ilumlnados. 


catAlogo  be  d.  appleton  t  ca. 


Grand.     Compendio  de  Aritm^tica  Elemental, 

Para  la  Instruccion  Primam,  por  M.  P.  Grand.    Un  tomo  dc  CO  piiginas  en  12'. 

Le  Sage.     Historia  de  Gil  Bias  de  Santillana, 

Publicada  en  Francis  por  A.  E.  Le  Sage,  traducida  al  Castellano  por  el  Padre  Isla. 
Un  tomo  en  12'. 

Libro  Primario  de  los  Ninos. 

Una  cartilla  adornada  con  himinas  iluminadas.     Un  tomo  dc  14  paginas,  en  S% 

Libro  Primario  de  Ortografia, 

Designado  particularmente  para  uso  dc  las  esciiclas  dc  primeras  Ictras.    Un  tomo 
de  164  piiginas  en  12°. 

Los  Miserables.     Xovela  por  Victor  Hugo, 

Traducida  del  original  franci-s  al  castellano  por  D.  Joso  Segundo  Florcs.    Dos  to- 
mes en  S'.  encuardernados  en  tela. 

IVEandevil.     Libro  Primario  por  el  Doctor  Enrique  Man- 

devil.    Designado  particularmente  para  las  escuelas  dc  los  niftos.    Un  tomo  dc  73 
paginas,  con  laminas,  en  12'. 

Mandevil.     Libro  Segundo  por  el  Doctor  Enrique  Man- 

deviL    Un  tomo  de  123  paginas,  con  laminas,  en  12'. 

IVIandevil.     Libro  Tcrcero  de  Lectura. 

Un  tomo  en  12\  eonstando  do  mas  de  230  p:'iginas. 

IVCarsh.     Curso  Practico  de  Teneduria  de  Libros. 

Partida  Sencilla.    Por  C.  C.  Marsh,  contador.    Un  tomo  de  144  piiginas,  en  8'. 

Marsh.     La  Ciencia  de  la  Teneduria  de  Libros, 

Bien  calculada  para  enseuar  completamente  la  Teoria  y  la  Practica  de  la  Partida  Do- 
ble.    Por  C.  C.  Marsh,  contador.    Un  tomo  do  190  paginas,  en  8% 

Marsh.     Juegos  de  Libros  (en  Blanco), 

Para  la  Pr;ictica  de  la  Teneduria.    Seis  libros,  componen  un  juego. 

Mi  Abuela  Facil,  Coleccion  ISTueva  de  Historias  para 

Xinos.    Adornadas  con  bonitas  laminas.    Diez  libritos,  en  paquetes  siirtidos. 

Nueva  Biblioteca  de  la  Risa,  por  una  Sociedad  de 

Literatos  de  Buen  Humor.    Obra  capaz  de  haccr  rclr  a  una  estatua  de  piedra,  es- 
crita  al  alcance  de  todas  las  inteligonci.as,  y  dispuesta  para  s.atjs&cer  todos  los 
•    gustos.    Un  tomo  de  490  paginas,  en  12°. 


CATALOGO  DE  D.  APPLETON  T  CA. 


Nuevo   Tesoro   de  Chistcs,  Maxiraas,  Proverbios,  Re- 

flosioncs  Morales,  Ilistorias,  Cuentos  y  Leyendas.  Extractados  de  las  obraa  da 
los  mejores  autores  Inglcscs  y  Americanos.  Traducido  al  Castellano  x>or  Si- 
mon Camacho.    Un  tomo  de  271  pi'iginas,  en  12°. 

Ollendorff.     Un  Mctodo  para  Aprender  a  Leer,  Escribir, 

y  llablar  el  IngK-s,  segun  el  Sistema  dc  OllendorflF.  Per  Hamon  Palenzucla  y  Juan 
de  la  C.  Carrcflo.    Un  tomo  de  45t  piiginas,  en  12". 

Ollendorff.      Claye  de  los  Ejercicios  del  Metodo  para 

aprender  a  Leer,  Escribir,  y  llablar  el  IngK'S,  segun  el  Sistema  de  OliendoriF.  Per 
Kamon  Palcnzuela  y  Juan  de  Ui  C.  Carrena    Un  tomo  de  111  paginas,  en  12% 

Ollendorff.     Un  Metodo  para  Aprender  a  Leer,  Escribir, 

y  llablar  el  FrancOs  sogim  el  Sistema  de  Ollendorff.  Por  Teodoro  Simonne.  Un 
tomo  de  341  p:'iglnas,  en  12°. 

Ollendorff.      Clave  de  los  Ejercicios  del  Metodo  para 

aprender  a  Leer,  Escribir,  y  Hablar  el  Frances,  segun  cl  iSistcma  dc  Ollendorff.  Por 
Teodoro  Simonne.    Un  tomo  de  SO  pngiaas,  en  12°. 

Omnibus,  6  iLibro  de  Memoria,  para  todo  el  aiio. 

Contiene  cl  Omnibus:  tablas  de  calculo  de  tiempo;  tablas  de  intereses;  tabia 
de  la  cantidad  de  dias  entre  do6  epocas  dadas ;  tabla  comparativa  dc  las  eras 
de  las  principales  nacioaes  del  mundo ;  lista  de  las  fiestas  movibles,  cuatro 
temporas,  etc,  ;  compnto  eclesiastico ;  calendario  de  los  Santos ;  agenda  para 
cada  dia  del  afio ;  pjiginas  pantodas  p.ira  cuentas  de  gastos,  apuntes  de  vales  W 
pagar  y  a  recibir, etc.,  etc.  En  tres  estilos  de  encuadernacion.  El  dmnibiisse 
publica  para  cada  afio,  con  6  mese«  de  anticipacion. 

Otis.     Estudios  sobre  los  Animales, 

Con  instruccioaes  pai-a  cl  uso  del  Laplz  de  Plomo  y  de  Creyoo.  Por  F.  N.  Otis^ 
A.M.    Un  tomo. 

Otis.     Lecciones  Fuciles  de  Paisaje, 

Con  instrucciones  para  el  uso  del  Liipiz  de  Plomo  y  de  Creyon.  Por  F.  N.  0t!S» 
A.M.    Un  tomo. 

Ortiz.     Principios  Elementales  de  Fisica  Experimental  y 

Aplicada,  ineluyendo  la  Meteorologia  y  la  Climatologia.  For  Pedro  P.  Ortiz.  Un 
tomo  de  507  paginas  y  366  grabados,  en  12°. 

Faez.     Libro  Segundo  de  Geografia  Descriptiva, 

Destinado  a  seguir  al  Primero  dc  Smith.  Adomado  con  Doco  Grandes  Mapas  y 
mas  dc  cien  grabados  que  sirven  para  mojor  Inteligencia  del  testa    Edicloa 


CATALOGQ  DE  D.  APPLETON  Y  CA. 


Entcramonte  Nueva,  CoiTcgida  y  aumontada  conforme  &  los  I'lltimos  (latos  Ks- 
tadisticos  y  C'ambios  Politicos,  y  An'cglada  al  uso  de.  las  Kscuolas  lIisj)ano- 
Americanas.    Por  D.  Kauion  Paez.    Un  tomo  de  90  p;'igiuas  grandes. 

Perkins.     Leccioncs  de  Aritraetica  Elemental, 

Basadas  en  el  nuovo  sistouia  mental  y  jiractico  adoptado  en  las  principales  escuclas 
do  los  Estados-Unidos.  Por  Jorjc  II.  Perkins.  Un  tomo  dc  1C3  puginas  en  18'. 

Ripalda.     Catccisuio  de  la  Doctrina  Cristiana. 

Por  el  P.  Geronimo  Eipalda,  de  lu  Compafiia  de  Jesus.    Un  tomo  dc  90  pi'iginas,  en 

Resales.     Caton  Cristiano,  Catecisrao  de  la  Doctrina  Cris- 
tiana, para  la  cducacion  y  buena  criauza  de  los  niftos.     Compuesto  por  el  P.  Gcro- 
nimo  Ilosales,  de  la  Compaftia  dc  Jesus.    Nucvamonte  eojTogido  y  aAadido  el 
compendio  do  la  fo  del  Catecisrao  del  P.  Francisco  Amado  Pouget,  al  fin.    Un 
tomo  de  851  paginas,  en  18°. 

Robertson.     Nuevo  Curso  Practice,  Analitico,  Teorico 

y  Sintetico  de  Idioma  Inglcs.  Escrito  pai-a  los  Franceses  por  T.  Kobertson.  Tra- 
ducido  y  adaptado  al  Castellano  sobre  la  ultima  cdicion  del  original.  Por  Pe- 
dro Josu  Eojas.  Un  tomo  de  351  pi'iginas,  en  8".,  con  una  clave  dc  los  ejcrci- 
cios. 

Roemer.     El  Lector  Poligloto  y  Guia  para  la  Tradaccion, 

Cinco  tomos  (que  se  venden  soparadamente)  por  J.  Pwocmcr,  M.  A.  El  tomo  I.  sc 
compono  dc  una  importantc  serio  de  Extractos  Ingleses ;  el  II.  bus  traducciones 
en  Frances,  por  el  Profesor  Eoemer ;  el  III.  en  Aleman,  por  el  Dr.  Keinhard 
Solger;  el  IV.  en  Espafiol,  por  Simon  Camacho;  el  V.  on  Italiano,  por  el  Dr. 
Vincenzo  Botta ;  haciendo  do  esta  manera  una  mutua  clave  de  cada  lengua. 
Cada  tomo  en  12°. 

Royo.     Instruccion  Moral  y  Keligiosa, 

Para  las  escuclas  dc  la  Ecpablica,  Nociones  importintos  tomaJas  del  Frances. 
Por  Jose  Manual  Poyo.  Obra  examinada  y  aprobada  por  el  M.  E.  sefior  Arzo- 
bispo  de  Bogot;'u    Un  tomo  de  243  paginas,  en  IS",  con  laminas. 

Sarmiento.     Aritmetica  Practica,  priraera  parte. 

Sumar,  Eestar,  Multiplicar  y  Dividir  Enteros  y  Quebrados.  Publicada  per  orden 
del  Jefe  del  Departamcnto  de  Escuclas  del  Estado  do  Buenos  Ayrcs,  por  Do- 
mingo F.  Sarmiento.    Un  tomo  de  64  paginas,  en  12'. 

Sarmiento.    Metodo  de  Lectura  Gradual, 

Por  Domingo  F.  Sarmiento.    Un  tomo  do  64  paginas,  con  cuarenta  luminas,  on  18'. 


CATALOG  0  DE  D.  APPLE  TON  Y  CA. 


Serie  Nueva  de  Novelitas,  para  Diversion  6  Instruc- 

cion  dc  la  Infanciu. : 
Aladin  6  la  Lampara  Maraviilosa,    Ali  Baba  y  los  Cuarenta  Ladrones, 
El  Gato  Calzado,  Juau  el  Matador  de  Gigantes, 

Beldad  y  la  Bestia,  Aventuras  de  llobinson  Crusoe, 

Viaje  de  Gulivero  k  Lilipueia,  La  Gaperuclta  Roja, 

Juanito  y  el  Tallo  de  Haba,  La  Barba  Azul, 

Cfenicentilla,  6  el  Escarpin  de  Cristal,  La  Gata  Blanca. 

Expendense  por  separado  en  paquetes  de  12  novelitas. 

Smith.     Astronomia  Ilustrada, 

Dispuesta  para  uso  dc  las  Escuelas  dc  la  Amorica  EspaPioI.i ;  ilustrada  con  numcro- 
sos  diagramas  originales ;  por  Asa  Smith,  traducida  al  espanol  por  Demetrio 
Paredes.    Un  tomo  en  cuarto  mayor,  66  pi'iginas. 

Smith.    Primer  Libro  de  Geografia  de  Smith,  6  Geografia 

Elemental,  dispucsto  para  los  Kinos.  Adornaflo  con  cien  grabados  y  catorce  ma- 
pas,  por  Asa  Smith,  M.A.  Traducido  al  Espanol  por  Temistoclcs  Paredes.  Un 
tomo  de  131  paginas,  en  caarto  menor,  con  mapas  y  muchas  estampas. 

Velazquez.     Diccionario  de  Pronunciacion  de  las  Len- 

guas  Espai^ola  u  Inglesa,  por  Mariano  Velazquez  dc  la  Cadena,  compuesto  sobrc  los 
Diccionarios  Espaftolas  de  la  Academia  Espafiola,  Terrcros,  Salva  y  el  Earettl 
y  Ncuman  por  el  Dr.  Seoane,  y  los  ingleses  de  Webster,  Worcester,  y  Walker, 
aumentado  con  mas  dc  ocho  mil  palabras,  idiotismos,  y  frases  familiares,  las  ir- 
rcgularidades  de  los  vcrbos  y  la  sinopsis  de  I'lmbas  lenguas.  En  dos  partes :  I. 
Espanol  6  Ingles;  II.  Ingles  y  Espanol.  Un' tomo,  en  8°.  mayor,  de  mas  de 
1300  pi'iginas,  hermosamcntc  impreso  y  bien  cncuadernado. 

Velazquez.  Diccionario  de  las  Lenguas  Espafiola  e  In- 
glesa. Abrcviado  del  grande  del  autor  al  uso  de  los  jovenes  cstudiantcs  y  de 
los  viajeros,  por  Mariano  Velazquez  de  la  Cadena.  •  En  dos  partes :  Espaftol  c 
Ingles ;  Ingles  y  Espanol.    Un  tomo  de  847  paginas,  en  12°. 


•S-^^04, 


UC  SOUTHERN  RE 


A     000  669  422     8 


w 


